JP7322401B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and presentation for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems and providing a gaming machine that is considerate of players (for example, Patent Document 1). ).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following modes.

[form]
special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition opportunity based on a game action occurs ;
A lottery determination means for executing a win-or-fail determination with a predetermined probability using the special information;
setting value determination means for selecting and determining the setting value of the predetermined probability used for the suitability determination from among a plurality of stages within a predetermined range;
means for storing predetermined setting information in a predetermined storage area based on determination of a predetermined setting value;
The predetermined setting information stored based on the determination of the setting value is used as information corresponding to the predetermined setting information and referred to when the lottery determination means determines whether or not the special information is appropriate. means for determining and storing the
A gaming machine comprising
The lottery determination means determines the special information by referring to the determination time reference information before starting the variation of the symbols based on the occurrence of the acquisition opportunity ,
The gaming machine further comprises
storage content determination means for determining whether or not the storage content of the game storage area including the predetermined storage area is normal;
initialization means for initializing a predetermined range of the game storage area when the set value determination means newly determines the set value;
with
The range initialized by the initialization means differs depending on whether the memory contents of the game memory area are determined to be normal by the memory contents determination means or not.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above aspect, it is possible to suppress fraudulent use of the gaming machine.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success or failure table for the electric accessory open lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main controller and the structure of an inspection machine in detail. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the content of processing in the game history management chip and inspection machine; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of an input port provided in a main MPU; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining ball-entering detection processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing entering ball determination processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the presence/absence of a hit ball is detected; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a CPU of a game history management chip; It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main-control apparatus and the structure of an inspection machine with which the pachinko machine of aspect 6 of 1st Embodiment is provided. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the content of processing in the game history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 6 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main-control apparatus and the structure of an inspection machine with which the pachinko machine of aspect 7 of 1st Embodiment is provided. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of processing in the game history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 7 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 11 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an overview of processing in a main MPU in aspect 11 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 12 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing entering ball detection processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing game history processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 37 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 46 of the first embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing typically a part of electrical composition of a pachinko machine in aspect 50 of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 56 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of an information display unit; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how game history information is displayed on the information display section; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how setting information is displayed on the information display portion during the setting change mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how setting information is displayed on the information display portion during the setting change mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how setting information is displayed on the information display portion during the setting change mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how setting information is displayed on the information display portion during the setting change mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how setting information is displayed on the information display portion during the setting change mode; It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 74 of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing composition of main side ROM. It is an explanatory view showing composition of main side RAM. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the memory map of a main controller. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by a main CPU in aspect 74 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by a main CPU in aspect 75 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by a main CPU in aspect 76 of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a process diagram showing a work process when the manager changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine. It is a process diagram showing a work process when the manager confirms the lottery setting of the pachinko machine. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a part of main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 87 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 87 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing a part of main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 88 of the first embodiment when power is turned on; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a part of main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 89 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a part of main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 90 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting change processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 91 of the first embodiment; FIG. 5 is a time chart showing an example of changes in the display mode of the information display section; 9 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit when the number of objects passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60000; 9 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit when the number of objects passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60000; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 97 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 97 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 98 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 98 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 100 of the first embodiment when power is turned on; 10 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 100 of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 100 of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 100 of the first embodiment; FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 of aspect 101 of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 101 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 101 of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a sound and light side MPU (sound and light side CPU) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup date/time information acquisition processing executed by the sound and light side MPU (sound and light side CPU) of mode 101 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing activation type notification processing executed by the sound and light side MPU (sound and light side CPU) of aspect 101 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU (sound and light side CPU) of aspect 101 of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing RTC effect processing executed by the sound and light side MPU (sound and light side CPU) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining an RTC effect execution determination table. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing startup date/time information acquisition processing executed by the sound and light side MPU (sound and light side CPU) in aspect 102 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a ball entry process for a starting opening executed by a main side MPU (main side CPU) in aspect 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a destination determination process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a ball entering process for a through gate executed by a main side MPU (main side CPU) in aspect 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a game round control process executed by the main MPU (main CPU) of mode 103 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing data setting processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variation start processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in mode 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition processing which main side MPU (main side CPU) of aspect 103 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening and closing process executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of mode 103 of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of an ending period executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for supporting an electrician executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing electrical opening/closing control processing executed by a main side MPU (main side CPU) in aspect 103 of the first embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU (sound and light side CPU) of aspect 102 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a holding effect process executed by the sound and light side MPU (sound and light side CPU) in aspect 102 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a ball entry process for a starting opening executed by a main side MPU (main side CPU) in aspect 104 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing variation start processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 104 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a ball entry process for a starting opening executed by a main side MPU (main side CPU) in aspect 105 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing variation start processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 105 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a starting opening executed by a main side MPU (main side CPU) in aspect 106 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 106 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 110 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU in mode 110 of the first embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings which the main side MPU of the aspect 110 of 1st Embodiment performs. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a destination determination process executed by the main MPU in aspect 110 of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process which the main side MPU of the aspect 110 of 1st Embodiment performs. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the main MPU in aspect 110 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing executed by the main MPU in aspect 110 of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how setting information is displayed on an information display section in aspect 111 of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 111 of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 111 of the first embodiment; It is a front view of the game board in the aspect 112 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 112 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 112 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in aspect 118 of the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing how an error code is displayed on the information display section in aspect 119 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing when RAM clear processing is executed after power is turned on; FIG. 7 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing when a setting change mode is executed after power is turned on and setting information is not changed in the setting change mode; 7 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing when a setting change mode is executed after power is turned on and setting information is changed in the setting change mode; 7 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing when the setting confirmation mode is executed after power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 121 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 121 of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 121 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU in mode 121 of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows door monitoring processing. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the process for various alerting|reporting. 9 is a flowchart showing a setting change mode notification process; 9 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation mode notification process; It is a flow chart which shows processing for RAM clear information. 7 is a flowchart showing RAM abnormality notification processing; It is a flow chart which shows processing for door opening information.

An embodiment of a game machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Applies to other configurations:
C. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") according to the first embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged on the back of the inner frame 13. FIG. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. The substrate box is configured to leave a trace of opening and closing (also referred to as a trace of opening or a trace of unsealing). For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 and a variable winning device 36 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls. In this embodiment, as the general prize winning opening 32, three general prize winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided. Hereinafter, the general winning opening 32a is also referred to as the first winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 32b as the second winning opening 32b, and the general winning opening 32c as the third winning opening 32c.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a normal electric accessory.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of winning lottery, when a big win or a small win is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the first winning port 32a, the second winning port 32b, the third winning port 32c, the big winning port 36a, and the game in which the ball enters the out port 43 The balls are configured to merge into a discharge passage provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting the game balls. As will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 by detecting the game balls with the ejection path detection sensor.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is also called a first starting hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is also called a second starting hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns representing numbers 1 to 8. As shown in FIG. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning at either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the first result display section 37a or the second result is displayed for each game round. In either one of the display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four at maximum.

A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when the CPU 62x executes the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and an input/output port 62a. The MPU 62 further includes a game history management chip 300 and an inspection terminal 65 .

The game history management chip 300 calculates various game history information to be described later, based on the information of the game ball entering the start hole, the prize winning hole, and the gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as "ball entry hole"). do. The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for transmitting game history information stored in the game history management chip 300 to a later-described inspection machine. Details of the game history management chip 300 and the inspection terminal 65 will be described later.

The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element.

An input side of the MPU 62 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, in this embodiment, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor 87, and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power failure occurs or the power switch is turned off.

Also, the input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a ball entry detection sensor provided at each ball entrance. Specifically, a large winning opening detection sensor 44a that detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 36a, a first starting opening detection sensor 44b that detects a gaming ball that has entered the first starting opening 33, A second starting hole detection sensor 44c for detecting a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, a first winning hole detecting sensor 44d for detecting a game ball entering the first winning hole 32a, and a second winning hole 32b. A second winning hole detection sensor 44e that detects a game ball that has entered a game ball, a third winning hole detection sensor 44f that detects a game ball that has entered the third winning hole 32c, and a game ball that has passed through the through gate 35. A through gate detection sensor 44g for detection and a discharge passage detection sensor 44h for detecting game balls passing through the discharge passage are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the starting opening or the winning opening, and whether the game ball has passed through the through gate or the discharge passage. or not. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34, and a main display. 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area of the ROM 63 . Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. Specifically, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 made of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and controls the operation of the speaker 46. , and controls the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. Various counters are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64, and are used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the display setting of the main display section 45, the design display setting of the design display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the ROM 63, resulting in a jackpot. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big win, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not it occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not it occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. A variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the big-hit random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the big-hit random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 7(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 7(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), five values of 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the present embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode described above is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10 pieces.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8( a ), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. , "28 to 33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, the shooting of game balls continues in the same mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric role product 34a occurs multiple times in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state ends, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary item open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary item open lottery.

FIG. 9(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9( a ), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 9(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 that becomes the electric accessory open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main controller 60 and the inspection machine 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The MPU 62, CPU 62x, ROM 63 and RAM 64 are hereinafter also referred to as main MPU 62, main CPU 62x, main ROM 63 and main RAM 64, respectively.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and an arithmetic execution condition storage area.

The prize ball number data storage area stores the number of game balls paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter each ball entrance (ball number data). In this embodiment, the following number of prize balls data is stored in the number of prize balls data storage area.
· Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the first start hole 33 (first start hole prize ball number P ₁ ): 3
- The number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second start hole 34 (second start hole prize ball number P ₂ ): 3
- Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the first prize hole 32a (number of prize balls in the first prize hole P _N1 ): 10
- Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the second winning hole 32b (second winning hole prize ball number P _N2 ): 10
- Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the third prize opening 32c (number of prize balls in the third prize opening P _N3 ): 10
- The number of game balls paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the big winning hole 36a (large winning hole prize ball number P _S ): 15

By referring to the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63, the main side MPU 62 pays out game balls as prize balls when the game balls enter each ball entrance. Determine the number of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The computation execution condition storage area stores computation execution conditions that are conditions for the game history management chip 300 to start computation for calculating game history information. In this embodiment, it is stored as a calculation execution condition that the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500 pieces. The arithmetic execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The game history management chip 300 is a semiconductor chip that calculates various kinds of game history information based on the information on the game balls entering each ball entrance and stores the calculated game history information. The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information from the CPU 62x into each ball entry hole, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls entered into each ball entry hole, and a main side ROM 63. Winning ball number data storage memory 306 for storing the winning ball number data obtained from the main ROM 63, calculation execution condition storage memory 307 for storing calculation execution conditions obtained from the main ROM 63, and overall control of the game history management chip 300 and calculating game history information based on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance and the number of winning balls set in each ball entrance, triggered by the establishment of the calculation execution condition; and a calculation result storage memory 309 for storing the game history information obtained.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10 . In this embodiment, the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 .

The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a game history management chip 300. A display unit 328 for displaying the received game history information and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320. As shown in FIG.

The buffer 302 is provided between the CPU 62x of the main MPU 62 and the register 304, and acquires ball entry information at each ball entrance from the CPU 62x. Specifically, the buffer 302 is provided with a plurality of bits corresponding to each ball entrance, and the CPU 62x turns ON ("1 ”). For example, when the CPU 62x determines that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 33, the bit corresponding to the first starting hole 33 in the buffer 302 is turned ON (“1”).

The buffer 302 is also provided with bits for grasping the game mode and the state of the pachinko machine 10 when a game ball enters each ball entrance (hereinafter also referred to as the game state). In this embodiment, a bit for determining whether or not the normal mode is in progress (not in the high probability mode, not in the high frequency support mode, and not in the opening/closing execution mode), and whether or not the high probability mode is on. a bit for determining whether it is in the high-frequency support mode; a bit for determining whether it is in the open/close execution mode; A bit for determining whether it is during the period of value, a bit for determining whether it is during the period when the second reserved number is the upper limit value, and the front door frame 14 is open A bit for judging whether or not there is, and a bit for judging whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error, such as a trouble such as a failure, are provided. For example, when the CPU 62x determines that the normal mode is in effect at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, the CPU 62x turns ON (“1 ”).

The register 304 stores the number of game balls entering each ball entrance. Specifically, the register 304 is composed of a plurality of counters corresponding to each ball entry port. ), 1 is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the bit determined to have the entry information. Note that, in this embodiment, the register 304 is configured by a non-volatile register that can retain its memory even if the power supply is cut off.

In this embodiment, the register 304 stores the following values by each counter corresponding to each entrance.
・The number of game balls entering the big winning hole 36a = the number of balls entering the big winning hole _NS
・ Number of game balls entering the first starting hole 33 = Number of balls entering the first starting hole N ₁
· The number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 = the number of balls entering the second starting port N ₂
・The number of game balls entering the first winning hole 32a = Number of balls entering the first winning hole N _N1
・The number of game balls entering the second winning hole 32b = the number of balls entering the second winning hole N _N2
・The number of game balls entering the third winning hole 32c = the number of balls entering the third winning hole N _N3
・The number of game balls that passed through the through gate 35 = the number of through gate passing N _G
・The number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage = the number of balls that have passed through the discharge passage N _OUT
Incidentally, as described above, the discharge passage passage number N _OUT coincides with the number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the register 304 stores the number of game balls entering each ball entrance for each game state.
・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during normal mode ・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during high probability mode ・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during high frequency support mode The number of game balls ・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during the open/close execution mode ・The game balls that entered the first start opening 33 during the period when the first reserved number is the upper limit value during the normal mode・The number of game balls that entered the second starting port 34 during the period in which the second reservation number is the upper limit during the normal mode ・The game that entered each ball entrance while the front door frame 14 was open Number of balls ・Number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during the error

For example, it is determined that the bit corresponding to the first starting port 33 of the buffer 302 has ball entry information (the bit is ON), and the information is in the bit that determines whether or not the normal mode is in progress. If it is determined that there is (the bit is ON), the value of the first start opening number counter, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start opening 33, is set to 1. is added, and 1 is added to the value of the number counter of the number of balls entering the first starting hole during the normal mode, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls entered into the first starting hole 33 during the normal mode. be.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 . In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the memory for storing number of prize balls data 306 are the same as the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the main ROM 63 .

The calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is a memory for storing calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10 . The calculation execution condition is a condition for starting the calculation for calculating the game history information, as described above. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is set to start calculation for calculating the game history information each time the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500 pieces. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 . Therefore, the content of the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is the same as the content of the calculation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 . In addition, as a calculation execution condition, the number of game balls that have passed through or entered a passage other than the discharge passage may be stored as a reference, or a number other than 500 may be stored as a reference.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the computation execution condition stored in the computation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied, and when it is determined that the computation execution condition is satisfied, the CPU 308 stores the number of prize balls data in the memory 306. and the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304, various game history information is calculated. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 calculates the following values as the game history information each time the value of the discharge passage passing number N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500.

・Accessory ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by activation of role (number of award balls) / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
=( _N2 * _P2 + _NS * _PS )/( _NN1 * _PN1 + _NN2 * _PN2 + _NN3 * _PN3 + _N1 * _P1 + _N2 * _P2 + _NS * _PS )
・ Continuous role ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by continuous role operation (number of consecutive role prize balls) / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= (N _S ×P _S )/(N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3 +N ₁ ×P ₁ +N ₂ ×P ₂ +NS ×P _{S )}
・Ball output rate (total)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls) / Number of game balls launched to the game board 30 = (N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S )/N _OUT

The basis for calculating the above values is as follows.
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the action of the accessory (the number of prize balls)
=The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the electric accessory 34a as the normal electric accessory and the variable winning device 36 as the special electric accessory =To the second start port 34 and the big winning port 36a The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the number of game balls entered = N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to continuous bonus action (number of consecutive bonus balls)
= The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the variable prize winning device 36 as a special electric accessory = The game paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game balls into the big prize winning port 36a Number of spheres = N _S × P _S
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c =N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3
・Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, and the big winning opening 36a = _NN1 x _PN1 + _NN2 x _PN2 + _NN3 x _PN3 + _N1 x _P1 + N2 x _P2 + _{NS x PS}

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the following game history information is calculated based on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance counted for each game state.

・ Payout ratio (during normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during the normal mode / Based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during the normal mode The number of game balls paid out as prize balls + the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third prize openings 32a to 32c during the normal mode. Ball rate (during normal mode)
=Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode/Number of game balls fired to game board 30 during normal mode/ball output rate (during high-frequency support mode)
=Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during high-frequency support mode/number of game balls fired to game board 30 during high-frequency support mode · BY (during normal mode)
= The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c during the normal mode + the first reserved number during the normal mode is the upper limit. The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 during the period + the second start port during the period when the second reserved number is the upper limit value during the normal mode Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering 34 / Number of game balls shot to game board 30 during normal mode · BY _MIN (during normal mode)
= the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c during the normal mode/the number of game balls launched to the game board 30 during the normal mode・Ball entry rate while the front door frame is open = Number of game balls entering each ball entrance while the front door frame 14 is open/Number of game balls launched to the game board 30 Ball entry rate during errors = Number of game balls entered into each ball entrance during error/Number of game balls launched to game board 30 Note that the above-mentioned game history information is an example, and configuration for calculating game history information other than these may be

After calculating the various game history information, the CPU 308 stores the calculated various game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 and resets the values of the counters of the register 304 to "0". In addition, hereinafter, various types of game history information calculated each time 500 game balls are shot to the game board 30 are collectively referred to as a "short-term game history information group".

The calculation result storage memory 309 is a memory for storing the game history information calculated by the CPU 308, and in this embodiment, it is composed of a non-volatile memory capable of retaining the memory even if the power supply is cut off. It is The calculation result storage memory 309 also stores information about the order in which the short-term gaming history information group was written. The short-term game history information group thus written is stored in an area in which the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the calculation result storage memory 309 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in/first-out method), and the most recent short-term game history information group is always stored. be in a state where

In this embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term game history information groups calculated each time 500 game balls are shot onto the game board 30. are doing. For example, if game balls are continuously shot for 10 hours in a day, 60,000 game balls will be shot in a day. It will be stored in the result storage memory 309 . Therefore, the calculation result storage memory 309 can store short-term game history information groups for the most recent ten days.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 , it transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the game history information to the game history management chip 300 . Upon receiving the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320 , the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 transmits the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 . As a result, the inspection machine 320 acquires the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 and causes the display unit 328 to display the acquired game history information.

Thus, in this embodiment, each time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500, that is, each time 500 game balls are shot onto the game board 30, the game such as the role product ratio History information is calculated and stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 . Then, the calculated game history information is displayed on the display section 328 of the inspection machine 320 .

A3. Details of various processes executed in gaming machines:
Next, each process performed by MPU62 (this embodiment CPU62x) is demonstrated. The processing of the MPU 62 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the main process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. In step S10101, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, it executes initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a process of transmitting calculation data to the game history management chip 300 is executed in the initial setting process. Specifically, the calculation data (the number of winning balls data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 . As will be described later, the game history management chip 300 that has received the calculation data stores the prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307, respectively. is sent to the main side MPU 62. After executing step S10101, the process proceeds to step S10102.

In step S10102, it is determined whether or not a setting completion command has been received. If it is determined in step S10102 that the setting completion command has been received (S10102: YES), the process advances to step S10103 to set interrupt permission to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10102 that the setting completion command has not been received (S10102: NO), the process of step S10102 is executed again. In other words, the process does not proceed to step S10103 until the setting completion command is received, and interrupt permission setting for permitting generation of timer interrupt processing is not performed.

After executing step S10103, the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 is performed. In other words, although the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as will be described later, there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S10104 to S10107 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S10104, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S10105, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S10106, variation counter update processing for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S10107, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S10107, the process returns to step S10104, and the processes of steps S10104 to S10107 are repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment) will be described.

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. The timer interrupt process is started at a specific cycle (4 msec cycle in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, random number update process for lottery is executed in step S10201. In the lottery random number update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information , overwrites the read source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, the process proceeds to step S10202.

In step S10202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in the random number initial value update process, and the flow advances to step S10203 to update the variation type counter CS in the variation type counter update process. After that, the process proceeds to step S10204.

In step S10204, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when information is set to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state, output of a drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set Stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information to switch the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. When set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S10205.

In step S10205, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S10206.

In step S10206, signals received from each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and ball entry detection processing for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. The processing contents of the ball-entering detection processing will be described in detail later. After that, the process proceeds to step S10207.

In step S 10207 , the ball entry detection information is output to the bit of the buffer 302 of the game history management chip 300 . Specifically, the bit corresponding to the ball entrance determined to have entered the game ball in the ball entry detection process of step S10206 is turned ON (“1”), and the bit corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. is turned ON (“1”). After that, the process proceeds to step S10208.

In step S10208, a timer update process is executed for collectively updating numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. Then, it progresses to step S10209 and performs the output setting process of a prize ball command. After that, the process proceeds to step S10210.

In step S10210, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the starting port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are determined based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. While acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM64. After executing step S10210, the process proceeds to step S10211.

In step S10211, ball-entering processing for the through-gate accompanying entry (passage) of the game ball to the through-gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is stored in the electronic device of the RAM 64. Store in reservation area 64d. After executing step S10211, the process proceeds to step S10212.

In step S10212, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, winning lottery, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. After executing step S10212, the process proceeds to step S10213.

In step S10213, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. In the game state transition processing, processing is executed to shift the game state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

In step S10214, an electric role support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric role product 34a (electric role product opening lottery), and when it is determined to be in the open state, the electric role product 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S10214, the process proceeds to step S10215.

In step S10215, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, a process for shooting a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S10215, the process proceeds to step S10216.

In step S10216, external information setting processing is executed so as to control the start and end of the output of external signals according to the processing results of the various processing executed in this timer interrupt processing. After executing step S10216, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Next, the ball entry detection process executed in step S10206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the ball entry detection process, a process of confirming the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is executed. Here, before describing the entering ball detection process, the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main side MPU 62 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. The input port 62b is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle 8 types of signals simultaneously. Areas for storing "0" or "1" information according to the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7.

In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 62b, in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 62b depends on the driver IC. Switched through switching control. In the ball-entering detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 62b is set to each of the ball-entering detection sensors 44a to 44h.

In this setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the 1st bit D1 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the first start opening detection sensor 44b. Corresponding information is stored, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second start hole detection sensor 44c, and the third bit D3 is stored to the ball entry signal from the first winning hole detection sensor 44d. Corresponding information is stored, the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second winning hole detection sensor 44e, and the fifth bit D5 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the third winning hole detection sensor 44f. Corresponding information is stored, the sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the through gate detection sensor 44g, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. Stored.

In this case, each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h outputs a HI level signal indicating non-detection as a ball entry signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and the passage of the game ball is output. is detected, a LOW level signal indicating that the ball is being detected is output as an incoming ball signal. However, the main control board 151 is provided with an inverting circuit, and the state of the signal is inverted before each detection signal is input to the input port 62b. When the input port 62b receives a LOW level signal through the inverting circuit, it stores "0" information (data 0 or no information) in the corresponding bit, and receives a HI level signal through the inverting circuit. If the data is present, "1" information (data 1 or presence information) is stored in the corresponding bit.

In other words, in a situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, "0" information corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In the state where detection is in progress, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is in progress is stored in the corresponding bit.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h outputs a LOW level signal as a ball entry signal while not detecting the passage of a game ball, and outputs a HIGH level signal as an entry ball signal while the passage of a game ball is detected. It may be configured to output a level signal. In this case, the inverting circuit should be considered defective.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ball-entering detection process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. FIG. 15(a) is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62. FIG. FIG. 15(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the ball entry determination area used in the ball entry detection process. In the ball entry detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. A process of shifting to the one-ball determination area WA1 is executed. The first ball entry determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. It is a data capacity that can be used. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the first ball entry determination area WA1 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence. The information of D0 is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first ball entry determination area WA1.

In the subsequent step S10302, a wait process for ball entry detection is executed. In the wait process, the main MPU 62 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time elapses. In the pachinko machine 10, the wait time is set to 10 μsec, but it does not impede the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process, and furthermore, by setting the wait process, it is possible to fully achieve the effects described later. Although the specific wait time is arbitrary as long as it is possible, it is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

Incidentally, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the processing of one step. Therefore, even if the processing of step S10302 is not set, a forced wait time of 1.2 μsec will occur between steps S10301 and S10303. In this regard, in step S10302, in addition to the minimum time required to execute the process, an additional wait time is set between the process of step S10301 and the process of step S10303.

In the following step S10303, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is transferred to the second entering ball determination area WA2 in the register of the main side MPU 62. FIG. Incidentally, since the information in the input port 62b is updated at intervals shorter than the time from the completion of step S10301 to the start of step S10303, the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 are updated in step S10303. The information migrated from may be different than in step S10301.

Like the first ball entry determination area WA1, the second ball entry determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 15(b-2). It has a data capacity that can store all of the stored information. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the second entering ball determination area WA2 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence. The relationship between the bit and the bit of the storage destination is the same as in the case of the first ball entry determination area WA1.

After that, in step S10304, after executing the ball entry determination process, the main ball entry detection process is terminated. The entering ball determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the ball entry determination process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. In the entering ball determination process, first, in step S10401, 8 is set in the entering ball determination counter provided in the main RAM 64 . It should be noted that the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter corresponds to the bits of each of the eight ball entry holes. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the numerical value information "8" of the entry determination counter is the 0th bit D0 of the big winning opening 36a, "7" is the first bit D1 of the first start opening 33, and "6". is the second bit D2 of the second starting hole 34, "5" is the third bit D3 of the first winning hole 32a, "4" is the fourth bit D4 of the second winning hole 32b, "3" is the third winning hole The fifth bit D5 of 32c, "2" corresponds to the sixth bit D6 of the through gate 35, and "1" corresponds to the seventh bit D7 of the discharge passage. In the following step S10402, each bit information corresponding to the current numerical value information of the entering ball determination counter in the first entering ball determination area WA1 and the second entering ball determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit at the input port 62b.

In subsequent step S10403, the AND processing of each information grasped in step S10402 is executed, and the result of the AND processing is stored in a register. Of these, the result of the AND processing is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side on which the information on the result of the AND processing was stored in the incoming ball detection processing in the processing of the previous timer interrupt processing. The first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIGS. 15(b-3) and 15(b-4). The data capacity is such that it is possible to store all information of the result of AND processing between each bit and each bit of the second ball entry determination area WA2. In this case, the order of the bits in the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 that are subject to AND processing, and the order of the bits in the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4. is uniquely defined.

After that, in step S10405, in the side of the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 in which the information of the result of the AND process was stored in the entering ball determination process in the previous timer interrupt process, Then, the bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is read. Then, in step S10406, an inversion process is executed to invert the read information between "0" and "1".

After that, in step S10407, AND processing is executed between the information of the AND processing result in step S10403 and the information of the reversing processing result in step S10406. It is determined whether or not it is "1" corresponding to . If it is determined in step S10408 that the AND processing result is "1", the process proceeds to step S10409 and subsequent steps.

In step S10409, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port . If it corresponds to either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, in step S10410, the starting port entrance flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", and step S10411 , 1 is added to the numerical information of the 3 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 64 .

The starting port entry ball flag specifies the entry of the game ball to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 by the main side MPU 62, and the game ball to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 It is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 62 that it is a process corresponding to the entering ball and is in a state where a process other than the execution of the winning ball should be executed. Incidentally, since the ball detection sensors 44b and 44c are provided for the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34, respectively, the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 may be grasped at the same time within the range of one timer interrupt process. Therefore, in order to correspond to this, the starting ball entry flags are provided corresponding to the number of the starting ports 33 and 34, specifically, two flags are provided. Also, the 3 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the main side MPU 62 should output a 3 prize ball command instructing execution of 3 prize balls.

When a negative determination is made in step S10409, in step S10412, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to the big winning opening 36a (variable winning device 36). judge. When the variable winning device 36 is supported, at step S10413, "1" is set to the big winning opening ball flag provided in the main side RAM64, and at step S10414, the main side RAM64 is provided. 1 is added to the numerical information of the 15 prize ball counter.

The main MPU 62 specifies the entry of a game ball into the variable winning device 36, and the big winning opening ball flag is processing corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 36, This flag is used by the main MPU 62 to specify that a process other than execution should be executed. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the main MPU 62 should output the 15 prize ball command instructing the execution of 15 prize balls.

If a negative determination is made in step S10412, it is determined in step S10415 whether or not the current numerical information of the ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to the through gate 35. FIG. If it corresponds to the through gate 35, the through passage flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S10416.

The through passage flag specifies that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 in the main side MPU 62, and indicates that the main side MPU 62 is in a state in which processing corresponding to the game ball entering the through gate 35 should be executed. It is a flag for specifying in MPU62.

When a negative determination is made in step S10415, in step S10417, the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter corresponds to any of the first winning opening 32a, second winning opening 32b and third winning opening 32c. It is determined whether or not the information indicates a bit. If it corresponds to any one of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b and the third winning opening 32c, in step S10418, the general winning opening ball flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". ” is set, and in step S10419, 1 is added to the numerical value information of the 3 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 64 .

The general winning hole entry ball flag is a flag for specifying the entry of the game ball to the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b or the third winning hole 32c in the main side MPU62. Incidentally, the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, and the third winning hole 32c are provided with the ball detection sensors 44d, 44e, and 44f, respectively. A ball entering the winning hole 32b and a ball entering the third winning hole may be grasped at the same time within the range of one process of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, in order to correspond to this, the general winning opening ball flags are provided corresponding to the number of the general winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c, specifically, three. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the main MPU 62 should output the 3 prize ball command instructing the execution of 10 prize balls.

If a negative determination is made in step S10417, it means that the current entry corresponds to the discharge passage, so in step SAD20, the discharge passage passage flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". to set. The discharge passage passage flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 62 that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage.

If a negative determination is made in step S10408, or after executing any one of steps S10411, S10414, S10416, S10419, and S10420, the process proceeds to step S10421. In step S10421, the entry determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10422, it is determined whether or not the entry determination counter is "0".

If the entry determination counter is not "0", the processing of steps S10402 to S10420 is executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the entry determination counter updated in step S10421. When the processes of steps S10402 to S10420 are executed for the numerical information set in step S10401, an affirmative determination is made in step S10422, and this entering ball determination process ends.

Next, by executing the ball-entering detection process (FIG. 15), the general winning port 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the discharge passage The manner in which the presence or absence of a hit ball is detected will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the presence/absence of a hit ball is detected. First, with reference to FIG. 17(A), the timing for monitoring the detection results (hereinafter also referred to as "entering ball information") of the entering ball detecting sensors 44a to 44h will be described. FIG. 17A is a timing chart for explaining the timing of monitoring each piece of incoming ball information.

As shown in FIG. 17(A), in a configuration in which timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) is activated at T1 (specifically, 4 msec) intervals, processing for monitoring incoming ball information is performed at each processing time of timer interrupt processing. This is performed twice (steps S10301 and S10303). The processing for monitoring each set of entering ball information is executed so that the timing is delayed. is executed when the time has passed.

In this case, the timing at which the ball-entering detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed before the processes whose processing time is likely to fluctuate, such as the game turn control process and the electric support process. The processing that is executed prior to the detection processing is processing whose processing time is relatively less likely to fluctuate. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process of each process, the period until the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side is started is the same, substantially the same, or the same as T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of entering-ball information included in each processing cycle of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the preceding-side entering-ball information is periodically executed.

Further, among the processes for monitoring each set of ball entry information, between the process for monitoring the front side entry information (step S10301) and the process for monitoring the rear side entry information (step S10303), A wait process for ball-entering detection (step S10302) is executed, but this wait process does not execute any process and only waits until a certain wait time T3 elapses. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of ball entry information included in each processing cycle of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the rear ball entry information is periodically executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(B), the contents of the calculation executed when the entering ball determination is performed will be described. FIG. 17(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the calculation executed when the entering ball determination is performed. Although various operations are actually performed in 1-bit units, in the following explanation, the contents of the operations will be explained in 1-byte units. However, the configuration may be such that the operation is actually performed in 1-byte units as described below.

In the case of FIG. 17(B), first, in the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side in the n-th timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 17(B1), "00100000" ” is set. In this case, the ball entry information of the third winning hole detection sensor 44f among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is information indicating that a game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as information that a game ball has been entered). The entering ball information of other sensors is information indicating that the game ball is not detected (hereinafter also referred to as no entering ball information).

Further, in the process of monitoring the trailing ball entry information in the n-th timer interrupt process, "10100000" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 17(B2). In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge path detection sensor 44h and the third prize winning opening detection sensor 44f each provide ball entry information, and the other sensors provide ball entry information. .

When the information of the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is "00100000" as shown in FIG. Information is set in the first post-computation area WA3 as the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the timer interrupt process of the n-th process. If the monitoring result of the entering ball information is set in the post-first calculation area WA3 in the n-1th timer interrupt process, the monitoring result of the entering ball information in the n-th timer interrupt process is set to the second calculation. It is set in the rear area WA4. Also, the ball entry determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the n-1th ball entry information and the monitoring result of the nth ball entry information, but the details of the calculation of this process are omitted here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17(B4), "10100110" is set in the first ball entry determination area WA1 in the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the front side in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third prize winning opening detection sensor 44f, the second start opening detection sensor 44c, and the first start opening detection sensor 44b each have entry information. It is set and other sensors have no ball entry information.

In addition, in the process of monitoring the trailing ball entry information in the n+1th timer interrupt process, "10100010" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 17(B5). In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third prize winning opening detection sensor 44f, and the first starting opening detection sensor 44b each provide ball entry information, and the other sensors It is information that there is no entry.

When the information of the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is "10100010" as shown in FIG. Information is set in the second post-calculation area WA4 as the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the timer interrupt processing of the (n+1)th processing.

After that, in the entering ball determination process (FIG. 16) in the n+1th timer interrupt process, the result of monitoring the entering ball information in the nth timer interrupt process is first read from the first post-computation area WA3 and read out. Inversion processing is performed on the information of the monitoring result obtained. Then, as shown in FIG. 17B7, it becomes "11011111". Then, the result of the reversing process is ANDed with the monitoring result of the entering ball information in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. This results in "10000010" as shown in FIG. 17(B8). In this case, in the ball entry determination process, it is determined that the entry of the game ball is detected by the discharge path detection sensor 44h, and that the entry of the game ball is detected by the first start hole detection sensor 44b. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 17(B4), the second starting hole detection sensor 44c has entered ball presence information in the process of monitoring the leading ball entering information in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. is caused by electrical noise. In this case, even if it is confirmed that there is a change from information with no ball entry to information with ball entry, it is not determined immediately that a ball has been entered. It is the configuration that identifies the occurrence. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17 (B5), in the process of monitoring the ball entering information on the rear side in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process, the second starting hole detection sensor 44c is the no ball entering information, and the electrical The occurrence of noise is not treated as the entry of a game ball.

In addition, in the third winning hole detection sensor 44f, input is performed in each of the process of monitoring one set of entering ball information in the nth timer interrupt process and the process of monitoring one set of entering ball information in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. Although it is the ball presence information, this indicates a state in which a game ball whose entry has already been grasped is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of a ball entry is specified on the condition that the result of monitoring the ball entry information in the n-th timer interrupt process is "0", one game ball is counted as a plurality of ball entries. Do not treat it as an incoming ball.

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the detection results of the respective ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are monitored, and when a ball entry corresponding to the application of the gaming ball occurs. 3, addition processing to the 3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter and 15 prize ball counter is executed according to the ball entry position. If any of these counters is "1" or more, the award command is set in the award command output setting process (step S10209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). The awarded ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In this case, the output setting of the prize command is performed only once in one processing of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is "2" or more, the 15 prize ball command is transmitted only once in one process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined plurality of (for example, two or three) prize ball commands are transmitted in one processing.

It is also conceivable that each of the 3 prize ball counter, the 10 prize ball counter, and the 15 prize ball counter is "1" or more. have priority. That is, the output of the 15 ball command has priority over the output of the 10 ball command and the output of the 3 ball command, and the output of the 10 ball command is prioritized over the output of the 3 ball command. .

When the 15 prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 15 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 15 prize ball counter. Further, when the 10 prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 10 prize ball command is set as an output target, the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by one. Further, when the 3 prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 3 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 3 prize ball counter.

Next, processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the following main processing when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300. As shown in FIG.

In step S10501, it is determined whether or not calculation data including the number of winning balls data and calculation execution conditions has been received. If it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has been received (S10501: YES), the process proceeds to step S10502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10501 that the calculation data has not been received (S10501: NO), the process of step S10501 is executed again. That is, the infinite loop continues without proceeding to the next step S10502 until the calculation data is received.

In step S10502, the received number-of-balls data is stored in memory 306 for storing number-of-balls-winning data. After that, the process advances to step S10503 to store the received calculation execution condition in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10504.

In step S10504, a setting completion command indicating that the storage of the number of prize balls data in the number of prize balls data storage memory 306 is completed and the storage of the calculation execution condition to the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is completed. is transmitted to the main side CPU 62x. After that, the process proceeds to step S10505.

In step S10505, it is determined whether or not the bit of the buffer 302 contains the ball entry information received from the main side CPU 62x ("1" is stored in the bit). If it is determined in step S10505 that the bit of the buffer 302 contains the incoming ball information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: YES), the process advances to step S10506 to set the counter of the register corresponding to the bit of the buffer 302 to 1. to add. Specifically, for example, when the bit corresponding to the first starting hole entry information in the buffer 302 is "1" and the bit corresponding to the normal mode is "1", the big win in the register 304 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the entrance _NS , and 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the normal mode. After that, the process proceeds to step S10507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10505 that the bit of the buffer 302 does not contain the ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: NO), the process proceeds to step S10507 without executing step S10506.

In step S10507, it is determined whether or not the computation execution condition stored in the computation execution condition storage memory 307 is established. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharge passage passage number _NOUT stored in the register 304 is 500, that is, whether or not the number of game balls shot to the game board 30 has reached 500. judge. If it is determined in step S10507 that the computation execution condition stored in the computation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied (S10507: YES), the process proceeds to step S10508.

In step S10508, based on the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304, various game history information Arithmetic processing for calculating is executed. After that, the process advances to step S10509 to store the calculated various game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10510, and the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304 is cleared to zero. After that, the process proceeds to step S10511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10507 that the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage memory 307 is not established (S10507: NO), step S10511 is executed without executing steps S10508 to S10510. proceed to

In step S10511, it is determined whether or not a transmission request command for game history information has been received from the inspection machine 320. If it is determined that a transmission request command has been received (S10511: YES), the process proceeds to step S10512. , the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . The inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information. After executing step S10512, the process returns to step S10505 to repeat the processes from step S10505 onward. On the other hand, in step S10511, when it is determined that the game history information transmission request command has not been received from the inspection machine 320 (S10511: NO), the process returns to step S10505 without executing the processing of step S10512, and step The processing after S10505 is repeated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 can calculate the game history information, which is information correlated with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game. If the game machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled by checking the game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 includes the calculation result storage memory 309 that stores the calculated game history information in a non-volatile manner. Since the game history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the game history information differs for each pachinko machine 10 and is unique to the pachinko machine 10 . That is, the game history information is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 . According to this embodiment, the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, is stored in the calculation result memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the main body of the pachinko machine 10. do. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected by acquiring the game history information from the pachinko machine 10 itself. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, information about the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be obtained from the hall computer installed in the game hall. However, since the pachinko machine 10 is distributed from time to time, there are cases where it is placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. Can not do it. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stores the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, in the memory 309 for storing the calculation result of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the main body of the pachinko machine 10. Since the information is stored, even when the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to the hall computer, the game history information can be obtained from the main body of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment always maintains a one-to-one relationship between the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (the state of being installed in a game hall or the state of circulation). , and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 and the main CPU 62x are both mounted on the main MPU 62, and are configured to operate with the same power source. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated by the hall computer, a problem occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer. game history information can be calculated as long as power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, even if there is a problem in the processing of the hall computer. If the main side CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by different power supplies, and if there is a problem with the power supply of the game history management chip 300, the pachinko machine 10 is still playing games. Regardless, there arises a problem that the game history information cannot be calculated. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, since the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by the same power source, the game history information can be calculated whenever the game is executable. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game history information.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box, which is a space in which traces of opening and closing (also referred to as traces of opening and traces of opening) remain. Therefore, when the memory 309 for storing calculation results is physically touched, a trace of opening the board box remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is altered through physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, the fact that the information has been altered can be grasped from the traces on the board box. It becomes possible to Therefore, unauthorized modification of the game history information can be prevented. Since the pachinko machine 10 is distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but the operation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box where the traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the game history information by someone can be suppressed. In addition, since the game history information is information acquired based on the games that have been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the pachinko machine 10 using the game history information. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the game history information that reflects the game-related characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the number of prize balls data stored in the number of prize balls data storage area of the main-side ROM 63. can be calculated. Furthermore, even if different prize ball number data is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10, the game history management chip 300 can be used to play a correct game using the prize ball number data set for each type of pachinko machine 10. Historical information can be calculated. If the game machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can appropriately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled by confirming the correct game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 62x transmits a signal including the number of prize balls data stored in the number of prize balls data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the game history management chip 300, thereby enabling game history management. A configuration in which the chip 300 cannot access the number-of-balls data storage area of the main-side ROM 63, and a storage position of the number-of-balls data stored in the number-of-balls data storage area of the main-side ROM 63 by the game history management chip 300. Even in a configuration where (memory address) cannot be grasped, the game history management chip 300 can acquire the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63 .

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the main processing of the main CPU 62x, the interruption of the timer interruption processing is not permitted until the setting completion command is received, and the game ball launch control processing included in the timer interruption processing is not executed. It is configured. That is, since the game ball is not shot until the memory 306 for storing the number of prize balls data is completely stored, the game ball is not included in the calculation target of the game history information by the game history management chip 300. - 特許庁can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the game history information for each period until 500 game balls are detected by the discharge path detection sensor 44h is calculated and stored, each pachinko machine 10 detects 500 game balls. Even if there is variation in the time until is detected, it is possible to calculate and store game history information that does not affect the variation in time. That is, even if there is a height difference in the frequency with which game balls are shot, it is possible to calculate and store highly accurate game history information that is not easily affected by the difference. In addition, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which the ball-entering information to each ball-entering hole is stored as it is.

If the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so the optimal conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 as the operation execution conditions. According to this embodiment, since the game history management chip 300 acquires the operation execution conditions stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, the operation set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 An operation for calculating game history information can be executed when an execution condition is satisfied.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304 Since the (counter value) is erased, it becomes possible to store the information on the number of game balls entered in the register 304 again. Therefore, the storage capacity required for register 304 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 , the inspection machine 320 can display the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 . Then, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the game history information displayed on the inspection machine 320. - 特許庁

A4. Other aspects of the first embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the first embodiment, as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it was set that the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reached 500 pieces. A configuration may be adopted in which a time interval for executing the calculation is set as the execution condition. For example, one hour is set as the time interval for executing calculations, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to calculate the game history information each time one hour elapses. An inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the detailed game history information calculated every hour, and can appropriately judge whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled. Become. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Note that if the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the game characteristics are also different, so the optimal conditions (time intervals) for executing calculations for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 as the operation execution conditions. Therefore, in this aspect 1 as well, the game history management chip 300 acquires the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, so that the operation execution condition is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. An operation can be executed when the operation execution condition is satisfied.

Further, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 measures the elapsed time after the calculation is executed, determines whether or not the player is playing a game, and determines that the game is not being played. The measurement of the elapsed time may be interrupted during the period of time. Specifically, for example, when there is no winning ball information in the bit of the buffer 302 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 minutes), it is determined that the game is not being played, and measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the game has been restarted and measurement of the elapsed time is restarted when the winning ball information is confirmed in the bit 302 . According to this configuration, the game history information can be calculated only for the period in which the game is actually played.

The elapsed time may be measured by using a timer counter, or by providing an RTC (Real-Time Clock) and using date and time information of the RTC. Further, the configuration may be such that the game history information is calculated at each predetermined time.

<Aspect 2>
In the first embodiment, as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it was set that the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reached 500 pieces. As an execution condition, the configuration may be such that the occurrence of power shutdown is set. Specifically, when the power failure monitoring circuit 86 detects that the power has been cut off, it outputs a signal indicating that the power has been cut off to the game history management chip 300 . The CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 that has received the signal determines that the power has been cut off, and calculates the game history information. In this configuration, the register 304 is composed of a volatile memory, and the entered ball number information is erased. According to such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the game history information based on the number of game balls detected during the period from when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is started to when the power is cut off. can. That is, since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start of the operation of the game hall to the end of the operation, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp whether or not there has been a change in the characteristics of the game history information over the business days of the game hall. It is possible to appropriately judge whether or not As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, if the configuration is provided with a capacitor 87 that supplies power to the game history management chip 300 even after power interruption occurs, a memory 309 for calculating the game history information by the CPU 308 and storing the calculation result of the game history information. can be reliably completed.

<Aspect 3>
In the above-described first embodiment, the main side CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and may be configured to display the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 on the symbol display device 41. . According to this configuration, since the game history information is displayed on the pattern display device 41 of the pachinko machine 10, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 uses a dedicated device (such as the inspection machine 320) to check the game history information. The game history information of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed without using it. It is preferable that the main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309 but cannot change data. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, program bugs, or the like.

<Aspect 4>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x is configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and notifies that the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 does not satisfy a predetermined condition. An LED lamp for this purpose may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a predetermined portion of the main display section 45). For example, when a specific value included in the game history information (for example, character ratio, continuous character ratio, payout ratio (during normal mode)) is no longer within a predetermined range, the LED lamp may be configured to emit light. good. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine can easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range. By checking the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved. In particular, if the nails near the first starting port 33 and the general winning ports (first to third winning ports 32a to 32c) are tampered with, the aforementioned payout ratio (during the normal mode) will be the design of the pachinko machine. Occasionally, it will deviate from the assumed predetermined range (eg, 0.60 to 0.70). Therefore, by configuring the LED lamp to emit light when the payout ratio (during normal mode) is no longer included in a predetermined range (for example, 0.60 to 0.70), the first start port 33 and general winning It can be appropriately determined whether or not the nails near the openings (first to third winning openings 32a to 32c) have been tampered with.

Furthermore, the light emission mode (color) of the LED lamp is determined according to the degree of deviation from a predetermined range of specific values (for example, character ratio, continuous character ratio, payout ratio (in normal mode)) included in the game history information. may be configured to determine the For example, when the character ratio is within a predetermined range (0.70 or less), the first LED lamp emits blue light, and when the character ratio is 0.71 to 0.80, the first LED lamp may emit purple light, and the first LED lamp may emit red light when the character ratio is 0.81 to 1.00. The second LED lamp emits blue light when the continuous character ratio is within a predetermined range (0.60 or less), and the second LED lamp when the continuous character ratio is 0.61 to 0.70. may emit purple light, and the second LED lamp may emit red light when the continuous character ratio is 0.71 to 1.00. Also, when the payout ratio (during normal mode) is within a predetermined range (0.60 to 0.70), the third LED lamp emits blue light, and the payout ratio (during normal mode) is 0.71. 0.80, the third LED lamp emits purple light, and when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is between 0.81 and 1.00, the third LED lamp may emit red light. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp how much the specific value included in the game history information deviates from the predetermined range. It is preferable that the main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309 but cannot change data. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, program bugs, or the like.

<Aspect 5>
In the above-described first embodiment, the calculation data (the number of winning balls data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x). However, the game history management chip 300 is configured to be able to access the prize ball number data storage area and the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 immediately after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A configuration in which the main ROM 63 is accessed to acquire calculation data (ball number data and calculation execution conditions), and the acquired calculation data is stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. may be According to such a configuration, the processing load on the main MPU 62 can be reduced.

<Aspect 6>
In the above-described first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the role ratio. It may be configured to calculate the game history information. With such a configuration, the processing load on the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Details of mode 6 will be described below, centering on differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main controller 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and a storage execution condition storage area.

In the prize ball number data storage area, as in the first embodiment, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter each ball entrance (ball number data) is stored. there is Also, as in the first embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. be done. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The storage execution condition storage area stores a storage execution condition that is a condition for the game history management chip 300 to execute storage processing described later. In mode 6, it is stored as a storage execution condition that the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500 pieces. The stored execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information from the CPU 62x into each ball entry hole, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls entered into each ball entry hole, and a main side ROM 63. A winning ball data storage memory 306 that stores the winning ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63, a storage execution condition storage memory 307a that stores the storage execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, and the overall control of the game history management chip 300 and a memory 309a for storing the number of game balls stored in the register 304 and sequentially storing the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance. The above-described storage processing is processing for storing the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304 in the entered ball number storage memory 309a.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10 . In mode 6, the winning ball number information stored in the winning ball number storage memory 309a and the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. be done.

The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A portion 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

In this aspect 6, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the number of entered balls information and the number of winning balls data to the game history management chip 300. Send to When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the CPU 308 receives the entered ball number information stored in the entered ball number storage memory 309a via the inspection terminal 65, and the winning ball number data storage memory 309a. The winning ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the received ball number information and winning ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320 of mode 6 of the first embodiment.

The contents of the processing in the buffer 302 and the register 304 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, so the description is omitted.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 . In this mode 6, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main side ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the memory for storing number of prize balls data 306 are the same as the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the main ROM 63 .

The storage execution condition storage memory 307 a is a memory for storing the storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10 . When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the stored execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a. Therefore, the contents of the stored execution condition stored in the stored execution condition storage memory 307 a are the same as the contents of the stored execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 .

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a is met. Information on the number of game balls entering the ball opening is stored in the memory 309a for storing the number of entering balls, and the values of the counters of the register 304 are reset to "0". In this mode 6, every time the value of the discharge passage passing number N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500, the CPU 308 determines the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304. The information is stored in the number-of-entered-ball storage memory 309a. In addition, hereinafter, the information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance that is counted while 500 game balls are shot to the game board 30 is also referred to as "short-term entered ball number information group".

The number-of-entered-balls storage memory 309a is a memory for sequentially storing information (short-term number-of-entered-balls information group) related to the number of entered-balls stored in the register 304. In this embodiment, the information is stored even if the power supply is cut off. is configured by a non-volatile memory capable of holding The memory 309a for storing the number of entered balls also stores information on the order in which the group of information on the number of short-term entered balls is written. The short-term entry number information group is stored in an area in which the short-term entry number information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the memory 309a for storing the number of entered balls is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term entered-ball number information group (first-in/first-out method), and the latest short-term entered-ball number information group is always stored. It will be stored.

In this mode 6, the memory 309a for storing the number of game balls entered is short-term entry, which is information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance counted while 500 game balls were shot onto the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 ball number information groups. For example, if game balls are continuously shot for 10 hours in a day, 60,000 game balls will be shot in a day. It is stored in the number-of-entered-ball storage memory 309a. Therefore, the entering ball number storage memory 309a can store the short-term entering ball number information group for the last ten days.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 , it transmits a transmission request command to the game history management chip 300 . Upon receiving the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320 , the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 transmits the short-term entered ball number information group and winning ball number data to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information such as a role ratio based on the short-term entered ball number information group and prize ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

Specifically, in this aspect 6, the inspection machine 320 can calculate one short-term game history information group for one short-term entered ball number information group, like the CPU 308 of the first embodiment. In addition, the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in each of a plurality of short-term entered ball number information groups is added, and long-term game history information is obtained using the added number of entered balls. (long-term game history information group) can be calculated. That is, the inspection machine 320 of aspect 6 not only stores the short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls were shot, but also, for example, 600,000 (approximately It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a long period of time when game balls were shot for 10 days.

In addition, in this aspect 6, the following configuration may be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received short-term entered ball count information group on the display unit 328 . Also, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive each counter value stored in the register 304 and display each received counter value on the display unit 328 .

Further, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main side CPU 62x The configuration may be such that the ball number data is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . According to such a configuration, the memory 306 for storing data on the number of winning balls can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a time interval for executing the storage process is set as the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 . For example, one hour is set as the time interval for executing the memory processing, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the memory processing each time one hour elapses.

Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which occurrence of power cutoff is detected as the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 . Specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit 86 is configured to output to the game history management chip 300 a signal indicating that the power supply has been cut off when it detects the occurrence of the power cutoff. The CPU 308 of 300 may be configured to determine that a power cutoff has occurred and execute storage processing.

Further, in aspect 6, the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, but part or all of the calculation is executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300, and the calculation The game history information, which is the result of , may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320 .

<Aspect 7>
In the above-described first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the role ratio. It may be configured to calculate the game history information. With such a configuration, the processing load on the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Details of mode 7 will be described below, centering on differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main controller 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

In mode 7, the main MPU 62 is provided with an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information to the game history management chip 300 . The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update the date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

A main-side ROM 63 of the main-side MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area. Note that, in mode 7, no calculation start condition storage area is provided.

In the prize ball number data storage area, as in the first embodiment, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter each ball entrance (ball number data) is stored. there is Also, as in the first embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. be done. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information from the CPU 62x into each ball entrance, and a prize ball number data storage memory 306 that stores the prize ball number data acquired from the main side ROM 63. , a CPU 308 that controls the entire game history management chip 300, and a ball entry information storage memory 309b that sequentially stores the entry information of a game ball into each ball entrance stored in the buffer 302. .

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10 . In this mode 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information memory 309b and the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number data memory 306 are stored. The data is sent to inspection machine 320 .

The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A portion 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the winning ball information and the winning ball number data to the game history management chip 300. Send to When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection device 320, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65, and the winning ball number data storage memory 309b. The winning ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information based on the received ball entry information and the winning ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of processing in the game history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320 of mode 7 of the first embodiment.

The contents of the processing in the buffer 302 are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

The ball entry information storage memory 309b is a memory for sequentially storing the ball entry information stored in the buffer 302 and the information regarding the game state when the game ball is entered. It is composed of a non-volatile memory that can hold memory even if the Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the ball entry information and the information about the game state are stored, information on the date and time when the game ball enters each ball entrance is added and stored. The memory 309b for storing information on entering a ball also stores information on the order in which information such as entering a ball is written. Information and the like are stored in an area in which the entry information and the like with the oldest written order are stored. That is, the memory 309b for storing ball entry information is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest entry information (first-in/first-out method), and the latest entry information and the like are always stored. state.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 . In this mode 7, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main side ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the memory for storing number of prize balls data 306 are the same as the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the main ROM 63 . Furthermore, in this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 , the prize number data stored in the prize number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 .

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 sends the game history management chip 300 a transmission request command requesting the transmission of the information on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls. Send to When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the testing machine 320, the CPU 308 receives the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65, the information on the game status, and the date and time information. , and the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the received information, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

Specifically, the inspection machine 320 of aspect 7 calculates game history information (short-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls were shot. In addition to calculating, for example, game history information (long-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entering each ball entrance in a long period of time when 600000 game balls (for about 10 days) were shot It is possible to That is, it is possible to calculate the game history information for any period.

Furthermore, in this aspect 7, since the date and time information (date information and time information) is added to the ball entry information and the like, the inspection machine 320 can detect the range of date and time information added to the received ball entry information and the like. It is also possible to calculate the game history information by designating the range of dates and times for which the game history information is calculated. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can carry out a detailed inspection based on the game history information specifying the date and time range.

In addition, in this aspect 7, the following configuration may be employed.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received ball entry information and the like on the display unit 328 . According to such a configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can also grasp the date and time when the game ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main side CPU 62x The configuration may be such that the ball number data is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . According to such a configuration, the memory 306 for storing data on the number of winning balls can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

Further, in mode 7, the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, but part or all of the calculation is executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300, and the calculation The game history information, which is the result of , may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320 .

<Aspect 8>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes, the main ROM 63 stores the calculation execution conditions or the memory execution conditions, and the game history management chip 300 acquires these conditions from the main ROM 63. , the game history management chip 300 may store these conditions in a non-volatile memory from the beginning. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which inappropriate calculation execution conditions or storage execution conditions are stored in the main ROM 63, and the game history information or the number-of-balls information cannot be stored appropriately. can. For example, an extremely short period (for example, the number N _OUT =5 of passing through the discharge passage) is stored as the calculation execution condition or the storage execution condition, and the calculation result storage memory 309 or the entering ball number storage memory 309a It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which only game history information or ball-in number information for an extremely short period (for example, about one hour) is stored.

<Aspect 9>
In the above-described first embodiment and the above-described other aspects, the function of storing the number of game balls entering each ball entrance, the function of calculating game history information such as the role ratio, and the function of calculating the calculated game history information Although the game history management chip 300 has the function of storing, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have some of these functions. Alternatively, the game history management chip 300 may not be provided, and the main side CPU 62x (the main side MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have all of these functions. According to such a configuration, since it is not necessary to separately provide the game history management chip 300, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. However, according to the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 is provided, the processing load on the main side CPU 62x can be reduced.

<Aspect 10>
In the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 includes some or all of the functions provided by the functional units other than the game history management chip 300 (for example, the inspection machine 320 and the main CPU 62x). Alternatively, some or all of the functions provided by the game history management chip 300 may be provided by functional units other than the game history management chip 300 . For example, if the game history management chip 300 is configured to include some of the functions of the inspection machine 320, the processing load and manufacturing cost of the inspection machine 320 can be further reduced. If the inspection machine 320 has a configuration in which a part thereof is provided, the processing load and manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be further reduced.

<Aspect 11>
In the above-described first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the role item ratio. good too. In the following, details of aspect 11 will be described, focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. This mode 11 is different from the above-described first embodiment (FIG. 5) in that the game history management chip 300 is not provided and that the main side RAM 64 is provided with a winning ball number storage area and a calculation result storage area. different.

The main side CPU 62x updates the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the entered ball number storage area of the main side RAM 64 based on the game ball entry information received from the input/output port 62a. do. Then, when the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is established, the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 Calculation is executed based on the number of game balls entered at each ball entrance stored in the entry number storage area of , and game history information is calculated, and the game history information is stored in the main side RAM 64 as a calculation result. store in the area. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the outline of the processing in the main MPU 62 of aspect 11 of the first embodiment. The main CPU 62x determines whether or not the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is satisfied. Information on the number of game balls entering each ball entrance stored in the cache is stored in the entry number storage area of the main side RAM 64.例文帳に追加In this mode 11, the main side CPU 62x, every time the value of the discharge passage passage number N _OUT stored in the cache of the main side CPU 62x reaches 500, updates information on the number of game balls entering each ball entrance. , is stored in the number-of-entered-ball storage area of the main side RAM 64 . As described above, the information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance counted while the 500 game balls were shot to the game board 30 is also referred to as a "short-term entered ball number information group". .

The number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main-side RAM 64 is an area for sequentially storing information on the number of entered-balls (short-term number-of-entered-balls information group). Information on the order in which the short-term entry number information group is written is also stored in the entry number storage area of the main side RAM 64, and the main side CPU 62x does not have an empty area for writing the short-term entry entry number information group. In this case, the short-term entering number information group to be newly written is stored in the area in which the short-term entering number information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the entry number storage area of the main side RAM 64 is configured so that the oldest short-term entry number information group is overwritten in order (first-in/first-out method), and the most recent short-term entry number information is always stored. The group is stored.

In this mode 11, the number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main-side RAM 64 is information relating to the number of game balls entered into each ball-entering opening counted while 500 game balls were shot onto the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 pieces of information on the number of short-term entered balls. For example, if game balls are continuously shot for 10 hours in a day, 60,000 game balls will be shot in a day. It will be stored in the number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main side RAM 64 . Therefore, the number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main-side RAM 64 can store short-term number-of-entered-balls information groups for the most recent ten days.

Then, the main CPU 62x newly calculates one short-term game history information group for one newly stored short-term entered ball number information group each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. Furthermore, each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main side CPU 62x executes a game to each entrance stored in each of the plurality of short-term entrance-ball number information groups including the newly stored short-term entrance-ball number information group. The number of hit balls is added, and long-term game history information (long-term game history information group) is calculated using the added number of hit balls. That is, the main side CPU 62x of this aspect 11 not only stores the short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls were shot, but also, for example, 600000 (about It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a long period of time when game balls were shot for 10 days. Then, the calculated game history information is stored in the calculation result storage area of the main side RAM 64 .

The calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64 is composed of an area for sequentially storing short-term game history information groups and an area for storing long-term game history information groups. Information about the order in which the short-term gaming history information group was written is also stored in the area for sequentially storing the short-term gaming history information group. (2) stores the newly calculated short-term game history information group in an area in which the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the area for sequentially storing the short-term gaming history information group of the main side RAM 64 is configured so that the oldest short-term gaming history information group is overwritten in order (first-in first-out method), and the most recent short-term gaming history information group is always overwritten. The game history information group is stored. The area for storing the long-term game history information group is overwritten with the newly calculated long-term game history information group each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. That is, in the area for storing the long-term game history information group, the latest long-term game history information group calculated based on a plurality of short-term entered ball number information groups including the latest short-term entered ball number information group is stored. become.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command to the main side CPU 62x. When receiving the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320 , the main CPU 62 x transmits the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information.

Further, in this aspect 11, when the predetermined operation for displaying the game history information on the pattern display device 41 is executed, the game history information stored in the main side RAM 64 is transmitted via the input/output port 62x to the sound emission control. It is output to the device 90 and displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

Further, in this aspect 11, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power supply supplied from the capacitor 87 keeps the short-term entry number information group and the game history information stored in the main side RAM 64 counted. Configured to be retained for days.

According to such a configuration, the main CPU 62x, which is a single processing unit, executes processing for progressing the game such as winning lottery processing and processing for calculating and storing the game history information. Since there is no need to provide a dedicated game history management chip 300 for calculating and storing history information, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, a short-term ball entry number information group, which is information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entry hole counted while 500 game balls were shot onto the game board 30, is stored in the main side RAM 64. 22, the configuration stores the game ball entry information in the same format (for example, the configuration stores the entry information in the format stored in the entry information storage memory 309b in FIG. 22), and In comparison, it is possible to calculate the most recent short-term game history information group and long-term game history information group while greatly reducing the memory capacity required for the main RAM 64 .

Note that the main CPU 62x is not limited to calculating both the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group as the game history information, and may be configured to calculate only one of them.

<Aspect 12>
FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 12 of the first embodiment. The difference from mode 11 (FIG. 23) described above is that the main MPU 62 is provided with a flash memory 64x which is a rewritable non-volatile memory capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. The point is that In this flash memory 64x, the number-of-entered-balls storage area for storing the short-term number-of-entered-balls information group in the above-described mode 11, and the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group in the above-described mode 11 are stored. and a calculation result storage area are provided.

The main side CPU 62x of mode 12 is configured to store the short-term entered ball count information group and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied.

According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced compared to the configuration having the game history management chip 300 . Furthermore, even if the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for a long period of time, the short-term entered ball count information group and the game history information are retained, so that the pachinko machine 10 is kept in any state (for example, the pachinko machine is in any state for a long period of time). 10, the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information are always linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 are managed. , can be inspected.

In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the short-term entry number information group and the game history information in the main side RAM 64, the storage capacity of the main side RAM 64 can be suppressed, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. can do.

<Aspect 13>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the main controller 60 sends the game mode, which is a mode in which the game progress process, which is the process for progressing the game, and the game history information to the inspection machine 320. It is also possible to switch between the inspection mode, which is the output mode, and execute it. The game progress process is a process that is executed based on the detection of a game ball by the entering ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, and includes a winning lottery process, an electronic role opening lottery process, a prize ball payout process, and a main display section. 45 includes a symbol variation display process, an open/close door 36b and an electric accessory 34a open/close process, and the like.

Then, in the inspection mode, even when the game ball passes through the area detected by the entering ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, the game progress processing may not be executed.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection mode is entered, the inspection mode flag for determining whether or not the inspection mode is set in the main controller 60 is turned ON. Then, main controller 60 determines whether or not the inspection mode flag is ON, and when it is determined that the inspection mode flag is ON, does not proceed to the processing flow for executing normal game progress processing. , proceed to the processing flow for inspection mode. As a result, even when the main controller 60 receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected from the entering ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, the main controller 60 performs processing based on the reception of the signal (for example, a random number Processing for acquiring the value of the counter C1, processing for paying out prize balls, processing for transmitting a command to the sound emission control device 90, etc.) are not executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute in the inspection mode a process that is not preferable to be executed in parallel with the game progress process, or a process that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress process. . Further, according to such a configuration, since the game progress processing is not executed in the inspection mode, when developing the program for the processing to be executed in the inspection mode, countermeasures for the case where the game progress processing is executed in parallel are taken. Since there is no need to consider it, the development efficiency of the program for the processing executed in the inspection mode can be greatly improved.

The game history information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration for executing the process of outputting the game history information in parallel with the game progress process is adopted, while the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 is inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 based on the game history information, The content of the game history information may change as the game progress process is executed, and it may become difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the configuration of aspect 13, even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the game history information is output in the inspection mode in which the game progress processing is not executed, so the game history information is output. It is possible to suppress the content of the game history information from changing while the game is being played. As a result, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can smoothly perform the inspection.

The mode of outputting the game history information in the inspection mode is not limited to the mode of outputting the game history information to the inspection machine 320 and displaying it, and other modes may be used. For example, the game history information may be output to the symbol display device 41 and displayed.

Also, the information output in the inspection mode is not limited to the game history information, and may be other information. For example, it may be other information based on the detection of game balls by the game ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, such as game ball entry information and entry ball number information.

<Aspect 14>
Among the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode, during execution of the game progress process in the game mode, the inspection mode is changed from the game mode to the inspection mode. When a predetermined operation (hereinafter also referred to as a "mode switching operation") for shifting to is executed by the inspector, at the timing when the game progress process being executed is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the game The mode may be changed to the inspection mode.

Specifically, for example, when the mode switching operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed during execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, each game progress processing being executed ( winning lottery process, electric role open lottery process, award ball payout process, pattern variation display process on the main display unit 45, opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.) Allow the process to complete. Then, when the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the processing after the processing stage is not executed and the game enters a standby state. Then, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode at the timing when all of the game progress processes being executed have been completed up to a predetermined process stage.

According to such a configuration, the game mode is switched from the game mode to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed regardless of whether the game progressing process being executed has been completed up to the predetermined processing stage. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to the inspection mode, as compared with the configuration that shifts.

For example, provisionally, regardless of whether or not the game progress processing being executed has completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed. In this case, when the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process on the main display part 45 is executed as the game progress process in the game mode, the symbol on the main display part 45 is changed. It is difficult to control the pattern stop timing and the pattern fluctuation time, etc., because the game shifts to the inspection mode in the middle of the variable display. On the other hand, according to the configuration of aspect 14, for example, when the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing is being performed in the game mode, the symbol variation display processing is performed. At the timing when the processing is completed up to the processing stage where the pattern is stopped after the completion, the inspection mode is entered. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbols and the variation time of the symbols.

In addition, when shifting (returning) from the inspection mode to the game mode, it may be configured such that the game progress processing of the remaining processing stages scheduled to be executed before shifting to the inspection mode is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the expected game progress process ends in an incomplete state.

In addition, when the mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, at the timing when all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode. may be According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when restarting the game progress processing.

Further, when the mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, the game execution processing is interrupted, and information enabling the restart of the interrupted game progress processing is stored in the main side RAM 64. It may be configured such that the game mode is changed to the inspection mode at the timing when the data is stored and the storage is completed. According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 quickly shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, so that many pachinko machines 10 can be inspected in a short period of time.

Further, the mode switching operation for shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, but may be another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing a mode switching button. Further, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the same processing as when the mode switching operation is performed may be performed.

<Aspect 15>
Among the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, in the configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode, during the inspection mode, 10 minutes from the time of transition to the inspection mode If the automatic return condition that has passed is established, a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not performed However, it may be configured to shift from the inspection mode to the game mode.

According to such a configuration, when 10 minutes have passed since the shift to the inspection mode, even if the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not executed, the inspection mode Since it is configured to shift to the game mode from , it is possible to reliably prevent the game mode from returning to the game mode without execution of a predetermined operation. For example, even if the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 forgets to execute a predetermined operation after inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 based on the game history information output in the inspection mode, the inspector enters the inspection mode. Since the game mode is restored after 10 minutes have passed since the shift, a situation occurs in which the pachinko machine 10 does not return to the game mode in which the game progress processing can be executed and the player cannot play the game with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

Note that the automatic return condition is not limited to the condition that 10 minutes have elapsed from the time of transition to the inspection mode, and may be another aspect. For example, the condition may be that 5 minutes have passed since the inspection mode was entered, or that 10 minutes have passed since the inspection terminal 65 was removed from the inspection device 320 .

Further, the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, but may be another aspect. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing a mode switching button.

<Aspect 16>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, a RAM clear button for initializing the main side RAM 64 is provided in the main controller 60, and an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button (below, The information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized) when an "erase operation" is executed.

Furthermore, the main control device 60 may switch between the game mode and the test mode to execute. Then, in a state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, for example, in a state during the inspection mode or in a state where the power is turned off as it is after shifting to the inspection mode, while pressing the RAM clear button The information stored in the main RAM 64 may be configured not to be erased even when the erasing operation of pressing the power button is executed.

According to such a configuration, in the state after the shift to the inspection mode and before the shift to the game mode, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main side RAM 64 is executed. However, since the information stored in the main side RAM 64 is not erased, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, an erasing operation is mistakenly executed to shift to the game mode. Even if the information is stored in the wrong place, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

For example, an erasing operation for erasing information stored in the main RAM 64 is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and the mode is shifted between the game mode and the inspection mode. In a configuration in which the operation for this is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, the intention of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button to switch from the inspection mode to the game mode is incorrect. There is a risk that the power button will be pressed while pressing the RAM clear button. However, according to the configuration of aspect 16, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, an erasing operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button by mistake is executed. Even if the information is accidentally erased, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode, the game progress processing being executed in the game mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress processing is returned to the inspection mode. In the case of adopting a configuration in which information for restarting later is stored in the main RAM 64, the intention is to press the power button while pressing the mode switching button to return from the inspection mode to the game mode, but the RAM clear button is accidentally pressed. If the power button is pressed while pressing , the information for restarting the game progress processing is erased, and the game progress processing cannot be restarted after returning to the inspection mode. There is a risk that it will be disadvantageous to On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, the power button is pushed while pushing the RAM clear button by mistake to shift to the game mode. Even if is pressed, the information stored in the main side RAM 64 can be prevented from being erroneously erased, so that the player is prevented from being disadvantaged. can be done.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which memorize|stores game history information in main side RAM64. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated memory for storing the game history information, so the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when the erasing operation is executed, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power ON/OFF state, game mode or inspection mode), the game history stored in the main side RAM 64 Information may not be erased, and only information other than the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 (such as information stored for restarting the game progress process) may be erased (initialized). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress intentional erasure of game history information that deviates from the predetermined defined range.

Note that the erasing operation is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and may be performed in another manner. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the RAM clear button.

<Aspect 17>
Among the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, in a configuration in which the main controller 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode, when the main controller 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode , a game stop command, which is a command indicating that the game progress processing is temporarily stopped by shifting to the inspection mode, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the game progress processing that was being executed is stopped in the inspection mode. It is good also as a structure which stops temporarily. Specifically, for example, when the mode is shifted to the inspection mode while the pattern variation display on the main display section 45 is being executed, the display on the main display section 45 is extinguished, and the pattern variation time on the main display section 45 is counted. to stop. Further, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, it transmits to the sound emission control device 90 a game restart command, which is a command indicating that the game mode is shifted to restart the game progress processing. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

Then, when the game stop command is received, the sound emission control device 90 temporarily stops the effect being executed, and when the game restart command is received thereafter, the effect that has been temporarily stopped is configured to restart. According to such a configuration, even when the main control device 60 shifts between the game mode and the inspection mode, the game progress processing executed by the main control device 60 (for example, the pattern display on the main display section 45 is displayed). variable display process) and the effect controlled by the sound emission control device 90 (for example, the variable display process of the pattern in the pattern display device 41) can be synchronized, and the player feels uncomfortable after shifting to the game mode. can be suppressed.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured not to stop the effect being executed even when the game stop command is received. Specifically, for example, when the game stop command is received during the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41, the layer of the variable display of the symbols is continued while the control of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 is continued. A layer of another image (for example, a black image) is displayed on top of the . However, since the pattern display device 41 continues to control the variable display of the pattern, the variable display of the pattern continues under the layer of the black image. Then, when the pattern fluctuation time in the pattern display device 41 has passed, the pattern fluctuation display ends under the layer of the black image, but the pattern does not stop but sways slightly.

Then, when a game restart command is received from the main controller 60, the black image layer displayed above the pattern variable display layer is removed, and the pattern layer is displayed again. At this time, the main controller 60 shifts (returns) from the inspection mode to the game mode, and restarts the stopped game progress process (variation display of symbols on the main display section 45).

Then, the main controller 60 resumes the variable display of the symbols on the main display section 45, which had stopped counting the variable time, and when the remaining variable time elapses, that is, the variation of the symbols on the main display section 45 is resumed. When it is time to stop, a symbol stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . The sound emission control device 90 that has received the pattern stop command transmits the pattern stop command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 stops the pattern that was displayed in a slightly swaying manner on the pattern display device 41. stop completely.

According to such a configuration, when the main controller 60 is in the inspection mode, the display on the main display section 45 is turned off, and the display on the pattern display device 41 is a black image. Then, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 45, which had stopped counting the variable time, is resumed, and the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are displayed variably. It becomes a mode or a display mode that sways slightly. At the timing when the symbols on the main display portion 45 stop, the symbols on the symbol display device 41 also stop. That is, it is possible to synchronize the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 45 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 . Also, even when a game stop command is received, the control of the effect being executed is not stopped, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of trouble caused by temporarily stopping the control of the effect being executed. As a problem, for example, when the control of the production is resumed from the state where the control of the production is temporarily stopped, the timing of the plurality of productions is shifted when the plurality of productions are being executed. For example, there may be a discrepancy between the moving image displayed on the screen 41 and the sound output from the speaker 46 .

In addition, when adopting a configuration in which the main control device 60 does not transmit the symbol stop command to the sound emission control device 90 even when it is time to stop the variation of the symbols on the main display unit 45, the symbol The variable display of the pattern on the display device 41 continues in a slightly swaying mode, and the variable command transmitted from the main control device 60 after that, or the standby command transmitted when no hold information is stored. is received, the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are stopped.

<Aspect 18>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined time has come. Specifically, for example, at 11:10 pm, the game mode may be shifted to the inspection mode, and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 . According to such a configuration, since the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 at around 11:10 pm after the game hall closes, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected. A person can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 after the game hall is closed without taking time to shift each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

Further, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer. According to such a configuration, for example, all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall are shifted to the inspection mode all at once, and the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on each pattern display device 41. Therefore, an inspector of the pachinko machines 10 can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 without taking the trouble of shifting each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode. becomes.

<Aspect 19>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the game history information may be always displayed on the symbol display device 41 . According to such a configuration, the player or the inspector can always check the game history information. It is possible to notice anomalies. As a result, it is possible to quickly secure the soundness of the game.

<Aspect 20>
In the above-described first embodiment and other aspects described above, a 7-segment display composed of seven light-emitting diodes is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and games stored in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the 7-segment display. It may be configured to display information related to history information. For example, when the main controller 60 shifts from the above-described game mode to the inspection mode, whether or not the accessory ratio and payout ratio (in normal mode) stored in the pachinko machine 10 are within a predetermined range. or may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

More specifically, for example, when the main controller 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, the 7-segment display displays "1" indicating that the character ratio is to be displayed, and then the character ratio is displayed. is within a predetermined range (specifically, when the character ratio is 0.700 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while the character ratio is not within a predetermined range, an error "E" may be displayed on the 7-segment display. After displaying the character ratio, "2" indicating that the continuous character ratio is to be displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and if the continuous character ratio is within a predetermined range (specifically is 0.600 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while if the continuous character ratio is not within the predetermined range , an error "E" may be displayed on the 7-segment display. After the continuous accessory ratio is displayed, "2" indicating that the payout ratio (in normal mode) is to be displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within a predetermined range. (Specifically, when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within the range of 0.60 to 0.70), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, On the other hand, if the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is not within the predetermined range, an error "E" may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the accessory ratio. In addition, since the 7-segment display consumes less power, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the game history information can be inspected using only a small amount of power, such as the capacitors and batteries provided inside the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to

Also, the information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be always displayed on the 7-segment display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the role item ratio without switching from the game mode to the inspection mode. Also, even in the pachinko machine 10 that does not have an inspection mode, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the character ratio. Furthermore, if the 7-segment display is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, the 7-segment display does not come into the player's field of vision, so the player does not like the display of the 7-segment display. It can be suppressed that it becomes impossible to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, when an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine main body 12 supported by the hinge 15 is rotated forward, and the pachinko machine main body 12 is provided on the back side. Since it is only necessary to check the display of the 7-segment display, it is possible to easily and quickly check the game history information such as the character ratio. Instead of the 7-segment display, another display capable of displaying the game history information in a recognizable manner, such as a segment display composed of light-emitting diodes other than seven, may be employed.

<Aspect 21>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the configuration may be such that the sound emission control device 90 calculates the game history information. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x of the main controller 60 transmits a signal including the number of prize balls data stored in the number of prize balls data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the sound emission control device 90 in the initial setting process. , the sound emission control device 90 calculates game history information based on the obtained winning ball number data and the game ball entry information transmitted from the main control device 60, and calculates the calculated game history information may be configured to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

According to such a configuration, the voice emission control device 90 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63, and the voice emission control device 90 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63. Even if the storage position (memory address) of the stored prize ball number data cannot be grasped, the sound emission control device 90 can detect the prize balls stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63. It becomes possible to acquire number data, and to calculate game history information. Further, since the sound emission control device 90 calculates the game history information instead of the main control device 60, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be greatly reduced.

<Aspect 22>
The first embodiment and other aspects described above are applicable not only to the pachinko machine 10 capable of shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode, but also to a gaming machine capable of shifting from the game mode to another mode. . For example, it can be applied to a game machine having a game state display mode that can display the state of processing related to the game, such as the state of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the contents of the stored reservation information. can.

<Aspect 23>
FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In this mode 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the above-described game history information is calculated by the main side CPU 62x. The main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area). The second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for deploying a program for executing processing for calculating and displaying game history information (hereinafter also referred to as game history processing). Then, the main CPU 62x writes information only to the first area of the main RAM 64 when executing the processing related to the progress of the game (processing other than the processing for game history), and when executing the processing for game history , writes information only to the second area of the main RAM 64 .

The first area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit entry detection information storage area, a stack area, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the second area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit buffer area, winning ball tally buffer, calculation buffer, calculation result buffer, stack area, etc., which will be described later. Details of these will be described later.

A game history information display unit 45z is connected to the input/output port 62a. The game history information display section 45z is composed of four 7-segment displays, and is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As will be described later, the game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x is displayed on the game history information display section 45z.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. Also in this aspect, the timer interrupt process is started at a 4 msec cycle, as in the first embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) of the first embodiment described above is that the content of the ball entry detection process shown in step S10606 is different, and that the game history information is used to calculate and display the game history information. Processing is added as the final processing (step S10616) of this timer interrupt processing, and ball entry detection information output processing (step S10207 in FIG. 13) is processing for outputting ball entry detection information to the game history management chip. processing) is omitted, and other processing is the same as the processing described in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) of the first embodiment. The ball entry detection process in step S10606 shown in FIG. 27 and the game history process in step S10616 will be described below.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the ball-entering detection process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In the entering ball detection process of aspect 23, it is determined that there is no information (“0”) in the bit of the input port 62b in the previous (one time before) timer interrupt process, and the bit of the input port 62b is determined in the current timer interrupt process. is determined to have information ("1"), and when it is determined that the bit has information ("1") again in the timer interrupt process, the game is played at the entrance corresponding to the bit. It is determined that the ball has entered the ball. An example of the ball-entering detection process will be described below.

In step S10701, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 (FIG. 14) of the input port 62b (hereinafter also referred to as ball entry determination information) is read. The information for ball entry determination is stored in the first buffer, which is an 8-bit buffer. That is, the first buffer is a buffer for storing the entering ball determination information read from each bit of the input port 62b in the current timer interrupt processing. The second buffer, which will be described later, is an 8-bit buffer that stores the entering ball determination information read from each bit of the input port 62b in the previous timer interrupt process. Moreover, in this aspect, the first buffer and the second buffer are provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 . After executing step S10702, the process advances to step S10703.

In step S10703, 8 is set in the ball entry determination counter provided in the main side RAM 64 . After that, go to 10704. Note that the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter is the same as the ball entry determination counter (step S10401) used in the above-described ball entry determination process (FIG. 16) of the eight ball entrances. bits. Specifically, in this aspect, the numerical information "8" of the entering ball determination counter is the 0th bit D0 of the big winning opening 36a, "7" is the first bit D1 of the first start opening 33, and "6" is The second bit D2 of the second starting hole 34, "5" is the third bit D3 of the first winning hole 32a, "4" is the fourth bit D4 of the second winning hole 32b, and "3" is the third winning hole 32c. , "2" corresponds to the sixth bit D6 of the through gate 35, and "1" corresponds to the seventh bit D7 of the exhaust passage, respectively.

In step S10704, it is determined whether or not there is information for ball entry judgment in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the counter for entry judgment in the second buffer, that is, the information for ball entry judgment stored in the bit is "1". Determine whether or not If it is determined in step S10704 that the information for determination of entering ball is not "1" (S10704: NO), the process proceeds to step S10705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10704 that the entry determination information is "1" (S10704: YES), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processing from steps S10705 to S10709 described later. .

In step S10705, it is determined whether or not there is ball entry judgment information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the entry judgment counter in the first buffer, that is, the entry judgment information stored in the bit is "1". Determine whether or not If it is determined in step S10705 that the information for determination of entering ball is "1" (S10705: YES), the process proceeds to step S10706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10705 that the entry determination information is not "1" (S10705: NO), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processing from steps S10706 to S10709 described later. .

In step S10706, it is checked whether or not the bit corresponding to the numerical value information of the entry judgment counter in the current input port 62b is the entry judgment information, that is, the entry judgment information stored in the bit is "1". It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S10706 that the information for determination of entering ball is "1" (S10706: YES), the process proceeds to step S10707. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10706 that the entry determination information is not "1" (S10706: NO), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processing from steps S10707 to S10709 described later. .

In step S10707, it is determined whether the current numerical information of the ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to which type of ball entrance, and the game ball entered the ball entrance corresponding to the bit. Turn ON the entering ball flag indicating . Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to the large winning opening 36a, it is determined that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 36a. Turn ON the big winning entrance ball flag shown. Also, for example, when it is determined that the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to the second starting port 34, it indicates that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Turn on the second start port entrance flag. After executing step S10707, the process advances to step S10708.

At step S10708, 1 is added to the numerical value information of the winning ball counter corresponding to the ball entrance where the ball entry flag was turned ON at step S10707, that is, the game ball was judged to have entered. Specifically, for example, when the big winning opening ball entry flag is turned on, 1 is added to the 15 prize ball counter, and when the second starting opening ball entry flag is turned on, 3 prize balls are added. Add 1 to the counter. After executing step S10708, the process advances to step S10709.

In step S10709, the entry determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10710, it is determined whether or not the entry determination counter is "0".

If it is determined in step S10710 that the entry determination counter is not "0" (S10710: NO), the bits corresponding to the numerical information of the entry determination counter updated in step S10709 are processed in steps S10704 to S10708. Execute the process. When the processing of steps S10704 to S10708 is executed for the amount of numerical information set in step S10703, the entry determination counter becomes "0", and an affirmative determination is made in step S10710 (S10710: YES). Proceed to S10711.

In step S10711, the 8-bit entry determination information stored in the first buffer is stored (copied) in the second buffer. As a result, the entering ball determination information acquired from the input port 62b in the current timer interrupt process is referred to in the entering ball detection process in the next timer interrupt process. After executing step S10711, the process proceeds to step S10712.

In step S10712, ball entry detection information indicating that the game ball entry has been detected in the ball entry detection processing of the timer interrupt processing this time is stored in the ball entry detection information storage area capable of storing 8-bit information. . Specifically, the ball entry detection information storage area stores "1" when the ball entry flag is ON for each bit corresponding to each of the eight ball entry holes. If the flag is OFF, "0" is stored as the ball entry detection information. For example, as a result of executing the ball entry detection process in the timer interrupt process this time, the big winning hole entry flag and the second starting hole entry flag are ON, and the entry flags corresponding to the other ball entry holes are OFF. In some cases, 8-bit entry detection information of "00000101" is stored in the entry detection information storage area. The 8-bit ball entry detection information stored in the entry detection information storage area is referred to in game history processing, which will be described later. After executing step S10712, the main ball entry detection process ends.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing game history processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in mode 23 of the first embodiment. In this game history process, a process for calculating the role ratio and the continuous role ratio and displaying them on the game history information display section 45z is executed. Specifically, the character ratio is calculated, and the calculated character ratio is displayed on the game history information display section 45z for 5 seconds. After that, the continuous role material ratio is calculated, and the calculated continuous role material ratio is displayed on the game history information display section 45z for 5 seconds. After that, the character ratio is calculated again, and the calculated character ratio is displayed on the game history information display section 45z for 5 seconds. In this way, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are alternately displayed on the game history information display section 45z. An example of specific processing will be described below.

In step S10801, save processing is executed to save the information stored in the register in the main CPU 62x (hereinafter also referred to as register information) to the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64. FIG. In this aspect 23, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), before the game history process (step S10616 in FIG. 27) is executed, the game progress process (FIG. 27), which is a process other than the game history process (steps S10601 to 10615) are executed, the register information relating to the progress of the game is saved to the stack area of the second area of the main side RAM 64 in the saving process. Specifically, the value of the stack pointer in the main CPU 62x (the address value indicating the top of the stack area of the first area) is saved (pushed) to the bottom of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 . Then, an address value indicating the top of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. After that, the register information stored in the registers in the main CPU 62x is sequentially saved in the stack area indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x (the uppermost stack area in the second area of the main RAM 64). Push. By executing this saving process, the address value of the stack area in the second area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, so that the main CPU 62x stores the game history information described below. It becomes possible to execute the processing of calculating and displaying using the second area of the main RAM 64 . After executing step S10801, the process proceeds to step S10802.

In step S10802, it is determined whether or not the abnormality flag stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is ON. The abnormal flag is a flag that is turned ON when the prize ball total value, which will be described later, is an abnormal value. In step S10802, when it is determined that the abnormality flag is ON (S10802: YES), the process proceeds to step S10803, and the prize ball total value is cleared to zero. After that, the process advances to step S10804 to turn off the abnormality flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S10805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is not ON (S10802: NO), the process proceeds to step S10805 without executing the processes of steps S10803 and S10804.

In step S10805, OR processing is performed for each corresponding bit in the entering detection information storage area and the buffer area, and the result (logical sum) of each OR processing is stored (overwritten) in the corresponding bit in the buffer area. The details of this processing will be described later. The buffer area is an area capable of storing the same 8-bit information as the entering detection information storage area, and is provided in the second area of the main side RAM 64 . After executing step S10805, the process advances to step S10806.

In step S10806, it is determined whether or not at least one bit of the eight bits in the buffer area has ball entry detection information (whether or not "1" is stored in one or more bits). . If it is determined in step S10806 that at least one bit of the buffer area contains ball entry detection information (S10806: YES), the process proceeds to step S10807.

In step S10807, a target setting process is executed for setting a bit to be the target of the prize ball tallying process, which will be described later, among the eight bits of the buffer area. In this aspect, in one target setting process, two consecutive bits are set as the target of the winning ball tallying process. Further, as will be described later, when the target setting process is executed in the next or subsequent timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits located next to the two bits set in the previous target setting process is set as the target of the prize ball tallying process. In this way, the two bits targeted for the winning ball tallying process are sequentially shifted to the next. After the last two bits of the eight bits are set as targets for the prize ball counting process, the first two bits are set for the prize ball counting process in the next target setting process. Set as target again. As described above, in this aspect, the order of two bits to be set as the processing targets of the prize ball tallying process among the eight bits of the buffer area is determined in advance. After executing step S10807, the process advances to step S10808 to execute prize ball counting processing corresponding to the set bit. A specific example of the processing from step S10805 to step S10808 will now be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. As described above, the ball entry detection information storage area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the first area of the main side RAM 64, and each bit corresponds to each ball entrance. Specifically, in this aspect, the 0th bit D0 of the ball entry detection information storage area is the big winning opening 36a, the 1st bit D1 is the first starting opening 33, the 2nd bit D2 is the second starting opening 34, the third The bit D3 corresponds to the first winning port 32a, the fourth bit D4 corresponds to the second winning port 32b, the fifth bit D5 corresponds to the third winning port 32c, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. are doing.

The buffer area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the second area of the main side RAM 64, and each bit corresponds to each entrance. Specifically, in this aspect, the 0th bit D0 of the buffer area is the big prize winning port 36a, the 1st bit D1 is the first start port 33, the 2nd bit D2 is the second start port 34, and the 3rd bit D3 is the 1st start port 34. The 1st winning port 32a, the 4th bit D4 correspond to the 2nd winning port 32b, the 5th bit D5 corresponds to the 3rd winning port 32c, the 6th bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the 7th bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. That is, each bit of the buffer area corresponds to each bit of the entering detection information storage area.

In the above-described ball entry detection process (FIG. 28), when it is determined that the game ball has entered the ball entry opening such as the big winning opening 36a, the game ball A bit corresponding to the ball entrance determined to have entered the ball is turned ON (“1”).

FIG. 30A1 shows an example of processing when the n-th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n-th timer interrupt process, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that the game ball has entered the second start hole 34 and the first winning hole 32a, and eight bits of the ball entry detection information storage area is "00001100". Also, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before executing the OR process is "00000000". Therefore, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "00001100". As a result, the ball entry detection information in the ball entry detection information storage area, which is updated each time the timer interrupt process is executed, is set as a processing target of the winning ball tallying process, which will be described later, and is stored in the buffer area until the process is executed. will be held in

In the n-th timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits, the 0th bit D0 and the 1st bit D1, out of the 8 bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed, are counted. set as the processing target of

In the prize ball counting process, when the 0th bit D0 (the bit corresponding to the big winning hole 36a) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", the winning ball is stored in the prize ball counting buffer. "15" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of consecutive prize balls. On the other hand, when the 0th bit D0 is "0", the addition is not performed. It should be noted that, in this aspect, the winning ball tallying buffer is configured as a ring buffer, and configured to store the number of winning balls paid out in the most recent predetermined period. Further, the number of consecutive bonus balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls by continuous bonus action, and is paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the big winning opening 36a. It means the number of game balls.

Furthermore, in the prize ball counting process, when the first bit D1 (the bit corresponding to the first start port 33) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", Add "3" to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the first bit D1 is "0", the addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30A1, the 0th bit D0 is "0" and the 1st bit D1 is also "0", so the addition described above is not performed.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (the 0th bit D0 and the first bit D1) set as objects of the prize ball counting process in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

FIG. 30A2 shows an example of processing when the (n+1)th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+1th timer interrupt process, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 32b, and the value of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area is "00010000". ”. Also, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before executing the OR process is "00001100", which is the same as the buffer area after the winning balls tallying process in the above-described n-th timer interrupt process. Therefore, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "00011100".

In the (n+1)-th timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits, the second bit D2 and the third bit D3, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed, are subjected to the prize ball counting process. set as the processing target of

In the prize ball counting process, when the second bit D2 (the bit corresponding to the second start port 34) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", it is stored in the prize ball counting buffer. Add “3” to the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls. On the other hand, when the second bit D2 is "0", the addition is not performed. In addition, the number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the action of the prize, and the number of prize balls is determined based on the number of game balls entering the second start hole 34 and the big winning hole 36a. It means the number of game balls paid out.

Furthermore, in the prize ball counting process, when the third bit D3 (the bit corresponding to the first winning hole 32a) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the third bit D3 is "0", the addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30(A2), since the second bit D2 is "1", "3" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls. Also, since the third bit D3 is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (the second bit D2 and the third bit D3) set as targets of the prize ball counting process in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

FIG. 30A3 shows an example of processing when the n+2th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+2th timer interrupt process, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the 8-bit value of the ball entry detection information storage area is " 01000000". Also, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before executing the OR process is "00010000", which is the same as the buffer area after the winning balls tallying process in the above-mentioned n+1 timer interrupt process. Therefore, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "01010000".

In the (n+2)th timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits of the 4th bit D4 and the 5th bit D5 out of the 8 bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed are counted. set as the processing target of

In the prize ball counting process, when the fourth bit D4 (the bit corresponding to the second winning hole 32b) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", it is stored in the prize ball counting buffer. Add “10” to the total number of prize balls in the game. On the other hand, when the fourth bit D4 is "0", the addition is not performed.

Furthermore, in the prize ball counting process, when the fifth bit D5 (the bit corresponding to the third winning hole 32c) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the fifth bit D5 is "0", the addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30(A3), since the fourth bit D4 is "1", "10" is added to the total number of winning balls. Also, since the fifth bit D5 is "0", the addition described above is not performed.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (the fourth bit D4 and the fifth bit D5) set as targets of the prize ball counting process in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

FIG. 30A4 shows an example of processing when the (n+3)th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+3-th timer interrupt process, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that a game ball has entered the big winning opening 36a, and the value of the eight bits of the ball entry detection information storage area is "00100001". It has become. Also, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before executing the OR process is "01000000", which is the same as the buffer area after the winning balls tallying process in the above-mentioned n+2 timer interrupt process. Therefore, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "01100001".

In the (n+3)th timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits, 6th bit D6 and 7th bit D7, out of the 8 bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed, are counted. set as the processing target of

However, in this embodiment, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. No prize balls are set in the through gate 35 and the discharge passage. Therefore, in this aspect, when the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7 are set as targets for the prize ball counting process, addition to the total number of prize balls and the like is not performed in the prize ball counting process. After that, the two bits (6th bit D6 and 7th bit D7) that are set as objects of winning ball totalization processing in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

After that, in the (n+4)th timer interrupt process, the 0th bit D0 and the 1st bit D1 are again set as objects to be processed in the prize ball tallying process. Thereafter, similar processing is repeatedly executed. However, as will be described later, if there is no ball entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0"), the target setting process (step S10807) and prize ball tallying process (step S10808) ) is not executed. Further, in this aspect, the state in which there is no entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0") is changed again to the presence of entry detection information in at least one bit in the buffer area. state, and when the target setting process is executed, the two bits set as the processing targets of the prize ball counting process in the previous target setting process are stored and positioned next to the two bits. Two consecutive bits are set as objects to be processed in the winning ball tallying process. In addition, when the two bits set as the processing targets of the prize ball counting processing in the previous target setting processing are the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7, the two bits of the 0th bit D0 and the first bit D1 consecutive bits are set as objects to be processed in the winning ball tallying process.

As described above, in this aspect, in one timer interrupt process, two bits out of eight bits in the buffer area are set as targets for the winning ball counting process, so at least one bit in the buffer area If there is ball-entering detection information, timer interrupt processing is executed four times, and winning ball tally processing is executed for all eight bits of the buffer area.

Returning to the description of FIG. After executing the prize ball tallying process in step S10808, the process proceeds to step S10809.

In step S10809, calculation result display control processing is executed. Specifically, it executes control to display the value (the calculated character ratio or continuous character ratio, which is the calculated game history information) stored in a calculation result buffer, which will be described later, on the game history information display section 45z. After executing step S10809, the process advances to step S10810.

In step S10810, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute arithmetic processing for calculating game history information. Specifically, when a predetermined time (30 minutes in this aspect) has passed since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on, or when 5 seconds have passed since the previous execution of the calculation process, at the timing of executing the calculation process Determine that there is. If it is determined in step S10810 that it is time to execute arithmetic processing (S10810: YES), the process proceeds to step S10811. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10810 that it is not the timing to execute the arithmetic processing (S10810: NO), the process proceeds to step S10813 without executing the processing of steps S10811 and S10812 described later.

In step S10811, the type of game history information calculated in arithmetic processing (task 1 and task 2 to be described later) is set. In this aspect, as the types of game history information to be calculated, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are alternately set. Thereafter, the process advances to step S10812 to designate task 1 as the next task to be executed in task processing (step S10814) described later. After executing step S10812, the process proceeds to step S10813.

In step S10813, the process of returning the register information saved in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 in the saving process described above to the register of the main CPU 62x is executed. Specifically, the saved register information is sequentially transferred from the stack area indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x (the uppermost stack area in the second area of the main RAM 64) to the main CPU 62x. return (pop) to the internal register. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer (the address value indicating the top of the stack area of the first area) saved to the bottom of the stack area of the second area is returned (popped) to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. By executing this return processing, the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x is set to the address value of the stack area in the first area of the main RAM 64, so that the main CPU 62x returns to the first area of the main RAM 64 again. It is possible to execute processing related to the progress of the game using the area. After that, the game history processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S10806. If it is determined in step S10806 that there is no entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0") (S10806: NO), the process proceeds to step S10814.

In step S10814, one of the following three tasks is executed. If no task is specified, task 3 is executed. That is, instead of sequentially executing three tasks in one timer interrupt process, only one of the specified three tasks is executed in one timer interrupt process.

[Task 1]
The dividend and divisor necessary for calculating the game history information set as the calculation object are stored in the calculation buffer. Specifically, for example, when the setting is such that the role ratio is calculated, the number of award balls as the dividend and the total number of award balls as the divisor are stored in the calculation buffer. Further, for example, when the continuous role ratio is set to be calculated, the number of consecutive role prize balls is stored as the dividend, and the total number of prize balls is stored as the divisor in the calculation buffer. After that, task 2 is specified as the next task to be executed when proceeding to the processing of step S10806 in the timer interrupt processing from the next time onward.

[Task 2]
An operation of dividing the dividend stored in the operation buffer by the divisor is executed, and the operation result (quotient) is stored in the operation result buffer. After that, task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when proceeding to the processing of step S10806 in the next timer interrupt processing.

[Task 3]
It is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls (number of prize balls, consecutive prize balls, total number of prize balls) is valid, and if it is determined that it is not valid, an abnormality flag is turned on, and then , task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the timer interrupt process after the next time. On the other hand, if it is determined that the total prize value is valid, the abnormality flag is not turned ON, and task 3 is designated as the next task. Here, the case where the total number of prize balls is not valid means that the number of prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, the number of continuous prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, or the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls. This is the case where there is a contradiction in the aggregate value of prize balls, such as when the number of prize balls exceeds the number of prize balls.

After executing the designated task out of the three tasks described above, the process proceeds to step S10809 described above, and the value (character ratio or continuous character ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer is displayed in the game history information display unit. 45z is displayed. In this mode, the information indicating the type of the game history information is displayed on the first 7-segment display which constitutes the game history information display section 45z, and the value of the game history information is displayed on the remaining three 7-segment displays. do.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect described above, the processing related to the progress of the game included in the timer interrupt processing (processing other than the processing for game history) is the time until the next timer interrupt processing is started (4 msec in this aspect). ) is programmed to finish in a shorter time than ), but the time required to finish the processing related to the progress of the game changes according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the game history process is a process unrelated to the progress of the game, in one timer interrupt process, the process related to the progress of the game is executed rather than the time for executing the game history process. It is preferable to prioritize the time for In addition, even if it is not configured to continuously execute various processes included in the game history process (for example, prize ball counting process and arithmetic process for each bit, etc.) in one timer interrupt process, the game can be completed. Progression is not affected. Therefore, in this aspect, even if the execution time of the processing related to the progress of the game reaches the maximum according to the progress of the game, the execution time of the timer interrupt processing once (execution of the processing related to the progress of the game) Various processes included in the game history process are divided into a plurality of processes so that the time + the execution time of the game history process) is shorter than the time until the next timer interrupt process is started. In one timer interrupt process, the divided processes are executed, and various processes are completed by executing the timer interrupt process a plurality of times. As a result, according to this aspect, it is possible to execute the game history process while securing the time required to execute the process related to the progress of the game in one timer interrupt process.

Specifically, according to this aspect, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, one of the two tasks (task 1 and task 2) constituting the arithmetic process that is the process of calculating the game history information can be executed, and by executing the timer interrupt processing twice, all of the two tasks that make up the arithmetic processing are executed. The time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to the configuration that does. As a result, the time required for one execution of timer interrupt processing becomes longer than 4 msec, which is the interval at which the execution of timer interrupt processing is started (hereinafter also referred to as the interrupt interval), and the timer interrupt processing is reduced to 4 msec. It is possible to suppress the fact that it becomes impossible to execute at intervals.

Further, according to this aspect, the series of processes whose execution order is determined is divided into a plurality of tasks, and in one execution of the timer interrupt process, after executing one of the plurality of tasks, , the task to be executed next to the one task in question is specified, so when incorporated into timer interrupt processing, the time required to execute the timer interrupt processing becomes longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt processing. Even processing can be incorporated into timer interrupt processing and executed. Specifically, according to this aspect, when the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information is incorporated into the timer interrupt processing, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes longer than 4 msec. Also in the gaming machine with the configuration, the arithmetic processing can be executed by incorporating it into the timer interrupt processing which is executed at intervals of 4 msec. In addition, the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information does not affect the progress of the game even if all tasks are not executed in one execution of the timer interrupt processing. The required time can be allocated to the execution time of other processes included in the timer interrupt process, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

Further, according to this aspect, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, two bits out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area are set as targets for the processing of the prize ball tallying process. It is possible to execute the prize ball counting process for the bit to be processed, and by executing the timer interrupt process multiple times, the prize ball counting process is executed for all the eight bits D0 to D7 of the buffer area. do. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to the configuration in which the prize ball counting process is executed for all eight bits D0 to D7 in one execution of the timer interrupt process. can be done. As a result, the time required to execute timer interrupt processing becomes longer than 4 msec, which is the interval at which timer interrupt processing is started, and timer interrupt processing cannot be executed at intervals of 4 msec. can be suppressed.

Further, according to this aspect, when setting two bits out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area as objects to be processed in the prize ball tallying process, they are set in a predetermined order. It is possible to simplify the process without executing the process of determining which bit is to be set as the process target of the sphere tallying process, and as a result, it is possible to improve the processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for executing the determination process.

In addition, according to this aspect, the main side CPU 62x detects two game balls continuously entering one ball entrance in a time shorter than the shortest interval (about 18 msec in this aspect). Since the timer interrupt process can be executed four times, the prize ball tally process (the Step S10808) can be executed. Therefore, even if two game balls enter the same ball entrance in succession, the entrance of the first game ball is detected at the ball entrance. The updated ball entry detection information is set as a processing target, and prize ball counting processing is executed, and then the remaining ball entry detection information corresponding to other ball entrances is set as a processing target, and prize ball counting processing is performed. is executed, it is possible to finish the winning ball tallying process for all the ball entry detection information before the entry of the next second game ball is detected at the ball entry hole. can. That is, at the time when the ball entry detection information updated based on the detection of the second game ball entry at the ball entrance is set as the processing target and the winning ball tallying process is executed, The winning ball tallying process for the ball entry detection information updated based on the detection of the entry of the first game ball at the ball entrance has already been completed. Effects of this configuration will be described below.

As in this aspect, in a configuration that adopts binary information of "0" or "1" indicating whether or not a game ball has entered as the ball entry detection information, if a second ball enters a certain ball entrance, Ball entry detection updated from "0" to "1" based on the entry of the first game ball into the ball entrance until the entry of the game ball is detected at the ball entrance If the winning ball totaling process is not executed for the information, when the entry of the second game ball is detected at the entrance, the entrance detection information corresponding to the entrance is still " 1”, and the entry of the second game ball cannot be recorded. That is, in spite of the fact that two game balls have entered the ball entrance in succession, the ball entry detection information corresponding to the ball entrance indicates that one game ball has entered the ball entrance. It cannot be distinguished from the situation in which only balls have entered, and in the winning ball counting process, it is treated as a situation in which one game ball has entered the ball entrance. As a result, it may not be possible to record the correct number of prize balls in the prize ball counting process.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, when the entry of the second game ball is detected in the entry hole, the update is already made by the entry of the first game ball into the entry hole. Prize ball tallying processing is executed for the entered ball detection information, and since the entered ball detection information is "0", the entry of the second game ball can be recorded. . As a result, it is possible to accurately record the number of prize balls in the prize ball counting process. As a result, it is possible to adopt binary information of "0" or "1" indicating whether or not a game ball has entered as the ball entry detection information, while ensuring accuracy in the winning ball tallying process. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the entering ball detection information and improve the processing speed of the winning ball tallying process.

In addition, according to this aspect, the game history processing (FIG. 29) stores the information held by the register in the main side CPU 62x, which is information for executing the processing related to the progress of the game, in the second area of the main side RAM 64. (step S10801 in FIG. 29) of writing to the stack area of , when the main CPU 62x starts the game history process, the register in the main CPU 62x registers the game that was being executed immediately before the start of the game history process. When holding information for executing processing related to the progress of , the information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 . Therefore, the information for executing the processing related to the progress of the game held in the register in the main CPU 62x is erased, and when the game history processing is executed by the main CPU 62x, the register for the game history is stored in the register in the main CPU 62x. Information for execution of processing can be held.

Further, according to this aspect, the game history processing (FIG. 29) is a return processing (FIG. 29 , step S10813), when the game history process is terminated, the information for executing the process relating to the progress of the game is held again in the register of the main side CPU 62x, and is executed before the game history process is started. It is possible to re-execute the processing related to the progress of the game from the state immediately before the start of the processing for game history.

Further, according to this aspect, since the saving process and the returning process are included in the game history process, even if only the program for executing the game history process is deleted, the process related to the progress of the game other than the game history process can be performed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which is executed without problems. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the game history process without altering the program for executing the process related to the progress of the game other than the game history process. As a result, for example, when improving the game machine so that the game history process is not executed, or when developing a new game machine that does not execute the game history process based on the game machine, the design change can be minimized. It is possible to limit

Further, according to this aspect, the main CPU 62x writes information in the game history process only to the second area of the main RAM 64, so that the information is written to the first area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to prevent the information from being rewritten due to the execution of the game history process. Therefore, in the configuration in which the processing related to the progress of the game is executed using the first area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to suppress the influence of the processing related to the progress of the game by the processing for the game history. .

Further, according to this aspect, the main CPU 62x writes information in the processing related to the progress of the game only to the first area of the main RAM 64, so that the information written to the second area of the main RAM 64 is It is possible to prevent the information stored in the game from being rewritten due to the execution of the processing related to the progress of the game. Therefore, in the configuration in which the game history process is executed using the second area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from affecting the game history process.

Further, according to this aspect, since the 8-bit buffer area capable of storing the ball entry detection information is provided, the ball entry detection information in the ball entry detection information storage area, which is updated each time the timer interrupt process is executed, It can be held until it is set as a processing target of the prize ball tallying process and the process is executed.

Further, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 29, when executing the prize ball tallying process (step S10808) in one timer interrupt process, arithmetic processing (task 1 and task 2 of step S10814) is executed. do not. That is, in one timer interrupt process, both the prize ball tallying process and the arithmetic process are not executed, so that the time required for executing one timer interrupt process can be shortened. As a result, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process becomes longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt process, preventing the timer interrupt process from being executed at the interrupt interval. be able to. Furthermore, according to this aspect, the winning ball counting process in which the game ball entry state and the processing load are correlated is executed with priority over the arithmetic processing in which the game ball entry state and the processing load are not correlated. , suppresses the interval between the execution of the prize ball counting process from increasing, and as a result, the prize ball total value, which is the processing result of the prize ball counting process, cannot accurately reflect the ball entry state of the game ball. can be suppressed. Specifically, for example, the next game ball enters the ball entrance corresponding to the bit before the winning ball tallying process is executed for the bit in the buffer area, resulting in two It is possible to suppress treating the entry of a game ball as the entry of one game ball.

Further, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is determined that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing (step S10810: YES) when the prize ball tallying process (step S10808) is not executed, Since the arithmetic processing (task 1 and task 2 of step S10814) is executed, neither the prize ball totalization processing nor the arithmetic processing is executed in one timer interrupt processing. In addition, it is possible to execute other processing independent of these processing (in this aspect, the processing of determining the validity of the total value of prize balls (task 3 of step S10814)). Furthermore, in this aspect, when either the prize ball tallying process or the arithmetic process is executed in one timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is configured to be shorter than the interrupt interval. Therefore, in a situation where neither the prize ball counting process nor the calculation process is executed, by executing a process with a shorter processing time than the prize ball counting process and the calculation process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process becomes longer than the interrupt interval.

Further, according to this aspect, although it is possible to calculate two types of game history information, namely, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, in the arithmetic processing in one timer interrupt process, the role ratio Alternatively, since processing for calculating either one of the continuous accessory ratios is executed, compared to a configuration that executes processing for calculating two types of game history information in arithmetic processing in one timer interrupt processing , the time required for one execution of timer interrupt processing can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the interrupt interval and the timer interrupt process not being able to be executed at the predetermined interrupt interval. . In addition, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main side RAM 64 for temporarily storing the calculated game history information.

Further, according to this aspect, in the ball entry detection process, when the ball entry determination information of the bit corresponding to each ball entrance becomes "0"→"1"→"1", Since it is determined that the game ball has entered the ball entrance, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of erroneous detection due to electrical noise, as in the first embodiment described above.

<Aspect 24>
In the above aspect 23, as the game history information, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are calculated. It can be configured to calculate. For example, it may be configured to calculate the ball-out rate, the payout rate, and the like shown in the first embodiment. In this case, the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been shot to the game board 30) is also totaled in the same manner as the above-described prize ball counting process (step S10808 in FIG. 29). do it.

<Aspect 25>
In the game history processing of aspect 23 (FIG. 29), when it is determined that the abnormality flag is ON in step S10802, the total prize ball value is cleared (step S10803), and the abnormality flag is turned OFF (step S10804) However, when the abnormality flag is turned ON for a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, information indicating that an abnormality has occurred may be displayed on the game history information display section 45z.

<Aspect 26>
In Aspect 23 above, the arithmetic processing, which is the processing for calculating the gaming history information, is divided into a plurality of tasks and executed. The processing can be divided into a plurality of tasks and executed. For example, in a configuration in which the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 sets the content of the effect to be executed, the processing for setting the content of the effect may be divided into a plurality of tasks and executed.

<Aspect 27>
In Aspect 23 above, two of the eight bits in the buffer area are set as objects to be processed in the winning ball tallying process, but the number of bits to be processed is two. is not limited to, and other numbers may be used. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which five bits are set as objects to be processed in one timer interrupt process. Also, in one timer interrupt process, a configuration may be adopted in which all eight bits are set as targets to be processed. In addition, it is possible to set only predetermined bits (for example, 6 bits from 0th bit D0 to 5th bit D5 in which prize balls are set) out of the 8 bits to be processed. In timer interrupt processing, a configuration may be adopted in which two bits are set as objects to be processed.

<Aspect 28>
In the above aspect 23, the first area of the main RAM 64 is allocated as the memory area for executing the processing related to the progress of the game, and the second area of the main RAM 64 is allocated as the memory area for executing the game history processing. However, the second area of the main RAM 64 may be allocated as a storage area for executing other processes than the game history process.

Also, the main RAM 64 may be divided into three or more areas. Then, for example, the third area, which is the third area of the main RAM 64, may be allocated as a storage area for executing processing for outputting the game history information to the outside.

<Aspect 29>
In the above aspect 23, the game history process includes the save process and the return process, but the process other than the game history process may include the save process and the return process. For example, the processing that is scheduled to be deleted when the design of the game machine is changed may include the save processing and the return processing.

<Aspect 30>
In the above aspect 23, the game history process is incorporated in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), but the game history process may be incorporated in the main process (FIG. 12). Further, in the above aspect 23, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) incorporates the game history process as a process different from the process related to the progress of the game. Alternatively, processing other than the game history processing may be incorporated into the timer interrupt processing. For example, a configuration in which transmission processing for transmitting information regarding the state of a game to a hall computer installed in a game hall at a predetermined timing is incorporated in timer interrupt processing as processing different from processing regarding the progress of the game. may be Also, various processes different from the processes related to the progress of the game may be incorporated into the main process.

<Aspect 31>
In the above aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the game history processing (FIG. 29) to calculate the game history information. 300, the main CPU 62x may execute the game history process (FIG. 29) to calculate the game history information. According to such a configuration, since the game history information can be calculated in two systems, it is possible to calculate the game history information even if a problem occurs in one system. In addition, if the game history information calculated from the two systems is compared and it is configured to notify (display) whether or not these values match, the reliability and accuracy of the calculated game history information can be confirmed. It becomes possible to

Further, the game history management chip 300 may be configured to calculate the game history information by executing the game history processing (FIG. 29) described in the above aspect 23. FIG.

<Aspect 32>
In step S10805 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of aspect 23, the information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area (FIG. 30) provided in the first area of the main side RAM 64 is ORed. Although it is configured to read out in the processing, instead of this configuration, an 8-bit storage area (hereinafter also referred to as a second entrance detection information storage area) corresponding to the entrance detection information storage area is stored in the second storage area of the main side RAM 64. The information stored in each bit of the entering ball detection information storage area provided in the first area of the main side RAM 64 is provided in the second area of the main side RAM 64. A configuration may be adopted in which the data is duplicated (copied) to the second ball entry detection information storage area, and the duplicated information of each bit is read out in the OR processing of step S10805.

Also, the entering detection information storage area may be provided in the second area of the main side RAM 64 .

<Aspect 33>
In step S10814 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of aspect 23, if the arithmetic processing (task 1 or task 2) for calculating game history information is not executed, the total value of prize balls included in task 3 is valid. Although the processing for determining the validity is always executed, the processing for determining the validity of the total value of prize balls may be executed only once each time the game history information is newly calculated. Specifically, for example, after judging the effectiveness of the total value of prize balls in task 3, the judged flag indicating that the judgment has been completed is turned ON, and next time task 3 is executed, the judged flag is ON, the processing for determining the validity of the prize ball total value is not executed. Then, in task 1 that is executed again, the determined flag may be turned off. According to such a configuration, the validity of the total value of prize balls, which is the basis for calculating the game history information, is determined to ensure the validity of the game history information, and one game history process is completed. It is possible to further shorten the processing time required to.

<Aspect 34>
In step S10810 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of aspect 23, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) has passed since the pachinko machine 10 was turned on, or when 5 seconds have passed since the previous execution of the arithmetic processing In this case, it is determined that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing, and the game history information is calculated. It is also possible to determine that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing, and thereafter determine that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing each time five seconds have elapsed since the previous execution of the arithmetic processing. In this configuration, until the total number of prize balls in the total value of prize balls reaches 60,000, the calculated game history information is displayed on the game history information display section 45z with blinking display, and the total number of prize balls reaches 60,000. After reaching it, it may be configured such that it is illuminated when the calculated game history information is displayed on the game history information display section 45z. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not a sufficient amount of statistical data has been accumulated as the prize ball total value that is the basis for calculating the displayed game history information. Instead of the total number of prize balls, the total number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been shot to the game board 30) may be used as a reference, and the flashing display may be switched to the lighting display. .

<Aspect 35>
In step S10807 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of aspect 23, the plurality of processing target candidates for the prize ball counting processing are fixed in advance as 8 bits in the buffer area. 8 bits are divided into 2 groups of 4 each, one of the 2 groups is selected as a plurality of processing target candidates for prize ball counting processing, and 4 bits belonging to the selected group are selected. It is also possible to set two bits out of the above as objects to be processed in the winning ball tallying process. However, as in the above aspect 23, if a plurality of processing target candidates for the prize ball tallying process are fixed in advance as 8 bits in the buffer area, one of the two groups is selected. Since there is no need to execute the processing to be performed, the processing can be simplified, and as a result, the processing speed can be improved. Furthermore, the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for selecting one of the two groups can be reduced.

<Aspect 36>
In the game history process of aspect 23 (FIG. 29), the task (various processes) to be executed in the game history process in the current timer interrupt process is determined based on the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is started. It is good also as a structure which determines a number or a classification. According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is started to execute the task.

<Aspect 37>
FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 37 of the first embodiment. In this mode 37, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main side CPU 62x is configured to execute the process for calculating and displaying the above-described game history information (game history process). In addition, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (first area and second area) in the same manner as in the above-described aspect 23 (FIG. 26). It is used as an area for storing programs for executing processing, various flags (high-probability mode flag, high-frequency support mode flag, etc.), etc. The second area of the main side RAM 64 is used for calculating and displaying game history information. It is used as an area for storing the program for executing the processing (game history processing) and various numerical information (game history information such as the above-mentioned total value of prize balls, information on the number of balls entered, and the ratio of accessories), etc. . Then, the main CPU 62x writes information to the first area of the main RAM 64 when executing the processing related to the progress of the game (processing other than the game history processing), as in the above-described aspect 23 (FIG. 26). When the game history processing is executed, the information is written only to the second area of the main side RAM 64.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31, the main side MPU 62 of the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect includes a flash memory which is a non-volatile memory that is rewritable and capable of retaining memory even if the power supply is cut off. A memory 64x is provided. In this embodiment, a NAND type flash memory is used as the flash memory 64x, but a NOR type flash memory may be used. In the game history processing, the main CPU 62x of this aspect executes processing of writing various numerical information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 into the flash memory 64x at a predetermined timing. Specifically, for example, each time the total number of prize balls in the total prize ball value reaches 500, the main CPU 62x executes a process of writing various prize ball total values and the like into the flash memory 64x. In other words, the flash memory 64x stores various types of numerical information (game history information such as winning ball total value, number of entered balls information, and accessory ratio) acquired based on the execution of the game.

As described above, according to the configuration of this aspect, various numerical information (game history information such as total value of winning balls, information on the number of balls entered, and ratio of accessories) obtained based on the execution of the game is stored in the flash memory 64x. Since it is stored, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for a long period of time, these various numerical information can be retained. For example, even if power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 for a long period of time during the distribution process, the pachinko machine 10 is normally playing games based on various numerical information stored in the flash memory 64x. It is possible to check whether or not

<Aspect 38>
In the above aspect 37, a depressible flash memory clear button is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and when the flash memory clear button is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the flash memory 64x stores It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the information (game history information such as total value of winning balls, information on the number of entered balls, and the ratio of accessories, etc.) is erased.

Specifically, for example, an erasing IC chip capable of executing erasing processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and during the period when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the erasing processing IC chip is provided. A Hi level signal is input to the input terminal of the IC chip. The erasure processing IC chip is configured to execute erasure processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the high level signal input to the input terminal continues for 10 seconds. . According to such a configuration, compared to a configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by the processing of the main CPU 62x, the processing related to the execution of the game of the main CPU 62x and the operation of the main RAM 64 are affected. can be suppressed while erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x.

Furthermore, the flash memory clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space where traces of opening remain. Specifically, for example, the flash memory clear button is stored inside the circuit board box to which a sealing seal that leaves traces of opening is attached, and cannot be pressed unless the sealing seal is peeled off to open the circuit board box. It is good also as a structure which cannot be performed.

According to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. The board box of the pachinko machine 10 is left with traces of opening. That is, based on whether or not there remains a trace of opening the board box of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the board box of the pachinko machine 10 was opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x was erased. It is possible to grasp whether or not

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nail is illegally modified), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the character ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized remodeling. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the flash memory 64x, thereby checking the pachinko machine 10. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, a person (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") who desires to prevent an inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been unauthorizedly modified by erasing the relevant information. may exist.

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. Then, since a trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the information is erased to cover up the illegality. It leaves a trail of possibilities. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal remodeling of the pachinko machine 10, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motivation to illegally remodel the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game. can be improved.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only a person who has a legitimate reason for wanting to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as a "legitimate person") can erase the traces of the opening of the board box. By constructing a distribution system that allows the pachinko machine 10 to be distributed smoothly, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring soundness of the game. Specifically, for example, by constructing a distribution system in which only the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 as a legitimate person can affix a new seal, the soundness of the game can be secured and the pachinko machine It is possible to promote the smooth distribution of 10.

The configuration for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the operation of the flash memory clear button is not limited to the configuration described above, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (eg, 5 times) within a predetermined time (eg, 10 seconds), the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be erased. Alternatively, for example, in a configuration without an erase processing IC chip, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the flash memory clear button is pressed, and the flash memory clear button continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). may be configured to execute an erase program for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x to erase the information when the button is pressed.

In addition, the flash memory clear button is not limited to being stored inside the board box to which the sealing seal is attached, but is stored inside a space where traces of opening (also called traces of opening or opening and closing) remain. Other configurations may be used as long as the configuration is such that the For example, the flash memory clear button is housed inside the space covered by the lid member, and the flash memory clear button cannot be operated unless at least part of the lid member is destroyed to open the space. It is good also as a structure which cannot do. According to such a configuration, since the lid member must be destroyed to open the space in order to operate the flash memory clear button, the flash memory is stored when the flash memory clear button is pressed. The destroyed lid member remains as a trace of the opening of the closed space. Further, for example, the flash memory clear button is connected to a plurality of case bodies (for example, a box-shaped case body and a lid-shaped case body capable of sealing the open portion of the box-shaped case body) at a connecting portion (crimped portion). When separating the plurality of case bodies that make up the board box, a predetermined part of the joint (crimped part) is required to be destroyed. good too. According to such a configuration, in order to operate the flash memory clear button, it is necessary to break a predetermined portion of the connecting portion (crimped portion) to separate the plurality of case bodies to open the circuit board box. When the flash memory clear button is pressed, a joint portion (crimped portion) where a predetermined portion is destroyed remains as a trace that the base box was opened. Furthermore, after the flash memory clear button is configured to be housed inside the board box that is joined by the above-described joining portion (crimped portion), the adhesive layer remains on the adhesive object when it is peeled off, so that it is peeled off. A configuration may be adopted in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of the event is pasted so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. According to such a configuration, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, in addition to the traces of the opening of the substrate box, that is, the joint portion (crimped portion) where the predetermined portion is destroyed, the sealing seal is peeled off or The opening of the board box leaves traces such as the sealing seal being cut at the boundary between the case bodies.

<Aspect 39>
In the above mode 37, the inspection terminal 65 provided in the main MPU 62 is connected to the inspection machine 320 (FIG. 10) for inspecting whether or not the various game history information is within the normal range. , when a predetermined signal (for example, an erasure instruction command) is received from the inspection machine 320, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (game history information such as the total number of prize balls, information on the number of entered balls, and the ratio of accessories, etc.) ) may be deleted.

Specifically, for example, similarly to the above-described mode 38, an erasing IC chip capable of executing erasing processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided and connected to the inspection terminal 65. When an erasure command is transmitted from the inspection machine 320, the erasure command is input to the input terminal of the IC chip for erasure processing. Then, the erasing IC chip executes an erasing process for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the erasure instruction command received from the input terminal.

According to the configuration of this aspect, the erasing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the erasure instruction command received from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. , the person who has the inspection machine 320 can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. That is, it becomes possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the inspection machine 320 .

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nail is illegally modified), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the character ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized remodeling. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the pachinko machine 10 connects, for example, the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and checks the information stored in the flash memory 64x. By confirming with 320, it is possible to discover illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 concerned. Therefore, there is a possibility that there is a person (illegal person) who desires to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegitimately modified by erasing the information. .

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the inspection machine 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 is required. If the person who can have the inspection machine 320 is restricted, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. It is possible to suppress the generation of the motivation to perform a remodeling, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated from one transaction to another. There may be a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the memory 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for legitimate reasons (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) and the inspector mentioned above have the inspection machine 320. By constructing a distribution system that allows this, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring soundness of the game.

Furthermore, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure. It is good also as a structure.

Specifically, for example, the erasing IC chip described above receives a transmission start signal indicating that transmission of information stored in the flash memory 64x is to be started based on reception of an erasing instruction command from the input terminal. Send the command to the inspection machine 320 . Upon receiving the transmission start command, the inspection device 320 shifts to a receivable mode in which information can be received, and transmits a receivable command indicating the receivable mode to the erasing IC chip. The erasing IC chip that has received the receivable command starts transmitting the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Then, when the transmission of the information is completed, the erasing IC chip transmits a transmission completion command to the inspection machine 320 . Upon receiving the transmission completion command, the inspection device 320 checks whether or not there is an error such as data loss in the received information, and if there is no error, transmits the reception completion command to the IC chip for erasing processing. The erasure processing IC chip executes erasure processing for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the receipt of the reception completion command.

According to such a configuration, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the will of the person who has the inspection machine 320, the information is erased from the flash memory 64x. Since the information that has been deleted remains in the inspection machine 320 , the information can be confirmed by the inspection machine 320 .

The configuration for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320 is not limited to the configuration described above, and various other configurations may be employed. can. For example, in a configuration without an erase processing IC chip, the main side CPU 62x monitors whether or not an erase instruction command is received from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, and receives the erase instruction command. Alternatively, the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be erased by executing an erase program for erasing the information. Further, when receiving an erasure command from the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x transmits information stored in the flash memory 64x to the inspection machine 320, and then executes an erasure program for erasing the information. may be configured to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

In this embodiment, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased using the inspection machine 320 for inspecting whether or not the various game history information is within a normal range. The configuration is not limited to the configuration using the device 320, and the configuration may be such that a dedicated terminal for deleting information stored in the flash memory 64x is used to delete the information.

<Aspect 40>
In the above aspect 37, the flash memory clear button stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 Information stored in the flash memory 64x (game history information such as prize ball count, number of balls entered, and role ratio) is erased when a signal (for example, an erase command) is received. good too.

Specifically, for example, similar to the above-described aspect 38, an erasing IC chip capable of executing erasing processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed, A Hi level signal is input to the input terminal of the erasing IC chip during the period. The erasing IC chip is capable of erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the high level signal input to the input terminal continues for 10 seconds. Switch to execution standby mode. When the erasure processing IC chip receives an erasure instruction command from the inspection machine 320 in this erasure processing execution standby mode, it executes erasure processing for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

According to the configuration of this aspect, since the flash memory clear button is stored inside the board box where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, When the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the flash memory clear button is operated, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 leaves a trace of opening. Further, the erasing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on receiving a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, so it has the inspection machine 320. A person can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Therefore, there is a possibility that the board box of the pachinko machine 10 has been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x has been erased based on whether or not the board box of the pachinko machine 10 remains open. In addition, it is possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the inspection machine 320 .

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nail is illegally modified), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the character ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized remodeling. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the pachinko machine 10 connects, for example, the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and checks the information stored in the flash memory 64x. By confirming with 320, it is possible to discover illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 concerned. Therefore, there is a possibility that there is a person (illegal person) who desires to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegitimately modified by erasing the information. .

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the inspection machine 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 is required. By limiting who can own the inspection machine 320, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized person possesses the inspection machine 320, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 can be opened and the flash memory You have to press the clear button. Then, since a trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, there is a possibility that the information was erased for fraudulent concealment. It will leave traces. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person, and it is possible to make it difficult to conceal the illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to further suppress the generation of the motivation to illegally modify the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated from one transaction to another. There may be a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the memory 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only those who want to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for legitimate reasons (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) and the inspector mentioned above have the inspection machine 320. In addition, if a distribution system is constructed in which only legitimate persons can erase the traces of opening of the board box, smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted while ensuring soundness of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, as a configuration for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the flash memory clear button receiving a predetermined operation and receiving a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320, the above configuration is used. Without being limited thereto, various other configurations can be adopted. For example, when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the erase processing IC chip may shift to the above-described erase processing execution standby mode. Further, for example, when an erasure instruction command is received from the inspection machine 320, the erasure processing IC chip shifts to the erasure processing execution standby mode described above, and in the erasure processing execution standby mode, the flash memory clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the configuration may be such that when the button is continuously pressed, an erasing process of erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed. Alternatively, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the erasing IC chip is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes a function equivalent to that of the erasing IC chip to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

Further, as in the case 39 above, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is connected to the inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure. It may be configured to be transmitted to the inspection machine 320 that has been processed. According to such a configuration, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the will of the person who has the inspection machine 320, the information is erased from the flash memory 64x. Since the information that has been deleted remains in the inspection machine 320 , the information can be confirmed by the inspection machine 320 .

<Aspect 41>
In the above aspect 37, an operation panel for accepting input operation of authentication information (for example, a password) and a display for displaying the input authentication information are provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and authentication information input by the operation panel and Information stored in the flash memory 64x when the authentication information individually set for the pachinko machine 10 matches (game history information such as prize ball total value, number of balls entered, and role ratio) may be deleted.

Specifically, for example, similarly to the above-described mode 38, an erasing IC chip capable of executing erasing processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and input via the operation panel Authentication information is configured to be input to an input terminal of an IC chip for erasing processing. Then, the erasing IC chip determines whether or not the authentication information input from the operation panel matches the authentication information stored in the ROM of the erasing IC chip. If so, an erasing process is executed to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

According to the configuration of this aspect, the IC chip for erasing processing is stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the authentication information accepted by the accepting means matches the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10. Since the information is erased, a person who has the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a person who knows the password set in the pachinko machine 10) is stored in the flash memory 64x. Information can be erased. That is, it becomes possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 .

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, illegally modified nails), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the character item ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized remodeling. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the pachinko machine 10 checks the information stored in the flash memory 64x to find out whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. can be discovered. For this reason, there is a possibility that there are persons (unauthorized persons) who want to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been unauthorizedly modified by erasing the information. .

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 concerned. By limiting who can have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the generation of motivation to illegally modify the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated from one transaction to another. There may be a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the memory 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for legitimate reasons (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) are set in the pachinko machine 10. If a distribution system capable of having authentication information is constructed, it becomes possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring soundness of the game.

The authentication information input to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x is not limited to the personal identification number, and various authentication information can be adopted. For example, as authentication information, authentication characters (passwords, passphrases) that are combinations of multiple character strings, barcodes with specific patterns, passwords generated according to predetermined rules (for example, one-time passwords), specific people biometric authentication information (fingerprint, iris, vein pattern, etc.) or the like can be adopted.

<Aspect 42>
In the above aspect 37, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the information stored in the main side RAM 64 Among them, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game including the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is erased and stored in the second area. (Information acquired based on the executed game, such as the total number of winning balls, information on the number of entered balls, and game history information such as the ratio of accessories) may not be deleted.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed, and determines whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. If it is determined that it is, among the information stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the information stored in the second area is not erased. Configuration.

According to such a configuration, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) is stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to erase information (information used to control game execution). Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the game execution, or when the game hall starts or ends the operation, the information used for the control of the game execution is erased and the control of the game machine is stopped. There is a desire to perform initialization, but not to erase information obtained based on the played game. According to the configuration of this aspect, by operating the RAM clear button, the information used for controlling the execution of the game is erased while the information acquired based on the executed game is left, and the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Control initialization can be performed.

Furthermore, in addition to the RAM clear button described above, a second RAM clear button for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 may be deleted when an operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is performed during the state of .

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the second RAM clear button has been pressed, and the state in which the second RAM clear button has been pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined that the information has been stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is deleted.

According to such a configuration, the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 that cannot be erased by operating the RAM clear button (information acquired based on the executed game) is It can be erased by operating the second clear button.

Furthermore, the second RAM clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space where traces of opening remain. Specifically, for example, the second RAM clear button is stored inside the board box to which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of unsealing is attached, and cannot be pressed unless the sealing seal is peeled off to open the board box. It is good also as a structure which cannot be performed.

According to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. There is a trace of opening in the board box of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加That is, the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 is erased by opening the board box of the pachinko machine 10 based on whether the board box of the pachinko machine 10 remains open. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nail is illegally modified), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 The information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (for example, the character ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized remodeling. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the pachinko machine 10 confirms the information stored in the flash memory 64x and the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64. By doing so, it is possible to discover illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, there is a possibility that there is a person (illegal person) who desires to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegitimately modified by erasing the information. .

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. . Then, since a trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64, the information can be used for unauthorized concealment. It leaves traces that it may have been erased because of Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal remodeling applied to the pachinko machine 10, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motivation to perform illegal remodeling to the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game. can be improved.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the second area of the RAM 64 before distributing it. Therefore, only a person (legitimate person) who desires to erase the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 for a legitimate reason can erase the traces of the opening of the board box. By constructing a distribution system, it becomes possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring soundness of the game. Specifically, for example, by constructing a distribution system in which only the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 as a legitimate person can affix a new seal, the soundness of the game can be secured and the pachinko machine It is possible to promote the smooth distribution of 10.

As the configuration of the space in which the trace of opening (also referred to as the trace of opening or the trace of opening and closing) remains, various configurations described in the above aspect 38 can be adopted.

<Aspect 43>
In the above aspect 37, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and the RAM within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) When the clear button is not pressed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is executed while pressing the RAM clear button, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Alternatively, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is not erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed, and determines whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear button is pressed, it is monitored whether or not the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined that the RAM clear button has not been pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. However, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM clear button has been pressed down for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. First, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to select information to be erased from among the information stored in the main RAM 64 by performing different operations on the RAM clear button. That is, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified because the information to be erased can be selected without providing another operation unit (such as a button) for selecting the information to be erased. can be achieved.

Specifically, for example, information used for controlling game execution (stored in the first area of the main side RAM 64 information) is erased and the control of the game machine is to be initialized, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed and a predetermined time (for example, 10 Seconds), the RAM clear button is not pressed, and information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64) is erased and the game is played. If you want to circulate a new machine, perform an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and keep the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). ) should be continued. In this way, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select information to be erased from among the information stored in the main RAM 64 .

It should be noted that during execution of the erasing process of the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the above-described game history process cannot be executed, so the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance, There is a possibility that errors may occur in the tally of prize balls, etc. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that does not start playing the game until the erasing process is completed (for example, a configuration that suppresses the shooting of the game ball), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the error.

Further, in this aspect, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If not, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and it is determined whether or not the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. If it is determined that the information is valid, the information may not be deleted, and if it is determined that the information is not valid, the information may be deleted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started while the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid. The information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid, for example, when the number of prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls. This is the case where there is a contradiction in the total value of prize balls, such as when the number of prize balls is exceeded, or when the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the number of prize balls.

<Aspect 44>
In the above aspect 37, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and the RAM within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) When the clear button is not pressed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is executed while pressing the RAM clear button, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). In addition to erasing the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may also be erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed, and determines whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. If so, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased. Further, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and determines whether the RAM clear button has been pressed within the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined that there is no such state, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x also erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. .

According to such a configuration, as in the above-described mode 43, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, the information to be erased is selected from among the information stored in the main RAM 64. It becomes possible to Furthermore, by performing an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and keeping the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main side RAM 64 It is possible to erase both the information stored in the first area and the information stored in the second area.

It should be noted that during execution of the erasing process of the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the above-described game history process cannot be executed, so the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance, There is a possibility that an error may occur in the total value of prize balls. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that does not start playing the game until the erasing process is completed (for example, a configuration that suppresses the shooting of the game ball), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the error.

<Aspect 45>
In the above aspect 37, when the operation of pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is executed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. , the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be deleted.

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and determines that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If determined, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 among the information stored in the main RAM 64 is deleted.

According to such a configuration, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 can be stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 without providing a separate operation unit (for example, a button, etc.) for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 . It is possible to erase existing information. During the erasing process of the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the game history process described above cannot be executed temporarily. There is a possibility that errors may occur in the number of entered balls and the total value of awarded balls. Therefore, if the game execution is temporarily stopped during the period from the start to the end of the execution of the erasing process (for example, the game ball is temporarily prevented from being shot), the occurrence of the error can be suppressed. can do.

<Aspect 46>
In each of the above aspects, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (the total number of prize balls, information on the number of balls entered, game history information such as the ratio of accessories, etc., acquired based on the executed game) information) is always erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag) is always erased. may be configured. That is, when a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is executed, or when a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is executed. When a signal is received from another device (for example, the inspection machine 320), not only is the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 erased, but also the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is deleted. The information may also be always erased.

According to such a configuration, even though the information acquired based on the executed game (the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64) is erased, it is still used to control the execution of the game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the information stored in the main RAM 64 (the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is not erased and is maintained as it is. Specifically, for example, the information acquired based on the played game is collateral information for judging the fairness of the game played in the pachinko machine 10, so the collateral information is erased, the information used for controlling the execution of the game in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag indicating the game state) is erased and the pachinko machine 10 is preferably initialized. According to the configuration of this aspect, when erasing the information acquired based on the executed game (the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64), the information used for controlling the execution of the game ( Information stored in the first area of the main side RAM 64) is erased, so that the information used to control the execution of the game is erased even though the information that serves as collateral for judging the fairness of the game is erased. (Information stored in the first area of the main side RAM 64) is not erased, so that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is.

Also, for example, even if the information acquired based on the executed game (the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased, the information used to control the execution of the game. (Information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is maintained as it is without being erased. ) is erased, the pachinko machine 10 may maintain the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode as they are. In this case, when a game is executed on the pachinko machine 10, the game is started in the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode in a state in which the amount of information acquired based on the executed game is not sufficient as statistical data. , there is a high possibility that the game history information such as the role ratio will be calculated as a biased value. Therefore, as in this aspect, based on the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 (the total number of prize balls, the number of balls entered, the game history information such as the ratio of accessories, etc.) acquired information) is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag) is always erased. By adopting a configuration in which the information is deleted, it is possible to prevent the game history information such as the role product ratio from being calculated as a biased value.

Various operation modes can be adopted as the operation for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 . For example, while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). An operation, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the second RAM clear button separately provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko game while pressing both the RAM clear button and the second RAM clear button An operation such as turning on the power of the machine 10 can be employed.

Furthermore, for example, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, among the information stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (including the high-probability mode flag, the high-frequency support mode flag, etc.) is used to control the execution of the game. information stored in the second area) is erased, and the information stored in the second area (information obtained based on the executed game, such as game history information such as total value of winning balls, information on the number of entered balls, and the ratio of accessories). may be configured so as not to be erased.

According to such a configuration, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) is stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to erase information (information used to control game execution). Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of game execution, or at the start or end of the operation of the game hall, the information used to control the execution of the game is erased and the control of the game machine is stopped. There is a desire to perform initialization, but not to erase information obtained based on the played game. According to the configuration of this aspect, by operating the RAM clear button, the information used for controlling the execution of the game is erased while the information acquired based on the executed game is left, and the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Control initialization can be performed.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of this aspect. The main CPU 62x executes this main process when the power is turned on.

In step S10901, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is being pressed. If it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S10901: YES), the process advances to step S10903 to determine whether the RAM clear button continues to be pressed. judge.

If it is determined in step S10903 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed down, that is, if it is determined that the RAM clear button has not been pressed (step S10903: NO), step S10904 , erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, and executes the initial setting process for the first area. After that, the process proceeds to step S10908, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10903 that the RAM clear button has been pressed down (step S10903: YES), the flow advances to step S10905 to keep the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). ) to determine whether it continues.

If it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (step S10905: NO), the process returns to step S10903, and the RAM clear button continues to be pressed. Determine whether or not On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (step S10905: YES), the process proceeds to step S10906. That is, if the RAM clear button has not been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the process proceeds to step S10904, and if the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), a Then, the process proceeds to step S10906.

In step S10906, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the initial setting process for the first area is executed. After that, the process advances to step S10907 to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 and execute the initialization process of the second area. After that, the process proceeds to step S10908, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, for example, whether the total number of prize balls (the number of prize balls, the number of continuous prize balls, and the total number of prize balls), which is the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, is valid. determine whether or not Here, the case where the total number of prize balls is not valid means that the number of prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, the number of continuous prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, or the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls. This is the case where there is a contradiction in the aggregate value of prize balls, such as when the number of prize balls exceeds the number of prize balls. If it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid (step S10902: NO), the process proceeds to steps S10906 and S10907 described above, and the first The information stored in the area and the information stored in the second area are erased. After that, the process proceeds to step S10908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid (step S10902: YES), the process proceeds directly to step S10908.

In step S10908, interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. After executing step S10908, the remaining processing of steps S10909 to S10912 is performed. Since the residual processing in steps S10909 to S10912 is the same as the residual processing in steps S10104 to S10107 in FIG. 12 described above, description thereof will be omitted.

According to the processing flow described above, based on the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (total value of prize balls, information on the number of balls entered, game history information such as the ratio of accessories, etc.) When executing the process (process of step S10906) for erasing the information (the information acquired by the above), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is always executed. Information used to control the execution of the game) is deleted (processing of step S10907).

<Aspect 47>
In each of the above modes, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (the information obtained based on the executed game, such as the total number of prize balls, information on the number of balls entered, and game history information such as the ratio of accessories) is erased. The information stored in the first area of the main side RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) may be erased when the game is played. . That is, when an operation for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed, or when a predetermined signal for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is sent to another device (for example, the inspection machine 320). ), not only the information stored in the flash memory 64x but also the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 may be erased.

According to such a configuration, although the information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the flash memory 64x) is erased, the information used for controlling the execution of the game (main The information stored in the first area of the side RAM 64 can be prevented from being maintained as it is without being erased. Specifically, for example, the information acquired based on the played game is collateral information for judging the fairness of the game played in the pachinko machine 10, so the collateral information is erased, the information used for controlling the execution of the game in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag indicating the game state) is erased and the pachinko machine 10 is preferably initialized. According to this configuration, when erasing the information (information stored in the flash memory 64x) acquired based on the executed game, the information used for controlling the execution of the game (the first information stored in the main RAM 64) is erased. 1 area) is not erased, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is.

Furthermore, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game) is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main side RAM 64 (high-probability mode In addition to information used to control the execution of games such as flags and high-frequency support mode flags), information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) It may be configured to be erased.

<Aspect 48>
In some of the aspects described above, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (first area and second area), and the first area of the main RAM 64 is used for executing processes related to game progress. It is used as an area for storing programs and various flags (high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc.). processing) and various numerical information (game history information such as the above-mentioned tally value of winning balls, information on the number of balls entered, and the ratio of accessories). Instead of the configuration, a RAM that functions as the first area of the main RAM 64 (RAM used for game progress processing) and a RAM that functions as the second area of the main RAM 64 (RAM used for game history processing). and may be provided separately.

<Aspect 49>
Among the above aspects, in the aspect including the flash memory 64x, the flash memory 64x may be stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (for example, a substrate box with a sealing seal attached). . According to such a configuration, in order to illegally alter the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 must be opened. A trace of opening will remain in the box. That is, based on whether the board box of the pachinko machine 10 remains open or not, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x is illegally altered. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized alterations made to the information stored in the flash memory 64x, and furthermore, the motivation to make unauthorized alterations to the information stored in the flash memory 64x is generated. can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

As the configuration of the space in which the trace of opening (also referred to as the trace of opening or the trace of opening and closing) remains, various configurations described in the above aspect 38 can be adopted.

<Aspect 50>
FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing part of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 50. As shown in FIG. The main MPU 62 of this mode is provided with an entering ball detection IC 62c between the input/output port 62a and the main CPU 62x.

The ball entry detection IC 62c is electrically connected to each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h via an input/output port 62a, and detects each ball entrance based on the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h. to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the main side CPU 62x and the inspection terminal. output to inspection machine 320 connected to 65; A specific description will be given below.

Each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h for detecting the entry of a game ball into each ball entrance is electrically connected to the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7, which are eight input bits provided in the input port 62b. , and the eight input bits D0 to D7 are electrically connected to the eight input bits R0 to R7 provided in the entrance detection IC 62c, respectively. In this mode, each of the eight input bits R0 to R7 provided in the ball detection IC 62c is always input with a Lo level signal, and when a game ball enters the ball entrance, the ball is entered. When detected by the detecting sensor, the signal input to the input bit corresponding to the entering ball detecting sensor among the eight input bits R0 to R7 rises from Lo level to Hi level.

The ball-entering IC 62c determines whether or not a game ball enters each ball-entering port based on signals output from the ball-entering detection sensors 44a to 44h. In this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c monitors eight input bits R0 to R7 corresponding to the eight ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, respectively. When the rising edge from the level to the Hi level is detected, it is determined that the game ball has entered the ball entrance corresponding to the input bit. However, when a rising edge is detected but the high level state does not continue for a predetermined period, or when a rising edge is detected but the rising edge occurs within a predetermined interval from the most recent falling edge. , it is highly likely that the detected rising edge is noise, so it is determined that the game ball has not entered the ball entrance corresponding to the input bit. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as a method of determining whether or not a game ball has entered each ball entrance. method may be adopted.

The ball entry detection IC 62c determines whether or not a game ball has entered each ball entrance at predetermined intervals, and transmits the ball entry information, which is information indicating the result of the determination, to the main side by serial transmission communication. It is output to the CPU 62 x and also to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 . In this aspect, since eight ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are provided, the ball entry detection IC 62c provides ball entry information (8 bits of ball entry information) is output every predetermined period (every 4 ms). Specifically, the entering ball detection IC 62c always outputs a Lo level signal, and outputs a 50 μs Hi level signal as a start bit every predetermined period (every 4 ms) in which the presence or absence of an entering ball is determined. After that, a Hi level signal (ball entered) or a Lo level signal (ball not entered) for 50 μs corresponding to the presence or absence of a game ball entering each of the eight ball entrances is output for 8 bits, and finally. , a 50 μs Lo level signal is output as a stop bit.

Upon receiving the ball entry information from the ball entry detection IC 62c, the main CPU 62x performs processing related to the progress of the game, such as the above-described win lottery and payout of prize balls, based on the received ball entry information of each ball entrance. Execute. In addition, the main CPU 62x executes the above-described game history processing (FIG. 29), and also executes processing related to calculation and display of game history information such as ball payout ratio (total), character ratio, and consecutive character ratio. do. Then, the main CPU 62x causes the flash memory 64x to store the numerical information used in the process of calculating the game history information and the calculated game history information.

Next, the inspection using the inspection machine 320 capable of receiving the ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c will be described.

In this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the player or the inspector operates the operation handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10 to play the game balls. By using the inspection machine 320 while the board 30 is made to shoot and the game is normally executed, it is inspected whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is executing a valid game during this inspection period. do. A specific description will be given below.

The inspection machine 320 has a ball entry information reception mode, which is a mode for receiving entry information of a game ball in each ball entry hole from the ball entry detection IC 62c, and a ball entry information reception mode, which is a mode for receiving entry ball information of a game ball in each ball entry hole, and a ball entry information receiving mode that is a mode for receiving entry ball information of a game ball in each ball entry hole, and a ball entry information reception mode that is a mode for receiving the ball entry information of the game ball in each ball entry hole, and a ball entry information reception mode that is a mode in which the ball entry information is received from the ball entry detection IC 62c. A ball entry information setting mode for setting ball entry information, which is information related to the number of balls, and game history information for calculating the above-described various game history information based on the received ball entry information and the set ball entry information. Calculation mode can be executed.

When inspecting whether or not a valid game is being played in the pachinko machine 10, the inspector connects the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and the inspection machine 320 is operated to shift the inspection machine 320 to the above-described incoming ball information reception mode. A player or an inspector operates the operating handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10 to be inspected to shoot game balls onto the game board 30, and continues the execution of the game as usual.

The inspection machine 320 outputs a Hi level signal to the output permission signal line 329 b in the connection cable 329 when shifting to the entering ball information reception mode. The output permission signal line 329b is electrically connected via the inspection terminal 65 to the output permission determination bit 62d of the entrance detection IC 62c. The ball entry detection IC 62c determines whether or not a Hi level signal is input to the output permission determination bit 62d, and determines that a Hi level signal is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Only during this period, the above-described ball entry information is output to the information transmission signal line 329a in the connection cable 329 via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission communication.

In the ball entry information reception mode, the inspection machine 320 receives ball entry information corresponding to eight ball entry holes at predetermined intervals, and measures (counts) the number of game balls entering each ball entry hole. memorize. Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display information indicating the number of game balls entering each ball entrance that has been measured (counted). That is, every time a game player or an inspector executes a game and a game ball enters each ball entrance, the information indicating the number of balls entered corresponding to each ball entrance displayed on the display unit 328 is set to 1. is added. As a result, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 displays the number of game balls that have entered each ball entrance after shifting to the ball entry information reception mode.

After a sufficient inspection period (for example, about 10 hours) has passed, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the ball entry information reception mode. Switch to setting mode.

When shifting to the entrance information setting mode, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display an input screen for allowing the inspector to input the type of entrance and the number of winning balls for each entrance. In this aspect, the inspection machine 320 receives 8-bit ball entry information every predetermined period in the ball entry information reception mode. An input screen for inputting the type of ball entrance and the number of prize balls is displayed. The type of the ball entrance means the type of the ball entrance provided with each ball detection sensor 44a to 44h such as the first start hole 33, the second start hole 34, the big winning hole 36a, and the discharge passage. , The number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the entrance.

The inspector operates the operation unit 327 to input ball entrance information (ball entrance type information and winning ball information) into the inspection machine 320 for each ball entrance. Specifically, the inspector obtains information (type information) indicating which numbered bit in the ball-entering information output from the ball-entering detection IC 62c corresponds to which type of ball-entering hole (type information), Information on how many prize balls should be set in the ball entrance (price ball number information) is grasped from the specifications, instructions, etc. of the pachinko machine 10, and the grasped information is sent to the inspection machine 320. input. When the inspector completes inputting the entrance information, the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information calculation mode.

When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information calculation mode, the number of game balls entering each ball entrance measured (counted) in the ball entrance information receiving mode and the type set in the ball entrance information setting mode are counted. Based on the information and information on the number of winning balls, the above-described various game history information is calculated. For example, the inspection machine 320 calculates the above-described ball output rate (total), character ratio, and continuous character ratio. When the calculation of the various game history information is completed, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated various game history information.

The inspector can confirm whether or not a valid game has been played during the inspection period by confirming various game history information displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 .

As described above, according to this aspect, the entering ball detection IC 62c outputs the entering ball information to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main side CPU 62x. 320 will be able to receive incoming ball information that has not been affected by the main side CPU 62x.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which ball entry information is output to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 via the main side CPU 62x without adopting the configuration of this aspect, the main side If the CPU 62x has a problem or is illegally remodeled, there is a possibility that the ball entry information output to the inspection machine 320 will be affected by the problem or the illegal remodeling. In addition, there is a possibility that the reliability of the gaming history information calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x may be low due to malfunctions or unauthorized modification of the main CPU 62x.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the entering ball detection IC 62c outputs entering ball information to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main CPU 62x. Even if there is a problem or unauthorized modification is made to the inspection machine 320, the ball entry information output to the inspection machine 320 is not affected by the problem or unauthorized modification. As a result, the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 can execute processing based on the ball entry information that is not affected by the defect or unauthorized modification. Specifically, the inspection machine 320 can calculate the game history information based on the ball entry information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the pachinko machine 10 may suspect that the main CPU 62x is malfunctioning or has been illegally remodeled. Even if the reliability of the information is low, the inspection machine 320 can check the game history information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

Further, according to this aspect, the entering ball detection IC 62c outputs the entering ball information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entrances to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 by a serial transmission method. Therefore, for example, compared to the case of adopting a configuration for outputting ball entry information by a parallel transmission method, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the inspection terminal 65 for passing the entry information to the inspection machine 320, It is possible to simplify the configuration of the inspection machine 320 that receives the entered ball information.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which the ball entry information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry holes is output by a parallel transmission method, the inspection terminal 65 is arranged in accordance with the number of the plurality of ball entry holes. Corresponding outputs (eg bits for output) must be provided. Similarly, the inspection machine 320 must have input units (for example, bits for input) corresponding to the number of the plurality of entrances. In addition, since the number of ball entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10 differs for each type (for each model) of the pachinko machine 10, the inspection machine 320 provided with a different number of input units for each type (for each model) of the pachinko machine 10. need to prepare.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the entering ball detection IC 62c serially transmits the entering ball information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entrances to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. Therefore, the inspection terminal 65 has at least one output unit capable of outputting ball entry information by a serial transmission method regardless of the number of ball entry holes provided in the pachinko machine 10. And it is sufficient. Therefore, the configuration of the inspection terminal 65 can be simplified. Similarly, if the inspection machine 320 is configured to have at least one input unit capable of inputting the ball entry information output by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry holes provided in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the configuration of the inspection machine 320 can be simplified. Furthermore, even if the inspection machine 320 is connected to the pachinko machine 10 having different numbers of ball entrances, the inspection machine 320 can input the ball entry information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entrances by the serial transmission method. can do. That is, the inspection machine 320 can be used for other pachinko machines 10 having different numbers of ball entrances. As a result, the versatility of the inspection machine 320 can be enhanced.

Further, according to this aspect, the entering-ball detecting IC 62c transmits the entering-ball information to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 only when a Hi-level signal is received from the inspection machine 320. Since the information is output, it is possible to prevent the ball-entering information of the pachinko machine 10 from being output to the outside except when the Hi-level signal is being received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 from being analyzed and abused by a malicious person.

<Aspect 51>
In the above aspect 50, in the entrance information setting mode of the inspection machine 320, the inspection person operates the operation unit 327 to manually input the entrance information to the inspection machine 320. Instead of this configuration, The inspection machine 320 may receive and set the ball entrance information from the pachinko machine 10 .

Specifically, for example, when the inspection machine 320 shifts to the entrance information setting mode, a signal requesting transmission of entrance information (transmission of entrance information) is sent via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65 request command) to the entrance detection IC 62c. Upon receiving the signal (ball entrance information transmission request command), the ball entrance detection IC 62 c transmits the ball entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329 . The inspection machine 320 sets the ball entrance information received from the ball entrance detection IC 62c for each ball entrance, and ends the ball entrance information setting mode.

As described above, according to this aspect, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information (ball number information and type information) to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. , It is possible to save the trouble of manually inputting the ball entrance information (the number of prize balls information and type information) to the inspection machine 320, and to prevent the wrong ball entrance information (the number of prize balls information and type information) can be suppressed from being input. As a result, the inspection machine 320 can calculate the game history information based on the ball entry information and the accurate ball entry information (the number of winning balls and the type information).

In this aspect, the ball entrance detection IC 62c is configured to transmit the ball entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 on the basis of receiving a predetermined signal (ball entrance information transmission request command). However, instead of this configuration, the entering ball detection IC 62c is triggered by the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 being connected to the inspection terminal 65 (that is, when the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65). When it is detected that the terminal 65 has been connected, the entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . According to this configuration, the inspection machine 320 can quickly execute a process that requires the entrance information after the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 .

In this embodiment, the ball entrance information is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 by the ball entrance detection IC 62c. The configuration may be such that the information is read and transmitted to the inspection machine 320 .

<Aspect 52>
In the above aspect 50, the entering-ball detection IC 62c serially transmits the entering-ball information via the inspection terminal 65 only during a period in which it is determined that a Hi-level signal is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Although it is configured to output by communication of the transmission method, another configuration may be adopted instead of this configuration. For example, the entering ball detection IC 62c serially transmits the entering ball information via the inspection terminal 65 only during the period when it is determined that a signal of a predetermined pattern is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. may be configured to output by communication of Further, for example, when the entering ball detection IC 62c determines that a signal of a predetermined pattern is input to the output permission determination bit 62d, the entering ball information is output through the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission communication. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Further, for example, when a predetermined switch is provided in the inspection terminal 65 and it is determined that the predetermined switch is pressed down with a cable terminal having a predetermined shape connected to the inspection terminal 65, The ball-entering detection IC 62c may be configured to output the ball-entering information through the inspection terminal 65 by communication of a serial transmission method.

<Aspect 53>
In aspects 50 to 52 described above, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to shift to the entrance information reception mode after completing the setting of the entrance information in the entrance information setting mode. According to such a configuration, the type of each ball entrance is set at the time of transition to the ball entrance information reception mode. It is possible to display the type and number of balls entered.

As a result, the inspector can grasp which type of ball entrance the game ball has entered, even during the ball entry information reception mode. Furthermore, the inspector confirms that the information displayed on the display unit 328 (the type and the number of balls entered into each ball entrance) matches the number of game balls that have actually entered each ball entrance visually confirmed. By confirming whether or not they match, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c is authentic.

<Aspect 54>
In the aspects 50 to 53 described above, the inspection machine 320 detects the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 when the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10. may be shifted to the game history information reception mode, which is a mode for receiving .

Specifically, for example, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, it shifts to the game history information reception mode. When shifting to the game history information reception mode, the inspection machine 320 transmits a signal requesting transmission of game history information (game history information transmission request command) to the main side CPU 62x via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. . The main CPU 62x that has received the signal (game history information transmission request command) transmits the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. Send to When the game history information received from the main CPU 62x is stored in the RAM 326, the inspection machine 320 terminates the game history information reception mode and shifts to the entrance information setting mode.

When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the entrance information setting mode, the main side CPU 62x transmits a signal requesting transmission of entrance information (entrance information transmission request command) via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. Send to The main CPU 62 x that has received the signal (entrance information transmission request command) transmits the entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329 . After setting the entrance information received from the main side CPU 62x for each entrance, the inspection machine 320 ends the entrance information setting mode and shifts to the entrance information reception mode.

When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the ball entry information reception mode, it receives the ball entry information corresponding to the eight ball entry holes every predetermined period, and measures (counts) the number of game balls entering each ball entry hole. ) to memorize. Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display information indicating the number of game balls entering each ball entrance that has been measured (counted). That is, every time the player or the inspector executes a game and a game ball enters each ball entrance, the information indicating the number of balls entered corresponding to each ball entrance displayed on the display unit 328 is set to 1. is added. As a result, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 displays the number of game balls that have entered each ball entrance after shifting to the ball entry information reception mode.

After a sufficient inspection period (for example, about 10 hours) has passed, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the incoming ball information reception mode, and the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information. mode.

When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information calculation mode, the number of game balls entering each ball entrance measured (counted) in the ball entrance information receiving mode and the type set in the ball entrance information setting mode are counted. Based on the information and information on the number of winning balls, the above-described various game history information is calculated. For example, the inspection machine 320 calculates the above-described ball output rate (total), character ratio, and continuous character ratio. When the calculation of various game history information is completed, the inspection machine 320 receives various game history information calculated in the game history information calculation mode and various game history information received in the game history information reception mode (stored in the flash memory 64x). (game history information that has been played) is displayed on the display unit 328 . That is, on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320, the game history for the inspection period during which the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 was connected to the pachinko machine 10 and the ball entry information was received in the ball entry information reception mode is displayed. Information and game history information for a past predetermined period calculated by the main CPU 62x of the pachinko machine 10 and stored in the flash memory 64x are displayed.

As described above, according to this aspect, the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 receives the game history information (hereinafter also referred to as first game history information) stored in the flash memory 64x. It is possible to display Also, the inspection machine 320 can execute processing based on the received ball entry information during the inspection period. Specifically, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information based on the ball entry information received during a predetermined inspection period connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and calculates the game history information (hereinafter referred to as the game history information). , also referred to as second game history information). Therefore, for example, an inspector who inspects the pachinko machine 10 is based on the first game history information stored in the flash memory 64x provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the entering ball information received by the inspection machine 320 during a predetermined inspection period. It becomes possible to compare with the second game history information.

Here, if the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 are changed due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10, or due to unauthorized modification (for example, modification of nails, etc.), The first game history information stored in the flash memory 64x provided in the pachinko machine 10 (game history information calculated by the main side CPU 62x based on the ball entry information in the past predetermined period), and the inspection machine 320 performs a predetermined inspection There may be a difference from the second game history information calculated based on the ball entry information in the period. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the pachinko machine 10 checks the difference between the two pieces of game history information to check whether any defect or unauthorized modification (for example, modification of nails) has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. can do.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive and set the ball entrance information in the above-described ball entrance information setting mode, and then shift to the game history information reception mode to receive the game history information. Further, after calculating the game history information in the examination period in the above-described game history information calculation mode, the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information reception mode and receives the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x. may be configured.

<Aspect 55>
In aspects 50 to 54 described above, the number of ball entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to eight, and may be nine or more, or may be seven or less. The ball-entering detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball-entering information corresponding to the number of ball-entering holes. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has seven or less ball entry holes, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs the ball entry information using the first half of the 8 bits output by the serial transmission method. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Further, for example, when the number of ball entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10 is nine or more, the ball entrance detection IC 62c outputs nine or more balls by executing an 8-bit output multiple times according to the serial transmission method. It may also be configured to output ball entry information corresponding to the ball opening. Also, the entering ball detection IC 62c may be configured to be capable of outputting 16-bit, 32-bit, etc. entering ball information at once by a serial transmission method.

<Aspect 56>
In the above aspect 23, the main side CPU 62x is configured to execute the game history process as one process included in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23: step S10616). It may be configured such that it is not executed in the timer interrupt process but during the remaining time of the main process described above. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the main CPU 62x in mode 56. FIG. In step S11001, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, it executes initial setting of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like. After executing step S11001, the process advances to step S11002 to set interrupt permission in order to permit generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13).

After step S11002 is executed, the process advances to remaining processing of steps S11003 to S11007. In other words, although the main CPU 62x is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as described above, there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time (residual time) is used to repeatedly execute the processing of steps S11003 to S11007 (residual processing). .

In step S11003, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11004 to execute random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI, and advances to step S11005 to execute fluctuation counter update processing to update the fluctuation type counter CS. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, the process proceeds to step S11006.

In step S11006, the game history processing (FIG. 29) described above is executed. As described above, the game history processing includes a plurality of tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 of FIG. 29) that are executed sequentially to complete the calculation of game history information. Then, the main CPU 62x executes a part of the plurality of tasks in one execution of the game history process included in the residual process. That is, the main CPU 62x completes the calculation of the game history information set as the calculation target by executing the game history process a plurality of times. After executing step S11006, the process advances to step S11007 to set interrupt permission for switching from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. After executing the processing of step S11007, the process returns to step S11003, and the processing of steps S11003 to S11007 is repeated.

As described above, according to this aspect, in the remaining time in the main process (the period from the end of execution of one timer interrupt process to the start of execution of the next timer interrupt process), the remaining time including the game history process Since the process is repeatedly executed, it is possible to suppress the start of execution of the remaining process including the game history process even though the execution of one timer interrupt process has not ended. That is, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the residual process including the game history process while the timer interrupt process is not being executed while giving priority to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

Further, if a configuration is adopted in which the game history processing is included in the timer interrupt processing and executed without adopting the configuration of this mode, from the start to the end of one execution of the timer interrupt processing The required time becomes longer, for example, a predetermined time (4 msec in this aspect) has passed since the start of execution of one timer interrupt process, and it is time to start the execution of the next timer interrupt process. Execution of one timer interrupt process has not ended yet, and there is a possibility that execution of the next timer interrupt process cannot be started until execution of the one timer interrupt process ends. In this case, the delay in starting the next timer interrupt process may cause problems in the progress of the game.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, since the game history process is included in the residual process and executed, the timer interrupt process is executed only once compared to the configuration in which the game history process is included in the timer interrupt process and executed. It is possible to shorten the time required from the start to the end of the execution of As a result, for example, a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of execution of one timer interrupt process, and although it is time to start execution of the next timer interrupt process, one timer interrupt still occurs. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of processing has not finished, and suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the next timer interrupt processing cannot be started until the execution of the first timer interrupt processing is finished. can do. As described above, according to this aspect, while suppressing the occurrence of a problem in the progress of the game due to the delay in the start of execution of the next timer interrupt process, the game history can be stored during the period in which the timer interrupt process is not executed. By repeatedly executing the residual process including the process, it is possible to efficiently and quickly calculate the game history information.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, the game history process includes a plurality of tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 in FIG. 29) that are sequentially executed to complete the calculation of the game history information. Since the CPU 62x executes a part of a plurality of tasks in one execution of the game history process, for example, the CPU 62x is configured to execute all of the plurality of tasks in one execution of the game history process. , the time required from the start to the end of one execution of the game history process can be shortened. Specifically, for example, even if the condition for starting the execution of the timer interrupt process is satisfied during execution of the game history process, since the game history process being executed ends in a short period of time, It is possible to shorten the time until the execution of timer interrupt processing is started. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the remaining process while suppressing the occurrence of problems due to the delay in starting the execution of the timer interrupt process.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, the length of the remaining time changes according to the length of time required from the start to the end of timer interrupt processing. Specifically, for example, when the length of one timer interrupt process becomes longer, the remaining time from the end of the one timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process becomes shorter. When the length of the process is shortened, the remaining time from the end of the timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process becomes longer. When the remaining time is short, the number of times the game history process is executed can be reduced, and when the remaining time is long, the number of times the game history process is executed can be increased. That is, the number of executions of the game history process can be changed according to the length of the remaining time.

<Aspect 57>
In the first embodiment and each aspect described above, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to have a plurality of settings with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, for example, even in the same low-probability mode, it may be configured to have six stages of lottery settings (“lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6”) with different probabilities of winning a big win in a winning lottery. . A specific description will be given below.

The main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this mode is equipped with six types of win/fail tables for low probability modes corresponding to six stages of lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". . Then, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery by referring to the winning/failing table corresponding to the set lottery setting. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1 and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the main controller 60 refers to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode of the lottery setting 1. Run a winning lottery.

In this mode, five values of 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode of the lottery setting 1 as the values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. there is Also, in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode of the lottery setting 2, 6 values of 0 to 5 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. In addition, in the success/failure table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 3, 7 values of 0 to 6 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. In addition, in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode of lottery setting 4, 8 values of 0 to 7 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. In addition, in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode of the lottery setting 5, 9 values of 0 to 8 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. In addition, in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode of lottery setting 6, 10 values of 0 to 9 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199.

That is, in this mode, the larger the number following the "lottery setting", the higher the winning probability of the winning lottery in the low-probability mode.

In addition, in this mode, the winning lottery is executed by referring to the same win/fail table in the high-probability mode regardless of which of the six stages of lottery settings is set. That is, in the high-probability mode, regardless of the lottery setting, the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is the same. However, as another aspect, even in the high-probability mode, the larger the number following the "lottery setting", the higher the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery.

In this aspect, the change of the lottery setting in six stages is configured to be executable when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A specific description will be given below.

In this aspect, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing settings and a button for changing settings. When the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the key for changing the setting is inserted into the keyhole while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the inserted key turned to the setting change side (for example, turned clockwise), the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode, information indicating the current lottery setting (hereinafter also referred to as setting information) is displayed on the game history information display section 45z. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed in the game history information display section 45z. Then, every time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the game history information display section 45z changes from "1"→"2"→"3"→"4"→"5"→"6". ”→“1”→“2” and so on.

When the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position in a state in which the setting information displayed on the game history information display portion 45z has reached the value desired by the administrator, the game history information display portion 45z is displayed. The lottery setting is changed to correspond to the setting information displayed in 45z. Specifically, for example, while the administrator presses the setting change button and "6" is displayed in the game history information display section 45z, the setting change key is turned from the setting change side to the original position. Then, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to "lottery setting 6".

Thus, according to this aspect, by changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery. As a result, even if it is the same pachinko machine 10, as a result of the winning lottery, the probability that the variable prize winning device 36 as the special electric accessory will be activated is changed, so that it is calculated as the game history information. The values of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio will converge to values corresponding to the changed new lottery setting. That is, by changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10, the game history information such as the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio of the pachinko machine 10 changes. In other words, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by a simple method such as changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 .

In addition, in each of the aspects described below, information on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance, information on the number of entered balls, total value of prize balls, etc., which are information that serves as the basis for calculating the above-described game history information, are referred to as "basic game history information." ” is also called.

<Aspect 58>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration that can change the lottery setting of the winning lottery), when the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 is changed, various memories (main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x, etc.) before changing the lottery setting The game history basic information stored in the memory may be deleted, and after the lottery setting is changed, the game history information may be calculated and displayed based on the game history basic information stored in various memories.

The reason for such a configuration will be explained. When the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 (the setting of the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery) is changed, the probability of operating the variable prize winning device 36 as a special electric accessory is changed, so the game history information. The value of the above-described accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio calculated as follows converges to a value corresponding to the changed new lottery setting. That is, before and after the lottery setting is changed, the values to which the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio should converge change.

Even after the lottery setting is changed, the game history basic information acquired after the lottery setting is changed is stored without erasing the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed. If the configuration is adopted, the influence of the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is included when calculating the game history information, and the original of the pachinko machine 10 after the change of the lottery setting is included. It may take time for the characteristics of the game to be reflected in the game history information.

Therefore, in this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed, the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed is erased, and the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed. Based on, the game history information is calculated and displayed.

According to this aspect, the game history information such as the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio quickly converge to values corresponding to the lottery settings after the change. It is possible to quickly check the game history information corresponding to the lottery setting currently set in the .

<Aspect 59>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration capable of changing the lottery setting of the winning lottery), even after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information stored in various memories before the lottery setting is changed. Without erasing, the game history basic information acquired after the lottery setting is changed is added to and stored in various memories, and the game history basic information stored in the various memories before and after the lottery setting is changed is stored. Based on this, the game history information may be calculated and displayed.

According to this aspect, it is possible to calculate and display the game history information including the influence of the change in the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10, as a result of the operation of the change in the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the total game history information including the influence of the change in the lottery setting is within an appropriate range. You can check whether it fits in the

<Aspect 60>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration capable of changing the lottery setting of the winning lottery), when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is erased, The game history basic information acquired after the current lottery setting is changed may be stored, and the game history information may be calculated and displayed based on the stored game history basic information.

In such a configuration, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated to a predetermined amount. may record information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time (hereinafter also referred to as short-term change information) and display the short-term change information.

Specifically, for example, before the total number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed reaches 1,000, the pachinko machine is operated again. When the lottery setting of 10 is changed, short-term change information indicating that the lottery setting is changed in a short period of time is recorded, and the short-term change information is displayed on the game history information display part 45z. . Further, for example, an LED lamp for displaying the short-term change information may be provided in the game history information display section 45z, and the LED lamp may emit light when the short-term change information is recorded.

According to this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 confirms whether or not the change in the lottery setting has been made in the pachinko machine 10 in a short period of time by confirming whether or not the short-term change information is displayed. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from changing the lottery setting based on an illegal intention.

Specifically, for example, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 changes the winning probability even in a situation where the game is not being played much in the game machine. Regardless, there is a possibility that the lottery setting is changed again and the game history basic information and game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 are erased. However, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed again in a short period of time in spite of the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the game is not being played much after the lottery setting is changed, the above-mentioned short-term change information will be recorded and displayed. Therefore, by confirming the short-term change information, the inspector recognizes that there is a possibility that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time with illegal intentions such as erasing the game history basic information and game history information. It becomes possible to As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from changing the lottery setting based on an illegal intention.

When the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before a predetermined time elapses after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time. (Short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if a game is not played on the pachinko machine 10 between changes in the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined period of time elapses between changes in the lottery settings. Short-term change information is not displayed if it has passed. Therefore, even though there is a relatively long period of time between changes in the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, but no game is played on the pachinko machine 10 between the changes. Regardless, it is possible to prevent the inspector from erroneously recognizing that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time with unfair intentions.

<Aspect 61>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration capable of changing the lottery setting of the winning lottery), it is also possible to store and display the game history basic information and the game history information in a plurality of periods immediately preceding the change in the past lottery setting. good. When the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the most recent periods already stored are erased, and the current lottery setting is changed. It may be configured to store the game history basic information acquired after the change.

In such a configuration, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated to a predetermined amount. may record information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time (hereinafter also referred to as short-term change information) and display the short-term change information.

Specifically, for example, before the total number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed reaches 1,000, the pachinko machine is operated again. When the lottery setting of 10 is changed, short-term change information indicating that the lottery setting is changed in a short period of time is recorded, and the short-term change information is displayed on the game history information display part 45z. . Further, for example, an LED lamp for displaying the short-term change information may be provided in the game history information display section 45z, and the LED lamp may emit light when the short-term change information is recorded.

According to this aspect described above, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information for each of a plurality of periods immediately preceding the change in the past lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10. . That is, the inspector can confirm whether or not there was a situation in which the game history information did not fall within an appropriate range during the process in which the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 was changed in the past.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 confirms whether or not the short-term change information is displayed, thereby determining whether or not the lottery setting has been changed in the pachinko machine 10 in a short period of time. can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from changing the lottery setting based on an illegal intention.

Specifically, for example, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 repeatedly changes the lottery setting in a short period of time so that a plurality of nearest pachinko machines 10 There is a possibility that the game history basic information and game history information in the period will be erased. However, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is repeatedly changed in a short period of time, the above-described short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by confirming the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that there is a possibility that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time with unfair intentions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from changing the lottery setting based on an illegal intention.

When the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before a predetermined time elapses after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time. (Short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if a game is not played on the pachinko machine 10 between changes in the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined period of time elapses between changes in the lottery settings. Short-term change information is not displayed if it has passed. Therefore, even though there is a relatively long period of time between changes in the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, but no game is played on the pachinko machine 10 between the changes. Regardless, it is possible to prevent the inspector from erroneously recognizing that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time with unfair intentions.

<Aspect 62>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration capable of changing the lottery setting of the winning lottery), after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information serving as the basis for calculating the game history information reaches a sufficient amount as statistical data. The game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed may be saved (stored) without being erased until it is accumulated.

Furthermore, until the game history basic information acquired and stored after the change of the lottery setting is accumulated to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data, the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is stored. The game history information calculated based on the information is displayed blinking on the game history information display part 45z, and the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed is accumulated to a sufficient amount as statistical data. After that, the game history information is calculated based on the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed, and the calculated game history information is lit and displayed on the game history information display section 45z. good too.

Specifically, for example, until the total number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls as the gaming history basic information acquired and stored after the change of the lottery setting reaches 60000, The game history basic information stored in is stored without being erased. Then, until the total number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the change of the lottery setting reaches 60000, it is stored before the change of the lottery setting. The game history information calculated based on the game history basic information is flashed on the game history information display section 45z. After the total number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the change of the lottery setting reaches 60000, the game stored before the change of the lottery setting is performed. The game history basic information is erased, the game history information is calculated based on the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed, and the calculated game history information is lit and displayed on the game history information display section 45z. The configuration shall be such that

According to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the game history basic information stored before changing the lottery setting from being intentionally erased by changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the game history basic information acquired and stored before the lottery setting is changed is deleted immediately after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the pachinko machine 10 Before being inspected by an inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting and erases the game history basic information and the game history information stored before the change of the lottery setting. It may get lost. On the other hand, according to this aspect, the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is sufficient as the statistical data for the game history basic information acquired and stored after the change of the lottery setting. Since the information is not erased until it is accumulated to a predetermined amount, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine from changing the lottery setting with an illegal intention.

Further, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 confirms whether the game history information displayed in the game history information display section 45z is blinking display or lighting display, thereby obtaining the information after the lottery setting is changed. It becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not the game history basic information stored in the above-mentioned manner is accumulated up to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data.

As conditions for erasing the basic game history information stored before the lottery setting is changed and switching from flashing display to lit display, various criteria other than the total number of prize balls may be adopted. can. For example, a total value of the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been shot onto the game board 30) may be used as a reference.

<Aspect 63>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration capable of changing the lottery setting of the winning lottery), it is also possible to store and display the game history basic information and the game history information in a plurality of periods immediately preceding the change in the past lottery setting. good. When the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated up to a sufficient predetermined amount as statistical data. Until then, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the most recent periods already stored are not erased, and are acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. After the game history basic information is accumulated to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the plurality of immediately stored periods may be erased. good.

Specifically, for example, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the total value of the total prize balls as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Until the number of prize balls reaches 60000, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed without erasing the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the immediately stored plural periods. After the total number of prize balls in the prize ball total value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after reaching 60000, the game history in the oldest period among the immediately stored plural periods The configuration may be such that the basic information and the game history information are deleted.

According to this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information for each of the latest multiple periods with the change in the past lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 as a boundary. That is, the inspector can confirm whether or not there was a situation in which the game history information did not fall within an appropriate range during the process in which the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 was changed in the past.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, the game history basic information and the game history information in a plurality of periods immediately preceding the change in the past lottery setting are changed intentionally by repeatedly changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the fact that the

For example, if the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the most recent multiple periods bounded by the change in the past lottery setting are changed immediately after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. When the deleted configuration is adopted, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 repeatedly changes the lottery setting, and the pachinko machine 10 in a plurality of most recent periods. There is a possibility that the game history basic information and the game history information will be deleted.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the plurality of most recent periods bounded by the change in the past lottery setting are changed after the lottery setting is changed. Since the acquired and stored game history basic information is not erased until it is accumulated to a sufficient predetermined amount as statistical data, it is possible to suppress the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from changing the lottery setting with an illegal intention. .

<Aspect 64>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration capable of changing the lottery setting of the winning lottery), the acquired game history basic information is stored separately for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of acquisition, and the game history information is stored for each lottery setting. It may be configured to calculate and display.

Specifically, for example, when the game history basic information is stored in various memories, information that can specify the lottery setting at the timing when the game history basic information is acquired is added and stored. When calculating and displaying the game history information, the game history basic information may be extracted for each lottery setting, and the game history information for each lottery setting may be calculated and displayed.

As another specific configuration, a storage area corresponding to each lottery setting is provided in various memories, and when storing the acquired game history basic information, the storage area corresponding to the currently set lottery setting is stored. It may be configured to be stored. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1, the acquired game history basic information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the lottery setting 1, and when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 2. , the acquired game history basic information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the lottery setting 2. When calculating and displaying the game history information, the game history information for each lottery setting may be calculated and displayed based on the game history basic information stored in each storage area.

According to such a configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10, for example, the game history information calculated based on the game history basic information acquired when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1, Each game history calculated for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, such as game history information calculated based on the game history basic information acquired when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 2 You can check the information. Then, the inspector confirms whether or not each piece of game history information calculated for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 falls within an appropriate range. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a lottery setting that does not fall within a certain range.

<Aspect 65>
In the above aspect 57, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the game history information display section 45z. It may be configured to be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 .

<Aspect 66>
In each of the above modes, the numerical value of the calculated game history information itself is displayed on the game history information display section 45z. Information indicating whether or not it is settled may be displayed on the game history information display section 45z or another display section. For example, whether or not the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio as the game history information are within predetermined ranges may be displayed by the color of the LED lamp that emits light.

<Aspect 67>
In each of the above modes, the game history information display section 45z provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 may have a configuration in which four 7-segment displays are arranged adjacently in a horizontal row. Note that the game history information display unit 45z not only displays the game history information, but also displays the setting information instead of the game history information during the setting change mode for changing the lottery setting. 45z”.

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the information display section 45z in mode 67. As shown in FIG. The information display section 45z is constructed by arranging four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. Each of the 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 has 7 segment light emitting parts A to G and a DP light emitting part indicating a decimal point. , "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", "0", "b", "L.", "6." It is possible to display various numerical values such as , characters, symbols, and the like. In this aspect, the seven segment light emitting portions A to G and the DP light emitting portion are composed of red LEDs (light emitting diodes).

In the following description, the 7-segment display 45z1 arranged at the left end is also referred to as the left-end 7-segment display 45z1, and the 7-segment display 45z2 arranged adjacent to the right of the left-end 7-segment display 45z1 is called the middle left 7-segment display. A 7-segment display 45z3, also referred to as display 45z2, located adjacent to the right of center left 7-segment display 45z2, is also referred to as center right 7-segment display 45z3 and is adjacent to the right of center 7-segment display 45z3. The 7-segment display 45z4 arranged at the right end is also referred to as the right-end 7-segment display 45z4.

As shown in FIG. 35, the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the middle left 7-segment display 45z2, when displaying the game history information, display type information for identifying the type of the game history information to be displayed. is used as an area for displaying (type information display area). In addition, the middle right 7-segment display 45z3 and the right end 7-segment display 45z4 are used as areas (numerical information display areas) for displaying numerical information of gaming history information corresponding to the type displayed in the type information display area. be. A specific example in which game history information is displayed on the information display section 45z will be described below.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing how the game history information is displayed on the information display section 45z. In FIG. 36, the lit segment light-emitting units and DP light-emitting units are shown blacked out, and the unlit segment light-emitting units and DP light-emitting units are not blacked out and are shown in white. It is written in the state of extraction. The same applies to the drawings after FIG. 37 .

In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, the main controller 60 always displays the game history information on the information display section 45z except during the setting change mode for changing the lottery setting described above. In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, the main controller 60 calculates the above-described ball payout rate (during the normal mode) as game history information, and displays the calculated ball payout rate (during the normal mode) on the information display section 45z. to display. The definition of the ball output rate (in normal mode) is as follows.
・ Ball output rate (in normal mode)
=Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode/Number of game balls fired to game board 30 during normal mode (=Number of game balls passed through discharge passage during normal mode (normal number of outs in mode))
Note that, as described above, the normal mode means a mode that is not in the high-probability mode, not in the high-frequency support mode, and not in the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the jackpot. Also, below, the ball output rate (during normal mode) is also referred to as "base (during normal mode)".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, the main controller 60 divides the section every time the counted discharge passage passing number _NOUT reaches 60000, and calculates the base (during the normal mode) for each section. Then, the information display section 45z alternately displays two types of bases (during the normal mode) that are different in the calculation target section. Specifically, the information display section 45z of this aspect displays the following two types of bases (during normal mode).

・"bL": Base during measurement (during normal mode)
Pitching rate calculated in the current section until the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage currently being measured reaches 60000 (in normal mode)
・"b6": Measured base (during normal mode)
Pitching rate calculated in the section in which the measured number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage has reached 60000 and is one section before the section currently being measured (during normal mode)

In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, the information display unit 45z switches and alternately displays "measured base (in normal mode)" and "measured base (in normal mode)" every 5 seconds.

When the information display unit 45z displays "base under measurement (in normal mode)", "bL." is displayed in the type information display area, and "base under measurement (in normal mode)" )” is displayed in two digits. Specifically, when displaying "bL." The segment light emitting portions D, E, F, and DP light emitting portions of the display 45z2 emit light. Numerical information of "measurement base (during normal mode)" is displayed on the middle right seven-segment display 45z3 and the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 that constitute the numerical information display area. In this aspect, the integer part of the numerical value obtained by rounding off the value of the calculated "measured base (during normal mode)" to the third decimal place and multiplying it by 100 is displayed in the numerical information display area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the information display unit 45z displays information such as “bL. It means "0.35". Also, if the value of the "measurement base (in normal mode)" rounded off to the third decimal place is "1.00" or more, the value multiplied by 100 will be 100 or more, so in this case , the information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.99."

When the information display unit 45z displays "measured base (in normal mode)", "b6." is displayed in the type information display area, and "measured base (in normal mode)" is displayed in the numerical information display area. )” is displayed in two digits. Specifically, when displaying "b6." The segment light emitting portions A, C, D, E, F, G, and DP light emitting portions of the display 45z2 emit light. Numerical information of "measured base (during normal mode)" is displayed on the middle right 7-segment display 45z3 and the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 that constitute the numerical information display area. In this aspect, the integer part of the numerical value obtained by rounding off the value of the calculated "measured base (in normal mode)" to the third decimal place and multiplying it by 100 is displayed in the numerical information display area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the information display unit 45z displays information such as "b6.35", and the value of "measured base (in normal mode)" rounded to the third decimal place is It means "0.35". Also, if the value of "measured base (in normal mode)" rounded off to the third decimal place is "1.00" or more, the value multiplied by 100 will be 100 or more, so in this case , the information display unit 45z displays information such as "b6.99."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the information display section 45z displays the game history information, even if the numerical value to be displayed in the numerical information display area is a single digit value, the middle right 7 "0" is displayed on the segment display 45z3 to display a numeric value in two digits. For example, if the value of "measurement base (in normal mode)" rounded off to the third decimal place is "0.07", the value multiplied by 100 is 7, so in this case , the information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.07".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the game history information is displayed, "bL." and "b6." Information other than the two types of information is not displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when displaying the game history information, the following light-emitting portions of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the middle left 7-segment display 45z2 constituting the type information display area are used. not (does not emit light).
[Light-emitting part of type information display area not used when displaying game history information]
・Segment light-emitting portions A, B, and DP light-emitting portions of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1 ・Segment light-emitting portion B of the center left seven-segment display 45z2

In other words, when displaying the game history information, only the following light-emitting portions of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the middle left 7-segment display 45z2 that constitute the type information display area are used (light-emitting ).
[Light-emitting part of type information display area used when displaying game history information]
・Segment light-emitting parts C, D, E, F, G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1
・Segment light-emitting parts A, C, D, E, F, G and DP light-emitting parts of the middle left 7-segment display 45z2. The light-emitting portion is shown in a cross-hatched manner.

Next, the display mode of the information display section 45z in the setting change mode for changing the lottery setting described above will be described. In this aspect, in the setting change mode, the information display section 45z displays setting information that is information indicating the current lottery setting or information indicating the changed lottery setting. A specific description will be given below.

37 and 38 are explanatory diagrams showing how setting information is displayed on the information display section 45z during the setting change mode. 37 and 38 show how "1" to "6" are displayed as setting information (numerical information) indicating lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode, the information display section 45z displays numerical information indicating the current lottery setting in the numerical information display area. Then, when the administrator presses the setting change button, the information display unit 45z displays numerical information indicating the changed lottery setting in the numerical information display area. Then, when the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the setting change mode ends, and the information display section 45z again displays the game history information in the numerical information display area.

In this aspect, during the setting change mode, "--(two hyphens)" is displayed in the type information display area of the information display section 45z, and "1" to "6" are displayed in the numerical information display area. Any setting information is displayed. A display pattern such as "-- (two hyphens)" displayed in the type information display area in the setting change mode is a display pattern that is not displayed when information related to the type of game history information is displayed.

Specifically, during the setting change mode, the segment light-emitting portion G of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1 constituting the type information display area of the information display portion 45z emits light, and the segment light-emitting portion of the left center seven-segment display 45z2 emits light. G emits light. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, only the light-emitting portion used when displaying the game history information is used during the setting change mode. In other words, the light-emitting units that are not used when the game history information is displayed are not used even during the setting change mode.

Further, in this aspect, of the middle right 7-segment display 45z3 and the right end 7-segment display 45z4 that constitute the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z, the middle right 7-segment display 45z3 is not used, and the right end 7-segment display 45z3 is not used. Numerical information indicating lottery setting is displayed using only the display 45z4. That is, the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z can display two-digit numerical information. is turned off without displaying , and numerical information of any one of "1" to "6" indicating the lottery setting is displayed only on the second digit rightmost 7-segment display 45z4.

As described above, according to this aspect, when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z, and when the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed, The display mode of the type information display area is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the manager of the pachinko machine 10 can clearly distinguish whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z or whether the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from erroneously recognizing the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. can.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the light-emitting portions of the type information display area (segment light-emitting portions A, B, and DP light-emitting portions of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1, the left center 7-segment display 45z2 segment light emitting portion B) is not used even during the setting change mode, so there are unused light emitting portions (hereinafter referred to as unused light emitting portions) in the type information display area. Therefore, for example, even if a problem occurs in the non-use light-emitting portion of the type information display area, the display mode in the type information display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode will be affected when a problem occurs in the light emitting portion of the type information display area.

Further, for example, since a light emitting element (LED) that is an unused light emitting portion does not need to emit light, components necessary for causing the light emitting element to emit light can be omitted. Therefore, the cost of the information display section 45z can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, the number of digits of the displayed numerical value is changed depending on whether the numerical information regarding the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area or when the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. Therefore, even if there is a problem with the display of the type information display area, it is necessary to ask the administrator whether the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information or not. It is possible to clearly distinguish and recognize whether it is. That is, when a two-digit numerical value is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z, the manager determines that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information. When a one-digit numerical value is displayed in the information display area, it can be determined that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the setting information.

<Aspect 68>
In the above aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to display "--(two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode. During the mode, the type information display area may be configured to flash "--(two hyphens)".

According to such a configuration, when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z, and when the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed, the type information display area is displayed. The display mode of is further clearly different. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 to further clarify whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z or whether the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. can be distinguished and recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from erroneously recognizing the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. can.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, during the setting change mode in which the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area, "--(two hyphens)" in the type information display area flashes, so that the pachinko It is possible to alert the administrator of the machine 10 that this is an important condition in which the lottery setting should be changed carefully.

<Aspect 69>
In the above aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to display "--(two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode. During the mode, the configuration may be such that nothing is displayed in the type information display area. A specific description will be given below.

39 and 40 are explanatory diagrams showing how setting information is displayed on the information display section 45z during the setting change mode. FIGS. 39 and 40 show how "1" to "6" are displayed as numerical information indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z. Further, as shown in FIG. 39, in this aspect, during the setting change mode, all of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the middle left 7-segment display 45z2 that constitute the type information display area of the information display section 45z are displayed. The segment light emitting section and the DP light emitting section are extinguished. That is, as described above, nothing is displayed in the type information display area of the information display section 45z during the setting change mode.

As described above, according to this aspect, when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z, and when the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed, the type information The display mode of the display area is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the manager of the pachinko machine 10 can clearly distinguish whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z or whether the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from erroneously recognizing the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. can.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, even if there is a problem that some of the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to G, etc.) constituting the type information display area do not emit light, all the light emitting units do not emit light. Unless such a serious problem occurs, the display mode of the type information display area differs between when game history information is displayed and when lottery setting information is displayed. Therefore, according to this aspect, even if there is a problem that some of the light emitting units (LEDs) that make up the type information display area do not emit light, it is possible to tell the administrator that all the light emitting units do not emit light. As long as no serious problem has occurred, it is possible to discriminate whether the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information or setting information for lottery setting. That is, when at least part of the light-emitting units in the type information display area emit light, the manager determines that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information, and closes the type information display area. Only when all the constituent light-emitting units are turned off, it can be determined that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the setting information for the lottery setting.

<Aspect 70>
In the above aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to display "--(two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode. During the mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display patterns are switched and displayed in the type information display area for a short period of time (for example, every 0.5 seconds). A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing how setting information is displayed on the information display section 45z during the setting change mode. In the example shown in FIG. 41, "1" is displayed as the numerical information indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z. In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, during the setting change mode, the following two types of display patterns are alternately displayed in the type information display area of the information display section 45z by switching every 0.5 seconds.

・Display pattern A of the type information display area:
Display pattern in which the segment light-emitting portions C, D, E, and G of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1 are lit (lighted) and all the light-emitting portions of the middle left seven-segment display 45z2 are turned off ・Display pattern B of the type information display area :
A display pattern in which all the light-emitting portions of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are extinguished, and the segment light-emitting portions C, D, E, and G of the center left 7-segment display 45z2 are lit (lighted).

The display pattern A and the display pattern B described above are display patterns that are not displayed in the type information display area when the game history information is displayed. Also, in the display pattern A and the display pattern B, only the light-emitting units used when displaying the game history information are used. In other words, in the display pattern A and the display pattern B, the light-emitting units that are not used when displaying the game history information are not used.

As described above, according to this aspect, when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z, and when the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed, the type information The display mode of the display area is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the manager of the pachinko machine 10 can clearly distinguish whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z or whether the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from erroneously recognizing the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. can.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, the display pattern in the type information display area dynamically changes during the setting change mode in which the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area. It is possible to call attention to the administrator of the lottery setting that it is an important state in which the lottery setting should be changed carefully.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, the light-emitting portions of the type information display area that are not used when displaying the game history information (segment light-emitting portions A, B, and DP light-emitting portions of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1, the middle left 7-segment display 45z2 segment light emitting portion B) is not used even during the setting change mode, so there are unused light emitting portions (hereinafter referred to as unused light emitting portions) in the type information display area. Therefore, for example, even if a problem occurs in the non-use light-emitting portion of the type information display area, the display mode in the type information display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode will be affected when a problem occurs in the light emitting portion of the type information display area.

In addition, since the light-emitting element (LED) that becomes the unused light-emitting portion does not need to emit light, it is possible to omit the parts necessary for causing the light-emitting element to emit light. Therefore, the cost of the information display section 45z can be reduced.

In this embodiment, two types of display patterns are alternately displayed in the type information display area of the information display section 45z during the setting change mode, but three or more types of display patterns are sequentially switched. may be configured to be repeatedly displayed.

<Aspect 71>
In each of the above modes, when the "number of game balls passing through the discharge passage during normal mode (the number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6000, for example, "bL." may be displayed blinking, and when the number is 6000 or more, the lighting may be displayed. According to such a configuration, a person who confirms the blinking display of "bL." )” is less than 6000, and the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the “measurement base (during normal mode)” calculated when a sufficient amount of statistical data has not been accumulated. can be recognized.

In addition, after lighting up "bL." In the case of , the numerical value in the numerical information display area may be displayed blinking, and when the number is 6000 or more, the numerical value may be lit. According to such a configuration, a person who confirms the blinking display of the numerical value in the numerical information display area can confirm that "the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs during the normal mode)" being measured. It is recognized that the number displayed in the numerical information display area is less than 6000 and is the "measurement base (during normal mode)" calculated when a sufficient amount of statistical data has not been accumulated. be able to.

Also, when the "number of game balls passing through the discharge passage during normal mode (the number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6000, for example, "bL." A configuration may be adopted in which the numerical value in the display area is displayed blinking, and when the number is 6000 or more, the numerical value is lit. According to such a configuration, a person who confirms the blinking display of "bL." (Number of outs during normal mode)” is less than 6000, and the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is calculated under the condition that a sufficient amount of statistical data has not been accumulated. normal mode)”.

Various game history basic information can be used as a criterion for determining whether the display is flashing or lit. For example, the "number of game balls (total number of outs) passing through the discharge passage" during measurement may be employed.

<Aspect 72>
In each of the above modes, when the numerical information indicating the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area during the setting change mode, all the light-emitting parts constituting the middle right seven-segment display 45z3 are extinguished. First, only the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 is used to display the numerical information indicating the lottery setting with one digit, but instead of this configuration, the middle right 7-segment display 45z3 is also used to display two digits. may be configured to display numerical information indicating the lottery setting. For example, when the numerical information indicating the lottery setting is only one-digit information, it is possible to display "0" on the middle right 7-segment display 45z3.

<Aspect 73>
In each of the above modes, the number of lottery settings is not limited to six types from 1 to 6, and the number of types of lottery settings may be 5 or less or 7 or more. Further, the number of 7-segment displays constituting the information display section 45z is not limited to four, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. Further, the number of 7-segment displays constituting the type information display area of the information display section 45z is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Further, the number of 7-segment displays constituting the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Further, the information display section 45z may be configured by a light-emitting element other than an LED such as an organic EL, or may be configured by a display element (display element) that does not emit light. For example, the information display section 45z may be composed of liquid crystal or a display element that employs an electrophoresis method used in electronic paper.

<Aspect 74>
FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 74 of the first embodiment. In this mode 74, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the above-described game history information is calculated by the main side CPU 62x. In the following, details of various configurations provided in the main controller 60 will be described, and other configurations will be denoted by the same reference numerals as in the first embodiment and each aspect described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42, the main ROM 63 includes program storage means 63a and program data storage means 63b. The main RAM 64 includes data storage means 64a and stack means 64b.

The main CPU 62x includes a register set 62x1, and performs various processes by combining and executing a plurality of programs stored in the program storage means 63a of the main ROM 63. FIG. Each program is composed of a combination of a plurality of reserved instructions such as operation instructions, transfer instructions, rotate instructions, shift instructions, jump instructions, call instructions, and return instructions. Execute multiple instructions sequentially in the order defined in the program.

The register set 62x1 includes an A register (accumulator register), an F register (flag register), a general purpose register, and a stack pointer (SP). Note that the A register and the general-purpose register are formed in a size of 1 byte (8 bits), and the stack pointer (SP) is formed in a size of 2 bytes (16 bits). The register set 62x1 may also include other registers, such as index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, and the like.

The A register stores the data (value) to be operated on by the operation instruction and the operation result.

The F register automatically changes its state according to the operation result of an operation instruction or the execution result of a specific instruction such as a load instruction.

General-purpose registers are used in the same way as general program variables. Specifically, they are used to temporarily store data (values), configure counters, and specify memory addresses. used to

A stack pointer (SP) is a stack for accessing a first stack area 64b1 (see FIG. 44 described later) and a second stack area 64b2 (see FIG. 44 described later) of stack means 64b configured in the main RAM 64. Stores pointer reference address. Specifically, the stack pointer (SP) stores the first stack area reference address SP1 when accessing the first stack area 64b1, and the second stack area reference address SP1 when accessing the second stack area 64b2. Store address SP2.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main ROM 63. As shown in FIG. As described above, the main ROM 63 includes program storage means 63a and program data storage means 63b.

The program storage means 63a has a first program control area 63a1 that stores a first program 63p1 and a second program control area 63a2 that is different from the first program control area 63a1 and stores a second program 63p2. are doing.

The first program 63p1 includes a game progress program, a storage program, and a change program. Then, the main CPU 62x executes a game progressing process for controlling the progress of a game by executing a game progressing program, a storage process by executing a storage program, and a change process by executing a change program. to implement. Details of the game progress processing, storage processing, and change processing will be described later.

The second program 63p2 includes a game history information calculation display program, a save program, and a return program. Then, the main CPU 62x executes a game history information calculation display program to calculate and display the game history information described above, and executes a save program to save the game history information. Then, the recovery process is executed by executing the recovery program. Details of the game history information calculation display process, save process, and return process will be described later.

The program data storage means 63b includes a first program data area 63b1 for storing various data necessary for executing the first program 63p1, and an area different from the first program data area 63b1, and a second program 63p2. and a second program data area 63b2 for storing various data necessary for executing the program. The first program data area 63b1 stores, for example, data such as a win/fail table and a distribution table used in the above-described winning lottery process, and the second program data area 63b2 stores, for example, Various fixed value data to be used is stored.

As described above, the first program control area 63a1 stores the first program 63p1, the first program data area 63b1 stores data necessary for executing the first program 63p1, and the first program data area 63b1 stores the second program 63p2. A second program control area 63a2 and a second program data area 63b2 storing data necessary for executing the second program 63p2 are configured in different areas of the main ROM 63, respectively.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main RAM 64. As shown in FIG. As described above, the main RAM 64 includes data storage means 64a and stack means 64b.

The data storage means 64a corresponds to a first data storage area 64a1 corresponding to a first program 63p1 capable of updating data, and a second program 63p2 different from the first data storage area 64a1 and capable of updating data. and a second data storage area 64a2. The first data storage area 64a1 stores, for example, various data (various flags such as a high-probability mode flag) updated in the game progress process, and the second data storage area 64a2 stores, for example, a game history Various data updated in the information calculation display process are stored.

The stack means 64b has a first stack area 64b1 accessible by a first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP), and an area different from the first stack area 64b1. and a second stack area 64b2 that can be accessed by a second stack area reference address SP2 stored in . The first stack area 64b1 corresponds to the first program 63p1 (game progress program, storage program, change program), and the second stack area 64b2 corresponds to the second program 63p2 (game history information calculation display program, save program, return program). program) is supported.

As described above, the first stack area 64b1 and the first data storage area 64a1, the second program 63p2 (the A second stack area 64b2 and a second data storage area 64a2, in which data can be updated and referenced by processing by a game history information calculation and display program, a save program, and a return program), are configured in different areas of the main RAM 64. ing. The processing by the first program 63p1 prevents the data in the second stack area 64b2 and the second data storage area 64a2 from being updated, but allows the data to be referenced. The data in the area 64b1 and the first data storage area 64a1 cannot be updated, but the data can be referenced.

FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a memory map of main controller 60. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 45, the internal ROM area corresponding to the main ROM 63 and the internal RAM area corresponding to the main RAM 64 are allocated in this order to the memory space in this mode. In this aspect, in the internal ROM area, the first program control area 63a1, the first program data area 63b1, the unused area, the second program control area 63a2, and the second program data area 63b2 are allocated in this order. In the built-in RAM area, a first data storage area 64a1, a first stack area 64b1, a second data storage area 64a2, a second stack area 64b2, and an unused area are allocated in this order.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 62x in mode 74 of the first embodiment. Also in this aspect, the timer interrupt processing is executed at a 4 msec cycle, as in the first embodiment.

46 are executed by the main CPU 62x executing the first program 63p1 stored in the first program control area 63a1. Each process described on the right side of the page is a process executed by the main CPU 62x executing the second program 63p2 stored in the second program control area 63a2.

In step S11101, the main CPU 62x executes a game progressing program included in the first program 63p1 to carry out a game progressing process for progressing the game. Specifically, in the game progress process, the process group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 in FIG. 27 described above is executed. After performing the process of step S11101, the process advances to step S11102.

In step S11102, the main CPU 62x performs storage processing by executing a storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the memory processing, the values of the A register and the F register among the plurality of registers are stored in the first stack accessible by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a push instruction (PUSH). Store in area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A and F registers are stored in the first stack area 64b1 by one push instruction (PUSH AF) using a special code AF designating the A and F registers as transfer targets.

After executing step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes save processing 1, 2, and 3 shown in steps S11103 to S11105 by executing the save program included in the second program 63p2. A specific description will be given below.

In save processing 1 shown in step S11103, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is changed to the address W21 of the second data storage area 64a2 by the load instruction (LD (W21), SP). Store in the area specified by . At this time, the value of the F flag may be changed by changing the state of the TZ flag of the F register due to the load instruction. After executing save processing 1 in step S11103, the process advances to step S11104.

In save processing 2 shown in step S11104, the second stack area reference address SP2, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). The second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63, for example. In this embodiment, since data is not stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time of saving process 2, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in saving process 2 is the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. is an address value indicating After executing save processing 2 in step S11104, the process advances to step S11105.

In save processing 3 shown in step S11105, a load instruction (LD (W22), register) is executed multiple times to store the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register in the area specified by address W22 of the second data storage area 64a2. memorize to The values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a single load instruction using a special code designating the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register as transfer targets. may be After performing the process of step S11105, the process advances to step S11106.

In step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes a game history information calculation and display process by executing a game history information calculation and display program included in the second program 63p2. In the game history information calculation display process, the above-described game history information is calculated and a process for displaying the calculated game history information on the information display section 45z is performed. Specifically, in the game history information calculation and display processing, the processing group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 in FIG. 29 described above is performed. At this time, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register change in the game history information calculation and display process.

After executing the game history information calculation and display process of step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes return processes 1 and 2 shown in steps S11107 and S11108 by executing the return program included in the second program 63p2. A specific description will be given below.

In restore processing 1 shown in step S11107, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register are saved to the second data storage area by saving processing 3 (step S11105) by a plurality of load instructions (LD register, (W22)). The value stored in the area specified by the address W22 of 64a2 is set. A single load instruction using a special code may be used to set the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by save processing 3 (step S11105). good. In this return process 1, when the value of the F register has changed in the save process 1 (step S11103), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is ended is stored in the F register. After performing the processing of step S11107, the process advances to step S11108.

In restore processing 2 shown in step S11108, the first stack area stored in the area specified by address W21 of the second data storage area 64a2 by save processing 1 (step S11103) is executed by the load instruction (LD SP, (W21)). The reference address SP1 is stored in the stack pointer (SP), and the main CPU 62x ends execution of the second program 63p2. After performing the process of step S11108, the process advances to step S11109.

In step S11109, the main CPU 62x executes the change process by executing the change program included in the first program 63p1. In the change processing, the values of the A register and the F register among the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register whose values are set by the restore processing 1 (step S11107) are stored by the pop instruction (POP) (step S11102). is changed to the value stored in the first stack area 64b1. At this time, a single pop instruction (POP AF) using a special code changes the values of the A and F registers to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage processing (step S11102). At this time, even if a different value is stored in the F register in return processing 1 (step S11107) than immediately after the game progress processing is terminated, the value of the F register is set to the same value as immediately after the game progress processing is terminated. can be changed to After executing the process of step S11109, the timer interrupt process ends.

As described above, according to this aspect, save processing 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 46) and restoration processing 1 (step S11107 in FIG. 46) are performed, so that the second program 63p2 returns to the first program 63p1. In this case, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems due to changes in the values of the registers used in the first program 63p1.

Further, according to this aspect, there is a possibility that the state of the F register may change before saving process 3 is performed (for example, when a load instruction is executed in saving process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46)). Before executing the save process 1, the values of the A register and the F register are stored in the storage process (step S11102 in FIG. 46) by the storage program included in the first program 63p1, and after the process by the second program 63p2 is finished. , the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the storage processing in the change processing (step S11109 in FIG. 46) by the change program included in the first program 63p1. Therefore, for example, even if the state of the F register changes in save processing 1, the state of the F register returns to the same state as immediately after the game progress processing (step S11101 in FIG. 46) by the first program 63p1. 2 program 63p2, there is no possibility of affecting the processing to be executed after returning from the processing. As a result, it becomes possible to configure a plurality of programs independently.

In addition, according to this aspect, by simply adding the game history information calculation display program for executing the game history information calculation display process (step S11106 in FIG. 46) to the second program 63p2, the progress of the game can be controlled. The game history information calculation display process can be added without affecting the progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 46). Therefore, the game history information calculation display program can be easily created independently of the game progress program for executing the game progress process.

Further, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 45, the memory space used by the processing by the first program 63p1 and the memory space used by the processing by the second program 63p2 are arranged independently of each other. It is possible to prevent both memory spaces from physically interfering with each other, and to prevent, for example, an illegal action made to one process (memory space) from affecting the other process (memory space). can do.

Further, according to this aspect, in the saving process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 46), all the values of each register may be stored in the second stack area 64b2 by one push instruction (PUSH ALL). Instead, since the value of each register is stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a load instruction, it is possible to store only the registers that have been used in the second data storage area 64a2. Therefore, the storage capacity required for storing the values of each register in save processing 3 can be reduced. Further, according to this aspect, instead of storing the value of each register in the second stack area 64b2, the value of each register is stored in the second data storage area 64a2. It is possible to increase the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2 by reducing the storage capacity of the second stack area 64b2.

Also, for example, if the amount of data to be stored in the stack area by a push instruction (PUSH) exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area of the main RAM 64, all the data stored in the stack area In the case of a configuration in which reset processing for erasing data is performed, if the configuration is such that the value of each register is stored in the second stack area 64b2 by a push instruction (PUSH) in save processing 3, the reset processing is performed. There is a risk that it will be done. Furthermore, if all the values of each register are stored in the second stack area 64b2 by one push instruction (PUSH ALL) in the saving process 3, the possibility of the reset process being executed becomes even higher. end up On the other hand, according to this aspect, the value of each register is stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the load instruction (LD) without using the push instruction (PUSH ALL) in the saving process 3, so the stack area can be avoided.

<Aspect 75>
In the configuration shown in aspect 74, instead of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46, the timer interrupt process described below may be implemented.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 62x in mode 75 of the first embodiment. The same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those included in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The main differences from the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 46 are that save processing 1 shown in step S11103 of FIG. 46 is omitted and the contents of return processing 2 shown in step S11108 of FIG. It is a point. A specific description will be given below.

In step S11101, the main CPU 62x executes a game progressing program included in the first program 63p1 to carry out a game progressing process for progressing the game. Specifically, in the game progress process, the process group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 in FIG. 27 described above is executed. After performing the process of step S11101, the process advances to step S11102.

In step S11102, the main CPU 62x performs storage processing by executing a storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the memory processing, the values of the A register and the F register among the plurality of registers are stored in the first stack accessible by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a push instruction (PUSH). Store in area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A and F registers are stored in the first stack area 64b1 by one push instruction (PUSH AF) using a special code AF designating the A and F registers as transfer targets.

After executing step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes save processing 2 and 3 shown in steps S11104 and S11105 by executing the save program included in the second program 63p2. That is, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x does not perform the save process 1 of step S11103 described above. A specific description will be given below.

In save processing 2 shown in step S11104, the second stack area reference address SP2, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). The second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63, for example. In this embodiment, since data is not stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time of saving process 2, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in saving process 2 is the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. is an address value indicating After executing save processing 2 in step S11104, the process advances to step S11105.

In save processing 3 shown in step S11105, a load instruction (LD (W22), register) is executed multiple times to store the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register in the area specified by address W22 of the second data storage area 64a2. memorize to The values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a single load instruction using a special code designating the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register as transfer targets. may be After performing the process of step S11105, the process advances to step S11106.

In step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes a game history information calculation and display process by executing a game history information calculation and display program included in the second program 63p2. In the game history information calculation display process, the above-described game history information is calculated and a process for displaying the calculated game history information on the information display section 45z is performed. Specifically, in the game history information calculation and display processing, the processing group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 in FIG. 29 described above is performed. At this time, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register change in the game history information calculation and display process.

After executing the game history information calculation and display process in step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the return program included in the second program 63p2, thereby executing return process 1 and return process A shown in steps S11107 and S11108a. do. That is, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x performs the return process A shown in step S11108a instead of the return process 2 in step S11108 described above. A specific description will be given below.

In restore processing 1 shown in step S11107, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register are saved to the second data storage area by saving processing 3 (step S11105) by a plurality of load instructions (LD register, (W22)). The value stored in the area specified by the address W22 of 64a2 is set. A single load instruction using a special code may be used to set the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by save processing 3 (step S11105). good. In this return process 1, when the value of the F register has changed in the save process 1 (step S11103), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is ended is stored in the F register. Alternatively, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be set to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by multiple load instructions without using the special code. After performing the process of step S11107, the process proceeds to step S11108a.

In return processing A shown in step S11108a, the first stack area reference address SP1, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). The first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63, for example. This fixed value will be described below.

In this aspect, at the time when all of the processes (processes of steps S10601 to S10615) constituting the game progress process (step S11101) are completed, the data stored in the first stack area 64b1 is not present. Therefore, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value specifying the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

Thereafter, when the main CPU 62x executes storage processing (step S11102) and starts executing the second program 63p2, a predetermined amount of data is stored in the first stack area 64b1. As a result, at the time (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts executing the second program 63p2, The first stack area reference address SP1 is an address value that designates a position moved by a predetermined amount from the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

Since the amount of data stored in the first stack area 64b1 is the same every time (every timer interrupt process) due to the execution of the storage process (step S11102) and the start of the execution of the second program 63p2, the first stack area The amount of movement of the reference address SP1 is also the same each time. Therefore, the first stack stored in the stack pointer (SP) at the time (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts executing the second program 63p2 The area reference address SP1 has the same address value each time.

Then, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the return processing A (step S11108a) of this mode is the time (FIG. is set to the same address value as the address value stored in the stack pointer every time at the timing TX1) shown in FIG. As a result, even if the save processing 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46) described above is omitted, the value of the stack pointer (SP) is saved by the restoration processing A (step S11108a) of this mode, and the storage processing (step S11102) ends. However, it can be restored to the value at the time point (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) immediately after the execution of the second program 63p2 is started.

The main CPU 62x ends the processing of step S11108a described above, ends execution of the second program 63p2, starts execution of the first program 63p1, and proceeds to step S11109.

In step S11109, the main CPU 62x executes the change process by executing the change program included in the first program. In the change processing, the values of the A register and the F register among the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register whose values are set by the restore processing 1 (step S11107) are stored by the pop instruction (POP) (step S11102). is changed to the value stored in the first stack area 64b1. At this time, a single pop instruction (POP AF) using a special code changes the values of the A and F registers to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage processing (step S11102). At this time, the value of the F register has changed after the storage process (step S11102) is performed, and in the return process 1 (step S11107), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is terminated is stored in the F register. Even in this case, the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as immediately after the game progress process is terminated. After executing the process of step S11109, the timer interrupt process ends.

As described above, according to this aspect, in addition to the effects shown in aspect 74, the following effects can be obtained.

In this aspect, at the time when all of the processes (processes of steps S10601 to S10615) constituting the game progress process (step S11101) are completed, the data stored in the first stack area 64b1 is not present. Therefore, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value specifying the bottom of the first stack area 64b1. Therefore, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102), and at the time (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) immediately after starting the execution of the second program 63p2, the first The stack area reference address SP1 has the same address value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, since a fixed value may be stored in the stack pointer (SP) by the return processing A (step S11108a) of this aspect, saving processing 1 shown in aspect 74 can be omitted. As a result, the processing of the main CPU 62x can be simplified, and the second data storage area 64a2 necessary for saving the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) can be saved. Storage capacity can be reduced.

<Aspect 76>
Instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 47, the timer interrupt processing described below may be implemented.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 62x in mode 76 of the first embodiment. The same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those included in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The main differences from the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 47 are that save processing 3 shown in step S11105 in FIG. 47 is omitted, and return processing 1 shown in step S11107 in FIG. 47 is omitted. 48, and a process of setting all register values to 0 is added after the processes shown in steps S11102 and S11108a of FIG. A specific description will be given below.

In step S11101, the main CPU 62x executes a game progressing program included in the first program 63p1 to carry out a game progressing process for progressing the game. Specifically, in the game progress process, the process group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 in FIG. 27 described above is executed. After performing the process of step S11101, the process advances to step S11102.

In step S11102, the main CPU 62x performs storage processing by executing a storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the memory processing, the values of the A register and the F register among the plurality of registers are stored in the first stack accessible by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a push instruction (PUSH). Store in area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A and F registers are stored in the first stack area 64b1 by one push instruction (PUSH AF) using a special code AF designating the A and F registers as transfer targets. After performing the process of step S11102, the process advances to step S11102-2.

In step S11102-2, the main CPU 62x carries out the first clear process by executing the first clear program included in the first program 63p1. In the first clear process, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register are set to 0 by multiple load instructions (LD register, 0). A single load instruction using a special code may be used to set the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register to 0 respectively.

After executing step S11102-2, the main CPU 62x executes save processing 2 shown in step S11104 by executing the save program included in the second program 63p2. That is, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x does not perform save processing 1 in step S11103 and save processing 3 in step S11105. A specific description will be given below.

In save processing 2 shown in step S11104, the second stack area reference address SP2, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). The second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63, for example. In this embodiment, since data is not stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time of saving process 2, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in saving process 2 is the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. is an address value indicating After executing save processing 2 in step S11104, the process advances to step S11106. That is, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x does not perform the save processing 3 of step S11105 described above.

In step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes a game history information calculation and display process by executing a game history information calculation and display program included in the second program 63p2. In the game history information calculation display process, the above-described game history information is calculated and a process for displaying the calculated game history information on the information display section 45z is performed. Specifically, in the game history information calculation and display processing, the processing group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 in FIG. 29 described above is performed. At this time, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register change in the game history information calculation and display process.

After executing the game history information calculation and display process of step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the second clear process shown in step S11107a by executing the second clear program included in the second program 63p2. That is, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x does not perform the return processing 1 of step S11107 described above.

In the second clear processing shown in step S11107a, the value of each of the A register, F register and general-purpose register is set to 0 by multiple load instructions (LD register, 0). A single load instruction using a special code may be used to set the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register to 0 respectively.

After executing the second clear process of step S11107a, the main CPU 62x executes the return process A shown in step S11108a by executing the return program included in the second program 63p2.

In return processing A shown in step S11108a, the first stack area reference address SP1, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). The first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63, for example. This fixed value will be described below.

In this aspect, at the time when all of the processes (processes of steps S10601 to S10615) constituting the game progress process (step S11101) are completed, the data stored in the first stack area 64b1 is not present. Therefore, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value specifying the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

After that, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2), and when the execution of the second program 63p2 is started, a predetermined amount of data is stored in the first stack area 64b1. be. As a result, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2), and immediately after starting the execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47), , the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value specifying a position moved by a predetermined amount from the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

Then, the amount of data stored in the first stack area 64b1 by starting the storage processing (step S11102), the first clearing processing (step S11102-2), and the execution of the second program 63p2 each time (every timer interrupt processing) 2) Since it is the same, the amount of movement of the first stack area reference address SP1 is also the same each time. Therefore, the main CPU 62x executes the storage processing (step S11102) and the first clear processing (step S11102-2), and immediately after starting the execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47), the stack pointer The first stack area reference address SP1 stored in (SP) has the same address value each time.

Then, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the return processing A (step S11108a) of this aspect is stored in the second program 63p2 after completing the storage processing (step S11102) and the first clear processing (step S11102-2). is set to the same address value as the address value stored in the stack pointer every time (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) immediately after the execution of . As a result, even if the saving process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46) described above is omitted, the value of the stack pointer (SP) can be saved by the storing process (step S11102) and the 1 clear processing (step S11102-2) is completed and the value at the time (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) immediately after the execution of the second program 63p2 is started can be restored.

The main CPU 62x ends the processing of step S11108a described above, ends execution of the second program 63p2, starts execution of the first program 63p1, and proceeds to step S11109.

In step S11109, the main CPU 62x executes the change process by executing the change program included in the first program. In the change processing, a pop instruction (POP) is used to change the values of the A and F registers to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage processing (step S11102). At this time, a single pop instruction (POP AF) using a special code changes the values of the A and F registers to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage processing (step S11102). At this time, even if the value of the F register has changed after the memory processing (step S11102) is performed, the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as immediately after the game progress processing is terminated. . After executing the process of step S11109, the timer interrupt process ends.

As described above, according to this aspect, in addition to the effects shown in the above aspects 74 and 75, the following effects can be obtained.

According to this aspect, the first clear process (step S11102-2 in FIG. 48) is performed by the first program 63p1, and the second clear process (step S11107a in FIG. 48) is performed by the second program 63p2. Without executing the saving process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 47) and the restoring process 1 (step S11107 in FIG. 47), the values of the registers and the It can match the value of the register at the time immediately after the end of execution. Therefore, when returning from the second program 63p2 to the first program 63p1, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem due to a change in the value of the register used in the first program 63p1. Further, since the saving process 3 and the restoring process 1 can be omitted, the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2 required for the saving process 3 and the restoring process 1 can be reduced.

Further, in this aspect, in one timer interrupt process, after all the various processes included in the game progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 48) are completed, the first clear process is performed, and after the first clear process does not execute the game progress processing, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in the game progress processing by setting the value of the register to 0 by the first clear processing.

<Aspect 77>
In the storage processing of step S11102 of modes 74, 75, and 76, the values of the specific registers (A register, F register) may be stored in the first data storage area 64a1 by a load instruction. In this case, in the change processing of step S11109, the load instruction may be used to change the values of the specific registers (A register, F register) to the values stored in the first data storage area 64a1 in the storage processing. Alternatively, the F register may be the only specific register to be subjected to the storage processing in step S11102 and the change processing in step S11109.

Further, in the above aspect 74, the execution of the game progress processing (step S11101 in FIG. 46) by the first program 63p1 is interrupted in the middle, and after performing the processing from the storage processing of step S11102 to the change processing of step S11109 by interruption, the execution is interrupted. It may be configured to restart the execution of the game progress processing that was being performed.

Further, in the above aspect 76, the first clear process (step S11102-2) may be performed after the game progress process (step S11101) is performed and before the storage process (step S11102) is performed. . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the above aspect 76.

<Aspect 78>
Among the above modes, various modes can be adopted as the method of starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and the operation method in the setting change mode in the configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed. A specific description will be given below.

In this aspect, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for setting change and the above-described RAM clear button, but is not provided with the above-described setting change button. . When the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Then, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, and the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole. Then, the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (for example, turned clockwise). In this state, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect is activated in the setting change mode when all of the following conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied when the power is turned on.
Condition 1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open Condition 2: The keyhole for setting change is positioned on the setting change side Condition 3: The RAM clear button is pressed Pachinko When the power supply of the machine 10 is turned on, if condition 3 is satisfied but either condition 1 or 2 is not satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 does not start in the setting change mode and initializes the main side RAM 64. Execute processing to convert

When the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode, information (setting information) indicating the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display section 45z described above. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed on the information display section 45z. Then, every time the administrator presses the RAM clear button, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z changes from "1"→"2"→"3"→"4"→"5"→"6"→" 1” → “2”, and so on.

In a state where the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z has reached the value desired by the manager, the manager enters a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance (for example, the out port 43) to enter a predetermined ball. When the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (for example, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h), the change to the lottery setting corresponding to the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z is confirmed. Specifically, for example, when "6" is displayed as the setting information on the information display section 45z and the game ball is detected by the discharge path detection sensor 44h, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to "lottery setting 6” is changed. When the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the pachinko machine 10 terminates the setting change mode.

Thus, according to this aspect, the setting change button can be omitted, so the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, according to this aspect, when changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, so for example, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Even if an unauthorized person (hereinafter also referred to as an unauthorized person) tries to illegally change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, there is no means for opening the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14. For the time being, the lottery settings cannot be changed. Therefore, the security of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, even if an unauthorized person can open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, when the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened, the speaker 46 of the pachinko machine 10 warns. A sound or a warning voice (for example, "the door is open") is output, so the administrator can easily notice the situation where an unauthorized person is trying to change the lottery settings. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

In this embodiment, one of the conditions for the pachinko machine 10 to start in the setting change mode is that both the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open. One of the conditions for starting the pachinko machine 10 as the setting change mode may be that one of them is in the open state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the detection of game balls by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h is adopted as a condition for confirming the change of the lottery setting, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the detection of game balls by other ball entry detection sensors is performed by lottery. You may employ|adopt as conditions which confirm the change of a setup. For example, detection of a game ball by the first winning opening detection sensor 44d may be adopted as a condition for confirming the change of the lottery setting. The first winning hole detection sensor 44d is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 32a, which is a general winning hole.

Further, in this aspect, every time the administrator presses the RAM clear button in the setting change mode, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z changes from "1"→"2"→"3"→"4"→" 5"→"6"→"1"→"2"..., but it is not limited to this configuration. Every time the user presses the button for changing the setting, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z changes from "1"→"2"→"3"→"4"→"5"→"6"→"1". ”→“2” and so on.

Further, in this aspect, the configuration is such that the keyhole for setting change is provided, but the configuration may be such that the keyhole for setting change is not provided. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to start in the setting change mode when the above conditions 1 and 3 are satisfied when the power is turned on. Also, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the above conditions 1 and 3 when the power is turned on, whether to start in the setting change mode or execute RAM clear processing to initialize the main side RAM 64 may be configured to execute a selection mode in which the administrator selects. In the selection mode, pressing the RAM clear button selects whether to start as the setting change mode or execute the RAM clearing process, and the selection is confirmed by pressing the RAM clear button for a predetermined time. good too. In addition, in the selection mode, only when the game ball is entered into a predetermined ball entrance (for example, the out port 43) and the game ball is detected by a predetermined ball entrance detection sensor (for example, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h), the setting is made. The configuration may be such that activation as the change mode can be selected. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a person other than the administrator from illegally changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

<Aspect 79>
Among the above-described modes, in the configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, it may be configured to notify that the setting change mode is in progress during the setting change mode. A specific description will be given below.

In this aspect, when main controller 60 starts the setting change mode, main controller 60 transmits a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, to sound emission control device 90 .

When receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "setting change mode is in progress". Further, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting change mode is in progress", and displays the received command. The control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "in setting change mode". In addition, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with maximum luminance.

After ending the setting change mode, main controller 60 transmits a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, to sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

Thus, according to this aspect, the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode is notified by the speaker 46, the pattern display device 41, and the various lamps 47. can be easily recognized. Further, even if an unauthorized person illegally shifts the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the setting change mode is in progress through the speaker 46 or the pattern display device 41. Therefore, surrounding players and managers can notice that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode by an unauthorized person. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

Further, when main controller 60 starts the setting change mode, it transmits information indicating that the setting change mode has started to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. Then, when the setting change mode is terminated, the main controller 60 transmits information indicating that the setting change mode has been terminated to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal.

According to such a configuration, even when the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is not in the vicinity of the pachinko machine 10, the presence of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is displayed on the management screen of the hall computer. It becomes possible to recognize Therefore, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode by an unauthorized person, the administrator can confirm the presence of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode through the management screen of the hall computer. can recognize. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

<Aspect 80>
Among the above aspects, in a configuration that can execute the setting change mode, if the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, after the setting change mode ends, among the information stored in the main side RAM 64, It may be configured such that the information about the game state is not initialized. A specific description will be given below.

In this mode, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main side RAM 64 is initialized except for the information on the game state, and the setting change mode ends without changing the lottery setting in the setting change mode. In this case, the main side RAM 64 is not initialized, and the game is shifted to a game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. In addition, in this aspect, the "information about the game state" that is not initialized includes the state of the high probability mode flag, the state of the high frequency support mode flag, and the flag indicating whether the open/close execution mode is in progress (during the jackpot). is in a state of

Thus, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main RAM 64 is initialized. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the progress of the game due to mismatching with the information stored in the main side RAM 64 before the setting is changed.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, even if the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode and the main side RAM 64 is initialized, the information about the game state among the information stored in the main side RAM 64 is erased. Therefore, for example, it is possible to change the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 while maintaining a game state advantageous to the player.

In this aspect, the main side RAM 64 is initialized after the setting change mode is finished. It may be configured such that the main side RAM 64 is initialized by excluding information on the game state before starting as. Even with such a configuration, a mismatch occurs between the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery setting is changed and the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the lottery setting is changed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles in the progress of the game.

In addition, in this mode, when the main side RAM 64 is initialized, the information about the game state is not erased, but all the information (including the information about the game state) stored in the main side RAM 64 is initialized. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

In addition, the uninitialized "game state information" is not limited to the above, and may include pending information, for example.

<Aspect 81>
Among the above modes, in a configuration that allows the setting change mode to be executed, if information stored in the main side RAM 64 becomes inconsistent due to noise or the like, and the main side RAM 64 is initialized, the game proceeds. Before returning to the possible game progression mode, it may be configured to shift to the setting change mode. A specific description will be given below.

In this aspect, the main controller 60 executes monitoring processing for monitoring whether or not an abnormality such as inconsistency occurs in the information stored in the main RAM 64 in the timer interrupt processing. Specifically, for example, in the monitoring process, each area of the main RAM 64 monitors whether or not a value in a range that should not be stored is stored. When it is determined in the monitoring process that an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 64, the process relating to the progress of the game is stopped, and the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized. After the initialization of the main RAM 64 is completed, the main controller 60 shifts to the above-described setting change mode before shifting to the game progress mode in which the game can progress. It should be noted that, as causes of anomalies such as inconsistency in the information stored in the main RAM 64, for example, noise such as electromagnetic waves, or a player with illicit intentions bringing a magnet or the like close to the pachinko machine 10. etc. can be mentioned.

Then, in the same way as the aspect 79 described above, if it is configured to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can notify that the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the setting change mode. can notice. Then, the manager determines the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the game progress mode.

The reason for such a configuration will be described. When the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the setting information of the lottery setting is rewritten with setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. there is a possibility. If the setting information for the lottery setting is not initialized (changed) even if the main RAM 64 is initialized, there is a risk that the setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator will still be maintained. be. Therefore, as in the present mode, when the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, it is configured to shift to the setting change mode before returning to the game progress mode in which the game can progress. Then, the administrator can correct the setting information of the lottery setting to the originally intended setting information before the pachinko machine 10 returns to the game progress mode.

Furthermore, in this aspect, when the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the above-described information relating to the game state may not be initialized. According to such a configuration, even if the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the information regarding the game state is not initialized (erased). It is possible to restart the game while maintaining the state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by forced initialization of the main RAM 64 due to noise or the like.

In this embodiment, the setting change mode is entered after the main RAM 64 is initialized. However, the setting change mode is not entered after the main RAM 64 is initialized. 1”), and then shift to a game progress mode in which the game can be progressed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the main RAM 64 is initialized, the information about the game state is not erased.

<Aspect 82>
Among the above-described modes, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, it may be configured to notify whether or not the lottery setting has been changed in the setting change mode. A specific description will be given below.

In this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 causes the speaker 46 to output a voice suggesting that the lottery setting has been changed, and the lottery setting is changed. The fact that the lottery setting has been changed is notified by displaying a character string suggesting that the lottery setting has been changed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

Specifically, for example, when the main controller 60 shifts to the setting change mode, the setting information of the current lottery setting is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64 . Then, the setting information of the lottery setting newly determined in the setting change mode is compared with the saved setting information of the lottery setting before the change. to the sound emission control device 90.

When receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound suggesting that the lottery setting has been changed. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The lottery setting has been changed." Further, when receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information suggesting that the lottery setting has been changed. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for displaying a character string such as "the lottery setting has been changed" on the pattern display device 41, and receives the command. Then, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The lottery setting has been changed." In addition, upon receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 to alternately repeat turning on and off with the maximum luminance and blinking.

On the other hand, when the setting change mode is terminated while the lottery settings are maintained without being changed, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 outputs a voice suggesting that the lottery settings are maintained without being changed. By outputting from 46 and displaying a character string suggesting that the lottery setting is maintained without being changed on the pattern display device 41, it is reported that the lottery setting is maintained without being changed.

Specifically, for example, when the main controller 60 shifts to the setting change mode, the setting information of the current lottery setting is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64 . Then, the setting information of the lottery setting newly determined in the setting change mode is compared with the saved setting information of the lottery setting before the change. A setting maintenance command, which is a command indicating that the settings are maintained without being changed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When receiving the setting maintenance command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound suggesting that the lottery setting is maintained without being changed. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The lottery setting has not been changed." Further, when receiving the setting maintenance command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information suggesting that the lottery setting is maintained without being changed. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for displaying a character string such as "the lottery setting has not been changed" on the symbol display device 41, and transmits the command. The received display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The lottery setting has not been changed." Further, when receiving the setting maintenance command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 to light up instead of blinking.

Thus, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the fact that the lottery setting has been changed is notified. You can check whether

In particular, in the mode 81 above, in the setting change mode after the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the player who has been playing the game on the pachinko machine 10 is not set by the administrator for the lottery setting. It is assumed that there will be doubts as to whether or not it has been changed. However, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed, the fact that the lottery setting has been changed is notified, so the player can confirm whether or not the lottery setting has been changed. More specifically, it is possible to allow the player to grasp only whether or not the lottery setting has been changed in the setting change mode without making the player grasp what kind of setting information the current lottery setting is. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having to restart the game with an uneasy feeling while not knowing whether or not the lottery setting has been changed by the administrator.

In this mode, when the lottery setting is not changed, it is configured to notify that the lottery setting is maintained without being changed, but when the lottery setting is not changed, nothing is notified. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which notification is made in a manner different from that when the lottery setting is changed, such as "the setting change mode is terminated." Even with such a configuration, the player can determine that the lottery setting has not been changed if there is no notification that ``the lottery setting has been changed.'' It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation must be restarted.

<Aspect 83>
In aspect 82 above, main controller 60 may be configured to include setting information of the changed lottery setting in the setting change command, which is a command indicating that the lottery setting has been changed. Then, each time the sound emission control device 90 receives a setting change command including the setting information of the changed lottery setting, it sequentially stores the setting information of the changed lottery setting in the RAM serving as a storage means provided therein. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Then, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to display the change history of the lottery setting on the pattern display device 41 when a predetermined operation is received from the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

According to such a configuration, without using the limited storage capacity of the main RAM 64 of the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to store the change history of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. A manager of the pachinko machine 10 can easily confirm how the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been operated by the change history of the lottery setting displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加.

<Aspect 84>
Among the above modes, in the configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, it is also possible to implement the setting confirmation mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the current lottery setting although the lottery setting cannot be changed. good. A specific description will be given below.

The pachinko machine 10 of this aspect shifts to the setting confirmation mode after a game stop state in which the game cannot be progressed when a specific operation is executed under a specific condition.

In this aspect, specific conditions refer to a state in which all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Condition 1: The special pattern is not fluctuating in the special figure unit 37 Condition 2: The normal pattern is not fluctuating in the general pattern unit 38 Condition 3: The variable winning device 36 as a special electric accessory is not operating Condition 4: The electric accessory 34a as a normal electric accessory is not operating Condition 5: A predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed since the game ball was last shot That is, a specific condition The lower state is a state in which even if the progress of the game is stopped (interrupted), the result of the game is not affected.

Further, in this aspect, the specific operation is an operation of pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10 .

That is, when the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect detects that the RAM clear button has been pressed during the game progress mode in which the game can progress, the above specific conditions are met. If it is determined that the specific conditions are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is entered. Then, when it is detected that the RAM clear button is not pressed again, the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed is restored.

In the setting confirmation mode, the main controller 60 executes random number update processing for updating the jackpot random number counter and power supply monitoring processing, but other processing necessary for the progress of the game (various inputs in the timer interrupt processing) is executed. ball processing, etc.) is not executed and the game is put in a stopped state (a state in which the game cannot be progressed), and setting information indicating the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display section 45z. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed on the information display section 45z.

Furthermore, during the game progress mode, regardless of the result of the winning lottery or the result of the electric accessory open lottery, the accessory (hereinafter also referred to as the always-operating accessory) always continues to perform a certain action (predetermined action). , the main controller 60 continues the operation of the always-operating role even when the game progress mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, after shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the main controller 60 is configured to continue executing the control process of the always-operating character in addition to the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process. Then, when returning to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed after finishing the setting confirmation mode, the main controller 60 restarts the execution of other processes necessary for the progress of the game, which have been avoided. do.

According to such a configuration, even at the timing of shifting from the game progress mode to the setting confirmation mode and the timing of returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, the operation of the always-operating role is constant without stopping or changing. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from shooting a game ball aiming at the timing when the action of the always-operating accessory stops or changes, thereby obtaining an illegally advantageous result. can be done.

In this mode, the operation of the always-operating role continues even during the setting confirmation mode, but the operation of the always-operating role is temporarily stopped at the timing when the game progress mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. Then, at the timing of returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, the operation of the always-operating accessory that has been stopped may be resumed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing as compared with the configuration in which the action of the always-operating accessory is continued. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the actions of the always-operating accessories are continuously connected during the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. Further, according to such a configuration, when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, the operation of the always-operating role is resumed from the same state as at the timing when the game progress mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, the always-operating accessory is changed from a state different from the state at the timing of shifting from the game progress mode to the setting confirmation mode (for example, a state disadvantageous or advantageous to the player). It is possible to avoid the situation where the operation of is restarted and the player has to restart the game from a state different from the state in which the game was stopped.

Further, in this aspect, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button is adopted as the specific operation for shifting to the setting confirmation mode, but various operations can be adopted as the specific operation. For example, as the specific operation, an operation of inserting a setting change key into a setting change keyhole and turning it to the setting change side may be adopted. According to such a configuration, a setting change key is required to confirm the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, so that a person who does not have the setting change key can change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress what can be confirmed.

<Aspect 85>
In the above aspect 84, the operation of the always-operating role is continued even during the setting confirmation mode. Alternatively, the operation may be stopped after being moved to the initial position. A specific description will be given below.

The main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when shifting from the game progress mode to the setting confirmation mode, keeps the always-operating role until the constantly-operating role shifts to the initial state (or moves to the initial position). continue control processing. Then, when the main control device 60 detects that the always-operating role has transitioned to the initial state (or moved to the initial position), the main control device 60 stops the execution of the always-operating role's control processing and starts the operation of the always-operating role. stop. After that, when the main controller 60 ends the setting confirmation mode and returns to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed, the main controller 60 performs the control processing of the always-operating role and the control processing of the game that has been avoided. Resume execution of other processes.

In addition, when the main controller 60 returns to the game progress mode from the setting confirmation mode before detecting that the always-operating role has shifted to the initial state (or moved to the initial position), the always-operating role continues the control processing of . That is, in this aspect, the always-operating accessory is configured so as not to stop operating in a state other than the initial state (or a position other than the initial position).

According to such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles in the always-operating accessory that may cause troubles if the operation is stopped in a state other than the initial state (or at a position other than the initial position). can be done.

<Aspect 86>
Among the above-described modes, in the configuration capable of executing the setting confirmation mode, it may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is in progress during the setting confirmation mode. A specific description will be given below.

In this aspect, when main controller 60 starts the setting confirmation mode, main controller 60 transmits a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, to sound emission control device 90 .

When receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "Setting confirmation mode is in progress". Further, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "in setting confirmation mode" on the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100, and displays the received command. The control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "in setting confirmation mode". In addition, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with the maximum luminance.

After finishing the setting confirmation mode, main controller 60 transmits a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode is finished, to sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving the setting confirmation mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

Thus, according to this aspect, the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode is notified by the speaker 46, the pattern display device 41, and the various lamps 47, so that the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode. can be easily recognized. In addition, even if an unauthorized person illegally shifts the pachinko machine 10 to the setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode. Since the notification is given by the lamp 47, surrounding players and administrators can notice that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode by an unauthorized person. Therefore, it is possible to suppress confirmation of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

Furthermore, when starting the setting confirmation mode, the main controller 60 transmits information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. Then, when the setting confirmation mode is terminated, the main controller 60 transmits information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been terminated to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal.

According to such a configuration, even when the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is not in the vicinity of the pachinko machine 10, the presence of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode can be confirmed by the management screen of the hall computer. It becomes possible to recognize. Therefore, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode by an unauthorized person, the administrator can confirm the presence of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode through the management screen of the hall computer. can recognize. Therefore, it is possible to suppress confirmation of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

<Aspect 87>
Among the above aspects, in the configuration where the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be executed, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be executed only after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off once. good. That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off once and a predetermined operation is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 executes the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. may be A specific description will be given below.

It should be noted that the "keyhole for changing settings" and the "key for changing settings" in each of the above modes are not limited to the case of shifting to the setting change mode for changing the lottery settings in this mode and the modes described below. Since they are also used when shifting to a setting confirmation mode for confirming settings, they are also simply referred to as a "setting keyhole" and a "setting key", respectively.

In this aspect, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a power switch, a RAM clear button, a setting keyhole, a setting change button, and an information display section 45z. ing. After the pachinko machine 10 of this mode is turned on by operating the power switch and the execution of the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed is started, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off. Otherwise, it is configured so that it cannot shift to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect executes the setting change mode when all of the following conditions A1 to A3 are satisfied when the power is turned on (ON).
Condition A1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open. Condition A2: The setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and positioned on the ON side. Condition A3: The RAM clear button is pressed. being

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect executes the setting confirmation mode when all of the following conditions B1 to B3 are satisfied when the power is turned on (ON).
Condition B1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open. Condition B2: The setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and positioned on the ON side. Condition B3: The RAM clear button is pressed. not

Below, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 explains an example of the work process for shifting the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the execution of the game progress mode is started, and then the pachinko machine An example of the processing performed in 10 will be described.

FIG. 49 is a process chart showing the work process when the manager changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In step W101, the administrator inserts the key into the cylinder lock 17 of the pachinko machine 10 whose lottery setting is to be changed, turns it to the open side, and rotates the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 to open it. At the same time, the front door frame 14 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 13 to open. By rotating the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11, the administrator can access various operation units provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Next, proceeding to step W102, the administrator operates the power switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn off the power. Next, the process proceeds to step W103.

In step W103, the administrator inserts a setting key into a setting keyhole provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and turns it to the setting change side (hereinafter also referred to as ON side). Next, proceeding to step W104, the administrator turns on the pachinko machine 10 by operating the power switch while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the setting change mode after starting (step W105), and setting information of the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display section 45z (step W106). Specifically, for example, when the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 is "1", "1" is lit and displayed in the information display section 45z. Next, the process proceeds to step W107.

In step W107, the administrator presses a setting change button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to change the setting information. Specifically, for example, every time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z changes from "1"→"2"→"3"→"4"→"5". →"6"→"1"→"2"... so that the administrator presses the setting change button until the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z becomes the desired setting information. . Next, the process proceeds to step W108.

In step W108, the administrator confirms that the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z is the desired setting information, and then presses the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. to confirm the changed setting information. Next, proceeding to step W109, the administrator returns the setting key to the OFF side and removes the key from the setting keyhole. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed (step W110), and the game history information is displayed on the information display section 45z (step W111). Next, in step W112, the administrator closes the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 and removes the key from the cylinder lock 17. FIG. Through such a process, the administrator can change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

FIG. 50 is a process chart showing the work process when the manager confirms the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In step W201, the administrator inserts the key into the cylinder lock 17 of the pachinko machine 10 whose lottery setting is to be confirmed, turns it to the open side, and rotates the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 to open it. At the same time, the front door frame 14 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 13 to open. By rotating the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11, the administrator can access various operation units provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Next, proceeding to step W202, the administrator operates the power switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn off the power. Next, the process proceeds to step W203.

In step W203, the administrator inserts a setting key into a setting keyhole provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and turns it to the ON side. Next, proceeding to step W204, the administrator operates the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the setting confirmation mode after starting (step W205), and setting information of the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display section 45z (step W206). Specifically, for example, when the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 is "1", "1" is flashed on the information display section 45z. The administrator can confirm the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 by confirming the setting information blinking on the information display section 45z. Next, the process proceeds to step W207.

In step W207, the administrator confirms the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z, returns the setting key to the OFF side, and removes the key from the setting keyhole. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed (step W208), and the game history information is displayed on the information display section 45z (step W209). Next, in step W210, the administrator closes the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 and removes the key from the cylinder lock 17. FIG. Through such a process, the administrator can confirm the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect will be described.

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11201, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11202 to execute internal function register setting processing. After that, the process advances to step S11203 to execute processing for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered on and activated. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined warning sound. After executing step S11203, the process advances to step S11204.

In step S11204, it is determined whether or not the power restoration flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information stored in the register of the main CPU 62x (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) Save to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 .

If it is determined in step S11204 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11204: YES), the process proceeds to step S11205 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. FIG. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the flow advances to step S11206 to determine whether the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal. checksum value). If it is determined in step S11206 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11206: YES), the process proceeds to step S11208, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S11204 described above (step S11204: NO), and if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S11206 described above (step S11206: NO ), the process advances to step S11207 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal. This is a flag indicating that the state is not normal. After executing step S11207, the process advances to step S11208.

In step S11208, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11208 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11208: NO), the process advances to step S11209 to determine whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when

If it is determined in step S11209 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11209: NO), the process advances to step S11210 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. determine whether

If it is determined in step S11210 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11210: NO), the process advances to step S11211 to execute power recovery processing for returning to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11211, the process advances to step S11212 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 . After that, it shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, the interrupt prohibition setting, the random number update process, and the power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11210 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11210: YES), the process advances to step S11213 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11213, the above-described normal game processing is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process are executed, but other processes necessary for the progress of the game (for example, entering a ball for the starting hole) are executed. processing, game round control processing, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, the state is apparently the same as the normal game progress mode, but the player cannot proceed with the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode.

On the other hand, in step S11209 described above, if it is determined that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11209: YES), the process proceeds to step S11214, and the RAM abnormality flag is ON. Determine whether or not there is

If it is determined in step S11214 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11214: NO), the process advances to step S11215 to execute setting confirmation processing. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S11215, the process advances to step S11216 to execute the above-described power restoration process to return to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. After that, the process advances to step S11217 to turn off the power recovery flag. After that, it shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, the interrupt prohibition setting, the random number update process, and the power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11214 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11214: YES), the process advances to step S11218 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After step S11218 is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) are executed. (for example, ball entry processing for the starting port, game round control processing, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, the state is apparently the same as the normal game progress mode, but the player cannot proceed with the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11208 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11208: YES), the process advances to step S11219 to check whether all of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are ON. determine whether or not

If it is determined in step S11219 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11219: NO), the process proceeds to step S11220, and the RAM abnormality flag is ON. Determine whether or not If it is determined in step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11220: NO), the process proceeds to step S11221.

In step S11221, first RAM clear processing is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clearing process, a first RAM clearing process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clearing process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46 . After step S11221 is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11220: YES), the process advances to step S11222 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11222, the above-described normal game processing is performed. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) are executed. (for example, ball entry processing for the starting port, game round control processing, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, the state is apparently the same as the normal game progress mode, but the player cannot proceed with the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode.

In step S11219 described above, if it is determined that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11219: YES), the process proceeds to step S11223 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. determine whether or not

If it is determined in step S11223 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11223: NO), the process advances to step S11224 to execute the above-described first RAM clear processing. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11225 to execute setting change processing. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed, and a process of receiving a change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. After step S11225 is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11223 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11223: YES), the process advances to step S11226 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "RAM is abnormal." After executing step S11226, the process advances to step S11227.

In step S11227, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64 . That is, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, setting information for lottery setting is erased in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like. Here, the reason why the second RAM clearing process for erasing the setting information is executed instead of the first RAM clearing process when the RAM abnormality flag is ON will be described. If the RAM abnormality flag is ON, there is a possibility that the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. can take only numerical values within a predetermined range (for example, numerical values from 1 to 6), there is a possibility that numerical values outside the predetermined range are stored. In addition, in the second RAM clear processing of this aspect, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Also, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF by the second RAM clearing process. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11228 to execute setting change processing. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. After executing step S11228, the above-described normal game processing is performed.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of steps S11225 and S11228 in FIG.

In step S11301, setting change notification start processing is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress. Please change the setting." Further, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for causing the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "You are in the setting change mode. Please change the setting." Then, the display control device 100 that has received the command causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "You are in the setting change mode. Please change the setting." In addition, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with maximum luminance.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S11301, the process advances to step S11302.

In step S11302, control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is lit and displayed on the information display section 45z. After that, the flow advances to step S11303 to determine whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6". judge. If it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, noise, etc. If information other than numerical values is stored by , the flow advances to step S11304 to change the setting information to the initial value. In this aspect, "1" is stored as an initial value in the setting information. After that, the process advances to step S11305.

In step S11305, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11305 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed (step S11305: NO), the flow advances to step S11306 to determine whether or not the setting change button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S11306: YES), the process advances to step S11307 to update the setting information of lottery setting. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value information stored as the setting information. However, when the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical value information stored as the setting information is "6", the numerical value information is updated to "1". After that, returning to step S11303 described above, it is determined whether or not the updated setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S11306: NO), the process returns to step S11303 without executing the process of step S11307, and the setting information is set to the predetermined value. Determine whether the numerical value is within the range.

If it is determined in step S11305 that the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S11305: YES), the flow advances to step S11308 to determine whether or not the setting key has turned OFF. If it is determined in step S11308 that the setting key is not on the OFF side (step S11308: NO), step S11308 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11308 that the setting key has turned OFF (step S11308: YES), the process proceeds to step S11309. That is, after the RAM clear button is pressed, an infinite loop is repeated until the setting key is turned OFF, and the process does not proceed to step S11309.

In step S11309, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z ends. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11310.

In step S11310, setting change notification end processing is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode is ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S11310, this setting change process ends. After executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the lottery setting after the change is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information displays the relevant information on the management screen. The configuration may be such that the setting information of the lottery setting after the change of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing setting confirmation processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of aspect 87 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S11215 in FIG.

In step S11401, setting confirmation notification start processing is executed. In the setting confirmation notification start process, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "Setting confirmation mode is in progress". Further, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "in setting confirmation mode" on the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100, and displays the received command. The control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "in setting confirmation mode". In addition, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with maximum luminance.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification start process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step S11401, the process advances to step S11402.

In step S11402, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is flashed on the information display section 45z. After that, the process proceeds to step S11403.

In step S11403, it is determined whether or not the setting key has been turned to the OFF side. If it is determined in step S11403 that the setting key is not on the OFF side (step S11403: NO), step S11403 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11403 that the setting key has turned OFF (step S11403: YES), the process proceeds to step S11404. In other words, an infinite loop is repeated until the setting key is turned to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S11404.

In step S11404, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z ends. After that, the process advances to step S11405.

In step S11405, setting confirmation notification end processing is executed. In the setting confirmation notification end process, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving the setting confirmation mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification end process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After step S11405 is executed, this setting confirmation process ends.

As described above, in this aspect, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (when the power is turned on), the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all turned on, and , when the RAM clear switch is ON, the setting change mode is executed, and when the power is turned on (when the power is turned ON), the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all turned ON. and the RAM clear switch is OFF, the setting confirmation mode is executed. That is, in this aspect, it is configured that it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the power of the pachinko machine 10 that has been started (for example, the game progress mode is being executed) is turned on. In order to shift the activated pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine 10 must be turned off once and then turned on again while performing the above-described predetermined operation. is configured as

In general, game halls are arranged so that a person other than the manager cannot operate the power switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Even if there is a person who tries to change or check the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as an unauthorized person), the unauthorized person who is not the administrator can access the power supply provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Operating the switch is difficult. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally shifting the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Furthermore, in this mode, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the speaker 46 outputs a voice or an alarm indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started, so that an unauthorized person can set the lottery without being noticed by the surroundings. can be more difficult to change or verify. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally changing or confirming the lottery setting.

Furthermore, in this aspect, in order to shift the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is necessary to open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, so that the unauthorized person is not noticed by the surroundings. It can make it even more difficult to change or check the lottery settings immediately. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally changing or confirming the lottery setting.

Furthermore, in this aspect, during the start-up process from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the execution of the game progress mode is started (the period during which the processes from step S11201 to step S11228 in FIG. 51 are executed In the middle), the game history information is not displayed on the information display section 45z, and the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed. That is, during the start-up process, the game history information is not displayed on the information display section 45z, and only the setting information of the lottery setting can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the administrator from wondering whether the information displayed on the information display section 45z is the setting information of the lottery setting or the game history information during the start-up process. , it is possible to prevent the administrator from erroneously recognizing the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z as game history information.

Furthermore, in this aspect, even if an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode is performed when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the RAM determination value of the main side RAM 64 is normal or not, and the RAM determination is performed. When it is determined that the value is not normal, the setting confirmation mode is not executed, and after notifying that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, the game is not shifted to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation mode and the game progress mode from being executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has become an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this aspect, the operation for executing the setting change mode includes an operation of pressing the RAM clear button, and the pachinko machine 10 performs RAM clear processing ( first RAM clear processing or second RAM clear processing). That is, in order to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode, the administrator operates the RAM clear button, and the pachinko machine 10 also executes RAM clear processing when executing the setting change mode. In general, an administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 recognizes that RAM clear processing is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed. Therefore, according to the configuration of this aspect, when the administrator operates the RAM clear button to execute the setting change mode, not only the setting change mode is executed but also the RAM clear processing is executed. It is possible to strongly recognize that it will be done. As a result, for example, when the administrator wants to start the pachinko machine 10 while maintaining the game state such as the high probability mode and restart the game progress mode from the state at the time of the previous power OFF, that is, the pachinko machine 10 If the RAM clearing process should not be executed at startup, it is possible to reliably determine that the setting change mode that accompanies the execution of the RAM clearing process should not be executed.

Furthermore, in this aspect, among the information stored in the main RAM 64, it is possible to execute a first RAM clearing process in which the setting information for the lottery setting is not erased, and a second RAM clearing process in which the setting information is also erased. , a processing step in which information stored in the main-side RAM 64 is to be deleted except for the setting information, and a processing step in which the setting information is also deleted. can be realized. For example, if the setting information is normal and should be maintained, and other information should be erased, the first RAM clearing process is executed, and the setting information becomes an abnormal value unintended by the administrator. It is possible to implement a configuration that executes the second RAM clearing process in the case of a processing step that may be closed.

Furthermore, in this aspect, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the power recovery flag is not ON when the power is turned ON and determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the main side RAM 64 After notifying that it is abnormal, it does not shift to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off once and then turned on again, the game cannot be started unless the operation for executing the setting change mode is performed and the setting change mode is executed. It is configured not to execute a game progress mode in which progress is possible. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game progress mode while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main side RAM 64 has become an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. can.

Furthermore, in this aspect, when the setting change mode is executed, the RAM clearing process is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the progress of the game due to a mismatch with the information stored in the side RAM 64.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, after executing the first RAM clearing process in step S11224 of FIG. 51, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11225. The configuration may be such that the first RAM clearing process is executed after the setting change mode) is executed. With such a configuration, while maintaining the setting information of the lottery setting set by the setting change process, various flag information indicating the game state and various control information stored in the main side RAM 64 can be erased. can be done. Furthermore, when it is determined in step S11223 in FIG. 51 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, after executing the setting change process (setting change mode), the first RAM clear process is executed, and then the setting change process is executed. If the setting key is turned to the OFF side and pulled out of the setting keyhole without changing the lottery setting (or without confirming the changed setting information) in (setting change mode), first RAM clear processing is performed. It may be configured to shift to the game progress mode without executing. According to such a configuration, setting change processing (setting change mode) is executed by turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear button while the setting key is unintentionally turned to the ON side by mistake. Even in such a case, by not changing the setting information of the lottery setting (or not fixing the changed setting information), the execution of the first RAM clearing process is avoided, and the game progresses from the state at the time of the previous power OFF. It is possible to restart the mode.

Further, in this embodiment, after executing the first RAM clearing process in step S11224 of FIG. 51, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11225. , the setting change process (setting change mode) may be executed. Even with such a configuration, after the lottery setting is erased by the second RAM clearing process and the initial value (for example, "1") is stored as the setting information, the lottery setting is changed to desired setting information by the setting change process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed with the setting information of the lottery setting set to the initial value (for example, "1").

Further, in this embodiment, after the second RAM clearing process is executed in step S11227 of FIG. 51, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11228. The configuration may be such that the first RAM clearing process is executed after the setting change mode) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to erase various information stored in the main side RAM 64 determined to be abnormal while maintaining the setting information of the lottery setting set by the setting change process.

Further, in this aspect, after executing the second RAM clearing process in step S11227 of FIG. 51, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11228. , the setting change process (setting change mode) may be executed. According to such a configuration, even if the setting information of the lottery setting is an abnormal value and the setting information of the lottery setting is maintained as an abnormal value even after the first RAM clearing process is executed. Also, the setting information of the lottery setting can be reset to an appropriate value by setting change processing (setting change mode).

Further, in this aspect, when it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON in steps S11210, S11214 and S11220 of FIG. However, instead of this configuration, when it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON in steps S11210, S11214 and S11220, the RAM abnormality notification process is executed, and then the second RAM clear process is executed to set the lottery. may be set to an initial value (for example, "1"), and then the game progress mode may be entered.

Further, in this aspect, after executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) in step S11215 of FIG. Instead of this configuration, the configuration may be such that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed after the power recovery process and the process of turning off the power recovery flag are executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the setting information is updated when the setting change button is pressed in step S11306 in FIG. 52, and the setting information is confirmed when the RAM clear button is pressed in step S11305. The operation to update and confirm the setting information is not limited to this. For example, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the setting information is updated, and when the RAM clear button is continuously pressed for a predetermined time or more, the setting information is confirmed. It may be configured to allow According to this configuration, the setting change button can be omitted, so the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Alternatively, the setting information may be determined when the setting key is turned off, and the setting information may be determined when a game ball is detected by a ball entry detection sensor provided at a predetermined ball entrance. may be configured.

Further, in this aspect, the condition for executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode includes that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in an open state. It is not essential for the condition that the door frame 14 is in the open state. Alternatively, the conditions may include that the front door frame 14 is in an open state, but not include that the inner frame 13 is in an open state. Also, neither the inner frame 13 nor the front door frame 14 may be included in the condition.

In this mode, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z in the setting change mode is displayed in a lighting mode, and the setting information displayed in the information display section 45z in the setting confirmation mode is in a blinking display mode. However, the display manner of the setting information in each mode is not limited to these. , the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z may be configured to be a lighting display mode.

Further, in this aspect, after the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are finished, the game progress mode is executed as it is. A predetermined operation for executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by temporarily turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift to a standby state in which the game cannot be progressed without executing the game progress mode. The configuration may be such that the game progress mode is executed when the power is turned on without

Further, in this aspect, in step S11302 of the setting change process (FIG. 52), the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 (for example, the setting information at the time of the previous power OFF) is lit and displayed on the information display section 45z. However, instead of this configuration, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is irrespective of the value at the start of the setting change process. may be set to an initial value (for example, "1"), and the setting information set to the initial value may be lit and displayed on the information display section 45z. With such a configuration, the RAM clearing process for erasing (clearing to 0) all the information including the setting information for the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64 is executed before executing the setting change process. It becomes possible to

Further, in this aspect, during the period in which the inner frame 13 is open, the inner frame 13 It is good also as a structure which continues alerting|reporting that is an open state. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "the inner frame is open" or a predetermined alarm sound. Similarly, during the period in which the front door frame 14 is open, the front door frame 14 is opened regardless of whether the setting change process (setting change mode) or setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is being executed. It is good also as a structure which continues alerting|reporting that it is an open state. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "the door is open" or a predetermined alarm sound. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for an unauthorized person to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute setting change processing (setting change mode) and setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) without being noticed by surrounding people. can.

<Aspect 88>
In the above aspect 87, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the power recovery flag is not ON when the power is turned ON and determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. After notifying that it is, it is configured not to shift to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed, but instead of this configuration, when the power is turned on, if the power recovery flag is not ON When it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal, even if the operation for executing the setting change mode is not performed, it is notified that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. , the setting change mode may be executed, and then the game progress mode may be entered. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 88 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11501, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11502 to execute internal function register setting processing. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11503 to execute processing for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered on and activated. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined warning sound. After executing step S11503, the process advances to step S11504.

In step S11504, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information stored in the register of the main CPU 62x (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) Save to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 .

If it is determined in step S11504 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11504: YES), the process advances to step S11505 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. FIG. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process advances to step S11506 to determine whether the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( checksum value). If it is determined in step S11506 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11506: YES), the process proceeds to step S11507.

In step S11507, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11507 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11507: NO), the process advances to step S11508 to determine whether all of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are ON. judge. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when

If it is determined in step S11508 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11508: NO), the process proceeds to step S11509, and the state at the time of the previous power OFF is restored. Execute the power recovery process to Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11509, the process advances to step S11510 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 . After that, it shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number updating process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11508 that the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON (step S11508: YES), the process advances to step S11511 to execute setting confirmation processing. . The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53 of aspect 87 described above. After executing step S11511, the process advances to step S11512 to execute the above-described power restoration process to return to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. After that, the process advances to step S11513 to turn off the power recovery flag. After that, it shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number updating process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

If it is determined in step S11507 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11507: YES), the process advances to step S11514 to check whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. determine whether or not

If it is determined in step S11514 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11514: NO), the process proceeds to step S11515.

In step S11515, first RAM clear processing is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clearing process, a first RAM clearing process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clearing process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46 . After step S11515 is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing.

In step S11514 described above, when it is determined that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11514: YES), the process proceeds to step S11516, and the above-described first RAM clearing process is executed. do. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11517 to execute setting change processing. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of aspect 87 described above. After step S11517k is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S11504 described above (step S11504: NO), and if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S11506 described above (step S11506: NO ), the process advances to step S11518 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "RAM is abnormal." After executing step S11518, the process advances to step S11519.

In step S11519, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64 . That is, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, setting information for lottery setting is erased in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like. In addition, in the second RAM clear processing of this aspect, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11520 to execute setting change processing. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of aspect 87 described above. After step S11520 is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing.

As described above, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON even when an operation for executing the setting change mode is not performed when the power is turned ON, and If it is determined that the RAM determination value of the main side RAM 64 is normal or not, it is notified that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, and then the second RAM is cleared. After executing the processing and setting change mode to fix the setting information, the game is shifted to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game progress mode while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main side RAM 64 has become an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. can.

For example, when it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON even if an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode is performed when the power is turned ON, and the RAM determination value of the main side RAM 64 is normal. If it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal, the setting confirmation mode is not executed, and after notifying that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, the second RAM clearing process is performed. And after the setting change mode is executed to confirm the setting information, the game is shifted to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game progress mode while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main side RAM 64 has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator. can.

<Aspect 89>
In the main processing (FIG. 51) of mode 87, after determining whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S11208), it is determined whether all of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are ON. (Steps S11209 and S11219), but instead of this configuration, after determining whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON, the RAM A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the clear button has been pressed. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 89 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11601, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11602 to execute internal function register setting processing. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11603 to execute processing for informing that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered on and activated. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined warning sound. After executing step S11603, the process advances to step S11604.

In step S11604, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly Save to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64 . When the saving of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for restoring the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main-side RAM 64 .

If it is determined in step S11604 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11604: YES), the process advances to step S11605 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. FIG. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the flow advances to step S11606 to determine whether the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal. checksum value). If it is determined in step S11606 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11606: YES), the process proceeds to step S11608, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S11604 described above (step S11604: NO), and if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S11606 described above (step S11606: NO ), the process advances to step S11607 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal. This is a flag indicating that the state is not normal. After executing step S11607, the process advances to step S11608.

In step S11608, it is determined whether or not the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when If it is determined in step S11608 that at least one of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch is not ON (step S11608: NO), the process proceeds to step S11609 to determine whether the RAM clear button is ON. determine whether

If it is determined in step S11609 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11609: NO), the process advances to step S11610 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11610 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11610: NO), the process advances to step S11611 to execute power restoration processing for returning to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11611, the process advances to step S11612 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 . After that, it shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number updating process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11610 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11610: YES), the process advances to step S11613 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After step S11613 is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing (power failure monitoring processing) are executed, but other processing necessary for the progress of the game (for example, starting ball entry processing for the mouth, game turn control processing, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, the state is apparently the same as the normal game progress mode, but the player cannot proceed with the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11609 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11609: YES), the process advances to step S11614 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11614 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11614: NO), the process proceeds to step S11615.

In step S11615, first RAM clear processing is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clearing process, a first RAM clearing process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clearing process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46 . After step S11615 is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11614 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11614: YES), the process advances to step S11616 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After step S11616 is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) are executed. (for example, ball entry processing for the starting port, game turn control processing, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, the state is apparently the same as the normal game progress mode, but the player cannot proceed with the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode.

In step S11608 described above, if it is determined that all of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are ON (step S11608: YES), the process proceeds to step S11617 to determine whether the RAM clear button is ON. determine whether or not

If it is determined in step S11617 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11617: YES), the process advances to step S11618 to determine whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11618 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11618: NO), the process advances to step S11619 to execute setting confirmation processing. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53 of aspect 87 described above. After executing step S11619, the process advances to step S11620 to execute the above-described power restoration process to return to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. After that, the process advances to step S11621 to turn off the power recovery flag. After that, it shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above aspects are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11618 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11618: YES), the process advances to step S11622 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11622, the above-described normal game processing is performed. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) are executed. (for example, ball entry processing for the starting port, game round control processing, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, the state is apparently the same as the normal game progress mode, but the player cannot proceed with the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode.

In step S11217 described above, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11217: YES), the process advances to step S11223 to determine whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11623 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11623: NO), the process advances to step S11624 to execute the above-described first RAM clear processing. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11625 to execute setting change processing. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed, and a process of receiving a change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of aspect 87 described above. After step S11625 is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11623 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11623: YES), the process advances to step S11626 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "RAM is abnormal." After executing step S11626, the process advances to step S11627.

In step S11627, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64 . That is, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, setting information for lottery setting is erased in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like. Here, the reason why the second clearing process for erasing the setting information is executed instead of the first clearing process when the RAM abnormality flag is ON will be described. If the RAM abnormality flag is ON, there is a possibility that the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. can take only numerical values within a predetermined range (for example, numerical values from 1 to 6), there is a possibility that numerical values outside the predetermined range are stored. In addition, in the second RAM clear processing of this aspect, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Also, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF by the second clearing process. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11628 to execute setting change processing. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of aspect 87 described above. After step S11628 is executed, the process shifts to the above-described normal game processing.

According to the configuration of this aspect described above, the same effects as those of aspect 87 can be obtained. In addition, various modified configurations described in the aspect 87 can also be applied to this aspect.

<Aspect 90>
In the main processing (FIG. 54) in aspect 88, after determining whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S11507), it is determined whether all of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are ON. (Steps S11508 and S11514), but instead of this configuration, it is determined whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON, and then the RAM A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the clear button has been pressed. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing a part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 90 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11701, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11702 to execute internal function register setting processing. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11703 to execute processing for informing that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered on and activated. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined warning sound. After executing step S11703, the process advances to step S11704.

In step S11704, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information stored in the register of the main CPU 62x (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) Save to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 .

If it is determined in step S11704 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11704: YES), the process advances to step S11705 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. FIG. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the flow advances to step S11706 to determine whether the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal. checksum value). If it is determined in step S11706 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11706: YES), the process proceeds to step S11707.

In step S11707, it is determined whether or not the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when If it is determined in step S11707 that at least one of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch is not ON (step S11707: NO), the process proceeds to step S11708 to determine whether the RAM clear button is ON. determine whether

If it is determined in step S11708 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11708: NO), the process advances to step S11709 to execute power recovery processing for returning to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11709, the process advances to step S11710 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 . After that, it shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above aspects are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11708 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11708: YES), the process advances to step S11711 to execute first RAM clear processing. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clearing process, a first RAM clearing process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clearing process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11711, the above-described normal game processing is performed.

In step S11707 described above, if it is determined that all of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are ON (step S11707: YES), the process proceeds to step S11712 to determine whether the RAM clear button is ON. determine whether or not

If it is determined in step S11712 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11712: NO), the process advances to step S11713 to execute setting confirmation processing. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53 of aspect 87 described above. After executing step S11713, the process advances to step S11714 to execute the above-described power restoration process to return to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11715 to turn off the power recovery flag. After that, it shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above aspects are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

If it is determined in step S11712 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11712: YES), the process advances to step S11716 to execute the above-described first RAM clear processing. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11717 to execute setting change processing. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of aspect 87 described above. After executing step S11717, the above-described normal game processing is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S11704 described above (step S11704: NO), and if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S11706 described above (step S11706: NO ), the process advances to step S11718 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "RAM is abnormal." After executing step S11718, the process advances to step S11719.

In step S11719, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64 . That is, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, setting information for lottery setting is erased in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like. In addition, in the second RAM clear processing of this aspect, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11720 to execute setting change processing. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of aspect 87 described above. After executing step S11720, the above-described normal game processing is performed.

According to the configuration of this aspect described above, the same effects as those of the aspect 88 can be obtained. In addition, various modified configurations described in aspect 88 above can also be applied to this aspect.

<Aspect 91>
In the setting change processing (FIG. 52) in each of the above modes, the setting information for the lottery setting is determined when the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11305). A configuration may be adopted in which the setting information of the lottery setting is determined when the setting is turned off. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 91 of the first embodiment. The same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those included in the setting change process shown in FIG. The main difference from the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 is that in FIG. The points are that the process for confirming the changed setting information is to turn the setting key to the OFF side (step S11305a), and that the process of step S11308 in FIG. 52 is omitted along with this. A specific description will be given below.

In step S11301, setting change notification start processing is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "Setting change mode is in progress". Further, when receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "Setting change mode is in progress", and displays the received command. The control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "in setting change mode". Further, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with the maximum luminance.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S11301, the process advances to step S11302.

In step S11302, control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is lit and displayed on the information display section 45z. After that, the flow advances to step S11303 to determine whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6". judge. If it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305a. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, noise, etc. If information other than numerical values is stored by , the flow advances to step S11304 to change the setting information to the initial value. In this aspect, "1" is stored as an initial value in the setting information. After that, the process proceeds to step S11305a.

In step S11305a, it is determined whether or not the setting key has been turned to the OFF side. If it is determined in step S11305a that the setting key is not on the OFF side (step S11305a: NO), the process advances to step S11306 to determine whether or not the setting change button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S11306: YES), the process advances to step S11307 to update the setting information of lottery setting. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value information stored as the setting information. However, when the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical value information stored as the setting information is "6", the numerical value information is updated to "1". After that, returning to step S11303 described above, it is determined whether or not the updated setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S11306: NO), the process returns to step S11303 without executing the process of step S11307, and the setting information is set to the predetermined value. Determine whether the numerical value is within the range.

In step S11305a described above, if it is determined that the setting key is turned off (step S11305a: YES), the process advances to step S11309 to perform control for displaying the setting information for the lottery setting on the information display section 45z. finish. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11310.

In step S11310, setting change notification end processing is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode is ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After step S11310 is executed, this setting change process ends. After executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the lottery setting after the change is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information displays the relevant information on the management screen. The configuration may be such that the setting information of the lottery setting after the change of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

According to the configuration of this aspect described above, it is possible to omit the operation of pressing the RAM clear button in order to confirm the changed setting information. The process can be simplified.

<Aspect 92>
Among the above-described modes, in the configuration in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be executed, the main display unit 45 displays the game progress in which the game can be progressed while the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are being executed. A display pattern (display mode) that is not displayed during execution of the mode may be displayed. A specific description will be given below.

As described above, the main display section 45 is composed of a plurality of light emitting sections. Specifically, the main display portion 45 includes a first pattern display portion 37a made up of a plurality of segment light emitting portions, a second pattern display portion 37b made up of a plurality of segment light emitting portions, and a first holding portion 37b made up of a plurality of LED lamps. It is composed of a display section 37c, a second reservation display section 37d consisting of a plurality of LED lamps, a normal figure unit 38 consisting of a plurality of LED lamps, and a round display section 39 consisting of a plurality of LED lamps.

While the main display unit 45 is in the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed, the main display unit 45 controls each light emitting unit so that the display mode reflects the progress of the game. During execution of the progress mode, all the light-emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 are not lit at the same time, nor are all the light-emitting units blinking synchronously.

Therefore, in this aspect, the main display unit 45 performs control to simultaneously light up all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 during execution of the setting change mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be changed, During execution of the setting confirmation mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be confirmed, all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 are controlled to synchronously blink.

According to such a configuration, it is possible for the administrator or the like to identify whether the pachinko machine 10 is currently in the game progress mode, the setting change mode, or the setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, for example, since it is not necessary to newly add a light emitting unit for mode display for identifying the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the main display unit 45, the pachinko machine 10 By only changing the control program of the pachinko machine 10 without changing the hardware configuration, the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed to a configuration that allows an administrator or the like to identify it.

It should be noted that the main display unit 45, during execution of the setting change mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be changed, executes control to synchronously blink all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45, and performs lottery setting. During execution of the setting confirmation mode in which the setting information can be confirmed, the configuration may be such that all the light-emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 are simultaneously turned on.

Further, if the display mode displayed by the main display unit 45 during execution of the setting change mode and during the execution of the setting confirmation mode is a display mode (lighting pattern) that is not displayed during execution of the game progress mode, the main display unit 45 is not limited to lighting and blinking of all the light emitting units, and other display modes may be used.

In addition, one light-emitting part (e.g., LED) for mode display is added to the main display part 45, and the light-emitting part is turned off during execution of the game progress mode, and turned on during execution of the setting change mode. Alternatively, the light emitting unit may blink during execution of the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the administrator or the like clearly recognize the current mode of the pachinko machine 10, and at the same time, it is possible to use the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100, and the pattern display device 41 to play a pachinko game. A simplification of the configuration can be achieved compared to the configuration that notifies the current mode of the aircraft 10 .

In addition, two light emitting units (for example, LED) for mode display are added to the main display unit 45 (a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit). are extinguished, the first light emitting unit is illuminated and the second light emitting unit is extinguished during execution of the setting change mode, and the second light emitting unit is lit during execution of the setting confirmation mode. A configuration in which the first light emitting unit is turned off may be employed. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the administrator or the like to clearly recognize the current mode of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 can be played using the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100, and the pattern display device 41. A simplification of the configuration can be achieved compared to the configuration that notifies the current mode of the aircraft 10 . Furthermore, since it is only necessary to control the two light-emitting units added to the main display unit 45, it is possible to suppress an increase in data capacity due to the addition of control programs and lighting patterns.

<Aspect 93>
Among the above aspects, in the configuration in which the information display unit 45z includes four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time ( For example, it may be configured to turn on for 3 seconds) and then blink in synchronization for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds).

According to such a configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to check whether or not there is a light-emitting part that does not light up due to a problem such as disconnection among the light-emitting parts constituting the information display part 45z. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a light-emitting part that remains in a constantly lit state due to a defect and does not turn off. For example, if the segment light-emitting portion G and the segment light-emitting portion D of the middle right seven-segment display 45z3 do not light up due to a problem, control is executed to display "3" on the middle right seven-segment display 45z3. Even in this case, since the segment light-emitting portion G and the segment light-emitting portion D do not light up, "7" will be displayed on the middle right 7-segment display 45z3. As a result, the manager may misunderstand the numerical information of the game history information. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is confirmed whether or not there is a light emitting part that does not light up due to a problem such as disconnection among the light emitting parts constituting the information display part 45z. In addition, it is possible to check whether or not there is a light-emitting portion that is constantly lit and is not turned off due to a defect, so that such misrecognition can be suppressed.

Further, an information display portion inspection button is provided for inspecting the information display portion 45z, and when the information display portion inspection button is pressed, all the light emitting portions constituting the information display portion 45z are turned off for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then flash synchronously for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds).

According to such a configuration, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is not turned on, by pressing the information display section inspection button, the light emitting section constituting the information display section 45z can emit light that does not light up due to a problem such as disconnection. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a light-emitting part that is constantly lit and is not extinguished due to a problem. That is, since it is not necessary to once turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 and then turn it on in order to confirm whether or not the information display part 45z has a problem, the work efficiency of the administrator can be improved.

Further, in the configuration in which the base (during the normal mode) is calculated and stored, and the stored base (during the normal mode) is displayed on the information display section 45z, the main controller 60 controls the counted discharge passage passing number N _OUT Each time 60000 is reached, the section is divided, and the base (in normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section. middle) may be switched and displayed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect calculates and stores a maximum of seven section bases (during normal mode), and the information display unit 45z stores a maximum of seven section bases (normal mode). middle) is switched to display. The seven intervals are as follows.

・"bL": Base during measurement (during normal mode)
Pitching rate calculated in the current section until the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage currently being measured reaches 60000 (in normal mode)
・ "b1": Base measured in the previous section (during normal mode)
Pitching rate calculated in the section in which the measured number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage has reached 60000 and is one section before the section currently being measured (during normal mode)
・"b2": Base measured in the previous section (during normal mode)
Pitching rate calculated in the section in which the measured number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage has reached 60000 and is two sections before the section currently being measured (during normal mode)
・"b3": Base measured in the 3rd section before (during normal mode)
Pitching rate calculated in the section where the measured number of passages N _OUT reached 60,000 and three sections before the section currently being measured (during normal mode)
・"b4": Base measured in the 4th section before (during normal mode)
Pitching rate calculated in the section where the measured number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage has reached 60000 and is four sections before the section currently being measured (during normal mode)
・ "b5": Base measured in the previous section (during normal mode)
Pitching rate calculated in the section where the measured number N _OUT passed through the discharge passage has reached 60000 and is five sections before the section currently being measured (during normal mode)
・"b6": Base measured in the 6th section before (during normal mode)
Pitching rate calculated in the section where the measured number of passage passages N _OUT reached 60000 and the section 6 before the section currently being measured (during normal mode)

In the initial state in which basic game history information such as information on the number of balls entered into each section is not stored, the measurement of the section corresponding to "bL" is started, and the section corresponding to "bL" is measured at a predetermined timing. Calculate the base (during normal mode). When the discharge passage passing number N _OUT being measured reaches 60,000, the game history basic information stored as the section corresponding to "bL" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b1", and the section corresponding to "bL" is newly set. Start measurement. Then, when the discharge passage passing number N _OUT reaches 60000 in the section corresponding to "bL" for which measurement is newly started, the game history basic information stored as the section corresponding to "b1" is changed to correspond to "b2". The game history basic information stored as the interval corresponding to "bL" is shifted to the interval corresponding to "b1", and measurement of the interval corresponding to "bL" is newly started. In this way, every time the discharge passage passing number N _OUT being measured reaches 60000, the game history basic information for each section is shifted, and the game history basic information is displayed up to the section corresponding to "b6" at the maximum. Remember. Then, in a state in which the game history basic information is stored as the section corresponding to "b6", when the discharge passage passing number _NOUT under measurement reaches 60000, it is stored as the section corresponding to "b6". The game history basic information is erased, and the game history basic information stored as the section corresponding to "b5" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b6".

That is, in this mode, the game history basic information is accumulated and stored until the discharge passage passing number N _OUT of 60000 pieces×7 sections at maximum is measured.

Then, in this aspect, the information display unit 45z switches and displays the bases (during the normal mode) of the plurality of stored intervals every 5 seconds. Specifically, for example, when the bases of five sections "bL", "b1", "b2", "b3", and "b4" (during normal mode) are stored, the information display section 45z 31 → b1.31 → b2.30 → b3.31 → b4.30 → bL.31 → b1.31... Repeatedly displays the base of each section (during normal mode) while switching every second.

According to such a configuration, the inspector or administrator of the gaming machine can compare the bases (during the normal mode) for each section by checking the display of the information display section 45z. As a result, for example, when the base value (during the normal mode) becomes an abnormal value due to the occurrence of a problem or fraud in the pachinko machine 10, at what timing in the past did the problem occur? can be predicted.

In this embodiment, each time the counted discharge passage passing number N _OUT reaches 60000, a section is divided, the base (during normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section, and the base (normal mode) stored for each section is calculated and stored. middle) is switched every predetermined time (for example, every 5 seconds) and displayed on the information display unit 45z, but instead of this configuration, an RTC 96 is provided, and each time the date changes, the interval is divided, and the The base (during normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section, and the base (during normal mode) stored for each date (for each section) is switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 5 seconds) and displayed on the information display section 45z. may be configured to be displayed on the Specifically, for example, "bL" is the section of the current day, "b1" is the section of one day ago, "b2" is the section of two days ago, "b3" is the section of three days ago, and "b4" is the section of four days ago. , “b5” is defined as the section five days ago, and “b6” is defined as the section six days ago.

According to such a configuration, the inspector or manager of the gaming machine can compare the bases (during the normal mode) of each section divided by date by checking the display of the information display section 45z. becomes possible. As a result, for example, when the base value (during the normal mode) becomes an abnormal value due to the occurrence of a problem or fraud in the pachinko machine 10, the date of occurrence of the problem can be predicted. It becomes possible.

In addition, game history basic information such as information on the number of balls entered into each ball entry section and game history information such as base (during normal mode) are stored in the main side RAM 64, and the pachinko machine can be operated while the RAM clear button is pressed. After the game history basic information and the game history information are erased (cleared) in a configuration in which the game history basic information and the game history information are erased (cleared) by the RAM clearing process executed by turning on the power of the device 10. Until the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300), when the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the type information of the game history information is displayed, but the game history information is displayed. Numerical information of history information may be configured not to be displayed.

Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a base (during the normal mode) is calculated and stored as game history information and the stored base (during the normal mode) is displayed on the information display section 45z, the game history base is determined by the RAM clearing process. After the information and the game history information are erased, until the counted number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage reaches 300, "bL." is displayed in the type information display area of the information display section 45z, may be configured to display "--(two hyphens)".

According to such a configuration, the inspector or manager of the gaming machine can confirm that the basic game history information and the game history information have been deleted when "bL.--" is displayed on the information display section 45z. It can be recognized that the discharge passage passing number N _OUT measured after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped from the manufacturer's factory has not reached 300. Further, for example, when the manufacturer ships the pachinko machine 10, there are cases where several game balls are entered into each ball entry portion to check the operation. In this case, since the number of game balls entering each ball entering portion is counted in a situation that is not the case when the game is played legally, for example, the first counted discharge passage passing number N _OUT is 300. Until this number is reached, there is a possibility that the basic game history information and the game history information will be significantly affected by checks by the manufacturer. Therefore, according to the configuration of this aspect, until the measured discharge passage passing number _NOUT reaches 300, the information display section 45z displays "bL.--", and the base (during the normal mode) is displayed. Numerical information is not displayed, so that the manager checks the numerical value greatly influenced by the check by the manufacturer, and suppresses the misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 has some problem. can do.

<Aspect 94>
Among the above modes, in the configuration in which the game history information is calculated for each of a plurality of sections, after the game history basic information corresponding to the section is stored up to the upper limit and the game history information is calculated and stored, the game of the section The game history basic information used as the basis for calculation of the history information may be deleted. Specifically, for example, after the discharge passage passing number N _OUT during measurement reaches 60000 and the game history information is calculated and stored, the game history basic information used as the basis for calculating the game history information is It may be configured to be erased. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the game history basic information.

<Aspect 95>
In each of the above aspects, in the configuration in which the information display unit 45z switches and sequentially displays a plurality of bases (during normal mode) corresponding to each of a plurality of sections, the information display unit 45z is displayed for a predetermined time at the time of the switching. A configuration may be adopted in which all light emitting portions (segment light emitting portions A to H and DP light emitting portions) of the constituent 7-segment display are extinguished for a predetermined period of time. The configuration of this aspect will be specifically described below.

FIG. 58 is a time chart showing an example of changes in the display mode of the information display section 45z. In FIG. 58, the bases of the three sections "bL", "b1", and "b2" (during normal mode) are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and the bases of these three sections (normal mode) are calculated. middle) is switched and displayed by the information display section 45z.

In this aspect, the information display unit 45z circulates and repeatedly displays the base (during the normal mode) in the order of going back to the past section. More specifically, after displaying "bL", which is the base during measurement (during normal mode) corresponding to the most recent section, until a predetermined display duration (for example, 5000 ms) elapses, the previous section The bases (during normal mode) are sequentially displayed in a retroactive order, and after displaying the base (during normal mode) corresponding to the oldest section among the sections stored in the main-side RAM 64, the most recent measurement is being performed again. "bL", which is the base (during normal mode) corresponding to the section of .

Furthermore, in this aspect, the information display unit 45z starts displaying a base (during normal mode) corresponding to one of the plurality of sections, and displays the base (during normal mode) for a display duration (for example, 5000 ms). ) has passed, all the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to H and DP light emitting units) of the 7 segment display device constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off for a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms), and then 1 Starts displaying the base (during normal mode) corresponding to the previous section. That is, in this aspect, when switching the display of the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to one section to the display (during the normal mode) corresponding to the other section, the 7-segment display constituting the information display section 45z All light emitting parts (segment light emitting parts A to H and DP light emitting parts) of the device are turned off for a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms).

In the example shown in FIG. 58, the information display unit 45z continuously displays "bL", which is the base under measurement (during normal mode) corresponding to the section under current measurement, in a display mode such as "bL.31" for 5000 ms. After that, all the light emitting units are turned off for 300 ms. After that, "b1", which is the measured base (during normal mode) corresponding to the previous section, is continuously lit for 5000 ms in a display mode such as "b1.30", and then all light emitting parts are turned on for 300 ms. lights out. After that, "b2", which is the measured base (during normal mode) corresponding to the previous section, is continuously lit for 5000 ms in a display mode such as "b2.31", and then all the light emitting parts are turned off. Turn off the light for 300ms. After that, again, "bL", which is the base under measurement (during normal mode) corresponding to the section under current measurement, is displayed continuously for 5000 ms in a display mode such as "bL.31". In this way, the information display unit 45z circulates and repeatedly displays the base of each section (during the normal mode) stored in the main-side RAM 64 while interposing a 300 ms all-off state.

Next, the case where the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000 will be described.

FIG. 59 is a time chart showing an example of changes in the display mode of the information display section 45z when the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000. In FIG. 59, the bases (during the normal mode) of the three sections "bL", "b1", and "b2" are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and the information display section 45z displays "b1". The display shows an example in which the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage during measurement has reached 60,000.

In this aspect, when the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section currently being measured reaches 60000 while the base corresponding to one of the sections is being displayed (during normal mode), the information display section 45z Even before the display continuation time (5000 ms) of the base being displayed (during normal mode) elapses, the display of the base being displayed (during normal mode) is terminated. Then, display in a display mode corresponding to the fact that the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60000 is started, and the display mode is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms). In this mode, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is adopted as a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000. Then, during a period until a predetermined period (for example, 2000 ms) during which the four hyphens are lit, the main CPU 62x of the main controller 60 is based on the section currently being measured (in normal mode). After executing the process of calculating the final value of a certain "bL" and the process of shifting the base (during normal mode) corresponding to each interval one by one to the past interval, a new "bL" is calculated. Start the process of measuring the number of game balls entering each ball entrance in the current section to perform the calculation and calculating the current value of "bL".

In the example shown in FIG. 59, at the timing when "b1" is being displayed and before 5000 ms, which is the display duration time of "b1", has passed, the discharge passage number N _OUT in the section being measured is 60000. , the information display unit 45z ends the display of "b1", starts the display mode in which four hyphens are lit, and continues the display mode for 2000 ms.

After that, in this mode, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) has passed since the display mode in which four hyphens are lit is started, cyclic display is started from "bL" for which measurement is newly started. That is, after finishing the display mode in which the four hyphens are lit, regardless of the section of the base (during the normal mode) in which the display was interrupted, the display resumes from the newly started measurement "bL". .

In this mode, at the timing before 300 ms has passed since the start of the display mode in which all the light emitting parts constituting the information display part 45z are extinguished, the number of discharge passage passages N _OUT in the section under measurement is 60000. When reaching , the information display section 45z terminates the display mode in which all the light-emitting sections are extinguished, and shifts to the display mode in which the above four hyphens are lit.

As described above, in this aspect, the information display unit 45z displays the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to one of the plurality of intervals (for example, the display aspect displaying "bL"). , to a display mode in which none of the bases (during normal mode) are displayed (for example, a display mode in which all segment light emitting units are turned off), and then a display that displays bases (during normal mode) corresponding to other sections It shifts to a mode (for example, a display mode that displays "b1"). Therefore, according to this aspect, for the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10, the base (during the normal mode) displayed on the information display section 45z corresponds to another section (during the normal mode) It is possible to clearly recognize that it has been switched to . As a result, it is possible to prevent administrators from erroneously recognizing the displayed base (in normal mode) section without noticing that the displayed base (in normal mode) section has changed. can do. In particular, in this aspect, even if the base (during normal mode) section is different, there is a situation where the base (during normal mode) numerical value itself is the same. ) changes, only the display of the second character (for example, L, 1, 2, etc.) indicating the base (during normal mode) section changes. Assuming that the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to one section (during normal mode) is changed directly to the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to another section (during normal mode), the administrator, etc. It becomes difficult to notice that the section of the base being displayed (during normal mode) has changed. On the other hand, in this aspect, before transitioning from the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to one section (during normal mode) to the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to another section (during normal mode), Since it shifts to a display mode in which none of the bases (during normal mode) are displayed (for example, a display mode in which all segment light emitting units are turned off), even if the values themselves for the bases (during normal mode) before and after switching are the same , the administrator or the like can be made to clearly recognize that the base (during normal mode) displayed on the information display section 45z has been switched to the base (during normal mode) corresponding to another section.

Further, in this aspect, when the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to one section (during the normal mode) is shifted to the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to another section (during the normal mode), the transition mode is , which is a transition mode in which all the light emitting units are extinguished for 300 ms. On the other hand, the transition mode when the display mode is shifted based on the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60000 is a transition mode in which four hyphens are lit for 2000 ms. That is, in this aspect, a transition aspect in the case of transitioning from a display aspect of displaying a base corresponding to one section (during normal mode) to a display aspect of displaying a base corresponding to another section (during normal mode), This is different from the mode of transition when the display mode is transitioned based on the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000. Therefore, according to this mode, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 recognizes the difference in the transition mode, and shifts to the display mode that displays the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to the other section. It is possible to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the display mode shifts based on the fact that the discharge passage passage number _NOUT in the section being measured reaches 60000. As a result, for example, the administrator or the like may notice that the base of each section (during normal mode) has shifted one by one to the past section due to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60000. It is possible to suppress continuation of the confirmation work of the base (during the normal mode) without noticing.

Further, in this aspect, when the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage reaches 60000 in the section under measurement while the base (during the normal mode) is being displayed, the display of the base being displayed (during the normal mode) is continued. Even before the time elapses, the display mode (display mode in which four hyphens are lit) corresponding to the fact that the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60000 is changed. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible for the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 to quickly recognize that the discharge passage passing number N _OUT in the section being measured has reached 60000 pieces. Further, according to this aspect, it is possible to quickly display the base (during the normal mode) of each section after the shift due to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60000. Therefore, the administrator can quickly check the base (during normal mode) for each section after the shift due to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60000. The efficiency of inspection for the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in this aspect, when the discharge passage passage number _NOUT in the section under measurement reaches 60000, a display corresponding to the fact that the discharge passage passage _number NOUT in the section under measurement has reached 60000 is displayed. Since the mode (display mode in which four hyphens are lit) continues for a predetermined time (2000 ms in this mode), the main CPU 62x uses the period until the predetermined time elapses to set the final value as "bL". and the processing of shifting the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to each interval to the past interval one by one. Further, if the game history basic information used as the basis for the calculation of "bL" is deleted after the final value of "bL" is calculated, the storage necessary for storing the game history basic information Capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in this aspect, a plurality of bases (during normal mode) corresponding to each of a plurality of sections are sequentially switched and displayed according to a predetermined order such as going back to the previous section, and the discharge in the section being measured is displayed. When the passage passing number N _OUT reaches 60,000, regardless of which section is the next base section (during the normal mode) to be displayed according to the predetermined order, The display starts from "bL" which is the base (during normal mode) corresponding to the section. Therefore, according to this aspect, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can recognize that the discharge passage passing number N _OUT in the section under measurement has reached 60000, and from "bL" Priority confirmation is possible.

In addition, in this aspect, between the display mode in which the base corresponding to one of the plurality of sections (during the normal mode) is displayed and the display mode in which the base corresponding to the other section (during the normal mode) is displayed As the display mode in , a display mode in which all segment light emitting units are turned off is adopted, but other display modes may be adopted as long as the display mode does not display the base of any section (during normal mode). For example, a display mode in which four hyphens are illuminated or a display mode in which four hyphens are blinking may be adopted. According to such a configuration, for the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10, the base (during the normal mode) displayed on the information display section 45z corresponds to another section (during the normal mode) can be made to recognize more clearly that it switched to .

In addition, in this mode, as a display mode corresponding to the fact that the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage in the section under measurement has reached 60000, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is adopted, but other display modes are adopted. may be adopted. For example, a display mode in which four hyphens blink may be adopted as a display mode corresponding to the fact that the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured has reached 60,000. Further, for example, as a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section under measurement reaching 60000, all light emitting parts (segment light emitting part A A display mode in which the (H and DP light emitting parts) are extinguished may be adopted.

In addition, in this mode, as a transition mode when the display mode is changed based on the fact that the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section under measurement reaches 60000, a transition mode in which four hyphens are lit for 2000 ms is adopted. However, other transition modes may be employed. For example, as a transition mode when the display mode is shifted based on the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60000, all the light emitting parts of the 7-segment display constituting the information display part 45z A transitional mode may be adopted in which (segment light emitting portions A to H and DP light emitting portions) are extinguished for 300 ms. According to such a configuration, the transition mode when transitioning from the display mode for displaying the bass corresponding to one section (during the normal mode) to the display mode for displaying the bass corresponding to another section (during the normal mode) Then, the display mode can be made the same as the transition mode when the display mode changes based on the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60000, so that the administrator, etc. You can change the display mode without giving it.

Further, in this aspect, the base (during the normal mode) is displayed as the game history information, but the displayed game history information is not limited to the base (during the normal mode). It may be configured to display history information (for example, role product ratio, continuous role product ratio, etc.).

Further, in this aspect, the section is divided based on the fact that the discharge passage passage number N _OUT reaches 60000, but the section may be divided based on the satisfaction of another predetermined condition. . For example, the section may be divided based on the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage reaching 10000, or the section may be divided based on the change of date.

<Aspect 96>
In the aspect 95, when the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage in the section currently being measured reaches 60000 while the base corresponding to any section is being displayed (during the normal mode), the information display section 45z , Even before the display duration (5000 ms) of the base being displayed (during normal mode) has elapsed, the display of the base being displayed (during normal mode) ends and the discharge passage in the section being measured is passed. Although it is configured to start display in a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT reaching 60000, instead of this configuration, while the base corresponding to one of the sections (during normal mode) is being displayed, the current When the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60000, the information display unit 45z displays the information during measurement after the display duration time (5000 ms) of the base being displayed (during the normal mode) has elapsed. A configuration may be adopted in which the display in the display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section of reaches 60000 is started. The configuration of this aspect will be specifically described below.

FIG. 60 is a time chart showing an example of changes in the display mode of the information display section 45z when the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000. In FIG. 60, the bases (during the normal mode) of the three sections "bL", "b1", and "b2" are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and the information display section 45z displays "b1". The display shows an example in which the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage during measurement has reached 60,000.

As described above, in this aspect, while the base corresponding to any section (during the normal mode) is being displayed, if the discharge passage passing number N _OUT in the section currently being measured reaches 60000, the information The display unit 45z is in a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60000 after the display duration time (5000 ms) of the base being displayed (during normal mode) has elapsed. Start display. In this mode, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is adopted as a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000.

In the example shown in FIG. 60, at the timing when "b1" is being displayed and before the display duration time of "b1" of 5000 ms elapses, the number of discharge passage passages N _OUT in the section being measured is 60000. After the display continuation time (5000 ms) of "b1" has elapsed, the information display unit 45z starts displaying in a display mode in which four hyphens are lit, and continues this display mode for 2000 ms. After that, similarly to mode 95 described above, cyclic display is started from "bL" for which measurement is newly started.

In this mode, at the timing before 300 ms has passed since the start of the display mode in which all the light emitting parts constituting the information display part 45z are extinguished, the number of discharge passage passages N _OUT in the section under measurement is 60000. , the information display section 45z shifts to the display mode in which the above-described four hyphens are lit after 300 ms have elapsed since the start of the display mode in which all the light emitting parts are turned off.

As described above, in this aspect, even if the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60000 during the display of the base (during the normal mode), the base (during the display) ( Since the display of the base (during normal mode) continues until the display duration time of the display (during normal mode) elapses, for example, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 may ) and tried to transfer it to the inspection table, the display of the base (in normal mode) ended and the base (in normal mode) could not be transferred to the inspection table. The occurrence can be suppressed.

<Aspect 97>
All the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to G and DP light emitting units) constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the following processing flow may be adopted as a processing flow for realizing a configuration that synchronously blinks. A specific description will be given below.

FIGS. 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 97 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. The main difference from the main process shown in FIG. 51 is that after the power recovery process is executed, the process of lighting and blinking all the light-emitting parts constituting the information display part 45z (lighting and blinking process) is executed. .

In step S11801, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11802 to execute internal function register setting processing. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11803 to execute processing for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered on and activated. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound. After executing step S11803, the process advances to step S11804.

In step S11804, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly Save to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64 . When the saving of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for restoring the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main-side RAM 64 .

If it is determined in step S11804 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11804: YES), the process advances to step S11805 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. FIG. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process advances to step S11806 to determine whether the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( checksum value). If it is determined in step S11806 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11806: YES), the process proceeds to step S11808, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S11804 described above (step S11804: NO), and if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S11806 described above (step S11806: NO ), the process advances to step S11807 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal. This is a flag indicating that the state is not normal. After executing step S11807, the process advances to step S11808.

In step S11808, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11808 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11808: NO), the process advances to step S11809 to determine whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when

If it is determined in step S11809 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11809: NO), the process advances to step S11810 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. determine whether

If it is determined in step S11810 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11810: NO), the process advances to step S11811 to execute power recovery processing for returning to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11811, the process advances to step S11812 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 . After that, the process advances to step S11812-2 to execute lighting/blinking processing for lighting and blinking all the light emitting portions (segment light emitting portions A to G and DP light emitting portion) constituting the information display portion 45z. In the lighting and blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then synchronized and blinked for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step S11812-2, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11810 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11810: YES), the process advances to step S11813 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11813, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11809 that the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON (step S11809: YES), the process proceeds to step S11814, and the RAM abnormality flag is ON. Determine whether or not there is

If it is determined in step S11814 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11814: NO), the process advances to step S11815 to execute setting confirmation processing. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those of the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11815, the process advances to step S11816 to execute the above-described power recovery process to return to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11817 to turn off the power recovery flag. After that, the process advances to step S11817-2 to execute the lighting and blinking process described above. After executing step S11817-2, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11814 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11814: YES), the process advances to step S11818 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11818, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S11808 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11808: YES), the process advances to step S11819 to check whether all of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are ON. determine whether or not

If it is determined in step S11819 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11819: NO), the process proceeds to step S11820, and the RAM abnormality flag is ON. Determine whether or not If it is determined in step S11820 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11820: NO), the process proceeds to step S11821.

In step S11821, first RAM clear processing is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clearing process, a first RAM clearing process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clearing process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11821, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11820 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11820: YES), the process advances to step S11822 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11822, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

In step S11819 described above, if it is determined that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11819: YES), the process proceeds to step S11823 to check whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. determine whether or not

If it is determined in step S11823 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11823: NO), the process advances to step S11824 to execute the above-described first RAM clear processing. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11825 to execute setting change processing. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed, and a process of receiving a change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11825, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11823 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11823: YES), the process advances to step S11826 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "RAM is abnormal." After executing step S11826, the process advances to step S11827.

In step S11827, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64 . That is, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, setting information for lottery setting is erased in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like. Here, the reason why the second RAM clearing process for erasing the setting information is executed instead of the first RAM clearing process when the RAM abnormality flag is ON will be described. If the RAM abnormality flag is ON, there is a possibility that the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. can take only numerical values within a predetermined range (for example, numerical values from 1 to 6), there is a possibility that numerical values outside the predetermined range are stored. In addition, in the second RAM clear processing of this aspect, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Also, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF by the second RAM clearing process. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11828 to execute setting change processing. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11828, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

In the processing after step S11829 shown in FIG. 62, if the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, various random number update processing, and power failure monitoring processing (power supply monitoring processing) of timer interrupt processing are executed. and the above timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) is also executed. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the game is shifted to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, various random number update processing and power failure monitoring processing are executed, but the interrupt permission setting for the timer interrupt processing is not executed, so the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) described above is executed. not. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game does not shift to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode. The processing after step S11829 will be specifically described below.

In step S11829 shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11829 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11829: NO), the process advances to step S11830 to execute interrupt permission setting for permitting generation of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11831 to execute interrupt prohibition setting for prohibiting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S11832, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined at step S11829 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11829: YES), the process proceeds to step S11832 without executing the processes at steps S11830 and S11831.

In step S11832, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number updating processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the numerical information after the addition is overwritten on the read source counter. to run. Note that when the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting the read source counter with 0 is executed. After executing step S11832, the process proceeds to step S11833.

In step S11833, power failure monitoring processing is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main controller 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (eg, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Determining that the switch has been turned off or that a power failure has occurred, saves various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main side CPU 62 x to a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. After that, without proceeding to step S11834, which will be described later, the infinite loop processing is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable. Note that the power supply device 85 of this aspect is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main controller 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output a regulated voltage in volts. As for the time during which this stabilized voltage is output, sufficient time is ensured for executing the processing up to storing the above-described RAM determination value in the main-side RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process of step S11833 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main controller 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S11834.

In step S11834, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11834 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11834: NO), the process advances to step S11835 described above to execute interrupt permission setting for permitting generation of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, the process returns to step S11831 described above, and the interrupt prohibition setting for prohibiting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined at step S11834 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11834: YES), the process does not proceed to step S11835 for executing interrupt permission setting, but returns to step S11832 for executing various random number updating processes. .

As described above, according to this aspect, since the above-described lighting and blinking process is executed, there is a light-emitting unit that does not light up due to a problem such as disconnection among the plurality of light-emitting units that constitute the information display unit 45z. In addition, it is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light-emitting portion that remains in a constantly lit state and does not turn off due to a defect. For example, if the segment light-emitting portion G and the segment light-emitting portion D of the middle right seven-segment display 45z3 do not light up due to a problem, control is executed to display "3" on the middle right seven-segment display 45z3. Even in this case, since the segment light-emitting portion G and the segment light-emitting portion D do not light up, "7" will be displayed on the middle right 7-segment display 45z3. As a result, the administrator may, for example, misunderstand the numerical information of the game history information displayed on the information display section 45z. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, among the plurality of light emitting parts constituting the information display part 45z, there is no light emitting part that does not light up due to a problem such as disconnection. In addition, it is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light-emitting portion that remains in a constantly lit state and does not turn off due to a defect, thereby suppressing such misidentification.

Furthermore, in this aspect, the lighting and blinking process is executed with the execution of the power restoration process as a trigger. Therefore, when the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 turns off the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 whose power is turned on, and then turns it on again, the power restoration process described above is executed, and the power restoration process is executed. Triggered by the execution, the lighting and blinking process is executed. That is, the administrator or the inspector can cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the lighting and flashing process by simply turning the power switch off and on. Furthermore, when the administrator or inspector turns the power switch OFF and ON in order to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the lighting and flashing process, the pachinko machine 10 performs the power restoration process. Therefore, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (the state of the high-probability mode flag, etc.) is also maintained. Therefore, according to this aspect, even if the player is playing a game at the pachinko machine 10, the lighting and blinking process can be executed without giving any disadvantage to the player, and the administrator can Alternatively, the inspector can inspect whether or not there is a light emitting unit that does not light up or does not turn off due to a problem among the plurality of light emitting units that configure the information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 98>
All the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to G and DP light emitting units) constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the following processing flow may be adopted as a processing flow for realizing a configuration that synchronously blinks. A specific description will be given below.

63 and 64 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in mode 98 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. The main difference from the main processing shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is that the lighting and blinking processing is not executed with the execution of the power restoration processing as a trigger, but any processing flow out of a plurality of branched processing flows is executed. The point is that the lighting and blinking process is executed even when it is executed.

In step S11901, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11902 to execute internal function register setting processing. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11903 to execute processing for informing that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered on and activated. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined warning sound. After executing step S11903, the process advances to step S11904.

In step S11904, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly Save to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64 . When the saving of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for restoring the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main-side RAM 64 .

If it is determined in step S11904 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11904: YES), the process advances to step S11905 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. FIG. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the flow advances to step S11906 to determine whether the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal. checksum value). If it is determined in step S11906 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11906: YES), the process proceeds to step S11908, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S11904 described above (step S11904: NO), and if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S11906 described above (step S11906: NO ), the process advances to step S11907 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM determination value is not normal. This is a flag indicating that the state is not normal. After executing step S11907, the process advances to step S11908.

In step S11908, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11908 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11908: NO), the process advances to step S11909 to determine whether or not the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when

If it is determined in step S11909 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11909: NO), the process proceeds to step S11910 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. determine whether

If it is determined in step S11910 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11910: NO), the process advances to step S11911 to execute power restoration processing for returning to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11911, the process advances to step S11912 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11910 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11910: YES), the process advances to step S11913 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11913, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11909 that the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON (step S11909: YES), the process proceeds to step S11914, and the RAM abnormality flag is ON. Determine whether or not there is

If it is determined in step S11914 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11914: NO), the process advances to step S11915 to execute setting confirmation processing. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those of the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11915, the process advances to step S11916 to execute the above-described power recovery process to return to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. After that, the flow advances to step S11917 to turn off the power restoration flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11914 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11914: YES), the process advances to step S11918 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11918, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S11908 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11908: YES), the process advances to step S11919 to check whether all of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are ON. determine whether or not

If it is determined in step S11919 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11919: NO), the process proceeds to step S11920, and the RAM abnormality flag is ON. Determine whether or not If it is determined in step S11920 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11920: NO), the process proceeds to step S11921.

In step S11921, first RAM clear processing is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clearing process, a first RAM clearing process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clearing process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11921, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11920 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11920: YES), the process advances to step S11922 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S11922, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

In step S11919 described above, if it is determined that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11919: YES), the process proceeds to step S11923 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. determine whether or not

If it is determined in step S11923 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11923: NO), the process advances to step S11924 to execute the above-described first RAM clear processing. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11925 to execute setting change processing. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed, and a process of receiving a change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11925, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11923 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11923: YES), the process advances to step S11926 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "RAM is abnormal." After executing step S11926, the process advances to step S11927.

In step S11927, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64 . That is, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, setting information for lottery setting is erased in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like. Here, the reason why the second RAM clearing process for erasing the setting information is executed instead of the first RAM clearing process when the RAM abnormality flag is ON will be described. If the RAM abnormality flag is ON, there is a possibility that the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. can take only numerical values within a predetermined range (for example, numerical values from 1 to 6), there is a possibility that numerical values outside the predetermined range are stored. In addition, in the second RAM clear processing of this aspect, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Also, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF by the second RAM clearing process. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11928 to execute setting change processing. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11928, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

In step S11928-2 shown in FIG. 64, a lighting/blinking process for lighting and blinking all the light emitting parts (segment light emitting parts A to G and DP light emitting part) constituting the information display part 45z is executed. In the lighting and blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then synchronized and blinked for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step S11928-2, the process advances to step S11929.

In the processing after step S11929, if the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, various random number update processing, power failure monitoring processing (power supply monitoring processing) are executed. Timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) is also executed. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the game is shifted to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, various random number update processing and power failure monitoring processing are executed, but the interrupt permission setting for the timer interrupt processing is not executed, so the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) described above is executed. not. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game does not shift to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode. The processing after step S11929 will be specifically described below.

In step S11929 shown in FIG. 64, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11929 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11929: NO), the flow advances to step S11930 to execute interrupt permission setting for permitting generation of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11931 to execute interrupt prohibition setting for prohibiting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S11932, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11929 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11929: YES), the process advances to step S11932 without executing the processes in steps S11930 and S11931.

In step S11932, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number updating processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the numerical information after the addition is overwritten on the read source counter. to run. When the read numerical value information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting the read source counter with 0 is executed. After executing step S11932, the process advances to step S11933.

In step S11933, power failure monitoring processing is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main controller 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (eg, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Determining that the switch has been turned off or that a power failure has occurred, saves various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main side CPU 62 x to a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. After that, without proceeding to step S11934, which will be described later, the infinite loop processing is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable. Note that the power supply device 85 of this aspect is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main controller 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output a regulated voltage in volts. As for the time during which this stabilized voltage is output, sufficient time is ensured for executing the processing up to storing the above-described RAM determination value in the main-side RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process of step S11933 that the driving voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main controller 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S11934.

In step S11934, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11934 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11934: NO), the flow advances to step S11935 described above, and interrupt permission setting is performed to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, the process returns to step S11931 described above, and the interrupt prohibition setting for prohibiting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11934 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11934: YES), the process does not proceed to step S11935 for executing interrupt permission setting, but returns to step S11932 for executing various random number updating processes. .

As described above, according to this aspect, since the lighting and blinking process described above is executed, there may be a light emitting unit that does not light up due to a defect such as disconnection among the plurality of light emitting units that constitute the information display unit 45z. In addition, it is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light-emitting portion that remains in a constantly lit state and does not turn off due to a defect. For example, if the segment light-emitting portion G and the segment light-emitting portion D of the middle right seven-segment display 45z3 do not light up due to a problem, control is executed to display "3" on the middle right seven-segment display 45z3. Even in this case, since the segment light-emitting portion G and the segment light-emitting portion D do not light up, "7" will be displayed on the middle right 7-segment display 45z3. As a result, the administrator may, for example, misunderstand the numerical information of the game history information displayed on the information display section 45z. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, among the plurality of light emitting parts constituting the information display part 45z, there is no light emitting part that does not light up due to a problem such as disconnection. In addition, it is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light-emitting portion that remains in a constantly lit state and does not turn off due to a defect, thereby suppressing such misidentification.

Further, in this aspect, the process branches into a plurality of processes based on the operation mode of each operation unit (RAM clear switch, setting key) when the power switch is turned on and the supply of power from the outside is started. Execute one of the processing flows. For example, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch is ON, the setting key is ON, and the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open, the setting change process Execute the processing flow that contains the . In this aspect, the lighting and blinking process is executed regardless of which one of the plurality of branched process flows is executed. Therefore, according to this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 can be caused to execute the lighting and flashing process regardless of what kind of operation mode each operation unit accepts when the power is turned on. Specifically, for example, when the manufacturer ships the pachinko machine 10, the RAM clear switch is turned on, the setting key is turned on, and the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened. By turning on the power at , the pachinko machine 10 may be caused to execute setting change processing (setting change mode) to check whether or not it is possible to change the lottery setting. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described lighting and flashing process after executing the setting change process (setting change mode), so the manufacturer administrator checks the operation in the setting change mode. After that, it can be inspected whether or not there is a light emitting part that does not light up or goes out due to a problem among the plurality of light emitting parts that constitute the information display part 45z of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, the inspection efficiency at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10 can be dramatically improved. In this way, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can select one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z regardless of the operation mode accepted by each operation unit when the power is turned on. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light-emitting portion that does not light up or that does not turn off due to a defect. That is, it is possible to prevent the inspection from being impossible depending on the operation mode accepted by each operation unit when the power is turned on.

Further, according to this aspect, when the power switch is turned on and the supply of electric power from the outside is started, steps S11901 to S11928 of the main processing including the lighting and blinking processing (FIGS. 63 and 64) are performed. The processing group up to -2 is executed, and after the execution of the processing group is completed, the interrupt permission setting is executed and the processing group included in the timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed, so the supply of power from the outside is started. After that, the lighting and blinking process can be executed only once. If the lighting and blinking process is included in the processing group of the timer interrupt process, the lighting and blinking process will be repeatedly executed, and the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 will increase. Further, if the lighting and blinking process is repeatedly executed, there is a possibility that the period during which various information can be displayed on the information display section 45z will be shortened. On the other hand, according to this aspect, since the lighting and blinking process can be executed only once after the supply of power from the outside is started, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, A manager or an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether or not there is a light emitting part that does not turn on or goes off due to a problem among the plurality of light emitting parts that constitute the information display part 45z.

Further, according to this aspect, after the power switch is turned on and the supply of power from the outside is started, before the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting, Execute the lighting and blinking process. Therefore, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10, before the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 10 becomes possible, the light emitting portion that does not light up due to a problem among the plurality of light emitting portions that constitute the information display portion 45z, or the light emitting portion that does not light up due to a problem. It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting portion that does not emit light. If the lighting and blinking process is executed after the execution of the timer interrupt process is started, the player will not be able to inspect the information display section 45z before the administrator or the inspector can inspect the information display section 45z. A game can be started on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In this case, after the player starts playing a game on the pachinko machine 10, the manager or an inspector inspects the information display section 45z of the pachinko machine 10 and finds a defect in the light emitting section of the information display section 45z. There is a risk that If the manager or inspector finds a problem with the light-emitting part of the information display part 45z of the pachinko machine 10, the player is asked to interrupt or stop the game in order to repair or replace the information display part 45z. need to get it. As a result, there is a possibility that the player will feel a strong sense of discomfort. On the other hand, according to this aspect, the administrator or the inspector can inspect the information display section 45z of the pachinko machine 10 before the player can start playing the pachinko machine 10. Since it becomes possible, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to interruption or cancellation of the game.

Further, according to this aspect, after executing the lighting and blinking process, the interrupt permission setting is executed, and the game history process (step S10616 in FIG. 27) included in the timer interrupt process is executed. That is, in this aspect, since the lighting and blinking process is executed before the game history information such as the base (during the normal mode) is displayed on the information display section 45z, the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can 10, before the game history information is displayed on the information display section 45z, it is inspected whether or not there is a light emitting section that does not light up or goes out due to a problem among the plurality of light emitting sections that constitute the information display section 45z. can do. As a result, the game displayed on the information display unit 45z is not noticed that there are light-emitting units that do not turn on or turn off due to defects among the plurality of light-emitting units that constitute the information display unit 45z. It is possible to suppress checking history information.

In this aspect, the lighting and blinking process (step S11928-2 in FIG. 64) is executed after the setting change process (setting change mode) (steps S11925 and S11928 in FIG. 63) is executed. Alternatively, the lighting and blinking process may be executed before the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed on the information display section 45z in the setting change process (setting change mode). Specifically, for example, the lighting and blinking process in step S11928-2 of FIG. 64 is omitted, and the lighting and blinking process is executed prior to the execution of the process of step S11908 in FIG. 63 (the process of determining the state of the RAM clear button). It is good also as a structure which carries out. According to such a configuration, the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10, before the setting information is displayed on the information display section 45z in the pachinko machine 10, changes the plurality of light-emitting sections constituting the information display section 45z. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light-emitting part that does not turn on due to a problem or a light-emitting part that does not turn off. As a result, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z can be checked without noticing that there is a light emission section that does not operate normally due to a defect among the plurality of light emission sections that constitute the information display section 45z. You can prevent it from happening. Similarly, according to this configuration, the lighting and blinking process is executed before the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed on the information display section 45z in the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode). Setting information displayed on the information display section 45z is checked without noticing that there is a light emission section that does not operate normally due to a defect among the plurality of light emission sections that constitute the information display section 45z. can be suppressed.

Further, in this aspect, by adopting a configuration in which the lighting and blinking process is executed in step S11928-2 of FIG. However, not only this configuration but also another configuration may be adopted to execute the lighting and blinking process regardless of which processing flow is executed among the processing flows branched into a plurality of branches. may be For example, the lighting and blinking process in step S11928-2 of FIG. 64 may be omitted, and the lighting and blinking process may be executed prior to the execution of the process of step S11908 in FIG. 63 (the process of determining the state of the RAM clear button). . Further, for example, the lighting and blinking process in step S11928-2 in FIG. 64 is omitted, and between steps S11909 and S11910 in FIG. Between S11920 and between steps S11919 and S11923 in FIG. 63, the lighting and blinking process may be executed.

<Aspect 99>
In the above aspects 97 and 98, the administrator or the inspector can inspect whether there is a light emitting unit that does not light up or goes out due to a problem among the plurality of light emitting units that constitute the information display unit 45z. Although the above-described lighting and blinking process is adopted as the inspection process, the inspection process is not limited to the lighting and blinking process, and various control modes can be adopted. For example, as the inspection process, control for blinking the light-emitting units is not executed, and all the light-emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are shifted from the off state to the lit state at the same time, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the lighted state is changed. You may perform the control which makes it switch to the light-out state simultaneously. Further, for example, as inspection processing, control may be executed to synchronously blink all the light emitting units. Further, for example, as an inspection process, control may be executed to sequentially turn on all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z and then turn them off. That is, as the inspection process, it is sufficient to execute control to shift all the light-emitting portions constituting the information display portion 45z from the off state to the on state at least once and then to the off state. By executing the inspection processing in such a control mode, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine which of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z does not light up or goes out due to a problem. It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting portion that does not emit light.

<Aspect 100>
Among the above aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, various main processing and timer interrupt processing can be employed. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in mode 100 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S12001, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S12002 to execute internal function register setting processing. After that, the process advances to step S12003 to execute processing for informing that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered on and activated. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined warning sound. After executing step S12003, the process proceeds to step S12004.

In step S12004, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information stored in the register of the main CPU 62x (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) Save to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 .

If it is determined in step S12004 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S12004: YES), the process advances to step S12005 to execute a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. Then, the RAM determination value is calculated. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process advances to step S12006 to determine whether the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal. checksum value). If it is determined in step S12006 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S12006: YES), the process proceeds to step S12007.

In step S12007, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", if the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6" , the setting information is determined to be a numerical value within a predetermined range. determines that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined in step S12007 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12007: YES), the process proceeds to step S12008.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S12004 described above (step S12004: NO), if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S12006 described above (step S12006: NO), and If it is determined in step S12007 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12007: NO), the process advances to step S12015 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM determination value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, This flag indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

The flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON will be described below, and then the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON will be described.

In step S12008, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag is ON. The setting changing flag is a flag that turns ON when setting change processing (setting change mode) described later is started, and turns OFF when the setting change processing (setting change mode) ends. Here, the situation in which the setting change flag is ON in step S12008 means that when the pachinko machine 10 was powered on last time, the setting change process (setting change mode) described later was executed, and the setting change process ( During execution of the setting change mode), the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, so that the setting change flag remains ON.

If it is determined in step S12008 that the setting changing flag is ON (step S12008: YES), the process advances to step S12018 to execute setting change processing (setting change mode). In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed, and a process of receiving a change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12008 that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), the process proceeds to step S12009.

In step S12009, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12009 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12009: NO), the process advances to step S12010 to determine whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. Note that "the setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and positioned on the ON side. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when

If it is determined in step S12010 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S12010: NO), the process proceeds to step S12011.

In step S12011, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that turns ON when setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode), which will be described later, is started, and turns OFF when the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) ends. Here, the situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step S12011 means that when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on last time, the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later is executed, and the setting confirmation process ( During execution of the setting confirmation mode), the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, so that the setting confirmation flag remains ON.

If it is determined in step S12011 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step S12011: NO), the process proceeds to step S12013, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12010 that the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON (step S12010: YES), and if the setting checking flag is ON in step S12011, If so (step S12011: YES), the process proceeds to step S12012. That is, when the RAM clear button is OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are all ON, and the previous power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed at the time of turning on, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode). If the flag remains ON, the process proceeds to step S12012.

In step S12012, setting confirmation processing is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S12012, the process proceeds to step S12013.

In step S12013, power restoration processing is executed to return to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S12013, the process advances to step S12014 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S12022, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step S12009 described above, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12009: YES), the process proceeds to step S12017, and the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. Determine whether or not there is If it is determined in step S12017 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S12017: YES), the process advances to step S12018 to perform the setting change process (setting change process). mode). After that, the process proceeds to step S12022, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12017 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S12017: NO), the process proceeds to step S12019.

In step S12019, it is determined whether or not the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12019: NO), the process advances to step S12020 to execute first RAM clear processing. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clearing process, a first RAM clearing process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clearing process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S12020, the process proceeds to step S12022, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12019: YES), the process advances to step S12021 to execute RAM abnormality notification processing. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . After executing step S12021, the process proceeds to step S12022. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the process does not proceed to step S12021.

In step S12022, a lighting/blinking process, which is a process of lighting and blinking all the light emitting parts (segment light emitting parts A to G and DP light emitting part) constituting the information display part 45z, is executed. In the lighting and blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then synchronized and blinked for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step S12022, the process proceeds to step S12023.

In step S12023, interrupt permission setting is executed to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. After that, an infinite loop is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015 will be described.

As described above, when it is determined in step S12004 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12004: NO), when it is determined in step S12006 that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S12006: NO), and If it is determined in S12007 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12007: NO), the process advances to step S12015 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S12016.

In step S12016, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12016 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12016: YES), the process advances to step S12017 to determine whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. If it is determined in step S12017 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S12017: YES), the process advances to step S12018 to perform the setting change process (setting change process). mode). After that, the process proceeds to step S12022. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12016 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12016: NO), and in step S12017 it is determined that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON. If so (step S12017: NO), the process proceeds to step S12019.

In step S12019, it is determined whether or not the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12019: NO), the process advances to step S12020 to execute the above-described first RAM clear processing. After executing step S12020, the process proceeds to step S12022. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step S12020.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12019: YES), the process advances to step S12021 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process described above. After that, the process proceeds to step S12022.

In step S12022, the lighting blinking process described above is executed. After executing step S12022, the process advances to step S12023 to execute interrupt permission setting for permitting generation of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, infinite loop processing is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As described above, in this aspect, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is to press the RAM clear switch (to be in the ON state) and press the setting key (keyhole). , the power switch is turned on while the frame open switch and the door open switch are all turned on. In addition, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed by setting the RAM clear switch to a non-depressed state (OFF state), setting the setting key (keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening. This is an operation to turn on the power switch while all the switches are turned on. The operation for executing the first RAM clearing process is to press down the RAM clear switch (turn it ON) and turn OFF any of the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch. This is an operation to turn on the power switch in the state where the

An example of the flow of processing realized by executing the main processing described above will be collectively described below.

・When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied (steps S12004, S12006, and S12007), and setting change processing (setting change mode) is performed, regardless of whether the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied or not, and regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag, the setting change process is performed. (setting change mode) is executed (step S12018).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12004, S12006, and S12007), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, and if it is determined that the setting changing flag is ON (step S12008: YES), an operation for executing setting change processing (setting change mode), setting confirmation processing The setting change process (setting change mode) is executed regardless of whether or not the operation for executing the (setting confirmation mode) and the operation for executing the first RAM clear process are performed (step S12018). .

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12004, S12006, and S12007), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), and if an operation for executing the first RAM clearing process has been performed (step S12009 : YES, step S12017: NO, step S12019: NO), the first RAM clear processing is executed regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag (step S12020).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12004, S12006, and S12007), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), and an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed. (step S12009: NO, step S12010: YES), setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12012).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12004, S12006, and S12007), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is not performed. Even if there is, if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S12011: YES), setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12012).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12004, S12006, and S12007), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is established and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12015), even if an operation for executing the first RAM clear processing has been performed, the first RAM clear processing is executed. Without execution, RAM abnormality notification processing is executed (step S12021).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12004, S12006, and S12007), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is established and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12015), even if an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed, the setting Without executing confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode), RAM abnormality notification processing is executed (step S12021).

Next, details of the setting change processing shown in step S12018 of FIG. 65 will be described.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of aspect 100 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of step S12018 in FIG.

In step S12101, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The setting change flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, as described above, and a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not yet ended. is. After executing step S12101, the process proceeds to step S12102.

In step S12102, initial setting processing at the start of setting change is executed. In the initial setting process at the start of setting change, initial settings necessary for starting the setting change process are executed. Further, in this aspect, in the initial setting process at the start of setting change, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF. to After executing step S12102, the process advances to step S12103.

In step S12103, setting change notification start processing is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "setting change mode is in progress". Further, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting change mode is in progress", and displays the received command. The control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "in setting change mode". In addition, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with maximum luminance.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S12103, the process advances to step S12104.

In step S12104, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as update setting information. Specifically, in this aspect, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in another area of the main RAM 64 other than the setting information storage area. is copied to the update setting information storage area. After executing step S12104, the process advances to step S12105.

In step S12105, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information for update is lit on the information display section 45z. After that, the flow advances to step S12106 to determine whether or not the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", whether the update setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6" determine whether or not If it is determined in step S12106 that the update setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12106: YES), the process proceeds to step S12108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12106 that the update setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12106: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information. Alternatively, if information other than numerical values is stored due to noise or the like, the flow advances to step S12107 to change the update setting information to the initial value. In this aspect, "1" is stored as an initial value in the update setting information. After that, the process proceeds to step S12108.

In step S12108, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. In the middle, a signal indicating Low level is monitored, and when a falling edge of the signal falling from High level to Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) is turned to the OFF side. If it is determined in step S12108 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12108: NO), the process advances to step S12109 to determine whether the setting change button has been pressed. judge. If it is determined in step S12109 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S12109: YES), the process advances to step S12110 to update the update setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value information stored as update setting information. However, when the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical value information stored as update setting information is "6", the numerical value information is updated to "1". After that, returning to step S12106 described above, it is determined whether or not the updated setting information for update is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12109 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S12109: NO), the process returns to step S12106 without executing the processing of step S12110, and the update setting information is updated. It is determined whether the numerical value is within a predetermined range.

If it is determined in step S12108 described above that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12108: YES), the process proceeds to step S12111.

In step S12111, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as setting information. Specifically, in this aspect, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is copied to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. do. After executing step S12111, the process advances to step S12112 to end the control for displaying the update setting information on the information display section 45z. After that, the process proceeds to step S12113.

In step S12113, setting change notification end processing is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode is ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S12113, the process proceeds to step S12114. After executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the lottery setting after the change is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information displays the relevant information on the management screen. The configuration may be such that the setting information of the lottery setting after the change of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

In step S12114, first RAM clear processing is executed. In the first RAM clearing process, information other than the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is erased. When this first RAM clearing process is executed, the above-described setting changing flag is also cleared (turned OFF). After executing step S12114, this setting change process ends.

Next, details of the setting confirmation process shown in step S12012 of FIG. 65 will be described.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 100 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S12012 in FIG.

In step S12201, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, as described above, and a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not yet ended. is. After executing step S12201, the process proceeds to step S12202.

In step S12202, setting confirmation notification start processing is executed. In the setting confirmation notification start process, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "Setting confirmation mode is in progress". Further, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "in setting confirmation mode" on the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100, and displays the received command. The control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "in setting confirmation mode". In addition, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with the maximum luminance.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification start process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step S12202, the process advances to step S12203.

In step S12203, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is flashed on the information display section 45z. After that, the process proceeds to step S12204.

In step S12204, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. In the middle, the signal indicating the Low level is monitored, and when the falling edge of the signal falling from the High level to the Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. judge. If it is determined in step S12204 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12204: NO), step S12204 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12204 that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12204: YES), the process proceeds to step S12205. That is, the infinite loop is repeated until the setting key (keyhole) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S12205. move on.

In step S12205, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z ends. After that, the process proceeds to step S12206.

In step S12206, setting confirmation notification end processing is executed. In the setting confirmation notification end process, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving the setting confirmation mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification end process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S12206, the process advances to step S12207 to turn off the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 . After that, the setting confirmation process is terminated.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x) will be described.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of mode 100 of the first embodiment. In this aspect, the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) executes timer interrupt processing at a 4 ms cycle.

In step S12301, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, etc.) in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the numerical information after the addition to the reading source counter is executed. When the read numerical value information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting the read source counter with 0 is executed. After executing step S12301, the process proceeds to step S12302.

In step S12302, power failure monitoring processing is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main controller 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (eg, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Determining that the switch has been turned off or that a power failure has occurred, saves various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main side CPU 62 x to a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . After that, without proceeding to step S12303, which will be described later, the infinite loop processing is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable. Note that the power supply device 85 of this aspect is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main controller 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output a regulated voltage in volts. As for the time during which this stabilized voltage is output, sufficient time is ensured for executing the processing up to storing the above-described RAM determination value in the main-side RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process of step S12302 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main controller 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S12303.

In step S12303, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12303 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12303: NO), the process proceeds to step S12304. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12303 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12303: YES), this timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes after step S12304. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the processing for enabling the progress of the game after step S12304 is not executed, and the configuration is such that the transition to the game progress mode in which the progress of the game is possible is not made. there is The processing after step S12304, which is the processing for enabling the progress of the game, will be described below.

In step S12304, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when information is set to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state, output of a drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set Stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information to switch the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. When set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S12305.

In step S12305, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S12306.

In step S12306, signals received from the respective ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and ball entry detection processing for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. Since the ball-entering detection process is the same as the ball-entering detection process shown in FIG. 28, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S12306, the process advances to step S12307.

In step S12307, timer update processing is executed to collectively update numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. Then, it progresses to step S12308 and performs the output setting process of a prize ball command. After that, the process proceeds to step S12309.

In step S12309, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the starting port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are determined based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. While acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM64. After executing step S12309, the process advances to step S12310.

In step S12310, ball-entering processing for the through-gate accompanying entry (passage) of the game ball into the through-gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the electric accessary product opening counter C4 is acquired based on determination that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is stored in the RAM 64. It is stored in the electric service reservation area 64d. After executing step S12310, the process advances to step S12311.

In step S12311, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, winning lottery, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. After executing step S12311, the process proceeds to step S12312.

In step S12312, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. In the game state transition processing, processing is executed to shift the game state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S12312, the process proceeds to step S12313.

In step S12313, an electric role support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric role product 34a (electric role product opening lottery), and when it is determined to be in the open state, the electric role product 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S12313, the process proceeds to step S12314.

In step S12314, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, a process for shooting a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S12314, the process proceeds to step S12315.

In step S12315, external information setting processing is executed so as to control the start and end of the output of external signals according to the processing results of various processing executed in the timer interrupt processing this time. After executing step S12315, the process advances to step S12316.

In step S12316, game history processing for calculating and displaying game history information is executed. Since the game history processing is the same as the game history processing shown in FIG. 29, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S12316, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

As described above, according to this aspect, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects described in the above other aspects.

According to this aspect, the setting change mode is started based on the reception of the operation for executing the setting change mode, the setting change flag is turned ON when the setting change mode is started, and the setting change mode is performed. , the setting changing flag is changed to the OFF state. The main side RAM 64 can maintain the state of the setting changing flag even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is cut off. Therefore, for example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during execution of the setting change mode due to the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 being turned off or a power failure occurring, etc., the main side RAM 64 The setting changing flag stored in is maintained in the ON state.

Then, according to this aspect, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started from the outside, the setting change mode is started based on the determination that the setting change flag is in the ON state (Fig. 65 step S12008). That is, according to this aspect, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during execution of the setting change mode, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted, the setting change Even if the operation for executing the mode is not accepted, the setting change mode is started.

Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is cut off while the setting change mode is being executed, the power to the pachinko machine 10 must be supplied to the pachinko machine 10 to start the setting change mode again. It is possible to save the trouble of having to perform an operation for executing the setting change mode again after the supply of data is restarted.

Also, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted from the outside while the setting change mode is being executed, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 may be in a state not intended by the administrator. However, according to this aspect, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed from the outside, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the operation to execute the setting change mode again. Since the setting change mode is started even when the setting change mode is started, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being overlooked in a state not intended by the administrator.

Further, according to this aspect, the setting confirmation mode is started based on the reception of the operation for executing the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is started, the setting confirmation flag is set to the ON state, and the setting confirmation mode is started. When the confirmation mode ends, the setting confirmation flag is turned off. The main-side RAM 64 can maintain the state of the setting-confirming flag even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is cut off. Therefore, for example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during execution of the setting confirmation mode due to the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 being turned off or a power failure occurring, etc., the main RAM 64 The setting confirmation flag stored in is kept ON.

Then, according to this aspect, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started from the outside, the setting confirmation mode is started based on the determination that the setting confirmation flag is in the ON state (Fig. 65 step S12011). That is, according to this aspect, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted during execution of the setting confirmation mode, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted, the setting confirmation Even if the operation for executing the mode is not accepted, the setting confirmation mode is started.

Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is cut off during execution of the setting confirmation mode, in order for the pachinko machine 10 to start the setting confirmation mode again, the power to the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to save the trouble of having to perform an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode again after the supply of data is restarted.

Further, according to this aspect, when the setting change mode is started, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the same information as the setting information is used as the update setting information in the main RAM 64. is stored in the update setting information storage area. By accepting the operation of pressing the setting change button, the update setting information stored in the update setting information of the main RAM 64 is updated, and when the setting change mode ends, the update setting information and the update setting information are updated. The same information is stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 as the setting information. Therefore, even if the external power supply is interrupted during execution of the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 can be updated before the setting change mode is started. can be kept at its value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming a value different from the value intended by the administrator due to the interruption of the power supply from the outside during execution of the setting change mode. can do. A specific description will be given below.

Assuming that the setting information for update is not used during execution of the setting change mode, and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is updated by accepting the operation of pressing the setting change button. When the direct change configuration is adopted, the power supply from the outside is cut off at the timing when the setting information becomes a value different from the value intended by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 during execution of the setting change mode. In that case, the setting information for the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 will be a value different from the value intended by the administrator.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, until the setting change mode ends, the setting information itself stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not changed, and the setting information for updating of the main RAM 64 is stored. Since the setting information for update stored in the area is changed, the setting information for update is changed to a value different from the value intended by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 during execution of the setting change mode. The setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is maintained at the value before the setting change mode is started even when the power supply from the main side RAM 64 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming a value different from the value intended by the administrator due to interruption of the power supply from the outside during execution of the setting change mode. be able to.

Further, according to this aspect, the update setting information stored in the update information storage area of the main RAM 64 is displayed on the information display section 45z during execution of the setting change mode. An operation of pressing the setting change button can be performed while confirming the update setting information displayed on the display section 45z.

Further, according to this aspect, when the supply of electric power from the outside is started, it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range, and the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. If it is determined, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON, and the game progress processing (processing from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) for progressing the game is not executed. Therefore, the game progress processing is executed while the setting information stored in the main side RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, and the game progress in the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from being defective. can do. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent unexpected losses from being given to players and administrators.

Further, according to this aspect, when the supply of electric power from the outside is started, it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range, and the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. If it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON and an operation for executing the first RAM clearing process is accepted, the first RAM clearing process is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to the first RAM clear processing being executed while the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. A specific description will be given below.

Even if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, if the configuration for executing the first RAM clearing process is adopted, among the various information stored in the main RAM 64, the setting Even the RAM abnormality flag, which is information indicating that the information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, is erased (turned OFF), and the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. After the execution of the first RAM clear processing, the game progress processing (processing from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) is executed on the premise that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, and a problem occurs. There is a possibility that

On the other hand, according to this aspect, if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, even if an operation for executing the first RAM clearing process is accepted, the first RAM Since the clear processing is not executed, the first RAM clear processing is executed even though the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. It is possible to suppress the execution of the game progress process. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to the first RAM clear processing being executed while the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range.

Further, according to this aspect, when the supply of electric power from the outside is started, it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range, and the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. If it is determined that the setting confirmation mode is executed, the setting confirmation mode is not executed even if an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode is received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation mode for displaying the setting information from being executed even though the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. .

Further, according to this aspect, when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off, a predetermined calculation is executed based on a predetermined information group (including setting information in this aspect) stored in the main RAM 64. Then, a RAM determination value (hereinafter also referred to as a first RAM determination value), which is the result of the predetermined calculation, is stored in the main RAM 64 . Then, when the supply of electric power from the outside is started, a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group (in this embodiment, the setting information is included, but the first RAM determination value is not included) stored in the main RAM 64. and determines whether or not the RAM determination value (hereinafter also referred to as the second RAM determination value), which is the result of the predetermined calculation, matches the first RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64. Furthermore, in this aspect, when it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match (step S12006 in FIG. 65: YES), and if it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12007 in FIG. 65) : YES), the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON, and the game progress processing (processing from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) is executed. In other words, if it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match (step S12006 in FIG. 65: YES), but it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (FIG. 65 (step S12007: NO), the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12015 in FIG. 65), and the game progress processing (processing from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress processing from being executed even though the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match but the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems caused by the game progress processing being executed even though the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. A specific description will be given below.

When the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value match, when the power supply from the outside is started, the contents of the predetermined information group stored in the main side RAM 64 and the previous power supply There is a high possibility that the content of the predetermined information group stored in the main side RAM 64 is the same as the content of the predetermined information group stored in the main side RAM 64 when the power supply is cut off. It is highly probable that it was maintained normally even when the However, even if the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64 is not maintained normally, the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value may coincide with each other.

For this reason, if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, but it is not determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. Even if the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, there is a possibility that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value will coincidentally match, and the game progress processing will be executed. As a result, there is a risk that a fatal problem will occur in the progress of the game.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, and the setting information is determined to be a numerical value within a predetermined range. Execute the process. In other words, when the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, but the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, the game progress processing is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress processing from being executed even though the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match but the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems caused by the game progress processing being executed even though the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range.

Further, according to this aspect, during execution of the setting change mode, the setting change mode is terminated based on detection of a transition from the ON state of the setting key (keyhole) to the OFF state ( Step S12108 in FIG. 66: YES), it is possible to avoid ending the setting change mode immediately after starting. A specific description will be given below.

For example, a case will be described in which a configuration different from the present embodiment is adopted, in which the setting change mode is terminated when it is detected that the setting key (keyhole) is in the OFF state. When this configuration is adopted, when the setting change mode is started based on the operation for starting the setting change mode including turning on the setting key (keyhole). , the setting change mode continues until the setting key (keyhole) changes from the ON state to the OFF state. However, when the setting change mode is started based on the fact that the setting change flag is ON when power supply is started, the setting change is performed while the setting key (keyhole) is in the OFF state. A mode may be initiated. In this case, immediately after the setting change mode is started, it is detected that the setting key (keyhole) is OFF, and the setting change mode ends. That is, the setting change mode ends immediately after starting, and it becomes difficult to change the setting information of the lottery setting in the setting change mode.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the setting change mode is terminated based on detection of the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the setting key (keyhole). Even if the setting change mode is started while the keyhole is OFF, the administrator or the like of the pachinko machine 10 shifts the setting key (keyhole) from the OFF state to the ON state, and again, The setting change mode continues until the ON state is changed to the OFF state. Therefore, even when the setting change mode is started while the setting key (keyhole) is in the OFF state, the setting change mode is prevented from ending immediately after the setting change mode is started. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent difficulty in changing the setting information of the lottery setting due to the setting change mode ending immediately after starting.

Further, according to this aspect, even if the setting change mode is started based on the fact that the setting change flag is ON when the power supply is started, the setting key is retained. Only those who are Therefore, the security of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, according to this aspect, not only is the setting change mode started based on the fact that an operation for starting the setting change mode including the ON state of the setting key (keyhole) is performed, but also , the setting change mode is started based on the fact that the setting change flag is ON when power supply is started. Therefore, the setting change mode can be started not only when the setting key (keyhole) is in the ON state, but also when the setting key (keyhole) is not in the ON state.

In this embodiment, the operations for executing the setting change mode include pressing the RAM clear switch (turning it ON), and pressing the setting key (keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch. Although the operation of turning on the power switch in a state where everything is turned on has been adopted, various operations can be adopted as the operation for executing the setting change mode. For example, as an operation for executing the setting change mode, the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed (turned on) and the setting key (keyhole) is turned on. operation may be employed.

Further, in this aspect, as an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear switch is not pressed (OFF state), and the setting key (keyhole), frame opening switch and door opening are performed. Although the operation of turning on the power switch with all the switches turned on has been adopted, various operations can be adopted as the operation for executing the setting confirmation mode. For example, as an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode, the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch is not pressed (off state) and the setting key (keyhole) is turned on. You may adopt the operation to make

Further, in this aspect, as an operation for executing the first RAM clearing process, the RAM clear switch is pressed (ON state), and the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch are pressed. is turned off, and the power switch is turned on, various operations can be used as the operation for executing the first RAM clearing process. For example, as an operation for executing the first RAM clearing process, the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed (turned on) and the setting key (keyhole) is turned off. You may adopt the operation to

Further, in this aspect, the setting information is included in the target for calculating the RAM determination value (checksum value). It may be configured not to include it.

In this embodiment, the RAM determination value (checksum value) calculated when the power supply is cut off is stored in the main RAM 64. Instead of this configuration, the power supply is cut off. The RAM determination value (checksum value) calculated at that time may be stored in a non-volatile storage means separate from the main RAM 64 .

In this aspect, when the setting change mode is started, the same information as the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is stored in the update setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 as setting information for update. Although it is configured to be stored, the information stored as update setting information may not be exactly the same as the setting information, and may be information corresponding to the setting information. For example, when the setting information is "1", "A" is stored as the value corresponding to the setting information as the update setting information, and when the setting information is "2", the value corresponding to the setting information is stored as "A". A configuration may be adopted in which "B" is stored as update setting information.

Similarly, in this aspect, when the setting change mode ends, the same information as the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is used as the setting information. However, the information stored as the setting information may not be exactly the same as the setting information for update, and may be information corresponding to the setting information for update. For example, when the update setting information is "A", "1" is stored as the setting information as a value corresponding to the setting information, and when the update setting information is "B", the update setting information is stored as "1". A configuration may be adopted in which "2" is stored as the setting information as the corresponding value.

<Aspect 101>
Among the above-described modes, in the configuration capable of executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a configuration in which the sound emission control device 90 includes an RTC 97 (real time clock) capable of keeping the current date and time may be employed. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 69 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 of aspect 101 of the first embodiment. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

An audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 outputs an MPU 92, which is an arithmetic unit that controls the overall control of the audio emission control device 90, and current date and time information, which is information that can specify the current date and time. A capable RTC97 (real time clock) is installed. The MPU 92 and the RTC 97 are connected via signal lines so as to be able to communicate with each other.

The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU 92x, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The CPU 92 x executes various control programs stored in the main ROM 63 . The ROM 93 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 92x, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with various table storage areas in which production pattern tables and the like are stored. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the CPU 92x executes the control program. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with a various flag storage area 94a in which various flags are stored, an activation date/time information storage area 94b in which activation date/time information (to be described later) is stored, and the like. It is not essential that the CPU 92x, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The RTC 97 has a function of keeping the current date and time, and has an RTC control section 97a, a register 97b, and an RTC power supply 97c.

The RTC control unit 97a uses (controls) the register 97b to perform various controls such as clocking of the current date and time. The register 97b has a register table consisting of a plurality of registers, and this register table includes a clock register 97b1 and an activation date/time information storage area 97b2.

The clock register 97b1 is a register for clocking the current date and time, and the register value as the current date and time information is updated every second. In this aspect, the current date and time information in the clock register 97b1 includes information that can specify the current "year", "month", "day", "hour", "minute", and "second".

The starting date/time information storage area 97b2 is a storage area in which the current date/time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 is written at the timing immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is started. Hereinafter, the current date and time information read from the clock register 97b1 and written to the start date and time information storage area 97b2 will be referred to as start date and time information. In this aspect, the start date and time information stored in the start date and time information storage area 97b2 includes "year", "month", "day", "hour", Contains information that can identify "minutes" and "seconds". The details of the process of writing the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 into the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 as the startup date and time information will be described later.

The RTC power supply 97c is a dedicated power supply for the RTC 97 that is different from the power supply for the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC control section 97a and the register 97b even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, the clock register 97b1 can update the current date and time information even in a power failure state, and the activation date and time information storage area 97b2 can retain the stored activation date and time information even in a power failure state. is possible. In this aspect, a button type battery is used for the RTC power supply 97c.

The sound emission control board 91 is provided with an input/output port. The main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the sound emission control board 91, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and receives a predetermined signal from the effect operation button 24. . The speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the sound emission control board 91, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in mode 101 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S12401, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S12402 to execute internal function register setting processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S12403.

In step S12403, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information stored in the register of the main CPU 62x (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) Save to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 .

If it is determined in step S12403 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S12403: YES), the process advances to step S12404 to execute a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. Then, the RAM determination value is calculated. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the flow advances to step S12405 to determine whether the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal. checksum value). If it is determined in step S12405 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S12405: YES), the process proceeds to step S12406.

In step S12406, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", if the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6" , the setting information is determined to be a numerical value within a predetermined range. determines that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined in step S12406 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12406: YES), the process proceeds to step S12407.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S12403 described above (step S12403: NO), if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S12405 described above (step S12405: NO), and If it is determined in step S12406 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12406: NO), the process advances to step S12415 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM determination value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, This flag indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

The flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON will be described below, and then the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON will be described.

In step S12407, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag is ON. The setting changing flag is a flag that turns ON when setting change processing (setting change mode) described later is started, and turns OFF when the setting change processing (setting change mode) ends. Here, the situation in which the setting change flag is ON in step S12407 means that when the pachinko machine 10 was powered on last time, the setting change process (setting change mode) described later was executed, and the setting change process ( During execution of the setting change mode), the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, so that the setting change flag remains ON.

If it is determined in step S12407 that the setting changing flag is ON (step S12407: YES), the process advances to step S12418 to execute setting change processing (setting change mode). In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed, and a process of receiving a change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12407 that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12407: NO), the process proceeds to step S12408.

In step S12408, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12408 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12408: NO), the process advances to step S12409 to determine whether or not the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. Note that "the setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and positioned on the ON side. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when

If it is determined in step S12409 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S12409: NO), the process proceeds to step S12410.

In step S12410, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that turns ON when setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode), which will be described later, is started, and turns OFF when the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) ends. Here, the situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step S12410 means that when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on last time, the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later is executed, and the setting confirmation process ( During execution of the setting confirmation mode), the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, so that the setting confirmation flag remains ON.

If it is determined in step S12410 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step S12410: NO), the process advances to step S12411 to transmit a normal activation command to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The normal startup command is not determined to be a RAM abnormality, and the pachinko machine 10 (main controller 60) in a normal state in which none of the setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and first RAM clear processing described later is executed. is a command that indicates that has started. As will be described later, when receiving the normal activation command, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated in a normal state. Specifically, in this aspect, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "Normal startup". After executing step S12411, the process proceeds to step S12413, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12409 that the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON (step S12409: YES), and if the setting checking flag is ON in step S12410, If so (step S12410: YES), the process proceeds to step S12412. That is, when the RAM clear button is OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are all ON, and the previous power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed at the time of turning on, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode). If the flag remains ON, the process proceeds to step S12412.

In step S12412, setting confirmation processing is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S12412, the process proceeds to step S12413.

In step S12413, power restoration processing is executed to return to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S12413, the process advances to step S12414 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S12423, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step S12408 described above, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12408: YES), the process proceeds to step S12417, and the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. Determine whether or not there is If it is determined in step S12417 that the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON (step S12417: YES), the process advances to step S12418 to perform the setting change process (setting change process). mode). After that, the process proceeds to step S12423, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12417 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S12417: NO), the process proceeds to step S12419.

In step S12419, it is determined whether or not the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12419: NO), the process advances to step S12420 to execute first RAM clear processing. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. After executing step S12420, the process advances to step S12421 to transmit a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM clear command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller has been cleared." After executing step S12421, the process proceeds to step S12423, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12419: YES), the flow advances to step S12422 to emit a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. Send to control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." After executing step S12422, the process proceeds to step S12423. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the process does not proceed to step S12422 described above.

In step S12423, a lighting/blinking process, which is a process of lighting and blinking all the light emitting parts (segment light emitting parts A to G and DP light emitting part) constituting the information display part 45z, is executed. In the lighting and blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then synchronized and blinked for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step S12423, the process proceeds to step S12424.

In step S12424, interrupt permission setting is executed to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. After that, an infinite loop is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12415 will be described.

As described above, when it is determined in step S12403 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12403: NO), when it is determined in step S12405 that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S12405: NO), and If it is determined in S12406 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12406: NO), the process advances to step S12415 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S12416.

In step S12416, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12416 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12416: YES), the process advances to step S12417 to determine whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. If it is determined in step S12417 that the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON (step S12417: YES), the process advances to step S12418 to perform the setting change process (setting change process). mode). After that, the process proceeds to step S12422. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12416 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12416: NO), and in step S12417 it is determined that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON. If so (step S12417: NO), the process proceeds to step S12419.

In step S12419, it is determined whether or not the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12419: NO), the process advances to step S12420 to execute the above-described first RAM clear processing. After executing step S12420, the process advances to step S12421 to transmit a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. After executing step S12421, the process proceeds to step S12422. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step S12420 described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12419: YES), the flow advances to step S12422 to emit a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. Send to control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." After executing step S12422, the process proceeds to step S12423.

In step S12423, the lighting blinking process described above is executed. After executing step S12423, the process advances to step S12424 to execute interrupt permission setting for permitting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, infinite loop processing is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As described above, in this aspect, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is to press the RAM clear switch (to be in the ON state) and press the setting key (keyhole). , the power switch is turned on while the frame open switch and the door open switch are all turned on. In addition, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed by setting the RAM clear switch to a non-depressed state (OFF state), setting the setting key (keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening. This is an operation to turn on the power switch while all the switches are turned on. The operation for executing the first RAM clearing process is to press down the RAM clear switch (turn it ON) and turn OFF any of the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch. This is an operation to turn on the power switch in the state where the

An example of the flow of processing realized by executing the main processing described above will be collectively described below.

・When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied (steps S12403, S12405, and S12406), setting change processing (setting change mode) is performed, regardless of whether the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied or not, and regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag, the setting change process is performed. (setting change mode) is executed (step S12418).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12403, S12405, and S12406), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, and if it is determined that the setting change flag is ON (step S12407: YES), an operation for executing setting change processing (setting change mode), setting confirmation processing The setting change process (setting change mode) is executed regardless of whether or not the operation for executing the (setting confirmation mode) and the operation for executing the first RAM clear process are performed (step S12418). .

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12403, S12405, and S12406), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12407: NO), and if an operation for executing the first RAM clear processing has been performed (step S12408 : YES, step S12417: NO, step S12419: NO), the first RAM clear processing is executed (step S12420) and a RAM clear command is transmitted (step S12421) regardless of the state of the setting checking flag.

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12403, S12405, and S12406), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12407: NO), and an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed. (step S12408: NO, step S12409: YES), setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12412).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12403, S12405, and S12406), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12407: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is not performed. Even if there is, if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S12410: YES), setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12412).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12403, S12405, and S12406), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is established and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12415), even if an operation for executing the first RAM clear processing has been performed, the first RAM clear processing is executed. Without execution, a RAM abnormality command is transmitted (step S12422).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S12403, S12405, and S12406), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is established and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12415), even if an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed, the setting A RAM abnormality command is transmitted without executing confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) (step S12422).

Details of the setting change process shown in step S12418 in FIG. 70 will now be described.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of step S12418 in FIG.

In step S 12501 , a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for notifying that the setting change mode has started. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "the setting change mode has started", and then the speaker 46 is caused to repeatedly output a voice such as "the setting change mode is in progress". Further, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, in this aspect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for displaying a character string such as "in setting change mode" on the pattern display device 41, and receives the command. Then, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "in setting change mode". In addition, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with maximum luminance.

After transmitting the setting change mode start command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S12501, the process advances to step S12502.

In step S12502, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The setting change flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, as described above, and a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not yet ended. is. After executing step S12502, the process advances to step S12503.

In step S12503, initial setting processing at the start of setting change is executed. In the initial setting process at the start of setting change, initial settings necessary for starting the setting change process are executed. Further, in this aspect, in the initial setting process at the start of setting change, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF. to After executing step S12503, the process advances to step S12504.

In step S12504, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as update setting information. Specifically, in this aspect, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in another area of the main RAM 64 other than the setting information storage area. is copied to the update setting information storage area. After executing step S12504, the process advances to step S12505.

In step S12505, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information for update is lit on the information display section 45z. After that, the flow advances to step S12506 to determine whether the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", whether the update setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6" determine whether or not If it is determined in step S12506 that the update setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12506: YES), the process proceeds to step S12508. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12506 that the update setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12506: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information. Alternatively, if information other than numerical values is stored due to noise or the like, the flow advances to step S12507 to change the update setting information to the initial value. In this aspect, "1" is stored as an initial value in the update setting information. After that, the process proceeds to step S12508.

In step S12508, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. In the middle, a signal indicating Low level is monitored, and when a falling edge of the signal falling from High level to Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) is turned to the OFF side. If it is determined in step S12508 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12508: NO), the process advances to step S12509 to determine whether the setting change button has been pressed. judge. If it is determined in step S12509 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S12509: YES), the process advances to step S12510 to update the update setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value information stored as update setting information. However, when the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical value information stored as update setting information is "6", the numerical value information is updated to "1". Thereafter, returning to step S12506 described above, it is determined whether or not the updated setting information for update is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12509 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S12509: NO), the process returns to step S12506 without executing the processing of step S12510, and the update setting information is updated. It is determined whether the numerical value is within a predetermined range.

If it is determined in step S12508 that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12508: YES), the process proceeds to step S12511.

In step S12511, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as setting information. Specifically, in this aspect, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is copied to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. do. After executing step S12511, the process advances to step S12512 to end the control for displaying the update setting information on the information display section 45z. After that, the process proceeds to step S12513.

In step S12513, first RAM clear processing is executed. In the first RAM clearing process, information other than the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is erased. When this first RAM clearing process is executed, the above-described setting changing flag is also cleared (turned OFF). After executing step S12513, the process proceeds to step S12514.

In step S 12514 , a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 performs processing for notifying that the setting change mode has ended. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the output of the voice "setting change mode is in progress" from the speaker 46 is ended, and the voice "setting change mode is finished" is output from the speaker 46. FIG. Also, the control for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress in the pattern display device 41 and various lamps 47 is ended.

After transmitting the setting change mode end command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may display information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

After executing step S12514, this setting change process ends. After executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the lottery setting after the change is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information displays the relevant information on the management screen. The configuration may be such that the setting information of the lottery setting after the change of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

Details of the setting confirmation process shown in step S12412 in FIG. 70 will now be described.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S12412 in FIG.

In step S 12601 , a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for notifying that the setting confirmation mode has started. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "the setting confirmation mode has started", and then a voice such as "the setting confirmation mode is in progress" is repeatedly outputted from the speaker 46. Further, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, in this aspect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting confirmation mode is in progress", and receives the command. Then, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "in setting confirmation mode". In addition, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with the maximum luminance.

After transmitting the setting confirmation mode start command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step S12601, the process advances to step S12602.

In step S12602, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, as described above, and a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not yet ended. is. After executing step S12602, the process advances to step S12603.

In step S12603, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is flashed on the information display section 45z. After that, the process proceeds to step S12604.

In step S12604, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. In the middle, the signal indicating the Low level is monitored, and when the falling edge of the signal falling from the High level to the Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. judge. If it is determined in step S12604 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12604: NO), step S12604 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12604 that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12604: YES), the process proceeds to step S12605. That is, until the setting key (keyhole) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, the infinite loop is repeated and the process does not proceed to step S12605. move on.

In step S12605, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z ends. After that, the process proceeds to step S12606.

In step S12606, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S12607.

In step S 12607 , a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 performs processing for notifying that the setting confirmation mode has ended. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the output of the voice "setting confirmation mode is in progress" from the speaker 46 is ended, and the voice "setting confirmation mode is finished" is output from the speaker 46. Also, the control for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is in progress on the pattern display device 41 and various lamps 47 is ended.

After transmitting the setting confirmation mode end command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S12607, this setting confirmation process ends.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x) will be described.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. In this aspect, the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) executes timer interrupt processing at a 4 ms cycle.

In step S12701, various random number updating processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, etc.) in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the numerical information after the addition to the reading source counter is executed. When the read numerical value information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting the read source counter with 0 is executed. After executing step S12701, the process advances to step S12702.

In step S12702, power failure monitoring processing is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main controller 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (eg, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Determining that the switch has been turned off or that a power failure has occurred, saves various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main side CPU 62 x to a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . After that, without proceeding to step S12703, which will be described later, infinite loop processing is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable. Note that the power supply device 85 of this aspect is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main controller 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output a regulated voltage in volts. As for the time during which this stabilized voltage is output, sufficient time is ensured for executing the processing up to storing the above-described RAM determination value in the main-side RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process of step S12702 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main controller 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S12703.

In step S12703, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12703 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12703: NO), the process proceeds to step S12704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12703 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12703: YES), this timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes after step S12704. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the processing for enabling the progress of the game after step S12704 is not executed, and the configuration is such that the transition to the game progress mode in which the progress of the game is possible is not made. there is The processing after step S12704, which is the processing for enabling the progress of the game, will be described below.

In step S12704, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when information is set to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state, output of a drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set Stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information to switch the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. When set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S12705.

In step S12705, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S12706.

In step S12706, signals received from the respective ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and ball entry detection processing for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. Since the ball-entering detection process is the same as the ball-entering detection process shown in FIG. 28, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S12706, the process advances to step S12707.

In step S12707, timer update processing is executed to collectively update numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. Then, it progresses to step S12708 and performs the output setting process of a prize ball command. After that, the process proceeds to step S12709.

In step S12709, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the starting port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are determined based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. While acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM64. After executing step S12709, the process advances to step S12710.

In step S12710, ball-entering processing for the through-gate accompanying entry (passage) of the game ball into the through-gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is stored in the electronic device of the RAM 64. Store in reservation area 64d. After executing step S12710, the process advances to step S12711.

In step S12711, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, winning lottery, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. After executing step S12711, the process advances to step S12712.

In step S12712, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. In the game state transition processing, processing is executed to shift the game state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S12712, the process advances to step S12713.

In step S12713, an electric role support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric role product 34a (electric role product opening lottery), and when it is determined to be in the open state, the electric role product 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S12713, the process advances to step S12714.

In step S12714, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, a process for shooting a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S12714, the process advances to step S12715.

In step S12715, external information setting processing is executed so as to control the start and end of the output of external signals according to the processing results of various processing executed in the current timer interrupt processing. After executing step S12715, the process advances to step S12716.

In step S12716, game history processing for calculating and displaying game history information is executed. Since the game history processing is the same as the game history processing shown in FIG. 29, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S12716, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

As described above, in this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is started, the above-described normal startup command, RAM abnormality command, RAM clear command, setting change mode start command, setting One of the five confirmation mode start commands is transmitted from main controller 60 to sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving one of these five commands, the sound emission control device 90 determines in what manner the main control device 60 was started based on the type of the received command (what type of command). ) can be grasped. That is, the above-described five commands, ie, the normal startup command, the RAM error command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command are commands indicating the type of startup processing executed by the main controller 60. Therefore, these five commands are also collectively referred to as "activation type commands".

Next, processing executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of mode 101 of the first embodiment. In step S12801, startup processing is executed. Specifically, it executes initial setting processing upon power-on, determination of whether or not the sound and light side RAM 94 functions normally, and the like. After executing step S12801, the process advances to step S12802.

In step S12802, start date/time information acquisition processing is executed. In the activation date/time information acquisition process, the activation date/time information is read from the activation date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 and stored in the activation date/time information storage area 94b of the main RAM 64. FIG. The details of the activation date/time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S12802, the process advances to step S12803.

In step S12803, activation type notification processing is executed. In the activation type notification process, based on the activation type command received from the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60, the activation type of the main controller 60 is notified. Details of the activation type notification process will be described later. After executing step S12803, the process advances to step S12804.

In step S12804, permission of timer interrupt is set. As a result, execution of timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is permitted. After that, it enters into an infinite loop.

Next, the details of the activation date/time information acquisition process shown in step S12802 in FIG. 74 will be described.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the startup date/time information acquisition process executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of aspect 101 of the first embodiment. In step S12901, it is determined whether or not an activation type command has been received from the main MPU62. Specifically, in this embodiment, the main MPU 62 issues any one of the above-described five commands: the normal startup command, the RAM error command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command. Determine whether or not a command has been received. If it is determined in step S12901 that one of the above five commands has been received (step S12901: YES), the process proceeds to step S12902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12901 that none of the above five commands has been received (step S12901: NO), the process returns to step S12901. That is, it waits until it is determined that any one of the above-described five commands has been received, and if it is determined that any one of the above-described five commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S12902. move on.

In step S12902, it is determined whether or not the command received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command is either the normal activation command or the RAM abnormality command. If it is determined in step S12902 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is either the normal activation command or the RAM abnormality command (step S12902: YES), the process proceeds to step S12903. Here, when the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the normal activation command or the RAM abnormality command, the setting change processing (setting change mode) is started when the power supply from the outside is started. This is a case where none of the operation for execution, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), and the operation for executing the first RAM clear process has been accepted. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S12903.

In step S12903, the current date and time information is read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and the read current date and time information is written (stored) in the activation date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. After that, the process advances to step S12905, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12902 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is neither the normal activation command nor the RAM abnormality command (step S12902: NO), that is, If the received command is one of the RAM clear command, setting change mode start command, and setting confirmation mode start command, the process advances to step S12904. Here, when the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is any one of the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command, it mainly means that power is supplied from the outside. When supply is started, an operation for executing setting change processing (setting change mode), an operation for executing setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode), and an operation for executing first RAM clear processing This is a case where any one of the operations is accepted. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S12904.

In step S12904, it is determined whether or not the startup date/time information is stored in the startup date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. FIG. Here, the case where the startup date and time information is stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 means the case where the date and time can be read from the information stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2. When the startup date and time information is not stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on for the first time, or when the information stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 This is the case when the date and time cannot be read normally due to destruction due to noise or the like. If it is determined in step S12904 that the activation date/time information is stored in the activation date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S12904: YES), the process of step S12903 described above (overwriting the current date/time information as activation date/time information processing) is not executed (avoided), and the process advances to step S12905.

In step S12905, the activation date/time information is read from the activation date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, and the read activation date/time information is written (stored) in the activation date/time information storage area 94b of the sound/light RAM 94. After that, the activation date/time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S12904 described above, if it is determined that the activation date/time information is not stored in the activation date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S12904: NO), the process of step S12903 described above (read current date/time information to overwrite the activation date and time information in step S12905 described above. The reason for this is that, if the process proceeds to step S12905 while the startup date/time information is not stored in the startup date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, it should be written to the startup date/time information storage area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. This is because there is a problem that the target startup date and time information does not exist.

Next, the details of the activation type notification process shown in step S12803 in FIG. 74 will be described.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing activation type notification processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of aspect 101 of the first embodiment. In step S13001, it is determined whether or not the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the normal activation command. If it is determined in step S13001 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the normal activation command (step S13001: YES), the process proceeds to step S13002.

In step S13002, normal activation notification processing is executed. In the normal startup notification process, the main side RAM 64 is not determined to be abnormal, and the pachinko machine 10 (main A process for notifying that the control device 60) has been activated is executed. Specifically, in this aspect, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "Normal startup". After executing step S13002, this activation type notification process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13001 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command is not the normal activation command (step S13001: NO), the process advances to step S13003 to receive the activation type command from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the received command is a RAM abnormal command. If it is determined in step S13003 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the RAM abnormality command (step S13003: YES), the process proceeds to step S13004.

In step S13004, RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a process of notifying that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the program enters into an infinite loop by controlling the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." That is, in the RAM abnormality notification process, the notification of the type to be activated next in the pachinko machine 10 continues until the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the power supply is cut off.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13003 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command is not the RAM abnormality command (step S13003: NO), the process advances to step S13005 to receive the activation type command from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the received command is a RAM clear command. If it is determined in step S12005 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the RAM clear command (step S13005: YES), the process proceeds to step S13006.

In step S13006, RAM clear notification processing is executed. In the RAM clear notification process, a process of notifying the main RAM 64 that the RAM clear process has been executed is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller has been cleared." After that, the activation type notification process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13005 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command is not the RAM clear command (step S13005: NO), the process advances to step S13007 to receive the activation type command from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the received command is a setting change mode start command. If it is determined in step S13007 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the setting change mode start command (step S13007: YES), the process proceeds to step S13008.

In step S13008, setting change mode start notification processing is executed. In the setting change mode start notification process, a process of notifying that the setting change mode has started is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "the setting change mode has started", and then the speaker 46 is caused to repeatedly output a voice such as "the setting change mode is in progress". Further, in the setting change mode start notification process, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, in this aspect, a command for displaying a character string such as "in setting change mode" on the pattern display device 41 is transmitted to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 that receives the command, A character string such as "in setting change mode" is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加In addition, in the setting change mode start notification process, the various lamps 47 are controlled so as to alternately repeat turning on and off at maximum luminance and flashing. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S13009 to determine whether or not a setting change mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S13009 that the setting change mode end command has been received (step S13009: YES), the process proceeds to step S13010. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13009 that the setting change mode end command has not been received (step S13009: NO), the process returns to step S13009. That is, it waits until it is determined that the setting change mode end command has been received, and when it is determined that the setting change mode end command has been received, the process advances to step S13010.

In step S13010, setting change mode termination notification processing is executed. In the setting change mode end notification process, a process of notifying that the setting change mode has ended is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the output of the voice "setting change mode is in progress" from the speaker 46 is ended, and the voice "setting change mode is finished" is output from the speaker 46. FIG. Also, the control for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress in the pattern display device 41 and various lamps 47 is ended. After that, the activation type notification process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13007 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command is not the setting change mode start command (step S13007: NO), in other words, if the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 If the command is a setting confirmation mode start command, the process advances to step S13011.

In step S13011, setting confirmation mode start notification processing is executed. In the setting confirmation mode start notification process, a process for notifying that the setting confirmation mode has started is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "the setting confirmation mode has started", and then a voice such as "the setting confirmation mode is in progress" is repeatedly outputted from the speaker 46. Further, in the setting confirmation mode start notification process, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, in this aspect, a command for displaying a character string such as "in setting confirmation mode" on the pattern display device 41 is transmitted to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 that receives the command, The symbol display device 41 is caused to display a character string such as "in the setting confirmation mode". In addition, in the setting confirmation mode start notification process, the various lamps 47 are controlled so as to alternately repeat lighting and extinguishing with maximum luminance. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S13012 to determine whether or not a setting confirmation mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S13012 that the setting confirmation mode end command has been received (step S13012: YES), the process proceeds to step S13013. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13012 that the setting confirmation mode end command has not been received (step S13012: NO), the process returns to step S13012. That is, the process waits until it is determined that the setting confirmation mode end command has been received, and when it is determined that the setting confirmation mode end command has been received, the process advances to step S13013.

In step S13013, setting confirmation mode termination notification processing is executed. In the setting confirmation mode end notification process, a process of notifying that the setting confirmation mode has ended is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the output of the voice "setting change mode is in progress" from the speaker 46 is ended, and the voice "setting change mode is finished" is output from the speaker 46. FIG. Also, the control for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is in progress on the pattern display device 41 and various lamps 47 is ended. After that, the activation type notification process is terminated.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of mode 101 of the first embodiment. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (2 msec in this aspect). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S13101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S13101, the process advances to step S13102.

In step S13102, RTC effect processing is executed. In the RTC effect processing, an RTC effect for a predetermined time (5 minutes in this mode) is performed every predetermined time (every hour in this mode) after the pachinko machine 10 is activated (after power supply is started). Perform processing to execute. The details of the RTC effect processing will be described later. After executing step S13102, the process advances to step S13103.

In step S13103, a game round effect process is executed. In the game round effect processing, processing relating to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is performed. After executing step S13103, the process advances to step S13104.

In step S13104, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step S13104, the process advances to step S13105.

In step S13105, a customer waiting process is executed. In the customer waiting process, a process for displaying a demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 is executed when the game round has not been executed for a predetermined time. After executing step S13105, the process advances to step S13106.

In step S13106, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step S13106, the process advances to step S13107.

In step S13107, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step S13107, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, details of the RTC effect processing shown in step S13102 of FIG. 77 will be described.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing RTC effect processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

In step S13201, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect execution flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The RTC effect in-execution flag is a flag for determining whether or not an RTC effect, which will be described later, is being executed. If it is determined in step S13201 that the RTC effect running flag is not ON (step S13201: NO), that is, if the RTC effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S13202.

In step S13202, the current date and time information is read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S13203, and based on the read current date and time information and the activation date and time information stored in the activation date and time information storage area 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94, it is the elapsed time from the activation date and time to the current date and time. Calculate the elapsed startup time. Specifically, for example, the current date and time information read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 indicates "December 15, 2017 11:53:45", and the start date and time information stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 indicates "December 15, 2017 08:42:35", the activation elapsed time is "3 hours 11 minutes 10 seconds". If the calculated elapsed activation time exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the elapsed activation time will be reduced to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds or less until the elapsed activation time reaches 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds. Subtract the value corresponding to seconds. For example, if the calculated elapsed activation time is "51 hours 35 minutes 24 seconds", the value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds is subtracted twice to obtain a new elapsed activation time "3 hours 35 minutes". 24 seconds”. The reason for adopting such processing will be described later. After executing step S13203, the process proceeds to step S13204.

In step S13204, the RTC effect execution determination table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and in step S13205 it is determined whether or not it is time to start the RTC effect. In the RTC presentation execution determination table, the activation elapsed time and the type of RTC presentation are stored in association with each other.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the RTC effect execution determination table. As described above, the activation elapsed time and the type of RTC effect are stored in the RTC effect execution determination table in association with each other. Specifically, in this mode, as shown in FIG. 79, a different type of RTC effect is set for each hour of the activation elapsed time. For example, "RTC effect A" is set corresponding to the elapsed activation time "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", and "RTC effect B" is set corresponding to the elapsed activation time "2 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds". It is As described above, in this aspect, when the startup elapsed time exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, until the startup elapsed time reaches a value of 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds or less, from the startup elapsed time Subtract the value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds. Therefore, since the RTC effect execution determination table does not have to correspond to the portion where the elapsed time of activation exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the storage capacity of the sound and light side ROM 93 required for storing the RTC effect execution determination table is can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 78 . In step S13205, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the RTC effect. Specifically, when the activation elapsed time calculated in step S13203 matches the activation elapsed time set in the RTC effect execution determination table, it is determined that it is time to start the RTC effect. If not, it is determined that it is not time to start the RTC presentation. For example, when the activation elapsed time calculated in step S13203 is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", it is determined that it is time to start the RTC effect A.

If it is determined in step S13205 that it is not the timing to start the RTC effect (step S13205: NO), this RTC effect processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13205 that it is time to start the RTC effect (step S13205: YES), the process proceeds to step S13206.

In step S13206, the RTC effect of the type corresponding to the activation elapsed time set in the RTC effect execution determination table is set to start. For example, when the activation elapsed time is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", the control of the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 is started so as to create a presentation mode corresponding to the RTC presentation A, and the moving image corresponding to the RTC presentation A is displayed. is transmitted to the display control device 100 to start the display of . In this mode, the RTC production A is a production in which the character A appears and sings the song A for 5 minutes. Another RTC effect set in the RTC effect execution determination table is an effect in which another character appears and sings another song for five minutes. That is, different characters and songs appear for each type of RTC presentation. After that, the process proceeds to step S13207.

In step S13207, the RTC effect running flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S13208, and "150000" is set in the RTC rendering timer counter Tr. The RTC effect timer counter Tr is a counter for managing the remaining time of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time this timer interrupt process is executed, as will be described later. In this mode, the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, so "150000" set in the RTC effect timer counter Tr corresponds to 5 minutes. After that, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

In step S13201 described above, if it is determined that the RTC effect running flag is ON (step S13201: YES), that is, in the timer interrupt process after turning ON the RTC effect running flag in step S13207 described above. If the process proceeds to step S13201, the process proceeds to step S13209.

In step S13209, 1 is subtracted from the value set in the RTC effect timer counter Tr. After that, the process advances to step S13210 to determine whether or not the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is zero. In step S13210, if it is determined that the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is not 0 (step S13210: NO), that is, if it is determined that the RTC effect is not finished yet, this RTC effect process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in step S13210, if it is determined that the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is 0 (step S13210: YES), that is, if it is determined that it is time to end the RTC effect, the process proceeds to step S13211. Set to terminate the RTC presentation in progress. After that, the process proceeds to step S13212, the RTC effect in-execution flag is turned OFF, and this RTC effect processing ends.

As described above, according to this aspect, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects described in the above other aspects.

Before describing the effects of this mode, a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed will be described. Generally, in a game hall, power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in a so-called island facility with each power switch turned on, and the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. When it is turned ON, the supply of electric power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously).

According to this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 reads the current date and time information from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 based on the start of the supply of power from the outside to the pachinko machine 10, and reads the read current date and time information. is stored as start-up date/time information in the start-up date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (the process shown in step S12903 in FIG. 75, hereinafter also referred to as "start-up date/time information storage process"). Then, the start date and time information storage process is executed based on the start date and time information including the date and time when the start date and time information storage process was executed and the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. The elapsed activation time is calculated (step S13203 in FIG. 78), and the execution of the RTC effect is started based on the calculated elapsed activation time (steps S13204 to S13206 in FIG. 78). The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

Suppose that the execution of the RTC effect is started based on the current date and time information clocked in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 instead of the activation elapsed time after the activation date and time information storage process is executed (for example, the current date and time information A case in which the RTC presentation is started at the timing when the included time reaches 11:00:00 will be described. In this configuration, if there is a deviation in the time included in the current date and time information of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility (for example, at a certain moment, the current date and time information of the pachinko machine 10A When the time is 11:00:00 and the time included in the current date and time information of the pachinko machine 10B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the RTC effect is started is set to each pachinko machine 10 There is a problem that the players who expected the RTC performance to start all at once (at the same time) at each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island facility feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts to supply power from the outside to the pachinko machine 10, and the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 , and stores the read current date and time information in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 as startup date and time information. Therefore, for example, when the manager of the gaming hall turns on the island power switch, power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously), and the island facility is supplied with power. Each installed pachinko machine 10 simultaneously (simultaneously) executes start date/time information storage processing.

Then, according to this aspect, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility has start-up date information including the date and time when the start-up date information storage process was executed, and clocked in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. Based on the current date and time information stored in the device, the time elapsed since the start date and time information storage process was executed is calculated. As described above, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility simultaneously (simultaneously) executes the activation date/time information storage processing. The elapsed time since the start is the same (or substantially the same) even if there is a deviation in the time contained in the current date and time information clocked in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 of each pachinko machine 10.

Then, according to this aspect, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts the RTC effect based on the calculated elapsed activation time, so that all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility simultaneously (At the same time), it becomes possible to start the RTC presentation.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect is configured to be able to hold the start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 even during a power failure state in which the supply of power from the outside is interrupted. In addition, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 avoids execution of the above-described startup date and time information storage processing when the type of startup processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is a specific startup processing. configured (step S12902 in FIG. 75). Specifically, in this aspect, when the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 receives any one of the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode activation type command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, avoids execution of the above-described activation date/time information storage process. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case in which a configuration without a function for avoiding execution of the above-described startup date/time information storage process is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the supply of power to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously), each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously ) Execute start date and time information storage processing. After that, the manager of the game hall performs specific activation processing (for example, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear processing) for one pachinko machine 10 among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility. ), after the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 is turned off once, the one pachinko machine 10 is put into a state in which a specific startup process is executed (for example, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, In some cases, the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 is turned ON to execute a specific start-up process as a state of receiving an operation for executing the RAM clearing process. In this case, the one pachinko machine 10 performs the activation date/time information storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the supply of electric power is started. Then, the starting elapsed time calculated in the one pachinko machine 10 is different from the starting elapsed time calculated in the other pachinko machine 10, and the timing at which the RTC effect is started in the one pachinko machine 10 is There is a problem that the timing at which the RTC performance is started in the other pachinko machine 10 is different from that of the other pachinko machine 10, and the player who is playing the game in the pachinko machine 10 concerned feels uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if the administrator of the game hall turns off the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 to put it in a power failure state, the activation date and time information of the RTC 97 of the one pachinko machine 10 is stored. The activation date/time information stored in area 97b2 is retained. After that, when the administrator turns on the power switch with the one pachinko machine 10 in a state in which a specific start-up process is executed, a specific start-up process is executed in the one pachinko machine 10, and the start date and time information storage process is performed. Since the execution is avoided, the start date and time information stored in the start date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 of the one pachinko machine 10 is not overwritten, and power is supplied to the other pachinko machines 10 all at once (simultaneously). The start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage process executed at the start is maintained. As a result, the startup elapsed time calculated for each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility including the one pachinko machine 10 becomes the same (or substantially the same).

Then, according to this aspect, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts the RTC effect based on the calculated elapsed startup time. It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start the RTC presentation in each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility including the pachinko machine 10 which has been connected.

Further, according to this aspect, when a specific start-up process is executed by main controller 60, information regarding the type of start-up process to be executed when power supply is started next time is notified. Specifically, in this aspect, when main controller 60 executes a start-up process including a process of transmitting a RAM abnormality command (step S12422 in FIG. 70), sound emission control device 90 outputs "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode.” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 . Therefore, the administrator can grasp the type of start-up processing to be executed when the power supply is started next time, and after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is terminated, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted. When the power supply is started, the notified type of activation process (setting change mode in this aspect) can be executed.

In particular, in this aspect, after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 whose RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12415 of FIG. If the specified type of startup processing (setting change mode) is not executed, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal again, and the main control device 60 transmits the RAM abnormality command to the sound emission control device 90 (Fig. 70 step S12422). Then, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the above-described activation date/time information storage processing (step S12903 in FIG. The timing of starting the RTC performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 is shifted. However, in this aspect, since the information about the type of start-up process to be executed when the power supply is started next time is notified, the administrator can prevent the pachinko machine 10 from executing a different type of start-up process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the timing of starting the RTC effect in the pachinko machine 10 from being deviated from that of the other pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this aspect, the information about the type of startup process to be executed when the next power supply is started is notified until the power supply from the outside to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (for example, the power switch is turned off). (until turned off). Effects of such a configuration will be described.

Supposing that the notification of the information regarding the type of start-up process to be executed when the power supply is started next time is configured to end in a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), for example, in a large game hall, the administrator After the island power switch of the island facility is turned on and the power supply from the outside to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the notification ends before the administrator reaches the pachinko machine 10, and the next time In some cases, the administrator cannot grasp the type of startup processing that should be executed when power supply is started.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the notification of the information regarding the type of start-up process to be executed when the power supply is started next time is continued until the power supply from the outside to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, the notification ends before the administrator reaches the pachinko machine 10, and the administrator cannot grasp the type of start-up processing to be executed when the power supply is started next time. occurrence can be avoided.

In this embodiment, in step S12905 of FIG. 75, the startup date and time information is read from the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, and the read startup date and time information is written in the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 (storage ) processing is executed, but the processing of step S12905 may be omitted. In this case, in step S13203 of FIG. 78, based on the current date and time information read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 and the startup date and time information read from the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, the startup date and time information storage process is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which an elapsed startup time, which is the elapsed time from the execution date and time to the current date and time, is calculated. However, the configuration for executing the processing of step S12905 can reduce the frequency of access to the RTC 97 by the sound and light side MPU 92, so that the processing load on the sound and light side MPU 92 can be reduced.

In addition, in this aspect, in step S13202 of FIG. 78, the current date and time is grasped by reading the current date and time information from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, but instead of this configuration, the RTC 97 The current date and time information may be read from the clock register 97b1, and thereafter, the current date and time may be grasped by counting the elapsed time from the current date and time information read at the start based on the internal clock. With such a configuration, the frequency of access to the RTC 97 can be reduced, so the processing load on the sound and light side MPU 92 can be reduced.

Further, in this aspect, the setting change mode is executed not only when the setting change mode is executed based on the acceptance of the operation for executing the setting change mode, but also when the setting change flag is ON. Even if it is executed, the execution of the startup date and time information storage process is avoided. As long as the execution of the activation date/time information storage process is avoided, a configuration may be adopted. According to such a configuration, the manager of the game hall turns on the island power switch, and all at once (simultaneously) the supply of power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility is started. In this case, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is in a situation where the start date/time information storage process should be executed all at once (at the same time), but the setting change flag is ON. 10 avoiding execution of the activation date/time information storage process.

Similarly, only when the setting confirmation mode is executed based on the reception of the operation for executing the setting confirmation mode, the execution of the activation date/time information storage process may be avoided. According to such a configuration, the manager of the game hall turns on the island power switch, and all at once (simultaneously) the supply of power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility is started. In this case, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is in a situation where the start date and time information storage process should be executed all at once (at the same time), but the setting confirmation flag is ON. 10 avoiding execution of the activation date/time information storage process.

<Aspect 102>
The startup date/time information acquisition process shown in FIG. 75 of mode 101 may be replaced with the startup date/time information acquisition process shown in FIG. 79 below. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the startup date/time information acquisition process executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of aspect 102 of the first embodiment. In step S13301, it is determined whether or not an activation type command has been received from the main MPU62. Specifically, in this embodiment, the main MPU 62 issues any one of the above-described five commands: the normal startup command, the RAM error command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command. Determine whether or not a command has been received. If it is determined in step S13301 that one of the above five commands has been received (step S13301: YES), the process proceeds to step S13302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13301 that none of the five commands described above has been received (step S13301: NO), the process returns to step S13301. That is, it waits until it is determined that any one of the above-described five commands has been received, and if it is determined that any one of the above-described five commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S13302. move on.

In step S13302, it is determined whether or not the startup date/time information is stored in the startup date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. FIG. Here, the case where the startup date and time information is stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 means the case where the date and time can be read from the information stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2. When the startup date and time information is not stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on for the first time, or when the information stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 This is the case when the date and time cannot be read normally due to destruction due to noise or the like. If it is determined in step S13302 that the activation date/time information is stored in the activation date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S13302: YES), the process proceeds to step S13303.

In step S13303, the startup date/time information is read from the startup date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, and the current date/time information is read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC97. Then, it is determined whether or not the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information. Specifically, for example, the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is “December 8, 2017 08:12:32”, and the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information is the next day, “December 2017. 08:15:11 on the 9th of the month", it is determined that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information. On the other hand, the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is "December 8, 2017 08:12:32", and the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information is "December 8, 2017 08:25:21" on the same day. Seconds", it is determined that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has not passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information. If it is determined in step S13303 that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information (step S13303: YES), the process proceeds to step S13304.

In step S13304, the current date and time information is read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and the read current date and time information is written (stored) in the activation date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. After that, the process proceeds to step S13305, which will be described later. That is, if the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the start date and time information, the information indicating the date and time when the pachinko machine 10 was started (current date and time information) It is stored as date and time information in the activation date and time information storage area 97b2. After that, the process proceeds to step S13305, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13303 that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has not passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information (step S13303: NO), the process of step S13304 described above ( The process proceeds to step S13305 without executing (avoiding) the process of reading the current date/time information and overwriting it as start-up date/time information.

In step S13305, the startup date/time information stored in the startup date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 is read, and the read startup date/time information is written (stored) in the startup date/time information storage area 94b of the sound/light side RAM. After that, the activation date/time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S13302 described above, if it is determined that the activation date/time information is not stored in the activation date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S13302: NO), the process of step S13303 described above (the current date/time information indicates The process of determining whether or not 30 minutes or more have passed since the current date and time indicated by the activation date and time information) is avoided, and the process advances to step S13304. The reason for this is that if the process proceeds to step S13303 with no activation date/time information stored in the activation date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, there is activation date/time information to be compared with the current date/time information. This is because the problem of not doing so will occur. Further, the reason for executing the processing of step S13304 is that if the above-described step S13305 is to be proceeded with the startup date and time information not stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, the sound and light side RAM 94 is activated. This is because there is a problem that there is no activation date/time information to be written in the date/time information storage area 94b.

As described above, according to this aspect, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects described in the above other aspects.

According to this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 reads the current date and time information from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 based on the start of the supply of power from the outside to the pachinko machine 10, and reads the read current date and time information. is stored as start-up date/time information in the start-up date/time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (the process shown in step S13304 in FIG. 79, hereinafter also referred to as "start-up date/time information storage process"). Then, the start date and time information storage process is executed based on the start date and time information including the date and time when the start date and time information storage process was executed and the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. The elapsed activation time is calculated (step S13203 in FIG. 78), and the execution of the RTC effect is started based on the calculated elapsed activation time (steps S13204 to S13206 in FIG. 78). Since the effect obtained by adopting this configuration is the same as the effect described in aspect 102 above, description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect is configured to be able to hold the activation date and time information stored in the activation date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 even during a power failure. When the MPU 92 receives the activation type command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the date and time included in the current date and time information in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 is included in the activation date and time information stored in the activation date and time information storage area 97b2. If a predetermined period of time (30 minutes in this embodiment) has not passed since the date and time of the start date and time, execution of the start date and time information storage process described above is avoided (step S13303 in FIG. 79). The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case in which a configuration without a function for avoiding execution of the above-described startup date/time information storage process is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the supply of power to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously), each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously ) Execute start date and time information storage processing. After that, for various reasons, the manager of the gaming hall once turns off the power switch of one of the pachinko machines 10 among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility, and then turns off the power switch of the one pachinko machine The power switch of the pachinko machine 10 may be turned ON. Specifically, for example, in order to execute the setting change mode and change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, the power switch of one pachinko machine 10 out of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility is turned off once, and then the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 is turned on to execute the setting change mode as a state in which an operation for executing the setting change mode is accepted for the one pachinko machine 10. be. In this case, the one pachinko machine 10 performs the activation date/time information storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the supply of electric power is started. Then, the starting elapsed time calculated in the one pachinko machine 10 is different from the starting elapsed time calculated in the other pachinko machine 10, and the timing at which the RTC effect is started in the one pachinko machine 10 is There is a problem that the timing at which the RTC performance is started in the other pachinko machine 10 is different from that of the other pachinko machine 10, and the player who is playing the game in the pachinko machine 10 concerned feels uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if the administrator of the game hall turns off the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 to put it in a power failure state, the activation date and time information of the RTC 97 of the one pachinko machine 10 is stored. The activation date/time information stored in area 97b2 is retained. After that, when the administrator turns on the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 within a predetermined time (30 minutes in this aspect), execution of the start date and time information storage processing is avoided, so that the one pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start date and time information storage process executed when the start date and time information stored in the start date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 is not overwritten and the power supply is started all at once (simultaneously) with the other pachinko machines 10 The stored start date and time information is maintained. As a result, the startup elapsed time calculated for each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility including the one pachinko machine 10 becomes the same (or substantially the same).

Then, according to this aspect, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts the RTC effect based on the calculated elapsed startup time. It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start the RTC performance in each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility including the pachinko machine 10 which has been connected.

That is, the administrator turns on the island power switch of the island facility to start supplying power all at once (simultaneously) to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility. In this mode, within 30 minutes), among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility, once the power switch of one pachinko machine 10 whose lottery setting is to be changed is turned off, When the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 is turned on to execute the setting change mode in a state of accepting an operation for executing the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery setting of the one pachinko machine 10 is performed. can be changed, and simultaneously (simultaneously) in each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility including the one pachinko machine 10 whose power switch is turned off and then turned on again It becomes possible to start the RTC presentation.

In this embodiment, in step S13303 of FIG. 80, the time serving as the criterion for determining whether or not to avoid execution of the activation date/time information storage process (step S13304) was set to 30 minutes. It is good also as a structure which can change the length of time which becomes. According to such a configuration, according to the number and size of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall, it is possible to appropriately change the length of time that is the criterion, so that, for example, the game It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the time serving as the determination criterion elapses before the lottery setting change work for a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is completed.

<Aspect 103>
Among the above modes, in the configuration in which the lottery setting of the winning lottery can be changed, whether or not the setting information that determines the lottery setting is a numerical value within a predetermined range is determined at a stage after the progress of the game is started. It may be configured to be executed also in For example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 that can take any value from "1" to "6" as the setting information that determines the lottery setting, the setting information may be abnormal other than "1" to "6" due to the influence of noise or the like. A configuration may be adopted in which the determination as to whether or not the value is not at a reasonable value (for example, 7, B, etc.) is also executed at a stage after the progress of the game is started.

In this aspect, the determination of the setting information is executed when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and when the pattern starts to fluctuate (more precisely, immediately before the execution of the winning lottery). do. Below, the determination of the setting information executed when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is referred to as "entering setting information determination". (immediately before execution) is called "setting information determination at the start of variation". The configuration of this aspect will be specifically described below.

First, the setting information determination at the time of ball entry executed in this mode will be described.

When the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 of this aspect acquires the special information (such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the Prior to execution of pre-determination processing (so-called pre-reading) based on the acquired special information, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range (1 to 6 in this aspect). ). In addition, as will be described later, the first determination process is based on the reserved special information before the reserved special information (reserved information) becomes the target of the winning lottery (hit judgment process described later). It is a process of determining the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the like.

Then, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range, the first determination processing is executed based on the acquired special information, and the first determination is performed. A pending command including the processing result is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, that is, if the setting information is an abnormal value other than 1 to 6 due to noise or the like ( For example, 7, B, etc.), the execution of the previous determination process is avoided, and the abnormality pending command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . The abnormal hold command indicates that the setting information is determined to be an abnormal value at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and that the execution of the previous determination process is avoided. command to show

Next, determination of setting information at the start of fluctuation executed in this embodiment will be described.

The main side MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this aspect is based on the special information (such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. When executing a winning lottery (winning determination process described later), prior to execution of the winning lottery, whether the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. Execute the determination of whether or not.

Then, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range, similar to the normal pachinko machine 10, a winning lottery is performed based on the special information. Execute.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, that is, if the setting information is an abnormal value other than 1 to 6 due to noise or the like ( For example, 7, B, etc.), after avoiding the execution of the winning lottery, the sub side of the sound emission control device 90 etc. issues a game stop command indicating to stop the progress of the game It transmits to the control device and executes processing for stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped, and the pachinko machine 10 enters a state in which the player cannot continue the game. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 that has received the game stop command notifies that the game has stopped due to an abnormality in the setting information and that the pachinko machine 10 should be restarted in the setting change mode. Execute the process.

As described above, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, the execution of the first determination process is avoided. To suppress the occurrence of a problem in the result of the preceding judgment processing, which is caused by executing the preceding judgment processing in a state in which a correctness table cannot be referred to due to an abnormal value which is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. can be done.

Further, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the execution of the winning lottery is avoided, so that the setting information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the result of the winning lottery as a result of the winning lottery being executed in a state in which the winning lottery table cannot be referred to due to an abnormal value which is not a numerical value.

Further, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range in the determination of the setting information at the start of fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped. It is possible to prevent the game from progressing with an abnormal value that is not a value, and increase the disadvantage of the player.

Further, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped, while the setting information is determined in the setting information determination at the time of ball entry. If it is determined that the numerical value is not within the predetermined range, the progress of the game is not stopped. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present mode, a case will be described in which the progress of the game is stopped even when the setting information is determined not to be within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of ball entry. In this configuration, for example, the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 during the variation of the pattern or during the execution of the opening and closing execution mode (round game), and the entering ball triggered by the entering ball. When it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range in the time setting information determination, the game is stopped due to the fluctuation of the symbol or the open/close execution mode (round game) being executed is interrupted, and the game is stopped. It will cause discomfort and disadvantage.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, the progress of the game is not stopped. There is no interruption of pattern variation and opening/closing execution mode (round game) already being executed before the entry of a game ball which triggered information determination. Then, as in this mode, even if the progress of the game is stopped when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range in the determination of the setting information at the start of variation, the symbols are still changing or the opening/closing is executed. Since the mode is not being executed, the discomfort and disadvantage given to the player is less than when the game is stopped by determining that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of ball entry. is not big. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to stop the progress of the game while reducing discomfort and disadvantages given to the player. Then, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing with the setting information having an abnormal value that is not within the predetermined range, and the player's disadvantage from increasing.

Next, a description will be given of effects executed in cooperation with the display control device 100 when the sound emission control device 90 of this aspect receives a hold command or an abnormal hold command.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, the special information (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc.) obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is the object of the winning lottery. In the situation where the special information is withheld, a suspended image indicating that the special information is suspended is displayed in the first suspended display area Ds1 or the second suspended display area Ds2 (FIG. 4) of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Let The pachinko machine 10 of this aspect is configured to be able to display the pending image in the following five types of display modes as the display mode of the pending image.
Type 1 reserved image (blue reserved image in this mode)
Type 2 reserved image (green reserved image in this mode)
Type 3 reserved image (red reserved image in this mode)
Type 4 reserved image (golden reserved image in this mode)
Type 5 reserved image (rainbow-colored reserved image in this mode)
In this mode, the first type reserved image, the second type reserved image, the third type reserved image, the fourth type reserved image, and the fifth type reserved image are arranged in descending order of expectation. The degree of expectation means a high probability that the special information corresponding to the reserved image will win the jackpot when the reserved image in the display mode is displayed. In this aspect, the fifth type reserved image is displayed only when the corresponding special information wins the jackpot, and is not displayed when it is not. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, the fifth type reserved image is a reserved image indicating that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed, and when the fifth type reserved image is displayed, the jackpot It is certain that you will be selected.

Then, upon receiving the hold command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 sets the hold effect pattern based on the result of the destination determination process included in the hold command. In the pending effect pattern, information such as which type of pending image is displayed first at the timing of receiving the pending command, and what display mode (type) of the pending image is displayed until it becomes the target of the winning lottery. Information such as whether to change by pattern is included.

In this aspect, various holding effect patterns are set. An example of a pending effect pattern that can be set in this mode is shown below.
・Pending production pattern that displays the lowest expected type 1 pending image at the timing of receiving the pending command, and maintains the type 1 pending image without changing even after that ・Expectation level at the timing of receiving the pending command After displaying the lowest type 1 reserved image, after executing a pending change suggestion effect that suggests that the type 1 reserved image may change to another type of reserved image, the type 1 reserved A hold effect pattern that executes a hold change effect that changes the image to a hold image with a higher degree of expectation (for example, a second type hold image) At the timing of receiving the hold command, a hold image with a high degree of expectation from the beginning (for example, a second type hold image) Suspended effect pattern that displays a suspended image) ・After displaying a highly anticipated suspended image (for example, a 3rd type suspended image) from the beginning at the timing of receiving a suspended command, the suspended image changes to another type of suspended image After executing a pending change suggesting effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the After displaying a highly anticipated pending image (for example, a third type pending image) from the beginning at the timing of receiving the command, the pending change suggesting that the pending image may change to another type of pending image. After executing the suggestive effect, a pending effect pattern that executes a pending change effect that changes the relevant pending image to a pending image with a lower degree of expectation (for example, a type 1 pending image) ・The pending image being displayed in each of the above pending effect patterns Executes a pending change suggestion effect that suggests that the is likely to change to another type of pending image, but even after that, the pending image being displayed is maintained without changing. A hold change effect that changes (promotes) a low hold image to a high-expectation hold image is also called a hold promotion effect, and a hold change effect that changes (demotes) a high-expectation hold image to a low-expectation hold image. In particular, it is also called a pending demotion effect.

In this mode, since the pending effect pattern as described above is set, the player plays the game expecting that the pending image with a higher degree of expectation will be displayed. In addition, when the player recognizes the pending change suggestive effect, the player expects to change to a pending image with a higher degree of expectation, while expressing complex feelings such as not wanting a pending image with a lower degree of expectation to change. will embrace

Next, a case where the sound emission control device 90 receives an abnormality hold command will be described.

When receiving the abnormal suspension command, the sound emission control device 90 displays the lowest expected type 1 suspension image in the first suspension display area Ds1 or the second suspension display area Ds2 (FIG. 4) of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. ), and it is determined whether or not the pending images of the second type or more are included in the pending images that have already been displayed. Then, when it is determined that the second or more type of pending image is displayed, the pending change suggesting effect and the pending change effect can be executed within the period until the variation of the pattern currently being executed is completed. Determine whether or not In this mode, the time required from the start to the end of the pending change suggesting effect and the pending change effect is 5 seconds. is determined to be executable. Then, when it is determined that the pending change suggesting effect and the pending change effect can be executed, the pending change suggesting effect is executed, and then the displayed second or more pending image (for example, gold pending) A suspension change effect (suspension demotion effect) for changing (demoting) to a first type suspension image (for example, blue suspension) is executed.

As described above, the fact that the abnormal hold command is transmitted from the main control device 60 means that the game ball to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 that triggered the transmission of the abnormal hold command It means that the setting information was determined to be abnormal (not a numerical value within a predetermined range) at the time of ball entry. Therefore, at the timing immediately before the pattern currently fluctuating stops and the special information reserved as the object of the next winning lottery becomes the object of the winning lottery and the fluctuation of the pattern starts, the set information is within a predetermined range. , and the progress of the game is stopped as it is.

Here, in this aspect, the reason for adopting the configuration for executing the suspension change suggesting effect and the suspension change effect (suspension demotion effect) described above when an abnormal suspension command is received will be described.

First, unlike this mode, the case of adopting a configuration that does not execute the suspension change suggesting effect and the suspension change effect (suspension demotion effect) described above even when an abnormal suspension command is received will be described. In this configuration, for example, when the abnormal hold command is received in a situation where the pattern is fluctuating and a hold image with high expectations for the next winning lottery target is displayed, the player can Special information corresponding to the high-expectation pending image Special information corresponding to the high-expectation pending image, in spite of having a strong expectation for the winning lottery, when the changing pattern stops The game is stopped at the moment when it becomes the target of the winning lottery, or the moment when the special information corresponding to the reserved image that is the target of the winning lottery before the high-expectation reserved image becomes the target of the winning lottery. In the end, the player is strongly angry and disappointed that the game has stopped without executing the winning lottery based on the special information corresponding to the high-expectation hold image, which the player had a strong sense of expectation. You will end up with feelings of distrust and distrust. After the game is stopped, when the manager of the game hall restarts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode described above in order to return the game to a state in which the game can be progressed, it is stored in the main side RAM 64. Various types of information are erased, and the special information corresponding to the high-expectation pending image, which the player had a strong sense of anticipation for, is also erased. As a result, even after the pachinko machine 10 is restarted, the winning lottery based on the special information corresponding to the high-expectation holding image, which the player had a strong expectation for, is not executed. anger and disappointment in the

On the other hand, as in this aspect, when adopting the configuration for executing the above-described suspension change suggestion effect and suspension change effect when an abnormal suspension command is received, a special Before the information becomes the target of the winning lottery, that is, before the fluctuation of the pattern based on the special information corresponding to the high-expectation reserved image starts, the high-expected reserved image is the lowest-expected reserved image change to Therefore, the player initially had a strong sense of expectation for the high-expectation reserved image. I will change my perception that the special information corresponding to the was not so highly anticipated. After that, the moment when the special information corresponding to the reserved image becomes the target of the winning lottery, or the moment when the special information corresponding to the reserved image which is the target of the winning lottery before the said reserved image becomes the target of the winning lottery. Even if the game is stopped immediately, the player already does not have a strong sense of expectation for the special information corresponding to the reserved image, so the special information corresponding to the reserved image becomes the target of the winning lottery. Even if the game stops at the moment when the game is stopped, or at the moment when the special information corresponding to the reserved image that is the target of the winning lottery before the reserved image is the target of the winning lottery, the anger and disappointment will be so great. You don't have to hold it. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment that the game has stopped, and the special information corresponding to the reserved image is erased by restarting the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to reduce the player's anger and disappointment.

In addition, in this aspect, at the timing when the special information corresponding to the reserved image is the target of the winning lottery, the reserved image is the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 It is configured to move to a different display area (also referred to as a suspended display area during variation) and continue to display the suspended image. Then, in this aspect, the fifth type reserved image (in this aspect, the rainbow-colored reserved image) with the highest degree of expectation is the object of the winning lottery and the reserved image after moving to the changing reserved display area is displayed. , and when the reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2, the fifth reserved image is not displayed. As a holding effect pattern in which the most expected fifth type reserved image is displayed, for example, the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 is displayed as the fourth type reserved image, After moving to the variable pending display area as the object of the lottery, the pending change suggesting effect and the pending change effect are executed, and the fourth type pending image is changed to the most expected fifth type pending image. can be mentioned. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be explained.

First, unlike the present mode, a case of adopting a configuration in which the most anticipated reserved image can be displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 will be described. In this configuration, in a situation where the most expected hold image is displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2, the sound emission control device 90 receives the abnormal hold command to suggest hold change When the effect is executed, the player who has recognized the pending change suggesting effect has no room for the highest expected pending image to change to a more highly expected pending image, so after the pending change suggesting effect It becomes possible to predict that the pending change effect to be executed changes the pending image with the highest degree of expectation to the pending image with the lowest degree of expectation, and the player's expectations for the pending change suggesting effect are reduced. It will make you feel less. Further, in a situation where the holding image with the highest degree of expectation is displayed in the first holding display area Ds1 or the second holding display area Ds2, the sound emission control device 90 is abnormal. A pending change performance is executed by receiving a pending command, and when a pending image determined to win a big win changes to a pending image with the lowest expectation, the player wins a big win. The unbelievable event that the reserved image, which should have been confirmed, changed to the lowest expected reserved image, or the reserved image that should have been confirmed to win the jackpot The player will feel very strong anger and disappointment that the game has stopped without executing the winning lottery based on the special information corresponding to the.

On the other hand, when the configuration of this aspect described above is adopted, the pending image displayed in the first pending display region Ds1 or the second pending display region Ds always changes to a pending image with a higher degree of expectation. Since there is room, even if the pending change suggesting effect is executed by the sound emission control device 90 receiving the abnormal pending command, the player who recognizes the pending change suggesting effect It cannot be determined that the pending change effect executed after the relevant pending change suggesting effect changes to a pending image with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectations for the pending change suggesting effect. In addition, in this aspect, the first holding display area Ds1 or the second holding display area Ds2, the highest degree of expectation, since it is configured not to display the holding image that has been determined to win the jackpot, Even if the suspension change effect is executed by the sound emission control device 90 receiving the abnormal suspension command, the suspension image with the highest degree of expectation displayed in the first suspension display area Ds1 or the second suspension display area Ds2 is the highest. An event of changing to a held image with a low degree of expectation cannot occur. Therefore, according to this aspect, the phenomenon that the reserved image that should be confirmed to win the jackpot changes to the reserved image with the lowest degree of expectation, and the fact that the jackpot is to be won should be confirmed. Since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event that the game is stopped without executing the winning lottery based on the special information corresponding to the reserved image, it is possible to make the player feel great anger and disappointment. It can be suppressed. In this mode, when the special information is the target of the winning lottery and the pattern starts to change, the lottery result of the winning lottery is displayed even if the setting information becomes an abnormal value after the pattern starts to change. Until the next special information becomes the target of the winning lottery, or if the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning, the opening and closing execution mode executed based on the jackpot winning ends and the next special information The game is not stopped until it becomes the target of the winning lottery. Therefore, as a pending image after moving to the variable pending display area, even if a pending image (type 5 pending image) suggesting that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed is displayed, the player can It will not cause you the great anger and disappointment mentioned above. Therefore, according to this aspect, while suppressing the player from having a great anger or disappointment, a pending image is displayed in the variable pending display area indicating that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed. The display can provide the player with a great sense of anticipation and joy.

In addition, in this aspect, when the abnormal hold command is received, it is determined whether or not there is a hold performance pattern that has already been set before the abnormal hold command is received. Cancel the setting of the pending effect pattern. Specifically, when an abnormal hold command is received, it is determined whether or not there are pending change suggesting effects and pending change effects that have already been set to be executed but have not yet been executed, and are still executed. When it is determined that there are pending change suggesting performances and pending change performances that have not been executed, the execution schedules of these pending change suggesting performances and pending change performances are canceled. According to this configuration, even though the player's expectation for the pending image changed by executing the pending change suggesting effect and the pending change effect is increased, the special information corresponding to the pending image It is possible to prevent a player from having a sense of distrust caused by the game being stopped without execution of a winning lottery.

Next, an example of processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this aspect will be described. The main MPU 62 of this aspect executes main processing and timer interrupt processing. The main process is a process executed when the power is turned on, and the main process executed by the main MPU 62 of this aspect is the same as the main process (FIG. 70) explained in aspect 101, so the explanation is omitted.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 of mode 103. FIG. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 4 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S20101, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, etc.) in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the numerical information after the addition to the reading source counter is executed. When the read numerical value information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting the read source counter with 0 is executed. After executing step S20101, the process proceeds to step S20102.

In step S20102, power failure monitoring processing is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main controller 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (eg, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Determining that the switch has been turned off or that a power failure has occurred, saves various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main side CPU 62 x to a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . After that, without proceeding to step S20103, which will be described later, the infinite loop processing is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable. Note that the power supply device 85 of this aspect is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main controller 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output a regulated voltage in volts. As for the time during which this stabilized voltage is output, sufficient time is ensured for executing the processing up to storing the above-described RAM determination value in the main-side RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process of step S20102 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main controller 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S20103.

In step S20103, it is determined whether or not at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON. As described above, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that turns ON when it is determined that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal in the main process executed when the power is turned on. As will be described later, the game stop flag is a flag that turns ON to stop the progress of the game when it is determined that the setting information is not normal before execution of the winning lottery. When it is determined in step S20103 that both the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag are not ON (step S20103: NO), the process proceeds to step S20104. On the other hand, in step S20103, when it is determined that at least one of the RAM abnormality flag or the game stop flag is ON (step S20103: YES), without executing the processing after step S20104, the timer interrupt processing ends. do. That is, when at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON, the processing for enabling the progress of the game after step S20104 is not executed, and the game progress mode is entered in which the game can progress. is configured not to migrate. The processing after step S20104, which is the processing for enabling the progress of the game, will be described below.

In step S20104, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when information is set to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state, output of a drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set Output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information to switch the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. When set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S20105.

In step S20105, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S20106.

In step S20106, signals received from the respective ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and ball entry detection processing for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. Since the ball-entering detection process is the same as the ball-entering detection process shown in FIG. 28, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S20106, the process advances to step S20107.

In step S20107, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S20108.

In step S20108, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the starting port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are determined based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. While acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM64. After executing step S20108, the process advances to step S20109.

In step S20109, ball-entering processing for the through-gate accompanying entry (passage) of the game ball to the through-gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the electric accessary product opening counter C4 is acquired based on determination that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is stored in the RAM 64. It is stored in the electric service reservation area 64d. After executing step S20109, the process advances to step S20110.

In step S20110, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, winning lottery, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. After executing step S20110, the process proceeds to step S20111.

In step S20111, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. In the game state transition processing, processing is executed to shift the game state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S20111, the process proceeds to step S20112.

In step S20112, an electric role support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric role product 34a (electric role product opening lottery), and when it is determined to be in the open state, the electric role product 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S20112, the process proceeds to step S20113.

In step S20113, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, a process for shooting a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S20113, the process proceeds to step S20114.

In step S20114, a command output process for outputting (transmitting) the command set as a transmission target in the current timer interrupt process to each sub-side control device is executed. For example, when commands related to effects such as variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, these commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S20114, the process proceeds to step S20115.

In step S20115, game history processing for calculating and displaying game history information is executed. Since the game history processing is the same as the game history processing shown in FIG. 29, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S20115, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

[Ball entry processing for the starting port]
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 81: S20108).

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the starting opening. In step S20201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step S20201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S20203.

In step S20203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20204.

In step S20204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20209.

In step S20201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step S20205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, in step S20205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step S20207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port . After that, the process proceeds to step S20208.

In step S20208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20209.

In step S20209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S20209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit (S20209: NO), that is, if the start suspension number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S20209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S20211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20212.

In step S20212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20101 (FIG. 81) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In S20210, it stores in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20101 (FIG. 81) The value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. In addition, when the second start pending quantity RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 81) is It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S20210. After executing step S20212, the process proceeds to step S20213.

In step S20213, it is determined whether or not the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", the setting information is "1", "2", "3", "4", "5". , "6". If it is determined in step S20213 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S20213: YES), the process proceeds to step S20214.

In step S20214, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing determination of the presence or absence of such pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of a winning lottery. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S20214, the process proceeds to step S20215.

In step S20215, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information (pending information) of each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command indicates that the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has occurred, and the determination result by the previous determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the information before the information becomes the object of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114).

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to an increase in the number of pending items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S20215, the main MPU 62 ends the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20213 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, for example, due to the influence of noise, etc. If it is determined that an impossible value is stored (step S20213: NO), the process advances to step S20216 without executing the previous determination process of step S20214 described above, and sets an abnormality pending command. The abnormal hold command is a command indicating that the setting information was not a numerical value within a predetermined range when the game ball entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 . The abnormality pending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process ( FIG. 81 : step S20114). After step S20216 is executed, the ball entry processing for this starting opening ends.

[Prior judgment processing]
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 82: S20214) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, in the first determination process, based on the pending information, determination results such as determination of winning lottery, determination of type of big win, determination of presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step S20301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read by entering the game ball into the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 82). After that, the process advances to step S20302 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is determined, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery for the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S20302, if it is determined that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is the low probability mode (S20302: YES), the process proceeds to step S20303, and corresponds to the setting information. refer to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. As described above, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect has six types of low-probability modes corresponding to six stages of lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". A table is provided, and the main MPU 62 refers to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting information indicating the lottery setting. Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is referred to. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Note that an example of the success/failure table for six types of low-probability modes has already been described in aspect 57, so description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, in step S20302, if it is determined that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is not the low probability mode (S20302: NO), the process proceeds to step S20304, and the high probability mode refer to the hit/fail table. After that, the process proceeds to step S20305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. In this embodiment, one type of success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to regardless of the lottery setting. A success/failure table for the lottery mode may be prepared, and the success/failure table for the high-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting may be referred to.

In step S20305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S20305: YES), the process proceeds to step S20306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the flow advances to step S20307 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the first start port distribution table , and if it is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34, the distribution table for the second starting hole is referred to. After executing step S20307, the process proceeds to step S20308.

In step S20308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S20308, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (S20308: YES), the process proceeds to step S20309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S20308, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (S20308: NO), the process proceeds to step S20310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S20305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S20305: NO), the process proceeds to step S20311, and the entry to the starting port this time causes the storage area to be stored. Read out the stored value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S20312 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S20313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S20313: YES), the process proceeds to step S20314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (S20313: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

[Ball entry processing for through gate]
Next, the ball entry processing for the through gate will be described. Ball entry processing for the through gate is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 81: S20109).

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a through gate. In step S20401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35 or not. In step S20401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S20401: YES), the process proceeds to step S20402, whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S20401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step S20402, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (S20402: YES), the process proceeds to step S20403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20404.

In step S20404, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step S20101 (FIG. 81) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the ball entry processing for the through gate ends.

On the other hand, in step S20402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (S20402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the through ball entry processing is ended.

[Game spin control process]
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 81: step S20110).

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S20501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the big win is won, and is turned OFF at the timing of ending the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S20501, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S20501: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game round is executed without executing any of the processes after step S20502. End the control process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S20501: NO), the process proceeds to step S20502.

In step S20502, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is terminated.

In step S20502, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S20502: NO), the process proceeds to the game round start processing of steps S20503 to S20505. In step S20503, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S20503, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is "0" (S20503: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20503 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S20503: NO), the process proceeds to step S20504.

In step S20504, reservation information shift processing is executed to set the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step S20505. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step S20505, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20506.

In step S20506, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S20506, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20502 that the main display section 45 is performing variable display (S20502: YES), the process proceeds to step S20507.

In step S20507, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S20507, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 89) to be described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S20507 that the variable time has not elapsed (S20507: NO), the process advances to step S20508 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S20508, this game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20507 that the variation time has elapsed (S20507: YES), the process advances to step S20509 to execute variation end processing. In the fluctuation ending process, the stop symbol determined in the hit determination process (FIG. 88), which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 as the result of the current game round. After executing step S20509, the process advances to step S20510.

In step S20510, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the hit determination process (FIG. 88) to be described later. In step S20510, when it is determined that any of the jackpot flags are ON (S20510: YES), the process proceeds to step S20511, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S20510, when it is determined that none of the jackpot flags is ON (S20510: NO), the process proceeds to step S20512.

In step S20512, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". In step S20512, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (S20512: YES), the process advances to step S20513 to set a customer waiting command. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game round) ends. is a command that contains information about The customer waiting command set in step S20513 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). On the other hand, in step S20512, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is not "0" (S20512: NO), this game round control process is terminated.

[Holding information shift process]
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 85: S20504).

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step S20601, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first among the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) (the hold information stored in the first area information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series than the reservation information stored first among the reservation information stored in time series in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 6) When the reservation information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S20601, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step S20601, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S20601: YES), reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps S20602 to S20607 is executed. On the other hand, in step S20601, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S20601: NO ), the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area in steps S20608 to S20613 is executed.

In step S20602, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step S20603 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20604. In step S20604, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S20605.

In step S20605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S20605, the process advances to step S20606.

In step S20606, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S20607.

In step S20607, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S20607 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S20601, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S20601: NO), The process advances to step S20608.

In step S20608, 1 is subtracted from the second start reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S20609. In step S20609, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process advances to step S20610 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S20611.

In step S20611, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S20611, the process proceeds to step S20612.

In step S20612, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S20613.

In step S20613, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift time command set in step S20613 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

[Variation start processing]
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 85: S20505).

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing. In step S20701, it is determined whether or not the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S20701: YES), the process proceeds to step S20702.

In step S20702, hit determination processing is executed. In the hit determination process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area AE in the pending information shift process. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step S20702, the process advances to step S20703.

In step S20703, variable time setting processing is executed. In the variable time setting process, the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, is set based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of ready-to-win. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S20703, the process advances to step S20704.

In step S20704, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S20704 that the second pattern display flag of RAM 64 is not ON (S20704: NO), the process proceeds to step S20705 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S20703. On the other hand, in step S20704, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S20704: YES), the process proceeds to step S20706 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S20703. After executing step S20705 or step S20706, the process proceeds to step S20707.

In step S20707, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as jackpot type information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S20705 to S20707 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S20707, the process proceeds to step S20708.

In step S20708, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S20708, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S20701 described above, if it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, the process advances to step S20709 to send the game stop command to the sub side. It is transmitted to the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90 which are the control devices. The game stop command is a command for making the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the progress of the game is to be stopped. After executing step S20709, the process proceeds to step S20710, and the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 81) is executed, the execution of the process group for advancing the game (the process group of steps S20104 to S20115 in FIG. 81) is avoided, and the progress of the game is prevented. be stopped. After executing step S20710, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Hit determination process]
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variation start process (FIG. 87: S20702).

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step S20801, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flags in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 64 are ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is started after winning the jackpot. In step S20801, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S20801:YES), it progresses to step S20802.

In step S20802, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode. After that, the process proceeds to step S20804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S20801: NO), the process proceeds to step S20803.

In step S20803, the propriety determination is performed by referring to the propriety table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting information. Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is referred to. to determine whether it is correct or not. In the success/failure determination, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the hit/failure in the hit/fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S20804.

In step S20804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (hit lottery) in step S20802 or step S20803 is a big hit. In step S20804, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (S20804: YES), in steps S20805 to S20812, to set the game result in the case of a big hit and to set the stop result process.

In step S20805, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S20805, if it is determined that the second pattern display unit flag is not ON (S20805: NO), proceed to step S20806 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 8A). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step S20805, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S20805: YES), the process proceeds to step S20807, and a distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 8B) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in After executing the process of step S20806 or step S20807. The process advances to step S20808.

In step S20808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step S20806 or step S20807 is a variable probability jackpot. In step S20808, when it is determined that the game result is a variable probability jackpot (S20808: YES), the process proceeds to step S20809.

In step S20809, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is changed in a state where any stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S20809, the process advances to step S20810.

In step S20810, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the real hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S20808, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is not a probability variable jackpot (S20808: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step Proceed to S20811.

In step S20811, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step S20806 or step S20807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S20811, the process proceeds to step S20812.

In step S20812, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the real hit determination process is terminated.

In step S20804, if the result of the winning lottery in step S20802 or step S20803 is not a big win (S20804: NO), the process advances to step S20813 to execute stop result setting processing for loss. The stop result setting process for the time of loss means that in the current game turn that results in a loss, the change display is terminated in a state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S20813, the real hit determination process ends.

[Processing for setting fluctuation time]
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 87: S20703).

FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process. In step S20901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step S20902.

In step S20902, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery for the current game round is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S20902: YES), the process proceeds to step S20903.

In step S20903, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times in which the winning lottery is won is constant. After that, the flow advances to step S20904 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S20902, when it is determined that the winning lottery related to the current game round is not won (S20902: NO), the process proceeds to step S20905 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S20905) is executed when the winning lottery related to the current game round is not won in the above step S20902, reach occurs among the game rounds not winning the winning lottery in step S20905. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S20905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S20906. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S20906, the variation time table for reach occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the flow advances to step S20904 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S20905, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (S20905: NO), the process proceeds to step S20907, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S20904 to set the acquired variable time information in variable time counter areas provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64 . After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set such that the greater the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

[Game state transition processing]
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 81: S20111).

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the start of the ending period and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21001: NO), the process advances to step S21002 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing process period, and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing process period.

If it is determined in step S21002 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S21002: NO), the process advances to step S21003 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S21003, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S21003: NO), the process proceeds to step S21004, timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b is completed. It is determined whether or not. In step S21004, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S21004: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step S21004, if it is determined that the variable display is finished (S21004: YES), the process proceeds to step S21005, and the result of the winning lottery for the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether or not there is Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S21005: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S21005, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (S21005: YES), the process proceeds to step S21006, where the high probability mode flag and the high frequency Among the support mode flags, the ON flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S21007. Note that if both the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag are OFF in step S21006, the process directly proceeds to step S21007.

In step S21007, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. In this embodiment, "1500" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After executing step S21007, the process advances to step S21008.

In step S21008, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute an opening effect and a right-handed informing effect based on the reception of the opening command, and starts controlling various devices so that these effects are sequentially executed. After executing step S21008, the process advances to step S21009 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21003 that the opening period flag is ON (S21003: YES), the process proceeds to step S21010.

In step S21010, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S21010 that the opening period has ended (S21010: YES), the process advances to step S21011 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S21012.

In step S21012, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S21012, the process proceeds to step S21013.

In step S21013, the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode is set. Specifically, while checking the jackpot type flag (16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64, the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in . The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened. After executing step 13913, the process advances to step S21014.

In step S21014, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the flow advances to step S21015 to set an opening start command. The set opening start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). This opening start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening start command, the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds, and controls various devices so that the set content of the round effect is executed. Start. After executing step S21015, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S21002, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S21002: YES), the process proceeds to step S21016 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driven state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big winning opening 36a is open, on the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 36a or that the game balls of the opening limit number have entered. The driving state of the variable winning drive section 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S21016, the process proceeds to step S21017.

In step S21017, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21017: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21017: YES), the process advances to step S21018 to turn off the open/close processing period flag. After executing step S21018, the process proceeds to step S21019.

In step S21019, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S21019, the process proceeds to step S21020.

In step S21020, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. In this embodiment, "1500" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After executing step S21020, the process proceeds to step S21021.

In step S21021, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command, and starts controlling various devices so that the ending effect is executed. After executing step S21021, the process proceeds to step S21022.

In step S21022, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is ON (S21001: YES), the process proceeds to step S21023.

In step S21023, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21020), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step S21023, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S21023: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S21023: YES), the process proceeds to step S21024.

In step S21024, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S21025 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21025, the process advances to step S21026 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S21027.

In step S21027, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". If it is determined in step S21027 that the total pending number CRN is "0" (S21027: YES), the process proceeds to step S21028 to set a customer waiting command. The customer waiting command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b when the opening/closing execution mode ends. is a command. The customer waiting command set in step S21028 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). On the other hand, in step S21027, when it is determined that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S21027: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

[Grand Prize Opening/Closing Process]
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 89: S21016).

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S21101, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. When it is determined in step S21101 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (S21101: NO), the process proceeds to step S21102 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S21102, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21102: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21102: NO), the process proceeds to step S21103.

In step S21103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21103: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S21103, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21103: YES), the process proceeds to step S21104, in order to open the big winning opening 36a variable winning driving section 36c is driven. After that, the process proceeds to step S21105.

In step S21105, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "7500" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step S20107) of the timer interrupt process is executed, that is, every 4 msec cycle. After executing step S21105, the process advances to step S21106.

In step S21106, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning hole 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has started, and also changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step S21101, when it is determined that the big winning opening 36a is open (step S21101: YES), the process proceeds to step S21107, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21107: NO), the process proceeds to step S21108.

In step S21108, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21108 that no ball has entered (S21108: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21108 that a ball has entered (S21108: YES), the process proceeds to step S21109, and 1 is subtracted from the winning counter area PC. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21110.

In step S21110, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S21110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S21110: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21107: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S21110 (S21110: YES), the process proceeds to step S21111 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step S21112.

In step S21112, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21113 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S21113, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21113: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21113: NO), the process advances to step S21114, and "500" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. to set. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step S21114, the process advances to step S21115 to set a close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning hole 36a has ended, and is a command including information for making the control device on the sub side recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a is completed. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to match what you have done.

[Transition processing at the end of the ending period]
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 90: S21025).

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S21201, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S21201, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S21201: YES), the process proceeds to step S21202 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S21202, the process advances to step S21203.

In step S21203, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the flow advances to step S21204 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process proceeds to step S21205.

In step S21205, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S21210, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21201 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S21201: NO), the process advances to step S21206 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process proceeds to step S21207.

In step S21207, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S21208, and 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21209.

In step S21209, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21210.

In step S21210, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

[Electric support processing]
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 81: S20112).

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. In step S21301, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S21301 that the supported flag is not ON (S21301: NO), the process proceeds to step S21302.

In step S21302, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S21302 that the support winning flag is not ON (S21302: NO), the process proceeds to step S21303.

In step S21303, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer update process (step S20107) of the timer interrupt process is executed, that is, every 4 msec cycle.

If it is determined in step S21303 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21303: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21303: YES), the process proceeds to step S21304.

In step S21304, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step S21304 that it is time to end the variable display (S21304: YES), the process advances to step S21305 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S21304: NO), the process proceeds to step S21306.

In step S21306, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S21306, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S21306: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21306 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (S21306: YES), the process proceeds to step S21307.

In step S21307, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S21308 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S21307 (S21307: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S21308 (S21308: YES), the process advances to step S21309 to perform an electric accessary item opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, "375" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21310.

In step S21310, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S21309 is support winning. In step S21310, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S21310: YES), the process proceeds to step S21311, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S21312. On the other hand, in step S21310, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S21310: NO), the process proceeds to step S21312 without executing the processing of step S21311.

In step S21312, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S21312 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S21312: YES), the process proceeds to step S21313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21312 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S21312: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S21313, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S21313, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S21313: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21313 that the number-of-games counter area is "0" (S21313: YES), the process proceeds to step S21314 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S21315.

In step S21315, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S21315 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). Upon receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S21307 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S21307: YES), or if it is determined in step S21318 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S21308: NO), the process proceeds to step S21316, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 or 1, the electric role item opening lottery is performed. be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, "7375" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the process proceeds to step S21317.

In step S21317, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S21316 is support winning. In step S21317, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S21317: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S21317, if it is determined that the support is won (S21317: YES), the process advances to step S21318 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S21302 that the support winning flag is ON (S21302: YES), the process advances to step S21319 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S21319, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21319: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general pattern unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21319: YES), the process proceeds to step S21320.

In step S21320, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S21321 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S21301, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (S21301: YES), the process advances to step S21322 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

[Electrical opening/closing control process]
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 93: S21322).

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process. In step S21401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21402.

In step S21402, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S21402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21402: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S21402, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21402: YES), the process proceeds to step S21403 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S21403, the process advances to step S21404.

In step S21404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S21405 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S21405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S21405: NO), this electrical opening/closing control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S21405: YES), the process advances to step S21406 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step S21401, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21407 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S21407 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21407: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21407: YES), the process advances to step S21408 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S21409.

In step S21409, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S21409: NO), the process advances to step S21410 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S21410 that the high-frequency support mode is on (S21410: YES), the flow advances to step S21411 to set "400" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21409 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S21409: YES), or if it is determined that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode in step S21410 (S21410: NO), the process proceeds to step S21412. "50" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

Next, an example of processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound light emission control device 90 of this aspect will be described.

[Timer interrupt processing]
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S23101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S23101, the process advances to step S23102.

In step S23102, processing for holding effect is executed. In the pending effect processing, processing related to the effect to be executed when a pending command or an abnormal pending command is received is performed. The details of the pending effect processing will be described later. After executing step S23102, the process advances to step S23103.

In step S23103, a game round effect process is executed. In the game round effect processing, processing relating to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is performed. After executing step S23103, the process proceeds to step S23104.

In step S23104, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step S23104, the process advances to step S23105.

In step S23105, a customer waiting process is executed. In the customer waiting process, a process for displaying a demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 is executed when the game round has not been executed for a predetermined time. After executing step S23105, the process advances to step S23106.

In step S23106, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step S23106, the process advances to step S23107.

In step S23107, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step S23107, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

[Processing for pending effect]
Next, the pending effect processing will be described. The hold effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 95: S23102).

FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing processing for holding effect. In step S23201, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. If it is determined in step S23201 that no hold command has been received (step S23201: NO), the process advances to step S23203 to be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23201 that a hold command has been received (step S23201: YES), the process proceeds to step S23202.

In step S23202, a pending effect pattern setting process is executed. In the pending effect pattern setting process, first, a random number for determining the pending effect pattern is obtained from the counter of the sound and light side RAM 94 . Then, referring to the pending effect pattern table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93, the determination result of the preceding determination process included in the pending command received this time (whether or not there is a big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc.), A holding performance pattern corresponding to the acquired holding performance pattern determination random number is selected. Then, the selected pending effect pattern is set as a pending effect pattern to be executed. More specifically, the pending change suggesting effect included in the pending effect pattern set as the execution target is displayed so that the pending image included in the pending effect pattern set as the execution target is displayed, Set so that a pending change effect or the like is executed. After executing step S23202, the process advances to step S23203.

In step S23203, it is determined whether or not an abnormality pending command has been received. In step S23203, if it is determined that the abnormal hold command has not been received (S23203: NO), this hold effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23203 that an abnormality pending command has been received (S23203: YES), the process proceeds to step S23204.

In step S23204, setting is made so that the type 1 reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2. After that, the process proceeds to step S23204.

In step S23205, it is determined whether or not there are pending change suggesting effects and pending change effects that have already been set to be executed but have not yet been executed. In step S23205, if it is determined that there is a pending change suggesting effect and a pending change effect that have already been set to be executed but have not yet been executed (step S23205: YES), proceed to step S23206, Cancel the setting of execution of the relevant pending change suggesting effect and pending change effect. As a result, the pending change suggesting effect and the pending change effect that have been set to be executed are no longer executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S23207, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23205 that there is no pending change suggesting effect or pending change effect that has already been set to be executed but has not yet been executed (step S23205: NO), the above step S23206 , the process proceeds to step S23207.

In step S23207, it is determined whether or not a pending image with a degree of expectation of the second type or higher is being displayed. In step S23207, if it is determined that the hold image with the degree of expectation of the second type or higher is displayed (step S23207: YES), the process proceeds to step S23208, and the above-described hold change suggestion effect and hold change effect (hold demotion production) can be executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the suspension change suggesting effect and the suspension change effect (suspension demotion effect) described above can be executed in the remaining variation time of the currently varying symbol. In step S23208, if it is determined that the above-described suspension change suggestion effect and suspension change effect (suspension demotion effect) can be executed (step S23208: YES), the process proceeds to step S23209, and the above-described suspension change suggestion effect and suspension It is set to execute a change effect (holding demotion effect). As a result, the pending change suggesting effect is executed, and thereafter the pending change effect (suspending change effect) is executed, and the pending image with the degree of expectation of the second type or higher is changed to the first type pending image.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23207 that the hold image with the second or higher level of expectation is not displayed (step S23207: NO), and in step S23208, the above-described hold change suggestion effect and hold change effect (hold demotion effect ) is not executable (step S23208: NO), this suspension effect processing is terminated without executing step S23209 described above.

An example of the processing executed by the main side MPU 62 and the sound and light side MPU 92 of this aspect has been described above.

In this aspect, when the sound emission control device 90 receives an abnormal hold command, it is configured to display a normal type 1 hold image, but instead of this configuration, a normal hold command is received. In some cases, it may be configured to display a pending image (for example, a pending image with a black x mark) that is not displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be made to recognize early that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the game. Further, in this configuration, when the sound emission control device 90 receives an abnormal hold command, the hold image that is already displayed is changed to a hold image (for example, a black , etc.) may be changed.

In addition, in this aspect, when the sound emission control device 90 receives an abnormal hold command, a hold change suggestion effect that has been set to be executed before the abnormal hold command is received but has not yet been executed, It is determined whether or not a pending change performance exists, and when it is determined that there is a pending change suggesting performance and a pending change performance that have not been executed yet, the scheduled execution of these pending change suggesting performance and pending change performance is canceled. Although it is configured, the pending change effect for which the execution schedule is to be canceled may be only the pending promotion effect. Even with such a configuration, the player's discomfort can be reduced because the pending promotion effect, which would make the player feel uncomfortable if executed before the game is stopped, is not executed.

In addition, in this aspect, the design display device 41 is configured to display a pending image, but instead of this configuration, a lamp is provided to indicate that the special information is suspended, and the light emission mode of the lamp (for example, lighting The degree of expectation of the special information corresponding to the lamp may be indicated by the color of the hour, the interval of blinking, etc.). Also with this configuration, it is possible to execute the above-described suspension change effect by changing the light emission mode of the lamp.

In addition, in this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the game stop flag is turned ON after avoiding the execution of the winning lottery (hit determination process). However, instead of this configuration, the game may be stopped by turning on the game stop flag after executing the winning lottery (hit determination process). Even with such a configuration, as in the present mode, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing with the setting information having an abnormal value that is not within the predetermined range, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. be able to. However, as in this aspect, if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, the execution of the winning lottery (hit determination process) is avoided. It is possible to prevent the system from entering a dead state (freeze state or runaway state).

In addition, in this aspect, the highest expected pending image (fifth type pending image) confirmed to win the jackpot is not displayed in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2. However, even if the highest expected pending image is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 is likely to be out, that is, even if the highest expected pending image is displayed, the jackpot is won. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 that is not determined to win , the configuration may be such that the highest expected pending image is displayed in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2. According to such a configuration, for a player who initially had a strong sense of expectation for the highest expected pending image, the highest expected pending image becomes the lowest expected pending image. Even if it changes, it is possible to change the recognition that the special information corresponding to the reserved image was not so highly anticipated.

<Aspect 104>
In the setting information determination at the time of fluctuation start executed in the above-described aspect 103, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 may fall within a predetermined range (for example, from 1 to 6) due to the influence of noise or the like. It is possible to detect that a numerical value) has been rewritten to an abnormal value outside the predetermined range (for example, 7, B, etc.), but if the setting information is changed from a normal numerical value within the predetermined range to another normal numerical value If the setting information has been rewritten, for example, if the setting information has been rewritten from "1" to "6", the rewriting of the setting information cannot be detected, and the rewritten setting information cannot be detected. There is a problem that a winning lottery (hit determination process) is executed based on the above.

Therefore, in this aspect, the configuration described below is adopted to solve this problem.

First, the setting information determination at the time of ball entry executed in this mode will be described. The ball-entering setting information determination performed in this mode is the same as the ball-entering setting information determination performed in mode 103 described above.

That is, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this aspect, in the same way as in the above-described aspect 103, is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the special information (jackpot random number counter C1 value, etc.) is acquired, prior to execution of pre-determination processing (so-called pre-reading) based on the acquired special information, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is within a predetermined range. is a numerical value (a numerical value from 1 to 6 in this aspect).

Then, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range, the first determination processing is executed based on the acquired special information, and the first determination is performed. A pending command including the processing result is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, that is, if the setting information is an abnormal value other than 1 to 6 due to noise or the like ( For example, 7, B, etc.), the execution of the previous determination process is avoided, and the abnormality pending command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Since the processing (effect) executed by the sound emission control device 90 that has received the abnormality suspension command is the same as in the aspect 103 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, determination of setting information at the start of fluctuation executed in this embodiment will be described.

The main side MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this aspect acquires and holds special information (such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. When storing in the information storage area 64b, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b together with the special information. Below, the set value stored together with the special information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 is also called "entering setting information".

Then, when executing the winning lottery based on the acquired special information (such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1), prior to the execution of the winning lottery, the setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 It is determined whether or not the information matches the information set at the time of ball entry stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 6) together with the special information to be the target of the winning lottery.

When it is determined that the setting information and the ball-entering setting information match, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information in the same manner as in a normal pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of ball entry do not match, after avoiding the execution of the winning lottery, the sound emission control device outputs a game stop command indicating to stop the progress of the game. 90 or the like, and executes processing for stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped, and the pachinko machine 10 enters a state in which the player cannot continue the game. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 that has received the game stop command notifies that the game has stopped due to an abnormality in the setting information and that the pachinko machine 10 should be restarted in the setting change mode. Execute the process.

As described above, according to this aspect, it is determined whether or not the setting information and the setting information at the time of entering the ball match in the determination of the setting information at the start of fluctuation. Even if a normal numerical value is rewritten to another normal numerical value, rewriting of the setting information can be detected. Specifically, it is set between the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 and the timing when the special information acquired based on the ball entry becomes the target of the winning lottery. If the information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value, the setting information and the setting information at the time of entry will not match in the determination of the setting information at the start of fluctuation. Rewriting can be detected.

In addition, according to this aspect, when rewriting of the setting information is detected in the determination of the setting information at the start of fluctuation, execution of the winning lottery is avoided, so that the setting information is normal other numerical value unintended by the administrator. It is possible to prevent the winning lottery from being executed in the state of being rewritten to .

Further, according to this aspect, when rewriting of the setting information is detected in the determination of the setting information at the time of fluctuation start, the progress of the game is stopped. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing in a rewritten state.

Further, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, the execution of the first determination process is avoided. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the result of the preceding determination process due to the execution of the preceding determination process with an abnormal value that is not the numerical value of .

Further, according to this aspect, if rewriting of the setting information is detected in the determination of the setting information at the start of variation, the progress of the game is stopped. If it is determined that it is not, the progress of the game is not stopped. The reason and effect of adopting such a configuration are the same as the reason and effect described in aspect 103 above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an example of processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this aspect will be described. In the following, processing different from the processing described in aspect 103 above will be described, and description of the same processing as in aspect 103 will be omitted. As will be described below, in this mode, the contents of the ball entry process for the starting opening and the fluctuation start process are different from those in the mode 103 described above.

[Ball entry processing for the starting port]
The ball entry process for the starting opening executed by the main side MPU 62 of aspect 104 will be described.

FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the starting opening executed by the main MPU 62 of mode 104. FIG. Since the processing from step S20201 to step S20211 is the same as the ball-entering processing for the start opening in aspect 103 shown in FIG. 82, description thereof is omitted.

In step S20212a, the setting information stored in the special information and the setting information storage area such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, 1 in step S20210. Store in a storage area corresponding to the added pending number. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the first It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the second holding area Rb is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S20210. After executing step S20212a, the process proceeds to step S20213. Since the processing after step S20213 is the same as the ball-entering processing for the starting opening in aspect 103 shown in FIG. 82, description thereof is omitted.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start processing executed by the main MPU 62 of aspect 104 will be described.

FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation start process executed by the main MPU 62 of mode 104. FIG. In step S20701a, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64, and the entering ball setting information shifted to the execution area AE together with the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the holding information shift process. match or not. If it is determined that the setting information matches the setting information at the time of ball entry (step S20701a: YES), the process proceeds to step S20702. Since the processing from step S20702 to step S20708 is the same as the fluctuation start processing in aspect 103 shown in FIG. 87, description thereof is omitted.

On the other hand, in step S20701a, setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 and special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the holding information shift process are shifted to the execution area AE. When it is determined that the information does not match (step S20701a: NO), the process proceeds to step S20709, and a game stop command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90 which are sub-side control devices. After executing step S20709, the process proceeds to step S20710, and the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 81) is executed, the execution of the process group for advancing the game (the process group of steps S20104 to S20116 in FIG. 81) is avoided, and the progress of the game is avoided. be stopped. After executing step S20710, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Aspect 105>
In the determination of setting information at the start of fluctuation executed in mode 104 above, it is detected that the setting information has been rewritten depending on the timing at which the setting information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value. may not be possible. For example, if the setting information is rewritten while the pattern is not changing, there is a problem that the rewriting of the setting information cannot be detected.

Therefore, in this aspect, the configuration described below is adopted in order to solve the above problems.

First, the setting information determination at the time of ball entry executed in this mode will be described. The ball-entering setting information determination performed in this mode is the same as the ball-entering setting information determination performed in mode 103 described above.

That is, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this aspect, in the same way as in the above-described aspect 103, is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the special information (jackpot random number counter C1 value, etc.) is acquired, prior to execution of pre-determination processing (so-called pre-reading) based on the acquired special information, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is within a predetermined range. is a numerical value (a numerical value from 1 to 6 in this aspect).

Then, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range, the first determination processing is executed based on the acquired special information, and the first determination is performed. A pending command including the processing result is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, that is, if the setting information is an abnormal value other than 1 to 6 due to noise or the like ( For example, 7, B, etc.), the execution of the previous determination process is avoided, and the abnormality pending command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Since the processing (effect) executed by the sound emission control device 90 that has received the abnormality suspension command is the same as in the aspect 103 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, determination of setting information at the start of fluctuation executed in this embodiment will be described.

The main side MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this aspect acquires and holds special information (such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. When storing in the information storage area 64b, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b together with the special information. Below, the set value stored together with the special information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 is also called "entering setting information".

Then, when executing the winning lottery based on the acquired special information, prior to the execution of the winning lottery, the input stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 6) together with the special information to be the target of the winning lottery. It is determined whether or not the ball time setting information matches the setting information for the previous winning determination process stored in the main side RAM 64 as the setting information at the time when the previous winning lottery (winning determination process) is executed.

Then, when it is determined that the setting information at the time of entering the ball and the setting information at the time of the previous winning determination process do not match, a game stop command indicating to stop the progress of the game after avoiding the execution of the winning lottery. is transmitted to the sub-side control device such as the sound emission control device 90, and processing for stopping the progress of the game is executed. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped, and the pachinko machine 10 enters a state in which the player cannot continue the game. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 that has received the game stop command notifies that the game has stopped due to an abnormality in the setting information and that the pachinko machine 10 should be restarted in the setting change mode. Execute the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information at the time of entering the ball matches the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process, a win lottery (hit determination process) is executed, and the setting information is read from the setting information storage area. , the read setting information is written in the previous hit determination processing setting information storage area. The setting information written in the setting information storage area for the previous winning judgment processing (setting information for the previous winning judgment processing) is the judgment executed prior to the next winning lottery (the setting information and the setting information for the previous winning judgment processing are combined). match).

As described above, according to this aspect, in determining the setting information at the start of variation, it is determined whether or not the setting information at the time of entering the ball matches the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process. Even if the information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value, rewriting of the setting information can be detected. Specifically, according to this aspect, the timing of execution of the previous winning lottery (timing of start of pattern fluctuation) and the timing of the game ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 If the setting information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value between Since they do not match, rewriting of the setting information can be detected. That is, according to this aspect, even if the setting information has been rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value during a period in which the pattern does not change, the setting information is rewritten. can be detected.

In addition, according to this aspect, when rewriting of the setting information is detected in the determination of the setting information at the start of fluctuation, execution of the winning lottery is avoided, so that the setting information is normal other numerical value unintended by the administrator. It is possible to prevent the winning lottery from being executed in the state of being rewritten to .

Further, according to this aspect, when rewriting of the setting information is detected in the determination of the setting information at the time of fluctuation start, the progress of the game is stopped. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing in a rewritten state.

Further, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, the execution of the first determination process is avoided. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the result of the preceding determination process due to the execution of the preceding determination process with an abnormal value that is not the numerical value of .

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the determination of the setting information at the start of the fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped. If it is determined, the progress of the game is not stopped. The reason and effect of adopting such a configuration are the same as the reason and effect described in aspect 103 above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an example of processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this aspect will be described. In the following, processing different from the processing described in aspect 103 above will be described, and description of the same processing as in aspect 103 will be omitted. As will be described below, in this mode, the contents of the ball entry process for the starting opening and the fluctuation start process are different from those in the mode 103 described above.

[Ball entry processing for the starting port]
The ball entry process for the starting opening executed by the main side MPU 62 of mode 105 will be described.

FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the starting opening executed by the main MPU 62 of mode 105. FIG. Since the processing from step S20201 to step S20211 is the same as the ball-entering processing for the start opening in aspect 103 shown in FIG. 82, description thereof is omitted.

In step S20212b, the setting information stored in the special information and the setting information storage area such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, 1 in step S20210. Store in a storage area corresponding to the added pending number. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the first It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the second holding area Rb is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S20210. After executing step S20212b, the process proceeds to step S20213. Since the processing after step S20213 is the same as the ball-entering processing for the starting opening in aspect 103 shown in FIG. 82, description thereof is omitted.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start processing executed by the main MPU 62 of aspect 105 will be described.

FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process executed by the main MPU 62 of mode 105. FIG. In step S20701b, in the holding information shift process, the setting information at the time of entry shifted to the execution area AE together with special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process of the main side RAM 64 are stored in the storage area. It is determined whether or not the setting information for the previous hit determination processing matches. If it is determined that the setting information at the time of entering the ball matches the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process (step S20701b: YES), the process advances to step S20702 to execute the hit determination process. After that, the process advances to step S20702-2b to read the setting information from the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64, and write the read setting information to the setting information storage area for the previous hit determination processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S20703. Since the processing from step S20703 to step S20708 is the same as the variation start processing in aspect 103 shown in FIG. 87, description thereof is omitted.

On the other hand, in step S20701b, if it is determined that the setting information at the time of entering the ball does not match the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process (step S20701b: NO), the process proceeds to step S20709, and the game stop command is issued by the sub-side control. It is transmitted to the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90, which are devices. After executing step S20709, the process proceeds to step S20710, and the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 81) is executed, the execution of the process group for advancing the game (the process group of steps S20104 to S20116 in FIG. 81) is avoided, and the progress of the game is avoided. be stopped. After executing step S20710, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Aspect 106>
In the determination of the setting information at the start of fluctuation executed in mode 105 above, it is detected that the setting information has been rewritten depending on the timing at which the setting information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value. may not be possible. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting information is set to "1", a winning lottery is executed, the setting information becomes "1" at the time of the previous winning determination processing, and during the variation of the symbols based on the execution of the winning lottery. When the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, one piece of special information is reserved, and the setting information at the time of ball entry becomes "1". After that, the setting information is rewritten from "1" to "6" due to the influence of noise etc. After that, when the fluctuation ends and the winning lottery for the reserved special information is executed, the setting at the time of entering the ball Since both the information and the setting information for the previous hit determination process are "1", it is determined that the setting information for entering the ball and the setting information for the previous hit determination process match, There is a problem that the winning lottery is executed with the setting information being "6".

In addition, in the setting information determination at the time of ball entry performed in the above aspects 103 to 105, the setting information changes from a numerical value within a predetermined range to an abnormal value (such as 7 or B) outside the predetermined range due to the influence of noise or the like. It is possible to detect that the setting information has been rewritten, but if the setting information has been rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value, the rewriting of the setting information cannot be detected. Therefore, there is a problem that the previous determination process is executed based on the rewritten setting information.

Therefore, in this aspect, the configuration described below is adopted in order to solve the above problems.

First, the setting information determination at the time of ball entry executed in this mode will be described.

When the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 of this aspect acquires the special information (such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the Before executing the pre-determination process (so-called pre-reading) based on the acquired special information, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 and the previous winning lottery (hit determination process) were executed. It is determined whether or not the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process stored in the main side RAM 64 as the setting information at the point in time matches.

Then, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process match, the previous determination process ( so-called look-ahead) is executed, and a pending command including the result of the pre-determining process is set as a command to be transmitted to the sub-side control device.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process do not match, the execution of the previous determination process is avoided, and the abnormality is suspended. A command is transmitted to a sub-side control device such as the sound emission control device 90 or the like. The abnormal hold command is determined that the setting information has been rewritten to another value at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the execution of the previous determination process. It is a command that indicates that it has been avoided. Since the processing (effect) executed by the sound emission control device 90 that has received the abnormality suspension command is the same as in the aspect 103 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, determination of setting information at the start of fluctuation executed in this embodiment will be described.

The main side MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this aspect is based on the special information (such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. When the winning lottery is executed, prior to the execution of the winning lottery, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area and the setting information at the time when the previous winning lottery (winning determination process) was executed are stored. It is determined whether or not the setting information for the previous hit determination processing matches.

When it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of the previous winning determination process do not match, after avoiding the execution of the winning lottery, a game stop command indicating stopping the progress of the game is emitted by voice. It is transmitted to a sub-side control device such as the control device 90 and executes processing for stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped, and the pachinko machine 10 enters a state in which the player cannot continue the game. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 that has received the game stop command notifies that the game has stopped due to an abnormality in the setting information and that the pachinko machine 10 should be restarted in the setting change mode. Execute the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information matches the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process, a winning lottery (hit determination process) is executed, then the setting information is read from the setting information storage area, and the read setting information is read. The setting information is written in the setting information storage area for the previous hit determination processing. The setting information written in the setting information storage area for the previous winning judgment processing (setting information for the previous winning judgment processing) is the judgment executed prior to the next winning lottery (the setting information and the setting information for the previous winning judgment processing are combined). match).

As described above, according to this aspect, it is determined whether or not the setting information matches the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process in the determination of setting information at the start of fluctuation. Even if a normal numerical value within the range of is rewritten to another normal numerical value, rewriting of the setting information can be detected. Specifically, according to this aspect, from the time of execution of the previous winning lottery (hit determination process) (that is, the start of the previous symbol fluctuation) to immediately before the execution of this time's winning lottery (hit determination process) (that is, If the setting information is rewritten from a normal value within a predetermined range to another normal value during the period until the current pattern fluctuation start), the setting information and the previous hit judgment process in the setting information judgment at the start of the fluctuation Since the time setting information does not match, rewriting of the setting information can be detected. That is, according to this aspect, it is possible to detect the rewriting of the setting information during the entire period in which the game is played.

In addition, according to this aspect, when rewriting of the setting information is detected in the determination of the setting information at the start of fluctuation, execution of the winning lottery is avoided, so that the setting information is normal other numerical value unintended by the administrator. It is possible to prevent the winning lottery from being executed in the state of being rewritten to .

Further, according to this aspect, when rewriting of the setting information is detected in the determination of the setting information at the time of fluctuation start, the progress of the game is stopped. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing in a rewritten state.

Further, according to this aspect, it is determined whether or not the setting information matches the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process in determining the setting information at the time of entering the ball. Even if the normal numerical value of is rewritten to another normal numerical value, rewriting of the setting information can be detected.

Further, according to this aspect, when rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, execution of the first determination process is avoided. It is possible to suppress the execution of the preceding determination process while the value has been rewritten to a numerical value.

Further, according to this aspect, when rewriting of the setting information is detected in the determination of setting information at the start of fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped. does not stop the progress of the game. The reason and effect of adopting such a configuration are the same as the reason and effect described in aspect 103 above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an example of processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this aspect will be described. In the following, processing different from the processing described in aspect 103 above will be described, and description of the same processing as in aspect 103 will be omitted. As will be described below, in this mode, the contents of the ball entry process for the starting opening and the fluctuation start process are different from those in the mode 103 described above.

[Ball entry processing for the starting port]
The ball entry process for the starting opening executed by the main side MPU 62 of aspect 106 will be described.

FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the starting opening executed by the main side MPU 62 of aspect 106 . Since the processing from step S20201 to step S20211 is the same as the ball-entering processing for the start opening in aspect 103 shown in FIG. 82, description thereof is omitted.

In step S20212c, the setting information stored in the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information storage area is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, 1 in step S20210. Store in a storage area corresponding to the added pending number. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the first It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the second holding area Rb is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S20210. After executing step S20212c, the process proceeds to step S20213c.

In step S20213c, it is determined whether or not the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 matches the setting information for the previous hit determination process stored in the setting information storage area for the previous hit determination process. judge. If it is determined in step S20213c that the setting information matches the setting information for the previous hit determination process (step S20213c: YES), the process advances to step S20214 to execute the previous determination process. After that, the process proceeds to step S20215, a hold command is set, and the ball-entering process for this starting opening ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20213c that the setting information does not match the previous hit determination processing setting information (step S20213c: NO), the process proceeds to step S20216 to set an abnormality pending command. After that, the ball-entering process for this starting hole ends.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start processing executed by the main MPU 62 of aspect 106 will be described.

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process executed by the main MPU 62 of mode 106. FIG. In step S20701c, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 matches the setting information for the previous hit determination process stored in the setting information storage area for the previous hit determination process of the main RAM 64. Determine whether or not If it is determined that the setting information matches the setting information for the previous hit determination process (step S20701c: YES), the process advances to step S20702 to execute the hit determination process. Thereafter, the process advances to step S20702-2c to read the setting information from the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64, and write the read setting information to the setting information storage area for the previous hit determination processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S20703. Since the processing from step S20703 to step S20708 is the same as the variation start processing in aspect 103 shown in FIG. 87, description thereof is omitted.

On the other hand, in step S20701c, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 and the setting information for the previous hit determination process stored in the setting information storage area for the previous hit determination process of the main RAM 64 are combined. When it is determined that they do not match (step S20701c: NO), the process proceeds to step S20709, and a game stop command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90, which are sub-side control devices. After executing step S20709, the process proceeds to step S20710, and the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 81) is executed, the execution of the process group for advancing the game (the process group of steps S20104 to S20116 in FIG. 81) is avoided, and the progress of the game is avoided. be stopped. After executing step S20710, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Aspect 107>
In the above modes 103 to 106, the setting information determination at the time of fluctuation start (step S20701 in FIG. 87, step S20701a in FIG. 98, step S20701b in FIG. 100, step S20701c in FIG. 87, FIGS. 98, 100, and 102, step S20702)) has been adopted, but the execution timing of setting information determination at the start of fluctuation does not have to be immediately before the winning lottery (winning determination process). good. For example, after executing the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, another process may be executed, and then a winning lottery (winning determination process) may be executed. That is, a plurality of other processes may intervene between the determination of setting information at the start of fluctuation and the winning lottery (winning determination process). In addition, the execution timing of the setting information determination at the start of the fluctuation may be after the execution of the winning lottery (hit determination process). may be intervening. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the game while the setting information is in an abnormal state not intended by the administrator, as in the above-described modes 103 to 106 .

<Aspect 108>
In the above modes 103 to 106, the setting information determination at the time of ball entry (step S20213 in FIGS. 82, 97 and 99, step S20213c in FIG. 101 step S20214))), but the execution timing of setting information determination at the time of entering the ball does not have to be immediately before the first determination process. For example, after executing setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, another process may be executed, and then the first determination process may be executed. That is, a plurality of other processes may intervene between the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball and the first determination process. In addition, the execution timing of the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball may be after execution of the first determination process, and a plurality of other processes may be interposed between the first determination process and the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball. may Even with such a configuration, similarly to the above aspects 103 to 106, whether or not the setting information is in an abnormal state not intended by the administrator is sent to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 of the game ball. It can be detected with the entry of the ball as a trigger.

<Aspect 109>
In the modes 103 to 106, the setting information is in an abnormal state in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation (step S20701 in FIG. 87, step S20701a in FIG. 98, step S20701b in FIG. 100, step S20701c in FIG. 102). (Not within a predetermined range, does not match) If it is determined, the processing to stop the progress of the game (processing to turn on the game stop flag) was adopted, but the setting information is in an abnormal state If it is determined that the game is stopped, a configuration may be adopted in which the predetermined processing for stopping the progress of the game is not executed, or the predetermined processing for stopping the progress of the game is executed, and then other processing is executed.

Further, in the above aspects 103 to 106, the setting information is in an abnormal state (predetermined range If it is determined that it is not within or does not match), we adopted a configuration that sets an error pending command, but if it is determined that the setting information is in an abnormal state, execute processing to set an error pending command Alternatively, the configuration may be such that other processes are executed after executing the process of setting the abnormality pending command.

For example, if it is determined that the setting information is in an abnormal state in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation or the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, the process for stopping the progress of the predetermined game is not executed or the predetermined game It is also possible to notify that an abnormality in the setting information has been detected after executing the process of stopping the progress of the setting information. Specifically, the speaker 46 of the pachinko machine 10 outputs a voice or warning sound such as "The setting information is abnormal. Please restart in the setting change mode." The display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41 may display a character string such as "The setting information is abnormal. Please restart in the setting change mode." According to such a configuration, a player or an administrator can easily grasp that an abnormality in the setting information has been detected in the pachinko machine 10, and the administrator can play a game on the pachinko machine 10. After explaining the situation to the player who is playing, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted in the setting change mode.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the setting information is in an abnormal state in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation or the setting information determination at the time of ball entry, a predetermined process for stopping the progress of the game is not executed or a predetermined After executing the process of stopping the progress of the game, information indicating that an abnormality in the setting information has been detected may be transmitted to the hall computer installed in the game hall. Information (for example, the machine number of the pachinko machine 10) of the pachinko machine 10 in which an abnormality in the setting information has been detected may be displayed on the monitor screen of the hall computer that has received the information. According to such a configuration, the administrator who manages the hall computer can easily grasp which pachinko machine out of many pachinko machines installed in the game hall has detected an abnormality in the setting information. It becomes possible.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the setting information is in an abnormal state in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation or the setting information determination at the time of ball entry, a predetermined process for stopping the progress of the game is not executed or a predetermined After executing the process of stopping the progress of the game, information indicating that an abnormality in the setting information has been detected and information indicating the date and time when the abnormality was detected may be stored in the memory. Specifically, information indicating that an abnormality in the setting information has been detected and information indicating the date and time when the abnormality was detected are stored in the storage area of the main RAM 64 so that the information is not erased even if the RAM clear processing described above is executed. If it is possible to store the stored information in a storage area or a non-volatile memory such as a flash ROM, and display the stored information on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 when a predetermined operation is received, the information can be displayed. Since it is not easily erased and can be checked after the game hall is closed, for example, it can be used as a clue to investigate the situation and cause of the abnormal state of the setting information.

<Aspect 110>
Among the above modes, in a configuration that allows the setting change mode to be executed, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is referred to each time the winning determination process (winning lottery) or the first determination process is executed. Then, the hit determination process or the first determination process is executed based on the win/fail table corresponding to the setting information referred to. Instead of this configuration, after power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started ( If the setting change mode is executed, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is referred to before the game progresses (after the setting change mode is completed), and the The setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 can be used for the hit determination by setting the hit/fail table corresponding to the referenced setting information so as to be used in the subsequent hit determination processing or the previous determination processing. A configuration may be adopted in which reference is not made each time a process or a preceding determination process is executed. An example of processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this aspect will be specifically described below.

The main MPU 62 of this aspect executes main processing and timer interrupt processing. The main process is a process executed when the power is turned on.

[Main processing]
FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in mode 110 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S30101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S30102 to execute internal function register setting processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S30103.

In step S30103, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information stored in the register of the main CPU 62x (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) Save to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 .

If it is determined in step S30103 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S30103: YES), the process advances to step S30104 to execute a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. Then, the RAM determination value is calculated. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process advances to step S30105 to determine whether the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal. checksum value). If it is determined in step S30105 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S30105: YES), the process proceeds to step S30106.

In step S30106, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", if the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6" , the setting information is determined to be a numerical value within a predetermined range. determines that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined in step S30106 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S30106: YES), the process proceeds to step S30107.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S30103 described above (step S30103: NO), if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S30105 described above (step S30105: NO), and If it is determined in step S30106 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S30106: NO), the process advances to step S30115 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM determination value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, This flag indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

The flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON will be described below, and then the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON will be described.

In step S30107, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag is ON. The setting changing flag is a flag that turns ON when setting change processing (setting change mode) described later is started, and turns OFF when the setting change processing (setting change mode) ends. Here, the situation in which the setting change flag is ON in step S30107 means that when the pachinko machine 10 was powered on last time, the setting change process (setting change mode) described later was executed, and the setting change process ( During execution of the setting change mode), the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, so that the setting change flag remains ON.

If it is determined in step S30107 that the setting changing flag is ON (step S30107: YES), the process advances to step S30118 to execute setting change processing (setting change mode). In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed, and a process of receiving a change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 71, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30107 that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S30107: NO), the process proceeds to step S30108.

In step S30108, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S30108 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S30108: NO), the process advances to step S30109 to determine whether or not the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. Note that "the setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and positioned on the ON side. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when

If it is determined in step S30109 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S30109: NO), the process proceeds to step S30110.

In step S30110, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that turns ON when setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode), which will be described later, is started, and turns OFF when the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) ends. Here, the situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step S30110 means that when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on last time, the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later is executed, and the setting confirmation process ( During execution of the setting confirmation mode), the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, so that the setting confirmation flag remains ON.

If it is determined in step S30110 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step S30110: NO), the process advances to step S30111 to transmit a normal activation command to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The normal startup command is not determined to be a RAM abnormality, and the pachinko machine 10 (main controller 60) in a normal state in which none of the setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and first RAM clear processing described later is executed. is a command that indicates that has started. As will be described later, when receiving the normal activation command, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated in a normal state. Specifically, in this aspect, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "Normal startup". After executing step S30111, the process proceeds to step S30113, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON in step S30109 described above (step S30109: YES), and if the setting checking flag is ON in step S30110, If so (step S30110: YES), the process proceeds to step S30112. That is, when the RAM clear button is OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are all ON, and the previous power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed at the time of turning on, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode). If the flag remains ON, the process proceeds to step S30112.

In step S30112, setting confirmation processing is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . Details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those of the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 72, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S30112, the process proceeds to step S30113.

In step S30113, power restoration processing is executed to return to the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S30113, the process advances to step S30114 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30123, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step S30108 described above, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is ON (step S30108: YES), the process proceeds to step S30117, and the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. Determine whether or not there is If it is determined in step S30117 that all of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are ON (step S30117: YES), the process advances to step S30118 to perform the setting change process (setting change process). mode). After that, the process proceeds to step S30123, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30117 that at least one of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch is not ON (step S30117: NO), the process proceeds to step S30119.

In step S30119, it is determined whether or not the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S30119 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S30119: NO), the process advances to step S30120 to execute first RAM clear processing. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. After executing step S30120, the process advances to step S30121 to transmit a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM clear command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller has been cleared." After executing step S30121, the process proceeds to step S30123, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30119 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S30119: YES), the process advances to step S30122 to emit a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. Send to control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." After executing step S30122, the process proceeds to step S30123. However, in the flow of this description, the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, so the process does not proceed to step S30122 described above.

In step S30123, a success/failure table setting process is executed. In this aspect, the main-side ROM 63 is provided with a win/fail table storage area, and the win/fail table storage area contains one type of win/fail table for the high-probability mode and "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". , six types of win/fail tables for low-probability modes corresponding to six stages of lottery settings up to . In the success/failure table setting process, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is referred to, and the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting information is retrieved from the success/failure table storage area of the main ROM 63. Read, and write the read right/wrong table for the low-probability mode in the right/wrong table storage area of the main side RAM 64 . Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is stored on the main side. The success/failure table storage area of the ROM 63 is read, and the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the read lottery setting 1 is written in the success/failure table storage area of the main RAM 64 . After executing step S30123, the process proceeds to step S30124.

In step S30124, a lighting/blinking process for lighting and blinking all the light emitting parts (segment light emitting parts A to G and DP light emitting part) constituting the information display part 45z is executed. In the lighting and blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then synchronized and blinked for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step S30124, the process advances to step S30125.

In step S30125, interrupt permission setting is executed to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. After that, an infinite loop is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S30115 will be described.

As described above, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S30103 (step S30103: NO), if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S30105 (step S30105: NO), and step If it is determined in S30106 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S30106: NO), the process advances to step S30115 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S30116.

In step S30116, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S30116 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S30116: YES), the process advances to step S30117 to determine whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. If it is determined in step S30117 that all of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are ON (step S30117: YES), the process advances to step S30118 to perform the setting change process (setting change process). mode). After that, the process proceeds to step S30122. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30116 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S30116: NO), and in step S30117 it is determined that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON. If so (step S30117: NO), the process proceeds to step S30119.

In step S30119, it is determined whether or not the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S30119 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S30119: NO), the process advances to step S30120 to execute the above-described first RAM clear processing. After executing step S30120, the process advances to step S30121 to transmit a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. After executing step S30121, the process proceeds to step S30122. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step S30120 described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30119 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S30119: YES), the process advances to step S30122 to emit a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. Send to control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." After executing step S30122, the process proceeds to step S30123.

In step S30123, the above-described right/wrong table setting process is executed, and then the process advances to step S30124 to execute the above-described lighting/blinking process. After executing step S30124, the process advances to step S30125 to execute interrupt permission setting for permitting generation of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, infinite loop processing is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As described above, in this aspect, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is to press the RAM clear switch (to be in the ON state) and press the setting key (keyhole). , the power switch is turned on while the frame open switch and the door open switch are all turned on. In addition, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed by setting the RAM clear switch to a non-depressed state (OFF state), setting the setting key (keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening. This is an operation to turn on the power switch while all the switches are turned on. The operation for executing the first RAM clearing process is to press down the RAM clear switch (turn it ON) and turn OFF any of the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch. This is an operation to turn on the power switch in the state where the

An example of the flow of processing realized by executing the main processing described above will be collectively described below.

・When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning ON the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied (steps S30103, S30105, and S30106), setting change processing (setting change mode) is performed, regardless of whether the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied or not, and regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag, the setting change process is performed. (setting change mode) is executed (step S30118).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S30103, S30105, and S30106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, and if it is determined that the setting change flag is ON (step S30107: YES), an operation for executing setting change processing (setting change mode), setting confirmation processing The setting change process (setting change mode) is executed regardless of whether or not the operation for executing the (setting confirmation mode) and the operation for executing the first RAM clear process are performed (step S30118). .

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S30103, S30105, and S30106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S30107: NO), and if an operation for executing the first RAM clearing process has been performed (step S30108 : YES, step S30117: NO, step S30119: NO), the first RAM clear processing is executed (step S30120) and a RAM clear command is transmitted (step S30121) regardless of the state of the setting checking flag.

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S30103, S30105, and S30106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S30107: NO), and an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed. (step S30108: NO, step S30109: YES), setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S30112).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S30103, S30105, and S30106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S30107: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is not performed. Even if there is, if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S30110: YES), setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S30112).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S30103, S30105, and S30106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is established and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S30115), even if an operation for executing the first RAM clear processing has been performed, the first RAM clear processing is executed. A RAM abnormality command is transmitted without execution (step S30122).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S30103, S30105, and S30106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is established and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S30115), even if an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed, the setting A RAM abnormality command is transmitted without executing confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) (step S30122).

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started periodically (for example, every 4 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 .

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 of mode 110 of the first embodiment. In step S30201, various random number updating processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, etc.) in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the numerical information after the addition to the reading source counter is executed. When the read numerical value information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting the read source counter with 0 is executed. After executing step S30201, the process advances to step S30202.

In step S30202, power failure monitoring processing is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main controller 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (eg, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Determining that the switch has been turned off or that a power failure has occurred, saves various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main side CPU 62 x to a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . After that, without proceeding to step S30203, which will be described later, the infinite loop processing is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable. Note that the power supply device 85 of this aspect is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main controller 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output a regulated voltage in volts. As for the time during which this stabilized voltage is output, sufficient time is ensured for executing the processing up to storing the above-described RAM determination value in the main-side RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process of step S30202 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main controller 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S30203.

In step S30203, it is determined whether or not at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON. As described above, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that turns ON when it is determined that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal in the main process executed when the power is turned on. As will be described later, the game stop flag is a flag that is turned ON to stop the progress of the game when shaking or magnetism is detected in the fraud detection process. When it is determined in step S30203 that both the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag are not ON (step S30203: NO), the process proceeds to step S30204. On the other hand, in step S30203, when it is determined that at least one of the RAM abnormality flag or the game stop flag is ON (step S30203: YES), without executing the processing after step S30204, the timer interrupt processing ends. do. That is, when at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON, the processing for enabling the progress of the game after step S30204 is not executed, and the game progress mode is entered in which the game can be progressed. is configured not to migrate. Hereinafter, processing after step S30204, which is processing for enabling the progress of the game, will be described.

In step S30204, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when information is set to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state, output of a drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set Output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information to switch the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. When set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S30205.

In step S30205, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S30206.

In step S30206, signals received from the respective ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and ball entry detection processing for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. Since the ball-entering detection process is the same as the ball-entering detection process shown in FIG. 28, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S30206, the process advances to step S30207.

In step S30207, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S30208.

In step S30208, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the starting port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are determined based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. While acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM64. After executing step S30208, the process advances to step S30209.

In step S30209, ball-entering processing for the through-gate accompanying entry (passage) of the game ball to the through-gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the electric accessary product opening counter C4 is acquired based on determination that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is stored in the RAM 64. It is stored in the electric service reservation area 64d. After executing step S30209, the process advances to step S30210.

In step S30210, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, winning lottery, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. After executing step S30210, the process advances to step S30211.

In step S30211, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. In the game state transition processing, processing is executed to shift the game state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S30211, the process proceeds to step S30212.

In step S30212, an electric role support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric role product 34a (electric role product opening lottery), and when it is determined to be in the open state, the electric role product 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S30212, the process proceeds to step S30213.

In step S30213, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, a process for shooting a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S30213, the process proceeds to step S30214.

In step S30214, command output processing for outputting (transmitting) commands set as transmission targets in the current timer interrupt processing to each sub-side control device is executed. For example, when commands related to effects such as variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, these commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S30214, the process advances to step S30215.

In step S30215, fraud detection processing is executed. In the fraud detection process, shaking and magnetism are monitored, and when shaking and magnetism are detected, an alarm sound or voice such as "Shake detected!" "Magnetism detected!" At the same time, various lamps 47 are blinked at maximum brightness. Further, in the fraud detection process, the above-described game stop flag is turned ON when shaking or magnetism is detected. As a result, after the game stop flag is turned ON, execution of the processing from step S30204 to step S30216 is avoided.

In step S30216, game history processing for calculating and displaying game history information is executed. Since the game history processing is the same as the game history processing shown in FIG. 29, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S30216, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Ball entry processing for the starting port]
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 104: S30208).

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the starting opening executed by the main MPU 62 of aspect 110 of the first embodiment. In step S30301, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step S30301, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S30301: YES), the process proceeds to step S30302, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S30303.

In step S30303, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30304.

In step S30304, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30309.

In step S30301, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (S30301: NO), the process proceeds to step S30305, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step S30305, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S30305: YES), the process proceeds to step S30306, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S30307. On the other hand, in step S30305, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S30305: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step S30307, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port . After that, the process proceeds to step S30308.

In step S30308, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30309.

In step S30309, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S30304 or step S30308 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S30309, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit (S30309: NO), that is, if the start suspension number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S30309, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit (S30309: YES), the process proceeds to step S30310, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S30311. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S30312.

In step S30312, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S30201 (FIG. 104) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In S30310, it stores in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S30201 (FIG. 104) The value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, ie, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S30310. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S30203 (Fig. 104) It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S30310. After executing step S30312, the process proceeds to step S30313.

In step S30313, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing determination of the presence or absence of such pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of a winning lottery. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S30313, the process proceeds to step S30314.

In step S30314, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information (pending information) of each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command indicates that the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has occurred, and the determination result by the previous determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the information before the information becomes the object of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 104: step S30214).

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to an increase in the number of pending items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S30314, the main MPU 62 ends the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

[Prior judgment processing]
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S30314) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the destination determination process executed by the main MPU 62 in aspect 110 of the first embodiment. As described above, in the first determination process, based on the pending information, determination results such as determination of winning lottery, determination of type of big win, determination of presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step S30401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read by entering the game ball into the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 105). After that, the process advances to step S30402 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is determined, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery for the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S30402, when it is determined that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is the low probability mode (S30402: YES), the process proceeds to step S30403, and the main side RAM 64 The success/failure table for the low probability mode stored in the success/failure table storage area is referred to. As described above, in this aspect, in the success/failure table setting process (step S30123) of the main process (FIG. 103), 6 stages corresponding to each of the 6 stages of lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6" Of the types of low-probability mode win-or-fail tables, the win-or-fail table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting information indicating the lottery setting is stored in the win-or-fail table storage area of the main RAM 64 . As a result, in this step S30403, the main MPU 62 refers to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting information indicating the lottery setting. Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is displayed on the main side. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode, which is stored in the success/failure table storage area of the RAM 64 and corresponds to the lottery setting 1, is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S30405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Note that an example of the success/failure table for six types of low-probability modes has already been described in aspect 57, so description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, in step S30402, if it is determined that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is not the low probability mode (S30402: NO), the process proceeds to step S30404, and the high probability mode refer to the hit/fail table. After that, the process proceeds to step S30405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. In this embodiment, one type of success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to regardless of the lottery setting. A success/failure table for the lottery mode may be prepared, and the success/failure table for the high-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting may be referred to.

In step S30405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S30405: YES), the process proceeds to step S30406, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S30407 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the first start port distribution table , and if it is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34, the distribution table for the second starting hole is referred to. After executing step S30407, the process advances to step S30408.

In step S30408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S30408, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (S30408: YES), the process proceeds to step S30409, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S30408, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (S30408: NO), the process proceeds to step S30410, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the preceding determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S30405, if it is determined that the value of the big hit random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the big hit (S30405: NO), the process proceeds to step S30411, Read out the stored value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S30412 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S30413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S30413, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S30413: YES), the process proceeds to step S30414, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30413 that the reach generation is not supported (S30413: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

[Game spin control process]
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 104: step S30210).

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing game round control processing executed by the main side MPU 62 in aspect 110 of the first embodiment. In step S30501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the big win is won, and is turned OFF at the timing of ending the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S30501, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S30501: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game round is executed without executing any of the processes after step S30502. End the control process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30501 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S30501: NO), the process proceeds to step S30502.

In step S30502, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is terminated.

In step S30502, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S30502: NO), the process advances to the game cycle start processing of steps S30503 to S30505. In step S30503, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S30503, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is "0" (S30503: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30503 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S30503: NO), the process proceeds to step S30504.

In step S30504, reservation information shift processing is executed to set the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step S30505. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step S30505, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S30506.

In step S30506, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S30506, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30502 that the main display section 45 is performing variable display (S30502: YES), the process proceeds to step S30507.

In step S30507, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S30507, it is determined whether or not the variable time information value stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (step S30603 in FIG. 108), which will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S30507 that the variable time has not elapsed (S30507: NO), the process advances to step S30508 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S30508, this game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30507 that the variation time has elapsed (S30507: YES), the process advances to step S30509 to execute variation end processing. In the fluctuation ending process, the stop symbol determined in the hit determination process (FIG. 109), which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 as the result of the current game round. After executing step S30509, the process advances to step S30510.

In step S30510, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the hit determination process (FIG. 109) to be described later. In step S30510, when it is determined that any of the jackpot flags are ON (S30510: YES), the process proceeds to step S30511, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S30510, when it is determined that none of the jackpot flags is ON (S30510: NO), the process proceeds to step S30512.

In step S30512, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". In step S30512, when it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (S30512: YES), the process advances to step S30513 to set a customer waiting command. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game round) ends. is a command that contains information about The customer waiting command set in step S30513 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 104: step S30214). On the other hand, in step S30512, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is not "0" (S30512: NO), this game round control process is terminated.

[Variation start processing]
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 107: S30505).

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process executed by the main MPU 62 of aspect 110 of the first embodiment. In step S30601, hit determination processing is executed. In the hit determination process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area AE in the pending information shift process. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step S30601, the process advances to step S30602.

In step S30602, variable time setting processing is executed. In the variable time setting process, the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, is set based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of ready-to-win. The details of the variable time setting process are the same as those of the variable time setting process shown in FIG. 89, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S30602, the process advances to step S30603.

In step S30603, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S30603, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S30603: NO), the process proceeds to step S30604 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S30602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30603 that the second pattern display flag is ON (S30603: YES), the process proceeds to step S30605 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S30602. After executing step S30604 or step S30605, the process advances to step S30606.

In step S30606, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as jackpot type information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S30604 to S30606 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 104: step S30214). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S30606, the process advances to step S30607.

In step S30607, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game cycle out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S30607, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

[Hit determination process]
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variation start process (FIG. 108: S30601).

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the hit determination process executed by the main MPU 62 of aspect 110 of the first embodiment. In step S30701, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flags in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 64 are ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is started after winning the jackpot. In step S30701, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S30701:YES), it progresses to step S30702.

In step S30702, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode. After that, the process proceeds to step S30704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30701 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S30701: NO), the process proceeds to step S30703.

In step S30703, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in the success/failure table storage area of the main RAM 64 . As described above, in this aspect, in the success/failure table setting process (step S30123) of the main process (FIG. 103), 6 stages corresponding to each of the 6 stages of lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6" Of the types of low-probability mode win-or-fail tables, the win-or-fail table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting information indicating the lottery setting is stored in the win-or-fail table storage area of the main RAM 64 . As a result, in this step S30703, the main MPU 62 refers to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting information indicating the lottery setting. Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is displayed on the main side. The success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, which is stored in the success/failure table storage area of the RAM 64 and corresponds to the lottery setting 1 . In the success/failure determination, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the hit/failure in the hit/fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S30704.

In step S30704, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (hit lottery) in step S30702 or step S30703 is a big hit. In step S30704, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (S30704: YES), in steps S30705 to S30712, to set the game result in the case of a big hit and to set the stop result process.

In step S30705, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S30705, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S30705: NO), proceed to step S30706 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 8A). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step S30705, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S30705: YES), the process proceeds to step S30707, and a distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 8B) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in After executing the process of step S30706 or step S30707. The process advances to step S30708.

In step S30708, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step S30706 or step S30707 is the variable probability jackpot. In step S30708, when it is determined that the game result is a probability variable jackpot (S30708: YES), the process proceeds to step S30709.

In step S30709, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is changed in a state where any stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S30706 or step S30707 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S30709, the process advances to step S30710.

In step S30710, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S30706 or step S30707 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the real hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S30708, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S30706 or step S30707 is not a probability variable jackpot (S30708: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step Proceed to S30711.

In step S30711, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S30706 or step S30707 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S30711, the process advances to step S30712.

In step S30712, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S30706 or step S30707 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the real hit determination process is terminated.

In step S30704, if the result of the winning lottery in step S30702 or step S30703 is not a big win (S30704: NO), the process advances to step S30713 to execute stop result setting processing for loss. The stop result setting process for the time of loss means that in the current game turn that results in a loss, the change display is terminated in a state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S30713, the real hit determination process ends.

As described above, according to this aspect, in the main process (FIG. 103) that is executed when power supply is started, The success/failure table setting process (FIG. 103: step S30123) of reading the success/failure table for the probability mode from the success/failure table storage area of the main ROM 63 and writing the read success/failure table for the low-probability mode to the success/failure table storage area of the main RAM 64 is performed. In the hit determination process (FIG. 109), the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the main RAM 64 is referred to. It doesn't have to be. Therefore, for example, even if the setting information is rewritten with other values not intended by the administrator due to the influence of noise, etc., the correctness table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information before being rewritten is used. hit determination processing can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that is less susceptible to noise and the like.

In this embodiment, the high-probability mode success/failure table is configured to use one type of high-probability mode success/failure table regardless of the setting information. The table may also be configured to use six types of yes/no tables for high-probability modes corresponding to six stages of setting information. When adopting this configuration, in the main process, the success/failure table for the high-probability mode corresponding to the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main-side RAM 64 is read from the success/failure table storage area of the main-side ROM 63, The read-out success/failure table for the high-probability mode is written in the success/failure table storage area of the main RAM 64, and in the hit determination process, if the high-probability mode is in progress, the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area of the main RAM 64 is stored. A configuration may be used in which the success/failure table for the probability mode is referred to. According to such a configuration, it is similarly unnecessary to refer to the setting information when executing the hit determination process during the high-probability mode. Therefore, for example, even if the setting information is rewritten with other values not intended by the administrator due to the influence of noise, etc., the correctness table for the high-probability mode corresponding to the setting information before being rewritten is used. hit determination processing can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that is less susceptible to noise and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main process (FIG. 103) that is executed when power supply is started employs a configuration in which the success/failure table setting process (step S30123) is always executed. The table setting process is executed when the setting information is changed in the setting change process (setting change mode) (step S30118). mode) is executed, if the setting information is not changed, the success/failure table setting process may not be executed. That is, the success/failure table setting process need not be executed when the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area of the main RAM 64 corresponds to the setting information. It should be configured to run as

<Aspect 111>
Among the above aspects, in a configuration that can execute the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, during the period during which the setting change mode is being executed, from the start of the setting change mode until the setting information being changed is confirmed. During the period of , the DP light-emitting portion of the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 of the information display portion 45z is in a blinking state, and the 2-second period from after the setting information is confirmed until the setting change mode ends is the A configuration in which the DP light emitting unit is lit may be adopted. Further, the DP light-emitting portion of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 of the information display portion 45z may be lit during the period during which the setting confirmation mode is being executed. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing how setting information is displayed on the information display section 45z in aspect 111 of the first embodiment. FIGS. 110A and 110B are explanatory diagrams showing the display mode of the information display section 45z during execution of the setting change mode. As shown in FIGS. 110(A) and 110(B), during execution of the setting change mode in this aspect, the three 7-segment displays on the left of the information display section 45z (left end 7-segment display 45z1, middle left The 7-segment display 45z2 and the middle right 7-segment display 45z3 function as a type information display area for displaying the type information of the mode being executed, and indicate that the setting change mode is being executed. Display a string. The rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 of the information display section 45z functions as a numerical information display area for displaying numerical information of setting information, and displays numerical information of setting information of lottery setting.

Here, the setting change mode is composed of two periods. More specifically, the setting change mode is a period during which the setting information can be changed, and is a period from the start of the setting change mode to the determination of the setting information. and a fixed period, which is a period in which the setting information cannot be changed and is from when the setting information is fixed until the setting change mode ends.

In this aspect, as shown in FIG. 110A, during the change period of the setting change mode, the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 displays numerical information of the currently selected setting information, The DP light emitting portion of the segment display 45z4 is in a blinking state. In the example shown in FIG. 110(A), the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 displays a numerical value of "1" as numerical information of the currently selected setting information, and the DP of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is displayed. The light emitting unit is in a blinking state.

Thereafter, when the administrator or the like turns the setting key (keyhole) from the ON side to the OFF side to confirm the setting information, the setting change mode shifts from the change period to the confirmation period, as shown in FIG. 110(B). Then, the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 transitions from the blinking state to the lit state, and after continuing the lit state for 2 seconds, the four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 of the information display portion 45z. turns off and exits the setting change mode. In the example shown in FIG. 110(B), the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 displays a numerical value of "2" as the numerical information of the confirmed setting information, and the DP light emitting section of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is in a flashing state.

That is, the DP light-emitting portion of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 has a setting key (keyhole) turned OFF after the setting change mode is started during the period during which the setting change mode is being executed, and the setting information is not displayed. During the change period until the setting change mode is executed, the setting key (keyhole) is turned from the ON side to the OFF side by the administrator etc. After the information is confirmed, it is in a lighting state during the confirmation period of two seconds until the setting change mode ends.

Next, the display mode of the information display section 45z in the setting confirmation mode will be described.

FIG. 110C is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the information display section 45z during execution of the setting confirmation mode. As shown in FIG. 110(C), during execution of the setting confirmation mode in this aspect, three 7-segment displays on the left of the information display section 45z (leftmost 7-segment display 45z1, middle left 7-segment display 45z2, and The middle right 7-segment display 45z3) functions as a type information display area for displaying type information of the mode being executed, and displays a character string "sec." indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being executed. The rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 of the information display section 45z functions as a numerical information display area for displaying numerical information of the setting information, and displays the numerical information of the currently set setting information. In the example shown in FIG. 110(C), the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 displays a numerical value of "2" as numerical information of the currently set setting information, and the DP of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is displayed. The light-emitting portion is in a lit state.

Next, an example of processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this aspect will be specifically described.

The main MPU 62 of this aspect executes main processing and timer interrupt processing. The contents of the main processing and timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this aspect are the same as the main processing (FIG. 103) and timer interrupt processing (FIG. 104) described in aspect 110, but the main processing (FIG. 103) The details (subroutines) of the setting change process (step S30118) and the setting confirmation process (step S30112) are different. Therefore, below, details (subroutines) of the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this aspect will be described.

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 111 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of step S30118 in FIG.

In step S30801, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. When the setting change mode start command is received, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the setting change mode has started. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "the setting change mode has started", and then the speaker 46 is caused to repeatedly output a voice such as "the setting change mode is in progress". Further, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, in this aspect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for displaying a character string such as "in setting change mode" on the pattern display device 41, and receives the command. Then, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "in setting change mode". In addition, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with maximum luminance.

After transmitting the setting change mode start command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S30801, the process advances to step S30802.

In step S30802, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The setting change flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, as described above, and a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not yet ended. is. After executing step S30802, the process advances to step S30803.

In step S30803, initial setting processing at the start of setting change is executed. In the initial setting process at the start of setting change, initial settings necessary for starting the setting change process are executed. Further, in this aspect, in the initial setting process at the start of setting change, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF. to After executing step S30803, the process advances to step S30804.

In step S30804, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as update setting information. Specifically, in this aspect, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in another area of the main RAM 64 other than the setting information storage area. is copied to the update setting information storage area. After executing step S30804, the process advances to step S30805.

In step S30805, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, as described above, the left three 7-segment displays of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1, left middle 7-segment display 45z2 and right middle 7-segment display 45z3 of the information display section 45z are set to the setting change mode. is being executed, and causes the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 to start lighting display of the update setting information, and the DP of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4. Start blinking display of the light emitting part. Thus, the modification period described above is started. After executing step S30805, the process advances to step S30806.

In step S30806, it is determined whether or not the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", whether the update setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6" determine whether or not If it is determined in step S30806 that the update setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S30806: YES), the process proceeds to step S30808. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30806 that the update setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S30806: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information. Alternatively, if information other than numerical values is stored due to noise or the like, the flow advances to step S30807 to change the update setting information to the initial value. In this aspect, "1" is stored as an initial value in the update setting information. After that, the process proceeds to step S30808.

In step S30808, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. In the middle, a signal indicating Low level is monitored, and when a falling edge of the signal falling from High level to Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) is turned to the OFF side. If it is determined in step S30808 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S30808: NO), the process advances to step S30809 to determine whether the setting change button has been pressed. judge. If it is determined in step S30809 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S30809: YES), the process advances to step S30810 to update the update setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value information stored as update setting information. However, when the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical value information stored as update setting information is "6", the numerical value information is updated to "1". After that, returning to step S30806 described above, it is determined whether or not the updated setting information for update is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30809 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S30809: NO), the process returns to step S30806 without executing the processing of step S30810, and the update setting information is updated. It is determined whether the numerical value is within a predetermined range.

If it is determined in step S30808 that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S30808: YES), the process proceeds to step S30811.

In step S30811, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as setting information. Specifically, in this aspect, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is copied to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. do. After executing step S30811, the process advances to step S30812 to start the lighting display of the setting information on the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 and change the display mode of the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 from blinking display to lighting display. switch. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S30813 to execute wait processing. The wait process waits for two seconds without proceeding to the next process. As a result, the character string "set." This state continues for 2 seconds, in which the determined setting information is illuminated on the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 and the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is illuminated. This two second period is the above-described determination period. After that, the process advances to step S30814 to end the control for displaying the setting information on the information display section 45z. Specifically, the four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 forming the information display section 45z are turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S30815.

In step S30815, first RAM clear processing is executed. In the first RAM clearing process, information other than the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is erased. When this first RAM clearing process is executed, the above-described setting changing flag is also cleared (turned OFF). After executing step S30815, the process advances to step S30816.

In step S30816, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. As will be described later, upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 performs processing for notifying that the setting change mode has ended. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the output of the voice "setting change mode is in progress" from the speaker 46 is ended, and the voice "setting change mode is finished" is output from the speaker 46. FIG. Also, the control for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress in the pattern display device 41 and various lamps 47 is ended.

After transmitting the setting change mode end command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may display information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

After executing step S30816, this setting change process ends. After executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the lottery setting after the change is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information displays the relevant information on the management screen. The configuration may be such that the setting information of the lottery setting after the change of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

Next, the details of the setting confirmation process of this aspect will be described.

FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing setting confirmation processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 111 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S30112 in FIG.

In step S30901, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. When receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the setting confirmation mode has started. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "the setting confirmation mode has started", and then a voice such as "the setting confirmation mode is in progress" is repeatedly outputted from the speaker 46. Further, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, in this aspect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting confirmation mode is in progress", and receives the command. Then, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "in setting confirmation mode". In addition, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so that they alternately flash on and off with the maximum luminance.

After transmitting the setting confirmation mode start command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step S30901, the process advances to step S30902.

In step S30902, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, as described above, and a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not yet ended. is. After executing step S30902, the process advances to step S30903.

In step S30903, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, as described above, the left three 7-segment displays of the left end 7-segment display 45z1, left middle 7-segment display 45z2 and right middle 7-segment display 45z3 of the information display section 45z are set to the setting confirmation mode. is being executed, and the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 starts lighting display of the setting information, and the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4. to start the lighting display. After executing step S30903, the process advances to step S30904.

In step S30904, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. In the middle, the signal indicating the Low level is monitored, and when the falling edge of the signal falling from the High level to the Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. judge. If it is determined in step S30904 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S30904: NO), step S30904 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30904 that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S30904: YES), the process proceeds to step S30905. That is, the infinite loop is repeated until the setting key (keyhole) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S30905. move on.

In step S30905, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z ends. Specifically, the four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 forming the information display section 45z are turned off. As a result, the character string "sec." is lighted and displayed on the left three 7-segment displays of the left end 7-segment display 45z1, left middle 7-segment display 45z2 and right middle 7-segment display 45z3 of the information display section 45z. and the state in which the setting information is lit on the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 and the DP light-emitting portion of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is lit and displayed after the setting confirmation mode is started. This is continued until the key (keyhole) of the switch shifts to the OFF side. After executing step S30905, the process advances to step S30906.

In step S30906, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S30907.

In step S30907, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. As will be described later, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 performs processing for notifying that the setting confirmation mode has ended. Specifically, in the present embodiment, output of the voice "setting confirmation mode is in progress" from the speaker 46 is ended, and voice "setting confirmation mode is finished" is output from the speaker 46. FIG. Also, the control for informing that the pattern display device 41 and various lamps 47 are in the setting confirmation mode is ended.

After transmitting the setting confirmation mode end command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S30907, this setting confirmation process is terminated.

As described above, according to this aspect, the display mode of the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 is a blinking display during the change period of the setting change mode, and a lighting display after shifting to the confirmation period. transition to In addition, the display mode of the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 is lighting display in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, according to this aspect, only by using the DP light emitting unit of the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 that can be in at least two display modes, it is possible to determine whether the mode currently being executed is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. can be clearly recognized by the administrator, and the administrator can be made to clearly recognize that the setting information being changed is fixed in the setting change mode and the change period is shifted to the fixed period. Further, according to this aspect, both the confirmation period of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are states in which the setting information cannot be changed, and the display mode of the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is The display is lit. Therefore, the administrator can recognize that the setting information cannot be changed when the display mode of the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is lighting display.

<Aspect 112>
Among the above aspects, in a configuration that can execute the setting change mode, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode when the power is turned on, a predetermined LED provided at a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 A configuration may be adopted in which the lamp lights up and the lighting state of the LED lamp continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. According to this configuration, the manager of the pachinko machine 10 confirms that the LED lamp is lit in the pachinko machine 10 which should not be activated in the setting change mode during the business hours of the game hall. In this case, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally activated in the setting change mode by someone other than the administrator (for example, an unauthorized person, a goto master). A specific description will be given below.

113 is a front view of the game board 30 in mode 112. FIG. A difference from the game board 30 shown in FIG. 3 is that a setting change mode execution lamp 45x constituted by an LED is provided in the vicinity of the main display section 45. FIG. The setting change mode execution lamp 45x is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode (when the setting change process is executed), and the setting change mode is terminated and the game can proceed. The lighting state is maintained even after transitioning to the state.

FIG. 114 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in mode 112. As shown in FIG. The main difference from the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 42 is that the input/output port 45x of the main side MPU 62 is connected to the setting change mode execution lamp 45x. That is, in this aspect, the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is configured to be controlled by the main control device 60 that governs the game, not by a sub-side control device such as the sound emission control device 90 or the like.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of mode 112 when the power is turned on. The difference from the main processing of mode 110 shown in FIG. It is a point to execute. That is, in this aspect, when the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed, the setting change mode execution lamp lighting process (step S12417b) is executed prior to the execution of the setting change process (setting change mode). configured to be

In the setting change mode execution lamp lighting process of step S12417b, the process of lighting the above-described setting change mode execution lamp 45x is executed. After the setting change mode execution lamp lighting process is executed, the setting change mode execution lamp 45x maintains the lighting state. After executing step S12417b, the process advances to the setting change process (setting change mode) in step S12418 described above.

Therefore, in this aspect, when the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in the main process, the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is lit immediately before the start of execution of the setting change process (setting change mode). Even after the setting change process (setting change mode) is completed, the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is kept lit. As a result, the lighting state of the setting change mode execution lamp 45x continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. On the other hand, when the setting change process (setting change mode) is not executed in the main process, the setting change mode execution lamp 45x does not turn on and remains in the off state.

As described above, according to this aspect, the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is turned on when the setting change mode is executed. By confirming whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is running, it is possible to confirm whether or not the setting change mode is being executed. Then, for example, when the administrator confirms that the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is in a lighting state in the pachinko machine 10 which should not execute the setting change mode when power supply is started, It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with so that the setting change mode is executed by a person other than the administrator (for example, a goto master).

Further, according to this aspect, the setting change mode execution lamp 45x maintains the lighting state even after the setting change mode is terminated, so that the administrator can perform the setting in the pachinko machine 10 when the power supply is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the change mode has been executed even after the setting change mode ends. Then, for example, when the administrator confirms that the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is lit in the pachinko machine 10 which should not be in the setting change mode when the power supply is started, can recognize that someone other than the administrator (for example, a goto master) has done something illegal to the pachinko machine 10 so that the setting change mode is executed.

Further, according to this aspect, since the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is provided at a position that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the administrator can, for example, operate the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall during business. The display mode of the setting change mode execution lamps 45x can be confirmed only by circling the aisles that the players come and go without moving to the back side of the .

In this embodiment, the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is configured to be lit prior to the start of the setting change mode. The lighting state may be maintained. Even with such a configuration, the administrator can confirm whether or not the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 when power supply is started. Then, for example, when the administrator confirms that the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is lit in the pachinko machine 10 which should not be in the setting change mode when the power supply is started, can recognize that someone other than the administrator (for example, a goto master) has done something illegal to the pachinko machine 10 so that the setting change mode is executed.

Further, in this aspect, the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is configured to remain lit even after the setting change mode is terminated. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to confirm from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether or not the setting change mode is being executed in the pachinko machine 10 .

Further, in this aspect, the setting change mode execution lamp 45x is provided which is turned on when the setting change mode is executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a light-emitting lamp is provided in the lighting state. Even with such a configuration, for example, when the administrator confirms that the light-emitting lamp is in the lighting state in the pachinko machine 10 that should not be executing a specific process, a person other than the administrator It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with so that the specific process is executed by (for example, a goto master).

<Aspect 113>
Among the above modes, the setting change mode can be executed in the configuration that calculates and displays the base (during the normal mode), the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio as the game history information. and the setting information is changed, the change of the setting information is used as a trigger to change the character ratio and the continuous character ratio among the game history basic information serving as the basis for calculating the game history information. The game history basic information required to calculate the base (during the normal mode) may be deleted, but not deleted.

Before describing the specific configuration of this mode, the characteristics of each piece of game history information will be described below.

When the setting information of the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery changes, so the frequency of operation of the variable winning device 36 as a special electric accessory changes, and as a result, the setting information changes. The convergent values of the character object ratio and the continuous character object ratio before and after the change are changed. That is, it can be said that the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are game history information affected by changes in the setting information. When calculating the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio after the setting information is changed, it is preferable not to use the game history basic information before the setting information is changed as a basis for calculation.

On the other hand, even if the setting information of the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the convergence value of the base (during the normal mode) does not change. That is, it can be said that the base (during the normal mode) is game history information that is not affected by changes in the setting information. In addition, the base (during normal mode) is the ease with which game balls enter each ball entrance (general prize winning opening and start opening) during normal mode, that is, the performance of the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 Therefore, if there is no change in the configuration of the nails, general prize winning openings, etc. on the game board 30, even if the setting information for the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the value will converge to the same value. . Therefore, it is preferable to calculate the base (during normal mode) based on a large amount of data accumulated over a long period of time regardless of whether or not the setting information has been changed, thereby calculating a more accurate convergence value. .

Below, of the game history information, the game history information such as the base (during normal mode) that is not affected by the change of the setting information is particularly called "first type game history information", and is affected by the change of the setting information. The game history information such as the role ratio and the continuous role ratio is particularly called "second type game history information". Also, the base (during normal mode) is also simply referred to as "base".

Here, in this aspect, when the setting information is changed in the setting change mode, the game history basic information, which is the basis for calculating the second type game history information, among the game history basic information is erased, and the first game history information is deleted. The game history basic information, which is the basis for calculating seed game history information, is configured not to be deleted. The game history basic information serving as the basis for calculating the type 1 game history information (base) is, for example, the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance in the normal mode, and the type 2 game history information. The game history basic information serving as the basis for calculating the (accessory ratio/continuous accessory ratio) is, for example, the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored without distinguishing between game states.

As described above, according to this aspect, when the setting information is changed, of the game history basic information, the game history basic information serving as the basis for calculating the second type game history information is erased. The game history basic information before the change and the game history basic information after the change of the setting information coexist, and the second type game history information is based on both the game history basic information before and after the change of the setting information. is calculated, and the storage capacity of the game history basic information after the change of the setting information to be newly stored can be secured. On the other hand, when the setting information is changed, the game history basic information, which is the basis for calculating the type 1 game history information, is not deleted from the game history basic information, so it is not deleted regardless of whether the setting information is changed. It is possible to calculate highly accurate first-class game history information based on the game history basic information accumulated over a long period of time. Therefore, an administrator or an inspector can confirm the second type game history information based on the game history basic information after the change of the setting information, and can check the accuracy based on the game history basic information accumulated over a long period of time. It becomes possible to confirm the first type game history information with a high number.

<Aspect 114>

Among the above modes, the configuration is such that the setting change mode can be executed, and in the configuration that calculates and displays the base, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio as the game history information, the base is not affected by changes in the setting information. (Type 1 game history information) is calculated without dividing it into sections (periods) with the change in setting information as a boundary, and the role ratio and continuous role ratio (type 2 game history information) may be calculated separately for each section (period) with a change in the setting information as a boundary. According to such a configuration, the administrator or the inspector can confirm the highly accurate base (first type gaming history information) calculated from a wide range (period) without dividing the section, and the setting information Accessory ratios and continuous accessory ratios (second-type game history information) that are affected by the change in , can be checked separately for each section with the change in the setting information as a boundary.

<Aspect 115>
Among the above-described modes, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode and calculating and displaying the base, the role ratio, and the continuous role ratio as the game history information, when the setting information is changed, the game Although the history basic information is deleted, the game history information calculated based on the game history basic information may not be deleted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure the storage capacity for the game history basic information to be newly stored, and the administrator or the inspector can use the game history basic information before the setting information is changed. The game history information calculated based on the deleted game history basic information (that is, the game history information before the setting information is changed) is replaced with the game history basic information used as the basis for calculating the game history information. is erased (ie, after the setting information is changed).

As a trigger for erasing the game history basic information, it is possible to employ other conditions besides the fact that the setting information has been changed. For example, when the counted discharge passage passage number N _OUT reaches 60000, the game history basic information may be deleted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a storage capacity for the game history basic information to be newly stored, and the administrator or the inspector can easily check that the counted discharge passage passing number _NOUT reaches 60000. It is possible to check the game history information calculated each time the game history information is calculated even after the game history basic information used as the basis for calculation of the game history information is deleted.

<Aspect 116>
Among the above aspects, in a configuration that can execute the setting change mode, and that calculates and displays the base, the role ratio, and the continuous role ratio as the game history information, the configuration described below may be adopted. good. The configuration of this aspect will be specifically described below.

In this aspect, the second area of the main RAM 64 is provided with a specific storage area designated by a predetermined consecutive address, and the main CPU 62x, when the setting information is changed in the setting change mode, erases information stored in a specific storage area of the second area of the main RAM 64, and does not erase information stored in a storage area other than the specific storage area of the second area of the main RAM 64. is configured to As described above, the second area of the main RAM 64 stores programs for executing processing for calculating and displaying game history information (processing for game history) and various numerical information (total prize balls, This is a storage area used as an area for storing game history basic information such as information on the number of balls entered, game history information such as a base, a role ratio, and a continuous role ratio.

Then, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x, among the game history basic information acquired along with the progress of the game, the second The seed game history basic information is stored in a specific storage area in the second area of the main side RAM 64, and the first type game history basic information, which is the basis for calculating the first type game history information (base), is stored in the main side RAM 64. 2 are stored in a storage area other than the specific storage area.

Therefore, according to this aspect, when the setting information is changed, the game history basic information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 is erased or not erased. Even if it is not determined whether it is the basic information, the second type game history basic information that is the basis for calculation of the second type game history information affected by the change of the setting information is collectively erased, and the setting information The second-class game history basic information, which is the basis for calculating the first-class game history information that is not affected by changes, can be left without being erased. That is, when erasing the game history basic information triggered by a change in the setting information, it is possible to omit the process of discriminating between the game history basic information to be erased and the game history basic information not to be erased, thereby simplifying the process. be able to.

Further, according to this aspect, the specific storage area of the second area of the main RAM 64 where the information is erased when the setting information is changed is a storage area designated by a predetermined continuous address. It is possible to further simplify the process of collectively erasing the second type game history basic information stored in the specific storage area of the second area of the main side RAM 64 .

In this embodiment, the specific storage area of the second area of the main RAM 64 where the information is erased when the setting information is changed is a storage area designated by a predetermined consecutive address. It is not essential that the storage areas are designated by consecutive addresses, but may be storage areas designated by discrete addresses.

<Aspect 117>
Among the above aspects, in the configuration for calculating and displaying the game history information, the number of game balls entering each ball entry portion during a predetermined period is not used as a basis for calculating the game history information (not used for calculation). may be configured. Hereinafter, this predetermined period is also referred to as a "non-measurement period". In this configuration, for example, the game board 30 is opened, and the game balls are directly entered into the winning opening, the start opening, or the like, and an operation inspection is performed to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 operates normally or not during the non-measurement period. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being affected by the operation inspection. As a result, the manager and the inspector can confirm accurate game history information that is not affected by the operation inspection.

Specifically, for example, as a non-measurement period, the discharge passage passing number N _OUT measured after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started is a predetermined number (for example, 300 If the period until reaching the number of pieces) is adopted, the operation inspection of the pachinko machine 10 described above is performed immediately after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, so that the influence of the operation inspection It is possible to avoid extending to historical information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager from misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 has some problem or the like by checking the game history information affected by the operation inspection. .

Further, for example, as a non-measurement period, after the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode, until the discharge passage passing number N _OUT measured after the end of the setting change mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300). When the period of (1) is adopted, the operation inspection of the pachinko machine 10 described above is performed immediately after the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 ends, so that the operation inspection does not affect the game history information. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager from misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 has some problem or the like by checking the game history information affected by the operation inspection. .

Further, for example, if a period during which a predetermined switch is pressed is adopted as the non-measurement period, the administrator can press the switch to start the non-measurement period at any timing. It is possible to perform the operation inspection at an arbitrary timing while preventing the game history information from being affected by the operation inspection of the pachinko machine 10 described above.

Various other periods can be adopted as the non-measurement period. For example, the period from when the RAM clear process is executed until the discharge passage passing number N _OUT measured after the RAM clear process is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300), or the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 A period from when the supply is started until a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses can be used.

<Aspect 118>
In the configuration for displaying the calculated game history information on the information display section 45z among the above modes, an information display section for executing display control of the information display section 45z is provided between the information display section 45z and the main control board 61. A configuration in which a driving IC 45y is provided may be employed. An example of a specific configuration will be described below.

FIG. 116 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 118 of the first embodiment. As described above, in this aspect, display control of the four 7-segment displays 45z1, 45z2, 45z3, and 45z4 that constitute the information display section 45z is performed between the information display section 45z and the main control board 61. An information display section driving IC 45y is provided. Other configurations are the same as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG.

The main MPU 62 provided on the main control board 61 executes the main processing (FIG. 103) at power-on, and then executes the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 104) every 4 ms. The timer interrupt process includes a game history process (step S30216). In the game history process, the game history information to be displayed on the information display unit 45z is calculated, and the type and value of the calculated game history information are displayed. Information is transmitted to the display control IC 45y. That is, the main MPU 62 calculates the game history information to be displayed on the information display section 45z every 4 ms, and transmits information on the type and numerical value of the calculated game history information to the display control IC 45y.

When the information display section driving IC 45y receives the information on the type and numerical value of the game history information from the main MPU 62, the information display section 45z displays the received information on the type and numerical value of the game history information. 7-segment displays 45z1, 45z2, 45z3, 45z4 are controlled, and the mode displayed by the information display unit 45z is held until information on the type and numerical value of game history information is newly received from the main side MPU 62 It controls four 7-segment displays 45z1, 45z2, 45z3, 45z4 as follows.

Specifically, for example, when the information display section driving IC 45y receives information such as "b6.35" as information relating to the type and numerical value of the game history information from the main MPU 62, the information display section 45z displays "b6.35". While controlling the four 7-segment displays 45z1, 45z2, 45z3, and 45z4 so that a character string such as The four 7-segment displays 45z1, 45z2, 45z3 and 45z4 are controlled so as to hold the character string "b6.35" currently displayed by the display unit 45z.

That is, in this aspect, even if the main MPU 62 is in a state where it is unable to newly transmit information about the type and numerical value of the game history information, the information display unit driving IC 45y is provided. Therefore, the information display section 45z can maintain the display mode based on the information regarding the type and numerical value of the game history information that the information display section driving IC 45y received last from the main MPU 62. FIG.

Note that the state in which the main MPU 62 cannot newly transmit information about the type and numerical value of the game history information is, for example, as described in aspect 110, an abnormal state in the fraud detection process ( FIG. 104 : step S30215). Magnetism and shaking are detected, the game stop flag is turned ON, and the execution of the game history process (step S30216) is avoided in the timer interrupt process.

As described above, according to this aspect, the information display section driving IC 45y is provided to maintain the display mode of the information display section 45z until the next game history information is transmitted from the main MPU 62. The game history information transmitted before the next game history information can be displayed on the information display section 45z until the next game history information is transmitted. For example, after one piece of game history information is output from the main MPU 62, the one piece of game history information is displayed on the information display section 45z until the next piece of game history information is transmitted from the one piece of game history information. will continue. Therefore, for example, the manager or inspector of the gaming machine, even in a situation where the game stop flag is turned ON after one piece of game history information is output from the main MPU 62 and the next game history information is not transmitted, Since the piece of game history information continues to be displayed on the information display section 45z, the piece of game history information that continues to be displayed on the information display section 45z can be confirmed.

Further, according to this aspect, an administrator who does not want the game history information to be inspected by an inspector intentionally generates an abnormal magnetism or vibration to turn on the game stop flag to avoid execution of the game history process. Even if an attempt is made to prevent the next game history information from being transmitted from the main MPU 62 and prevent the game history information from being displayed on the information display section 45z, the information display section drive IC 45y does not change the display mode of the information display section 45z. is maintained, the game history information transmitted before the game stop flag is turned ON continues to be displayed on the information display section 45z. Therefore, according to this aspect, the inspector confirms the game history information which is the game history information which continues to be displayed on the information display section 45z and which is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 before the game stop flag is turned ON. be able to.

<Aspect 119>
Among the above modes, in the configuration in which the calculated game history information and the setting information of the lottery setting are displayed on the information display section 45z, the information (for example, an error code) regarding the malfunction that occurred in the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the information display section 45z. It is good also as a structure displayed. An example of a specific configuration will be described below.

In this aspect, an error code corresponding to the contents of the trouble that occurred in the pachinko machine 10 is preset, and when the occurrence of trouble in the pachinko machine 10 is detected, the trouble information storage area provided in the main side RAM 64 stores an error code corresponding to the problem. Then, when the error code is stored in the main RAM 64, a signal for displaying the error code is transmitted to the information display section 45z, and the information display section 45z displays the error code instead of the game history information. , the error code continues to be displayed until a signal indicating that the problem corresponding to the error code has been resolved is received.

In addition, in this aspect, the main control device 60 and the payout control device 70 are configured to be able to communicate with each other, and in the fault information storage area of the main side RAM 64, the fault occurred in the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 Not only the corresponding error code, but also the error code corresponding to the malfunction that occurred in the payout control device 70 or the payout device 71 is stored. Specifically, in this aspect, when a problem occurs in the payout control device 70 or the payout device 71, the payout control device 70 sends an error code corresponding to the content of the fault to the main control device 60. Send. Then, the main control device 60 that has received the error code from the payout control device 70 writes the received error code into the malfunction information storage area of the main side RAM 64 . As a result, an error code corresponding to the problem that occurred in the payout device 71 or the payout control device 70 is displayed on the information display section 45z instead of the game history information.

In addition, problems that occur in the payout control device 70 or the payout device 71 include, for example, a problem that the game balls are clogged in the internal passage of the payout device 71 and the game balls cannot be paid out normally, and a game ball that is being paid out. Problems such as the inability of a measuring device (sensor) to measure the number of balls, and malfunction of valves that control the opening and closing of internal passages through which game balls are dispensed do not operate properly. For example, in this aspect, an error code such as "E.341" corresponds to a problem such as a valve that controls the opening and closing of the internal passage not operating normally. , as shown in FIG. 117, the error code is displayed in the information display section 45z.

In addition, in this aspect, an error display button (not shown) is provided in the vicinity of the information display section 45z on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and in the malfunction information storage area of the main side RAM 64, a predetermined Error codes corresponding to failures for the number of times (for example, 10 times) are stored. When the above-described error display button is pressed while the game history information is displayed on the information display section 45z, for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), instead of the game history information, the error that occurred most recently is dealt with. The resulting error code is displayed on the information display section 45z. Each time the error display button is pressed again during the period in which the error code is being displayed, the error codes corresponding to the troubles that occurred in the past are sequentially displayed on the information display section 45z one by one retroactively. . If the error display button is not pressed for a predetermined period of time while the error code is being displayed, the game history information is displayed again on the information display section 45z.

As described above, according to this aspect, the information display unit 45z is configured to be able to receive a signal for displaying game history information, and is configured to be able to receive a signal for displaying an error code. Therefore, the information display section 45z can display not only the game history information but also the error code. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 having the information display section 45z capable of displaying the game history information, there is no need to provide a separate display means for displaying the error code, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. can be done.

Further, according to this aspect, the information display section 45z is configured to be able to receive a signal for displaying an error code corresponding to a problem that has occurred in the payout control device 70 or the payout device 71. Therefore, the information display section 45z can also display an error code corresponding to a malfunction that has occurred in the payout control device 70 or the payout device 71 . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with the information display section 45z capable of displaying the game history information, there is no need to provide separate display means for displaying an error code corresponding to a problem occurring in the payout control device 70 or the payout device 71. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Various configurations can be adopted as the configuration for displaying the error code on the information display section 45z. For example, the following configuration can be employed.

・The error code corresponding to the problem is displayed on the information display section 45z instead of the game history information until a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has passed since the time when the problem occurred. A configuration that terminates the display of the error code and restarts the display of the game history information even if the error code is not resolved.This configuration avoids the situation where the game history information cannot be confirmed until the problem is resolved. can do.

A configuration in which an error code corresponding to a malfunction that has recently occurred only during the period in which the error display button is pressed is displayed on the information display section 45z instead of the game history information. By pressing , the error code corresponding to the most recent malfunction can be checked at any time, and after the confirmation is completed, the game history information can be quickly displayed by stopping pressing the error display button. It can be displayed on the display unit 45z.

The information display section 45z displays an error code corresponding to a predetermined number of malfunctions (for example, 10 malfunctions) that have recently occurred during the period from the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 10 until the game can be played. According to this configuration, it is possible for the administrator to grasp the trouble that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 by using the period until the progress of the game becomes possible.

<Aspect 120>
Among the above modes, in a configuration that can execute the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode using the display screen of the pattern display device 41 and the speaker 46 when the power is turned on or while the demo screen is being displayed. The configuration may be such that the method or procedure for activation is notified. During execution of the setting change mode, a method of changing the setting information in the setting change mode, a method of confirming the setting information, and a method of terminating the setting change mode are displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 41 and the speaker 46. It is good also as a structure which alert|reports using. According to such a configuration, even an administrator who is not familiar with the method of starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and the operation method in the setting change mode can manage the pachinko machine 10 appropriately. It becomes possible.

In addition, among the above-described modes, in a configuration in which the setting confirmation mode can be executed, the pachinko machine 10 can be set and confirmed using the display screen of the pattern display device 41 and the speaker 46 when the power is turned on or while the demo screen is being displayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a method or procedure for starting as a mode is notified. Also, during execution of the setting confirmation mode, the method of ending the setting change mode may be notified using the display screen of the pattern display device 41 or the speaker 46 . According to such a configuration, even an administrator who is not familiar with a method of activating the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode and a method of terminating the setting confirmation mode can appropriately manage the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加becomes possible.

<Aspect 121>
In each of the above aspects, a configuration may be adopted in which various notification processes are executed after power is turned on. A specific description will be given below.

First, various notification processes when the RAM clear process is executed after the power is turned on will be described.

In this aspect, as described above, when the setting key is in the OFF state (or the setting key is not inserted) and the RAM clear button is in the ON state, the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (power supply is started), the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 performs RAM clear processing, which is processing to erase (clear) information stored in the main side RAM 64. to run. Then, when the RAM clearing process is completed in the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device of the pachinko machine 10, performs the RAM clearing process for notifying that the RAM clearing process has been executed. The notification process A is started, and the RAM clear notification process A is terminated after 30 seconds have passed since the start.

In this mode, the RAM clearing notification process A repeatedly outputs a voice such as "RAM is cleared" from the speaker 46, and among the various lamps 47, the full color (RGB) LED lamp is lit in red at maximum brightness. , the single-color LED lamp is turned on at maximum brightness, and a character string such as "RAM is cleared" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in red characters on the uppermost layer.

In this aspect, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to be able to execute three types of RAM clear notification processes (RAM clear notification processes A, B1, B2) with different notification modes. The RAM clear notification process A described above is a notification process that is executed when the RAM clear process is executed independently without being triggered by execution of the setting change mode. As will be described later, the RAM clear notification process B1 is executed when the setting change mode is executed as a trigger, and the setting information is changed in the setting change mode executed before the RAM clear process. This is notification processing that is executed when it has not been performed. As will be described later, the RAM clear notification process B2 is executed when the RAM clear process is executed when the setting change mode is executed and the setting information is changed in the RAM clear setting change mode. This is notification processing.

In addition, in this aspect, main controller 60 permits an interrupt after the RAM clearing process ends, and periodically and repeatedly executes the timer interrupt process. Then, door monitoring processing is executed as one processing included in the timer interrupt processing. The door monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed or open by monitoring the states of the frame open switch and the door open switch. Then, the sound emission control device 90 determines in the door monitoring process that at least one of the frame open switch and the door open switch is ON (at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is open). During the period in which the door is open, door open notification processing, which is processing for notifying that at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is open, is executed.

In this aspect, the door opening notification process alternately and repeatedly outputs a sound such as "the door is open" and a frame opening sound from the speaker 46, and among the various lamps 47, the full color (RGB) LED lamp is based on the maximum luminance. The red light is repeatedly turned on and off, the single-color LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off at maximum brightness, and a character string such as "the door is open" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 at the top layer. is displayed in red.

Further, in this aspect, even if at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is in an open state, the main controller 60 is in the stage before starting the execution of the timer interrupt process including the door monitoring process (e.g. Until the RAM clearing process ends), the sound emission control device 90 does not execute the door open notification process. Furthermore, in this aspect, when another priority notification process is being executed, the sound emission control device 90 gives priority to execution of the other priority notification process, and the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is open, the door open notification process is not executed. Other priority notification processes include, for example, the RAM clear notification process described above, the notification process after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the RAM abnormality notification process, which will be described later.

Next, an example of the flow of processing when RAM clear processing is executed after power-on will be described.

FIG. 118 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing when RAM clear processing is executed after power-on. This FIG. 118 shows whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed, whether or not the setting change mode is executed, whether or not the setting confirmation mode is executed, the state of the frame open switch, the state of the door open switch, and the state of the notification process. types are shown. As described above, the frame open switch is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open, and the door open switch is turned on when the front door frame 14 is open. It is a switch that is

As shown in FIG. 118, the administrator who wants the pachinko machine 10 to execute the RAM clear process can open the inner frame 13 and access the RAM clear button and the power switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. state, the setting key is turned off (or the setting key is not inserted), the RAM clear button is turned on, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on ( time t1).

When the power switch is turned on, power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 starts RAM clear processing (time t2).

When the RAM clearing process ends, the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 starts the above-described RAM clearing notification process A (time t3).

When 30 seconds have passed since the start of the RAM clearing notification process A, the sound emission control device 90 ends the RAM clearing notification process A (time t4). At this time, since the frame open switch is ON (the inner frame 13 is in the open state), the sound emission control device 90 starts the above-described door open notification process (time t4).

After that, when the manager closes the inner frame 13 and turns off the frame open switch, the sound emission control device 90 ends the door open notification process (time t5).

As described above, the main controller 60 does not start the door monitoring process until the RAM clearing process ends. Even if the door is open, the door open notification process is not executed. Further, until the RAM clear notification process A, which is the notification process to be given priority, ends, the sound emission control device 90 keeps the door open even if at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is open. Do not execute notification processing.

Next, various notification processes when the setting change mode is executed after the power is turned on will be described.

In this mode, as described above, the setting key is in the ON state, the RAM clear button is in the ON state, and both the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are in the ON state (inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open), when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power supply is started), the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 performs the setting Start change mode (setting change processing). The setting change mode is a mode in which the setting information of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by the administrator or the like pressing the setting change button.

Then, when the setting change mode is started in the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side of the pachinko machine 10, performs processing for notifying that the setting change mode is being executed. A certain setting change mode in-execution notification process is started. This setting change mode in-execution notification process continues until the setting change mode ends in main controller 60 .

In this aspect, the setting change mode in-execution notification process causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a voice such as "setting is being changed", and among the various lamps 47, the full-color (RGB) LED lamp is lit in red at maximum brightness. , the single-color LED lamp is turned on at maximum brightness, and a character string such as "under change of setting" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in a display mode of white characters on a black background.

After that, when the setting key is turned off by the administrator or the like, the main controller 60 ends the setting change mode, and the sound emission control device 90 ends the setting change mode in-execution notification process.

After that, main controller 60 executes the RAM clearing process when the setting change mode ends. When the RAM clearing process is completed in the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes the RAM clearing notification process B1 if the setting information has not been changed in the setting change mode executed before the RAM clearing process. If the setting information has been changed in the setting change mode, the RAM clear notification process B2 is started, and the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 is terminated after 30 seconds have passed since the start.

In this aspect, the RAM clearing notification process B1 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The setting has not been changed. The RAM has been cleared" from the speaker 46, and among the various lamps 47, the full color (RGB) LED lamp is lit in red at maximum brightness, the single-color LED lamp is lit at maximum brightness, and a character string such as "The setting has not been changed. The RAM has been cleared" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 at the maximum. It is a process to display in red characters on the upper layer.

In addition, in this aspect, the RAM clear notification process B2 repeatedly outputs a sound such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been cleared" from the speaker 46, and the full color (RGB) LED lamp among the various lamps 47 is lit in red at maximum brightness, the single-color LED lamp is lit at maximum brightness, and a character string such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been cleared." It is a process to display in red characters on the upper layer.

Next, an example of the flow of processing when the setting change mode is executed after power-on will be described.

FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing when the setting change mode is executed after power is turned on and the setting information is not changed in the setting change mode.

As shown in FIG. 119, the administrator who wants the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode opens the inner frame 13 and opens the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the keyhole for setting, The setting change button and the power switch are accessible, the setting key is ON, the RAM clear button is ON, and the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open (frame Both the opening switch and the door opening switch are turned on), and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (time t1).

When the power switch is turned on, power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 starts the setting change mode (time t2). When main controller 60 starts the setting change mode, sound emission control device 90 starts the above-described setting change mode in-execution notification process (time t2). The administrator can change the setting information by pressing the setting change button in the setting change mode. FIG. 119 shows a case where the administrator does not change the setting information in the setting change mode.

When the administrator turns the setting key to the OFF side, main controller 60 terminates the setting change mode and executes RAM clear processing (time t3). When main controller 60 ends the setting change mode, sound emission control device 90 ends the setting change mode in-execution notification process (time t3). Notification processing B1 is started (time t4).

When 30 seconds have passed since the start of the RAM clearing notification process B1, the sound emission control device 90 ends the RAM clearing notification process B1 (time t5). At this time, both the frame open switch and the door open switch are ON (both the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state), so the audio light emission control device 90 operates to open the door. Notification processing is started (time t5).

After that, the manager closes the inner frame 13 and turns off the frame open switch (time t6), and then closes the front door frame 14 and turns off the door open switch (time t7). , the sound emission control device 90 ends the door open notification process (time t7).

As described above, the main controller 60 does not start the door monitoring process until the RAM clearing process ends. Even if the door is open, the door open notification process is not executed. Further, until the RAM clear notification process B1, which is the priority notification process, ends, the sound emission control device 90 keeps the door open even if at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is open. Do not execute notification processing.

FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing when the setting change mode is executed after power is turned on and the setting information is changed in the setting change mode.

The difference from the example shown in FIG. The only difference is that the above-described RAM clear notification process B2 is executed, and the other points are the same. That is, in this aspect, when the setting information is changed in the setting change mode, the above-described RAM clear notification process B2 is executed with the termination of the RAM clear process as a trigger.

Next, various notification processes when the setting confirmation mode is executed after the power is turned on will be described.

In this mode, as described above, the setting key is in the ON state, the RAM clear button is in the OFF state, and both the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are in the ON state (inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open), when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power supply is started), the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 performs the setting Confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) is started. The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like cannot change the setting information of the pachinko machine 10, but can confirm the setting information. Specifically, during execution of the setting confirmation mode, Setting information is displayed on the information display section 45z provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Then, when the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device of the pachinko machine 10, performs processing for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is being executed. A certain setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process is started. This setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process continues until the setting confirmation mode ends in main controller 60 .

In this aspect, the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "Setting confirmation is in progress", and among the various lamps 47, the full-color (RGB) LED lamp is lit in red at maximum brightness. , the single-color LED lamp is turned on at maximum brightness, and a character string such as "Confirming settings" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in a display mode of white characters on a black background.

After that, when the setting key is turned off by the administrator or the like, the main control device 60 ends the setting confirmation mode, the sound emission control device 90 ends the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process, After the end of the setting confirmation mode for informing that the setting confirmation mode has ended, notification processing is started. Then, after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the post-setting confirmation mode notification process, the sound emission control device 90 ends the post-setting confirmation mode notification process.

In this aspect, the notification process after the end of the setting confirmation mode causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "The setting confirmation mode has ended", and among the various lamps 47, the full color (RGB) LED lamp is red at maximum brightness. , the single-color LED lamp is lit at maximum brightness, and a character string such as "The setting confirmation mode has ended" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in red characters on the top layer. .

In this aspect, main controller 60 permits an interrupt after the setting confirmation mode ends, and periodically and repeatedly executes timer interrupt processing. That is, the door monitoring process described above is not started until the setting confirmation mode ends.

Next, an example of the flow of processing when the setting confirmation mode is executed after power-on will be described.

FIG. 121 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing when the setting confirmation mode is executed after power-on.

As shown in FIG. 121, the administrator who wants the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting confirmation mode opens the inner frame 13 and accesses the setting keyhole and the power switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. possible state, the setting key is ON, the RAM clear button is OFF, and the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened (both the frame open switch and the door open switch is ON), the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON (time t1).

When the power switch is turned on, power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 starts the setting confirmation mode (time t2). When main controller 60 starts the setting confirmation mode, sound emission control device 90 starts the above-described setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process (time t2). The administrator can check the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z in the setting confirmation mode.

When the administrator turns the setting key to the OFF side, main controller 60 terminates the setting confirmation mode (time t3). When the setting confirmation mode ends in the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process (time t3), and starts the notification process after the setting confirmation mode ends (time t3). .

When 30 seconds have passed since the start of the notification process after the end of the setting confirmation mode, the sound emission control device 90 ends the notification process after the end of the setting confirmation mode (time t4). At this time, both the frame open switch and the door open switch are ON (both the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state), so the audio light emission control device 90 operates to open the door. Notification processing is started (time t4).

After that, the manager closes the inner frame 13 and turns off the frame open switch (time t5), and then closes the front door frame 14 and turns off the door open switch (time t6). , the sound emission control device 90 ends the door open notification process (time t6).

As described above, the main controller 60 does not start the door monitoring process until the setting confirmation mode ends. Even if the door is open, the door open notification process is not executed. In addition, even if at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is open until the notification process is finished after the setting confirmation mode, which is the notification process to be prioritized, the sound emission control device 90 Does not execute door open notification processing.

Next, an example of processing executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 of this aspect will be specifically described.

The main MPU 62 of this aspect executes main processing and timer interrupt processing. The main processing is processing that is executed after the power is turned on.

[Main processing]
FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 121 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S40101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S40102 to execute internal function register setting processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S40103.

In step S40103, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information stored in the register of the main CPU 62x (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) Save to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 .

If it is determined in step S40103 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S40103: YES), the process advances to step S40104 to execute a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. Then, the RAM determination value is calculated. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process advances to step S40105 to determine whether the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal or not. checksum value). If it is determined in step S40105 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S40105: YES), the process proceeds to step S40106.

In step S40106, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", if the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6" , the setting information is determined to be a numerical value within a predetermined range. determines that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined in step S40106 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S40106: YES), the process proceeds to step S40107.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S40103 described above (step S40103: NO), if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S40105 described above (step S40105: NO), and If it is determined in step S40106 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S40106: NO), the process advances to step S40115 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM determination value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, This flag indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

The flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON will be described below, and then the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON will be described.

In step S40107, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag is ON. The setting changing flag is a flag that turns ON when setting change processing (setting change mode) described later is started, and turns OFF when the setting change processing (setting change mode) ends. Here, the situation in which the setting change flag is ON in step S40107 means that when the pachinko machine 10 was powered on last time, the setting change process (setting change mode) described later was executed, and the setting change process ( During execution of the setting change mode), the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, so that the setting change flag remains ON.

If it is determined in step S40107 that the setting changing flag is ON (step S40107: YES), the process advances to step S40118 to execute setting change processing (setting change mode). In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed, and a process of receiving a change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40107 that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S40107: NO), the process proceeds to step S40108.

In step S40108, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S40108 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S40108: NO), the process advances to step S40109 to determine whether or not the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. Note that "the setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and positioned on the ON side. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when

If it is determined in step S40109 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S40109: NO), the process proceeds to step S40110.

In step S40110, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that turns ON when setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode), which will be described later, is started, and turns OFF when the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) ends. Here, the situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step S40110 means that when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on last time, the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later is executed, and the setting confirmation process ( During execution of the setting confirmation mode), the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, so that the setting confirmation flag remains ON.

If it is determined in step S40110 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step S40110: NO), the process advances to step S40111 to transmit a normal activation command to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The normal start command is not determined to be RAM abnormal, and the pachinko machine 10 (main controller 60) is in a normal state in which none of the setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and RAM clear processing described later are executed. This is a command indicating that it has started. When receiving the normal activation command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated in a normal state. Specifically, in this aspect, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "Normal startup". After executing step S40111, the process proceeds to step S40113, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON in step S40109 described above (step S40109: YES), and if the setting checking flag is ON in step S40110, If so (step S40110: YES), the process proceeds to step S40112. That is, when the RAM clear button is OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are all ON, and the previous power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed at the time of turning on, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode). If the flag remains ON, the process proceeds to step S40112.

In step S40112, setting confirmation processing is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S40112, the process proceeds to step S40113.

In step S40113, power recovery processing is executed to return to the state when the power was last turned off. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S40113, the process advances to step S40114 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S40123, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step S40108 described above, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is ON (step S40108: YES), the process proceeds to step S40117, and the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. Determine whether or not there is If it is determined in step S40117 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S40117: YES), the process advances to step S40118 to perform the setting change process (setting change process). mode). After that, the process proceeds to step S40123, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40117 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S40117: NO), the process proceeds to step S40119.

In step S40119, it is determined whether or not the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S40119 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S40119: NO), the process advances to step S40120 to execute RAM clear processing. The RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, etc. are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. After executing step S40120, the process advances to step S40121 to transmit a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the RAM clear processing has been executed, to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM clear command, the sound emission control device 90 starts one of the above-described RAM clear notification processes A, B1, and B2. After executing step S40121, the process proceeds to step S40123, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40119 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S40119: YES), the process advances to step S40122 to emit a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. Send to the control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 starts RAM abnormality notification processing. After executing step S40122, the process proceeds to step S40123. However, in the flow of this description, the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, so the process does not proceed to step S40122 described above.

In step S40123, a lighting/blinking process, which is a process of lighting and blinking all the light emitting parts (segment light emitting parts A to G and DP light emitting part) constituting the information display part 45z, is executed. In the lighting and blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then synchronized and blinked for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step S40123, the process proceeds to step S40124.

In step S40124, interrupt permission setting is executed to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. After that, an infinite loop is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S40115 will be described.

As described above, when it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step S40103 (step S40103: NO), when it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S40105 (step S40105: NO), and If it is determined in S40106 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S40106: NO), the process advances to step S40115 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S40116.

In step S40116, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S40116 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S40116: YES), the process advances to step S40117 to determine whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. judge. If it is determined in step S40117 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S40117: YES), the process advances to step S40118 to perform the setting change process (setting change process). mode). After that, the process proceeds to step S40122. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40116 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S40116: NO), and in step S40117 it is determined that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON. If so (step S40117: NO), the process proceeds to step S40119.

In step S40119, it is determined whether or not the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S40119 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S40119: NO), the process advances to step S40120 to execute the above-described RAM clear processing. After executing step S40120, the process advances to step S40121 to transmit a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the RAM clear processing has been executed, to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. After executing step S40121, the process proceeds to step S40122. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step S40120 described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40119 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S40119: YES), the process advances to step S40122 to emit a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. Send to control device 90 . After executing step S40122, the process proceeds to step S40123.

In step S40123, the lighting blinking process described above is executed. After executing step S40123, the process advances to step S40124 to execute interrupt permission setting for permitting generation of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, infinite loop processing is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As described above, in this aspect, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is to press the RAM clear switch (to be in the ON state) and press the setting key (keyhole). , the power switch is turned on while the frame open switch and the door open switch are all turned on. In addition, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed by setting the RAM clear switch to a non-depressed state (OFF state), setting the setting key (keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening. This is an operation to turn on the power switch while all the switches are turned on. The operation for executing the RAM clearing process is to press down the RAM clear switch (turn it ON) and turn OFF any of the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch. In this state, the power switch is turned on.

An example of the flow of processing realized by executing the main processing described above will be collectively described below.

・When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied (steps S40103, S40105, and S40106), setting change processing (setting change mode) is performed, regardless of whether the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied or not, and regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag, the setting change process is performed. (setting change mode) is executed (step S40118).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S40103, S40105, and S40106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, and if it is determined that the setting change flag is ON (step S40107: YES), an operation for executing setting change processing (setting change mode), setting confirmation processing The setting change process (setting change mode) is executed regardless of whether or not the operation for executing the (setting confirmation mode) and the operation for executing the RAM clear process are performed (step S40118).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S40103, S40105, and S40106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S40107: NO), and if an operation for executing RAM clear processing has been performed (step S40108: YES, step S40117: NO, step S40119: NO), RAM clear processing is executed (step S40120) and a RAM clear command is transmitted (step S40121) regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag.

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S40103, S40105, and S40106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S40107: NO), and an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed. (step S40108: NO, step S40109: YES), setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S40112).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S40103, S40105, and S40106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is not established, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S40107: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is not performed. Even if there is, if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S40110: YES), setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S40112).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S40103, S40105, and S40106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is established and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S40115), the RAM clear processing is executed even if the operation for executing the RAM clear processing has been performed. First, a RAM abnormality command is transmitted (step S40122).

Determining whether or not the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied when power supply is started (steps S40103, S40105, and S40106), and determining the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is established and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S40115), even if an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed, the setting A RAM abnormality command is transmitted without executing confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) (step S40122).

[Setting change process]
Next, the details of the setting change processing of this aspect will be described.

FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing setting change processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 121 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of step S40118 in FIG.

In step S40201, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. When receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 starts the above-described setting change mode in-execution notification process.

After transmitting the setting change mode start command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S40201, the process proceeds to step S40202.

In step S40202, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The setting change flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, as described above, and a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not yet ended. is. After executing step S40202, the process proceeds to step S40203.

In step S40203, initial setting processing at the start of setting change is executed. In the initial setting process at the start of setting change, initial settings necessary for starting the setting change process are executed. Further, in this aspect, in the initial setting process at the start of setting change, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF. to After executing step S40203, the process proceeds to step S40204.

In step S40204, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as update setting information. Specifically, in this aspect, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in another area of the main RAM 64 other than the setting information storage area. is stored (copied) in the update setting information storage area. After executing step S40204, the process proceeds to step S40205.

In step S40205, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, as described above, the left three 7-segment displays of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1, left middle 7-segment display 45z2 and right middle 7-segment display 45z3 of the information display section 45z are set to the setting change mode. is being executed, and causes the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 to start lighting display of the update setting information, and the DP of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4. Start blinking display of the light emitting part. Thus, the modification period described above is started. After executing step S40205, the process advances to step S40206.

In step S40206, it is determined whether or not the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", whether the update setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6" determine whether or not If it is determined in step S40206 that the update setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S40206: YES), the process proceeds to step S40208. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40206 that the update setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S40206: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information. Alternatively, if information other than numerical values is stored due to noise or the like, the flow advances to step S40207 to change the update setting information to the initial value. In this aspect, "1" is stored as an initial value in the update setting information. After that, the process proceeds to step S40208.

In step S40208, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. In the middle, a signal indicating Low level is monitored, and when a falling edge of the signal falling from High level to Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) is turned to the OFF side. If it is determined in step S40208 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S40208: NO), the process advances to step S40209 to determine whether the setting change button has been pressed. judge. If it is determined in step S40209 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S40209: YES), the process advances to step S40210 to update the update setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value information stored as update setting information. However, when the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical value information stored as update setting information is "6", the numerical value information is updated to "1". Thereafter, returning to step S40206 described above, it is determined whether or not the updated setting information for update is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40209 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S40209: NO), the process returns to step S40206 without executing the processing of step S40210, and the update setting information is updated. It is determined whether the numerical value is within a predetermined range.

If it is determined in step S40208 described above that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S40208: YES), the process proceeds to step S40211.

In step S40211, it is determined whether or not the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is the same as the setting information stored in the setting information storage area. If it is determined in step S40211 that the update setting information is not the same as the setting information (step S40211: NO), that is, if the setting information has been changed by the administrator or the like, the process advances to step S40212 to confirm that the setting has been changed. Turn on the flag. The setting change completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the setting information has been changed when transmitting a setting change mode end command, which will be described later. After executing step S40212, the process proceeds to step S40213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40211 that the update setting information is the same as the setting information (step S40211: YES), that is, if the setting information has not been changed by the administrator or the like, step S40212 is executed. Without it, the process proceeds to step S40213.

In step S40213, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as setting information. Specifically, in this aspect, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. (copy). After executing step S40213, the process advances to step S40214 to start the lighting display of the setting information on the right end seven-segment display 45z4 and change the display mode of the DP light emitting unit of the right end seven-segment display 45z4 from blinking display to lighting display. switch. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S40215 to execute wait processing. The wait process waits for two seconds without proceeding to the next process. As a result, the character string "set." This state continues for 2 seconds, in which the determined setting information is illuminated on the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 and the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is illuminated. These 2 seconds are the determination period. After that, the process advances to step S40216 to end the control for displaying the setting information on the information display section 45z. Specifically, the four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 forming the information display section 45z are turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S40217.

In step S40217, it is determined whether or not the setting changed flag is ON. If it is determined in step S40217 that the setting changed flag is not ON (step S40217: NO), that is, if the setting information has not been changed by the administrator or the like, the process proceeds to step S40218, and the setting information is changed. First, a setting change mode end command A, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Thereafter, the process advances to step S40220. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40217 that the setting changed flag is ON (step S40217: YES), that is, if the setting information has been changed by the administrator or the like, the process advances to step S40219 to change the setting information. Then, a setting change mode end command B, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Thereafter, the process advances to step S40220. When receiving the setting change mode end command A or B, the sound emission control device 90 ends the setting change mode in-execution notification process. The difference between the processing executed when the sound emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command A after that and the processing executed when the setting change mode end command B is received will be described later.

After transmitting the setting change mode end command A or B to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may display information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

In step S40220, RAM clear processing is executed. In the RAM clearing process, information other than the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is erased. That is, when this RAM clearing process is executed, the setting change flag and the setting change completed flag are also cleared (turned OFF). After executing step S40220, the process advances to step S40221.

In step S40221, a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the RAM clear processing has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. Upon receiving the RAM clear command, the sound emission control device 90 starts any one of the RAM clear notification processes A, B1, and B2 described above. The details of the RAM clear notification process executed by the sound emission control device 90 that has received the RAM clear command will be described later.

After executing step S40221, this setting change process ends. After executing the setting change process, the setting information of the lottery setting after the change is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer receiving the information displays the pachinko machine on the management screen. 10 may be configured to display the setting information of the lottery setting after the change.

[Setting confirmation process]
Next, the details of the setting confirmation process of this aspect will be described.

FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing setting confirmation processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 121 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S40112 in FIG.

In step S40301, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. When receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 starts the above-described setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process.

After transmitting the setting confirmation mode start command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step S40301, the process proceeds to step S40302.

In step S40302, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, as described above, and a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not yet ended. is. After executing step S40302, the process proceeds to step S40303.

In step S40303, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, as described above, the left three 7-segment displays of the left end 7-segment display 45z1, the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 and the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 of the information display section 45z are set to the setting confirmation mode. is being executed, and the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 starts lighting display of the setting information, and the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4. to start the lighting display. After executing step S40303, the process proceeds to step S40304.

In step S40304, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the signal indicates a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. In the middle, the signal indicating the Low level is monitored, and when the falling edge of the signal falling from the High level to the Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. judge. If it is determined in step S40304 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S40304: NO), step S40304 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40304 that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S40304: YES), the process proceeds to step S40305. That is, the infinite loop is repeated until the setting key (keyhole) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S40305. move on.

In step S40305, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z ends. Specifically, the four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 forming the information display section 45z are turned off. As a result, the character string "sec." is lighted and displayed on the left three 7-segment displays of the left end 7-segment display 45z1, left middle 7-segment display 45z2 and right middle 7-segment display 45z3 of the information display section 45z. and the state in which the setting information is lit on the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 and the DP light-emitting portion of the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is lit and displayed after the setting confirmation mode is started. This is continued until the key (keyhole) of the switch shifts to the OFF side. After executing step S40305, the process proceeds to step S40306.

In step S40306, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S40307.

In step S40307, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. As will be described later, when the setting confirmation mode end command is received, the sound emission control device 90 ends the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process, and then executes the above-described setting confirmation mode termination notification process for 30 seconds.

After executing step S40307, this setting confirmation process is terminated. After transmitting the setting confirmation mode end command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started periodically (for example, every 4 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 .

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 in aspect 121 of the first embodiment. In step S40401, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, etc.) in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the numerical information after the addition to the reading source counter is executed. When the read numerical value information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting the read source counter with 0 is executed. After executing step S40401, the process advances to step S40402.

In step S40402, power failure monitoring processing is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main controller 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (eg, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Determining that the switch has been turned off or that a power failure has occurred, saves various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main side CPU 62 x to a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . After that, without proceeding to step S40403, which will be described later, the infinite loop processing is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable. Note that the power supply device 85 of this aspect is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main controller 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output a regulated voltage in volts. As for the time during which this stabilized voltage is output, sufficient time is ensured for executing the processing up to storing the above-described RAM determination value in the main-side RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process of step S40402 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main controller 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S40403.

In step S40403, it is determined whether or not at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON. As described above, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that turns ON when it is determined that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal in the main process executed when the power is turned on. The game stop flag is a flag that turns ON in order to stop the progress of the game when shaking or magnetism is detected in the fraud detection process. When it is determined in step S40403 that both the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag are not ON (step S40403: NO), the process proceeds to step S40404. On the other hand, in step S40403, when it is determined that at least one of the RAM abnormality flag or the game stop flag is ON (step S40403: YES), without executing the processing after step S40404, the timer interrupt processing ends. do. That is, when at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON, the processing for enabling the progress of the game after step S40404 is not executed, and the game progress mode is entered in which the game can be progressed. is configured not to migrate. The processing after step S40404, which is the processing for enabling the progress of the game, will be described below.

In step S40404, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when information is set to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state, output of a drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set Stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information to switch the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. When set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S40405.

In step S40405, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S40406.

In step S40406, signals received from the respective ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and ball entry detection processing for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. Since the ball-entering detection process is the same as the ball-entering detection process shown in FIG. 28, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S40406, the process advances to step S40407.

In step S40407, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S40408.

In step S40408, ball entry processing for the start opening accompanying entry of the game ball to the first start opening 33 and the second start opening 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the starting port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are determined based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. While acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM64. After executing step S40408, the process advances to step S40409.

In step S40409, ball-entering processing for the through-gate accompanying entry (passage) of the game ball into the through-gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the electric accessary product opening counter C4 is acquired based on determination that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is stored in the RAM 64. It is stored in the electric service reservation area 64d. After executing step S40409, the process advances to step S40410.

In step S40410, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, winning lottery, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. After executing step S40410, the process advances to step S40411.

In step S40411, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. In the game state transition processing, processing is executed to shift the game state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S40411, the process proceeds to step S40412.

In step S40412, an electric role support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric role product 34a (electric role product opening lottery), and when it is determined to be in the open state, the electric role product 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S40412, the process proceeds to step S40413.

In step S40413, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, a process for shooting a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S40413, the process proceeds to step S40414.

In step S40414, door monitoring processing is executed. In the door monitoring process, it is monitored whether the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open. Details of the door monitoring process will be described later. After executing step S40414, the process advances to step S40415.

In step S40415, fraud detection processing is executed. In the fraud detection process, shaking and magnetism are monitored, and when shaking and magnetism are detected, an alarm sound or voice such as "Shake detected!" "Magnetism detected!" At the same time, various lamps 47 are blinked at maximum brightness. Further, in the fraud detection process, the above-described game stop flag is turned ON when shaking or magnetism is detected. As a result, after the game stop flag is turned ON, execution of the processing from step S40404 to step S40417 is avoided. After executing step S40415, the process advances to step S40416.

In step S40416, command output processing for outputting (transmitting) commands set as transmission targets in the current timer interrupt processing to each sub-side control device is executed. For example, when commands related to effects such as variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, these commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S40416, the process advances to step S40417.

In step S40417, game history processing for calculating and displaying game history information is executed. Since the game history processing is the same as the game history processing shown in FIG. 29, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S40417, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

[Door monitoring process]
Next, details of the door monitoring process will be described.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing door monitoring processing. This door monitoring process is executed as a subroutine of step S40414 in FIG.

In step S40501, it is determined whether or not the door open flag is ON. The door open flag is a flag that is turned ON when it is determined that at least one of the frame open switch and the door open switch is ON, as will be described later. If it is determined in step S40501 that the door open flag is not ON (step S40501: NO), the process advances to step S40502 to determine whether at least one of the frame open switch and the door open switch is ON.

If it is determined in step S40502 that at least one of the frame open switch and the door open switch is ON (step S40502: YES), that is, if at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is open , the process advances to step S40503 to turn on the door open flag. After that, the process advances to step S40504 to set a door open command and end the main door monitoring process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40502 that both the frame open switch and the door open switch are OFF (step S40502: NO), that is, if both the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed , the main door monitoring process ends without executing steps S40503 and S40504.

If it is determined in step S40501 that the door open flag is ON (step S40501: YES), the process advances to step S40505 to determine whether both the frame open switch and the door open switch are OFF. In step S40505, if it is determined that both the frame open switch and the door open switch are OFF (step S40505: YES), that is, if both the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed, step Proceeding to S40506, the door open flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S40507 to set a door closing command and terminate the main door monitoring process. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S40505 that at least one of the frame open switch and the door open switch is ON (step S40505: NO), that is, when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. , the main door monitoring process ends without executing steps S40506 and S40507.

As described above, in the door monitoring process, when it is determined that at least one of the frame open switch and the door open switch is ON, the door open flag is turned ON and the door open command is set. When it is determined that both the frame open switch and the door open switch are OFF while the door open flag is ON, the door open flag is turned OFF and the door close command is set.

Next, an example of processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound light emission control device 90 of this aspect will be described.

[Timer interrupt processing]
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S43101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S43101, the process proceeds to step S43102.

In step S43102, various notification processes are executed. In the various notification processes, notification processes corresponding to commands received from the main MPU 62 are executed. Details of various notification processes will be described later. After executing step S43102, the process advances to step S43103.

In step S43103, a game round effect process is executed. In the game round effect processing, processing relating to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is performed. After executing step S43103, the process advances to step S43104.

In step S43104, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step S43104, the process advances to step S43105.

In step S43105, a customer waiting process is executed. In the customer waiting process, a process for displaying a demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 is executed when the game round has not been executed for a predetermined time. After executing step S43105, the process advances to step S43106.

In step S43106, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step S43106, the process advances to step S43107.

In step S43107, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step S43107, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

[Various notification processing]
Next, various notification processes will be described.

FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing various notification processes. Various notification processes are executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 127: S43102).

In step S43201, a setting change mode notification process is executed. In the setting change mode notification process, the setting change mode in-execution notification process is started based on the reception of the setting change mode start command from the main MPU 62, and the setting change mode end command A or B is received. to end the setting change mode in-execution notification process. The details of the setting change mode notification process will be described later. After executing step S43201, the process advances to step S43202.

In step S43202, a setting confirmation mode notification process is executed. In the setting confirmation mode notification process, the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process is started based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode start command from the main MPU 62, and the setting confirmation mode is started based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode end command. Terminate the in-execution notification process. In the setting confirmation mode notification process, the setting confirmation mode termination notification process is started based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode termination command, and after 30 seconds have elapsed, the setting confirmation mode termination notification process is terminated. The details of the setting confirmation mode notification process will be described later. After executing step S43202, the process advances to step S43203.

In step S43203, RAM clear notification processing is executed. In the RAM clear notification process, one of the RAM clear notification processes A, B1, and B2 is started based on the reception of the RAM clear command from the main MPU 62, and after 30 seconds, the RAM clear notification process is started. terminate. The details of the RAM clear notification process will be described later. After executing step S43203, the process proceeds to step S43204.

In step S43204, RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, the RAM abnormality notification process is started based on the reception of the RAM abnormality command from the main MPU 62 . The details of the RAM abnormality notification process will be described later. After executing step S43204, the process advances to step S43205.

In step S43205, door open notification processing is executed. In the door open notification process, the door open notification process is started when a door open command is received from the main MPU 62, and the door open notification process is terminated when a door close command is received. The details of the door open notification process will be described later. After executing step S43205, the process advances to step S43206.

In step S43206, other notification processing is executed. In the other notifying process, for example, when a command indicating that magnetism has been detected is received from the main MPU 62, a process of notifying that magnetism has been detected is executed. After executing step S43206, this various notification processing ends.

[Processing for notification of setting change mode]
Next, the setting change mode notification process will be described.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the setting change mode notification process. The setting change mode notification process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of various notification processes (FIG. 128: S43201).

In step S43301, it is determined whether or not a setting change mode start command has been received. If it is determined in step S43301 that the setting change mode start command has been received (step S43301: YES), the process advances to step S43302 to start the above-described setting change mode in-execution notification process. After executing step S43302, the process advances to step S43303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43301 that the setting change mode start command has not been received (step S43301: NO), the process proceeds to step S43303 without executing step S43302.

In step S43303, it is determined whether a setting change mode end command A or a setting change mode end command B has been received. If it is determined in step S43303 that either the setting change mode end command A or the setting change mode end command B has been received (step S43303: YES), the process advances to step S43304 to perform setting change mode in-execution notification processing. terminate. After that, the process advances to step S43305 to turn on the setting change mode executed flag in the sound and light side RAM 94 . This setting change mode execution completion flag is a flag that is referred to when determining the type (A or B) of RAM clear notification processing, which will be described later. , or a flag for identifying whether the RAM clearing process has been executed alone. After executing step S43305, the flow advances to step S43306 to determine whether or not the received command is the setting change mode end command B. If it is determined in step S43306 that the received command is the setting change mode end command B (step S43306: YES), the process advances to step S43307 to turn on the sound and light side setting changed flag in the sound and light side RAM 94. . This sound/light side setting changed flag is a flag that is referred to when determining the type (B1 or B2) of the RAM clear notification process described later, and identifies whether or not the setting information has been changed in the setting change mode. is a flag for After executing step S43307, this setting change mode notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43306 that the received command is not setting change mode end command B (step S43306: NO), that is, if the received command is setting change mode end command A, step S43307 is executed. This setting change mode notification process is terminated without executing.

If it is determined in step S43303 that neither the setting change mode end command A nor the setting change mode end command B has been received (step S43303: NO), without executing steps S43304 to S43307 described above, This setting change mode notification processing is terminated.

[Processing for notification of setting confirmation mode]
Next, the setting confirmation mode notification processing will be described.

FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation mode notification process. The setting confirmation mode notification process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of various notification processes (FIG. 128: S43202).

In step S43401, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation mode start command has been received. If it is determined in step S43401 that the setting confirmation mode start command has been received (step S43401: YES), the process advances to step S43402 to start the above-described setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process. After executing step S43402, the process advances to step S43403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43401 that the setting confirmation mode start command has not been received (step S43401: NO), the process proceeds to step S43403 without executing step S43402.

In step S43403, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S43403 that the setting confirmation mode end command has been received (step S43403: YES), the process advances to step S43404 to end the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process. After that, the process advances to step S43405 to start notification processing after the setting confirmation mode ends. After executing step S43405, the process advances to step S43406 to turn ON the in-notification flag after the setting confirmation mode ends. After that, the process advances to step S43407 to turn on the priority notification flag. Even if the condition for starting the door open notification process, which will be described later, is met, the priority notification flag gives priority to the notification process after the setting confirmation mode is finished if the notification process after the setting confirmation mode is finished is being executed. It is a flag for not starting the door open notification process. After executing step S43407, the process advances to step S43408. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43403 that the setting confirmation mode end command has not been received (step S43403: NO), the process advances to step S43408 without executing steps S43404 to S43407.

In step S43408, it is determined whether or not the in-notification flag after the end of the setting confirmation mode is ON. If it is determined in step S43408 that the informing flag after setting confirmation mode is ON (step S43408: YES), the process advances to step S43409 to determine whether or not it is time to end the notification process after setting confirmation mode has ended. judge. Specifically, in this aspect, when 30 seconds have passed since the post-setting confirmation mode end notification process was started, it is determined that it is time to end the setting confirmation mode post-end notification process. If it is determined in step S43409 that it is time to end the notification processing after the end of the setting confirmation mode (step S43409: YES), the process advances to step S43410 to end the notification processing after the end of the setting confirmation mode. Then, it progresses to step S43411 and step S43412, and turns OFF the flag during alert|reporting after completion|finish of setting confirmation mode, and a flag during priority alerting|reporting. After that, this setting confirmation mode notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43408 that the informing flag after the end of the setting confirmation mode is not ON (step S43408: NO), and if it is determined in step S43409 that it is not the end timing of the informing process after the end of the setting confirmation mode (step S43409: NO), this setting confirmation mode notification processing is terminated without executing steps S43410 to S43412.

[RAM clear notification processing]
Next, the processing for RAM clear notification will be described.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing RAM clear notification processing. The RAM clear notification process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of various notification processes (FIG. 128: S43203).

In step S43501, it is determined whether or not a RAM clear command has been received. If it is determined in step S43501 that the RAM clear command has been received (step S43501: YES), the flow advances to step S43502 to determine whether or not the setting change mode executed flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode has been executed before the RAM clearing process executed this time. If it is determined in step S43502 that the setting change mode executed flag is not ON (step S43502: NO), that is, if the setting change mode has not been executed before the RAM clear processing executed this time, The process advances to step S43503 to start RAM clear notification processing A. After that, the process proceeds to step S43509, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43502 that the setting change mode executed flag is ON (step S43502: YES), that is, if the setting change mode has been executed before the RAM clear processing executed this time, , the process advances to step S43504 to turn off the setting change mode executed flag, and then the process advances to step S43505.

In step S43505, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side setting changed flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting information has been changed in the setting change mode executed before the RAM clearing process. If it is determined in step S43505 that the sound and light side setting changed flag is not ON (step S43505: NO), that is, if the setting information has not been changed in the setting change mode executed before the RAM clear processing. , the process advances to step S43506 to start the RAM clear notification process B1. After that, the process proceeds to step S43509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43505 that the sound and light side setting changed flag is ON (step S43505: YES), that is, the setting information was changed in the setting change mode executed before the RAM clear processing. If so, the flow advances to step S43507 to start RAM clear notification processing B2. After that, the process advances to step S43508 to turn off the sound and light side setting changed flag, and the process advances to step S43509.

In step S43509, the flag during RAM clear notification is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S43510 to turn on the priority notification flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S43511. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43501 that the RAM clear command has not been received (step S43501: NO), the process advances to step S43511 without executing steps S43502 to S43510.

In step S43511, it is determined whether or not the flag during RAM clearing notification is ON. If it is determined in step S43511 that the RAM clearing notification flag is ON (step S43511: YES), the process advances to step S43512 to determine whether it is time to end the RAM clearing notification process. Specifically, in this aspect, when 30 seconds have passed since any one of the RAM clearing notification processes A, B1, and B2 was started, it is determined that it is time to end the RAM clearing notification process. If it is determined in step S43512 that it is time to end the RAM clear notification process (step S43512: YES), the process advances to step S43513 to terminate the notification process being executed among the RAM clear notification processes A, B1, and B2. . Then, it progresses to step S43514 and step S43515, and turns OFF a flag during RAM clear alerting|reporting and a flag during priority alerting|reporting. After that, this RAM clear notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43511 that the RAM clearing notification flag is not ON (step S43511: NO), and if it is determined in step S43512 that it is not the end timing of the RAM clearing notification process (step S43512: NO ), without executing steps S43513 to S43515, the RAM clearing notification processing ends.

Thus, in this aspect, when the RAM clear command is received, any one of the RAM clear notification processes A, B1, and B2 is started, and the priority notification flag is turned ON. Alternatively, even if the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the door open notification process is not started.

[RAM abnormality notification process]
Next, the RAM abnormality notification process will be described.

FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the RAM abnormality notification process. The RAM abnormality notification process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of various notification processes (FIG. 128: S43204).

In step S43601, it is determined whether or not a RAM abnormality command has been received. If it is determined in step S43601 that a RAM abnormality command has been received (step S43601: YES), the process advances to step S43602 to start RAM abnormality notification processing. Specifically, in the RAM abnormality notification process, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46, and among the various lamps 47, the full-color (RGB) LED lamp is lit in red at maximum brightness, and the single-color LED The lamp is turned on at maximum brightness, and a character string such as "RAM abnormal" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in a display mode of white characters on a black background. After performing step S43602, it progresses to step S43603 and turns ON a flag during priority alerting|reporting. After that, the RAM abnormality notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43601 that no RAM abnormality command has been received (step S43601: NO), this RAM abnormality notification process is terminated without executing steps S43602 and S43603.

Thus, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality command is received, the RAM abnormality notification process is started, and the priority notification flag is turned ON, so that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Even if it does, the door open notification process is not started. In this mode, the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off in order to terminate the RAM abnormality notification process.

[Door open notification process]
Next, the door open notification process will be described.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing door open notification processing. The door open notification process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of various notification processes (FIG. 128: S43205).

In step S43701, it is determined whether or not a door open command has been received. If it is determined in step S43701 that the door open command has been received (step S43701: YES), the process advances to step S43702 to turn on the sound/light side door open flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S43703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43701 that the door open command has not been received (step S43701: NO), the process proceeds to step S43703 without executing step S43702.

In step S43703, it is determined whether or not a door closing command has been received. If it is determined in step S43703 that the door closing command has been received (step S43703: YES), the process advances to step S43704 to turn off the sound/light side door open flag. After that, the process advances to step S43705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43703 that the door closing command has not been received (step S43703: NO), the process proceeds to step S43705 without executing step S43704.

In step S43705, it is determined whether or not the door open notification flag is ON. The door open notification flag is a flag for determining whether or not the door open notification process is being executed. If it is determined in step S43705 that the door open notification flag is not ON (step S43705: NO), the process advances to step S43706 to determine whether or not the sound/light side door open flag is ON. When it is determined in step S43706 that the sound/light side door open flag is ON (step S43706: YES), the process proceeds to step S43707 to determine whether or not the priority notification flag is ON. If it is determined in step S43707 that the priority notification flag is not ON (step S43707: NO), the process proceeds to step S43708 to start door open notification processing. After that, the process advances to step S43709 to turn on the door opening notification flag. After that, the main door opening notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S43706 that the sound/light side door open flag is not ON (step S43706: NO), and if it is determined in step S43707 that the priority notification flag is ON (step S43707 : YES), without executing steps S43708 and S43709, the main door opening notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S43705 that the door open notification flag is ON (step S43705: YES), the process advances to step S43710 to determine whether or not the sound/light side door open flag is ON. If it is determined in step S43710 that the sound/light side door open flag is not ON (step S43710: NO), the process advances to step S43711 to end the door open notification process. After that, the process advances to step S43712 to turn off the door open notification flag. After that, the main door opening notification process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S43710 that the sound/light side door open flag is ON (step S43710: NO), the main door open notification process is terminated without executing steps S43711 and S43712.

According to this aspect described above, the excellent effects described below can be obtained.

According to this aspect, when the setting change mode is executed, the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 is executed for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this aspect), so that the administrator can change the setting in the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user did not notice that the mode was executed.

Temporarily, unlike this aspect, the case where the structure which performs alerting|reporting only during the period when setting change mode is performed is employ|adopted is demonstrated. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the setting change mode is started to quickly change the setting information, and then the setting change mode is quickly terminated, the notification period can be shortened, and the setting information can be changed without being noticed by the administrator. There is a problem that it becomes possible to make illegal changes.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an unauthorized person quickly terminates the setting change mode, the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 continues for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this aspect). , the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 by the RAM clear notification processing B1 or B2 over the predetermined period. Therefore, according to this aspect, unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person can be suppressed. The length of the predetermined period for executing the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 is not limited to 30 seconds, and may be set to another length. For example, the length of the predetermined period during which the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 is executed may be set to 40 seconds.

Further, according to this aspect, when the setting change mode is executed, a predetermined notification process (in this aspect, the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2) is performed for a predetermined period after the setting change mode ends (in this aspect, 30 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case where a configuration in which a predetermined notification process is executed for a predetermined period after the setting change mode is started will be described. In this configuration, for example, if the setting change mode is executed for a period longer than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification process ends while the setting change mode is being executed. If the setting change mode ends in a period shorter than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification process continues even after the setting change mode ends. That is, the predetermined notification process ends or continues without being linked with the end timing of the setting change mode, which may confuse the administrator.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, since the predetermined notification process is executed for a predetermined period after the setting change mode ends, the predetermined notification process is not linked with the end timing of the setting change mode. never ends or continues. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the administrator does not notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding confusing the administrator.

Further, according to this aspect, since the setting change mode in-execution notification process is executed while the setting change mode is being executed, the administrator can notify the setting change mode that the setting change mode is being executed by an unauthorized person. It becomes possible to notice even during execution.

Further, according to this aspect, when the setting confirmation mode is executed, the notification process after the setting confirmation mode is completed is executed for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this aspect), so that the administrator can use the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user did not notice that the setting confirmation mode was executed.

Temporarily, unlike this aspect, the case where the structure which performs alerting|reporting only during the period when setting confirmation mode is performed is employ|adopted is demonstrated. In this configuration, for example, when an unauthorized person tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or surrounding players, the setting confirmation mode is started to quickly check the setting information, and then, If the setting confirmation mode is ended quickly, the notification period can be shortened, and there is a problem that the setting information can be checked illegally without being noticed by the administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an unauthorized person quickly ends the setting confirmation mode, the notification processing after the setting confirmation mode is finished continues for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this aspect). , the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 by the notification processing after the setting confirmation mode ends over the predetermined period. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person. It should be noted that the length of the predetermined period during which the notification process is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode is not limited to 30 seconds, and may be set to another length. For example, the length of the predetermined period for executing the notification process after the setting confirmation mode ends may be set to 40 seconds.

Further, according to this aspect, when the setting confirmation mode is executed, the predetermined notification processing (in this aspect, the notification processing after the setting confirmation mode is finished) is performed for a predetermined period after the setting confirmation mode is finished (in this aspect, 30 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined notification process is executed over a predetermined period after the setting confirmation mode is started. In this configuration, for example, if the setting confirmation mode is executed for a period longer than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification process ends during the execution of the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode ends in a period shorter than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification process continues even after the setting confirmation mode ends. That is, the predetermined notification process ends or continues without being linked with the end timing of the setting confirmation mode, which may confuse the administrator.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, since the predetermined notification process is executed for a predetermined period after the setting confirmation mode ends, the predetermined notification process is not linked with the end timing of the setting confirmation mode. never ends or continues. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the administrator does not notice that the setting confirmation mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding confusing the administrator.

Further, according to this aspect, since the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process is executed while the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the administrator can confirm that the setting confirmation mode is being executed by an unauthorized person. It becomes possible to notice even during execution.

Further, according to this aspect, the setting change mode in-execution notification process and the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2, which are notification processes executed when the setting change mode is executed, are performed on the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14. Priority is given to the door open notification process executed when at least one of them is in the open state. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this mode, the case where the door open notification process is given priority over the setting change mode in-execution notification process and the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 will be described. In this configuration, for example, when an unauthorized person tries to change the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or surrounding players, at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened to open the door. If the open notification process is executed, even if the setting change mode is executed, the door open notification process is given priority over the setting change mode execution notification process and the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2. There is a problem that setting information can be illegally changed without being noticed.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an unauthorized person opens at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, the setting change mode in-execution notification process and the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 will not open the door. Since it takes precedence over the notification process, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, according to this aspect, unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person can be suppressed.

Specifically, in this aspect, when the setting change mode in-execution notification process or the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 is being executed, at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The door open notification process is not executed even if the door is open. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 concerned.

It should be noted that another configuration may be adopted as a configuration for giving priority to the setting change mode in-execution notification process and the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 over the door open notification process. For example, when the setting change mode in-execution notification process or the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 is being executed and at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is in an open state, the door The volume of the opening notification process may be made smaller than when the setting change mode in-execution notification process or the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 is not executed. According to such a configuration, the administrator or the like is made aware that at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and the setting change mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be brought to your attention.

Further, according to this aspect, the notification process during execution of the setting confirmation mode and the notification process after the completion of the setting confirmation mode, which are notification processes that are executed when the setting confirmation mode is executed, are performed on the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 Priority is given to the door open notification process executed when at least one of them is in the open state. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this mode, the case where the door open notification process is prioritized over the notification process during execution of the setting confirmation mode and the notification process after the setting confirmation mode is completed will be described. In this configuration, for example, when an unauthorized person tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or surrounding players, at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened to open the door. If the door open notification process is executed, even if the setting confirmation mode is executed, the door open notification process is given priority over the notification process during execution of the setting confirmation mode and the notification process after the end of the setting confirmation mode. There is a problem that setting information can be checked illegally without being noticed.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an unauthorized person opens at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, the informing process during execution of the setting confirmation mode and the informing process after the setting confirmation mode is completed will not open the door. Since it is given priority over the notification process, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

Specifically, in this aspect, when the notification process during execution of the setting confirmation mode or the notification process after the completion of the setting confirmation mode is being executed, at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The door open notification process is not executed even if the door is open. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 concerned.

It should be noted that other configurations may be adopted as a configuration for giving priority to the notification processing during execution of the setting confirmation mode and the notification processing after the completion of the setting confirmation mode over the door open notification processing. For example, when the notification process during execution of the setting confirmation mode or the notification process after the completion of the setting confirmation mode is being executed and at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is in an open state, the door The volume of the opening notification process may be set to be lower than when the notification process during execution of the setting confirmation mode or the notification process after the completion of the setting confirmation mode is not executed. According to such a configuration, the administrator or the like is made aware that at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and the setting confirmation mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10. can be brought to your attention.

Further, according to this aspect, the setting change mode in-execution notification process is executed during the period during which the setting change mode is being executed, and after the setting change mode ends, the notification mode is different from the notification mode of the setting change mode in-execution notification process. A certain RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 is executed. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present mode, the notification mode of the setting change mode in-execution notification process executed during the execution of the setting change mode, and the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 executed after the setting change mode is completed. A case in which a configuration having the same notification mode is adopted will be described. In the case of adopting this configuration, for example, when the manager of the game hall instructs the worker to change the setting information of the pachinko machine 10 before the opening of the game hall, the worker In the working pachinko machine 10, the manager determines whether the setting change mode is being executed or whether the setting change mode has already ended through the setting change mode in-execution notification process and the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2. cannot be grasped from the notification mode. Therefore, there is a problem that the manager cannot promptly give the next instruction to the worker.

In contrast, according to this aspect, the setting change mode in-execution notification process is executed during the period during which the setting change mode is being executed, and after the setting change mode ends, the notification mode is different from the setting change mode in-execution notification process. Since the RAM clearing notification process B1 or B2, which is the notification mode, is executed, the manager can perform the notification mode of the notification executed by the pachinko machine 10 even if the worker's work process for the pachinko machine 10 is not confirmed up close. By grasping , it is possible to grasp whether the setting change mode is being executed or whether the setting change mode has already ended. Therefore, the manager can promptly give the next instruction to the worker.

Further, according to this aspect, the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process is executed during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being executed, and after the setting confirmation mode is completed, the notification process is performed in a notification manner different from the notification manner of the setting confirmation mode execution notification process. After a certain setting confirmation mode is finished, notification processing is executed. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present mode, there are a notification mode of the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process which is executed during the period during which the setting confirmation mode is being executed, and a notification process after the setting confirmation mode is finished which is executed after the setting confirmation mode is finished. A case in which a configuration having the same notification mode is adopted will be described. In the case of adopting this configuration, for example, when the administrator of the game hall instructs the worker to confirm the setting information of the pachinko machine 10 before the opening of the game hall, the worker In the working pachinko machine 10, whether the setting confirmation mode is being executed or whether the setting confirmation mode has already ended, the manager performs notification processing during execution of the setting confirmation mode and notification processing after the end of the setting confirmation mode. cannot be grasped from the notification mode. Therefore, there is a problem that the manager cannot promptly give the next instruction to the worker.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process is executed during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being executed, and after the setting confirmation mode ends, the notification form of the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process is different. Since the notification processing is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode, which is the notification mode, the administrator does not have to confirm the work process of the worker for the pachinko machine 10 at close range, but the notification mode of the notification executed by the pachinko machine 10. By grasping , it is possible to grasp whether the setting confirmation mode is being executed or whether the setting confirmation mode has already ended. Therefore, the manager can promptly give the next instruction to the worker.

Further, according to this aspect, when the RAM clearing process is not triggered by the end of the setting change mode but is triggered by a predetermined operation for executing the RAM clearing process, the RAM clearing notification process A to run. On the other hand, when the RAM clearing process is executed with the termination of the setting change mode as a trigger, the RAM clearing notification process B1 or B2, which is a notification mode different from the RAM clearing notification process A, is executed. Therefore, even if the administrator does not grasp what kind of operation has been performed on the pachinko machine 10, by grasping the notification mode of the RAM clear notification processing in the pachinko machine 10, the RAM clear processing can be performed. It is possible to grasp whether the execution was triggered by a predetermined operation or by the termination of the setting change mode.

Specifically, for example, before the opening of the game hall, the manager instructed the worker to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute RAM clear processing, but did not instruct to change the setting information. In such a case, whether or not the worker is performing work different from the instruction of the manager is confirmed by the reporting mode of the RAM clearing reporting process, even if the worker's work is not monitored in front of the eyes. be able to.

Further, according to this aspect, when the setting information is not changed in the setting change mode, the RAM clear notification process B1 is executed. On the other hand, when the setting information is changed in the setting change mode, a RAM clearing notification process B2 having a notification mode different from that of the RAM clearing notification process B1 is executed. Therefore, even if the administrator does not grasp what kind of operation is performed in the setting change mode, the administrator can grasp the notification mode of the RAM clear notification process in the pachinko machine 10, and the setting information in the pachinko machine 10. has been changed.

Specifically, for example, before the opening of the game hall, when the manager of the game hall instructs the operator to change the setting information of the pachinko machine 10, the worker is instructed by the administrator Whether or not a different work is being performed can be confirmed by the notification mode of the RAM clear notification process. Also, even when the administrator himself/herself changes the setting information in the setting change mode, he/she can confirm whether or not his/her work has been performed correctly by confirming the notification mode of the RAM clear notification process. .

Further, according to this aspect, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the RAM clear command and does not receive the setting change mode end command A or B before receiving the RAM clear command, RAM clear notification processing A is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear command is received, if the setting change mode end command A or B is received before the RAM clear command is received, the RAM clear which is a notification mode different from the RAM clear notification process A is executed. A notification process B1 or B2 is executed. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the RAM clear command cannot be transmitted with different instruction contents included, it is possible to execute the RAM clear notification process triggered by the RAM clear command in a different notification mode.

Specifically, as shown in this aspect, in the configuration in which the RAM clear command is transmitted after executing the RAM clear processing for erasing the information stored in the main RAM 64, setting before executing the RAM clear processing The RAM clear command cannot be sent including the content of whether or not the change mode has been executed. Therefore, the audio emission control device 90 that has received the RAM clear command cannot execute the RAM clear notification process in a notification mode corresponding to whether or not the setting change mode has been executed before the RAM clear process is executed. was there.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, when the setting change mode is executed before the execution of the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode end command A or B is transmitted (step S40218 or step S40219 in FIG. 123), and the RAM After executing the clear process, a RAM clear command is transmitted (step S40221 in FIG. 123). On the other hand, if the setting change mode is not executed before the RAM clear processing is executed, the RAM clear command is transmitted after the RAM clear processing is executed without transmitting the setting change mode end command A or B (Fig. 122 step S40121). Therefore, it is possible to execute the RAM clear notification process in a notification mode corresponding to whether or not the setting change mode is executed before the RAM clear process is executed.

Further, according to this aspect, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the RAM clear command, if the setting change mode end command A is received before receiving the RAM clear command, the RAM clear notification is given. Execute process B1. On the other hand, when the RAM clear command is received, if the setting change mode end command B is received before the RAM clear command is received, the RAM is notified in a different notification manner from the RAM clear notification processing B1. A clear notification process B2 is executed. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the RAM clear command cannot be transmitted with different instruction contents included, it is possible to execute the RAM clear notification process triggered by the RAM clear command in a different notification mode.

Specifically, as shown in this aspect, in the configuration in which the RAM clear command is transmitted after executing the RAM clear processing for erasing the information stored in the main RAM 64, at the time before the execution of the RAM clear processing , the RAM clear command cannot be transmitted including instruction contents corresponding to the information stored in the main side RAM 64 (in this mode, the state of the setting changed flag indicating whether or not the setting information has been changed). Therefore, the sound emission control device 90 that has received the RAM clear command cannot execute the RAM clear notification process in a notification mode corresponding to the information stored in the main side RAM 64 at the time before the execution of the RAM clear process. I had a problem.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, either the setting change mode end command A or the setting change mode end command B is transmitted based on the state of the setting changed flag, which is the information stored in the main RAM 64. After executing the RAM clearing process, the RAM clearing command is transmitted. It becomes possible to execute the RAM clear notification process in the notification mode.

Further, according to this aspect, the sound emission control device 90 executes the notification when the RAM clear command is received, but executes the notification when the setting change mode end command A or B is received. do not. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which notification is also performed when the sound emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command A or B as a trigger. When this configuration is adopted, the sound emission control device 90 receives the RAM clear command during execution of the notification triggered by the reception of the setting change mode end command A or B. Then, the sound emission control device 90 adopts a configuration in which the notification triggered by the reception of the setting change mode end command A or B and the notification triggered by the reception of the RAM clear command are performed in duplicate. Alternatively, a configuration is adopted in which the notification triggered by the reception of the setting change mode end command A or B is terminated along with the start of the notification triggered by the reception of the RAM clear command. .

However, if a configuration is adopted in which the notification triggered by the reception of the setting change mode end command A or B and the notification triggered by the reception of the RAM clear command are performed in duplicate, the administrator may There is a problem that the content of any notification cannot be recognized. Further, when adopting a configuration in which the notification triggered by the reception of the setting change mode end command A or B is terminated along with the start of the notification triggered by the reception of the RAM clear command, the setting change The notification triggered by the reception of the mode end command A or B (for example, the notification of the end of the setting change mode) ends in a short period of time, and the administrator receives the setting change mode end command A or B. There is a problem that the user cannot notice the notification triggered by the setting change mode and cannot recognize that the setting change mode has ended.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the sound emission control device 90 executes the notification when the RAM clear command is received, but is not triggered when the setting change mode end command A or B is received. Since the notification is not executed, the notification triggered by the reception of the setting change mode end command A or B and the notification triggered by the reception of the RAM clear command are redundantly executed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the content of the notification cannot be recognized.

Then, according to the configuration of this aspect, by executing the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 which is a notification triggered by the reception of the RAM clear command, in addition to the end of the RAM clear process, the setting change is performed. Since the end of the mode is notified, the administrator can certainly recognize that the setting change mode has ended in addition to the end of the RAM clear processing. Therefore, there is no problem even if the notification triggered by the reception of the setting change mode end command A or B is not executed. (For example, the notification that the setting change mode has ended) ends in a short period of time, and the administrator cannot notice the notification triggered by the reception of the setting change mode end command A or B. It is also possible to solve the problem of not being able to recognize that the change mode has ended.

Further, according to this aspect, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the RAM clear command and does not receive the setting change mode end command A or B before receiving the RAM clear command, RAM clear notification processing A is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear command is received, if the setting change mode end command A or B is received before the RAM clear command is received, a notification mode different from the notification mode of the RAM clear notification process A is used. Since a certain RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 is executed, the setting change mode end command A or B is received by the administrator who has recognized the RAM clear notification process before the audio light emission control device 90 receives the RAM clear command. It is possible to grasp whether or not it was done. Specifically, it becomes possible for the administrator who recognizes the RAM clearing notification process to grasp whether or not the setting change mode has been executed before the RAM clearing process.

In this mode, the door monitoring process (step S40414) is not executed until the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125) is started in the main controller 60. Therefore, during execution of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The door monitoring process is not executed, and as a result, the setting change mode in-execution notification process and the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process are given priority over the door open notification process. The door monitoring process can be executed even during execution of the confirmation mode, and the setting change mode execution notification process and the setting confirmation mode execution notification process may be prioritized over the door open notification process. Specifically, for example, the signal of the frame opening switch and the door opening switch is configured so that the sound emission control device 90 can also receive it, and after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the setting in the main control device 60 Even during the period when the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to monitor the state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, and the notification process during execution of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation The mode in-execution notification process may be prioritized over the door open notification process.

<Aspect 122>
Among the above aspects, in the configuration in which a predetermined notification process (RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 in the above aspect 121) is executed after the setting change mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 to the pachinko machine 10 during execution of the predetermined notification process A configuration may be adopted in which predetermined notification processing is executed when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted when the power supply is interrupted. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this mode, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted during execution of the predetermined notification process, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted. A case of adopting a configuration that does not execute the predetermined notification process when the In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. Then, after executing the setting change mode to change the setting information and ending the setting change mode, if the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, The predetermined notification process can be ended, and the setting information can be illegally changed without the administrator or the like noticing. After that, if the power supply switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again to start supplying power to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine whose setting information has been illegally changed without being noticed by the administrator or the like. There is a problem that an unauthorized person can play a game on the machine 10 .

On the other hand, according to this aspect, after the unauthorized person terminates the setting change mode, the power supply switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and the predetermined notification process is performed. is terminated, if a game is to be played on the pachinko machine 10 and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to restart the power supply to the pachinko machine 10, the predetermined notification process will be performed. will be executed. Therefore, the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 by the predetermined notification process. As a result, according to this aspect, it is possible to suppress illegal changes in the setting information by an illegal person and playing games on the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting information has been illegally changed.

In addition, as a specific configuration for realizing this aspect, for example, a predetermined flag is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sound and light side RAM 94, and the sound and light side RAM 94 stops the power supply to the pachinko machine 10. The configuration is such that it is possible to maintain the state of the predetermined flag even in the lowered state. Then, the predetermined flag is turned ON when the predetermined notification process is started, and the predetermined flag is turned OFF when the predetermined notification process ends. Then, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off during execution of the predetermined notification process and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the predetermined information stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 The flag remains ON. Then, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted, the sound emission control device 90 receives the normal startup command from the main controller 60 even if the setting change mode is not executed. (Step S40111 in FIG. 122) is received, when it is determined that the predetermined flag is ON when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, predetermined notification processing is configured to execute With such a configuration, this aspect can be realized without complicating the processing in main controller 60 .

<Aspect 123>
Among the above aspects, in the configuration for executing a predetermined notification process after the setting confirmation mode is finished (the notification process after the setting confirmation mode is finished in the above aspect 121), the pachinko machine 10 is operated during execution of the predetermined notification process. A configuration may be adopted in which predetermined notification processing is executed when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted when the power supply is interrupted. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this mode, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted during execution of the predetermined notification process, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted. A case of adopting a configuration that does not execute the predetermined notification process when the In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. Then, after the setting confirmation mode is executed to confirm the setting information and the setting confirmation mode is ended, if the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, The predetermined notification process can be ended, and the setting information can be checked illegally without being noticed by the administrator or the like. After that, if the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again to start supplying power to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine whose setting information has been illegally confirmed without being noticed by an administrator or the like. There is a problem that an unauthorized person can play a game on the machine 10 .

On the other hand, according to this aspect, after an unauthorized person terminates the setting confirmation mode, the power supply switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off to carry out predetermined notification processing. is terminated, if a game is to be played on the pachinko machine 10 and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to restart the power supply to the pachinko machine 10, the predetermined notification process will be performed. will be executed. Therefore, the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 by the predetermined notification process. As a result, according to this aspect, it is possible to prevent illegal confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person and playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 for which the setting information has been illegally confirmed.

In addition, as a specific configuration for realizing this aspect, for example, a predetermined flag is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sound and light side RAM 94, and the sound and light side RAM 94 stops the power supply to the pachinko machine 10. The configuration is such that it is possible to maintain the state of the predetermined flag even in the lowered state. Then, the predetermined flag is turned ON when the predetermined notification process is started, and the predetermined flag is turned OFF when the predetermined notification process ends. Then, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off during execution of the predetermined notification process and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the predetermined information stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 The flag remains ON. Then, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted, the audio light emission control device 90 receives the normal startup command from the main controller 60 even if the setting confirmation mode is not executed. (Step S40111 in FIG. 122) is received, when it is determined that the predetermined flag is ON when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, predetermined notification processing is configured to execute With such a configuration, this aspect can be realized without complicating the processing in main controller 60 .

<Aspect 124>
Among the above aspects, in the configuration for executing a predetermined notification process when the setting change mode is executed (in the above aspect 121, the notification process during execution of the setting change mode, the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2), the predetermined notification process may be given priority over the effect executed with the variation of the symbol in the special figure unit 37 as a trigger. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case will be described in which the effect executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is given priority over the predetermined notification process. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, for example, if a game ball is entered into the first starting port 33 to start the variation of the pattern and an effect is executed, even if the setting change mode is executed, the effect is prioritized over the predetermined notification process. There is a problem that the setting information can be illegally changed without the administrator or the like noticing.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an unauthorized person enters the game ball into the first starting port 33 to start the pattern variation, the predetermined notification process takes precedence over the effect. , the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Therefore, according to this aspect, unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person can be suppressed.

Specifically, in this aspect, when the predetermined notification process is being executed, the effect is not executed even if the special figure unit 37 is changing the pattern. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the machine 10 .

It should be noted that other configurations may be adopted as a configuration for giving priority to predetermined notification processing (setting change mode in-execution notification processing and RAM clear notification processing B1 or B2) over rendering. For example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed, even if the pattern in the special figure unit 37 is fluctuating, a configuration that does not output a specific sound as part of the effect (as part of the effect image may be displayed). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 . Further, as another configuration, for example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed and the pattern in the special figure unit 37 is fluctuating, the volume of the specific sound as part of the effect is It may be configured to be smaller than when the predetermined notification process is not executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the administrator or the like aware that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 while making the administrator aware that the special figure unit 37 has changed the symbols.

In addition, in a configuration in which the symbol variation in the special figure unit 37 is not executed (the winning lottery is not executed) during execution of the setting change mode, the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 executed after the setting change mode is completed is A configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to performance.

<Aspect 125>
Among the above aspects, in the configuration for executing a predetermined notification process when the setting confirmation mode is executed (in the above aspect 121, the notification process during execution of the setting confirmation mode and the notification process after the setting confirmation mode is completed), the predetermined notification process may be given priority over the effect executed with the variation of the symbol in the special figure unit 37 as a trigger. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case will be described in which the effect executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is given priority over the predetermined notification process. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, for example, if a game ball is entered into the first starting port 33 to start the variation of the pattern and an effect is executed, even if the setting confirmation mode is executed, the effect is prioritized over the predetermined notification process. Therefore, there is a problem that the setting information can be checked illegally without being noticed by the administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an unauthorized person enters the game ball into the ball entry means to start the pattern variation, the predetermined notification process has priority over the effect, so management is performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the person or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

Specifically, in this aspect, when the predetermined notification process is being executed, the effect is not executed even if the special figure unit 37 is changing the pattern. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the machine 10 .

It should be noted that other configurations may be employed as a configuration for giving priority to predetermined notification processing (notification processing during execution of the setting confirmation mode and notification processing after the setting confirmation mode is completed) over rendering. For example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed, even if the pattern in the special figure unit 37 is fluctuating, a configuration that does not output a specific sound as part of the effect (as part of the effect image may be displayed). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 . Further, as another configuration, for example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed and the pattern in the special figure unit 37 is fluctuating, the volume of the specific sound as part of the effect is It may be configured to be smaller than when the predetermined notification process is not executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the manager or the like aware that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 while making the administrator notice that the symbols in the special figure unit 37 are changing.

In addition, in the configuration where the pattern variation in the special figure unit 37 is not executed (the winning lottery is not executed) during execution of the setting confirmation mode, the notification process after the setting confirmation mode is completed, which is executed after the setting confirmation mode is completed. A configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to performance.

<Aspect 126>
Among the above aspects, when the setting change mode is executed, a predetermined notification process (in the above aspect 121, the notification process during execution of the setting change mode, the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2) is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the bottom tray full notification process is executed when the number of stored game balls reaches a predetermined amount or more, and the predetermined notification process is prioritized over the bottom tray full notification process. In the lower tray full notification process, for example, a voice such as "The lower tray is full. Please remove the balls" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46, and the display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays "The lower tray is full. Please remove the balls." This is a process of displaying a character string such as "Please remove it" in red characters on the top layer.

The reason for adopting the configuration in which the predetermined notification process is prioritized over the lower tray full notification process will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case will be described in which a lower tray full notification process is prioritized over a predetermined notification process. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, for example, if game balls are accumulated in the lower tray 21 to a predetermined amount or more and the lower tray full notification process is executed, even if the setting change mode is executed, the lower tray fullness will be faster than the predetermined notification process. There is a problem that the notification process is given priority, and the setting information can be illegally changed without being noticed by the administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an illegal person accumulates game balls in the lower tray 21 to a predetermined amount or more, the predetermined notification process is given priority over the lower tray full notification process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, according to this aspect, unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person can be suppressed.

Specifically, in this aspect, when a predetermined notification process is being executed, the lower tray full notification process is executed even when the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 21 exceeds a predetermined amount. Since it is not allowed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that other configurations may be adopted as a configuration for giving priority to predetermined notification processing (setting change mode in-execution notification processing and RAM clear notification processing B1 or B2) over lower tray full notification processing. For example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed, even if the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 21 exceeds a predetermined amount, a specific notification is performed as part of the lower tray full notification process. A configuration that does not output a sound (for example, a voice such as "The lower tray is full. Please remove the balls") (a character string as part of the lower tray full notification process (for example, ”) may be configured to be displayed on the pattern display device 41). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 . Further, as another configuration, for example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed and the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 21 exceeds a predetermined amount, one part of the lower tray full notification process is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the volume of a specific notification sound as a part is made smaller than when the predetermined notification process is not executed. According to this configuration, the manager or the like is made aware that the game balls stored in the lower tray 21 are equal to or larger than a predetermined amount, and that the setting change mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加be able to.

In addition, in a configuration in which it is not monitored whether or not the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount during execution of the setting change mode, RAM clear notification processing is executed after the setting change mode ends. B1 or B2 may be configured to have priority over the bottom tray full notification process.

<Aspect 127>
Among the above aspects, in the configuration for executing a predetermined notification process when the setting confirmation mode is executed (in the above aspect 121, the notification process during execution of the setting confirmation mode, the notification process after the setting confirmation mode is completed), the lower tray 21 A configuration may be adopted in which the bottom tray full notification process is executed when the number of stored game balls reaches a predetermined amount or more, and the predetermined notification process is prioritized over the bottom tray full notification process. In the lower tray full notification process, for example, a voice such as "The lower tray is full. Please remove the balls" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46, and the display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays "The lower tray is full. Please remove the balls." This is a process of displaying a character string such as "Please remove it" in red characters on the top layer.

The reason for adopting the configuration in which the predetermined notification process is prioritized over the lower tray full notification process will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case will be described in which a lower tray full notification process is prioritized over a predetermined notification process. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, for example, if game balls are stored in the lower tray 21 to a predetermined amount or more and the lower tray full notification process is executed, even if the setting confirmation mode is executed, the lower tray fullness will be faster than the predetermined notification process. There is a problem that the notification process is prioritized, and the setting information can be checked illegally without being noticed by the administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an illegal person accumulates game balls in the lower tray 21 to a predetermined amount or more, the predetermined notification process is given priority over the lower tray full notification process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

Specifically, in this aspect, when a predetermined notification process is being executed, the lower tray full notification process is executed even when the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 21 exceeds a predetermined amount. Since it is not allowed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that other configurations may be adopted as a configuration for giving priority to predetermined notification processing (notification processing during execution of setting confirmation mode or after completion of setting confirmation mode) over lower tray full notification processing. For example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed, even if the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 21 exceeds a predetermined amount, a specific notification is performed as part of the lower tray full notification process. A configuration that does not output a sound (for example, a voice such as "The lower tray is full. Please remove the balls") (a character string as part of the lower tray full notification process (for example, ”) may be configured to be displayed on the pattern display device 41). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 . Further, as another configuration, for example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed and the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 21 exceeds a predetermined amount, one part of the lower tray full notification process is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the volume of a specific notification sound as a part is made smaller than when the predetermined notification process is not executed. According to this configuration, the administrator or the like is made aware that the game balls stored in the lower tray 21 are equal to or larger than a predetermined amount, and that the setting confirmation mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加be able to.

In addition, in a configuration in which it is not monitored whether or not the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount during execution of the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation mode is terminated after the setting confirmation mode is terminated. The post notification process may be configured to have priority over the lower tray full notification process.

<Aspect 128>
Among the above modes, when the setting change mode is executed, a predetermined notification process (in the above mode 121, the notification process during execution of the setting change mode, the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2) is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the firing mode suggestion notification process is executed when the mode is not the predetermined firing mode, and the predetermined notification process is prioritized over the firing mode suggestion notification process. The shooting mode suggestion notification process is a notification process for suggesting that the game ball should be shot in a predetermined shooting mode.

The left-handed throw suggestion notification process is executed to suggest that the player should make a "left-handed" when the player is making a so-called "right-handed" in a game state in which the so-called "left-handed" should be made. For example, the speaker 46 alternately and repeatedly outputs a voice saying "Please hit left" and a warning sound, and the characters "Please hit left" are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. This is a process to display columns in red characters on the top layer. In addition, "left-handed hitting" is a shooting mode in which a game ball is distributed to the left-hand side game area of the game board 30, and "right-handed hitting" is the right side of the game area of the game board 30. It is a shooting mode in which game balls are distributed in the game area.

The right-handing suggestion notification process is executed to suggest that a "right-hander" should be played when the player is making a "left-hander" in a game state in which a "right-hander" should be played. For example, the speaker 46 alternately and repeatedly outputs a voice saying "Please hit to the right" and a warning sound, and a character string "Please hit to the right" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. This is a process to display in red characters on the top layer.

The reason for adopting the configuration in which the predetermined notification processing (setting change mode execution notification processing, RAM clear notification processing B1 or B2) is prioritized over the firing mode suggestion notification processing will be described.

First, unlike the present mode, a case in which a configuration in which the firing mode suggestion notification process is prioritized over the predetermined notification process will be described. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the game ball is shot in a shooting mode that is not the predetermined shooting mode and the shooting mode suggestion notification process is executed, even if the setting change mode is executed, the shooting mode suggestion notification process is faster than the predetermined notification process. There is a problem that setting information can be illegally changed without being noticed by an administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an unauthorized person shoots a game ball in a shooting mode that is not the predetermined shooting mode, the predetermined notification process takes precedence over the shooting mode suggestion notification process. It is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, according to this aspect, unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person can be suppressed.

Specifically, in this aspect, when the predetermined notification process is being executed, the firing mode suggestion notification process is not executed even when the game ball is shot in a firing mode other than the predetermined firing mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that other configurations may be adopted as a configuration for giving priority to predetermined notification processing (setting change mode execution notification processing or RAM clear notification processing B1 or B2) over firing mode suggestion notification processing. For example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed, even if the game ball is shot in a shooting mode that is not the predetermined shooting mode, a specific notification sound as part of the shooting mode suggestion notification process (For example, a sound or warning sound such as "Please hit left") is not output (a character string as part of the firing mode suggestion notification process (for example, a character string such as "Please hit left") is displayed in a pattern may be configured to be displayed on the device 41). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 . Further, as another configuration, for example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed and the game ball is shot in a shooting mode other than the predetermined shooting mode, part of the shooting mode suggestion notification process The volume of the specific notification sound may be made smaller than when the predetermined notification process is not executed. According to this configuration, the manager or the like can be made aware that the game ball is being shot in a shooting mode that is not a predetermined shooting mode, and that the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, in a configuration in which it is not monitored whether or not the shooting mode of the game ball is in a predetermined shooting mode during execution of the setting change mode, the RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 executed after the setting change mode ends is A configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to the firing mode suggestion notification process.

Also, various methods can be adopted as a method of determining whether or not the shooting mode of the game ball is a predetermined shooting mode. For example, as a method of determining whether or not the player is performing "left-handed" in a game state in which "left-handed" is to be performed, a predetermined ball entry section provided in the right game area is It can be determined by whether or not the game ball has entered, and when the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry portion, it can be determined that the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode. .

<Aspect 129>
Among the above aspects, in the configuration for executing a predetermined notification process when the setting confirmation mode is executed (in the above aspect 121, the notification process during execution of the setting confirmation mode and the notification process after the setting confirmation mode is completed), the game ball is shot. A configuration may be adopted in which the firing mode suggestion notification process is executed when the mode is not the predetermined firing mode, and the predetermined notification process is prioritized over the firing mode suggestion notification process. The shooting mode suggestion notification process is a notification process for suggesting that the game ball should be shot in a predetermined shooting mode.

The left-handed throw suggestion notification process is executed to suggest that the player should make a "left-handed" when the player is making a so-called "right-handed" in a game state in which the so-called "left-handed" should be made. For example, the speaker 46 alternately and repeatedly outputs a voice saying "Please hit left" and a warning sound, and the characters "Please hit left" are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. This is a process to display columns in red characters on the top layer. In addition, "left-handed hitting" is a shooting mode in which a game ball is distributed to the left-hand side game area of the game board 30, and "right-handed hitting" is the right side of the game area of the game board 30. It is a shooting mode in which game balls are distributed in the game area.

The right-handing suggestion notification process is executed to suggest that a "right-hander" should be played when the player is making a "left-hander" in a game state in which a "right-hander" should be played. For example, the speaker 46 alternately and repeatedly outputs a voice saying "Please hit to the right" and a warning sound, and a character string "Please hit to the right" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. This is a process to display in red characters on the top layer.

The reason for adopting the configuration in which the predetermined notification processing (notification processing during execution of the setting confirmation mode, notification processing after the end of the setting confirmation mode) is given priority over the firing mode suggestion notification processing will be described.

First, unlike the present mode, a case in which a configuration in which the firing mode suggestion notification process is prioritized over the predetermined notification process will be described. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. Furthermore, if the game ball is shot in a shooting mode that is not the predetermined shooting mode and the shooting mode suggestion notification process is executed, even if the setting confirmation mode is executed, the shooting mode suggestion notification process is faster than the predetermined notification process. There is a problem that setting information can be illegally confirmed without being noticed by an administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an unauthorized person shoots a game ball in a shooting mode that is not the predetermined shooting mode, the predetermined notification process takes precedence over the shooting mode suggestion notification process. It is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

Specifically, in this aspect, when the predetermined notification process is being executed, the firing mode suggestion notification process is not executed even when the game ball is shot in a firing mode other than the predetermined firing mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that other configurations may be adopted as a configuration for giving priority to predetermined notification processing (setting confirmation mode execution notification processing and RAM clear notification processing B1 or B2) over firing mode suggestion notification processing. For example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed, even if the game ball is shot in a shooting mode that is not the predetermined shooting mode, a specific notification sound as part of the shooting mode suggestion notification process (For example, a sound or warning sound such as "Please hit left") is not output (a character string as part of the firing mode suggestion notification process (for example, a character string such as "Please hit left") is displayed in a pattern may be configured to be displayed on the device 41). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 . Further, as another configuration, for example, when a predetermined notification process is being executed and the game ball is shot in a shooting mode other than the predetermined shooting mode, part of the shooting mode suggestion notification process The volume of the specific notification sound may be made smaller than when the predetermined notification process is not executed. According to this configuration, the administrator or the like can be made aware that the game ball is being shot in a shooting mode that is not a predetermined shooting mode, and that the setting confirmation mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, in a configuration in which it is not monitored whether or not the shooting mode of the game ball is in a predetermined shooting mode during execution of the setting confirmation mode, the post-setting confirmation mode end notification processing executed after the setting confirmation mode ends is A configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to the firing mode suggestion notification process.

Also, various methods can be adopted as a method of determining whether or not the shooting mode of the game ball is a predetermined shooting mode. For example, as a method of determining whether or not the player is performing "left-handed" in a game state in which "left-handed" is to be performed, a predetermined ball entry section provided in the right game area is It can be determined by whether or not the game ball has entered, and when the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry portion, it can be determined that the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode. .

<Aspect 130>
Among the above aspects, when the setting change mode is executed, a predetermined notification process (RAM clear notification process B1 or B2 in the above aspect 121) is executed after the setting change mode is completed. A configuration may be adopted in which the magnetic detection notification process is executed when the detected magnetism satisfies a predetermined condition, and the magnetic detection notification process is prioritized over the predetermined notification process.

In the magnetism detection notification process, for example, a voice such as "magnetism detected" and an alarm sound are alternately and repeatedly output from the speaker 46, and among the various lamps 47, the full-color (RGB) LED lamp is illuminated in red with maximum brightness. The single-color LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off at maximum brightness, and a character string such as "magnetism detected" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in red characters on the top layer. It is a process to display with .

The reason for adopting the configuration in which the magnetism detection notification process is prioritized over the predetermined notification process (RAM clear notification process B1 or B2) will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case where a configuration in which a predetermined notification process is prioritized over a magnetic detection notification process will be described. In this configuration, for example, after the administrator executes the setting change mode, the administrator terminates the setting change mode and leaves the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 executes a predetermined notification process. In this situation, even if an unauthorized person attempts to illegally enter a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the like using a magnet, for example, the predetermined notification process is given priority over the magnetic detection notification process. There is a problem that a game ball can be illegally entered into the first starting port 33 or the like using a magnet without being noticed by a manager or the like.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an attempt is made to illegally enter the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the like using a magnet in a situation where the predetermined notification is being executed, the magnetic detection notification process is given priority over the predetermined notification process, the possibility that the administrator or the like will notice that the magnet has been illegally used in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Therefore, according to this aspect, unauthorized use of the magnet by an unauthorized person can be suppressed.

Specifically, in this aspect, when the magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor satisfies a predetermined condition and the magnetism detection notification process is executed, for example, it is determined that the intensity of the detected magnetism is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, When the magnetism detection notification process is executed, even if the setting change mode is executed, the predetermined notification process is not executed (when the magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor during execution of the predetermined notification process If the condition is satisfied, the predetermined notification process is ended), so that the possibility that the manager or the like can notice that the magnet is illegally used in the gaming machine can be increased.

It should be noted that other configurations may be adopted as the configuration for prioritizing the magnetism detection notification process over the predetermined notification process (RAM clear notification process B1 or B2). For example, when the magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor satisfies a predetermined condition and the magnetism detection notification process is executed, even if the setting change mode is executed, a specific notification sound RAM has been cleared") is not output (a character string as part of the predetermined notification process (for example, a character string such as "Settings have been changed. RAM has been cleared") ) may be configured to be displayed on the pattern display device 41). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like will notice that the magnet has been illegally used in the pachinko machine 10 . Further, as another configuration, for example, when the magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor satisfies a predetermined condition and the magnetism detection notification process is executed, when the setting change mode is executed, a predetermined notification A configuration may be adopted in which the volume of the specific notification sound as part of the process is made lower than when the magnetism detection notification process is not being executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the administrator or the like aware that the pachinko machine 10 has executed the setting change mode and that the magnet has been illegally used in the pachinko machine 10 .

Moreover, the configuration of this aspect is particularly effective in the pachinko machine 10 that does not stop the progress of the game even when the magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor satisfies a predetermined condition.

In addition, in this aspect, during the execution of the setting change mode, the processing for advancing the game (such as ball entry processing for the start opening included in the timer interrupt processing) is not executed. Even if the game ball is illegally entered into the first start port 33 or the like, the game does not progress. Therefore, the setting change mode in-execution notification process executed during execution of the setting change mode is prioritized over the magnetism detection notification process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the administrator or the like aware that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode while suppressing the progress of a game using magnets by an unauthorized person.

<Aspect 131>
Detected by the magnetic sensor in the configuration for executing a predetermined notification process (notification process after termination of the setting confirmation mode in the above-described mode 121) after the termination of the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is executed among the above modes. A configuration may be adopted in which the magnetic detection notification process is executed when the detected magnetism satisfies a predetermined condition, and the magnetic detection notification process is prioritized over the predetermined notification process.

In the magnetism detection notification process, for example, a voice such as "magnetism detected" and an alarm sound are alternately and repeatedly output from the speaker 46, and among the various lamps 47, the full-color (RGB) LED lamp is illuminated in red with maximum luminance. The single-color LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off at maximum brightness, and a character string such as "magnetism detected" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in red characters on the top layer. It is a process to display with .

The reason for adopting the configuration in which the magnetism detection notification process is prioritized over the predetermined notification process (the notification process after the end of the setting confirmation mode) will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case where a configuration in which a predetermined notification process is prioritized over a magnetic detection notification process will be described. In this configuration, for example, after the administrator executes the setting confirmation mode, the administrator terminates the setting confirmation mode and leaves the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 executes a predetermined notification process. In this situation, even if an unauthorized person attempts to illegally enter a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the like using a magnet, for example, the predetermined notification process is given priority over the magnetic detection notification process. There is a problem that a game ball can be illegally entered into the first starting port 33 or the like using a magnet without being noticed by a manager or the like.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if an attempt is made to illegally enter the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the like using a magnet in a situation where the predetermined notification is being executed, the magnetic detection notification process is given priority over the predetermined notification process, the possibility that the administrator or the like will notice that the magnet has been illegally used in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Therefore, according to this aspect, unauthorized use of the magnet by an unauthorized person can be suppressed.

Specifically, in this aspect, when the magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor satisfies a predetermined condition and the magnetism detection notification process is executed, for example, it is determined that the intensity of the detected magnetism is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, When the magnetism detection notification process is executed, even if the setting confirmation mode is executed, the predetermined notification process is not executed (when the magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor during execution of the predetermined notification process If the condition is satisfied, the predetermined notification process is ended), so that the possibility that the manager or the like can notice that the magnet is illegally used in the gaming machine can be increased.

It should be noted that other configurations may be adopted as a configuration for prioritizing the magnetism detection notification process over the predetermined notification process (notification process after the end of the setting confirmation mode). For example, when the magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor satisfies a predetermined condition and the magnetic detection notification process is executed, even if the setting confirmation mode is executed, a specific notification sound (for example, "setting confirmation mode has ended") is not output (a character string as part of a predetermined notification process (for example, a character string such as "The setting confirmation mode has ended") is displayed on the pattern display device 41). good too. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like will notice that the magnet has been illegally used in the pachinko machine 10 . Further, as another configuration, for example, when the magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor satisfies a predetermined condition and the magnetic detection notification process is executed, when the setting confirmation mode is executed, a predetermined notification A configuration may be adopted in which the volume of the specific notification sound as part of the process is made lower than when the magnetism detection notification process is not being executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the administrator or the like aware that the pachinko machine 10 has executed the setting confirmation mode and that the magnet has been illegally used in the pachinko machine 10 .

Moreover, the configuration of this aspect is particularly effective in the pachinko machine 10 that does not stop the progress of the game even when the magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor satisfies a predetermined condition.

In addition, in this aspect, during execution of the setting confirmation mode, the processing for advancing the game (such as ball entry processing for the start opening included in the timer interrupt processing) is not executed. Even if the game ball is illegally entered into the first start port 33 or the like, the game does not progress. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process executed during execution of the setting confirmation mode is prioritized over the magnetism detection notification process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the manager or the like aware that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode while suppressing the progress of a game using magnets by an unauthorized person.

<Aspect 132>
Among the above-described embodiments and each of the above-described aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, when the setting change mode is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started, a different method from when the setting change mode is not executed , and may be configured to determine the effect to be executed. A specific description will be given below.

In this aspect, as described in the above aspect 101, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is started, the above-described normal startup command, RAM abnormality command, RAM clear command, setting change mode start One of the five activation type commands of the command and the setting confirmation mode start command is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving any one of these five activation type commands, the sound emission control device 90 determines how the main controller 60 was activated based on the type of the received activation type command. (what kind of startup process was executed) can be grasped.

Then, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command as the activation type command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a game round or the The effect to be executed during the open/close execution mode is determined. Specifically, for example, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a setting change mode start command as the activation type command, it turns on the sound and light side setting change mode execution flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 94. On the other hand, when a command other than the setting change mode start command is received as the activation type command, the sound and light side setting change mode execution flag remains OFF. This sound and light side setting change mode execution flag is a flag for specifying whether or not main controller 60 has executed the setting change mode in sound emission control device 90 .

Then, the sound emission control device 90 of this aspect determines whether or not the sound and light side setting change mode execution flag is ON when determining the effect to be executed in the game round at the start of the game round. Different performance pattern tables are referred to when the flag is ON and when the flag is OFF, and the performance is determined. Specifically, when the sound and light side setting change mode execution flag is ON, the effect is determined by referring to the effect pattern table for setting change mode execution, while the sound and light side setting change mode execution flag is set. If it is OFF, the normal effect pattern table is referred to determine the effect.

As a result, in this mode, the ratio and frequency of the effect performed differ depending on whether or not the setting change mode is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is started. Specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, the super ready-to-win effect is executed both in the case of a big win and in the case of a loss, but the pachinko machine 10 is started. When the setting change mode is not executed at times, two types of super ready-to-win effects A and B are selected with a probability of 50% each. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started, the super ready-to-win effect A is selected with a probability of 90% from the two types of super ready-to-win effects A and B, and the other is selected. Super reach effect B is selected with a probability of 10%.

Therefore, when the super ready-to-win effect is executed, the player pays attention to the type of the super ready-to-win effect and considers whether or not there is a difference in the appearance rate of the two types of super ready-to-win effects A and B. It is possible to guess whether or not the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 . That is, according to this aspect, when the setting change mode is executed, the effect to be executed is determined by a method different from when the setting change mode is not executed. From the ratio, frequency, etc., it can be inferred whether or not the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 concerned. Then, for example, if the setting change mode is not executed, the game is played with a sense of expectation that the result of today's game will be similar to the result of the previous day's game on the pachinko machine 10. can be provided to

Further, according to this aspect, even when the setting change mode is executed but the setting information is not changed, the same method as when the setting change mode is executed and the setting information is changed is executed. Since the performance is determined, the player can be made to recognize that the setting information has been changed in the pachinko machine 10 even though the setting information has not actually been changed.

In this aspect, even when the setting change mode is executed, if the predetermined effect is executed a predetermined number of times, the effect to be executed is changed in the same manner as when the setting change mode is not executed. It is good also as a structure which determines. Specifically, for example, even if the setting change mode is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started, when the super reach effect A is executed five times, the sound and light side setting change mode execution flag is turned off, and after that, the effect to be executed is determined by the same method as when the setting change mode is not executed. According to such a configuration, after the super ready-to-win effect A has been executed five times, the player can determine whether or not the setting change mode has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the ratio and frequency of the effects to be executed. It becomes impossible to guess Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 before the super ready-to-win effect A is executed five times (for example, from first thing in the morning).

Further, in this aspect, even if the setting change mode is executed, if the pattern is changed and stopped a predetermined number of times, the same method as when the setting change mode is not executed is executed. It may be configured to determine the performance. Specifically, for example, even if the setting change mode is executed at the start of the pachinko machine 10, when the symbol variation and stop (game round) are executed 50 times, the above-described sound and light side The configuration may be such that the setting change mode execution flag is turned OFF, and thereafter the effect to be executed is determined by the same method as when the setting change mode is not executed. According to such a configuration, after the pattern variation and stoppage (game round) are executed 50 times, the player can select the setting change mode in the pachinko machine 10 from the ratio and frequency of the effects to be executed. It becomes impossible to guess whether it was executed or not. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he or she wants to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 before the pattern changes and stops (game rounds) are executed 50 times (for example, from first thing in the morning).

<Aspect 133>
In the aspect 132, there is no distinction between the case where the setting change mode is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started and the setting information is changed, and the case where the setting information is not changed. is configured to determine the effect to be executed by a different method, but instead of this configuration, when the setting change mode is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started and the setting information is changed in the setting change mode Only, the effect to be executed may be determined by a method different from the case where the setting change mode is executed but the setting information is not changed or the setting change mode is not executed. A specific description will be given below.

In this aspect, as shown in FIGS. 122 to 124 of the aspect 121, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 starts, the above-described normal start command, RAM abnormality command, RAM clear command, setting change mode end command A, setting change mode end command B, and setting confirmation mode start command. sent. In particular, as shown in FIG. 123, the setting change mode end command A is transmitted when the setting change mode is executed and the setting information is not changed in the setting change mode. is transmitted when the setting change mode is executed and the setting information is changed in the setting change mode. Upon receiving one of these six activation type commands, the sound emission control device 90 determines how the main controller 60 was activated based on the type of the received activation type command. (what kind of startup process was executed) can be grasped.

Then, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command B as the activation type command, the game is played by a method different from that when a command other than the setting change mode end command B is received as the activation type command. It determines the effect to be executed during the opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, for example, when the sound light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command B as the activation type command, it turns on the sound and light side setting changed flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 94. On the other hand, when a command other than the setting change mode end command B is received as the activation type command, the sound and light side setting changed flag remains OFF. This sound and light side setting changed flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the setting information of the main control device 60 has been changed in the sound emission control device 90 .

Then, the sound emission control device 90 of this aspect determines whether or not the sound and light side setting changed flag is ON when determining the effect to be executed in the game round at the start of the game round. A different performance pattern table is referred to when the is ON and when it is OFF, and the performance is determined. Specifically, when the sound and light side setting changed flag is ON, the effect is determined by referring to the effect pattern table for setting changed, and on the other hand, when the sound and light side setting changed flag is OFF. , the normal effect pattern table is referred to determine the effect.

As a result, in this mode, the ratio and frequency of the performances to be executed are different between when the setting information is changed when the pachinko machine 10 is started and when the setting information is not changed. Specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, the super ready-to-win effect is executed both in the case of a big win and in the case of a loss, but the pachinko machine 10 is started. When the setting information is not changed, two types of super ready-to-win effects A and B are selected with a probability of 50% each. On the other hand, when the setting information is changed when the pachinko machine 10 is activated, the super reach effect A is selected with a probability of 90% from the two types of super reach effects A and B, and the other super reach effect is selected. The ready-to-win effect B is selected with a probability of 10%.

Therefore, when the super ready-to-win effect is executed, the player pays attention to the type of the super ready-to-win effect and considers whether or not there is a difference in the appearance rate of the two types of super ready-to-win effects A and B. It is possible to guess whether or not the setting information has been changed in the pachinko machine 10 . That is, according to this aspect, when the setting information is changed, the effect to be executed is determined by a method different from when the setting information is not changed. From the frequency or the like, it can be inferred whether or not the setting information has been changed in the pachinko machine 10 concerned. Then, for example, if the setting information has not been changed, the player has a sense of expectation that the result of today's game will be similar to the result of the game played on the pachinko machine 10 on the previous day. can be provided to

In this aspect, even if the setting information is changed, if the predetermined effect is executed a predetermined number of times, the effect to be executed is determined by the same method as when the setting information is not changed. may be configured. Specifically, for example, even if the setting information is changed when the pachinko machine 10 is started, when the super reach effect A is executed five times, the sound and light side setting changed flag is turned OFF. After that, the effect to be executed may be determined by the same method as when the setting information is not changed. According to such a configuration, after the super ready-to-win effect A is executed five times, the player can determine whether or not the setting information has been changed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the ratio and frequency of the effect to be executed. cannot be guessed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 before the super ready-to-win effect A is executed five times (for example, from first thing in the morning).

In addition, in this mode, even if the setting information is changed, if the symbols are changed and stopped a predetermined number of times, the effect to be executed is performed in the same manner as when the setting information is not changed. It is good also as a structure which determines. Specifically, for example, even if the setting information is changed at the start of the pachinko machine 10, when the symbol variation and stop (game round) are executed 50 times, the above-described sound and light side setting A configuration may be adopted in which the changed flag is turned OFF, and thereafter the effect to be executed is determined by the same method as when the setting information is not changed. According to such a configuration, after the symbol variation and stoppage (game round) are executed 50 times, the player can change the setting information in the pachinko machine 10 based on the ratio and frequency of the effects to be executed. It becomes impossible to guess whether it was done or not. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he or she wants to play a game on the pachinko machine 10 before the pattern changes and stops (game rounds) are executed 50 times (for example, from first thing in the morning).

<Aspect 134>
In the above embodiment and each of the above aspects, in the configuration where the setting change mode can be executed, when the setting change mode is executed at the start of the pachinko machine 10, the elapsed time from the execution of the previous setting change mode If a predetermined condition is not satisfied, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined notification is executed. As a method for determining the elapsed time from execution of the previous setting change mode to execution of the current setting change mode, various methods can be adopted. date and time information is acquired from the RTC when the setting change mode is executed, and the acquired date and time information is stored as the date and time acquired during the previous execution of the setting change mode. A method of judging the elapsed time by comparing with information, overwriting the date and time information acquired this time over the date and time information stored last time, and a timer capable of measuring the elapsed time even when the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and a setting change mode. , the elapsed time is determined based on the measurement result of the timer that was started when the setting change mode was executed last time, and the timer measurement is restarted.

According to this aspect, when the setting change mode is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started, if the elapsed time from execution of the previous setting change mode does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall notices the presence of the pachinko machine 10 that is executing the predetermined notification in the game hall, so that the elapsed time from the execution of the previous setting change mode to the current execution of the setting change mode. It becomes possible to notice the existence of the pachinko machine 10 that does not satisfy the predetermined condition. In addition, the administrator determines whether or not a predetermined notification is executed in the pachinko machine 10, and the elapsed time from the execution of the previous setting change mode in the pachinko machine 10 to the current execution of the setting change mode satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to grasp whether or not

In this aspect, the predetermined condition may include that the elapsed time from the last execution of the setting change mode to the current execution of the setting change mode is equal to or longer than the first predetermined time. That is, when the elapsed time from execution of the previous setting change mode in the pachinko machine 10 to execution of the current setting change mode is less than the first predetermined time, it may be configured to execute a predetermined notification. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

A case will be described below in which the pachinko machine 10 with the first predetermined time set to 14 hours is operated in a game hall that is open from 10:00 am to 11:00 pm (business hours: 13 hours).

In the game hall, for example, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the administrator causes the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode to change the setting information to a desired value. In general, the setting change mode is executed before the opening of the game hall, and the setting change mode is not executed during business hours.

After that, business is started at 10:00 am, and the players play games at the pachinko machine 10 concerned. After that, the business of the game hall ends at 11:00 pm. Then, at 9:00 am on the next day, the administrator causes the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode to change the setting information to a desired value. In such a case, since the elapsed time from the previous execution of the setting change mode to the current execution of the setting change mode is already 14 hours or more, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the predetermined notification.

Next, a case will be described where the setting change mode is executed by a person who is not an administrator and who has unauthorized intentions (hereafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") during business hours.

First, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the administrator causes the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode to change the setting information to a desired value. After that, business is started at 10:00 am, and the players play games at the pachinko machine 10 concerned. Then, for example, at 3:00 pm during business hours, if an unauthorized person attempts to change the setting information by causing the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode by unauthorized means, the previous setting change mode is executed. Since the elapsed time from the current setting change mode to the execution of the current setting change mode is less than 14 hours, which is the first predetermined time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the predetermined notification. By noticing the presence of the pachinko machine 10 that is executing the predetermined notification in the game hall, the administrator finds that the elapsed time from the execution of the previous setting change mode to the current execution of the setting change mode does not satisfy the predetermined condition. It becomes possible to notice the existence of the pachinko machine 10 that is not there. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the setting information from being changed by an unauthorized person and the game from being played on the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting information has been unauthorizedly changed.

Further, in this aspect, the predetermined condition includes that the elapsed time from the previous execution of the setting change mode to the current execution of the setting change mode is within a second predetermined time shorter than the first predetermined time. good too. That is, when the elapsed time from execution of the previous setting change mode to execution of the current setting change mode in the pachinko machine 10 exceeds the second predetermined time and is less than the first predetermined time, a predetermined notification is performed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In other words, if the elapsed time from execution of the previous setting change mode to execution of the current setting change mode in the pachinko machine 10 is within the second predetermined time, the predetermined notification may not be executed. . The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

A case will be described below in which the pachinko machine 10 with the second predetermined time set to 30 minutes is operated in a game hall that is open from 10:00 am to 11:00 pm (business hours: 13 hours).

In the game hall, for example, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the administrator causes the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode to change the setting information, but the changed setting information is different from the desired value, or the setting information is changed. Elapsed time from execution of the previous setting change mode to current execution of the setting change mode, even if the administrator causes the setting change mode to be executed again, such as when the operation policy of the pachinko machine 10 for the day is changed. If the time is within 30 minutes, which is the second predetermined time, the predetermined notification is not executed. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible for the administrator to change the setting information again before the start of business without executing a predetermined notification. Further, if the second predetermined time is set to be shorter than the time from the time when the manager executes the setting change mode to the opening time of the game hall, the setting change mode is executed after the opening time of the game hall. In this case, a predetermined notification will be made. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information from being changed illegally by an unauthorized person, while allowing the administrator to change the setting information again before the business starts.

Further, in this aspect, when the elapsed time from execution of the previous setting change mode to execution of the current setting change mode does not satisfy a predetermined condition, even if the operation handle 25 is operated, the game ball It is good also as a structure which suppresses (prohibits) the discharge of. According to this configuration, even if the speaker 46 of the pachinko machine 10 is destroyed by an unauthorized person and the notification is not executed, the unauthorized person in the pachinko machine 10 whose setting change mode has been illegally executed. It is possible to suppress the game from being played in the

Further, in this aspect, the configuration may be such that the first predetermined time can be changed. According to this configuration, the manager can appropriately change the first predetermined time period in consideration of the business hours of the game hall and the time period during which the setting change mode is executed.

Moreover, in this aspect, the configuration may be such that the second predetermined time can be changed. According to this configuration, the manager can appropriately change the second predetermined time in consideration of the business hours of the game hall and the time period during which the setting change mode is executed.

<Aspect 135>
In the aspect 134, when the setting change mode is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started, and when the elapsed time from execution of the previous setting change mode does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined notification is executed. However, instead of this configuration, the setting change mode is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started and the setting information is changed, and the elapsed time from the previous change of the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined notification is performed when the device has not been notified. Various methods can be used to determine the elapsed time from the last change of the setting information to the current change of the setting information. and acquires date and time information from the RTC when the setting information is changed (specifically, when the setting information change mode ends with the setting information changed). a method of determining the elapsed time by comparing the acquired date and time information with the date and time information acquired and stored when the setting information was changed last time, and overwriting the previously stored date and time information with the date and time information acquired this time; is provided with a timer capable of measuring the elapsed time even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and when the setting information is changed, the elapsed time is determined by the measurement result of the timer that was started when the setting information was changed last time; A method of restarting measurement by the timer can be employed.

According to this aspect, when the setting information is changed by executing the setting change mode when the pachinko machine 10 is started, if the elapsed time from the change of the previous setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined Since the notification is executed, the manager of the game hall notices the presence of the pachinko machine 10 for which the predetermined notification is executed in the game hall, so that the change from the previous setting information change to the current setting information change is performed. It becomes possible to notice the presence of the pachinko machine 10 whose elapsed time does not satisfy a predetermined condition. In addition, the administrator determines whether the elapsed time from the previous change of the setting information in the pachinko machine 10 to the current change of the setting information in the pachinko machine 10 satisfies a predetermined condition, depending on whether or not the predetermined notification is executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to grasp whether or not

In this aspect, the predetermined condition may include that the elapsed time from the last change of the setting information to the current change of the setting information is equal to or longer than the first predetermined time. That is, when the elapsed time from the previous change of the setting information in the pachinko machine 10 to the current change of the setting information is less than the first predetermined time, the configuration may be such that the predetermined notification is executed. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

A case will be described below in which the pachinko machine 10 with the first predetermined time set to 14 hours is operated in a game hall that is open from 10:00 am to 11:00 pm (business hours: 13 hours).

In the game hall, for example, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the administrator causes the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode to change the setting information to a desired value. In general, the setting information is changed before the opening of business of the game hall, and the setting information is not changed during business hours.

After that, business is started at 10:00 am, and the players play games at the pachinko machine 10 concerned. After that, the business of the game hall ends at 11:00 pm. Then, at 9:00 am on the next day, the administrator causes the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode to change the setting information to a desired value. In such a case, since the elapsed time from the previous change of the setting information to the current change of the setting information is already 14 hours or longer, the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the predetermined notification.

Next, a description will be given of a case in which a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") executes the setting change mode and changes the setting information during business hours.

First, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the administrator causes the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode to change the setting information to a desired value. After that, business is started at 10:00 am, and the players play games at the pachinko machine 10 concerned. For example, at 3:00 pm during business hours, if an unauthorized person changes the setting information by causing the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode by unauthorized means, the previous change of the setting information will be changed to the current setting information. Since the elapsed time until the setting information is changed is less than 14 hours, which is the first predetermined time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the predetermined notification. By noticing the presence of the pachinko machine 10 executing the predetermined notification in the game hall, the administrator finds that the elapsed time from the previous change of the setting information to the current change of the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. It becomes possible to notice the presence of the aircraft 10 . Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the setting information from being changed by an unauthorized person and the game from being played on the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting information has been unauthorizedly changed.

Further, in this aspect, the predetermined condition may include that the elapsed time from the last change of the setting information to the current change of the setting information is within a second predetermined time shorter than the first predetermined time. . That is, when the elapsed time from the last change of the setting information in the pachinko machine 10 to the current change of the setting information exceeds the second predetermined time and is less than the first predetermined time, a configuration for executing a predetermined notification. may be In other words, if the elapsed time from the last change of the setting information in the pachinko machine 10 to the current change of the setting information is within the second predetermined time, the predetermined notification may not be executed. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

A case will be described below in which the pachinko machine 10 with the second predetermined time set to 30 minutes is operated in a game hall that is open from 10:00 am to 11:00 pm (business hours: 13 hours).

In the game hall, for example, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the administrator causes the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode to change the setting information, but the changed setting information is different from the desired value, or the setting information is changed. Even if the setting information is changed by executing the setting change mode again by the administrator when the operation policy of the pachinko machine 10 for the day is changed, the setting information is changed from the previous setting information change to the current setting information. If the elapsed time until is within 30 minutes, which is the second predetermined time, the predetermined notification is not performed. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible for the administrator to change the setting information again before the start of business without executing a predetermined notification. If the second predetermined time is set to be shorter than the time from the time when the manager executes the setting change mode to the opening time of the game hall, the setting information is changed after the opening time of the game hall. , a predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information from being changed illegally by an unauthorized person, while allowing the administrator to change the setting information again before the business starts.

Further, in this mode, if the elapsed time from the previous change of the setting information to the current change of the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the game ball is shot even if the operation handle 25 is operated. may be configured to suppress (prohibit). According to this configuration, even if the speaker 46 of the pachinko machine 10 is destroyed by an unauthorized person and the notification is not executed, the pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed illegally can be used by an unauthorized person. It is possible to suppress the game from being played.

Further, in this aspect, the configuration may be such that the first predetermined time can be changed. According to this configuration, the administrator can appropriately change the first predetermined time in consideration of the business hours of the game hall and the time zone for changing the setting information.

Moreover, in this aspect, the configuration may be such that the second predetermined time can be changed. According to this configuration, the manager can appropriately change the second predetermined time in consideration of the business hours of the game hall and the time period during which the setting information is changed.

<Aspect 136>
An example of the source code of the program executed by the CPU 62x of the pachinko machine 10 in the aspect 74 will be described. The processing from step S11102 to step S11109 in FIG. 46 of mode 74 can be described by, for example, the following source code.

...
PUSH AF #S11102 (memory processing)
D.I.
CALL_DAI2PROGRAM #S11103 to S11108
POP AF #S11109 (change processing)
RET
...
_DAI2PROGRAM:
LD (W21), SP #S11103 (saving process 1)
LD SP, fixed value #S11104 (save processing 2)
LD (W22), register #S11105 (save processing 3)
CALL_YUGIRIREKI #S11106 (game history information calculation display processing)
LD register, (W22) #S11107 (Return processing 1)
LD SP, (W21) #S11108 (return processing 2)
EI
RET

"PUSH", "POP", and "LD" in the above source code are as described in aspect 74 above.

In addition, "DI" in the above source code is an instruction to disable interrupts, and "EI" is an instruction to enable interrupts. "CALL" is an instruction to call a subroutine, and "RET" is an instruction to return to the caller.

"_DAI2PROGRAM" in the above source code is a program (subroutine) for executing the processing from step S11103 to step S11108 in FIG. 2 program 63p2.

According to the above source code, before calling the second program 63p2 (subroutine) stored in the second program control area 63a2 of the main ROM 63, the memory processing (step S11102: PUSH AF) is executed to execute the second program 63p2. It is possible to realize the configuration of the aspect 74, in which the change processing (step S11109: POP AF) is executed after returning from the mode.

<Aspect 137>
In the source code shown in aspect 136, "PUSH AF" can be replaced with "PUSH PSW", and "POP AF" can be replaced with "POP PSW" to describe as follows. The PSW (program status word) means a 16-bit register including an A register (accumulator register) of upper 8 bits and an F register (flag register) of lower 8 bits. Therefore, "PUSH PSW" is an instruction synonymous with "PUSH AF", and "POP PSW" is an instruction synonymous with "POP AF".

...
PUSH PSW
D.I.
CALL_DAI2PROGRAM
POP PSW
RET
...
_DAI2PROGRAM:
LD (W21), SP
LD SP, fixed value LD (W22), register CALL_YUGIRIREKI
LD register, (W22)
LD SP, (W21)
EI
RET

Even if such a source code is adopted, the configuration of aspect 74 can be realized.

<Aspect 138>
The source code shown in aspect 137 above may be written as follows by using the following CALLI and RETI instructions.

...
CALLI_DAI2PROGRAM
RET
...
_DAI2PROGRAM:
LD (W21), SP
LD SP, fixed value LD (W22), register CALL_YUGIRIREKI
LD register, (W22)
LD SP, (W21)
RETI

"CALLI" in the above source code is an instruction for executing a series of processes of saving the value stored in the PSW to the stack area, disabling interrupts, and calling a subroutine. The side CPU 62x is configured to be able to execute this instruction.

"RETI" in the above source code is an instruction for executing a series of processes such as enabling an interrupt, returning to the caller, and restoring the value saved in the stack area to the PSW. is configured to be able to execute this instruction.

Thus, in this aspect, when the second program 63p2 (including the game history calculation display process) is called using the CALLI instruction, the process of saving the value stored in the PSW to the stack area (storage processing), processing for prohibiting interruption, and the called second program 63p2 (including game history calculation and display processing) are executed. Then, when the RETI instruction is executed at the end of the called second program 63p2, a process of returning to the calling source and a process of restoring the value saved in the stack area to the PSW (change process) are performed. will be executed.

Therefore, according to this aspect, the PUSH instruction (step S11102 in FIG. 46) for executing the process of saving the value stored in the PSW to the stack area and the process of restoring the value saved in the stack area to the PSW. can be omitted (step S11109 in FIG. 46). Therefore, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the processing shown in FIG. 46 of the aspect 74 was described using the CALLI instruction and the RETI instruction described above, but similarly, the processing shown in FIG. The processing shown in 48 can also be described using the CALLI and RETI instructions described above. Even in this way, the PUSH instruction and the POP instruction can be similarly omitted. Therefore, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

Moreover, in this aspect, the source code is written using both the CALLI instruction and the RETI instruction, but the source code may be written using only one of the CALLI instruction and the RETI instruction. Even with such a configuration, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

Further, in this aspect, when the CALLI instruction is executed by the main CPU 62x, the processing for inhibiting interrupts is also executed. However, as another aspect, the processing for inhibiting interrupts may not be executed. . That is, the CALLI instruction may be configured as an instruction for executing a series of processes of saving the value stored in the PSW to the stack area and calling a subroutine. Even with such a configuration, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

In addition, in this aspect, when the RETI instruction is executed by the main CPU 62x, the processing for enabling interrupts is also executed. However, as another aspect, the processing for enabling interrupts may not be executed. . That is, the RETI instruction may be configured as an instruction for executing a series of processes of returning to the calling source and restoring the value saved in the stack area to the PSW. Even with such a configuration, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

<Aspect 139>
In the above aspect 74, the game history information calculation display process (FIG. 46: step S11106) is executed as the process using the storage area for the second program (FIGS. 43 and 44). A configuration may be adopted in which other processing is executed in addition to the calculation display processing. For example, in addition to the game history information calculation display process, the test shooting test process for the test shooting test may be executed using the storage area for the second program. The source code in this case can be described, for example, as follows.

...
PUSH PSW
D.I.
CALL _DAI2PROGRAM2 # Second program (trial test)
POP PSW
...
CALL _DAI1PROGRAM # First program
...
PUSH PSW
D.I.
CALL _DAI2PROGRAM #Second program (game history information calculation display)
POP PSW
RET

"CALL_DAI2PROGRAM2" in the above source code is an instruction to call a subroutine (a subroutine including a test firing test process) stored in the second program control area 63a2.

"CALL_DAI1PROGRAM" in the above source code is an instruction to call a subroutine stored in the first program control area 63a1.

"CALL_DAI2PROGRAM" in the above source code is an instruction for calling a subroutine (a subroutine including game history information calculation and display processing) stored in the second program control area 63a2. The contents of "_DAI2PROGRAM" are the same as in aspect 137 above.

As shown in the above source code, in this embodiment, the PUSH and POP instructions are executed before and after calling each subroutine stored in the second program control area 63a2. Therefore, the value of PSW can be restored to the value before calling each subroutine.

<Aspect 140>
In the source code shown in aspect 139 above, between the two subroutines (the subroutine including the test firing test process and the subroutine including the game history information calculation and display process) stored in the second program control area 63a2, 43 and 44) to execute other processing. However, in this configuration, in order to return the value of PSW to the value before calling each subroutine, a PUSH instruction and a POP instruction are executed before and after each subroutine stored in the second program control area 63a2. There is a need. As a result, each time a subroutine stored in the second program control area 63a2 is newly added, the number of PUSH and POP instructions executed increases, and the amount of source code description increases. Therefore, in this aspect, the following source code is adopted.

...
CALL _DAI1PROGRAM # First program
...
PUSH AF
D.I.
CALL _DAI2PROGRAM2 # Second program (trial test)
CALL _DAI2PROGRAM #Second program (game history information calculation display)
POP AF
RET

That is, in this aspect, a plurality of subroutines stored in the second program control area 63a2 are executed between the PUSH instruction and the POP instruction.

According to such a source code, the PUSH instruction and the POP instruction are executed before and after each of the plurality of call instructions that call the subroutines stored in the second program control area 63a2. The number of instruction executions can be reduced. Therefore, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

Note that another process using the storage area for the second program (test shooting test process) is executed between the save process 3 in step S11105 of FIG. 46 and the game history information calculation display process in step S11106. may be configured. Similarly, another process using the storage area for the second program (test shooting test process) is executed between the save process 3 in step S11105 of FIG. 47 and the game history information calculation display process in step S11106 It is good also as a structure which carries out. Similarly, another process using the storage area for the second program (test shooting test process) is performed between the save process 2 in step S11104 of FIG. It may be configured to be executed in

According to such a configuration, it is possible to omit necessary instructions before and after the processing using the storage area for the second program in the configuration for executing a plurality of types of processing using the storage area for the second program. . Therefore, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

<Aspect 141>
Various functions explained in each of the above aspects (for example, a function of storing the number of game balls entering each ball entrance, and payout as prize balls based on the number of game balls entering each ball entrance) A function of calculating the number of game balls that have been played, a function of storing the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, a function of calculating game history information such as the role ratio, a function of storing the calculated game history information, function of displaying stored game history information, function of erasing various information stored in various storage means such as RAM and flash memory, etc.). may be implemented by the main CPU 62 x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300 ), or by the inspection machine 320 . Also, the game history management chip 300, the main side CPU 62x (the main side MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), and the inspection machine 320 share or cooperate to realize at least part of these various functions. may be

<Aspect 142>
The first embodiment and other aspects described above are not limited to the pachinko machine 10, and can be applied to other types of gaming machines. For example, it can also be applied to reel-type gaming machines such as pachinko-type slot machines. Specifically, for example, the number of game medals obtained by winning during the bonus, the number of game medals obtained by the child role drawn during the normal section, and the number of game medals obtained during the advantageous section (AT, ART) other than the bonus For a configuration that calculates the ratio with the number of game medals to be obtained and displays the ratio on a liquid crystal display device, or a configuration that outputs the ratio to the inspection machine and displays the ratio on the display part of the inspection machine can be applied.

<Aspect 143>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes, part or all of the functions realized by software (by CPU executing a program) may be realized by hardware. For example, the game history management chip 300 may be configured to include dedicated hardware designed to execute arithmetic processing for calculating game history information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information, and prevent the occurrence of fraud such as incorrect calculation of the game history information due to unauthorized tampering of the arithmetic program. can be suppressed. Note that the hardware may be configured by a digital circuit or may be configured by an analog circuit. If it is configured with an analog circuit, it is possible to speed up the arithmetic processing more than with a digital circuit.

<Aspect 144>
A configuration obtained by appropriately replacing or combining one or a plurality of configurations included in the above-described first embodiment and aspects 1 to 143 may be adopted. Also, one or more configurations included in the first embodiment and aspects 1 to 143 described above may be combined with one or more configurations included in embodiments other than the first embodiment. In addition, among the configurations included in the first embodiment and aspects 1 to 143 described above, configurations that are not essential can be omitted as appropriate without departing from the scope of the gist.

B. Applies to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

C. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The feature group A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) for nonvolatilely storing detection information, which is information acquired based on detection by the detection means, while being stored inside the housing of the game machine main body. )and,
a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, the process execution means includes information storage means for non-volatilely storing detection information, which is information acquired based on detection by the detection means. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature A1, the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the information storage means of the process execution means stored inside the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since game machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases in which they are not connected to hall computers. Can not. The game machine of feature A1 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the information storage means of the process execution means stored inside the housing of the game machine main body, so that the game machine functions as a hall computer. Even if the game machine is not connected, the detection information can be obtained from the game machine main body. That is, the gaming machine of feature A1 is in a state in which the gaming machine and the detection information are always linked on a one-to-one basis, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (the state of being installed in a gaming hall or the state of circulation). It is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1,
A control means (main side CPU 62x) that controls the execution of the game is provided,
A gaming machine, wherein the processing execution means operates on the same power source as the control means.

According to feature A2, the processing execution means operates on the same power source as the control means. Even if a problem occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer or a problem occurs in the processing of the hall computer, as long as power is supplied to the gaming machine. , detection information can be obtained. If the control means and the process execution means are operated by different power supplies, and if there is a problem with the power supply of the process execution means, the detection information is acquired even though the game is being executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that it is not possible. On the other hand, according to feature A2, since the control means and the process execution means are operated by the same power source, the detection information can be acquired whenever the game is executable. Therefore, the reliability of detection information can be improved.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means stores the detection information for each period until a prescribed number (500) of game balls are detected by a predetermined detection means (ejection path detection sensor 44h).

According to feature A3, the detection information for each period until the specified number of game balls are detected by the predetermined detection means is stored, so the time until the specified number of game balls are detected by each gaming machine varies. Even if there is, it is possible to acquire the detection information that does not affect the variation of the time. That is, even if there is a height difference in the frequency with which game balls are shot, it is possible to acquire highly accurate detection information that is not easily affected by the difference.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The game machine, wherein the information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period (every hour).

According to feature A4, the information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period, so statistical processing using the concept of time can be performed using the detection information.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The gaming machine, wherein the information storage means stores the detection information for each period from when power supply to the gaming machine is started until the power is cut off.

According to feature A5, the information storage means stores detection information for each period from the start of power supply to the game machine until the power supply is interrupted. When installed, it is possible to acquire detection information for each business day of the game hall.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
with
The processing execution means is
Number-of-balls information for acquiring number-of-balls information (number-of-balls data) that is information relating to the number of game balls (number of prize balls) put out from the payout means as the number of prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means acquisition means;
A calculation executing means (CPU 308) for executing a predetermined calculation based on the detection information and the information on the number of winning balls;
with
The game machine, wherein the information storage means stores calculation result information that is information relating to calculation results (role product ratio, etc.) by the calculation execution means.

According to feature A6, the process execution means stores the calculation result information. Since the calculation result information is information calculated based on the detection information and the information on the number of prize balls, the information on the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine is reflected. Therefore, according to feature A6, it is possible to acquire the characteristics of the gaming machine related to the paid-out prize balls. As a result, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the paid-out prize balls.

<Characteristic group B>
The feature group B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling execution of games;
Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for executing calculation processing based on the first information obtained based on the executed game and the preset second information and obtaining the third information;
Information storage means (computation result storage memory 309) for storing the third information in a non-volatile manner;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature B1, the first information is information obtained based on the played game, and the third information is information obtained based on the first information. Therefore, the third information contains information about the played game. Therefore, since the information storage means stores the third information including the information about the played game, the third information stored in the information storage means can be used to obtain the information about the game played in the past. can be obtained. Therefore, by using the third information, it becomes possible to manage the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine. Since the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means, the third information can be acquired if power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power sources, and if there is a problem in the power supply of the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means, the game is executed by the gaming machine. In spite of this, there arises a problem that the third information cannot be acquired. On the other hand, according to feature B2, since the arithmetic execution means, the information storage means and the control means are operated by the same power source, the third information is always acquired if the game is executable. be able to. Therefore, the reliability of the third information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
A game machine, comprising a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine.

According to feature B2, since the transmission means is provided for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine, the third information is transmitted using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine used.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
with
The first information is information acquired based on detection by the detection means,
The second information is information relating to the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out from the payout means as the prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means,
A gaming machine, wherein the third information is information relating to the number of winning balls put out by the gaming machine in the executed game.

According to feature B3, the third information is information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game. Therefore, using the third information stored in the information storage means, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine relating to the actually paid out prize balls.

<Characteristic group C>
The feature group C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling execution of games;
information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) for nonvolatilely storing first information acquired based on the executed game;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature C1, the information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the information storage means is physically touched, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the first information stored in the information storage means is altered through physical contact with the information storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Become. Therefore, unauthorized modification of the first information can be prevented. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made during the distribution process. is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the first information by someone can be suppressed. In addition, since the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to use the first information to manage and inspect the game-related characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, according to the characteristic C1, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the first information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature C2, since the information storage means operates with the same power source as the control means, the first information can be acquired if power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power supplies, and if there is a problem with the power supply to the information storage means, the first information is not displayed even though the game is being executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that the can not be obtained. On the other hand, according to feature C2, since the information storage means and the control means are operated by the same power supply, the first information can always be acquired if the game is executable. Therefore, the reliability of the first information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
A game machine, comprising a transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the first information to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine.

According to feature C3, since the transmission means for transmitting the first information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the game machine is provided, the first information is transmitted using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine used.

<Characteristic group D>
The feature group D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
A first prize ball number information storage for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. means (main-side ROM 63);
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
a winning ball number information acquisition means for acquiring the winning ball number information stored in the first winning ball number storage means;
a second prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing the prize ball number information acquired by the prize ball number information acquisition means;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
By executing calculation based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the second prize ball number information storage means, the game is played. Calculation executing means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information about the history of
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

The information on the number of winning balls set in the gaming machine is generally set to a different value for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

According to feature D1, the process execution means acquires the number of prize balls information stored in the first number of prize balls storage means, so that different number of prize balls information is set for each type (model) of the gaming machine. However, the process executing means can calculate correct game history information using the information on the number of winning balls set for each type of gaming machine.

If the game machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, by checking the game history information, the inspector of the gaming machine can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1,
a winning ball number information transmitting means (CPU 62x) for transmitting a signal including the winning ball number information stored in the first winning ball number information storage means to the processing execution means;
The gaming machine, wherein the acquisition means acquires the number of prize balls information by receiving the signal transmitted from the number of prize balls information transmission means.

According to feature D2, since a signal including the number of prize balls information stored in the first number of prize balls information storage means is transmitted to the processing execution means, the processing execution means accesses the first number of prize balls storage means. Even if the processing execution means cannot grasp the storage position (memory address) of the prize number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, the process execution means can acquire the number of prize balls information stored in the first number of prize balls storage means.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to feature D3, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature D4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
The shooting means is configured so as not to be able to shoot game balls until the processing execution means completes the storage of the number of prize balls information in the second number of prize ball information storage means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature D5, the game ball is not shot until the storage of the number of prize balls information in the second number of prize ball information storage means is completed. can be suppressed.

<Characteristic group E>
The feature group E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Every time the number of game balls detected by the predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) stored in the number information storage means (discharge passage passage number N _OUT ) reaches a specified value (500), the Information on the game history is obtained by performing calculation based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the information on the number of prize balls stored in the number information storage means. Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio etc.)
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, since the game history information is calculated each time the number of game balls detected by the predetermined detecting means reaches the specified value, the number of game balls detected by each gaming machine reaches the specified value. Even if there is a variation in the time, it is possible to calculate the game history information that does not affect the variation in the time. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency with which game balls are detected, it is possible to calculate highly accurate game history information that is less affected by the difference. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm highly accurate gaming history information, and can appropriately determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified or not. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
First calculation execution condition storage means (main ROM 63 ),
The processing execution means is
Calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution condition stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means;
a second computation execution condition storage means (computation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the acquired computation execution condition;
with
The game machine, wherein the calculation execution means executes the calculation when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

If the type (model) of the gaming machine is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so the optimal conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the game machine as the calculation execution condition.

According to feature E2, the processing execution means acquires the operation execution condition stored in the first operation execution condition storage means, so that the operation execution condition set for each type (model) of the game machine is established. Operations can be performed when

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine, comprising erasing means for erasing information about the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means after the arithmetic execution means executes the arithmetic operation.

According to feature E3, after the calculation execution means executes the calculation, the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means is erased, so the information on the number of game balls is stored again in the number information storage means. It becomes possible to Therefore, the storage capacity required for the number information storage means can be reduced.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to the feature E4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature E5, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Feature group F>
The feature group F is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Every time a predetermined time (one hour) elapses, based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number of prize balls information storage means. Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history, by executing calculations with
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature F1, since game history information is calculated each time a predetermined time elapses, an inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information calculated by statistical processing using the concept of time. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
A first calculation execution condition storage means (main-side ROM 63) for storing information about a time interval for executing the calculation as a calculation execution condition that is a condition for executing the calculation,
The processing execution means is
Calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage means;
a second computation execution condition storage means (computation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the acquired computation execution condition;
with
The game machine, wherein the calculation execution means executes the calculation when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

If the type (model) of the gaming machine is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so the optimal conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the game machine as the calculation execution condition.

According to feature F2, the processing execution means acquires the operation execution condition stored in the first operation execution condition storage means, so that the operation execution condition set for each type (model) of the game machine is established. Operations can be performed when

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time since the calculation was performed;
a determination means for determining whether or not a game is being played by a player;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the measurement means suspends measurement of the elapsed time during a period in which the determination means determines that no game is played.

According to the feature F3, the measurement of the elapsed time from the execution of the calculation is interrupted during the period during which it is determined that no game is being played. Historical information can be calculated.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to the feature F4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature F5, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group G>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
a monitoring means (blackout monitoring circuit 86) for monitoring the occurrence of power interruption;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
When the monitoring means detects that the power supply has been interrupted, the information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number of prize ball information storage means Calculation executing means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history, by executing calculations based on
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, since the game history information is calculated when the occurrence of power cutoff is detected, it is detected during the period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the power cutoff occurs. The game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls. That is, since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start of the operation of the game hall to the end of the operation, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the game machine can easily grasp whether or not there is a change in the characteristics of the game history information over the business days of the game hall, so that the game machine is not illicitly modified. It is possible to appropriately determine whether As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
A gaming machine comprising supply means (capacitor) for supplying power to the arithmetic execution means even after the interruption of the power supply has occurred.

According to the feature G2, since the supply means for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after the power is cut off is provided, the game history information is calculated by the calculation execution means and the game history information storage means for the game history information. can be reliably completed.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to feature G3, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature G4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group H>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
an informing means for informing in a predetermined case;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Game history information, which is information about a game history, based on the information about the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number information storage means. Calculation means (CPU 308) for calculating (accessory ratio, etc.);
game history information storage means (computation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the notifying means notifies when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature H1, when the game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the game machine inspector can easily find the game machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. can. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
The notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is no longer within a predetermined range. machine.

According to the feature H2, when the specific value included in the game history information is out of the predetermined range, notification is given. A game machine that is no longer included in the list can be easily found. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to feature H2,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to feature H3, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how the specific value included in the game history information falls within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a degree of deviation.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic H4, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the game history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to the feature H5, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature H6, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group I>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Ball entry information storage means (ball entry information storage memory 309b) for sequentially storing ball entry information, which is information indicating that a game ball has been detected by the detection means, each time a game ball is detected by the detection means. and,
For a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine, the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information storage means and the prize balls stored in the prize number information storage means a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting number information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I1, since the information on the number of winning balls and the information on the number of winning balls are transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device is information related to the game history based on the information on the number of winning balls and the information on the number of winning balls. Game history information can be calculated within an arbitrary range. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information of the gaming machine calculated within an arbitrary range by using a predetermined device, and can appropriately check whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. It becomes possible to judge As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1,
Date and time information acquisition means (RTC 96) for acquiring date and time information that is information about date and time,
The game machine, wherein the entering ball information storage means adds and stores the date and time information corresponding to the date and time when the game ball was detected by the detecting means when storing the entering ball information.

According to feature I2, the predetermined device that receives the ball entry information to which the date and time information is added can specify the date and time range and calculate the game history information. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can perform a detailed inspection based on the game history information specifying the date and time range. Further, if a predetermined device displays ball entry information to which date and time information is added, the inspector of the gaming machine can also grasp the date and time when the game ball was detected by each detection means. .

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information storage means.

According to feature I3, since the ball entry information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the ball entry information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the ball entry information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group J>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Prize ball number information storage means (mainly side ROM 63),
A game progress process (winning lottery process, electric role open lottery process, prize ball payout process, pattern display on the main display unit 45), which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.), and detection information of game balls detected by the detection means and the prize balls stored in the prize ball number information storage means. a process executing means (main side CPU 62x) for executing a process of calculating game history information (character product ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history by executing calculations based on numerical information;
game history information storage means (main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x) for storing the game history information calculated by the process execution means while being stored in the housing of the game machine main body;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J1, the game history information storage means for storing the game history information is provided. Since the game history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the game history information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the game history information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature J1, the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the game history information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the game history information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine of feature J1 stores the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the game history information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body, so that the game machine is connected to the hall computer. Even in a state in which the game machine main body is not in a state where the game history information is not installed, the game history information can be obtained from the game machine main body. That is, according to the feature J1, it is possible to link the game machine and the game history information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature J1, since a single process execution means executes the game progress process and the process of calculating the game history information, it is not necessary to provide a separate calculation chip or the like for executing the calculation process. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to feature J1,
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second mode, the game progress processing is not executed even when a game ball passes through the predetermined area.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, so it is not preferable to execute the game progress processing in parallel. In the second mode, it is possible to execute processing, processing that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress processing, and the like. Further, according to the feature J2, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when developing the program for the process to be executed in the second mode, the game progress process is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to take countermeasures into consideration, the development efficiency of the program for the processing executed in the second mode can be significantly improved.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to feature J2,
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the game history information.

The game history information is information whose content changes when a game ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration for executing the process of outputting the game history information in parallel with the game progress process is adopted, the game progress can be made while the inspector of the gaming machine is inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine based on the game history information. The content of the game history information may change from time to time as the process is executed, making it difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the feature J3, even if the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the game history information is output in the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed, so the game history information is output. It is possible to suppress the content of the game history information from changing while the game history information is being played. As a result, the game machine inspector can smoothly perform the inspection.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the first condition is satisfied during execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button). When the operation of doing is executed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when the predetermined time comes), the timing when the second condition is established (the symbol variation display process ends) The timing at which the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as the timing at which the game progress processing is completed, and the timing at which all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed), the transition from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to

According to feature J4, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the first mode is configured to shift to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the second mode is more effective than the configuration in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode is shifted from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is met regardless of whether the second condition is met, the first If the first condition that a predetermined operation has been executed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing as the game progress processing is being executed in the mode of (2), the second condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display. mode, it becomes difficult to control the timing of symbol stoppage and the control of the symbol fluctuation time. On the other hand, according to feature J4, for example, the first condition is that a predetermined operation is performed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is being performed in the first mode. If it is satisfied, the transition to the second mode is made at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variable display process is not executed is satisfied, that is, at the timing after the symbols being displayed in the variable display are stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbols and the variation time of the symbols.

[Feature J5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4,
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the third condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the shift to the inspection mode), an operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode (the operation of pressing the mode switching button, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed, the transition from the second mode to the first mode is not performed. A game machine characterized by being configured to shift to a mode.

According to feature J5, when the third condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the transition operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode is not executed, Since it is configured so as to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to prevent returning to the first mode without executing the transition operation. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute the transition operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress process can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player cannot play a game on the gaming machine.

[Feature J6]
The gaming machine according to feature J5,
The gaming machine, wherein the third condition is that a predetermined time has passed since a predetermined time (10 minutes have passed since the game was switched to the inspection mode).

According to feature J6, if a predetermined time has elapsed since a predetermined point in time during the second mode, it means that the transition operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been executed. However, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably prevent a return to the first mode without executing the transition operation. For example, even if the manager of the gaming machine, the inspector, or the like forgets to execute the transition operation after the transition to the second mode, after a predetermined time has passed since the predetermined time, the first mode will be activated. Since the game machine returns to the mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress processing can be executed and the player cannot play a game with the game machine.

[Feature J7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6,
a game progress processing information storage means (main side RAM 64) stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body and storing information related to the game progress processing;
Based on the execution of an erasing operation (operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button), which is an operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means, the game erasing means for erasing information stored in the progress processing information storage means;
with
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
In the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode (state during inspection mode, state in which the power supply is turned off as it is after shifting to inspection mode), the erasing means: A gaming machine characterized in that the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not deleted even when the deletion operation is executed.

According to the feature J7, in the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode, an erasing operation is executed to erase the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means. Even in this case, the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not erased. Even if an erase operation is mistakenly executed in an attempt to migrate the information, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

For example, an erasing operation for erasing information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erasing button. In a configuration in which the operation for shifting the mode between the Although the user intends to press the power button while pressing , there is a risk of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the button for erasure is erroneously executed. Even if the information is accidentally erased, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progressing process that has been executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progressing process is stored in the game progress processing information storage means after returning to the second mode, the transition button is pressed to return from the second mode to the first mode. If the user intends to press the power button while pressing it, but accidentally presses the power button while pressing the button for erasing, the information for restarting the game progress process is erased. After returning to mode 1, the game progress processing cannot be restarted, and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. On the other hand, according to feature J7, in the state after shifting to the second mode but before shifting to the first mode, the erase button is erroneously pressed in an attempt to shift to the first mode. Even if the power button is pressed while playing the game, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means from being erroneously erased, thus giving a disadvantage to the player. can be suppressed.

[Feature J8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information.

According to feature J8, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

[Feature J9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8,
A gaming machine, wherein the game history information storage means is composed of a non-volatile memory (flash memory 64x) capable of retaining data even if power supply is interrupted.

According to feature J9, since the game history information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine). However, the game machine and the game history information can always be linked on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the game machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature J10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9,
A game machine, wherein the game history information storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is attached) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the characteristic J10, the game history information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the game history information storage means is physically touched, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is altered through physical contact with the game history information storage means, it is possible to ascertain the alteration from the traces on the housing. becomes possible. Therefore, unauthorized modification of the game history information can be prevented. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made during the distribution process. Even in a situation where game machines are distributed from time to time, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of game history information by someone. In addition, since the game history information is information acquired based on the games that have been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the game history information. Therefore, according to the feature J10, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the gaming history information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10,
A game machine, comprising: a notification means for notifying when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the characteristic J11, when the game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the notification is given. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. can. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J12]
The gaming machine according to feature J11,
The notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is no longer within a predetermined range. machine.

According to the feature J12, when the specific value included in the game history information is outside the predetermined range, notification is given. A game machine that is no longer included in the list can be easily found. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J13]
The gaming machine according to feature J12,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature J13, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how the specific value included in the game history information falls within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a degree of deviation.

[Feature J14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J11 to J13,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic J14, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the game history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic group K>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (winning lottery process, electric role open lottery process, prize ball payout process, pattern display on the main display unit 45), which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When a predetermined condition is met (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), a second mode (inspection mode) that is executed;
is executable and
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second mode, the game progress processing is not executed even when a game ball passes through the predetermined area.

According to the feature K1, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, so it is not preferable to execute the game progress processing in parallel. In the second mode, it is possible to execute processing, processing that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress processing, and the like. Further, according to the characteristic K1, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when developing the program for the process to be executed in the second mode, the game progress process is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to take countermeasures into consideration, the development efficiency of the program for the processing executed in the second mode can be significantly improved.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role item ratio, etc.; ) (computation result storage memory 309, entry number storage memory 309a, entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the characteristic K2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature K2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. Since the gaming machine of feature K2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature K2, it is possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, the detection information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the process of outputting the detection information is executed in parallel with the game progress process, the game progress process may be executed while the inspector of the gaming machine is inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine based on the detection information. The content of the detection information may change at any time after execution, making it difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the characteristic K2, even if the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the detection information is output in the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed, so the detection information is output. It is possible to suppress the content of the detection information from changing in between. As a result, the game machine inspector can smoothly perform the inspection.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to feature K2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature K3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory (calculation result storage memory 309, entered ball number storage memory 309a, entered ball information storage memory 309b, flash memory) capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

According to the feature K4, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is retained, so the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine). Also, the gaming machine and the detection information can always be linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K4,
A gaming machine, wherein the storage means is housed inside a housing (board box to which a seal is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature K5, the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, traces of the opening of the housing remain. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, they come into contact with various external sources during the process of being distributed. Even if the information is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone can be suppressed. Moreover, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature K5, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K5,
A game machine, comprising: notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature K6, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the notification is given, so the inspector of the game machine can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K7]
The gaming machine according to feature K6,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer within a predetermined range.

According to the feature K7, when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the notification is given, so the inspector of the gaming machine can check whether the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K8]
The gaming machine according to feature K7,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature K8, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of divergence of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature K9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K6 to K8,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature K9, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic group L>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (winning lottery process, electric role open lottery process, prize ball payout process, pattern display on the main display unit 45), which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the first condition is satisfied during execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button). When the operation of doing is executed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when the predetermined time comes), the timing when the second condition is established (the symbol variation display process ends) The timing at which the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as the timing at which the game progress processing is completed, and the timing at which all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed), the transition from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to

According to feature L1, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the first mode is changed to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the second mode is more effective than the configuration in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode is shifted from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is met regardless of whether the second condition is met, the first If the first condition that a predetermined operation has been executed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing as the game progress processing is being executed in the mode of (2), the second condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display. mode, it becomes difficult to control the timing of symbol stoppage and the control of the symbol fluctuation time. On the other hand, according to the feature L1, for example, the first condition is that a predetermined operation is performed while the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is being performed in the first mode. If it is satisfied, the transition to the second mode is made at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variable display process is not executed is satisfied, that is, at the timing after the symbols being displayed in the variable display are stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbols and the variation time of the symbols.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role item ratio, etc.; ) (computation result storage memory 309, entry number storage memory 309a, entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the characteristic L2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature L2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine having the feature L2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature L2, it is possible to link the game machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine according to feature L2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature L3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory (calculation result storage memory 309, entered ball number storage memory 309a, entered ball information storage memory 309b, flash memory) capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

According to the feature L4, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is retained. Also, the gaming machine and the detection information can always be linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4,
A gaming machine, wherein the storage means is housed inside a housing (board box to which a seal is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to feature L5, the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, traces of the opening of the housing remain. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, they come into contact with various external sources during the process of being distributed. Even if the information is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone can be suppressed. Moreover, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature L5, the game machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L5,
A game machine, comprising: notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature L6, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, notification is given, so the game machine inspector can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L7]
The gaming machine according to feature L6,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer within a predetermined range.

According to the feature L7, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, a notification is given, so the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm that the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L8]
The gaming machine according to feature L7,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature L8, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature L9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L8,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic L9, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic group M>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (winning lottery process, electric role open lottery process, prize ball payout process, pattern display on the main display unit 45), which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the second condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the shift to the inspection mode), a predetermined amount of time is required to shift from the second mode to the first mode. (the operation of pressing the mode switching button, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not performed, the mode is changed from the second mode to the first mode. A game machine characterized by being configured to shift.

According to feature M1, when the second condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not executed. , the second mode is changed to the first mode, it is possible to prevent a return to the first mode without executing a predetermined operation. For example, after shifting to the second mode, the administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform a predetermined operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress process can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player cannot play a game on the gaming machine.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine according to feature M1,
The gaming machine, wherein the second condition is that a predetermined period of time has passed since a predetermined point in time (10 minutes have passed since the mode was shifted to the inspection mode).

According to feature M2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time point during the second mode, a predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode has not been executed. Even if there is, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably prevent the return to the first mode without executing the predetermined operation. For example, even if the manager of the gaming machine, the inspector, or the like forgets to perform the predetermined operation after the transition to the second mode, the first mode will be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined point in time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game machine from returning to the first mode in which the game progress processing can be executed and the player cannot play with the game machine.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role item ratio, etc.; ) (computation result storage memory 309, entry number storage memory 309a, entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the feature M3, it is possible to store the detection information and output the detection information in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature M3, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine having the feature M3 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the characteristic M3, it is possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature M3, after the inspector of the gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine based on the detection information output in the second mode, the operator forgets to execute a predetermined operation, and the gaming machine fails to operate. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot play a game on the gaming machine without returning to the first mode in which progress processing can be executed.

[Feature M4]
The gaming machine according to feature M3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature M4, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature M5]
A gaming machine according to feature M3 or feature M4,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory (calculation result storage memory 309, entered ball number storage memory 309a, entered ball information storage memory 309b, flash memory) capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

According to feature M5, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is retained. Also, the gaming machine and the detection information can always be linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature M6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5,
A gaming machine, wherein the storage means is housed inside a housing (board box to which a seal is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature M6, the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, traces of the opening of the housing remain. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, they come into contact with various external sources during the process of being distributed. Even if the information is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone can be suppressed. Moreover, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature M6, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M6,
A game machine, comprising: notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature M7, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, notification is given, so the game machine inspector can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M8]
The gaming machine according to feature M7,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer within a predetermined range.

According to the feature M8, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the game machine inspector can check whether the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M9]
The gaming machine according to feature M8,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature M9, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature M10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M7 to M9,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature M10, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic N group>
The N groups of features are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (winning lottery process, electric role open lottery process, prize ball payout process, pattern display on the main display unit 45), which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body and storing information related to the game progress process;
erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means based on execution of a predetermined operation (an operation of pressing a power button while pressing a RAM clear button);
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When a predetermined condition is met (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), a second mode (inspection mode) that is executed;
is executable and
In the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode (state during inspection mode, state in which the power supply is turned off as it is after shifting to inspection mode), the erasing means: A gaming machine, wherein the information stored in the storage means is not deleted even when the predetermined operation is executed.

According to feature N1, in the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode, even if a predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the storage means is executed. Even if there is, the information stored in the storage means is not erased. is performed, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

For example, the predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the button for erasing. In a configuration in which the operation for mode transition is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is pressed to transition from the second mode to the first mode. Although the user intends to press the power button while pressing the erase button, there is a risk of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature N1, in the state after shifting to the second mode but before shifting to the first mode, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the button for erasing is performed by mistake. Even if the information is accidentally erased, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progressing process that has been executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progressing process is stored in the storage means for resuming after returning to the second mode, the power supply is pressed while the transition button is pressed to return from the second mode to the first mode. If the user accidentally presses the power button while pressing the button for erasing, the information for resuming the game progress process is erased, and the second mode is entered. The game progress processing cannot be resumed after returning, and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. On the other hand, according to feature N1, after shifting to the second mode but before shifting to the first mode, the user accidentally presses the erase button to shift to the first mode. Even if the power button is pressed while holding the power button, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the storage means from being erroneously erased, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged. can be suppressed.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role item ratio, etc.; ) is provided with detection information storage means for storing
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information (game history information including information on the number of balls entered, information on the number of balls entered, ratio of accessories, etc.).

According to the characteristic N2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature N2, the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the detection information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine having the feature N2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the detection information detection information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body, so that the game machine is connected to the hall computer. Even if the game machine is not in the state, the detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature N2, it is possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to feature N2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature N3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3,
A gaming machine, wherein the detection information storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is attached) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to feature N4, the detection information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the detection information storage means is physically touched, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is altered through physical contact with the detection information storage means, it is possible to grasp the alteration from the traces on the housing. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made during the distribution process. Even in a situation where machines are distributed from time to time, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of detection information by someone. Moreover, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to feature N4, it is possible to appropriately manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N4,
A game machine, comprising: a notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the detection information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature N5, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the notification is given, so the inspector of the game machine can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N6]
The gaming machine according to feature N5,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range.

According to the feature N6, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the game machine inspector can confirm that the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N7]
The gaming machine according to feature N6,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature N7, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of divergence of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature N8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature N8, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

The inventions of the feature group A to feature group N solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games.

In addition to making games more interesting, various technical improvements have also been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and unauthorized modification of gaming machines.

For example, if a player commits an illegal act (so-called goto act), or if the nail provided on the game board of a pachinko machine is illegally bent and modified, each entry such as the general winning opening and the starting opening may be damaged. In some cases, the percentage of game balls entering the ball opening differs from what was originally assumed, and the performance and playability assumed for the pachinko game machine are sometimes impaired. However, it has been very difficult to detect such fraud.

Such cheating may be committed by a player during the hours of operation of the gaming hall. In addition, there are cases in which unauthorized modifications are made by someone after the business hours of the game hall. Furthermore, there are cases where a game machine is illegally modified while being transported before it is installed in a game hall. Furthermore, there are cases where the game machine is illegally modified before it is shipped to the game hall. Also, there is a possibility that unauthorized modifications will be made before that.

In light of this situation, the purpose is to detect fraudulent acts and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines, and to improve the soundness of games.

<Characteristic group O>
The feature group O is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A gaming machine comprising a process execution means (main side CPU 62x) for starting execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (an interval of 4 msec),
The process execution means is capable of executing a specific process (arithmetic process for calculating gaming history information) as one process included in the predetermined process,
The specific process is composed of a plurality of processing stages (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29),
The processing execution means is
one of the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific processing can be executed in one execution of the predetermined processing;
A gaming machine characterized by executing all of the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific processing by executing the predetermined processing multiple times.

According to feature O1, one processing step out of a plurality of processing steps constituting the specific processing can be executed in one execution of the predetermined processing, and by executing the predetermined processing multiple times, Since all of the plurality of processing stages that constitute the specific process are executed, the performance of the predetermined process is faster than a configuration that executes all of the plurality of processing stages that constitute the specific process in one execution of the predetermined process. The time required for one execution can be shortened. As a result, the time required to execute the predetermined process once becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. can be suppressed.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
The specific process is composed of a series of processes whose execution order is determined,
The plurality of processing stages are obtained by dividing the series of processes constituting the specific process,
After executing one processing step (task 1 in FIG. 29) of the plurality of processing steps, the processing execution means executes the processing step (task 2 in FIG. 29) next to the one processing step. A gaming machine characterized by specifying

According to feature O2, a series of processes whose order of execution is determined is divided, and in one execution of a predetermined process, one of a plurality of process steps is executed, and then the one process step is executed. Since the processing stage to be executed next to the processing stage is specified, even if it is a series of processes in which the time required to execute the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval when incorporated into the predetermined process , can be executed by being incorporated into a predetermined process executed at predetermined intervals.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to feature O2,
The process execution means is capable of executing a game progress process, which is a process related to progress of a game, as a process included in the predetermined process,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process is a process (arithmetic process) different from the game progress process.

According to feature O3, when a process different from the game progress process (process other than the game progress process) is incorporated into the predetermined process, the time required to execute the predetermined process once becomes longer than the predetermined interval. Even in a gaming machine having a configuration such that the game progresses, a process different from the game progress process can be incorporated into a predetermined process that is executed at predetermined intervals. In addition, the processing different from the game progress processing does not affect the progress of the game even if all the processing steps are not executed in one execution of the predetermined processing, so the time required for one execution of the predetermined processing can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved. As the processing different from the game progress processing, various arbitrary processing can be adopted. It is possible to adopt transmission processing or the like of transmitting information regarding the game situation to the hall computer in which the player is present at a predetermined timing.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to feature O3,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific process is a calculation process (arithmetic process) that is a process of calculating game history information, which is information about a game history.

According to the feature O4, when the calculation process for calculating the game history information is incorporated into the predetermined process, the game is configured such that the time required for executing the predetermined process once becomes longer than the predetermined interval. Also in the machine, the calculation process can be incorporated into a predetermined process executed at predetermined intervals. In addition, the calculation process for calculating the game history information does not affect the progress of the game even if all the processing steps are not executed in one execution of the predetermined process. Time can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
A gaming machine comprising a process execution means (main side CPU 62x) for starting execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (an interval of 4 msec),
The processing execution means is
As one process included in the predetermined process, it is possible to execute a specific process (prize tally process),
In one execution of the predetermined processing, a part of the processing target candidates (2 bits) from among the plurality of processing target candidates (8 bits of the buffer area) is selected for the specific processing (prize ball tabulation processing), and the specific processing can be executed for the set processing target,
A gaming machine characterized by executing the specific process for all of the plurality of candidates for processing by executing the predetermined process a plurality of times.

According to the feature P1, in one execution of the predetermined process, some of the plurality of process target candidates are set as the process target of a specific process, and the set process target is A specific process can be executed by executing the predetermined process a plurality of times, thereby executing the specific process for all of the plurality of processing target candidates. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for executing the predetermined process once, compared to a configuration in which a specific process is executed for all of the plurality of processing target candidates in one execution of the predetermined process. As a result, the time required to execute the predetermined process once becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. can be suppressed.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to feature P1,
A gaming machine, wherein the plurality of processing target candidates are fixed in advance.

According to feature P2, since the plurality of candidates to be processed are fixed in advance, there is no need to execute processing for selecting a plurality of candidates to be processed, and the processing can be simplified. can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for selecting a plurality of candidates for processing.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The processing target setting means sets the partial processing target candidates among the plurality of processing target candidates as processing targets for the specific processing in a predetermined order. game machine.

According to feature P3, when setting some processing target candidates among a plurality of processing target candidates as processing targets for a specific process, setting is performed in a predetermined order. It is possible to simplify the process without executing the process of determining which processing target candidate to set, and as a result, it is possible to improve the processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for executing the determination process.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3,
Equipped with multiple entrance ball parts where game balls can enter,
Each of the plurality of processing target candidates corresponds to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections,
Each candidate to be processed is information (ball entry detection information stored in each bit of the buffer area) that is updated based on detection of entry of a game ball into each ball entry portion,
The processing execution means performs the predetermined processing a plurality of times ( 4), it is possible to execute the specific processing for all of the processing target candidates by executing the processing 4 times).

According to the feature P4, the time required to execute a specific process for all candidates to be processed is the shortest time required to detect two game balls continuously entering one ball entering portion. , the information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry part can be set to the detection of the entry of a single game ball. can be stored as information that is updated based on Specifically, when two game balls enter the ball entering portion in succession, the update is performed based on detection of the entry of the first game ball in the ball entering portion. Even if the information obtained is set as the processing target and the specific processing is executed, and then the remaining other processing target candidates are set as the processing target and the specific processing is executed, the next second game All these specific processes can be completed before the ball entry is detected at the ball entry section. That is, at the time when the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the second game ball in the entry section is set as the processing target and the specific process is executed, one ball is already Specific processing for the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the second game ball in the relevant ball entry section is completed, and the entry of the second game ball is detected in the relevant ball entry section. The information updated based on the fact that the ball is entered can be handled as information updated based on the detection of the entry of the new first game ball in the ball entry section. Therefore, the information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry part is stored as the information updated based on the detection of the entry of one game ball. be able to. As a result, for example, it is possible to store information updated based on detection of a game ball entering each ball entering portion as binary information indicating the presence or absence of an entering ball. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry section, and to improve the processing speed of specific processing. be able to.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
a process execution means (main side CPU 62x) capable of executing specific processes (game history processes) and processes other than the specific processes (processes related to game progress);
A storage area (main side RAM 64) in which information can be written,
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means comprises holding means (registers) for holding information (register information) for execution of processing,
The specific processing is
a first process (saving process) of writing information (register information) held by the holding means for execution of the other process into the storage area;
a second process (restore process) for causing the holding means to hold the information written in the storage area in the first process;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature Q1, the specific process includes the first process of writing information held by the holding means and for executing other processes into the storage area. At the start, if the holding means holds information for execution of other processing that was being executed immediately before the start of the specific processing, information for execution of the other processing that was held by the holding means Information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it to a storage area. Therefore, it is possible to erase the information for executing the other process held in the holding means, and cause the holding means to hold the information for executing the specific process when the process executing means executes the specific process. can. Further, the specific process includes the second process of causing the holding means to hold the information written in the storage area in the first process. The information can be held again in the holding means, and another process that was being executed before the start of the specific process can be restarted from the state immediately before the start of the specific process. Furthermore, since the first process and the second process are included in the specific process, even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted, other processes than the specific process can be executed without problems. machine can be provided. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the specific process without altering the program for executing other processes than the specific process. As a result, for example, when improving the game machine so that it does not execute a specific process, or when developing a new game machine that does not execute a specific process based on the game machine, design changes can be minimized. It becomes possible to

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The processing execution means is
In the first process included in the specific process, information for executing the other process is written in a predetermined specific area (second area) of the storage area, and A gaming machine characterized in that information is written in a specific process only to the specific area (second area) of the storage area.

According to feature Q2, in the first process included in the specific process, the process execution means writes information for executing other processes into a predetermined specific area of the storage area, and , information written in a specific process is executed only in a specific area of the storage area. can be suppressed from being overwritten by the execution of Therefore, when the process using the other area is executed by the process executing means, it is possible to prevent the specific process from affecting the process.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1 or feature Q2,
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the writing of information in the other process is executed only in another area (first area) of the storage area other than the specific area.

According to the feature Q3, information written in other processing is executed only to other areas other than the specific area of the storage area. can be suppressed from being rewritten by execution of other processing. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process executing means using a specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3,
The specific process is a process different from the game progress process, which is a process related to the progress of the game,
A gaming machine, wherein the other process is the game progress process.

According to the characteristic Q4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the game progress process can be executed without any problem even if only the program for executing the process different from the game progress process is deleted. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the process different from the game progress process. As a result, for example, when the gaming machine is improved so as not to execute processing different from the game progress processing, or when developing a new gaming machine which does not execute processing different from the game progress processing, design changes are minimized. It is possible to limit As the processing different from the game progress processing, various arbitrary processing can be adopted. It is possible to adopt transmission processing or the like for transmitting information regarding the state of the game to the installed hall computer at a predetermined timing.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine according to feature Q4,
The specific processing is game history information related processing (game history processing) that is processing for calculating and displaying game history information (character product ratio, continuous character product ratio) that is information related to game history. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature Q5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the game progress process can be executed without problems even if only the program for executing the game history information related process is deleted. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the game history information related process. As a result, for example, when improving the game machine so as not to execute the game history information related process, or when developing a new game machine which does not execute the game history information related process, design changes can be minimized. becomes possible.

<Characteristic group R>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
a process execution means (main side CPU 62x) capable of executing a plurality of processes including a specific process (game history process);
A storage area (main side RAM 64) in which information can be written,
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the writing of information in the specific processing is executed only in a predetermined specific area (second area) of the storage areas.

According to feature R1, the process execution means writes information in a specific process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area. It is possible to prevent the information written in the area from being rewritten by execution of a specific process. Therefore, when a process using an area other than the specific area in the storage area is executed by the process execution means, it is possible to suppress the influence of the specific process on the process. can.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to feature R1,
The processing execution means is
The writing of information in other processes (processes related to progress of the game) other than the specific process is executed only in another area (first area) of the storage area other than the specific area. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature R2, the process execution means writes information in processes other than the specific process only to areas other than the specific area of the storage area. It is possible to prevent the information written in the specific area from being rewritten due to the execution of the other process. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process executing means using a specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
The processing execution means is
comprising holding means (registers) for holding information (register information) for execution of processing, and exclusively executing the specific processing and the other processing;
The specific processing is
a first process (saving process) of writing information (register information) held by the holding means for execution of the other process to the specific area;
a second process (restore process) for causing the holding means to hold the information written in the specific area in the first process;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature R3, since the specific process includes the first process, when the process execution means starts the specific process, the holding means executes another process just before the specific process starts. is held, the information held by the holding means for execution of other processing can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it in a specific area. Therefore, it is possible to erase the information for executing the other process held in the holding means, and cause the holding means to hold the information for executing the specific process when the process executing means executes the specific process. can. Further, since the specific process includes the second process, when the specific process ends, the information for executing the other process is retained again in the holding means, and the information to be executed before the start of the specific process is obtained. Other processes can be re-executed from the state just before the start of a particular process. Furthermore, since the first process and the second process are included in the specific process, even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted, other processes than the specific process can be executed without problems. machine can be provided. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the specific process without altering the program for executing other processes than the specific process. As a result, for example, when improving the game machine so that it does not execute a specific process, or when developing a new game machine that does not execute a specific process based on the game machine, design changes can be minimized. It becomes possible to

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3,
The specific process is a process different from the game progress process, which is a process related to the progress of the game,
A gaming machine, wherein the process other than the specific process is the game progress process.

According to the feature R4, the process executing means writes information in a process different from the game progress process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area, so that the game progress process can be processed. When executed by means, it is possible to suppress the game progress processing from being affected by processing different from the game progress processing.

[Feature R5]
The gaming machine according to feature R4,
The specific processing is game history information related processing (game history processing) that is processing for calculating and displaying game history information (character product ratio, continuous character product ratio) that is information related to game history. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature R5, the process execution means writes information in the game history information related process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area. When executed, it is possible to prevent the game history information related process from influencing the game progress process.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
ball entry detection means (ball entry detection sensor) for detecting entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion;
Parameter storage means (prize ball tally buffer) for storing a predetermined parameter (prize ball tally value);
A gaming machine comprising: a processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) for starting execution of predetermined processing (timer interrupt processing) at predetermined intervals (intervals of 4 msec),
The processing execution means is
As the predetermined processing,
a parameter update process (prize ball tally process) for updating the predetermined parameter stored in the parameter storage means upon entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
Calculation processing (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating game history information, which is information about game history, based on the predetermined parameters stored in the parameter storage means;
is executable and
A gaming machine characterized in that the calculation process is not executed when the parameter update process is executed in one time of the predetermined process.

According to the feature S1, the calculation process is not executed when the parameter update process is executed in one predetermined process. That is, since both the parameter updating process and the calculation process are not executed in one predetermined process, the time required for executing the predetermined process once can be shortened. As a result, the time required to execute the predetermined process once becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. can be suppressed. Furthermore, according to the feature S1, the parameter update processing in which the game ball entry state and the processing load are correlated is executed with priority over the calculation processing in which the game ball entry state and the processing load are not correlated. To suppress an increase in the execution interval of parameter update processing, and as a result, it becomes impossible for the processing result (prize ball total value) of the parameter update processing to accurately reflect the state of entry of game balls. can be suppressed.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
Determining means for determining whether to execute the calculation process (processing of step S10810 in FIG. 29),
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines to execute the calculation process, the calculation process is executed.

According to the feature S2, the calculation process is executed when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines to execute the calculation process. Therefore, neither the parameter update process nor the calculation process is executed in the predetermined process. In this situation, instead of the parameter update process and the calculation process, other processes independent of these processes (for example, the updated parameters, the process of determining the validity of the calculation result of the calculation process, etc.) can be executed. Furthermore, if either the parameter update process or the calculation process is executed in one predetermined process, if the time required for executing the predetermined process once is shorter than the predetermined interval, the situation To reliably suppress the time required for one execution of a predetermined process from becoming longer than a predetermined interval by executing a process whose processing time is shorter than that of a parameter update process and a calculation process in can be done.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
Although the process execution means can calculate a plurality of types of game history information (character material ratio, continuous character material ratio) in the calculation process, in the calculation process in one time of the predetermined process executes a process (task 1 or task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating one type of game history information.

According to the feature S3, in spite of the fact that it is possible to calculate a plurality of types of game history information in the calculation process, in the calculation process in one predetermined process, only one type of game history information is calculated. is executed, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process is reduced compared to the configuration in which the process for calculating the gaming history information of a plurality of types is executed in the calculation process in one predetermined process. be able to. As a result, the time required to execute the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. can be suppressed. Also, the storage capacity for temporarily storing the calculated game history information can be reduced.

[Feature S4]
The gaming machine according to feature S3,
The processing execution means is
The game history information of the one type is calculated by executing the process (task 1 or task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating the game history information of the one type over a plurality of times of the predetermined process. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature S4, by executing the process for calculating the game history information of one type over a plurality of predetermined processes, the game history information of the one type is calculated. It is possible to reduce the time required to execute one predetermined process, as compared with the configuration in which the calculation of one type of game history information is completed in the calculation process in the predetermined process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required to execute the predetermined process from exceeding the execution interval of the predetermined process.

The inventions of the above feature group O to feature S solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, various improvements in structure, control, presentation, etc. are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is desirable to further improve the technology for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing more sound games. It is rare.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 38 of the first embodiment) for controlling execution of a game;
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as total value of winning balls, role ratio, etc., information on the number of entered balls, etc.);
operation means (flash memory clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation;
erasing means (an erasing IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means when the operation means receives the predetermined operation;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the operating means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box to which a sealing seal is attached).

According to feature T1, since the operation means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine is in an open state and the operation means is operated, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. That is, based on whether or not the space of the gaming machine remains open, there is a possibility that the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means has been erased. It is possible to grasp whether or not

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears in the executed game, and furthermore, the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the information storage means, thereby confirming the information provided to the gaming machine. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, there are persons (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal persons") who desire to prevent inspectors from discovering that the gaming machine has been modified illegally by erasing the relevant information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the game machine and operate the operation means. If this is the case, traces of opening will remain in the space of the game machine, so even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased, there is a possibility that the information was erased for fraudulent concealment. Traces will remain. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal modifications made to the gaming machine, and in turn, it is possible to suppress the generation of motivation to illegally modify the gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of the game. can be made

It should be noted that game machines may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information that has been stored before distributing it. Therefore, if only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the game machine for justifiable reasons create a distribution system that can erase the traces of the opening of the space, the soundness of the game will be improved. It is possible to promote the smooth distribution of game machines while ensuring the reliability.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining memory even if power supply is interrupted.

According to feature T2, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, it is possible to retain the information acquired based on the game that has been executed. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a game is being played normally in the gaming machine.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information acquired based on the executed game includes information (total value of prize balls) regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

According to feature T3, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using the information on the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box to which a seal is attached).

According to feature T4, the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of openness remain. The space of the gaming machine is put into an open state, and a trace of the opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. That is, the information stored in the information storage means is illegally altered by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not there remains a trace of the opening of the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and furthermore, it is possible to generate motivation to illegally alter the information stored in the information storage means. can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group U>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 39 of the first embodiment) for controlling game execution;
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as total value of winning balls, role ratio, etc., information on the number of entered balls, etc.);
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device (inspection machine 320),
erasing means (an erasing IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on receiving a predetermined signal (erase command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connecting means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature U1, the erasing means comprises means for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of a prescribed signal from a prescribed device connected to the connecting means. can erase the information stored in the information storage means. That is, it becomes possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the prescribed device.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears in the executed game, and furthermore, the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the information storage means, thereby confirming the information provided to the gaming machine. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, there are persons (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal persons") who desire to prevent inspectors from discovering that the gaming machine has been modified illegally by erasing the relevant information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, a predetermined device connectable to the connection means of the game machine is required. By limiting who can own the device, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person. It is possible to suppress the generation of the motivation to modify the game, and to improve the soundness of the game.

It should be noted that game machines may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information that has been stored before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is constructed in which only those who want to delete the information stored in the information storage means of the game machine for a legitimate reason can own a predetermined device, the soundness of the game will be improved. It is possible to promote the smooth distribution of game machines while ensuring the availability.

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to feature U1,
transmission for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to characteristic U2, the transmission means transmits the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is accidentally erased by an operation against the will of the person who has the predetermined device, the information is erased from the information storage means. The information can be verified by the predetermined device.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining memory even if power supply is interrupted.

According to feature U3, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, it is possible to retain the information acquired based on the game that has been executed. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a game is being played normally in the gaming machine.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
A gaming machine, wherein the information acquired based on the executed game includes information (total value of prize balls) regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

According to feature U4, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using information about the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature U5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box to which a seal is attached).

According to feature U5, the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of openness remain. The space of the gaming machine is put into an open state, and a trace of the opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. That is, the information stored in the information storage means is illegally altered by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not there remains a trace of the opening of the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and furthermore, it is possible to generate motivation to illegally alter the information stored in the information storage means. can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group V>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature V1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 40 of the first embodiment) for controlling execution of a game;
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as total value of winning balls, role ratio, etc., information on the number of entered balls, etc.);
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device (inspection machine 320),
operation means (flash memory clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation;
erasing means (an erasing IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The operation means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside the board box with a sealing seal attached),
The erasing means receives the predetermined operation from the operating means and receives a predetermined signal (delete command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connecting means. A game machine characterized by comprising means for erasing the information stored in the game machine.

According to feature V1, since the operation means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, is in an open state and the operation means is operated, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the erasing means has means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of the prescribed signal from the prescribed device connected to the connecting means, a person who has the prescribed device can , the information stored in the information storage means can be erased. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information stored in the information storage means has been erased by opening the space of the game machine based on whether or not the space of the game machine remains open. In addition, it is possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the prescribed device.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears in the executed game, and furthermore, the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the information storage means, thereby confirming the information provided to the gaming machine. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, there are persons (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal persons") who desire to prevent inspectors from discovering that the gaming machine has been modified illegally by erasing the relevant information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, a predetermined device connectable to the connection means of the game machine is required. By restricting the persons who can own the predetermined device, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized person possesses the predetermined device, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the game machine must be opened and operated. It is necessary to operate the means. If this is the case, traces of opening will remain in the space of the game machine, so even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased, there is a possibility that the information was erased for fraudulent concealment. Traces will remain. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person, and it is possible to make it difficult to conceal the unauthorized modifications made to the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the generation of the motivation to illegally modify the game machine, and it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

It should be noted that game machines may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information that has been stored before distributing it. Therefore, only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the game machine for justifiable reasons can own the specified device and erase the traces of the opening of the space. If a distribution system capable of achieving this is established, it will be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of games.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to feature V1,
transmission for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to feature V2, the transmission means transmits the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is accidentally erased by an operation against the will of the person who has the predetermined device, the information is erased from the information storage means. The information can be verified by the predetermined device.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining memory even if power supply is interrupted.

According to feature V3, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, it is possible to retain the information acquired based on the game that has been executed. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a game is being played normally in the gaming machine.

[Feature V4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
A gaming machine, wherein the information acquired based on the executed game includes information (total value of prize balls) regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

According to feature V4, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using information on the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature V5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box to which a seal is attached).

According to feature V5, the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of openness remain. The space of the gaming machine is put into an open state, and a trace of the opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. That is, the information stored in the information storage means is illegally altered by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not there remains a trace of the opening of the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and furthermore, it is possible to generate motivation to illegally alter the information stored in the information storage means. can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group W>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 46 of the first embodiment) for controlling the execution of the game;
Based on the first information (information used for game progress processing stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) that is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game Information storage means for storing acquired second information (game history information such as winning ball tally stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, character ratio, etc., information on the number of balls entered, etc.) (main side RAM 64);
erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the first information stored in the information storage means when erasing the second information stored in the information storage means. game machine.

According to feature W1, since the erasing means has means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, the second information acquired based on the executed game is erased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first information, which is the information used to control the execution of the game, is not erased and is maintained as it is even though it has been erased.

Specifically, for example, the second information, which is the information acquired based on the game played on the gaming machine, is collateral information for judging the fairness of the game played on the gaming machine. When the second information is erased, the first information (for example, information about the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag indicating the game state) used for controlling the execution of the game in the gaming machine is deleted. It is preferable to erase and initialize the gaming state of the gaming machine. According to this feature, the erasing means has means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, so that the second information, which serves as collateral for judging the fairness of the game, is erased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained as it is because the first information is not erased even though the first information has been deleted.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to feature W1,
The game machine, wherein the erasing means has means for erasing the first information and not erasing the second information among the information stored in the information storage means.

According to feature W2, since the erasing means has means for erasing the first information among the information stored in the information storage means and not erasing the second information, It is possible to erase the first information, which is the information used to control the execution of the game, while leaving the second information, which is the information that has been written.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the execution of the game, or at the start or end of the operation of the game hall, the first information, which is the information used for the control of the execution of the game, is erased. There is a desire to initialize the control of the game machine by pressing the button, but not to erase the second information obtained based on the executed game. According to this feature, while leaving the second information, which is the information acquired based on the executed game, the first information, which is the information used for controlling the execution of the game, is erased, and the game machine is operated. Control initialization can be performed.

<Characteristic group X>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 42 of the first embodiment) for controlling the execution of the game;
Based on the first information (information used for game progress processing stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) that is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game Information storage means for storing acquired second information (game history information such as winning ball tally stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, character ratio, etc., information on the number of balls entered, etc.) (main side RAM 64);
First operation means (RAM clear button and power switch) for receiving a first operation (an operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM clear button is pressed);
erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means erases the first information among the information stored in the information storage means based on the acceptance of the first operation by the first operating means, and erases the second information. A game machine characterized by comprising a means for not erasing the information.

According to the feature X1, the erasing means erases the first information out of the information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of the first operation by the first operating means, and erases the second information. Since means for not erasing the information is provided, the first information, which is the information used to control the execution of the game, can be erased while leaving the second information, which is the information obtained based on the executed game. becomes possible.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the execution of the game, or at the start or end of the operation of the game hall, the first information, which is the information used for the control of the execution of the game, is erased. There is a desire to initialize the control of the game machine by pressing the button, but not to erase the second information obtained based on the executed game. According to this feature, by operating the first operating means, the second information, which is the information used to control the execution of the game, is left while the second information, which is the information acquired based on the executed game, is retained. 1 information can be erased to initialize the control of the gaming machine.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to feature X1,
A second operation means (second RAM clear button) for accepting a second operation (operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined time while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on),
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the second operation means accepts the second operation. game machine.

According to the feature X2, the erasing means has means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on acceptance of the second operation by the second operating means. The second information, which cannot be erased by operating the operating means, can be erased by operating the second operating means.

[Feature X3]
The gaming machine according to feature X2,
A gaming machine, wherein the second operation means (second RAM clear button) is stored inside a space (inside a board box to which a seal is attached) in which a trace of opening remains.

According to feature X3, the second operation means is stored inside the space where traces of opening remain. Therefore, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, When the space of the game machine is opened and the second operation means is operated, the space of the game machine is left with a trace of opening. In other words, it is possible that the second information stored in the information storage means has been erased by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not there remains a trace of the opening of the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears in the executed game, and furthermore, the second stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine information may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the information storage means, thereby confirming the information provided to the gaming machine. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, there are persons (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal persons") who desire to prevent inspectors from discovering that the gaming machine has been modified illegally by erasing the relevant information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the game machine and operate the second operation means. If this is the case, a trace of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine, so even if the second information stored in the information storage means is erased, there is a possibility that the information was erased for fraudulent concealment. There will be traces left behind. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal modifications made to the gaming machine, and in turn, it is possible to suppress the generation of motivation to illegally modify the gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of the game. can be made

It should be noted that game machines may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to circulate the second information after erasing it. Therefore, if only those who have a desire to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the game machine for a legitimate reason can erase the traces of the opening of the space, It is possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring soundness of games.

<Characteristic group Y>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspects 43 and 44 of the first embodiment) for controlling execution of games;
Based on the first information (information used for game progress processing stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) that is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game Information storage means for storing acquired second information (game history information such as winning ball tally stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, character ratio, etc., information on the number of balls entered, etc.) (main side RAM 64);
operation means (RAM clear button and power switch) for receiving a predetermined operation;
erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means is
The operation means performs the first operation (turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and entering a state in which the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) erasing the first information stored in the information storage means based on acceptance of the operation of
A second operation in which the operation means is different from the first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and continuing the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined period of time). A game machine characterized by comprising means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on acceptance of the second information.

According to feature Y1, the erasing means erases the first information stored in the information storage means when the operating means receives the first operation, and the operating means receives the first operation. is provided with means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on acceptance of a different second operation, by executing a different operation on the operation means, the information storage means It is possible to select the information to be erased from among the information stored in the . That is, the information to be erased can be selected without providing other operation means for selecting the information to be erased, so that the structure of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of game execution or at the start or end of business of the game hall, the first information, which is information used to control the execution of the game, is erased. When it is desired to initialize the control of the gaming machine, the first operation is executed, and on the other hand, the second information, which is the information obtained based on the executed game, is erased, and the gaming machine is newly operated. If you want to circulate it to the public, you just need to execute the second operation. In this way, by performing different operations on the operation means, it is possible to select information to be erased from among the information stored in the information storage means.

[Feature Y2]
The gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The erasing means accepts the second operation (the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and continuing the state of pressing the RAM clear button for a predetermined period of time). A gaming machine comprising means for erasing said first information in addition to erasing said second information stored in said information storage means, based on said information storage means.

According to the feature Y2, the erasing means erases the second information stored in the information storage means and also erases the first information based on the operation means accepting the second operation. Since means for erasing information is provided, both the first information and the second information can be erased by executing the second operation on the operating means.

<Feature Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 41 of the first embodiment) for controlling execution of a game;
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as total value of winning balls, role ratio, etc., information on the number of entered balls, etc.);
erasing means (an erasing IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
Receiving means for receiving authentication information (password);
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming machine, wherein the erasing means has means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the authentication information accepted by the accepting means satisfies a predetermined condition.

According to feature Z1, the erasing means has means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means when the authentication information received by the receiving means satisfies a predetermined condition. A person who has the authentication information that satisfies the requirements can erase the information stored in the information storage means. That is, it becomes possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears in the executed game, and furthermore, the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the information storage means, thereby confirming the information provided to the gaming machine. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, there are persons (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal persons") who desire to prevent inspectors from discovering that the gaming machine has been modified illegally by erasing the relevant information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to have authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition. If a person who can have authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition is restricted, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being deleted by an unauthorized person, which in turn leads to a game. It is possible to suppress the generation of motivation to illegally modify the machine, and improve the soundness of the game.

It should be noted that game machines may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information that has been stored before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is constructed in which only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for legitimate reasons can have the authentication information that satisfies the predetermined conditions, It is possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring soundness of games.

[Feature Z2]
The gaming machine according to feature Z1,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining memory even if power supply is interrupted.

According to feature Z2, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, it is possible to retain the information acquired based on the game that has been executed. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a game is being played normally in the gaming machine.

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information acquired based on the executed game includes information (total value of prize balls) regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

According to feature Z3, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using information on the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature Z4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box to which a seal is attached).

According to feature Z4, the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of openness remain. The space of the gaming machine is put into an open state, and a trace of the opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. That is, the information stored in the information storage means is illegally altered by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not there remains a trace of the opening of the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and furthermore, it is possible to generate motivation to illegally alter the information stored in the information storage means. can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

The inventions of the features T to Z described above solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines are designed to improve the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load on the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, and simplify the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and providing more sound games. Improvements in technology are desired.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
Signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
Judgment information output means (for detecting ball entry) that judges whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal, and outputs judgment information (ball entry information) that is information based on the judgment. IC62c);
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination information;
connection means (inspection terminal 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to the feature αA1, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. It becomes possible to receive determination information that has not been received.

For example, if a configuration in which determination information is output to a predetermined device connected to a connection means is employed without adopting the configuration of this feature, a problem occurs in the control means. In the case where the device has been modified illegally, there is a possibility that the determination information output to the predetermined device may be affected by the defect or the illegal modification.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means has means for outputting the determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Even if it occurs or is illegally modified, the determination information output to the predetermined device is not affected by the defect or the illegal modification. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on the determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

[Feature αA2]
The gaming machine according to feature αA1,
A plurality of said ball entry sections into which a game ball can enter and said signal output means for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into said ball entry section,
The determination information output means determines whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means. The determination information (ball entry information), which is information based on the determination and corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry sections, is serially transmitted to the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A game machine characterized by comprising means for outputting by.

According to feature αA2, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. , compared to the case of adopting a configuration in which the determination information is output by a parallel transmission method, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to a predetermined device can be simplified, and the predetermined device for receiving the determination information can be simplified. The configuration of the device can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of ball-entering sections is output by a parallel transmission method, the connecting means outputs output corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball-entering sections. It is necessary to have a department. Similarly, a given device must have input units corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball-entering units. In addition, since the number of ball-entering parts provided in a game machine differs for each type (model) of the game machine, it is necessary to prepare a predetermined device having a different number of terminals for each type (model) of the game machine. occurs.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means is means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may have at least one output unit capable of outputting determination information by a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball-entering units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connecting means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to have at least one input unit capable of inputting the determination information output by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball-entering units provided in the gaming machine. , the configuration of a given device can be simplified. Furthermore, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of ball-entering units, the predetermined device can input determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering units by a serial transmission method. can be done. That is, it is possible to use the predetermined device for other gaming machines having different numbers of ball-entering units. As a result, it is possible to increase the versatility of a given device.

[Feature αA3]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1 or feature αA2,
The connection means is configured to be connectable with the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as a role item ratio) that is information about a game history based on the determination information. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αA3, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can calculate the game history information based on the determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information that is not affected by the control means by using a predetermined device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

<Characteristic αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
a plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter;
a plurality of signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) that respectively output signals based on the entry of a game ball into each of the plurality of ball entry sections;
Based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entering portions, and information based on the determination determination information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) for outputting determination information (ball entry information) that is information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry portions;
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination information;
connection means (inspection terminal 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising
The determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections to the predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. game machine.

According to the feature αB1, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. , compared to the case of adopting a configuration in which the determination information is output by a parallel transmission method, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to a predetermined device can be simplified, and the predetermined device for receiving the determination information can be simplified. The configuration of the device can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of ball-entering sections is output by a parallel transmission method, the connecting means outputs output corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball-entering sections. It is necessary to have a department. Similarly, a given device must have input units corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball-entering units. In addition, since the number of ball-entering parts provided in a game machine differs for each type (model) of the game machine, it is necessary to prepare a predetermined device having a different number of terminals for each type (model) of the game machine. occurs.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means is means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may have at least one output unit capable of outputting determination information by a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball-entering units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connecting means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to have at least one input unit capable of inputting the determination information output by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball-entering units provided in the gaming machine. , the configuration of a given device can be simplified. Furthermore, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of ball-entering units, the predetermined device can input determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering units by a serial transmission method. can be done. That is, it is possible to use the predetermined device for other gaming machines having different numbers of ball-entering units. As a result, it is possible to increase the versatility of a given device.

[Feature αB2]
The gaming machine according to feature αB1,
The connection means is configured to be connectable with the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as a role item ratio) that is information about a game history based on the determination information. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αB2, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can calculate the game history information based on the determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information that is not affected by the control means by using a predetermined device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αB3]
A gaming machine according to feature αB1 or feature αB2,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αB3, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the predetermined device is not affected by the control means. It becomes possible to receive determination information that has not been received.

For example, if a configuration in which determination information is output to a predetermined device connected to a connection means is employed without adopting the configuration of this feature, a problem occurs in the control means. In the case where the device has been modified illegally, there is a possibility that the determination information output to the predetermined device may be affected by the defect or the illegal modification.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means has means for outputting the determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Even if it occurs or is illegally modified, the determination information output to the predetermined device is not affected by the defect or the illegal modification. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on the determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

<Characteristic αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
Signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
Judgment information output means (for detecting ball entry) that judges whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal, and outputs judgment information (ball entry information) that is information based on the judgment. IC62c);
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination information;
connection means (inspection terminal 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising
Only when the relationship with the predetermined device connected to the connection means satisfies a predetermined condition (when a Hi level signal is input from the inspection machine 320), the determination information output means outputs the predetermined A game machine characterized by comprising output control means for outputting the determination information to the device of the above.

According to feature αC1, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means only when the relationship with the predetermined device satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination information of the gaming machine from being output to the outside except when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination information of the gaming machine from being analyzed and abused by a malicious person.

[Feature αC2]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes receiving a predetermined signal from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to the feature αC2, when a predetermined condition including receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means is not satisfied, the determination information of the gaming machine is output to the outside. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination information of the gaming machine from being analyzed and abused by a malicious person.

[Feature αC3]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1 or feature αC2,
A plurality of said ball entry sections into which a game ball can enter and said signal output means for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into said ball entry section,
The determination information output means determines whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means. The determination information (ball entry information), which is information based on the determination and corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry sections, is serially transmitted to the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A game machine characterized by comprising means for outputting by.

According to feature αC3, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. , compared to the case of adopting a configuration in which the determination information is output by a parallel transmission method, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to a predetermined device can be simplified, and the predetermined device for receiving the determination information can be simplified. The configuration of the device can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of ball-entering sections is output by a parallel transmission method, the connecting means outputs output corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball-entering sections. It is necessary to have a department. Similarly, a given device must have input units corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball-entering units. In addition, since the number of ball entry units provided in a game machine differs according to the type (model) of the game machine, a predetermined device having a different number of input units is prepared for each type (model) of the game machine. need arises.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means is means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may have at least one output unit capable of outputting determination information by a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball-entering units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connecting means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to have at least one input unit capable of inputting the determination information output by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball-entering units provided in the gaming machine. , the configuration of a given device can be simplified. Furthermore, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of ball-entering units, the predetermined device can input determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering units by a serial transmission method. can be done. That is, it is possible to use the predetermined device for other gaming machines having different numbers of ball-entering units. As a result, it is possible to increase the versatility of a given device.

[Feature αC4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC3,
The connection means is configured to be connectable with the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as a role item ratio) that is information about a game history based on the determination information. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αC4, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can calculate the game history information based on the determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information that is not affected by the control means by using a predetermined device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αC5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC4,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to the feature αC5, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. It becomes possible to receive determination information that has not been received.

For example, if a configuration in which determination information is output to a predetermined device connected to a connection means is employed without adopting the configuration of this feature, a problem occurs in the control means. In the case where the device has been modified illegally, there is a possibility that the determination information output to the predetermined device may be affected by the defect or the illegal modification.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means has means for outputting the determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Even if it occurs or is illegally modified, the determination information output to the predetermined device is not affected by the defect or the illegal modification. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on the determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

<Characteristic αD group>
The feature αD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αD1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
Signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
Judgment information output means (for detecting ball entry) that judges whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal, and outputs judgment information (ball entry information) that is information based on the judgment. IC62c);
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination information;
connection means (inspection terminal 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising
The determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means,
The game machine further comprises
The number of prize balls, which is information capable of specifying the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the ball entry portion for the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A gaming machine comprising prize ball number information output means for outputting information.

According to the feature αD1, since the winning ball number information output means for outputting the winning ball number information to the predetermined device connected to the connecting means is provided, the trouble of manually inputting the winning ball number information to the predetermined device is eliminated. can be omitted, and it is possible to suppress the input of erroneous information on the number of winning balls to a predetermined device. As a result, the predetermined device can execute a process based on the determination information and the accurate information on the number of prize balls output from the information output means for information on the number of prize balls.

[Feature αD2]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1,
A gaming machine, comprising a type information output unit for outputting type information, which is information capable of specifying a type of the ball-entering unit, to the predetermined device connected to the connection unit.

According to the feature αD2, since the type information output means for outputting the type information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means is provided, it is possible to save the trouble of manually inputting the type information to the predetermined device. , it is possible to suppress input of wrong type information to a predetermined device. As a result, the predetermined device can execute processing based on the determination information output from the determination information output means and the accurate type information output from the type information output means. The type of the ball-entering portion refers to, for example, the ball-entering portion provided with signal output means (entering ball detection sensors 44a to 44h) such as a first start opening, a second start opening, a big winning opening, and a discharge passage. It is a type.

[Feature αD3]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
A plurality of said ball entry sections into which a game ball can enter and said signal output means for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into said ball entry section,
The determination information output means determines whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means. The determination information (ball entry information), which is information based on the determination and corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry sections, is serially transmitted to the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A game machine characterized by comprising means for outputting by.

According to feature αD3, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. , compared to the case of adopting a configuration in which the determination information is output by a parallel transmission method, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to a predetermined device can be simplified, and the predetermined device for receiving the determination information can be simplified. The configuration of the device can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of ball-entering sections is output by a parallel transmission method, the connecting means outputs output corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball-entering sections. It is necessary to have a department. Similarly, a given device must have input units corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball-entering units. In addition, since the number of ball-entering parts provided in a game machine differs for each type (model) of the game machine, it is necessary to prepare a predetermined device having a different number of terminals for each type (model) of the game machine. occurs.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means is means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may have at least one output unit capable of outputting determination information by a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball-entering units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connecting means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to have at least one input unit capable of inputting the determination information output by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball-entering units provided in the gaming machine. , the configuration of a given device can be simplified. Furthermore, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of ball-entering units, the predetermined device can input determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entering units by a serial transmission method. can be done. That is, it is possible to use the predetermined device for other gaming machines having different numbers of ball-entering units. As a result, it is possible to increase the versatility of a given device.

[Feature αD4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD3,
The prize-ball number information output means outputs the prize-ball number information based on the reception of a predetermined signal (ball entrance information transmission request command) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic αD4, the number-of-price-balls information output means includes means for outputting the number-of-price-balls information based on receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means. It is possible to suppress the information on the number of winning balls from being output to the outside at the timing.

[Feature αD5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD4,
A gaming machine, wherein the prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting the prize ball number information when the predetermined device is connected to the connection means.

According to the feature αD5, the prize number information output means includes means for outputting the prize number information when a predetermined device is connected to the connection means, so that the predetermined device is connected to the connection means. Information on the number of winning balls can be obtained quickly after the game is completed. Therefore, for example, after being connected to the connection means, the predetermined device can quickly execute a process that requires the information on the number of winning balls.

[Feature αD6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD5,
The connection means is configured to be connectable with the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as a role item ratio) that is information about a game history based on the determination information. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αD6, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can calculate the game history information based on the determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information that is not affected by the control means by using a predetermined device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αD7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD6,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αD7, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the predetermined device is not affected by the control means. It becomes possible to receive determination information that has not been received.

For example, if a configuration in which determination information is output to a predetermined device connected to a connection means is employed without adopting the configuration of this feature, a problem occurs in the control means. In the case where the device has been modified illegally, there is a possibility that the determination information output to the predetermined device may be affected by the defect or the illegal modification.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means has means for outputting the determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Even if it occurs or is illegally modified, the determination information output to the predetermined device is not affected by the defect or the illegal modification. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on the determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

[Feature αD8]
A gaming machine according to feature αD2,
The type information output means comprises means for outputting the type information based on reception of a predetermined signal (entrance information transmission request command) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αD8, the type information output means has means for outputting the type information based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the predetermined device connected to the connection means. It is possible to prevent information from being output to the outside.

[Feature αD9]
A gaming machine according to feature αD2 or feature D8,
A gaming machine, wherein the type information output means includes means for outputting the type information when the predetermined device is connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD9, the type information output means includes means for outputting type information when a predetermined device is connected to the connection means. Type information can be acquired. Therefore, for example, after being connected to the connecting means, the predetermined device can quickly execute a process that requires the type information.

<Characteristic αE group>
The feature αE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αE1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
Signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
Judgment information output means (for detecting ball entry) that judges whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal, and outputs judgment information (ball entry information) that is information based on the judgment. IC62c);
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination information;
Calculation means (main side CPU 62x, game history management chip 300) for calculating game history information (game history information such as role item ratio), which is information about game history based on the determination information;
storage means (flash memory 64x, game history management chip 300) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
connection means (inspection terminal 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising
The determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means,
The game machine further comprises
A gaming machine comprising game history information output means for outputting the game history information stored in the storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to the feature αE1, since means for outputting the game history information stored in the storage means and means for outputting the judgment information are provided to a predetermined device connected to the connection means, the device is connected to the connection means. The given device can receive the game history information stored in the storage means, and can execute processing based on the determination information.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined device can display game history information (hereinafter also referred to as first game history information) stored in the storage means of the gaming machine. Further, the predetermined device calculates the game history information based on the determination information received during the predetermined inspection period connected to the connection means of the game machine, and calculates the game history information (hereinafter also referred to as the second game history information). call) can be displayed. Therefore, for example, an inspector who inspects a gaming machine can play a second game based on the first game history information stored in the storage means provided in the gaming machine and the determination information received by a predetermined device during a predetermined inspection period. It becomes possible to compare with history information.

Here, if there is a change in the game characteristics of the game machine due to a malfunction or unauthorized modification (for example, alteration of nails, etc.), the game machine First game history information (game history information calculated by the calculation means based on the determination information in the past predetermined period) stored in the storage means provided, and the predetermined device based on the determination information in the predetermined inspection period There may be a difference between the second game history information calculated by Therefore, an inspector who inspects a gaming machine can inspect whether or not a defect or illegal modification (for example, modification of a nail) has occurred in the gaming machine by paying attention to the difference between the two pieces of game history information. can be done.

[Feature αE2]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1,
The number of prize balls, which is information capable of specifying the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the ball entry portion for the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A gaming machine comprising prize ball number information output means for outputting information.

According to the feature αE2, since the winning ball number information output means for outputting the winning ball number information to the predetermined device connected to the connecting means is provided, the trouble of manually inputting the winning ball number information to the predetermined device is eliminated. can be omitted, and it is possible to suppress the input of erroneous information on the number of winning balls to a predetermined device. As a result, the predetermined device can execute a process based on the determination information output from the determination information output means and the accurate winning ball number information output from the winning ball number information output means.

[Feature αE3]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1 or feature αE2,
The connection means is configured to be connectable with the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as a role item ratio) that is information about a game history based on the determination information. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αE3, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can calculate the game history information based on the judgment information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information that is not affected by the control means by using a predetermined device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αE4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αE1 to αE3,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to the feature αE4, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. It becomes possible to receive determination information that has not been received.

For example, if a configuration in which determination information is output to a predetermined device connected to a connection means is employed without adopting the configuration of this feature, a problem occurs in the control means. In the case where the device has been modified illegally, there is a possibility that the determination information output to the predetermined device may be affected by the defect or the illegal modification.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means has means for outputting the determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Even if it occurs or is illegally modified, the determination information output to the predetermined device is not affected by the defect or the illegal modification. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on the determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

<Characteristic αF group>
The feature αF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αF1]
a first processing group executing means for repeatedly executing a first processing group (residual processing of the main processing);
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the previous execution of the second processing group), the second processing group (game progress processing including game round control processing and the like) is executed. a second processing group executing means for interrupting and executing the first processing group;
A gaming machine comprising
The first processing group execution means executes the first processing group during a period (residual time) from the end of execution of one of the second processing groups to the start of execution of the next second processing group. having means for repeatedly executing
The first processing group includes game history information related processing (game history processing) that is processing related to calculation of game history information (character product ratio, continuous character ratio, etc.) that is information related to game history. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αF1, the first processing group including the game history information related processing is repeatedly executed during the period from the end of execution of one second processing group to the start of execution of the next second processing group. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first processing group including the game history information related processing from being started even though the execution of the second processing group has not ended. That is, while giving priority to the execution of the second processing group, the first processing group including the processing related to the game history information is repeatedly executed during the period in which the second processing group is not executed, whereby the game history information is quickly obtained. It is possible to calculate

Further, if a configuration is adopted in which the processing related to game history information is included in the second processing group and executed without adopting the configuration of this feature, the execution of the second processing group once The time required from the start to the end of the process becomes long, and the execution of the second process group is still finished at the timing when a predetermined condition triggering the start of the execution of the next second process group is met. In some cases, the execution of the next second processing group cannot be started until the execution of the one second processing group is completed. In this case, there is a possibility that a problem will occur due to the delay in starting the execution of the next second processing group.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since the game history information related process is included in the first process group and executed, it is compared with the configuration in which the game history information related process is included in the second process group and executed. , the time required from the start to the end of one execution of the second process group can be shortened. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of one second processing group has not yet finished at the timing when a predetermined condition triggering the start of execution of the next second processing group is met. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which execution of the next second processing group cannot be started until execution of the one second processing group is completed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to the delay in starting the execution of the next second process group.

As described above, according to this feature, while suppressing the occurrence of a problem due to the delay in the start of the execution of the next second processing group, the game history information related By repeatedly executing the first processing group including the processing, it is possible to efficiently and quickly calculate the game history information.

[Feature αF2]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1,
A gaming machine, wherein the second process group includes a game progress process which is a process relating to the progress of a game.

According to the feature αF2, it is possible to suppress the delay in starting the execution of the second process group including the game progress process, which is the process related to the progress of the game. The game history information can be quickly calculated by repeatedly executing the first processing group including the game history information related processing while the second processing group is not being executed.

[Feature αF3]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1 or feature αF2,
The game history information related processing includes a plurality of processing stages (multiple types of tasks) that are sequentially executed to complete the calculation of the game history information,
The gaming machine, wherein the first processing group executing means executes a part of the plurality of processing steps in one execution of the game history information related processing.

According to the feature αF3, the first process group executing means executes a part of the plurality of process stages in one execution of the game history information related process. The time required from the start to the end of one execution of the game history information related process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which all of the plurality of processing stages are executed in one execution of . Specifically, for example, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the game history information related process, the game history information related process being executed is completed in a short time, so that the first time after the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to shorten the time until the execution of the process group No. 2 is started. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group while suppressing the occurrence of problems due to the delay in starting the execution of the second processing group. .

[Feature αF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the previous execution of the second process group.

According to feature αF4, the predetermined condition includes that the predetermined time has elapsed since the previous execution of the second processing group was started, so the second processing group can be executed periodically. After the execution of the second processing group is completed, the first processing group including the game history information related processing is executed during a period from the start of execution of the second processing group until a predetermined time elapses. Repeated execution makes it possible to quickly calculate the game history information.

The inventions of the above features αA group to αF group solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, technical improvements are made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (eg, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to improve the enjoyment of the games, reduce the processing load of the gaming machines, simplify control, and provide more sound games.

<Characteristic αG group>
The feature αG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αG1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
storage means for storing detection information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history basic information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, etc.) that is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The storage means comprises means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods bounded by changes in the winning probability,
The calculation means comprises means for calculating game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods,
The gaming machine, wherein the display means includes means for displaying based on the game history information for each of the plurality of periods.

According to the feature αG1, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the display based on the gaming history information for each of a plurality of periods with the change in winning probability in the gaming machine as a boundary. For example, if the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the inspector should check whether the gaming history information falls within an appropriate range in the process in which the winning probability has been changed in the gaming machine in the past. It becomes possible to check whether or not there was a situation in which it was not.

<Characteristic αH group>
The feature αH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αH1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
storage means for storing detection information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history basic information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, etc.) that is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
Predetermined information (short-term change information) is displayed when the winning probability is changed again before the detection information stored in the storage means is accumulated to a predetermined amount after the winning probability is changed. predetermined information display means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αH1, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm whether or not the winning probability has been changed again before the detection information is accumulated up to a predetermined amount by confirming the predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability based on illicit intentions.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the detection information stored before the change in the winning probability is deleted based on the change in the winning probability, before the game machine is inspected by the inspector In addition, the manager of the gaming machine changes the winning probability again and stores it in the gaming machine, even though the gaming machine is in a state where games are not being played much after the winning probability is changed. There is a possibility of erasing the detection information that is present. However, according to this aspect, when the winning probability is changed again in a short period of time in spite of the fact that the game is not being played much in the gaming machine after the winning probability is changed, the above-mentioned Short-term change information will be recorded and displayed. Therefore, by confirming the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that there is a possibility that the winning probability has been changed in a short period of time due to fraudulent intentions such as erasing the detection information. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability based on illicit intentions.

[Feature αH2]
A gaming machine according to feature αH1,
An erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means,
The storage means comprises means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods bounded by changes in the winning probability,
The calculation means comprises means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods,
The display means comprises means for displaying based on the game history information for each of the plurality of periods,
A gaming machine, wherein the erasing means has means for erasing the detection information in the oldest period among the plurality of periods when the winning probability is changed.

According to the feature αH2, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the display based on the gaming history information for each of a plurality of periods bounded by changes in the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the inspector should check whether the gaming history information falls within an appropriate range in the process in which the winning probability has been changed in the gaming machine in the past. It becomes possible to check whether or not there was a situation in which it was not.

Furthermore, according to this feature, an inspector of the gaming machine can confirm whether or not the winning probability has been changed again before the detection information is accumulated up to a predetermined amount by confirming the predetermined information. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability based on illicit intentions.

Specifically, for example, before the gaming machine is inspected by an inspector, the manager of the gaming machine repeatedly changes the winning probability in a short period of time, and changes the winning probability of the gaming machine as a boundary. There is a possibility of erasing the detection information for multiple time periods. However, according to this feature, when the winning probability is repeatedly changed in a short period of time, the above-described short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by confirming the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that there is a possibility that the winning probability has been changed in a short period of time with fraudulent intentions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability based on illicit intentions.

<Characteristic αI group>
The feature αI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αI1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
storage means for storing detection information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history basic information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, etc.) that is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
an erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
When the winning probability is changed, the erasing means deletes the winning probability after the detection information stored in the storage means after the winning probability is changed is accumulated up to a predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means before the detection information is stored.

According to the feature αI1, until the detection information stored in the storage means is accumulated up to a predetermined amount after the winning probability is changed, the detection information stored in the storage means before the winning probability is changed is Since it is not erased, it is possible to prevent intentional erasure of the detection information stored before the winning probability is changed by changing the winning probability of the game machine. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the detection information acquired and stored before the winning probability is changed is deleted immediately after the winning probability of the gaming machine is changed, the gaming machine is inspected by an inspector. Before the winning probability is changed, the manager of the gaming machine may change the winning probability and erase the detection information that was stored before the winning probability was changed. On the other hand, according to this feature, the detection information stored before the change of the winning probability is stored until the detection information acquired and stored after the change of the winning probability accumulates up to a predetermined amount. is not erased, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability with an illegal intention.

[Feature αI2]
The gaming machine according to feature αI1,
An erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means,
The storage means comprises means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods bounded by changes in the winning probability,
The calculation means comprises means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods,
The display means comprises means for displaying based on the game history information for each of the plurality of periods,
When the winning probability is changed, the erasing means deletes the detection information stored in the storage means after the winning probability is changed to a predetermined amount, and deletes the detection information within the plurality of periods. A game machine characterized by comprising means for erasing the detection information in the oldest period of the period.

According to the feature αI2, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the display based on the gaming history information for each of a plurality of periods with the change in winning probability in the gaming machine as a boundary. For example, if the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the inspector should check whether the gaming history information falls within an appropriate range in the process in which the winning probability has been changed in the gaming machine in the past. It becomes possible to check whether or not there was a situation in which it was not.

Furthermore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress intentional deletion of detection information in a plurality of periods bounded by changes in the winning probability due to repeated changes in the winning probability of the gaming machine. can. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the detection information in the oldest period among a plurality of periods bounded by a change in winning probability is deleted immediately after the winning probability of the gaming machine is changed, the gaming machine Before being inspected by an inspector, the manager of the gaming machine may repeatedly change the winning probability and erase the sensing information of the gaming machine for multiple periods. On the other hand, according to this feature, the detection information in the oldest period among the plurality of periods bounded by the change in the winning probability is the detection information acquired and stored after the change in the winning probability. Since it is not erased until it is accumulated up to the amount of , it is possible to suppress the change of the winning probability by an illegal intention by the administrator of the gaming machine.

<Characteristic αJ group>
The feature αJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αJ1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
storage means for storing detection information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history basic information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, etc.) that is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The storage means comprises means for storing the detection information separately for each of the winning probabilities at the time when the detection means detects the game ball,
The calculating means comprises means for calculating the gaming history information for each winning probability,
The gaming machine, wherein the display means includes means for displaying based on the game history information for each winning probability.

According to the feature αJ1, for example, when the display based on the game history information is the numerical value of the game history information itself, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine whether each piece of game history information calculated and displayed for each winning probability is appropriate. You can check if it is within range. In other words, the inspector can confirm whether or not there is a winning probability setting in which the game history information is not within an appropriate range in the gaming machine.

The inventions of the features αG to αJ solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, technical improvements are made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (eg, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to improve the enjoyment of the games, reduce the processing load of the gaming machines, simplify control, and provide more sound games.

<Characteristic αK group>
The feature αK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αK1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
storage means for storing detection information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history basic information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
It has a first display area and a second display area configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting part, CP light emitting part), and predetermined information is displayed in the first display area and the second display area. a displayable display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
When displaying the game history information, information about the type of the game history information is displayed in the first display area using the display element, and the game history information is displayed in the second display area. means for displaying numerical information using said display element;
When the winning probability is changed, the information about the type of the game history information is displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when the information about the type of the game history information is displayed in the first display area. means for displaying a display mode using only display elements used at the time of winning, and displaying numerical information regarding the setting of the probability of winning in the second display area using the display elements;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic αK1, the second display area of the display means displays the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the manager of the gaming machine can clearly distinguish whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or whether the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from erroneously recognizing the numerical information displayed in the second display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. be able to.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the display elements of the first display area that are not used when displaying the game history information (for example, the segment light-emitting portions A, B, and DP light-emitting portions of the left end seven-segment display 45z1, the middle left seven Since the segment light-emitting portion B) of the segment display 45z2 is not used even when the winning probability is changed, unused display elements (hereinafter referred to as unused display elements) are present in the first display area. . Therefore, for example, even if a problem occurs in an unused display element in the first display area, the display mode in the first display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode will be affected when a problem occurs in the display element of the first display area.

Further, for example, when a light-emitting element such as an LED is adopted as a display element, since the light-emitting element that is an unused display element does not need to emit light, parts necessary for causing the light-emitting element to emit light can be omitted. can be done. Therefore, the cost of the display means can be reduced.

<Characteristic αL group>
The feature αL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αL1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
storage means for storing detection information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history basic information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means having a first display area and a second display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
means for displaying information about the type of the game history information in the first display area and displaying numerical information of the game history information in the second display area when the game history information is displayed; ,
means for displaying numerical information relating to the setting of the winning probability in the second display region without displaying anything in the first display region when the winning probability is changed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αL1, the first display area is displayed in the second display area of the display means when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed and when the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the manager of the gaming machine can clearly distinguish whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or whether the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from erroneously recognizing the numerical information displayed in the second display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. be able to.

Further, according to this feature, for example, the first display area is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs), predetermined information is displayed by emitting light from predetermined light emitting elements, and all light emitting elements are extinguished. In the case of a configuration in which nothing is displayed by this, even if there is a problem that some light emitting elements constituting the first display area do not emit light, there is a serious problem that all the light emitting elements do not emit light. As long as does not occur, the display mode of the first display area differs between when the game history information is displayed and when numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. Therefore, according to this feature, even if some light emitting elements constituting the first display area do not emit light, it is a serious problem that all the light emitting elements do not emit light. As long as no trouble has occurred, it is possible to discriminate whether the numerical information displayed in the second display area is the game history information or the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. That is, when at least part of the light-emitting elements are emitting light in the first display area, the manager determines that the numerical value displayed in the second display area is the gaming history information. Only when all the light-emitting elements constituting the display area are turned off, it can be determined that the numerical value displayed in the second display area is the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability.

<Characteristic αM group>
The feature αM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αM1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
storage means for storing detection information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history basic information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means having a predetermined display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the predetermined display area;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
means for displaying numerical information of the game history information in a predetermined number of digits (two digits) in the predetermined display area when displaying the game history information;
means for displaying numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined display area in a number of digits (one digit) different from the predetermined number of digits when the winning probability is changed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αM1, the number of digits of the displayed numerical value varies depending on whether the numerical information regarding the gaming history information is displayed in the predetermined display area or the numerical information regarding the winning probability setting is displayed. will be different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the gaming machine can clearly distinguish whether the numerical information regarding the game history information is displayed in the predetermined display area of the display means or the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. can be recognized. As a result, the manager of the gaming machine misunderstands the numerical information displayed in the predetermined display area of the display means between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. can be suppressed.

<Characteristic αN group>
The feature αN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αN1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
storage means for storing detection information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history basic information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means having a first display area and a second display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
means for displaying information about the type of the game history information in the first display area and displaying numerical information of the game history information in the second display area when the game history information is displayed; ,
When the winning probability is changed, a plurality of types of display modes (display pattern A and display pattern B) that are not displayed when the information related to the type of the gaming history information is displayed in the first display area are switched. means for repeatedly displaying and displaying numerical information relating to the setting of the winning probability in the second display area;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αN1, the first display area is displayed in the second display area of the display means when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed and when the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the manager of the gaming machine can clearly distinguish whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or whether the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from erroneously recognizing the numerical information displayed in the second display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. be able to.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the display mode in the first display area dynamically changes during the period in which the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed in the second display area. It is possible to call attention to the administrator of the status that it is an important state in which the winning probability should be changed carefully.

<Characteristic αO group>
The feature αO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αO1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
storage means for storing detection information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history basic information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the gaming history information calculated by the calculating means;
Based on the information amount of the detection information (the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs during the normal mode)) that is the basis for calculating the game history information, the game history on the display means determining means for determining the display mode (lighting display or blinking display) of the display based on the information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αO1, the administrator of the gaming machine can grasp how much detection information that is the basis for calculating the game history information is accumulated by checking the display mode on the display means. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the numerical value of the displayed gaming history information was calculated with a sufficient amount of statistical data accumulated.

The inventions of the features αK to αO solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, technical improvements are made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (eg, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to improve the enjoyment of the games, reduce the processing load of the gaming machines, simplify control, and provide more sound games.

<Characteristic αP group>
The feature αP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αP1]
A gaming machine comprising control means for controlling a game,
The control means is
a CPU (main-side CPU 62x) comprising a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer, and executing a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
Program storage means (main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area for storing the second program, which is different from the first program storage area program storage means 63a);
a first stack area corresponding to the first program accessible by the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer; and an area different from the first stack area and stored in the stack pointer. stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a second stack area corresponding to the second program accessible by the second stack area reference address;
a first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data; and a second data storage area different from the first data storage area and corresponding to the second program capable of updating data. A data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main side RAM 64) having
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In the processing by the first program, the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced. and
In the processing by the second program, the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced. and
The CPU
By executing a program included in the first program, a first process (game progress process) is performed,
After performing the first process, by executing a program included in the first program, performing a storage process of storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area;
By executing a program included in the second program after executing the storage process, the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer is stored in the second data storage area, and the storing the second stack area reference address in a stack pointer and performing a saving process of storing the values of each of the plurality of registers in the second data storage area;
After executing the saving process, a second process (game history information calculation display process) is executed by executing a program included in the second program,
After executing the second process, by executing the program included in the second program, the values of the plurality of registers are set to the values stored in the second data storage area by the saving process, and performing a restore process of storing the first stack area reference address stored in the second data storage area by the save process in the stack pointer;
By executing a program included in the first program after the restoration process is performed, the value of the flag register among the plurality of registers set by the restoration process is restored by the storage process. A gaming machine characterized by carrying out a change process for changing the value stored in the 1 stack area or the first data storage area.

According to feature αP1, since save processing and restoration processing are performed, when returning from the second program to the first program, there is a problem that the value of the register used in the first program has changed. can be avoided.

Further, according to this feature, even if the value of the flag register changes at the timing after executing the storing process and before executing the save process, the change process can be performed to restore the flag register. Since the value returns to the same value immediately after the first process by the first program ends, there is no possibility that the process by the first program executed after returning from the process by the second program will be affected. As a result, it becomes possible to configure a plurality of programs independently.

Further, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the process by the first program simply by adding the program for executing the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program for executing the second process independently of the first program.

Further, for example, when the amount of data to be stored in the stack area exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area, reset processing is performed to erase all the data stored in the stack area. In the configuration, if the values of each of the plurality of registers are stored in the second stack area in the saving process, the reset process may be executed. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the values of each of the plurality of registers are stored in the second data storage area in the saving process, the risk of resetting the stack area can be avoided.

<Characteristic αQ group>
The feature αQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αQ1]
A gaming machine comprising control means for controlling a game,
The control means is
a CPU (main-side CPU 62x) comprising a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer, and executing a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
Program storage means (main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area for storing the second program, which is different from the first program storage area program storage means 63a);
a first stack area corresponding to the first program accessible by the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer; and an area different from the first stack area and stored in the stack pointer. stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a second stack area corresponding to the second program accessible by the second stack area reference address;
a first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data; and a second data storage area different from the first data storage area and corresponding to the second program capable of updating data. A data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main side RAM 64) having
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In the processing by the first program, the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced. and
In the processing by the second program, the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced. and
The CPU
By executing a program included in the first program, a first process (game progress process) is performed,
After performing the first process, by executing a program included in the first program, performing a storage process of storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area;
By executing a program included in the second program after performing the storage processing, the address for referring to the second stack area is stored in the stack pointer, and the values of the plurality of registers are stored as the second data. Carry out save processing to store in the storage area,
After executing the saving process, a second process (game history information calculation display process) is executed by executing a program included in the second program,
By executing the program included in the second program after executing the second process, the values of the plurality of registers are set to the values stored in the second data storage area by the save process and fixed. performing a return process for storing the first stack area reference address, which is a value, in the stack pointer;
By executing a program included in the first program after the restoration process is performed, the value of the flag register among the plurality of registers set by the restoration process is restored by the storage process. A gaming machine characterized by carrying out a change process for changing the value stored in the 1 stack area or the first data storage area.

According to feature αQ1, since save processing and restoration processing are performed, when returning from the second program to the first program, there is a problem that the value of the register used in the first program has changed. can be avoided.

Further, according to this feature, even if the value of the flag register changes at the timing after executing the storing process and before executing the save process, the change process can be performed to restore the flag register. Since the value returns to the same value immediately after the first process by the first program ends, there is no possibility that the process by the first program executed after returning from the process by the second program will be affected. As a result, it becomes possible to configure a plurality of programs independently.

Further, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the process by the first program simply by adding the program for executing the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program for executing the second process independently of the first program.

Further, for example, when the amount of data to be stored in the stack area exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area, reset processing is performed to erase all the data stored in the stack area. In the configuration, if the values of each of the plurality of registers are stored in the second stack area in the saving process, the reset process may be executed. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the values of each of the plurality of registers are stored in the second data storage area in the saving process, the risk of resetting the stack area can be avoided.

Further, according to this feature, since the first stack area reference address, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer in the restore process, the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer is stored in the second stack area in the save process. No need to save to data storage. Therefore, the processing of the CPU can be simplified, and the storage capacity of the second data storage area required for saving the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer can be reduced. .

<Characteristic αR group>
The feature αR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αR1]
A gaming machine comprising control means for controlling a game,
The control means is
a CPU (main-side CPU 62x) comprising a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer, and executing a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
Program storage means (main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area for storing the second program, which is different from the first program storage area program storage means 63a);
a first stack area corresponding to the first program accessible by the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer; and an area different from the first stack area and stored in the stack pointer. stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a second stack area corresponding to the second program accessible by the second stack area reference address;
a first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data; and a second data storage area different from the first data storage area and corresponding to the second program capable of updating data. A data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main side RAM 64) having
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In the processing by the first program, the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced. and
In the processing by the second program, the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced. and
The CPU
By executing a program included in the first program, a first process (game progress process) is performed,
After performing the first process, by executing a program included in the first program, performing a storage process of storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area;
after performing the storage process, performing a first clear process of setting the values of each of the plurality of registers to 0 by executing a program included in the first program;
After performing the first clearing process, performing a first storing process of storing the second stack area reference address in the stack pointer by executing a program included in the second program,
After executing the first storage process, a second process (game history information calculation display process) is executed by executing a program included in the second program,
performing a second storing process of storing the first stack area reference address, which is a fixed value, in the stack pointer by executing a program included in the second program after performing the second process;
After performing the second storage process, performing a second clear process of setting the values of each of the plurality of registers to 0 by executing a program included in the second program,
After executing the second clearing process, the value of the flag register is stored in the first stack area or the first data storage area by the storing process by executing the program included in the first program. A gaming machine characterized by executing change processing for changing to a value.

According to feature αR1, the program included in the first program performs the first clear processing, and the program included in the second program performs the second clear processing. The values of each of the plurality of registers can be matched with the values of each of the plurality of registers immediately after execution of the second program ends. Therefore, when returning from the second program to the first program, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems due to the changes in the values of the plurality of registers used in the first program.

Also, according to this feature, since the storage process and the change process are performed, the value of the flag register is restored to the same value as immediately after the first process by the first program ends. Therefore, there is no risk of affecting the processing by the first program that is executed after returning from the processing by the second program. As a result, it becomes possible to configure a plurality of programs independently.

Further, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the process by the first program simply by adding the program for executing the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program for executing the second process independently of the first program.

Further, according to this feature, since the first stack area reference address, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer in the return process, the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer is stored in the save process. There is no need to save to the second data storage area. Therefore, the processing of the CPU can be simplified, and the storage capacity of the second data storage area required for saving the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer can be reduced. .

<Characteristic αS group>
The feature αS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αS1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing information about the progress of the game;
detection means for detecting an abnormality in the storage means;
initialization means for initializing the storage means when the detection means detects the abnormality;
A gaming machine comprising
The game machine is characterized in that the change mode executing means comprises means for executing the change mode when the initialization is executed, even if the predetermined operation is not accepted.

If the storage means is initialized due to an abnormality in the storage means, there is a possibility that the setting information of the winning probability will be rewritten with setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. . If the setting information of the winning probability is not initialized (changed) even if the storage means is initialized, there is a possibility that the setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator is still maintained. .

According to the feature αS1, when the storage means is initialized due to an abnormality in the storage means, the change mode is executed. , it is possible to change the setting information of the winning probability to the originally intended setting information.

[Feature αS2]
The gaming machine according to feature αS1,
The gaming machine, wherein the initialization means includes means for not initializing information related to a game state among the information stored in the storage means when initializing the storage means.

According to the feature αS2, even if the storage means is initialized, the information regarding the game state is not initialized, so the player can resume the game while maintaining the game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the initialization of the storage means.

[Feature αS3]
A gaming machine according to feature αS1 or feature αS2,
A game machine, comprising: an informing means for informing that the winning probability is changed in the change mode when the winning probability is changed.

When the storage means is initialized due to an abnormality in the storage means and the change mode is executed, the player who has been playing the game in the gaming machine is not allowed to enter the change mode after the storage means is initialized. It is assumed that the winning probability has been changed due to this. However, according to this feature, when the winning probability is changed, the fact that the winning probability has been changed is notified, so the player can confirm whether or not the winning probability has been changed. More specifically, to allow the player to grasp only whether or not the winning probability has been changed in the change mode without letting the player grasp what kind of setting information the current winning probability setting information is. can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having to restart the game with an uneasy feeling while not knowing whether or not the winning probability has been changed by the manager.

<Characteristic αT group>
The feature αT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αT1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
a notification means for notifying that the winning probability has been changed when the winning probability is changed in the changing mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αT1, the player can recognize that the winning probability has been changed in the change mode. Specifically, for example, it is possible to allow the player to grasp only whether or not the winning probability has been changed in the change mode without grasping what the current setting of the winning probability is. can.

[Feature αT2]
A gaming machine according to feature αT1,
A gaming machine comprising: a second notification means for notifying in a manner different from the notification by the notification means when the winning probability is not changed in the change mode.

According to feature αT2, the player can recognize that the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

[Feature αT3]
A gaming machine according to feature αT1 or feature αT2,
The gaming machine, wherein the second notification means includes means for notifying that the winning probability has not been changed when the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

According to feature αT3, the player can clearly recognize that the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

<Characteristic αU group>
The feature αU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αU1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a first operation from the outside;
information display mode execution means for executing an information display mode in which the progress of the game is stopped and information on the winning probability is displayed by receiving a second operation different from the first operation from the outside;
a role that continues a certain action regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming machine, wherein the accessory continues the predetermined action even during the information display mode.

According to the feature αU1, even at the start and end timings of the information display mode in which the progress of the game is stopped, the action of the character does not stop or change and continues to perform a certain action. It is possible to prevent a player from shooting a game ball aiming at the timing when the action stops or changes and obtaining an illegally advantageous result.

<Characteristic αV group>
The feature αV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αV1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a first operation from the outside;
information display mode execution means for executing an information display mode in which the progress of the game is stopped and information on the winning probability is displayed by receiving a second operation different from the first operation from the outside;
a role that continues a certain action regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the accessory enters a predetermined state and stops the given action during the information display mode.

According to the feature αV1, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles in a role product that may cause troubles if the operation is stopped in a state other than a predetermined state.

The inventions having the features αP to αV solve the following problems.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of providing a game machine that is less likely to cause problems and a game machine that takes players into account.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

<Characteristic αW group>
The feature αW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αW1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an operation from the outside;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting change mode execution means, when the game machine is powered on, satisfies the first condition (the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is ON). means for executing the setting change mode when the above condition is satisfied, but not executing the setting change mode even if the first condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature αW1, in order to execute the setting change mode in a gaming machine that has already been powered on, it is necessary to turn off the power of the gaming machine once and then turn it on again. Generally, in a gaming hall, it is difficult for a person other than the manager of the gaming machine to turn off the power once and then turn it on again by operating the power switch provided on the back of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine from being illegally changed by a person who is not the administrator of the gaming machine and has an illegal intention.

[Feature αW2]
A gaming machine according to feature αW1,
setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information relating to setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
The setting information display mode executing means satisfies the second condition (the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is turned ON) when the gaming machine is powered on. Means for executing the setting information display mode when the above condition is satisfied, but not executing the setting information display mode even when the second condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αW2, in order to execute the setting information display mode in a gaming machine that has already been powered on, it is necessary to turn off the power of the gaming machine once and then turn it on again. Generally, in a gaming hall, it is difficult for a person other than the manager of the gaming machine to turn off the power once and then turn it on again by operating the power switch provided on the back of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine from being illegally known by a person who is not the administrator of the gaming machine and has an illegal intention.

[Feature αW3]
A gaming machine according to feature αW1 or feature αW2,
A game machine, comprising a notification means for notifying when the game machine is powered on.

According to the feature αW3, it is possible to make it difficult for a person who is not the administrator of the game machine and who has illegal intentions to turn off the power of the game machine once and then turn it on again without being noticed by the surroundings. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent a person who is not the administrator of the gaming machine and who has illegal intentions from changing or confirming the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine.

<Characteristic αX group>
The feature αX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αX1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an operation from the outside;
setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information relating to the setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing information including the setting information;
Judgment processing execution means for executing a predetermined judgment process (processing for calculating a RAM judgment value and judging whether or not it is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting information display mode executing means determines that the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result (a result that the RAM determination value is not normal) even when the condition for executing the setting information display mode is satisfied. ), the gaming machine comprising means for not executing the setting information display mode.

When the result of the predetermined determination process based on the information stored in the storage means is the predetermined result, the setting information stored in the storage means is an abnormal value not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. It is possible that According to the feature αX1, the setting information display mode is prevented from being executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the winning probability stored in the storage means has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator. can be suppressed.

<Characteristic αY group>
The feature αY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αY1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an operation from the outside;
Operation means (RAM clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation (operation to be pressed);
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing information about the progress of the game;
An erasing process (RAM clearing process) for erasing the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on while the operation means has accepted the predetermined operation (the RAM clear button is pressed). an erasing process executing means for executing
A gaming machine comprising
The setting change mode execution means is set under a predetermined condition including that the operation means has accepted the predetermined operation (when the power is turned on, the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON). and that the RAM clear button is pressed) is established, means for executing the setting change mode,
A gaming machine, wherein the erasing process executing means comprises means for executing the erasing process before or after execution of the setting change mode when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In general, when an administrator who manages a gaming machine turns on the power of the gaming machine in a state where the operating means has received a predetermined operation, an erasing process for erasing the information stored in the storage means is executed. I am aware of that. Therefore, according to the feature αY1, when the administrator is caused to execute the setting change mode by satisfying a predetermined condition including that the operating means has accepted a predetermined operation, the setting change mode is executed. It is possible to strongly recognize that not only is executed, but also erasing processing is executed. As a result, for example, when the manager wants to restart the gaming machine from the state when the power was turned off last time while maintaining the gaming state such as the high probability mode, that is, when the administrator starts the gaming machine, the erasing process is executed. is not permitted to be executed, it is possible to reliably determine that the setting change mode is not to be executed. That is, according to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the administrator to easily understand the operation.

<Characteristic αZ group>
The feature αZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αZ1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an operation from the outside;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing information including setting information, which is information relating to setting of the winning probability;
erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means is
a first erasing process (first RAM clearing process) for erasing information other than the setting information without erasing the setting information among the information stored in the storage means;
a second erasing process (second RAM clearing process) for erasing information including the setting information among the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing

According to the characteristic αZ1, of the information stored in the storage means, in both the processing step in which the setting information is left and the other information is deleted, and the processing step in which the setting information is also deleted. Corresponding process steps can be realized. For example, if the setting information is normal and should be maintained, but other information should be deleted, the setting information will not be deleted, and the setting information will become an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator. It is possible to implement a configuration in which information including setting information is erased in the case of a processing step that may have occurred.

[Feature αZ2]
The gaming machine according to feature αZ1,
Judgment processing execution means for executing a predetermined judgment process (a process for calculating a RAM judgment value and judging whether or not it is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means,
The erasing means comprises means for executing the second erasing process when the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result (result that the RAM determination value is not normal). machine.

When the result of the predetermined determination process based on the information stored in the storage means is the predetermined result, the setting information stored in the storage means is an abnormal value not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. It is possible that According to the feature αZ2, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed while leaving the possibility that the winning probability setting information stored in the storage means has become an abnormal value unintended by the manager. can be done.

<Characteristic βA group>
The feature βA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βA1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an operation from the outside;
a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing information including setting information, which is information relating to setting of the lottery probability;
Judgment processing execution means for executing a predetermined judgment process (processing for calculating a RAM judgment value and judging whether or not it is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting change mode executing means performs a predetermined operation for executing the setting change mode (the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is pressed). Even if the operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10) is not accepted, if the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result (result that the RAM determination value is not normal) , and means for executing the setting change mode.

When the result of the predetermined determination process based on the information stored in the storage means is the predetermined result, the setting information stored in the storage means is an abnormal value not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. It is possible that According to the feature βA1, when the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result, the setting change mode is executed, so the administrator can change the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the winning probability stored in the storage means has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

<Characteristic βB group>
The feature βB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βB1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an operation from the outside;
display means (main display unit 45) for displaying information about the game including the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying a first display mode (a display pattern in which all LEDs are lit) that is not displayed when displaying the information about the game during execution of the setting change mode.

According to the feature βB1, it is possible to inform the manager and the players that the setting change mode is being executed by using the display means for displaying the information about the game. Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with display means for displaying information about a game, the setting change mode can be changed only by changing the control program of the gaming machine without changing the hardware configuration of the gaming machine. It is possible to change the configuration so that the administrator and the players can be notified of the execution. Therefore, for example, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced compared to a configuration in which a dedicated display means for notifying that the setting change mode is being executed is additionally provided.

[Feature βB2]
A gaming machine according to feature βB1,
setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information relating to setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
The display means is
During execution of the setting information display mode, a second display mode (a display mode in which all LEDs blink simultaneously), which is a display mode that is not displayed when the information related to the game is displayed and is different from the first display mode. ), a gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying .

According to the feature βB2, it is possible to inform the manager and the players that the setting information display mode is being executed instead of the setting change mode by using the display means for displaying the information about the game. Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with display means for displaying information related to a game, the setting information display mode can be changed only by changing the control program of the gaming machine without changing the hardware configuration of the gaming machine. It is possible to change the configuration so that it is possible to notify the manager or the player that the is being executed. Therefore, for example, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced compared to a configuration in which a dedicated display means for notifying that the setting information display mode is being executed is additionally provided.

<Characteristic βC group>
The feature βC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βC1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means (information display section 45z) for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
a control means for controlling the display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is composed of a plurality of light emitting units,
The control means comprises means for controlling so that all of the plurality of light-emitting units constituting the display means are turned on when the game machine is powered on. game machine.

According to feature βC1, when the game machine is powered on, the manager of the gaming machine checks whether there is a light-emitting part that does not light up due to a problem such as disconnection among the light-emitting parts that constitute the display means. be able to.

[Feature βC2]
A gaming machine according to feature βC1,
The control means comprises means for controlling so that all of the plurality of light-emitting units constituting the display means are in a blinking state when the game machine is powered on. game machine.

According to the feature βC2, when the gaming machine is powered on, the administrator of the gaming machine checks whether there is a light-emitting part that is always on and does not turn off due to a problem in the light-emitting part that constitutes the display means. can be confirmed.

<Characteristic βD group>
The feature βD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βD1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means (information display section 45z) for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
a control means for controlling the display means;
an operation means (information display unit inspection button) for receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is composed of a plurality of light emitting units,
The control means comprises means for performing control such that all of the plurality of light-emitting portions constituting the display means are turned on based on the operation means receiving the predetermined operation. Amusement machine.

According to the feature βD1, the manager of the gaming machine can always confirm whether or not there is a light-emitting unit that does not light up due to a problem such as a disconnection among the light-emitting units constituting the display unit by operating the operation unit. can be done.

[Feature βD2]
A gaming machine according to feature βD1,
The control means comprises means for performing control such that all of the plurality of light-emitting units constituting the display means are in a blinking state based on the operation means receiving the predetermined operation. Amusement machine.

According to feature βD2, the manager of the gaming machine can check at any time whether there is a light-emitting unit that is constantly lit due to a problem and does not turn off, among the light-emitting units that constitute the display unit, by operating the operation unit. can be confirmed.

<Characteristic βE group>
The feature βE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βE1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means (information display section 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The storage means comprises means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods bounded by a predetermined timing,
The calculation means comprises means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods,
The gaming machine, wherein the display means comprises means for switching and displaying a plurality of pieces of game history information for each of the plurality of periods.

According to the feature βE1, the inspector of the gaming machine can check a plurality of pieces of game history information for each of a plurality of periods bounded by predetermined timings in the gaming machine. For example, the inspector can confirm whether or not there is a situation in which the game history information is not within an appropriate range in a plurality of periods bounded by a predetermined timing in the gaming machine.

[Feature βE2]
A gaming machine according to feature βE1,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined timing is timing when a date changes.

According to feature βE2, the inspector of the gaming machine can check a plurality of pieces of game history information for each date in the gaming machine. For example, the inspector can confirm for each date whether or not there was a situation in which the game history information did not fall within an appropriate range.

<Characteristic βF group>
The feature βF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βF1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means (information display section 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means when a predetermined operation is received;
A gaming machine comprising
After the detection information is erased by the erasing means, the display means displays the game history information until a predetermined condition is satisfied (until the counted discharge passage passing number _NOUT reaches a predetermined number). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for not displaying the numerical information.

According to the characteristic βF1, when the numerical information of the game history information is not displayed on the display means, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm that the predetermined condition is not established after the detection information is erased by the erasing means. can be recognized.

The inventions of the features αW group to feature βF group solve the following problems.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of providing a game machine that is less likely to cause problems and a game machine that takes players into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

<Characteristic βG group>
The feature βG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βG1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation means _calculates the plurality of means for calculating a plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each period of
The display means is
Means for switching and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods, wherein when switching the display of the game history information, the display corresponding to one of the plurality of periods After shifting from the display mode of displaying the gaming history information (the display mode of displaying the bass corresponding to the section bL) to the display mode of not displaying any of the plurality of gaming history information (all lights off), the plurality of periods A gaming machine comprising means for shifting to a display mode for displaying the game history information corresponding to the other period (a display mode for displaying the base corresponding to the section b1).

According to the characteristic βG1, when switching the display of the game history information, the display means switches from a display mode of displaying the game history information corresponding to one of the plurality of periods to display any of the plurality of pieces of the game history information. After shifting to a display mode in which no display is made, the display mode shifts to a display mode in which game history information corresponding to other periods out of a plurality of periods is displayed. It is possible to clearly recognize that the displayed game history information has been switched to the game history information corresponding to another period. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the manager from erroneously recognizing the period and checking the game history information without noticing that the period of the displayed game history information has been switched to another period. be able to.

<Characteristic βH group>
The feature βH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βH1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation means _calculates the plurality of means for calculating a plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each period of
The display means is
The game history information corresponding to the other period out of the plurality of periods is changed from the display mode (display mode displaying bL) for displaying the game history information corresponding to one period out of the plurality of periods. Means for shifting the display mode in the first transition mode (transition mode in which all lights are turned off for 300 ms) when transitioning to the display mode for displaying (the display mode for displaying b1);
When the display mode is shifted based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, a second transition mode different from the first transition mode (a transition mode in which the transition is performed with a hyphen lighting display of 3000 ms interposed) and means for changing the display mode.

According to the feature βH1, the transition mode when the display mode for displaying the game history information corresponding to one period to the display mode for displaying the game history information corresponding to another period and the predetermined condition are satisfied. Therefore, the manager or inspector of the gaming machine recognizes the difference in the transition mode and changes the game history information corresponding to the other period. It is possible to clearly distinguish and recognize whether to shift to the display mode to be displayed or to shift to the display mode based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent an administrator or the like from continuing to check game history information without noticing that a predetermined condition has been met.

<Characteristic βI group>
The feature βI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βI1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means (information display section 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation means _calculates the plurality of means for calculating a plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each period of
The display means is
Means for switching and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods based on the elapse of a predetermined display duration time (5000 ms), is satisfied, even before the predetermined display continuation time of the game history information being displayed has passed, the display mode corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (hyphen lighting , all lights off).

According to the feature βI1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the game history information is being displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied even before the predetermined display duration of the game history information being displayed has elapsed. Since the display mode shifts to the one corresponding to the fulfillment, it is possible for the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine to quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been fulfilled. Further, for example, it becomes possible to display the game history information for each period after the predetermined condition is satisfied at an early stage after shifting to the display mode corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. . As a result, the manager or the like can quickly check the game history information for each period after the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the inspection efficiency of the gaming machine can be improved.

<Characteristic βJ group>
The feature βJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βJ1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation means _calculates the plurality of means for calculating a plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each period of
The display means is
Means for switching and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods based on the elapse of a predetermined display duration time (5000 ms), When the condition is satisfied, after the predetermined display duration of the game history information being displayed has passed, a display mode corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (hyphen lighting, all lights off) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for shifting to.

According to the feature βJ1, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game history information is being displayed, the display of the game history information continues until the display continuation time of the game history information being displayed elapses. Therefore, for example, at the timing when the manager or inspector of the gaming machine confirms the gaming history information being displayed and tries to transfer it to the inspection table, the display of the gaming history information ends, and the gaming machine It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the history information could not be transferred to the inspection table.

<Characteristic βK group>
The feature βK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βK1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
display means (information display section 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation means _calculates the plurality of means for calculating a plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each period of
The display means is
Means for switching and displaying the plurality of gaming history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods in accordance with a predetermined order, wherein when the predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of the predetermined order, the A gaming machine comprising means for starting display from game history information (bL) corresponding to a specific period out of a plurality of periods.

According to the feature βK1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of the predetermined order, display is started from the game history information corresponding to a specific period out of a plurality of periods. The administrator or the inspector can recognize that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and can preferentially check the game history information corresponding to the specific period.

The inventions of the features βG group to feature βK group solve the following problems.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of providing a game machine that is less likely to cause problems and a game machine that takes players into account.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

<Characteristic βL group>
The feature βL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βL1]
is a game machine,
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing predetermined information (various flag information, etc.) when the supply of power from the outside is cut off;
Return means for executing a return process (power recovery process) for returning the game machine to the state before the power supply was interrupted based on the predetermined information when the supply of power from the outside is started. and,
Display means (information display section 45z) configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting section, CP light emitting section) and capable of displaying various types of information;
an inspection process executing means for executing an inspection process (lighting and blinking process), which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the testing process executing means includes means for executing the testing process with execution of the return process as a trigger.

According to the feature βL1, the inspection process is executed when the return process is executed. By turning it off and then turning it on again), the game machine can be caused to execute the inspection process. Then, the administrator or the inspector can inspect whether or not there is a display element that does not operate in a predetermined mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means.

[Feature βL2]
A gaming machine according to feature βL1,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βL2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode. It is possible to check whether there is a display element (for example, a light emitting part that does not light up due to disconnection) that cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the means.

[Feature βL3]
A gaming machine according to feature βL1 or feature βL2,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. game machine.

According to feature βL3, the inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or examiner of the display means, among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means, the display element that cannot be shifted from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect (for example, it is in a constantly lit state It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part that does not turn off.

<Characteristic βM group>
The feature βM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βM1]
operation receiving means (RAM clear button, setting keyhole, setting change button) for receiving an operation from the outside;
a process execution means for executing one of a plurality of branched process flows based on an operation mode accepted by the operation acceptance means when power supply from the outside is started;
Display means (information display section 45z) configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting section, CP light emitting section) and capable of displaying various types of information;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner even when executing any one of the plurality of branched process flows. A gaming machine comprising means for executing inspection processing (lighting and blinking processing).

According to the feature βM1, the inspection process is executed regardless of which of the processing flows branched into a plurality of processes is executed. Even if the game machine accepts such an operation mode, it is possible to cause the game machine to execute the inspection process. Therefore, regardless of the operation mode accepted by the operation accepting means when the power supply is started, the administrator or inspector of the gaming machine may, due to a defect, cause a predetermined error in the plurality of display elements constituting the display means. It can be checked for the presence of display elements that do not behave in a manner. That is, it is possible to prevent the inspection from being impossible depending on the operation mode accepted by the operation accepting means when the power supply is started.

[Feature βM2]
A gaming machine according to feature βM1,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βM2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode. It is possible to check whether there is a display element (for example, a light emitting part that does not light up due to disconnection) that cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the means.

[Feature βM3]
A gaming machine according to feature βM1 or feature βM2,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. game machine.

According to feature βM3, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or examiner of the display means, among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means, the display element that cannot be shifted from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect (for example, it is in a constantly lit state It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part that does not turn off.

<Characteristic βN group>
The feature βN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βN1]
a first process group executing means for executing a first process group (processes from step S12001 to step S12028 in FIGS. 63 and 64) based on the start of power supply from the outside;
a second process group executing means for repeatedly executing a second process group (various processes included in the timer interrupt process, various random number update processes, power failure monitoring process) after the execution of the first process group is completed;
Display means (information display section 45z) configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting section, CP light emitting section) and capable of displaying various types of information;
A gaming machine comprising
The first process group executing means, as one process included in the first process group, is an inspection process (lighting and blinking), which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing processing).

According to the feature βN1, the first processing group including inspection processing is executed based on the start of power supply from the outside, and after the execution of the first processing group is completed, the second Since the processing group of (1) is repeatedly executed, the inspection processing can be executed only once after the power supply from the outside is started. If the inspection process were to be included in the second process group, the inspection process would be repeatedly executed, increasing the processing load of the gaming machine. Further, if the inspection process is repeatedly executed, there is a possibility that the period during which various information can be displayed on the display means will be shortened. On the other hand, according to this feature, it is possible to execute the inspection process only once after the supply of power from the outside is started, so that the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced and the game can be played. An administrator or an inspector of the machine can inspect whether there is any display element that does not operate in a predetermined manner due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means.

[Feature βN2]
A gaming machine according to feature βN1,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βN2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode. It is possible to check whether there is a display element (for example, a light emitting part that does not light up due to disconnection) that cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the means.

[Feature βN3]
A gaming machine according to feature βN1 or feature βN2,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. game machine.

According to feature βN3, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or examiner of the display means, among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means, the display element that cannot be shifted from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect (for example, it is in a constantly lit state It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part that does not turn off.

<Characteristic βO group>
The feature βO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βO1]
A game progress processing execution means for executing game progress processing (ball entry detection processing included in timer interrupt processing, ball entry processing for a start opening, game turn control processing, etc.) that is processing for enabling the progress of a game; ,
Display means (information display section 45z) configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting section, CP light emitting section) and capable of displaying various types of information;
an inspection process executing means for executing an inspection process (lighting and blinking process), which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner;
A gaming machine comprising
The testing process executing means includes means for executing the testing process after the supply of electric power from the outside is started and before the execution of the game progress process is started. .

According to the feature βO1, after the power supply from the outside is started and before the execution of the game progress process is started, the inspection process is executed. Before the game can be played on the machine, it is possible to check whether there is any display element that does not operate in a predetermined manner due to a defect among the plurality of display elements constituting the display means.

If the configuration is such that the inspection process is executed after the execution of the game progress process is started, the player will not be able to start the game before the administrator or the inspector can inspect the display means. it is possible to start. In this case, after the player has started playing a game on the gaming machine, there is a risk that the manager or the inspector will inspect the display means of the gaming machine and find a defect in the display element of the display means. If the manager or inspector finds a problem with the display elements of the display means of the game machine, it will be necessary to have the player stop or stop playing in order to repair or replace the display means. . As a result, there is a possibility that the player will feel a strong sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to this feature, before the player can start playing a game on the gaming machine, the manager or the inspector can inspect the display means of the gaming machine. , it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted or stopped, thereby giving the player a sense of displeasure.

[Feature βO2]
A gaming machine according to feature βO1,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βO2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode. It is possible to check whether there is a display element (for example, a light emitting part that does not light up due to disconnection) that cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the means.

[Feature βO3]
A gaming machine according to feature βO1 or feature βO2,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. game machine.

According to feature βO3, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or examiner of the display means, among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means, the display element that cannot be shifted from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect (for example, it is in a constantly lit state It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part that does not turn off.

<Characteristic βP group>
The feature βP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βP1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
Display means (information display section 45z) configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting section, CP light emitting section) and capable of displaying various types of information;
game history information display processing execution means for executing game history information display processing (game history processing included in timer interrupt processing) for displaying information corresponding to the game history information on the display means;
an inspection process executing means for executing an inspection process (lighting and blinking process), which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner;
A gaming machine comprising
The testing process executing means includes means for executing the testing process before information corresponding to the gaming history information is displayed on the display means by executing the gaming history information display process. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature βP1, the inspection process is executed before the information corresponding to the game history information is displayed on the display means. Before information is displayed on the display means, it is possible to check whether or not there is a display element that does not operate in a predetermined manner due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means. As a result, information corresponding to the game history information displayed on the display means is not noticed that there is a display element that does not operate normally due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means. It is possible to suppress confirmation.

[Feature βP2]
A gaming machine according to feature βP1,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βP2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode. It is possible to check whether there is a display element (for example, a light emitting part that does not light up due to disconnection) that cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the means.

[Feature βP3]
A gaming machine according to feature βP1 or feature βP2,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. game machine.

According to feature βP3, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or examiner of the display means, among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means, the display element that cannot be shifted from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect (for example, it is in a constantly lit state It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part that does not turn off.

<Characteristic βQ group>
The feature βQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βQ1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an operation from the outside;
display means (information display section 45z) configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting section, CP light emitting section) and capable of displaying setting information, which is information relating to setting of the winning probability during execution of the setting change mode;
an inspection process executing means for executing an inspection process (lighting and blinking process), which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner;
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming machine, wherein the testing process executing means includes means for executing the testing process before the setting information is displayed on the display means by executing the setting change mode.

According to the feature βQ1, the inspection process is executed before the setting information is displayed on the display means. It is possible to check whether or not there is a display element that does not operate in a predetermined mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means. As a result, setting information displayed on the display means may be checked without noticing that there is a display element that does not operate normally due to a defect among the plurality of display elements constituting the display means. can be suppressed.

[Feature βQ2]
The gaming machine according to feature βQ1,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βQ2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode. It is possible to check whether there is a display element (for example, a light emitting part that does not light up due to disconnection) that cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements that constitute the means.

[Feature βQ3]
A gaming machine according to feature βQ1 or feature βQ2,
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (turned off state) and a second display mode (lighted state) different from the first display mode,
The inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. game machine.

According to the feature βQ3, the inspection processing includes processing for controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or examiner of the display means, among the plurality of display elements that constitute the display means, the display element that cannot be shifted from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect (for example, it is in a constantly lit state It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part that does not turn off.

The inventions of the features βL group to feature βQ group solve the following problems.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of providing a game machine that is less likely to cause problems and a game machine that takes players into account.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

<Characteristic βR group>
The feature βR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg aspect 100).

[Feature βR1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing predetermined identification information (setting changing flag);
The identification information is set to a first state (ON) when the setting change mode is started, and the identification information is set to a second state (OFF) different from the first state when the setting change mode is terminated. Identification information transition means for transitioning to
A gaming machine comprising
The storage means is capable of maintaining the state of the identification information even when power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is interrupted,
The setting change mode executing means
Predetermined start operation (operation to turn on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON and the RAM clear button is pressed) a first starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the acceptance;
second starting means for starting the setting change mode based on determining that the identification information is in the first state when power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is started;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βR1, the first starting means starts the setting change mode based on reception of a predetermined start operation, and the identification information transition means transfers the identification information to the first setting change mode when starting the setting change mode. state, and the identification information is changed to the second state when the setting change mode ends. The storage means can maintain the state of the identification information even when power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is interrupted. Therefore, for example, when the power supply to the game machine is cut off during execution of the setting change mode due to the power switch of the game machine being turned off or a power failure, etc., the power is stored in the storage means. The identification information stored is maintained in the first state.

Then, according to this feature, the second starting means activates the setting change mode based on determination that the identification information is in the first state when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine from the outside is started. let it start. That is, according to this feature, when the power supply to the game machine is interrupted during execution of the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the predetermined start operation is performed. is not accepted, the setting change mode is started.

Therefore, when the power supply to the game machine from the outside is cut off during execution of the setting change mode, the power supply to the game machine must be stopped in order to restart the setting change mode. This saves the administrator the trouble of performing a predetermined start operation again after the restart.

In addition, if the power supply to the game machine is interrupted from the outside while the setting change mode is being executed, there is a possibility that the setting of the winning probability of the game machine is in a state not intended by the administrator. However, according to this feature, when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted from the outside, the setting change mode is started without the administrator of the gaming machine performing a predetermined start operation again. , it is possible to prevent the setting of the winning probability of the game machine from being overlooked in a state not intended by the administrator.

<Characteristic βS group>
The feature βS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg aspect 100).

[Feature βS1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information relating to the setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing predetermined identification information (setting confirmation flag);
When the setting information display mode is started, the identification information is set to a first state (ON), and when the setting information display mode is terminated, the identification information is set to a second state different from the first state ( OFF); and identification information transition means for transitioning to
A gaming machine comprising
The storage means is capable of maintaining the state of the identification information even when power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is interrupted,
The setting information display mode executing means
Predetermined start operation (operation to turn on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON and the RAM clear button is not pressed) a first starting means for starting the setting information display mode based on the reception;
second starting means for starting the setting information display mode based on determining that the identification information is in the first state when power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is started;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βS1, the first starting means starts the setting information display mode based on reception of a predetermined start operation, and the identification information transition means transfers the identification information to the first when starting the setting information display mode. 1, and when the setting information display mode ends, the identification information is changed to the second state. The storage means can maintain the state of the identification information even when power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is interrupted. Therefore, for example, when the power supply to the game machine is cut off during execution of the setting information display mode due to the power switch of the game machine being turned off or a power failure, etc., The identified information is maintained in the first state.

Then, according to this feature, the second starting means determines that the identification information is in the first state when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine from the outside is started, and the setting information display mode to start. That is, according to this feature, when the power supply to the game machine is interrupted during execution of the setting information display mode, when the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the predetermined start Even if no operation is accepted, the setting information display mode is started.

Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is interrupted during execution of the setting information display mode, in order for the gaming machine to start the setting information display mode again, it is necessary to supply power to the gaming machine. It is possible to save the trouble that the administrator has to perform the predetermined start operation again after the supply is restarted.

<Characteristic βT group>
The feature βT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg aspect 100).

[Feature βT1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A storage means for storing setting information that is information relating to setting of the winning probability, the first storage being capable of maintaining the state of the setting information even when power supply from the outside is interrupted. Means (setting information storage area of main side RAM 64);
a second storage means (update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64) for storing change setting information (update setting information) that is information used during execution of the setting change mode;
changing means capable of changing the setting information for change during execution of the setting change mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The second storage means comprises means for storing information corresponding to the setting information as the change setting information when the setting change mode is started,
The changing means comprises means for changing the setting information for change stored in the second storage means by receiving the predetermined change operation,
The gaming machine, wherein the first storage means includes means for storing information corresponding to the setting information for change as the setting information when the setting change mode ends.

According to feature βT1, when the setting change mode is started, the second storage means stores information corresponding to the setting information as change setting information, and the change means accepts a predetermined change operation to change the second setting information. 2 change the setting information for change stored in the storage means, and the first storage means stores information corresponding to the setting information for change as the setting information when the setting change mode is terminated. Therefore, even if the power supply from the outside is interrupted during execution of the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the first storage means remains the value before the setting change mode is started. can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the winning probability of the game machine from becoming a value different from the value intended by the manager due to the interruption of the power supply from the outside during execution of the setting change mode. be able to. A specific description will be given below.

Hypothetically, when the setting information for change is not used during execution of the setting change mode, and the setting information stored in the first storage means is directly changed by receiving a predetermined change operation. , if the power supply from the outside is interrupted at the timing when the setting information is different from the value intended by the administrator of the game machine during execution of the setting change mode, the game machine The setting information of the winning probability becomes a value different from the value intended by the administrator.

On the other hand, according to this feature, until the setting change mode is terminated, the setting information itself stored in the first storage means is not changed, and the setting information for change stored in the second storage means is not changed. is changed, even if the power supply from the outside is interrupted at the timing when the setting information for change is a value different from the value intended by the administrator of the game machine during execution of the setting change mode. Even if there is, the setting information stored in the first storage means is maintained at the value before the setting change mode is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the winning probability of the game machine from becoming a value different from the value intended by the manager due to the interruption of the power supply from the outside during execution of the setting change mode. can be done.

[Feature βT2]
A gaming machine according to feature βT1,
A gaming machine comprising display means for displaying the change setting information stored in the second storage means during execution of the setting change mode.

According to feature βT2, the display means displays the setting information for change stored in the second storage means while the setting change mode is being executed. Predetermined change operations can be performed while confirming the information.

<Characteristic βU group>
The feature βU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, mode 100).

[Feature βU1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
Storage means for storing setting information that is information relating to the setting of the probability of winning, the storage means being capable of maintaining the state of the setting information even when the supply of power from the outside is interrupted ( setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64);
setting information determining means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65) when the supply of power from the outside is started;
A game progress processing executing means for executing a game progress processing (processing of steps S12304 to S12316 in FIG. 68), which is processing for progressing a game;
A gaming machine comprising
When the setting information determining means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (in step S12007 in FIG. 65, it is determined that the setting information is not within the predetermined range, A gaming machine characterized in that the game progress processing is not executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015.

According to the feature βU1, the storage means maintains the state of the setting information even when the power supply from the outside is cut off, and the game progress processing execution means starts the power supply from the outside. When it is determined whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition, and if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the game progress processing for advancing the game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress processing from being executed while the setting information stored in the storage means does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and causing a problem in the progress of the game in the gaming machine. . As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent unexpected losses from being given to players and administrators.

<Characteristic βV group>
The feature βV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg aspect 100).

[Feature βV1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
Storage means capable of storing various types of information including setting information relating to setting of the probability of winning, and capable of maintaining the various types of information even when the supply of power from the outside is interrupted. storage means (main side RAM 64);
setting information determining means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65) when the supply of power from the outside is started;
erasing processing executing means for executing erasing processing (first RAM clearing processing) for erasing the various information stored in the storage means except for the setting information;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing process executing means
The erasing process based on acceptance of a predetermined erasing operation (an operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear button is pressed) a means for performing
When the setting information determining means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (it is determined that the setting information is not within the predetermined range in step S12007 in FIG. 65, and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015). means for not executing the erasing process even when the predetermined erasing operation is received;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βV1, the storage means maintains the state of the setting information even when the supply of power from the outside is cut off, and the erasing process execution means maintains the state of the setting information even when the supply of power from the outside is started. When it determines whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition, and if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, even if a predetermined erasing operation is accepted, the erasing process is not performed. don't run Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems caused by executing the erasing process while the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A specific description will be given below.

Even if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, if the configuration for executing the erasing process is adopted, among the various information stored in the storage means, for example, the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Even information (for example, a RAM error flag) indicating that it is determined that the condition is not satisfied is erased, and even though the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, after the erasing process, the setting information is deleted. There is a possibility that a process (for example, a game progress process for progressing a game) is executed on the premise that a predetermined condition is satisfied, causing a problem.

On the other hand, according to this feature, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, even if the predetermined erasing operation is accepted, the erasing process is not executed. It is possible to suppress the execution of the erasing process even though the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and the execution of the process assuming that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems caused by executing the erasing process while the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic βW group>
The feature βW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg aspect 100).

[Feature βW1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information relating to the setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
A storage means capable of storing various information including the setting information, and capable of maintaining the various information even when the supply of power from the outside is interrupted (setting of the main RAM 64). information storage area);
setting information determining means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65) when the supply of power from the outside is started;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting information display mode executing means
Predetermined start operation (operation to turn on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON and the RAM clear button is not pressed) means for executing the setting information display mode based on the acceptance;
When the setting information determining means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (it is determined that the setting information is not within the predetermined range in step S12007 in FIG. 65, and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015). means for not executing the setting information display mode even when the predetermined start operation is received;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βW1, the storage means maintains the state of various information including the setting information even when the supply of power from the outside is cut off, and the setting information display mode execution means is configured to display the setting information. If it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the setting information display mode is not executed even if the predetermined start operation is received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information display mode for displaying the setting information from being executed even though the setting information stored in the storage unit does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic βX group>
The feature βX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg aspect 100).

[Feature βX1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
Storage means capable of storing various types of information including setting information relating to setting of the probability of winning, and capable of maintaining the various types of information even when the supply of power from the outside is interrupted. storage means (main side RAM 64);
When power supply from the outside is cut off, a predetermined calculation is executed based on a predetermined information group stored in the storage means, and a first calculation result, which is the result of the predetermined calculation, is stored in the storage means. Calculation execution means for storing in the means (calculating the RAM judgment value in the power failure monitoring process and storing it in the main side RAM 64);
When the supply of electric power from the outside is started, the predetermined calculation is executed based on the predetermined information group stored in the storage means, and the result of the predetermined calculation is a second calculation result. , calculation result determination means for determining whether or not the first calculation result matches (performing the processing from step S12005 to step S12006 in FIG. 65);
setting information determining means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65) when the supply of power from the outside is started;
Based on the determination by the computation result determining means that the second computation result and the first computation result match and the setting information determination means determining that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition. , predetermined processing executing means for executing predetermined processing (processing of steps S12304 to S12316 in FIG. 68, which is processing for advancing the game);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βX1, the predetermined processing executing means performs the predetermined processing based on the determination that the second computation result and the first computation result match and that the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition. to run. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a predetermined process from being executed even though the second calculation result and the first calculation result match but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems caused by the execution of the predetermined process even though the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A specific description will be given below.

When the second calculation result and the first calculation result match, the content of the predetermined information group stored in the storage means when the power supply from the outside is started and the previous power supply are different. There is a high possibility that the contents of the predetermined information group stored in the storage means are the same when the power supply from the outside is cut off, and the predetermined information group stored in the storage means is likely to be the same. It is highly likely that it was maintained normally even in the However, even when the predetermined information group stored in the storage means is not maintained normally, the second calculation result and the first calculation result may coincidentally coincide.

For this reason, if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not the second computation result and the first computation result match, but it is not determined whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition, the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, there is a possibility that the result of the second calculation and the result of the first calculation will coincidentally and the predetermined process will be executed. If the predetermined process includes, for example, a process that enables the progress of the game, there is a possibility that fatal problems will occur in the progress of the game.

On the other hand, according to this feature, it is determined that the second calculation result and the first calculation result match each other, and the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the predetermined process is performed based on this determination. Execute, in other words, when the second calculation result and the first calculation result match but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined process is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a predetermined process from being executed even though the second calculation result and the first calculation result match but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems caused by the execution of the predetermined process even though the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic βY group>
The feature βY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg aspect 100).

[Feature βY1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
By receiving a predetermined operation (an operation of inserting a setting key into a setting keyhole and turning it), the first state (OFF side state) is changed to a second state different from the first state ( an operation receiving means (keyhole for setting) capable of shifting to the ON side state);
A gaming machine comprising
The setting change mode executing means
Based on detection of transition of the operation receiving means from the second state to the first state (OFF edge falling from the ON side state to the OFF side state) during execution of the setting change mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a termination means for terminating the setting change mode.

According to feature βY1, the setting change mode executing means ends the setting change mode based on detection of transition of the operation receiving means from the second state to the first state during execution of the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to avoid ending the setting change mode immediately after starting. A specific description will be given below.

For example, the first start condition including that the operation receiving means is in the second state (for example, the setting key (keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is pressed, and the operation to turn on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10) is established, and the second regardless of whether the operation reception means is in the second state (for example, the setting change flag is ON when the power is turned on) is satisfied, the setting change mode is started, and if the configuration is different from the present feature, the operation reception means A case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which the setting change mode is terminated when it is detected that is in the first state. In the case of adopting this configuration, when the setting change mode is started based on the establishment of the first start condition including that the operation receiving means is in the second state, the operation receiving means is in the second state. to the first state, the setting change mode continues. However, if the setting change mode is started based on the establishment of the second start condition regardless of whether the operation receiving means is in the second state, the operation receiving means remains set in the first state. Alteration mode may also be initiated. In this case, immediately after the setting change mode is started, it is detected that the operation reception means is in the first state, and the setting change mode ends. That is, the setting change mode ends immediately after starting, and it becomes difficult to change the setting of the winning probability in the setting change mode.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the setting change mode is terminated based on the detection of the transition from the second state to the first state of the operation receiving means. is established, and even if the setting change mode is started while the operation receiving means is in the first state, the administrator of the gaming machine or the like changes the operation receiving means to the first state. The setting change mode continues until the state 1 is changed to the second state, and the second state is changed to the first state again. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is started while the operation accepting means is in the first state, it is possible to avoid the setting change mode from ending immediately after the setting change mode is started. . As a result, it is possible to prevent difficulty in changing the setting of the winning probability due to the setting change mode ending immediately after starting.

Further, according to this feature, even when the setting change mode is started due to the establishment of the second start condition, only a person who can shift the state of the operation receiving means ends the setting change mode. can be done. Therefore, the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature βY2]
A gaming machine according to feature βY1,
The setting change mode executing means
A second start condition for starting the setting change mode based on satisfaction of a first start condition including that the operation receiving means is in the second state (that the keyhole for setting is in the ON side state). 1 initiation means;
The setting change mode is activated based on the establishment of a second start condition (that the setting change flag is ON when the power is turned on) regardless of whether or not the operation receiving means is in the second state. a second initiation means for initiation;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βY2, the first starting means starts the setting change mode based on satisfaction of a first starting condition including that the operation accepting means is in the second state, and the second starting means: The setting change mode is started based on the establishment of the second start condition regardless of whether or not the operation receiving means is in the second state. Therefore, the setting change mode can be started not only when the operation receiving means is in the second state, but also when the operation receiving means is not in the second state.

The inventions of the features βR group to feature βY group solve the following problems.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of providing a game machine that is less likely to cause problems and a game machine that takes players into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

<Characteristic βZ group>
The feature βZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Feature βZ1]
is a game machine,
Timing information updating means (RTC97 clock register 97b1) and
Means capable of storing the clock information as activation time information (activation date and time information), and being capable of retaining the stored activation time information even during the power failure state. a startup time information storage area 97b2);
The start time information storage means acquires the time information from the time information update means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine, and uses the acquired time information as the start time information. a memory processing executing means for executing a memory processing that is a processing to be stored in the
Elapsed time calculation means for calculating an elapsed time from execution of the storage process based on the activation time information;
a predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time;
Based on the start of power supply from the outside to the game machine, a plurality of types of activation processing with different processing contents (activation processing including processing for transmitting a normal activation command in FIG. 70, setting change mode a startup process including execution of a startup process including execution of a setting confirmation mode, etc.);
with
The storage process execution means determines that the type of the startup process executed by the startup process execution means is a specific startup process among the plurality of startup processes (startup process including execution of setting change mode, execution of setting confirmation mode). a game machine, comprising avoiding means for avoiding execution of the storage process in the case of a start-up process, etc.).

Before describing the effect of feature βZ1, a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed will be described. Generally, in a game hall, power supply to a plurality of game machines is started all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, a plurality of game machines are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. Then, the supply of electric power to a plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously).

Based on the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming hall described above, the gaming machine with the characteristic βZ1 acquires the timing information from the timing information update means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine. Then, a storage process, which is a process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means, is executed. Then, based on the activation time information stored in the activation time information storage means, the elapsed time after the execution of the storage process is calculated, and predetermined processing is performed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

Suppose a configuration (for example, , a configuration in which a predetermined effect is started at the timing when the time included in the clock information reaches 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timekeeping information of each game machine installed in the island facility (for example, at a certain moment, the time included in the timekeeping information of game machine A is 11 00:00, and the time included in the timing information of game machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which a predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started is set for each game. It is different for each machine, and it gives a sense of incongruity to the players who expected that the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) will start all at once (simultaneously) in each game machine installed on the island facility. I have a problem.

On the other hand, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility receives the timing information from the timing information updating means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine. is acquired, and a storage process is executed, which is a process of storing the acquired clocking information in the boot time information storage means as boot time information.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of the game hall turns on the island power supply switch, the supply of power to the plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously), Each of the gaming machines that are being played all at once (simultaneously) execute the memory processing.

Then, according to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility calculates the elapsed time since the memory processing is executed based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means. . As described above, the gaming machines installed in the island facility simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the memory processing, so the elapsed time calculated in each gaming machine after the execution of the memory processing is Even if there is a discrepancy in the time contained in the timing information of the gaming machine, it will be the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time. can be the same. Specifically, for example, when adopting a configuration in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, all the game machines installed in the island facility can perform the specific effect all at once (simultaneously). can be started.

Furthermore, the game machine having this feature has a start time information storage means capable of holding the stored start time information even during a power failure, and a start process with a plurality of types of start process executed by the start process execution means. avoiding means for avoiding the execution of the memory processing when it is a specific startup processing among the above. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case in which a configuration without the avoidance means described above is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the supply of electric power is started all at once (simultaneously) to the game machines installed in the island facility, the game machines installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously) store. Execute the process. After that, for the manager of the game hall to cause one of the plurality of game machines installed in the island facility to execute a specific start-up process (for example, a start-up process including execution of the setting change mode). Then, after the power switch of the gaming machine is once turned off, the power switch of the gaming machine is turned on so that the gaming machine is put into a state in which a specific activation process is executed, and the specific activation process is performed. may be executed. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. As a result, the elapsed time calculated in the one gaming machine differs from the elapsed time calculated in the other gaming machine, and the timing at which the predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started in the one gaming machine is delayed. However, there is a problem that the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started in the other gaming machine differs from that of the other gaming machine, giving the player playing the game in the one gaming machine a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the manager of the game hall turns off the power switch of the one gaming machine to put it in a power failure state, the activation time information storage means of the one gaming machine does not store the information. The startup time information stored in the After that, when the manager turns on the power switch to put the one gaming machine into a state where the specific starting process is executed, the specific starting process is executed in the one gaming machine, and the execution of the storage process is avoided. Therefore, the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the one gaming machine is not overwritten, and the storage processing is executed when power supply is started all at once (simultaneously) with the other gaming machines. The start-up time information stored in is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each game machine installed in the island facility including the one game machine is the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time. It is possible to make the manner of execution of the predetermined process executed in each game machine installed in the island facility including the game machine the same. Specifically, for example, when adopting a configuration in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the game machine includes a game machine in which the power switch is turned off once and then turned on again. It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific performance in each game machine installed in the island facility. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic γA group>
The feature γA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γA1]
is a game machine,
Timing information updating means (RTC97 clock register 97b1) and
A means for storing the clock information as activation time information (activation date and time information), and a activation time information storage means (RTC97 a startup time information storage area 97b2);
The start time information storage means acquires the time information from the time information updating means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the game machine, and uses the acquired time information as the start time information. a memory processing executing means for executing a memory processing that is a processing to be stored in the
Elapsed time calculation means for calculating an elapsed time from execution of the storage process based on the activation time information;
a predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time;
an operation receiving means (keyhole for setting) that receives a predetermined operation;
with
The memory processing executing means avoids execution of the memory processing when the operation receiving means has received the predetermined operation when the supply of power from the outside to the gaming machine is started. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Before describing the effect of the feature γA1, a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed will be described. Generally, in a game hall, power supply to a plurality of game machines is started all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, a plurality of game machines are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. Then, the supply of electric power to a plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously).

Based on the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming hall described above, the gaming machine having the feature γA1 acquires the timing information from the timing information update means when the supply of power from the outside to the gaming machine is started. Then, a storage process, which is a process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means, is executed. Then, based on the activation time information, the elapsed time after the execution of the storage process is calculated, and a predetermined process is performed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

Suppose a configuration (for example, , a configuration in which a predetermined effect is started at the timing when the time included in the clock information reaches 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timekeeping information of each game machine installed in the island facility (for example, at a certain moment, the time included in the timekeeping information of game machine A is 11 00:00, and the time included in the timing information of game machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which a predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started is set for each game. It is different for each machine, and it gives a sense of incongruity to the players who expected that the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) will start all at once (simultaneously) in each game machine installed on the island facility. I have a problem.

On the other hand, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility receives the timing information from the timing information updating means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine. is acquired, and a storage process is executed, which is a process of storing the acquired clocking information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means. Therefore, for example, when the manager of the game hall turns on the island power supply switch, the supply of electric power to the plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously), and the power is installed in the island facility. Each of the gaming machines that are being played all at once (simultaneously) execute the memory processing.

Then, according to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility calculates the elapsed time since the memory processing is executed based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means. . As described above, the gaming machines installed in the island facility simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the memory processing, so the elapsed time calculated in each gaming machine after the execution of the memory processing is Even if there is a discrepancy in the time contained in the timing information of the gaming machine, it will be the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time. can be the same. Specifically, for example, when adopting a configuration in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, all the game machines installed in the island facility can perform the specific effect all at once (simultaneously). can be started.

Furthermore, the game machine of this feature has a start-up time information storage means capable of holding the stored start-up time information even during a power failure, and and avoiding means for avoiding execution of the storage processing when the operation accepting means has accepted a predetermined operation. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case in which a configuration without the avoidance means described above is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the supply of electric power is started all at once (simultaneously) to the game machines installed in the island facility, the game machines installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously) store. Execute the process. After that, for various reasons, the manager of the game hall temporarily turns off the power switch of one of the plurality of game machines installed in the island facility, and then turns off the one game machine. In some cases, the power switch of the one game machine is turned on while the operation of . In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. As a result, the elapsed time calculated in the one gaming machine differs from the elapsed time calculated in the other gaming machine, and the timing at which the predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started in the one gaming machine is delayed. However, there is a problem that the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started in the other gaming machine differs from that of the other gaming machine, giving the player playing the game in the one gaming machine a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the manager of the game hall turns off the power switch of the one gaming machine to put it in a power failure state, the activation time information storage means of the one gaming machine does not store the information. The startup time information stored in the After that, when the manager turns on the power switch while the one gaming machine is in a state of accepting a predetermined operation, the execution of the memory processing is avoided, so that the starting time information storage means of the one gaming machine The stored start-up time information is not overwritten, and the start-up time information stored in the storage process executed when the power supply is started all at once (simultaneously) with the other game machines is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each game machine installed in the island facility including the one game machine is the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time. It is possible to make the manner of execution of the predetermined process executed in each game machine installed in the island facility including the game machine the same. Specifically, for example, when adopting a configuration in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the game machine includes a game machine in which the power switch is turned off once and then turned on again. It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific performance in each game machine installed in the island facility. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic γB group>
The feature γB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γB1]
is a game machine,
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
Timing information updating means (RTC97 clock register 97b1) and
Means capable of storing the clock information as activation time information (activation date and time information), and being capable of retaining the stored activation time information even during the power failure state. a startup time information storage area 97b2);
The start time information storage means acquires the time information from the time information update means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine, and uses the acquired time information as the start time information. a memory processing executing means for executing a memory processing that is a processing to be stored in the
Elapsed time calculation means for calculating an elapsed time from execution of the storage process based on the activation time information;
a predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time;
with
The setting change mode executing means
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined start condition is satisfied when supply of electric power from the outside to the gaming machine is started;
setting change mode starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the memory processing execution means comprises avoidance means for avoiding execution of the memory processing when the setting change mode is started.

Before describing the effect of the feature γB1, a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed will be described. Generally, in a game hall, power supply to a plurality of game machines is started all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, a plurality of game machines are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. Then, the supply of electric power to a plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously).

Based on the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming hall described above, the gaming machine with the feature γB1 acquires the timing information from the timing information updating means when the supply of power from the outside to the gaming machine is started. Then, a storage process, which is a process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means, is executed. Then, based on the activation time information, the elapsed time after the execution of the storage process is calculated, and a predetermined process is performed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

Suppose a configuration (for example, , a configuration in which a predetermined effect is started at the timing when the time included in the clock information reaches 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timekeeping information of each game machine installed in the island facility (for example, at a certain moment, the time included in the timekeeping information of game machine A is 11 00:00, and the time included in the timing information of game machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which a predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started is set for each game. It is different for each machine, and it gives a sense of incongruity to the players who expected that the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) will start all at once (simultaneously) in each game machine installed on the island facility. I have a problem.

On the other hand, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility receives the timing information from the timing information updating means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine. is acquired, and a storage process is executed, which is a process of storing the acquired clocking information in the boot time information storage means as boot time information.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of the game hall turns on the island power supply switch, the supply of power to the plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously), Each of the gaming machines that are being played all at once (simultaneously) execute the memory processing.

Then, according to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility calculates the elapsed time since the memory processing is executed based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means. . As described above, the gaming machines installed in the island facility simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the memory processing, so the elapsed time calculated in each gaming machine after the execution of the memory processing is Even if there is a discrepancy in the time contained in the timing information of the gaming machine, it will be the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time. can be the same. Specifically, for example, when adopting a configuration in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, all the game machines installed in the island facility can perform the specific effect all at once (simultaneously). can be started.

Furthermore, the game machine of this feature has a start time information storage means capable of holding the stored start time information even during a power failure, and avoids execution of storage processing when the setting change mode is started. and a means of avoiding it. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case in which a configuration without the avoidance means described above is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the supply of electric power is started all at once (simultaneously) to the game machines installed in the island facility, the game machines installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously) store. Execute the process. After that, the manager of the gaming hall changes the power supply of one gaming machine among the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility in order to execute the setting change mode and change the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine. After the switch is once turned off, the setting change mode may be started by turning on the power switch of the one game machine assuming that the condition for starting the setting change mode of the one game machine is satisfied. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. As a result, the elapsed time calculated in the one gaming machine differs from the elapsed time calculated in the other gaming machine, and the timing at which the predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started in the one gaming machine is delayed. However, there is a problem that the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started in the other gaming machine differs from that of the other gaming machine, giving the player playing the game in the one gaming machine a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the manager of the game hall turns off the power switch of the one gaming machine to put it in a power failure state, the activation time information storage means of the one gaming machine does not store the information. The startup time information stored in the After that, when the administrator turns on the power switch in a state where the start condition for starting the setting change mode is established in the one gaming machine, the setting change mode is started in the one gaming machine, and the memory processing is executed. Since it is avoided, the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the one gaming machine is not overwritten, and is executed when power supply is started all at once (simultaneously) with the other gaming machines. The start-up time information stored in the storage process is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each game machine installed in the island facility including the one game machine is the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time. It is possible to make the manner of execution of the predetermined process executed in each game machine installed in the island facility including the game machine the same. Specifically, for example, when adopting a configuration in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the game machine includes a game machine in which the power switch is turned off once and then turned on again. It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific performance in each game machine installed in the island facility. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic γC group>
The feature γC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γC1]
is a game machine,
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information relating to the setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
Timing information updating means (RTC97 clock register 97b1) and
Means capable of storing the clock information as activation time information (activation date and time information), and being capable of retaining the stored activation time information even during the power failure state. a startup time information storage area 97b2);
The start time information storage means acquires the time information from the time information update means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine, and uses the acquired time information as the start time information. a memory processing executing means for executing a memory processing that is a processing to be stored in the
Elapsed time calculation means for calculating an elapsed time from execution of the storage process based on the activation time information;
a predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time;
with
The setting information display mode executing means
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined start condition is satisfied when supply of electric power from the outside to the gaming machine is started;
setting information display mode starting means for starting the setting information display mode based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the memory processing execution means comprises avoidance means for avoiding execution of the memory processing when the setting information display mode is started.

Before describing the effect of the feature γC1, a gaming hall in which a plurality of gaming machines are installed will be described. Generally, in a game hall, power supply to a plurality of game machines is started all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, a plurality of game machines are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. Then, the supply of electric power to a plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously).

Based on the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming hall described above, the gaming machine with the feature γC1 acquires the timing information from the timing information update means when the supply of power from the outside to the gaming machine is started. Then, a storage process, which is a process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means, is executed. Then, based on the activation time information, the elapsed time after the execution of the storage process is calculated, and a predetermined process is performed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

Suppose a configuration (for example, , a configuration in which a predetermined effect is started at the timing when the time included in the clock information reaches 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timekeeping information of each game machine installed in the island facility (for example, at a certain moment, the time included in the timekeeping information of game machine A is 11 00:00, and the time included in the timing information of game machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which a predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started is set for each game. It is different for each machine, and it gives a sense of incongruity to the players who expected that the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) will start all at once (simultaneously) in each game machine installed on the island facility. I have a problem.

On the other hand, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility receives the timing information from the timing information updating means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine. is acquired, and a storage process is executed, which is a process of storing the acquired clocking information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of the game hall turns on the island power supply switch, the supply of electric power to the plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously), and the power is installed in the island facility. Each of the gaming machines that are being played all at once (simultaneously) execute the memory processing.

Then, according to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility calculates the elapsed time since the memory processing is executed based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means. . As described above, the gaming machines installed in the island facility simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the memory processing, so the elapsed time calculated in each gaming machine after the execution of the memory processing is Even if there is a discrepancy in the time contained in the timing information of the gaming machine, it will be the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time. can be the same. Specifically, for example, when adopting a configuration in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, all the game machines installed in the island facility can perform the specific effect all at once (simultaneously). can be started.

Furthermore, the game machine of this feature has a start time information storage means capable of holding the stored start time information even during a power failure, and executes a memory process when the setting information display mode is started. and an avoidance means for avoiding. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case in which a configuration without the avoidance means described above is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the supply of electric power is started all at once (simultaneously) to the game machines installed in the island facility, the game machines installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously) store. Execute the process. After that, the administrator of the game hall executes the setting information display mode and checks the setting of the winning probability of the game machine by opening one of the plurality of game machines installed in the island facility. When the power switch is turned off once, and then the setting information display mode is started by turning on the power switch of the one gaming machine in a state where the condition for starting the setting information display mode of the one gaming machine is established. There is In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. As a result, the elapsed time calculated in the one gaming machine differs from the elapsed time calculated in the other gaming machine, and the timing at which the predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started in the one gaming machine is delayed. However, there is a problem that the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started in the other gaming machine differs from that of the other gaming machine, giving the player playing the game in the one gaming machine a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the manager of the game hall turns off the power switch of the one gaming machine to put it in a power failure state, the activation time information storage means of the one gaming machine does not store the information. The startup time information stored in the After that, when the manager turns on the power switch in a state where the start condition for starting the setting information display mode is established in the one gaming machine, the setting information display mode is started in the one gaming machine, and the memory processing is performed. Since the execution is avoided, the activation time information stored in the activation time information storage means of the one gaming machine is not overwritten, and when power supply is started all at once (simultaneously) with the other gaming machines. The activation time information stored in the executed storage process is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each game machine installed in the island facility including the one game machine is the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time. It is possible to make the manner of execution of the predetermined process executed in each game machine installed in the island facility including the game machine the same. Specifically, for example, when adopting a configuration in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the game machine includes a game machine in which the power switch is turned off once and then turned on again. It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific performance in each game machine installed in the island facility. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic γD group>
The feature γD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 102 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γD1]
is a game machine,
Timing information updating means (RTC97 clock register 97b1) and
Means capable of storing the clock information as activation time information (activation date and time information), and being capable of retaining the stored activation time information even during the power failure state. a startup time information storage area 97b2);
The start time information storage means acquires the time information from the time information update means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine, and uses the acquired time information as the start time information. a memory processing executing means for executing a memory processing that is a processing to be stored in the
Elapsed time calculation means for calculating an elapsed time from execution of the storage process based on the activation time information;
a predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time;
with
The storage processing executing means stores the time included in the time information in the time information update means in the activation time information storage means when the supply of power from the outside to the gaming machine is started. a game machine comprising avoiding means for avoiding execution of the memory processing when a predetermined time (30 minutes) has not elapsed from the time included in the start time information.

Before describing the effect of the feature γD1, a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed will be described. Generally, in a game hall, power supply to a plurality of game machines is started all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, a plurality of game machines are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. Then, the supply of electric power to a plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously).

Based on the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming hall described above, the gaming machine with the feature γD1 acquires the timing information from the timing information updating means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine. Then, a storage process, which is a process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means, is executed. Then, based on the activation time information, the elapsed time after the execution of the storage process is calculated, and a predetermined process is performed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

Suppose a configuration (for example, , a configuration in which a predetermined effect is started at the timing when the time included in the clock information reaches 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timekeeping information of each game machine installed in the island facility (for example, at a certain moment, the time included in the timekeeping information of game machine A is 11 00:00, and the time included in the timing information of game machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which a predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started is set for each game. It is different for each machine, and it gives a sense of incongruity to the players who expected that the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) will start all at once (simultaneously) in each game machine installed on the island facility. I have a problem.

On the other hand, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility receives the timing information from the timing information updating means based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine. is acquired, and a storage process is executed, which is a process of storing the acquired clocking information in the boot time information storage means as boot time information.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of the game hall turns on the island power supply switch, the supply of power to the plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously), Each of the gaming machines that are being played all at once (simultaneously) execute the memory processing.

Then, according to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility calculates the elapsed time since the memory processing is executed based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means. . As described above, the gaming machines installed in the island facility simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the memory processing, so the elapsed time calculated in each gaming machine after the execution of the memory processing is Even if there is a discrepancy in the time contained in the timing information of the gaming machine, it will be the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time. can be the same. Specifically, for example, when adopting a configuration in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, all the game machines installed in the island facility can perform the specific effect all at once (simultaneously). can be started.

Furthermore, the game machine of this feature has a start-up time information storage means capable of holding the stored start-up time information even during a power failure, and If the time contained in the clock information in the clock information updating means has not passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) from the time contained in the start time information stored in the start time information storage means, storage processing is performed. and an avoidance means for avoiding the execution of The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case in which a configuration without the avoidance means described above is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the supply of electric power is started all at once (simultaneously) to the game machines installed in the island facility, the game machines installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously) store. Execute the process. After that, for various reasons, the manager of the gaming hall once turns off the power switch of one of the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility, and then turns off the gaming machine again. power switch is turned on. Specifically, for example, in order to execute the setting change mode and change the setting of the winning probability of the game machine, the power switch of one of the plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is turned on. After it is turned off once, the setting change mode may be started by turning on the power switch of the one game machine assuming that the starting condition for starting the setting change mode of the one game machine is established. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. As a result, the elapsed time calculated in the one gaming machine differs from the elapsed time calculated in the other gaming machine, and the timing at which the predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started in the one gaming machine is delayed. However, there is a problem that the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started in the other gaming machine differs from that of the other gaming machine, giving the player playing the game in the one gaming machine a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the manager of the game hall turns off the power switch of the one gaming machine to put it in a power failure state, the activation time information storage means of the one gaming machine does not store the information. The startup time information stored in the After that, when the manager turns on the power switch of the one gaming machine within a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes), the execution of the storage process is avoided, so the information is stored in the startup time information storage means of the one gaming machine. The stored start-up time information is not overwritten, and the start-up time information stored in the storage process executed when power supply is started all at once (simultaneously) with other gaming machines is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each game machine installed in the island facility including the one game machine is the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time. It is possible to make the manner of execution of the predetermined process executed in each game machine installed in the island facility including the game machine the same. Specifically, for example, when adopting a configuration in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the game machine includes a game machine in which the power switch is turned off once and then turned on again. It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific performance in each game machine installed in the island facility.

That is, the administrator turns on the island power switch of the island facility to start supplying electric power to a plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously), and then for a predetermined period of time (for example, within 30 minutes), among the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility, the power switch of one gaming machine for which the setting of the winning probability is to be changed is turned off, and then the gaming machine is turned off. When the setting change mode is started by turning on the power switch of the one gaming machine in a state where the condition for starting the setting change mode is established, the setting of the winning probability of the one gaming machine can be changed. It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific performance in each game machine installed in an island facility including the one game machine whose power switch is turned off once and then turned on again. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature γD2]
A gaming machine according to feature γD1,
A game machine, comprising a changing means for changing the length of the predetermined time.

According to the feature γD2, the length of the predetermined time can be appropriately changed according to the number of gaming machines installed in the gaming hall and the size of the gaming hall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a predetermined period of time elapses before the work of changing the setting of the winning probability for the game machine is completed.

<Characteristic γE group>
The feature γE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γE1]
A gaming machine,
a start-up process executing means for executing any one of a plurality of types of start-up processes having different processing contents based on the start of power supply from the outside to the gaming machine;
When a specific startup process among the plurality of types of startup processes is executed by the startup process executing means (when a startup process including a process of transmitting a RAM abnormality command is executed by the main controller), the next a notification means for notifying information on the type of the startup process to be executed by the startup process execution means when starting the power supply of (notifying "Please start in the setting change mode");
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γE1, since information regarding the type of activation process to be executed when power supply is started next time is notified, the manager of the gaming machine can restart the power supply after terminating the power supply to the gaming machine. , when power supply to the gaming machine is started, it is possible to execute the notified type of start-up processing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the manageability of the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, after stopping the power supply to one of the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility, when restarting the power supply to the one gaming machine In addition, if the notified type of activation process is not executed, the timing of starting the specific effect executed in the one gaming machine will be different from the timing of starting the specific effect executed in the other plurality of gaming machines. In this configuration, it is possible to suppress the administrator from causing the one gaming machine to execute a different type of activation process, and as a result, the specific effect executed in the one gaming machine can be started. It is possible to prevent the timing of , from being deviated from the timing of starting a specific effect executed in a plurality of other gaming machines.

[Feature γE2]
A gaming machine according to feature γE1,
The notification means comprises means for continuing notification of information regarding the type of the activation process until power supply from the outside to the game machine is cut off (until the power switch is turned off). game machine.

According to the feature γE2, the notification of the information regarding the type of activation process continues until the power supply from the outside to the gaming machine is cut off. This effect will be explained. If the notification of the information on the type of start-up processing is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), for example, in a large game hall, the administrator turns on the island power switch of the island facility. After the power supply from the outside to the game machine is started, the notification ends before the manager reaches the game machine, and the activation process execution means is caused to execute the next power supply. The administrator may not be able to grasp the type of startup processing that should be performed. On the other hand, according to the feature γE2, since the notification of the information regarding the type of start-up processing continues until the power supply from the outside to the gaming machine is cut off, before the administrator reaches the gaming machine, It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the notification ends and the administrator cannot grasp the type of start-up processing to be executed by the start-up processing executing means when the power supply is started next time.

The inventions of the features βZ group to feature γE group solve the following problems.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of providing a game machine that is less likely to cause problems and a game machine that takes players into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

<Characteristic γF group>
The feature γF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 103 to aspect 106 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γF1]
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination processing executing means for executing special information determination processing for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a privilege provision condition;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
Winning probability change means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to meet the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
setting information storage means for storing setting information that determines setting of the winning probability;
setting information determination means for executing a setting information determination process for determining whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game stop means for executing a game stop process (a process for turning on a game stop flag), which is a process for stopping the progress of a predetermined game;
with
The setting information determination means is
first setting information determination means for executing the setting information determination process (performing setting information determination at the time of ball entry) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
second setting information determination means for executing the setting information determination process (performing setting information determination at the start of variation) in accordance with execution of the special information determination process;
with
The game stop means is
When it is determined by the second determination process execution means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the game stop process is executed, but the first determination process execution means determines that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine comprising means for not executing the game stop processing when it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied.

According to the feature γF1, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition in the setting information determination processing executed along with the execution of the special information determination processing, a predetermined process of stopping the progress of the game is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the setting information determination process executed with the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means, the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is performed. don't run The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, even if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the setting information determination process executed with the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means, the predetermined game is performed. A case of adopting a configuration for executing processing for stopping progress will be described. In this configuration, for example, a game ball enters the ball entering means during the privilege provision period (during execution of the opening and closing execution mode), and in the setting information determination process executed with the ball entering as a trigger, the setting information meets the predetermined condition If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied, the privilege granting period is interrupted and the progress of the game is stopped, causing great discomfort and disadvantage to the player.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the setting information determination process executed with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means Since the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is not executed, the privilege giving period (opening/closing execution mode) already started before the entry of the game ball that triggered the setting information determination process is interrupted. There is no Then, as in this feature, even if the progress of the game is stopped when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the setting information determination process executed along with the execution of the special information determination process, the privilege Since it is not during the granting period, the discomfort or disadvantage given to the player is determined when the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition in the setting information determination process executed with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. It is not larger than the case where it is determined that there is no game and the predetermined game is stopped. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to stop the progress of the game while reducing the discomfort and disadvantages given to the player. Further, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the game while the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature γF2]
A gaming machine according to feature γF1,
The second setting information determination means comprises means for executing the setting information determination process prior to execution of the special information determination process,
The game machine is
A gaming machine comprising avoiding means for avoiding execution of the special information determining process when the second determining process executing means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

According to the feature γF2, the avoidance means is provided for avoiding execution of the special information determination process when the second determination process execution means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. It is possible to prevent the special information determination process from being executed in a state in which the condition of (1) is not satisfied.

[Feature γF3]
A gaming machine according to feature γF1 or feature γF2,
Before the special information becomes a target of the special information determination process, it comprises a first determination process execution means for performing a first determination process for determining whether the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition,
The first setting information determination means comprises means for executing the setting information determination process prior to execution of the preceding determination process, triggered by entry of a game ball into the ball entry means,
The game machine is
A gaming machine comprising avoiding means for avoiding execution of the preceding determination process when the first setting information determining means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

According to the feature γF3, since the first setting information determining means has the avoiding means for avoiding the execution of the first determination process when the first setting information determining means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. It is possible to suppress the execution of the preceding determination process in a state in which there is no data.

[Feature γF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features γF1 to γF3,
A gaming machine comprising: specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the first setting information determining means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

According to the feature γF4, the specific effect executing means is provided for executing a specific effect when the first setting information determining means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The specific effect can reduce the discomfort that the player may feel due to the state in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied due to the influence.

<Characteristic γG group>
The feature γG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 104 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γG1]
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination processing executing means for executing special information determination processing for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a privilege provision condition;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
Winning probability change means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to meet the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
setting information storage means for storing setting information that determines setting of the winning probability;
Along with the execution of the special information determination process, the setting information stored in the setting information storage means and the setting information stored as the setting information at the time when the special information to be the target of the special information determination process is acquired. setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information at the time of special information acquisition (set information at the time of entering the ball) matches the setting information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γG1, when the special information determination process is executed, the setting information stored in the setting information storage means and the setting information at the time when the special information targeted for the special information determination process is acquired are stored. setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information at the time of acquisition of the special information matches. If the setting information is rewritten with other values unintended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like, the setting information and the setting information at the time of special information acquisition do not match. Therefore, according to this feature, rewriting of the setting information can be detected along with the execution of the special information determination process.

[Feature γG2]
A gaming machine according to feature γG1,
The setting information determination means includes means for determining whether or not the setting information and the setting information at the time of special information acquisition match prior to execution of the special information determination process,
The game machine is
A gaming machine comprising avoiding means for avoiding execution of the special information determination process when the setting information determining means determines that the setting information and the setting information at the time of special information acquisition do not match.

According to the feature γG2, since the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the execution of the special information determination process when it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of special information acquisition do not match, the setting information may It is possible to prevent the special information determination process from being executed while the value is rewritten to another unintended value.

[Feature γG3]
A gaming machine according to feature γG1 or feature γG2,
When the setting information determining means determines that the setting information and the setting information at the time of special information acquisition do not match, a process of stopping the progress of a predetermined game (a process of turning on a game stop flag) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to the feature γG3, when it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of special information acquisition do not match, there is provided means for executing processing for stopping the progress of the predetermined game. It is possible to prevent the game from progressing while being rewritten to other values unintended by the administrator.

<Characteristic γH group>
The feature γH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 105 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γH1]
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination processing executing means for executing special information determination processing for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a privilege provision condition;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
Winning probability change means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to meet the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
setting information storage means for storing setting information that determines setting of the winning probability;
Accompanied by the execution of the special information determination process, setting information at the time of special information acquisition (setting information at the time of ball entry) stored as the setting information at the time when the special information to be the target of the special information determination process is acquired and setting information determination for determining whether or not the previously executed setting information (previous hit determination processing setting information) stored as the setting information at the time of execution of the special information determination processing executed last time matches. means and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γH1, when the special information determination process is executed, setting information at the time of special information acquisition stored as the setting information at the time when the special information to be subjected to the special information determination process is acquired; Setting information determination means is provided for determining whether or not the setting information stored as the setting information at the time of execution of the special information determination processing executed last time matches the setting information at the time of previous execution. If the setting information is rewritten with other values not intended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like, the setting information at the time of special information acquisition and the setting information at the time of previous execution will not match. Therefore, according to this feature, rewriting of the setting information can be detected along with the execution of the special information determination process.

[Feature γH2]
A gaming machine according to feature γH1,
The setting information determination means includes means for determining whether or not the setting information at the time of special information acquisition and the setting information at the time of previous execution match prior to execution of the special information determination process,
The game machine is
and avoiding means for avoiding execution of the special information determination process when the setting information determination means determines that the setting information at the time of special information acquisition and the setting information at the time of previous execution do not match. game machine.

According to the feature γH2, the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the execution of the special information determination process when it is determined that the setting information at the time of special information acquisition and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match. , it is possible to prevent the special information determination process from being executed in a state where the value is rewritten to another value unintended by the administrator.

[Feature γH3]
A gaming machine according to feature γH1 or feature γH2,
When the setting information determining means determines that the setting information at the time of special information acquisition and the setting information at the time of previous execution do not match, processing for stopping the progress of a predetermined game (processing for turning on a game stop flag) A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing

According to the feature γH3, when it is determined that the setting information at the time of acquisition of the special information and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match, there is provided means for executing processing for stopping the progress of the predetermined game. It is possible to suppress the progress of the game while the value is rewritten to another value unintended by the administrator due to the influence of the .

<Characteristic γI group>
The feature γI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 106 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γI1]
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination processing executing means for executing special information determination processing for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a privilege provision condition;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
Winning probability change means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to meet the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
setting information storage means for storing setting information that determines setting of the winning probability;
Along with the execution of the special information determination process, the setting information stored in the setting information storage means and the previous execution time stored as the setting information at the time of execution of the special information determination process executed last time setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information (setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process) matches;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γI1, when the special information determination process is executed, the setting information stored in the setting information storage means and the setting information stored as the setting information at the time of execution of the special information determination process executed last time are combined. Setting information determination means for determining whether or not the time setting information matches with the time setting information is provided. If the setting information is rewritten with other values unintended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like, the setting information and the previous execution setting information do not match. Therefore, according to this feature, rewriting of the setting information can be detected along with the execution of the special information determination process.

[Feature γI2]
The gaming machine according to feature γI1,
The setting information determination means includes means for determining whether or not the setting information and the setting information at the time of previous execution match prior to execution of the special information determination process,
The game machine is
A gaming machine comprising avoiding means for avoiding execution of the special information judging process when the setting information judging means judges that the setting information and the setting information at the time of previous execution do not match.

According to the feature γI2, since the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the execution of the special information determination process when it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of previous execution do not match, the setting information may be affected by noise or the like. It is possible to prevent the special information determination process from being executed while the value is being rewritten to another unintended value.

[Feature γI3]
A gaming machine according to feature γI1 or feature γI2,
Means for executing a process of stopping the progress of a predetermined game (a process of turning on a game stop flag) when the setting information determining means determines that the setting information does not match the setting information at the time of previous execution. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γI3, the setting information is managed under the influence of noise, etc., because means for executing processing for stopping the progress of the predetermined game when it is determined that the setting information does not match the setting information at the time of the previous execution is provided. It is possible to prevent the game from progressing while the value is rewritten to another value unintended by the player.

<Characteristic γJ group>
The feature γJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 106 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γJ1]
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination processing executing means for executing special information determination processing for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a privilege provision condition;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
Winning probability change means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to meet the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
setting information storage means for storing setting information that determines setting of the winning probability;
Triggered by the game ball entering the ball entering means, the setting information at the time of the game ball entering the ball entering means and the setting information at the time of execution of the special information determination process executed last time. setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information at the time of the previous execution (setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process) matches or not;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γJ1, when the game ball enters the ball entering means, the setting information when the game ball enters the ball entering means and the setting information when the special information determination process executed last time is executed. A setting information determination means is provided for determining whether or not the setting information at the time of previous execution, which is stored as setting information, matches or not. If the setting information is rewritten to other values unintended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like, the setting information at the time the game ball enters the game does not match the setting information at the time of the previous execution. . Therefore, according to this feature, rewriting of the setting information can be detected when a game ball enters the ball entering means. As a result, various processes are executed on the premise that the setting information has been rewritten to other values unintended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the entry means. becomes possible.

[Feature γJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature γJ1,
Before the special information becomes a target of the special information determination process, it comprises a first determination process execution means for performing a first determination process for determining whether the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition,
The setting information determining means determines whether or not the setting information at the time of the ball entry of the game ball matches the setting information at the time of previous execution, prior to execution of the preceding determination process. prepared,
The game machine is
An avoiding means for avoiding execution of the preceding determination process when the setting information determining means determines that the setting information at the time of the ball entry of the game ball does not match the setting information at the time of previous execution. A game machine characterized by

According to the characteristic γJ2, since the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the execution of the preceding determination process when it is determined that the setting information at the time of the game ball entry and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match, the setting information is noise or the like. It is possible to suppress the execution of the first determination process while the value is rewritten to another value unintended by the administrator due to the influence of .

[Feature γJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature γJ1 or feature γJ2,
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the setting information determining means determines that the setting information at the time of the game ball entry does not match the setting information at the time of acquiring the special information. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature γJ3, the specific effect executing means is provided for executing a specific effect when it is determined that the setting information at the time the game ball enters the game ball does not match the setting information at the time of the previous execution. The specific effect can reduce the discomfort that the player feels when it is determined that the setting information at the time of ball entry and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match.

<Characteristic γK group>
The feature γK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspects 103 to 106 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γK1]
is a game machine,
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination processing executing means for executing special information determination processing for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a privilege provision condition;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined in the special information determination process that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
Winning probability change means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to meet the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
setting information storage means for storing setting information that determines setting of the winning probability;
setting information determination means for executing a setting information determination process for determining whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition;
holding display means for displaying a holding display indicating that there is the special information that is the special information that is acquired by the special information acquisition means and that is held until it becomes the target of the special information determination process;
Effect execution means for executing a pending change effect, which is an effect for changing the display mode of the pending display, triggered by the determination that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

If the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined conditions, the progress of the game may be affected or the progress of the game may be stopped. According to the feature γK1, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the pending change effect, which is the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display, is executed. , and the suspension change effect can reduce the player's discomfort caused by the determination that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature γK2]
The gaming machine according to feature γK1,
The holding display means can display the holding display in a plurality of display modes (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow colors),
When the degree of expectation of each display mode of the pending display is defined as the high probability of a favorable result for the player when the pending display of each display mode is displayed,
The effect execution means includes means for executing, as the suspension change effect, a suspension demotion effect for changing the display mode of the suspension display already displayed to a display mode with a lower degree of expectation. machine.

If the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined conditions, the progress of the game may be affected or the progress of the game may be stopped. According to the feature γK2, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the display mode of the pending display that has already been displayed is changed to a display mode with a lower degree of expectation. Since it is executed, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being stopped while the hold display in the highly anticipated display mode is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of disappointment due to the stoppage of the progress of the game. More specific description will be given below.

First, unlike this feature, a case of adopting a configuration in which the pending demotion effect is not executed even when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition will be described. In this configuration, for example, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in a situation where the pending display of the display mode with high expectation is displayed, the player can display the display mode with high expectation. Despite having a strong sense of anticipation for the special information corresponding to the pending display, the progress of the game may stop before the special information determination processing is executed for the special information. The player feels strong anger, disappointment, and even disbelief at the fact that the game is stopped without executing the special information determination process based on the special information corresponding to the pending display of the highly anticipated display mode. I end up feeling.

On the other hand, in this feature, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the hold demotion effect is performed. Change. Therefore, the player initially had a strong sense of expectation for the suspended display in the display mode with the high expectation, but the suspended display in the display mode with the low expectation By changing to , you will change your perception that the special information corresponding to the pending display was not so highly anticipated. Thereafter, even if the game is stopped before the special information corresponding to the reserved display is subject to special information determination processing, the player already has a strong sense of expectation for the special information corresponding to the reserved display. Therefore, even if the game is stopped before the special information corresponding to the reserved display is subjected to special information determination processing, the player does not have to feel so much anger or disappointment. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to reduce the player's anger and disappointment at the fact that the game has stopped.

[Feature γK3]
The gaming machine according to feature γK2,
The effect execution means includes means for changing the display mode of the already displayed suspension display to a display mode (blue) with the lowest degree of expectation among the plurality of types of display modes as the suspension demotion effect. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature γK3, the effect executing means changes the display form of the already displayed pending display to the display form (blue) with the lowest degree of expectation among the plurality of types of display forms as the pending demotion effect. Therefore, the player initially had a strong expectation for the suspended display in the display mode with the high expectation, but the suspended display in the display mode with the high expectation was the display mode with the lowest expectation. By changing to a hold display, the special information corresponding to the hold display will be recognized as having the lowest expectations. After that, even if the game is stopped before the special information corresponding to the reserved display is subject to the special information determination process, the player does not have to feel so much anger or disappointment. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the player's anger and disappointment at the fact that the game has stopped.

[Feature γK4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features γK2 to γK3,
The pending display means comprises means for continuously displaying the pending display corresponding to the special information even after the special information is subject to the special information determination process,
The effect executing means comprises a pending change suggesting effect executing means for executing a pending change suggesting effect, which is a effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display may change, prior to the pending change effect,
The pending display means displays the pending display of the most expected display mode (rainbow color) among the plurality of types of display modes to the special information after the special information is subjected to the special information determination process. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying only when continuing to display the pending display.

According to the feature γK4, the pending display means displays the pending display of the most expected display mode (rainbow color) among the plurality of types of display modes after the special information is subjected to special information determination processing. means for displaying only when the pending display corresponding to is continuously displayed. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described below.

First, unlike this feature, regarding the case of adopting a configuration in which the pending display in the most expected display mode can be displayed even before the suspended special information is subject to special information determination processing. explain. In this configuration, when the pending change suggesting effect is executed in a situation where the pending display of the display mode with the highest degree of expectation is displayed for the special information before the special information determination processing is performed, the pending change is performed. Since there is no room for changing the pending display in the display mode with the highest degree of expectation to the pending display in the display mode with the highest degree of expectation, the player who has recognized the suggestive effect continues to perform the pending display after the pending change suggestive effect. It is possible to predict that the change effect will change the pending display of the display mode with the highest degree of expectation to the pending display of the display mode with the lower degree of expectation, and the game for the pending change suggestive effect It lowers people's expectations.

On the other hand, according to this feature, at the stage before the reserved special information becomes the target of the special information determination process, the reserved display always has room to change to the reserved display of the display mode with a higher degree of expectation. Since it is in a certain state, even if the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the player who recognizes the pending change suggesting effect will be able to It cannot be determined whether to change to the hold display of the display mode with a high degree of expectation or to change to the hold display of the display state with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for the pending change suggesting effect.

[Feature γK5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features γK1 to γK4,
A gaming machine comprising game stopping means for executing a process of stopping progress of a predetermined game based on determination that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

According to the feature γK5, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is executed. It is possible to suppress the expansion of the player's disadvantage due to the continuation of the progress of the game.

<Characteristic γL group>
The feature γL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 103 to aspect 106 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γL1]
is a game machine,
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination processing executing means for executing special information determination processing for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a privilege provision condition;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
Winning probability change means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to meet the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process;
setting information storage means for storing setting information that determines setting of the winning probability;
setting information determination means for executing a setting information determination process for determining whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition;
pending display means for displaying a pending display indicating that there is the special information that is the special information acquired by the special information acquiring means and is held pending until the special information determination process is performed;
Effect execution means for executing a pending change effect, which is an effect for changing the display mode of the pending display;
When it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, it has already been scheduled to be executed at a time before it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, but has not yet been executed. canceling means for canceling an execution schedule of the pending change effect;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

If the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, a problem may arise in the progress of the game and the progress of the game may be stopped. According to the characteristic γL1, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the execution is already scheduled at the point before it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, but it is not yet executed. Since the execution schedule of the pending change performance that has not been performed is canceled, even though the player's expectation for the pending display whose display mode is changed by the pending change performance is increased, the special information corresponding to the pending display is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from stopping without execution of the special information determination process and the player feeling distrustful.

[Feature γL2]
A gaming machine according to feature γL1,
The holding display means can display the holding display in a plurality of display modes (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color),
When the degree of expectation of each display mode of the pending display is defined as the high probability of a favorable result for the player when the pending display of each display mode is displayed,
The effect executing means is capable of executing, as the pending change effect, a pending promotion effect that changes the display mode of the already displayed pending display to a display mode with a higher degree of expectation,
When it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the canceling means is already scheduled to be executed before it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for canceling an execution schedule of the pending promotion performance that has not yet been executed.

If the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, a problem may arise in the progress of the game and the progress of the game may be stopped. According to the feature γL2, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the execution is already scheduled at the time before it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, but it is not yet executed. Since the execution schedule of the pending promotion performance that has not been performed is canceled, the pending promotion performance is handled even though the player's expectation for the pending display changed to a display mode with a higher degree of expectation due to the pending promotion performance is increased. It is possible to prevent the player from having a strong sense of distrust because the game is stopped without the special information determination processing being executed for the special information received.

The inventions of the features γF group to feature γL group solve the following problems.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of providing a game machine that is less likely to cause problems and a game machine that takes players into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

<Characteristic γM group>
The feature γM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 110 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γM1]
Setting information changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition from among a plurality of privilege granting conditions (big win random number counter value group set in a success/failure table);
privilege granting condition storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing the one privilege granting condition corresponding to the setting information at least when the setting information is changed;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the one privilege provision condition stored in the privilege provision condition storage means;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the one privilege granting condition;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γM1, at least the privilege granting condition storage means for storing one privilege granting condition corresponding to the setting information triggered by the change of the setting information, and the special information are stored in the privilege granting condition storage means. Since the special information determination means for determining whether or not one privilege provision condition is satisfied is provided, the special information determination means does not refer to the setting information when determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition. may Therefore, for example, even if the setting information is rewritten to other values not intended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like, the one privilege granting condition stored in the privilege granting condition storage means The special information can be determined based on one privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information before being rewritten. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less susceptible to noise and the like.

<Characteristic γN group>
The feature γN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 110 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γN1]
setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
change operation receiving means (setting change button) for receiving a change operation for changing the setting information in the setting information change mode;
Confirmation operation receiving means (setting keyhole) for receiving a confirmation operation (operation of turning a setting change keyhole to the OFF side) for confirming the setting information in the setting information change mode;
setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting information is displayed but the setting information cannot be changed;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
display means (the DP light-emitting portion of the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 of the information display portion 45z) that can be in at least the first display mode (blinking state) and the second display mode (lighting state);
A gaming machine comprising
The setting information change mode is
a first period that is a period during which the change operation can be accepted and a period until the confirmation operation is accepted;
a second period, which is a period after the confirmation operation is accepted and until the setting information change mode in which the change operation cannot be accepted ends;
is composed of
The display means (the DP light emitting portion of the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 of the information display portion 45z) is
means for changing to the first display mode (blinking state) during the first period of the setting information change mode;
means for setting the second display mode (lighting state) during the second period of the setting information change mode;
means for setting the second display mode (lighting state) in the setting information display mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γN1, the display means includes means for displaying the first display mode during the first period of the setting information change mode, means for displaying the second display mode during the second period of the setting information change mode, and setting information. Means are provided for the second display mode in the display mode. Therefore, according to this feature, the administrator can clearly see whether the mode currently being executed is the setting information change mode or the setting information display mode simply by using the display means that can be in at least two display modes. In addition, it is possible to make the administrator clearly recognize that the setting information being changed in the setting information change mode has been finalized and the transition from the first period to the second period has occurred. Further, according to this feature, in both the second period of the setting information change mode and the setting information display mode, the setting information cannot be changed, and the display means is in the second display mode. there is Therefore, the administrator can recognize that the fact that the display means is in the second display mode means that the setting information cannot be changed.

<Characteristic γO group>
The feature γO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 111 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γO1]
is a game machine,
a process executing means for executing a plurality of processes in response to the start of power supply to the game machine;
display means that can be in a predetermined display mode (lighting state);
with
The process execution means may execute a specific process (setting change mode) as one process among the plurality of processes, or may not execute the specific process,
A gaming machine, wherein the display means includes means for displaying the predetermined display mode when the specific process is executed.

According to the feature γO1, since the display means has a means for changing to a predetermined display mode when a specific process is executed, the administrator of the gaming machine can check whether the display means is in the predetermined display mode. By confirming , it is possible to confirm whether or not a specific process is being executed in the gaming machine. Then, for example, when the administrator confirms that the display means is in a predetermined display mode in a game machine that should not execute a specific process when power supply is started, It can be recognized that some kind of fraud has been done to the game machine so that a specific process is executed by a person (for example, a goto master).

[Feature γO2]
The gaming machine according to feature γO1,
A gaming machine, wherein the display means is provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine.

According to the feature γO2, since the display means is provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine, the manager does not have to move to the back side of the gaming machine, for example, in a gaming hall during business. Also, the player can check the display mode of the display means only by circling the aisle that the player comes and goes.

[Feature γO3]
A gaming machine according to feature γO1 or feature γO2,
The gaming machine, wherein the display means includes means for maintaining the predetermined display mode even after the specific processing is completed.

According to the feature γO3, the display means has means for maintaining a predetermined display mode even after the specific process is completed, so that the administrator can perform the specific process in the gaming machine when power supply is started. has been executed can be confirmed even after the specific processing is completed.

[Feature γO4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features γO1 to γO3,
setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the display means includes means for displaying the predetermined display mode when the setting information change mode is executed as the specific process.

According to the feature γO4, the display means has means for displaying a predetermined display mode when the setting information change mode is executed as a specific process. By confirming whether or not, it is possible to confirm whether or not the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Then, for example, when the manager confirms that the display means is in a predetermined display mode in the game machine which should not be in the setting information change mode when the power supply is started, It can be recognized that someone other than the administrator (for example, a goto master) has done something illegal to the game machine so that the setting information change mode is executed.

<Characteristic γP group>
The feature γP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 113 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γP1]
setting information changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means (main side CPU 62x) for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, base, etc.), which is information related to game history based on the detection information;
erasing means for erasing the detection information;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation means is
a first calculation means for calculating the first type game history information (base) which is the game history information which is not affected by the change of the setting information;
a second calculation means for calculating the second type game history information (character ratio, continuous character ratio), which is the game history information affected by the change of the setting information;
with
The erasing means is
Triggered by the change of the setting information, among the detection information, the detection information that is the basis for calculating the second type gaming history information is erased, and the detection that is the basis for calculating the first type gaming history information. A game machine characterized by comprising means for not erasing information.

According to the feature γP1, when the setting information is changed, the detection information, which is the basis for calculating the type 2 gaming history information, is erased from the detection information. It is possible to suppress the fact that the detection information after change coexists and the second type game history information is calculated based on both the detection information before and after the change of the setting information. It is possible to secure storage capacity for the detection information after changing the setting information to be stored. On the other hand, when the setting information is changed, the detection information, which is the basis for calculating the type 1 gaming history information, is not deleted. Highly accurate type 1 game history information can be calculated based on the accumulated detection information. Therefore, the administrator or the inspector can confirm the type 2 game history information based on the detection information after the change of the setting information, and the highly accurate first type game history information based on the detection information accumulated over a long period of time. It becomes possible to check seed game history information.

<Characteristic γQ group>
The feature γQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 114 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γQ1]
setting information changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means (main side CPU 62x) for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, base, etc.), which is information related to game history based on the detection information;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation means is
a first calculation means for calculating the first type game history information (base) which is the game history information which is not affected by the change of the setting information;
a second calculation means for calculating the second type game history information (character ratio, continuous character ratio), which is the game history information affected by the change of the setting information;
with
The first calculation means comprises means for calculating the first type gaming history information (base) without dividing it into sections bounded by changes in the setting information,
The second calculation means is characterized by comprising means for calculating the second type game history information (character product ratio, continuous character product ratio) by dividing it into sections with a change in the setting information as a boundary. game machine.

According to the feature γQ1, the first calculation means includes means for calculating the first type gaming history information (base) without dividing it into sections bounded by changes in the setting information, and the second calculation means calculates the Equipped with a means for calculating the two types of game history information (ratio of role items, ratio of continuous role items) by dividing it into each section with the change of the setting information as a boundary, so that the administrator and the inspector can It is possible to check the highly accurate type 1 game history information (base) calculated from (period), and the type 2 game history information (character ratio, continuous character ratio) that is affected by changes in setting information ) can be checked separately for each section with a change in the setting information as a boundary.

<Characteristic γR group>
The feature γR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 115 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γR1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Detection information storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means )and,
Calculation means (main side CPU 62x) for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, base, etc.), which is information related to game history based on the detection information;
game history information storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing the calculated game history information;
erasing means for not erasing the game history information calculated based on the detection information, although the detection information is erased when a predetermined condition is satisfied (setting information is changed). ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γR1, even though the detection information is erased when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the game history information calculated based on the detection information is not erased, so it should be newly stored. A storage capacity for detection information can be secured, and an administrator or an inspector can store gaming history information calculated based on deleted detection information that is detection information before a predetermined condition is established. , the game history information can be confirmed even after the detection information used as the basis for calculating the game history information is deleted.

[Feature γR2]
A gaming machine according to feature γR1,
Setting information changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
with
the predetermined condition includes that the setting information has been changed;
The erasing means has means for erasing the detection information when the setting information is changed, but not erasing the gaming history information calculated based on the detection information. Amusement machine.

According to the feature γR2, although the detection information is erased when the setting information is changed, the game history information calculated based on the detection information is not erased, so it should be newly stored. In addition to being able to secure a storage capacity for the detection information, the administrator or inspector can store the gaming history information calculated based on the deleted detection information which is the detection information before the setting information is changed. , even after the detection information used as the basis for calculating the game history information is erased (that is, after the setting information is changed).

<Characteristic γS group>
The feature γS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 116 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γS1]
setting information changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) capable of storing various kinds of information;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Control means (main control means) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.), which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means, in the storage means; side CPU 62x);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, base, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation means is
a first calculation means for calculating type 1 game history information (base), which is game history information not affected by changes in the setting information;
a second calculation means for calculating second type game history information (character ratio, continuous character ratio), which is game history information affected by the change of the setting information;
with
The storage means
a first storage means (a specific area designated by a predetermined consecutive address in area 2 of the main RAM 64);
Second storage means (an area other than the specific area of area 2 of the main RAM 64);
with
The erasing means is
means for erasing the information stored in the first storage means and not erasing the information stored in the second storage means when the setting information is changed;
The control means is
means for storing, in the first storage means, the second type detection information, which is the base for calculating the second type game history information (character ratio, continuous character ratio) among the detection information;
means for storing, in the second storage means, the first type detection information, which is the basis for calculating the first type gaming history information (base), among the detection information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γS1, the erasing means has means for erasing information stored in the first storage means and not erasing information stored in the second storage means when the setting information is changed. means for storing, in the first storage means, the second type detection information, which is the basis for calculating the second type game history information (character ratio, continuous character ratio) among the detection information; and means for storing in the second storage means the first type detection information, which is the basis for calculating the first type gaming history information (base). The basics of calculation of second-class gaming history information that is affected by changes in setting information at once, without determining whether detection information is to be erased or not to be erased. By deleting the second type detection information, the second type detection information, which is the basis for calculating the first type game history information which is not affected by the change of the setting information, can be left without being deleted. That is, it is possible to omit the process of determining the detection information to be erased and the detection information not to be erased when erasing the detection information triggered by the change of the setting information, thereby simplifying the process.

[Feature γS2]
The gaming machine according to feature γS1,
A gaming machine, wherein the first storage means is a specific memory area designated by a predetermined consecutive address in a predetermined memory area.

According to the feature γS2, the first storage means is a specific storage area designated by a predetermined continuous address in a predetermined memory area, so that the second type detection information stored in the first storage means can be collectively stored. can be simplified.

<Characteristic γT group>
The feature γT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 117 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γT1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, base, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
Display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation means calculates a predetermined period (a period until the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage measured after the start of power supply to the gaming machine reaches a predetermined number, a period during which a predetermined button is pressed, etc.). A gaming machine comprising means for calculating the game history information based on the detection information in the period excluded.

According to the feature γT1, the calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information based on the detection information during a period other than the predetermined period. It does not form the basis for calculation of game history information. Therefore, for example, an operation inspection may be performed during a predetermined period of time to inspect whether the game machine operates normally by directly entering a game ball into a winning opening, starting opening, or the like with the game board in an open state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being affected by the operation inspection. As a result, the manager and the inspector can confirm accurate game history information that is not affected by the operation inspection.

[Feature γT2]
A gaming machine according to feature γT1,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period includes a period until the number of game balls detected by predetermined detection means (discharge path detection sensor provided in the discharge path) reaches a predetermined number.

According to the feature γT2, the predetermined period includes the period until the number of game balls detected by the predetermined detection means reaches the predetermined number. The detection information during the period until the predetermined number is reached does not form the basis for calculating the game history information. Therefore, for example, an operation inspection for inspecting whether or not the game machine operates normally by directly entering a game ball into a winning opening, starting opening, or the like with the game board in an open state is detected by the predetermined detecting means. If it is performed during the period until the number of played game balls reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being affected by the operation inspection.

[Feature γT3]
A gaming machine according to feature γT1 or feature γT2,
Provided with operation reception means for receiving a predetermined operation,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period includes a period during which the operation receiving means receives the predetermined operation.

According to the feature γT3, the predetermined period includes a period during which the operation receiving means receives the predetermined operation, so the detection information during the period when the operation receiving means receives the predetermined operation is the basis for calculating the game history information. does not become Therefore, for example, with the game board in an open state, a game ball is directly entered into a winning opening, a starting opening, or the like, and the operation receiving means conducts an operation inspection to check whether the gaming machine operates normally. If the operation inspection is performed during the period when the operation is accepted, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being affected by the operation inspection. Furthermore, when the manager wants to inspect the operation of the gaming machine without affecting the game history information, he can perform a predetermined operation on the operation receiving means. It becomes possible to perform the operation inspection at the timing.

<Characteristic γU group>
The feature γU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 118 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γU1]
information output means (main side MPU 62) for outputting information;
Display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying information output from the information output means;
maintenance means (information display section driving IC 45y) for maintaining the display mode of the display means until the next information is output from the information output means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γU1, since the maintenance means is provided for maintaining the display mode of the display means until the next information is output from the information output means, the next information is displayed until the next information is output from the information output means. The previously output information can continue to be displayed on the display means. For example, after one piece of information is output from the information output means, the one piece of information continues to be displayed on the display means until the next information after the one piece of information is output. Therefore, for example, an administrator or an inspector of a gaming machine can display the information on the display means even if the next information is not output after one information is output from the information output means due to a defect or the like. Since the information continues to be displayed, it is possible to confirm the one piece of information that continues to be displayed on the display means.

[Feature γU2]
A gaming machine according to feature γU1,
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
storage means for storing detection information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history basic information such as ball entry information, number of ball entry information, total value of prize balls, etc.);
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, base, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the information output means comprises means for sequentially outputting the calculated game history information.

According to the feature γU2, the information output means has means for sequentially outputting the calculated game history information. The game history information output before the next game history information can be displayed on the display means until it is output. For example, after one piece of game history information is output from the information output means, the one piece of game history information continues to be displayed on the display means until the next piece of game history information of the one piece of game history information is output. become. Therefore, for example, an administrator or an inspector of a gaming machine cannot output the next piece of game history information after one piece of game history information is output from the information output means due to a defect or the like. Since the information continues to be displayed on the display means, it is possible to confirm the piece of game history information that continues to be displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic γV group>
The feature γV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 119 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γV1]
A gaming machine,
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as entry ball information, entry number information, winning ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of game balls by the detection means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as character ratio, continuous character ratio, ball output rate, etc.) that is information related to game history based on the detection information;
Defect information storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing defect information (error code), which is information about a defect occurring in the game machine;
display means for displaying information (information display unit 45z);
with
The display means is
means for receiving a signal for displaying the gaming history information;
means for receiving a signal to display the fault information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γV1, the display means includes means for receiving a signal for displaying the game history information and means for receiving a signal for displaying the defect information. In addition, it is possible to display defect information. Therefore, in a game machine having display means capable of displaying game history information, there is no need to provide a separate display means for displaying defect information, so the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

[Feature γV2]
The gaming machine according to feature γV1,
Payout means for paying out game balls (payout control device 70, payout device 71);
a defect detection means for detecting a defect occurring in the dispensing means;
with
The defect information storage means comprises means for storing the defect information that occurred in the payout means,
The gaming machine, wherein the display means includes means for receiving a signal for displaying the information on the trouble that occurred in the payout means.

According to the feature γV2, the display means has means for receiving a signal for displaying information about a problem that has occurred in the payout means. Since there is no need to provide a separate display means for displaying information about the defect that has occurred, the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

The inventions of the features γM group to feature γV group solve the following problems.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of providing a game machine that is less likely to cause problems and a game machine that takes players into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

<Characteristic γW group>
The feature γW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γW1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
notification execution means for executing a predetermined notification (RAM clear notification process) when the setting information change mode is executed;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the notification executing means comprises means for executing the predetermined notification for a predetermined period (30 seconds).

According to the feature γW1, since the predetermined notification is executed for the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the administrator from noticing that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

A case will be described where, unlike this feature, a configuration is employed in which notification is performed only during the period in which the setting information change mode is being executed. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the setting information change mode is started to quickly change the setting information, and then the setting information change mode is quickly terminated, the notification period can be shortened, and the setting can be made without being noticed by the administrator. There is a problem that information can be changed illegally.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person quickly terminates the setting information change mode, the predetermined notification will continue for a predetermined period of time. Through the predetermined notification, it is possible to notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature γW2]
A gaming machine according to feature γW1,
The game machine, wherein the notification executing means includes means for executing the predetermined notification for a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the setting information change mode is terminated.

According to the feature γW2, the predetermined notification is executed for a predetermined period after the setting information change mode ends. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined notification is performed for a predetermined period after the setting information change mode is started. In this configuration, for example, if the setting information change mode is executed for a period longer than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification ends during the execution of the setting information change mode. If the setting information change mode ends in a period shorter than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification continues even after the setting information change mode ends. That is, the predetermined notification ends or continues without being interlocked with the end timing of the setting information change mode, which may confuse the administrator.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since the predetermined notification is executed for a predetermined period after the setting information change mode ends, the predetermined notification is not linked with the end timing of the setting information change mode. never ends or continues. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the administrator from being confused and prevent the administrator from noticing that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature γW3]
The gaming machine according to feature γW2,
The game machine, wherein the notification execution means includes means for executing a second notification (notification process during execution of setting change mode) during execution of the setting information change mode.

According to feature γW3, since the second notification is executed during execution of the setting information change mode, the administrator can confirm that the setting information change mode is being executed by an unauthorized person. can also be noticed.

<Characteristic γX group>
The feature γX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γX1]
Setting information for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions, is displayed but the setting information cannot be changed. display mode execution means;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
notification executing means for executing a predetermined notification (notification processing after the setting confirmation mode is finished) when the setting information display mode is executed;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the notification executing means comprises means for executing the predetermined notification for a predetermined period (30 seconds).

According to the feature γX1, since the predetermined notification is executed for the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the administrator from noticing that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

A case will be described where, unlike this feature, a configuration is employed in which notification is performed only during the period in which the setting information display mode is being performed. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the setting information display mode is started, the setting information can be confirmed quickly, and then the setting information display mode is quickly terminated, the notification period can be shortened, and the setting can be made without being noticed by the administrator. There is a problem that information can be checked illegally.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person quickly terminates the setting information display mode, the predetermined notification will continue for a predetermined period of time. Through the predetermined notification, it is possible to notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature γX2]
A gaming machine according to feature γX1,
The game machine, wherein the notification executing means includes means for executing the predetermined notification for a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the setting information display mode is terminated.

According to the feature γX2, the predetermined notification is executed for a predetermined period after the setting information display mode ends. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined notification is performed for a predetermined period after the setting information display mode is started. In this configuration, for example, if the setting information display mode is executed for a period longer than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification ends while the setting information display mode is being executed. If the setting information display mode ends in a period shorter than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification continues even after the setting information display mode ends. That is, the predetermined notification ends or continues without being interlocked with the end timing of the setting information display mode, which may confuse the administrator.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since the predetermined notification is executed for a predetermined period after the setting information display mode ends, the predetermined notification is not linked with the end timing of the setting information display mode. never ends or continues. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the administrator from being confused and prevent the administrator from noticing that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature γX3]
A gaming machine according to feature γX2,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification execution means includes means for executing a second notification (notification process during execution of setting confirmation mode) during execution of the setting information display mode.

According to feature γX3, since the second notification is executed during execution of the setting information display mode, the administrator can confirm that the setting information display mode is being executed by an unauthorized person during execution of the setting information display mode. can also be noticed.

<Characteristic γY group>
The feature γY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γY1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first notification executing means for executing a first notification (setting change mode in-execution notification process, RAM clear notification process B1, B2) when the setting information change mode is executed;
movable means (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) movable from a first state (closed state) to a second state (open state);
a second notification execution means for executing a second notification (door open notification process) when the movable means is in the second state (open state);
Priority means for giving priority to the first notification over the second notification;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γY1, the first notification executed when the setting information change mode is executed is prioritized over the second notification executed when the movable means is in the second state. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case where a configuration in which the second notification is prioritized over the first notification will be described. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the movable means is in the second state and the second notification is executed, even if the setting information change mode is executed, the second notification is given priority over the first notification, and the administrator etc. However, there is a problem that setting information can be illegally changed without being noticed.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person puts the movable means in the second state, the first notification is given priority over the second notification. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the information change mode has been executed. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature γY2]
The gaming machine according to feature γY1,
The priority means prevents the second notification from being performed when the first notification is being performed, even if the movable means is in the second state (priority notification flag A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of turning ON the

According to the feature γY2, when the first notification is being executed, the second notification is not executed even when the movable means is in the second state. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the machine.

[Feature γY3]
The gaming machine according to feature γY1,
When the first notification is being performed and the movable means is in the second state, the priority means reduces the volume of the second notification to the first notification. A game machine characterized by comprising means for making the notification smaller than when the notification is not executed.

According to the feature γY3, when the first notification is being performed and the movable means is in the second state, the volume of the second notification is set to the volume of the second notification. Since it is made smaller than when it is not, it is possible to make the manager or the like aware that the setting information change mode has been executed in the game machine while making the manager aware that the movable means is in the second state. .

<Characteristic γZ group>
The feature γZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γZ1]
Setting information for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions, is displayed but the setting information cannot be changed. display mode execution means;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first notification execution means for executing a first notification (notification process during execution of setting confirmation mode, notification process after completion of setting confirmation mode) when the setting information display mode is executed;
movable means (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) movable from a first state (closed state) to a second state (open state);
a second notification execution means for executing a second notification (door open notification process) when the movable means is in the second state (open state);
Priority means for giving priority to the first notification over the second notification;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature γZ1, the first notification executed when the setting information display mode is executed is prioritized over the second notification executed when the movable means is in the second state. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case where a configuration in which the second notification is prioritized over the first notification will be described. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the movable means is in the second state and the second notification is executed, even if the setting information display mode is executed, the second notification will be given priority over the first notification, and the administrator, etc. However, there is a problem that setting information can be checked illegally without being noticed.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person puts the movable means in the second state, the first notification is given priority over the second notification. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the information display mode has been executed. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature γZ2]
The gaming machine according to feature γZ1,
The priority means prevents the second notification from being performed when the first notification is being performed, even if the movable means is in the second state (priority notification flag A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of turning ON the

According to the feature γZ2, when the first notification is being executed, the second notification is not executed even when the movable means is in the second state. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the machine.

[Feature γZ3]
The gaming machine according to feature γZ1,
When the first notification is being performed and the movable means is in the second state, the priority means reduces the volume of the second notification to the first notification. A game machine characterized by comprising means for making the notification smaller than when the notification is not executed.

According to the feature γZ3, when the first notification is being performed and the movable means is in the second state, the volume of the second notification is adjusted to the volume of the first notification. Since it is made smaller than when it is not, it is possible to make the administrator or the like aware that the setting information display mode has been executed in the game machine while making the manager aware that the movable means is in the second state. .

<Characteristic δA group>
The feature δA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δA1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first notification executing means for executing a first notification (setting change mode in-execution notification process) during a period in which the setting information change mode is being executed;
A second notification execution means for executing a second notification (RAM clear notification processing A, B1, B2) that is a notification mode different from the first notification after the setting information change mode is terminated;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δA1, the first notification is performed during the execution of the setting information change mode, and the second notification, which is a notification mode different from the first notification, is performed after the setting information change mode is finished. Execute. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, the first notification performed during the execution of the setting information change mode and the second notification performed after the setting information change mode is completed are divided into two types. A case of adopting the same configuration will be described. In the case of adopting this configuration, for example, when the manager of the game hall instructs the worker to change the setting information of the game machine before the opening of the game hall, the worker can work The manager can grasp whether the setting information change mode is being executed or whether the setting information change mode has already ended in the game machine that is running, from the notification modes of the first notification and the second notification. Can not do it. Therefore, there is a problem that the manager cannot promptly give the next instruction to the worker.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the first notification is executed during the execution of the setting information change mode, and the notification mode is different from the first notification after the setting information change mode ends. Since the second notification is executed, the administrator can grasp the notification mode of the notification executed by the game machine even if the manager does not closely check the work process of the worker for the game machine, and can change the setting information. It becomes possible to grasp whether the mode is being executed or whether the setting information change mode has already ended. Therefore, the manager can promptly give the next instruction to the worker.

[Feature δA2]
The gaming machine according to feature δA1,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification executing means comprises means for executing the second notification for a predetermined period (30 seconds).

According to the feature δA1, the second notification is executed for a predetermined period of time, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the manager fails to notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine. .

A case will be described where, unlike this feature, a configuration is employed in which notification is performed only during the period in which the setting information change mode is being executed. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the setting information change mode is started to quickly change the setting information, and then the setting information change mode is quickly terminated, the notification period can be shortened, and the setting can be made without being noticed by the administrator. There is a problem that information can be changed illegally.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person quickly terminates the setting information change mode, the second notification will continue for a predetermined period of time. By the second notification over a period of time, it is possible to notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

<Characteristic δB group>
The feature δB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δB1]
Setting information for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions, is displayed but the setting information cannot be changed. display mode execution means;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first notification executing means for executing a first notification (notification processing during execution of setting confirmation mode) during a period in which the setting information display mode is being executed;
a second notification execution means for executing a second notification (notification processing after setting confirmation mode termination) that is a notification mode different from the notification mode of the first notification after the setting information display mode is terminated;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δB1, the first notification is performed during the execution of the setting information display mode, and the second notification, which is a notification mode different from the first notification, is performed after the setting information display mode is finished. Execute. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, there are two types of notification modes: the first notification that is performed during the execution of the setting information display mode, and the second notification that is performed after the setting information display mode ends. A case of adopting the same configuration will be described. In the case of adopting this configuration, for example, when the manager of the gaming hall instructs the worker to check the setting information of the gaming machine before the opening of the gaming hall, the worker can perform the work The administrator can grasp whether the setting information display mode is being executed or whether the setting information display mode has already ended in the game machine that is running, from the notification modes of the first notification and the second notification. Can not do it. Therefore, there is a problem that the manager cannot promptly give the next instruction to the worker.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the first notification is executed during the execution of the setting information display mode, and the notification mode is different from the notification mode of the first notification after the setting information display mode ends. Since the second notification is executed, even if the manager does not closely check the work process of the worker for the game machine, the setting information display can be performed by grasping the notification mode of the notification executed by the game machine. It is possible to grasp whether the mode is being executed or whether the setting information display mode has already ended. Therefore, the manager can promptly give the next instruction to the worker.

[Feature δB2]
A gaming machine according to feature δB1,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification executing means comprises means for executing the second notification for a predetermined period (30 seconds).

According to the feature δB1, the second notification is executed for a predetermined period of time, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the manager fails to notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine. .

A case will be described where, unlike this feature, a configuration is employed in which notification is performed only during the period in which the setting information display mode is being performed. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the setting information display mode is started, the setting information can be confirmed quickly, and then the setting information display mode is quickly terminated, the notification period can be shortened, and the setting can be made without being noticed by the administrator. There is a problem that information can be checked illegally.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person quickly terminates the setting information display mode, the second notification will continue for a predetermined period of time. By the second notification over a period of time, it is possible to notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

<Characteristic δC group>
The feature δC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δC1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
predetermined processing executing means for executing predetermined processing (RAM clearing processing);
Notification execution means for executing a predetermined notification (RAM clear notification process) triggered by the execution of the predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The predetermined process execution means is
means for executing the predetermined processing triggered by a predetermined operation without being triggered by the termination of the setting information change mode;
means for executing the predetermined processing triggered by the termination of the setting information change mode;
with
The notification executing means is
Means for executing the predetermined notification (RAM clear notification processing A) in a first notification mode when the predetermined processing is not triggered by the end of the setting information change mode but is triggered by the predetermined operation. and,
means for executing the predetermined notification in a notification manner (RAM clear notification processing B1, B2) different from the first notification manner when the predetermined processing is executed with the termination of the setting information change mode as a trigger; ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δC1, when the predetermined process is executed not triggered by the end of the setting information change mode but triggered by a predetermined operation, the predetermined notification is executed in the first notification mode, and the predetermined process is set. A predetermined notification is performed in a notification mode different from the first notification mode when the information change mode is terminated. Therefore, even if the manager does not know what kind of operation has been performed on the gaming machine, the manager can understand the notification mode of the predetermined notification in the gaming machine, and the predetermined processing can be performed according to the predetermined operation. or the end of the setting information change mode.

Specifically, for example, when the manager instructs the worker to execute a predetermined process on the game machine before the opening of the game hall, but does not instruct the operator to change the setting information. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not the worker is performing work that is different from the instructions of the manager by the predetermined notification mode even if the worker's work is not monitored in front of the eyes. can.

[Feature δC2]
The gaming machine according to feature δC1,
The notification executing means is
If the setting information is not changed in the setting information change mode that triggered the execution of the predetermined process, the predetermined notification (RAM clear notification) is performed in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode. means for performing process B1);
When the setting information is changed in the setting information change mode that triggers the execution of the predetermined process, the third notification mode different from the first notification mode and the second notification mode means for executing notification (RAM clear notification process B2);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δC2, when the setting information is not changed in the setting information change mode that triggers the execution of the predetermined process, the predetermined notification is performed in the second notification mode different from the first notification mode. , when the setting information is changed in the setting information change mode that triggers the execution of the predetermined process, a predetermined notification is performed in a third notification mode different from the first notification mode and the second notification mode. do. Therefore, even if the administrator does not know what kind of operation has been performed on the gaming machine, the manager can obtain a trigger for executing the predetermined processing by grasping the notification mode of the predetermined notification in the gaming machine. It is possible to grasp whether or not the setting information has been changed in the setting information change mode.

Specifically, for example, before the opening of the game hall, when the manager of the game hall instructs the operator to change the setting information of the game machine, the worker is different from the manager's instruction. Whether or not work is being performed can be confirmed by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. Also, even when the administrator himself/herself changes the setting information in the setting information change mode, he/she can confirm whether or not his/her work has been done correctly by confirming the notification mode of the predetermined notification. .

<Feature δD group>
The feature δD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δD1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
notification executing means for executing a predetermined notification when the setting information change mode is executed;
A gaming machine comprising
The notification executing means is
means for executing the predetermined notification (RAM clear notification process B1) in a first notification mode when the setting information is not changed in the setting information change mode;
means for executing the predetermined notification (RAM clear notification process B2) in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode when the setting information is changed in the setting information change mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δD1, when the setting information is not changed in the setting information change mode, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode, and when the setting information is changed in the setting information change mode, the first notification is performed. Since the predetermined notification is executed in the second notification mode different from the mode, the manager can receive the predetermined notification in the gaming machine without knowing what kind of operation was performed in the setting information change mode. By grasping the notification mode, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the setting information has been changed in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, before the opening of the game hall, when the manager of the game hall instructs the operator to change the setting information of the game machine, the worker is different from the manager's instruction. Whether or not work is being performed can be confirmed by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. Also, even when the administrator himself/herself changes the setting information in the setting information change mode, he/she can confirm whether or not his/her work has been done correctly by confirming the notification mode of the predetermined notification. .

[Feature δD2]
A gaming machine according to feature δD1,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification executing means comprises means for executing the predetermined notification for a predetermined period (30 seconds).

According to the feature δD2, since the predetermined notification is executed for the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the administrator from not noticing that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

A case will be described where, unlike this feature, a configuration is employed in which notification is performed only during the period in which the setting information change mode is being executed. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the setting information change mode is started to quickly change the setting information, and then the setting information change mode is quickly terminated, the notification period can be shortened, and the setting can be made without being noticed by the administrator. There is a problem that information can be changed illegally.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person quickly terminates the setting information change mode, the predetermined notification will continue for a predetermined period of time. Through the predetermined notification, it is possible to notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature δD3]
A gaming machine according to feature δD2,
The game machine, wherein the notification executing means includes means for executing the predetermined notification for a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the setting information change mode is terminated.

According to the feature δD3, the predetermined notification is performed for a predetermined period after the setting information change mode is finished. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined notification is performed for a predetermined period after the setting information change mode is started. In this configuration, for example, if the setting information change mode is executed for a period longer than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification ends during the execution of the setting information change mode. If the setting information change mode ends in a period shorter than the predetermined period, the predetermined notification continues even after the setting information change mode ends. That is, the predetermined notification ends or continues without being interlocked with the end timing of the setting information change mode, which may confuse the administrator.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since the predetermined notification is executed for a predetermined period after the setting information change mode ends, the predetermined notification is not linked with the end timing of the setting information change mode. never ends or continues. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the administrator from being confused and prevent the administrator from noticing that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature δD4]
A gaming machine according to feature δD3,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification execution means includes means for executing a second notification during execution of the setting information change mode.

According to feature δD4, since the second notification is executed while the setting information change mode is being executed, the administrator can confirm that the setting information change mode is being executed by an unauthorized person during the execution of the setting information change mode. can also be noticed.

<Feature δE group>
The feature δE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δE1]
Transmission means for transmitting a notification trigger command (RAM clear command), which is a command that triggers the execution of a predetermined notification;
notification executing means for executing the predetermined notification when the notification trigger command is received;
A gaming machine comprising
The notification executing means is
When the notification trigger command is received and a predetermined command (setting change mode end command A or B) is not received before the notification trigger command is received, the predetermined command in the first notification mode means for executing notification (RAM clear notification process A);
When the notification trigger command is received, if the predetermined command (setting change mode end command A or B) is received before the notification trigger command is received, the notification mode is different from the first notification mode means for executing the predetermined notification (RAM clear notification processing B1, B2) in a notification mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δE1, when the notification trigger command is received and the predetermined command is not received before the notification trigger command is received, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode, and the notification is performed. When a trigger command is received and a predetermined command is received before the notification trigger command is received, a predetermined notification is performed in a notification mode different from the first notification mode. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the notification trigger command cannot be transmitted with different instruction contents included, it is possible to execute the predetermined notification triggered by the notification trigger command in a different notification mode.

Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a notification trigger command is transmitted after executing a RAM clear process for erasing information stored in the RAM, whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied before executing the RAM clear process It is not possible to send the notification trigger command including the contents of Therefore, there is a problem that the notification execution means that receives the notification trigger command cannot execute the predetermined notification in the notification mode corresponding to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the execution of the RAM clear processing.

On the other hand, in this feature, for example, according to whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied before the RAM clear processing is executed, a predetermined command is not transmitted or is transmitted, and after the RAM clear processing is executed, If a notification trigger command is transmitted, it becomes possible to execute a predetermined notification in a notification mode corresponding to whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied before execution of the RAM clearing process.

[Feature δE2]
A gaming machine according to feature δE1,
Information storage means (main side RAM 64) capable of storing various kinds of information;
erasing means for executing an erasing process (RAM clearing process) for erasing the various information stored in the information storage means;
a second transmitting means for transmitting the predetermined command when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the setting change mode is executed) before executing the erasing process;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the transmitting means comprises means for transmitting the notification trigger command after executing the erasing process.

According to the feature δE2, a predetermined command is transmitted when a predetermined condition is satisfied before executing the erasing process, and a notification trigger command is transmitted after executing the erasing process. Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined notification in a notification mode corresponding to whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied before execution of the erasing process.

<Characteristic δF group>
The feature δF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δF1]
Transmission means for transmitting a notification trigger command (RAM clear command), which is a command that triggers the execution of a predetermined notification;
notification executing means for executing the predetermined notification when the notification trigger command is received;
A gaming machine comprising
The notification executing means is
When the notification trigger command is received, if the first command (setting change mode end command A) is received before the notification trigger command is received, the predetermined notification ( means for executing RAM clear notification processing B1);
When receiving the notification trigger command, if a second command (setting change mode end command B) different from the first command is received before receiving the notification trigger command, the first means for executing the predetermined notification (RAM clear notification process B2) in a second notification mode different from the notification mode of
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δF1, when the notification trigger command is received, and the first command is received before the notification trigger command is received, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode, and the notification is performed. When a trigger command is received and a second command different from the first command is received before the notification trigger command is received, in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode Execute a predetermined notification. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the notification trigger command cannot be transmitted with different instruction contents included, it is possible to execute the predetermined notification triggered by the notification trigger command in a different notification mode.

Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a notification trigger command is transmitted after executing a RAM clear process for erasing information stored in the RAM, the information stored in the RAM before the execution of the RAM clear process (For example, information indicating whether or not the setting information has been changed) cannot be included in the notification trigger command to be transmitted. Therefore, there is a problem that the notification execution means which receives the notification trigger command cannot execute the predetermined notification in the notification mode corresponding to the information stored in the RAM at the time before the execution of the RAM clearing process.

According to this feature, for example, the first command or the second command is transmitted according to the information stored in the RAM, and the notification trigger command is transmitted after the RAM clear processing is executed. Then, it becomes possible to execute a predetermined notification in a notification mode corresponding to the information stored in the RAM before the RAM clearing process is executed.

[Feature δF2]
A gaming machine according to feature δF1,
Information storage means (main side RAM 64) capable of storing various information including predetermined information (status of setting changed flag);
erasing means for executing an erasing process (RAM clearing process) for erasing the various information stored in the information storage means;
Before executing the erasing process, based on the predetermined information stored in the information storage means, any one of a plurality of commands including the first command and the second command is transmitted. a second transmission means for determining whether and transmitting the determined command;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the transmitting means comprises means for transmitting the notification trigger command after executing the erasing process.

According to the feature δF2, any one of a plurality of commands including the first command and the second command is transmitted based on the predetermined information stored in the information storage means before executing the erasing process. is determined, the determined command is transmitted, and the notification trigger command is transmitted after the erasing process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined notification in a notification mode corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the information storage means at the time before execution of the erasing process.

<Characteristic δG group>
The feature δG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 121 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δG1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first transmission means for transmitting a first command (setting change mode end command) when the setting information change mode ends;
a predetermined process executing means for executing a predetermined process (RAM clearing process) triggered by the termination of the setting information change mode;
a second transmission means for transmitting a second command (RAM clear command) when the predetermined processing is completed;
Notification execution means for executing a predetermined notification triggered by the reception of a predetermined command;
A gaming machine comprising
The notification executing means includes means for executing the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the second command, but not executing the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature δG1, the notification executing means executes a predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the second command, but does not execute the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined notification is executed even when the notification execution means receives the first command. When this configuration is employed, the notification executing means receives the second command during the execution of the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command. Then, the notification executing means adopts a configuration for redundantly executing a predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command and a predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the second command. Alternatively, a configuration is adopted in which the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command is terminated along with the start of the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the second command. .

However, if a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command and a predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the second command are executed in duplicate, the administrator However, there is a problem that the content of any notification cannot be recognized. Further, when adopting a configuration in which a predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command is terminated along with the start of the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the second command, A predetermined notification (for example, notification that the setting information change mode has ended) triggered by the reception of the first command ends in a short period of time, and the administrator receives the first command. There is a problem that the user cannot notice the predetermined notification, and cannot recognize, for example, that the setting information change mode has ended.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the notification execution means executes the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the second command, but the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command is not executed, the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command and the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the second command are executed in duplicate, and the administrator It is possible to avoid a situation in which the content of the notification cannot be recognized.

In the configuration of this characteristic, for example, by executing a predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the second command, in addition to the end of the predetermined process, the setting information change mode is ended. is notified, the administrator can reliably recognize that the setting information change mode has ended in addition to the end of the predetermined processing. Therefore, there is no problem even if the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command is not executed. The notification of the end of the information change mode) ends in a short period of time, and the administrator cannot notice the predetermined notification triggered by the reception of the first command, and the setting information change mode ends. It can also solve the problem of not being able to recognize what has been done.

[Feature δG2]
A gaming machine according to feature δG1,
The notification executing means is
When the second command is received and the first command (the setting change mode end command A or B) is not received before the second command is received, the first notification mode means for executing the predetermined notification (RAM clear notification process A) in
When the second command is received and the first command (setting change mode end command A or B) is received before the second command is received, the first notification mode is selected. means for executing the predetermined notification (RAM clear notification processing B1, B2) in a notification mode different from
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δG2, when the notification execution means receives the second command and has not received the first command before receiving the second command, the notification execution means performs the first notification in the first notification mode. When a predetermined notification is executed and a second command is received, if the first command is received before the second command is received, the notification mode is different from the first notification mode. Since the predetermined notification is executed, it is possible for the administrator who recognizes the predetermined notification to grasp whether or not the notification executing means has received the first command before receiving the second command. can. Specifically, for example, it is possible for an administrator who has recognized a predetermined notification to grasp whether or not the setting information change mode has been executed before the predetermined process.

<Characteristic δH group>
The feature δH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 122 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δH1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
Notification execution means for executing a predetermined notification (RAM clear notification process);
A gaming machine comprising
The notification executing means is
first execution means for executing the predetermined notification (RAM clear notification process) after the setting information change mode is completed when the setting information change mode is executed;
Second executing means for executing the predetermined notification when the power supply to the game machine is interrupted during the execution of the predetermined notification and the power supply to the game machine is restarted. and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δH1, when the setting information change mode is executed, a predetermined notification is performed after the setting information change mode is finished. Then, when the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted during execution of the predetermined notification, and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the predetermined notification is executed. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, even if the power supply to the game machine is interrupted during the execution of the predetermined notification, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the predetermined A description will be given of a case where a configuration in which the notification of is not executed is adopted. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the setting information change mode is executed to change the setting information, and after the setting information change mode is terminated, the power supply to the game machine is cut off by turning off the power switch of the game machine. The predetermined notification can be terminated, and the setting information can be illegally changed without being noticed by the administrator or the like. After that, if the power switch of the gaming machine is turned on again to start supplying electric power to the gaming machine, the gaming machine whose setting information has been illegally changed without the administrator or the like noticing. There is a problem that it becomes possible for an unauthorized person to play a game.

On the other hand, according to this feature, after the unauthorized person ends the setting information change mode, the power switch of the game machine is turned off to cut off the power supply to the game machine and terminate the predetermined notification. Even if the game machine is set to play a game, if the power switch of the game machine is turned on and the supply of electric power to the game machine is started again, the predetermined notification is executed. . Therefore, the manager or the like can notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine by the predetermined notification. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from illegally changing the setting information and playing a game on a gaming machine in which the setting information has been illegally changed.

[Feature δH2]
A gaming machine according to feature δH1,
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing predetermined identification information (RAM clearing notification flag);
When the predetermined notification is started, the identification information is set to a first state (ON), and when the predetermined notification is terminated, the identification information is set to a second state (OFF) different from the first state. Identification information transition means for transitioning to
with
The storage means can maintain the state of the identification information even when power supply to the gaming machine is cut off,
The second execution means comprises means for executing the predetermined notification when it is determined that the identification information is in the first state when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature δH1, the identification information transition means changes the identification information to the first state at the start of the predetermined notification, and transitions the identification information to the second state at the end of the predetermined notification. The storage means can maintain the state of the identification information even when power supply to the game machine is cut off. Therefore, for example, when the power switch of the game machine is turned off during execution of the predetermined notification and the power supply to the game machine is cut off, the identification information stored in the storage means is changed to the first maintained in condition.

Then, according to this feature, the second executing means executes a predetermined notification when it is determined that the identification information is in the first state when power supply to the gaming machine is started. That is, according to this feature, when the power supply to the game machine is interrupted during the execution of the predetermined notification, when the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the setting information is changed. Even if the mode is not executed, the predetermined notification will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from illegally changing the setting information and playing a game on a gaming machine in which the setting information has been illegally changed.

<Characteristic δI group>
The feature δI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 123 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δI1]
Setting information for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions, is displayed but the setting information cannot be changed. display mode execution means;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
Notification execution means for executing a predetermined notification (notification processing after the end of the setting confirmation mode);
A gaming machine comprising
The notification executing means is
first execution means for executing the predetermined notification (notification processing after termination of the setting confirmation mode) after the termination of the configuration information display mode when the configuration information display mode is executed;
Second executing means for executing the predetermined notification when the power supply to the game machine is interrupted during the execution of the predetermined notification and the power supply to the game machine is restarted. and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δI1, when the setting information display mode is executed, a predetermined notification is performed after the setting information display mode is terminated. Then, when the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted during execution of the predetermined notification, and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the predetermined notification is executed. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, even if the power supply to the game machine is interrupted during the execution of the predetermined notification, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the predetermined A description will be given of a case where a configuration in which the notification of is not executed is adopted. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if the setting information display mode is executed to check the setting information, and after the setting information display mode is terminated, the power supply to the game machine is cut off by turning off the power switch of the game machine. The predetermined notification can be terminated, and the setting information can be checked illegally without being noticed by the administrator or the like. After that, if the power switch of the gaming machine is turned on again to start supplying power to the gaming machine, the gaming machine whose setting information has been illegally confirmed without being noticed by the administrator or the like. There is a problem that it becomes possible for an unauthorized person to play a game.

On the other hand, according to this feature, after the unauthorized person ends the setting information display mode, the power switch of the game machine is turned off to cut off the power supply to the game machine and terminate the predetermined notification. Even if the game machine is set to play a game, if the power switch of the game machine is turned on and the supply of electric power to the game machine is started again, the predetermined notification is executed. . Therefore, the manager or the like can notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine by the predetermined notification. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent illegal confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person and playing a game on the gaming machine in which the setting information has been illegally confirmed.

[Feature δI2]
A gaming machine according to feature δI1,
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing predetermined identification information (RAM clearing notification flag);
When the predetermined notification is started, the identification information is set to a first state (ON), and when the predetermined notification is terminated, the identification information is set to a second state (OFF) different from the first state. Identification information transition means for transitioning to
with
The storage means can maintain the state of the identification information even when power supply to the gaming machine is cut off,
The second execution means comprises means for executing the predetermined notification when it is determined that the identification information is in the first state when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature δI1, the identification information transition means changes the identification information to the first state at the start of the predetermined notification, and transitions the identification information to the second state at the end of the predetermined notification. The storage means can maintain the state of the identification information even when power supply to the game machine is cut off. Therefore, for example, when the power switch of the game machine is turned off during execution of the predetermined notification and the power supply to the game machine is cut off, the identification information stored in the storage means is changed to the first maintained in condition.

Then, according to this feature, the second executing means executes a predetermined notification when it is determined that the identification information is in the first state when power supply to the gaming machine is started. That is, according to this feature, when the power supply to the game machine is interrupted during the execution of the predetermined notification, when the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the setting information is displayed. Even if the mode is not executed, the predetermined notification will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent illegal confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person and playing a game on the gaming machine in which the setting information has been illegally confirmed.

<Characteristic δJ group>
The feature δJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 124 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δJ1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
notification executing means for executing a predetermined notification (setting change mode in-execution notification process, RAM clear notification process B1, B2) when the setting information change mode is executed;
Variation starting means (special figure unit 37) for starting the variation of the pattern when the special information becomes the object of determination by the special information determining means;
Effect executing means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100, etc.) that executes the effect with the variation of the pattern as a trigger,
Priority means for giving priority to the predetermined notification over the effect;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δJ1, the predetermined notification that is executed when the setting information change mode is executed is prioritized over the effect that is executed triggered by the variation of the symbols. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, the case of adopting a configuration in which the effect is prioritized over the predetermined notification will be described. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if a game ball is entered into the ball entry means to start the variation of the pattern and the performance is executed, even if the setting information change mode is executed, the performance is given priority over the predetermined notification, There is a problem that setting information can be illegally changed without being noticed by an administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person enters the game ball into the ball entry means and starts the pattern variation, the predetermined notification takes precedence over the effect, so the administrator etc., can increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature δJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature δJ1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the priority means comprises means for not executing the effect when the predetermined notification is being executed, even if the symbols are fluctuating.

According to the feature δJ2, when the predetermined notification is being executed, the effect is not executed even if the symbols are fluctuating. You can increase your chances of noticing things.

[Feature δJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature δJ1,
The effect executing means comprises means for outputting a specific sound as at least part of the effect,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the priority means comprises means for not outputting the specific sound when the predetermined notification is being executed, even if the symbols are fluctuating.

According to the feature δJ3, when the predetermined notification is being executed, the specific sound is not output even if the symbols are changing. You can increase the chances of being able to notice that it has been done.

[Feature δJ4]
The gaming machine according to feature δJ1,
The effect executing means comprises means for outputting a specific sound as at least part of the effect,
The priority means reduces the volume of the specific sound when the predetermined notification is being performed and the pattern is fluctuating, compared to when the predetermined notification is not being performed. A game machine characterized by comprising a means for

According to the characteristic δJ4, when the predetermined notification is executed and the pattern is fluctuating, the volume of the specific sound is made smaller than when the predetermined notification is not executed. It is possible to make the administrator or the like aware that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine while making the administrator aware that the symbols have changed.

<Characteristic δK group>
The feature δK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 125 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δK1]
Setting information for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions, is displayed but the setting information cannot be changed. display mode execution means;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
notification executing means for executing a predetermined notification (notification process during execution of setting confirmation mode, notification process after completion of setting confirmation mode) when the setting information display mode is executed;
Variation starting means (special figure unit 37) for starting the variation of the pattern when the special information becomes the object of determination by the special information determining means;
Effect executing means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100, etc.) that executes the effect with the variation of the pattern as a trigger,
Priority means for giving priority to the predetermined notification over the effect;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δK1, the predetermined notification that is executed when the setting information display mode is executed is prioritized over the effect that is executed triggered by the variation of the symbols. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, the case of adopting a configuration in which the effect is prioritized over the predetermined notification will be described. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. In addition, if a game ball is entered into the ball entry means and the pattern is started to change to execute an effect, even if the setting information display mode is executed, the effect is given priority over the predetermined notification, There is a problem that setting information can be checked illegally without being noticed by an administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person enters the game ball into the ball entry means and starts the pattern variation, the predetermined notification takes precedence over the effect, so the administrator etc., can increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature δK2]
A gaming machine according to feature δK1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the priority means comprises means for not executing the effect when the predetermined notification is being executed, even if the symbols are fluctuating.

According to the feature δK2, when the predetermined notification is being executed, the effect is not executed even if the symbols are fluctuating. You can increase your chances of noticing things.

[Feature δK3]
A gaming machine according to feature δK1,
The effect executing means comprises means for outputting a specific sound as at least part of the effect,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the priority means comprises means for not outputting the specific sound when the predetermined notification is being executed, even if the symbols are fluctuating.

According to the feature δK3, when the predetermined notification is being executed, the specific sound is not output even if the symbols are changing. You can increase the chances of being able to notice that it has been done.

[Feature δK4]
A gaming machine according to feature δK1,
The effect executing means comprises means for outputting a specific sound as at least part of the effect,
The priority means reduces the volume of the specific sound when the predetermined notification is being performed and the pattern is fluctuating, compared to when the predetermined notification is not being performed. A game machine characterized by comprising a means for

According to the feature δK4, when the predetermined notification is being executed and the pattern is changing, the volume of the specific sound is made smaller than when the predetermined notification is not being executed. It is possible to make the manager or the like notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine while making the manager notice that the symbols are changing.

<Characteristic δL group>
The feature δL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 126 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δL1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first notification executing means for executing a first notification (setting change mode in-execution notification process, RAM clear notification process B1, B2) when the setting information change mode is executed;
a storage means (lower tray 21) capable of storing game balls;
Second notification execution means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100, etc.) for executing the second notification when the number of game balls stored in the storage means exceeds a predetermined amount;
Priority means for giving priority to the first notification over the second notification;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δL1, the first notification that is executed when the setting information change mode is executed is more than the second notification that is executed when the number of game balls stored in the storage means exceeds a predetermined amount. also give priority. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case where a configuration in which the second notification is prioritized over the first notification will be described. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. Furthermore, if the storage means is made to store a predetermined amount or more of game balls and the second notification is executed, even if the setting information change mode is executed, the second notification is prioritized over the first notification. Therefore, there is a problem that setting information can be illegally changed without being noticed by an administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person stores a predetermined amount or more of game balls in the storage means, the first notification is given priority over the second notification, so that the manager, etc. can increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature δL2]
The gaming machine according to feature δL1,
The priority means is means for not executing the second notification when the first notification is being performed, even if the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δL2, when the first notification is being executed, the second notification is not executed even when the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount. It is possible to increase the possibility that the player or the like can notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature δL3]
The gaming machine according to feature δL1,
The second notification execution means includes means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the second notification,
The priority means is means for not outputting the specific notification sound when the first notification is being executed, even if the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δL3, when the first notification is being executed, even if the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, a specific notification sound is not output. It is possible to increase the possibility that the player or the like can notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature δL4]
The gaming machine according to feature δL1,
The second notification execution means includes means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the second notification,
The priority means, when the first notification is being executed and the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, reduces the volume of the specific notification sound to A game machine characterized by comprising means for making the first notification smaller than when the first notification is not executed.

According to the feature δL4, when the first notification is executed and the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the volume of the specific notification sound is reduced to the first Since the notification is made smaller than when the notification is not executed, the setting information change mode is set in the gaming machine while making the administrator or the like aware that the game balls stored in the storage means are equal to or larger than the predetermined amount. It can be made aware that it has been executed.

<Feature δM group>
The feature δM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 127 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δM1]
Setting information for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions, is displayed but the setting information cannot be changed. display mode execution means;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first notification execution means for executing a first notification (notification process during execution of setting confirmation mode, notification process after completion of setting confirmation mode) when the setting information display mode is executed;
a storage means (lower tray 21) capable of storing game balls;
Second notification execution means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100, etc.) for executing the second notification when the number of game balls stored in the storage means exceeds a predetermined amount;
Priority means for giving priority to the first notification over the second notification;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δM1, the first notification that is executed when the setting information display mode is executed is more than the second notification that is executed when the number of game balls stored in the storage means exceeds a predetermined amount. also give priority. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case where a configuration in which the second notification is prioritized over the first notification will be described. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. Furthermore, if the storage means stores a predetermined amount or more of game balls and executes the second notification, even if the setting information display mode is executed, the second notification is prioritized over the first notification. Therefore, there is a problem that setting information can be checked illegally without being noticed by an administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an unauthorized person stores a predetermined amount or more of game balls in the storage means, the first notification is given priority over the second notification, so that the manager, etc. can increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature δM2]
A gaming machine according to feature δM1,
The priority means is means for not executing the second notification when the first notification is being performed, even if the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δM2, when the first notification is executed, the second notification is not executed even when the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, so management is performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the player or the like can notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature δM3]
A gaming machine according to feature δM1,
The second notification execution means includes means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the second notification,
The priority means is means for not outputting the specific notification sound when the first notification is being executed, even if the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δM3, when the first notification is being executed, even if the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the specific notification sound is not output. It is possible to increase the possibility that the player or the like can notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the game machine.

[Feature δM4]
A gaming machine according to feature δM1,
The second notification execution means includes means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the second notification,
The priority means, when the first notification is being executed and the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, reduces the volume of the specific notification sound to A game machine characterized by comprising means for making the first notification smaller than when the first notification is not executed.

According to the feature δM4, when the first notification is executed and the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the volume of the specific notification sound is reduced to the first Since the notification is made smaller than when the notification is not executed, the setting information display mode is set in the gaming machine while making the administrator or the like aware that the number of game balls stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount. It can be made aware that it has been executed.

<Characteristic δN group>
The feature δN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 128 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δN1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first notification executing means for executing a first notification (setting change mode in-execution notification process, RAM clear notification process B1, B2) when the setting information change mode is executed;
When the shooting mode of the game ball is not a predetermined shooting mode (when "right hitting" is performed in the game state in which "left hitting" should be performed, "left hitting" is performed in the game state in which "right hitting" should be performed) Second notification execution means (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, etc.) that executes the second notification (left-handed suggestive notification process, right-handed suggested notification process) in the case where it is performed);
Priority means for giving priority to the first notification over the second notification;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δN1, the first notification that is executed when the setting information change mode is executed is prioritized over the second notification that is executed when the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode. . The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case where a configuration in which the second notification is prioritized over the first notification will be described. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") attempts to illegally change the setting information without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. Furthermore, if the game ball is shot in a shooting mode that is not a predetermined shooting mode and the second notification is executed, the second notification takes precedence over the first notification even if the setting information change mode is executed. There is a problem that the setting information can be illegally changed without being noticed by an administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the game ball is shot in a shooting mode that is not the predetermined shooting mode, the first notification takes precedence over the second notification, so the manager or the like can It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature δN2]
A gaming machine according to feature δN1,
The priority means comprises means for not executing the second notification when the first notification is being performed, even if the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode. Characteristic game machine.

According to the characteristic δN2, when the first notification is executed, the second notification is not executed even if the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature δN3]
A gaming machine according to feature δN1,
The second notification execution means includes means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the second notification,
The priority means comprises means for not outputting the specific notification sound when the first notification is being executed, even if the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature δN3, when the first notification is being executed, even if the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode, the specific notification sound is not output. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature δN4]
A gaming machine according to feature δN1,
The second notification execution means includes means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the second notification,
The priority means, when the first notification is being executed and when the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode, the volume of the specific notification sound is set to the first A game machine characterized by comprising means for making the notification smaller than when the notification is not executed.

According to the feature δN4, when the first notification is executed and the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode, the volume of the specific notification sound is set by the first notification. To make a manager or the like aware that a setting information change mode has been executed in the game machine while noticing that the shooting mode of the game ball is not a predetermined shooting mode because the size is made smaller than when it is not set. can be done.

<Feature δO group>
The feature δO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 129 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δO1]
Setting information for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions, is displayed but the setting information cannot be changed. display mode execution means;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first notification execution means for executing a first notification (notification process during execution of setting confirmation mode, notification process after completion of setting confirmation mode) when the setting information display mode is executed;
When the shooting mode of the game ball is not a predetermined shooting mode (when "right hitting" is performed in the game state in which "left hitting" should be performed, "left hitting" is performed in the game state in which "right hitting" should be performed) Second notification execution means (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, etc.) that executes the second notification (left-handed suggestive notification process, right-handed suggested notification process) in the case where it is performed);
Priority means for giving priority to the first notification over the second notification;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δO1, the first notification executed when the setting information display mode is executed is prioritized over the second notification executed when the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode. . The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case where a configuration in which the second notification is prioritized over the first notification will be described. In this configuration, for example, if a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") tries to check the setting information illegally without being noticed by the administrator or nearby players. Furthermore, if the game ball is shot in a shooting mode that is not a predetermined shooting mode and the second notification is executed, even if the setting information display mode is executed, the second notification takes precedence over the first notification. There is a problem that setting information can be illegally confirmed without being noticed by an administrator or the like.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the game ball is shot in a shooting mode that is not the predetermined shooting mode, the first notification takes precedence over the second notification, so the manager or the like can It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress unauthorized confirmation of the setting information by an unauthorized person.

[Feature δO2]
The gaming machine according to feature δO1,
The priority means comprises means for not executing the second notification when the first notification is being performed, even if the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature δO2, when the first notification is executed, the second notification is not executed even if the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature δO3]
The gaming machine according to feature δO1,
The second notification execution means includes means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the second notification,
The priority means comprises means for not outputting the specific notification sound when the first notification is being executed, even if the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature δO3, when the first notification is being executed, even if the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode, the specific notification sound is not output. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that the setting information display mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature δO4]
The gaming machine according to feature δO1,
The second notification execution means includes means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the second notification,
The priority means, when the first notification is being executed and when the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode, the volume of the specific notification sound is set to the first A game machine characterized by comprising means for making the notification smaller than when the notification is not executed.

According to the feature δO4, when the first notification is being executed and the shooting mode of the game ball is not the predetermined shooting mode, the volume of the specific notification sound is set by the first notification. To make a manager or the like aware that the setting information display mode has been executed in the game machine while noticing that the shooting mode of the game ball is not a predetermined shooting mode by making it smaller than when it is not set. can be done.

<Feature δP group>
The feature δP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 130 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δP1]
Setting information change mode execution means for executing a setting information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing setting information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first notification execution means for executing a first notification (RAM clear notification processes B1 and B2) after the setting information change mode is completed when the setting information change mode is executed;
a magnetic detection means for detecting magnetism;
A second notification execution means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100, etc.) that executes a second notification when the magnetism detected by the magnetic detection means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Priority means for giving priority to the second notification over the first notification;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δP1, the second notification executed when the detected magnetism satisfies a predetermined condition is prioritized over the first notification executed after the setting information change mode ends. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case where a configuration in which the first notification is prioritized over the second notification will be described. In this configuration, for example, after the administrator executes the setting information change mode, the administrator terminates the setting information change mode and leaves the game machine, and the first notification is executed in the game machine. In this situation, even if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal person") attempts to illegally enter a game ball into the ball entry means using a magnet, for example, There is a problem that the first notification is given priority over the second notification, and a game ball can be illegally entered into the ball-entering means using a magnet without being noticed by a manager or the like. .

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an attempt is made to illegally enter a game ball into the ball entry means using a magnet in a situation where the first notification is being executed, the second notification is the second notification. Since it is given priority over the notification of 1, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the magnet is illegally used in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress unauthorized use of the magnet by an unauthorized person.

[Feature δP2]
A gaming machine according to feature δP1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the priority means comprises means for not executing the first notification when the second notification is executed, even if the setting information change mode is executed. .

According to the feature δP2, when the second notification is executed, the first notification is not executed even if the setting information change mode is executed. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that a magnet has been used.

[Feature δP3]
A gaming machine according to feature δP1,
The first notification execution means comprises means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the first notification,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the priority means comprises means for not outputting the specific notification sound when the second notification is executed, even if the setting information change mode is executed. .

According to the feature δP3, when the second notification is executed, the specific notification sound is not output even if the setting information change mode is executed. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that a magnet has been used.

[Feature δP4]
A gaming machine according to feature δP1,
The first notification execution means comprises means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the first notification,
When the second notification is executed and the setting information change mode is executed, the priority means sets the volume of the specific notification sound to A game machine characterized by comprising a means for making it smaller than a case.

According to the feature δP4, when the second notification is executed and the setting information change mode is executed, the volume of the specific notification sound is set lower than when the second notification is not executed. is also reduced, it is possible to make the manager or the like aware that the setting information change mode has been executed and that the magnet has been illegally used in the game machine.

<Characteristic δQ group>
The feature δQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 131 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δQ1]
Setting information for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions, is displayed but the setting information cannot be changed. display mode execution means;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the setting information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a first notification execution means for executing a first notification (notification processing after termination of the setting confirmation mode) after the termination of the configuration information display mode when the configuration information display mode is executed;
a magnetic detection means for detecting magnetism;
A second notification execution means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100, etc.) that executes a second notification when the magnetism detected by the magnetic detection means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Priority means for giving priority to the second notification over the first notification;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δQ1, the second notification executed when the detected magnetism satisfies a predetermined condition is prioritized over the first notification executed after the setting information display mode ends. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case where a configuration in which the first notification is prioritized over the second notification will be described. In this configuration, for example, after the setting information display mode is executed by the manager, the setting information display mode is terminated, the manager leaves the gaming machine, and the first notification is performed in the gaming machine. In this situation, even if a person who is not an administrator but has an illegal intention (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal person") attempts to illegally enter a game ball into the ball entry means using a magnet, for example, There is a problem that the first notification is given priority over the second notification, and a game ball can be illegally entered into the ball-entering means using a magnet without being noticed by a manager or the like. .

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if an attempt is made to illegally enter a game ball into the ball entry means using a magnet in a situation where the first notification is being executed, the second notification is the second notification. Since it is given priority over the notification of 1, it is possible to increase the possibility that the administrator or the like can notice that the magnet is illegally used in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress unauthorized use of the magnet by an unauthorized person.

[Feature δQ2]
The gaming machine according to feature δQ1,
The gaming machine, wherein the priority means includes means for not executing the first notification when the second notification is executed, even if the setting information display mode is executed. .

According to the feature δQ2, when the second notification is executed, the first notification is not executed even if the setting information display mode is executed. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that a magnet has been used.

[Feature δQ3]
The gaming machine according to feature δQ1,
The first notification execution means comprises means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the first notification,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the priority means comprises means for not outputting the specific notification sound when the second notification is executed, even if the setting information display mode is executed. .

According to the feature δQ3, when the second notification is executed, even if the setting information display mode is executed, the specific notification sound is not output, so that the administrator or the like cannot illegally use the game machine. It is possible to increase the possibility of being able to notice that a magnet has been used.

[Feature δQ4]
The gaming machine according to feature δQ1,
The first notification execution means comprises means for outputting a specific notification sound as at least part of the first notification,
When the second notification is executed and the setting information display mode is executed, the priority means sets the volume of the specific notification sound to A game machine characterized by comprising a means for making it smaller than a case.

According to the feature δQ4, when the second notification is executed and the setting information display mode is executed, the volume of the specific notification sound is set to be lower than when the second notification is not executed. is made smaller, it is possible to make the manager or the like aware that the setting information display mode has been executed and that the magnet has been illegally used in the gaming machine.

The inventions of the group of features γ to group of features δQ solve the following problems.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of providing a game machine that is less likely to cause problems and a game machine that takes players into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

<Feature δR group>
The feature δR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 132 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δR1]
Predetermined information change mode execution means for executing a predetermined information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing predetermined information, which is information that determines one privilege grant condition from among a plurality of privilege grant conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
production execution means for executing production;
with
The effect execution means includes effect determination means for determining the effect to be executed when the predetermined information change mode is executed, using a different method from when the predetermined information change mode is not executed. game machine.

According to the feature δR1, when the predetermined information change mode is executed, the effect to be executed is determined by a method different from that when the predetermined information change mode is not executed, so the player can select the effect to be executed. From the ratio, frequency, etc., it can be inferred whether or not the predetermined information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine.

Further, according to this feature, even when the predetermined information change mode is executed but the predetermined information is not changed, the same method as when the predetermined information change mode is executed and the predetermined information is changed is performed. Since the effect to be executed is determined, the player can be made to recognize that the setting information has been changed in the game machine although the predetermined information has not actually been changed.

[Feature δR2]
A gaming machine according to feature δR1,
Even when the predetermined information change mode is executed, the effect determination means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, executes the effect in the same manner as when the predetermined information change mode is not executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining

According to the feature δR2, even when the predetermined information change mode is executed, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect to be executed is determined by the same method as when the predetermined information change mode is not executed. Therefore, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player cannot guess whether or not the predetermined information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine, based on the ratio and frequency of the effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants to play a game in the gaming machine before the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature δR3]
Features A gaming machine according to feature δR2,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes execution of a predetermined performance for a predetermined number of times.

According to the feature δR3, even when the predetermined information change mode is executed, if the predetermined effect is executed a predetermined number of times, the same method as when the predetermined information change mode is not executed is executed. Since the effect is determined, after the predetermined effect is executed a predetermined number of times, the player can guess whether or not the predetermined information change mode has been executed in the gaming machine from the ratio and frequency of the effect to be executed. be unable to do so. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants to play a game in the gaming machine before the predetermined performance is executed a predetermined number of times.
be able to.

[Feature δR4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features δR1 to δR3,
means for changing and stopping predetermined identification information for notifying the result of determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition;
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the predetermined identification information is changed and stopped a predetermined number of times.

According to the characteristic δR4, even when the predetermined information change mode is executed, if the predetermined identification information is changed and stopped a predetermined number of times, the same method is used as when the predetermined information change mode is not executed. , the effect to be executed is determined, so after the change and stop of the predetermined identification information are executed a predetermined number of times, the player decides whether the predetermined information change mode is set in the gaming machine based on the ratio and frequency of the effects to be executed. It becomes impossible to guess whether it was executed or not. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to play a game in the gaming machine before the predetermined identification information is changed and stopped a predetermined number of times.

<Feature δS group>
The feature δS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 133 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δS1]
Predetermined information changing means capable of changing predetermined information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition from among a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
production execution means for executing production;
with
The game machine is characterized in that the effect executing means comprises effect determining means for determining the effect to be executed when the predetermined information is changed by a method different from when the predetermined information is not changed.

According to the feature δS1, when the predetermined information is changed, the effect to be executed is determined by a method different from when the predetermined information is not changed, so the player can determine the ratio, frequency, etc. of the effect to be executed. Therefore, it can be inferred whether or not the predetermined information has been changed in the gaming machine.

[Feature δS2]
The gaming machine according to feature δS1,
The effect determination means determines the effect to be executed by the same method as when the predetermined information is not changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied even when the predetermined information is changed. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic δS2, even if the predetermined information is changed, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect to be executed is determined by the same method as when the setting information is not changed. After the condition is satisfied, the player cannot guess whether or not the predetermined information has been changed in the gaming machine, based on the ratio and frequency of the types of effects that are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants to play a game in the gaming machine before the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature δS3]
Features A gaming machine according to feature δS2,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes execution of a predetermined performance for a predetermined number of times.

According to the characteristic δS3, even if the predetermined information is changed, when the predetermined effect is executed a predetermined number of times, the effect to be executed is determined by the same method as when the predetermined information is not changed. Therefore, after the predetermined performance is executed for a predetermined number of times, the player cannot guess whether or not the predetermined information has been changed in the game machine from the ratio, frequency, etc. of the performance to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants to play a game in the gaming machine before the predetermined performance is executed a predetermined number of times.
be able to.

[Feature δS4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features δS1 to δS3,
means for changing and stopping predetermined identification information for notifying the result of determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition;
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the predetermined identification information is changed and stopped a predetermined number of times.

According to the feature δS4, even if the predetermined information is changed, if the predetermined identification information is changed and stopped a predetermined number of times, the same method as when the predetermined information is not changed is performed. Since the effect is determined, after the predetermined identification information is changed and stopped a predetermined number of times, the player can determine whether the predetermined information has been changed in the gaming machine based on the ratio and frequency of the effect to be executed. cannot be guessed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to play a game in the gaming machine before the predetermined identification information is changed and stopped a predetermined number of times.
be able to.

<Characteristic δT group>
The feature δT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 134 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δT1]
Predetermined information change mode execution means for executing a predetermined information change mode (setting change mode) capable of changing predetermined information, which is information that determines one privilege grant condition from among a plurality of privilege grant conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
predetermined processing execution means for executing predetermined processing when the predetermined information change mode is executed and the elapsed time from the previous execution of the predetermined information change mode does not satisfy a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δT1, when the predetermined information change mode is executed and the elapsed time from the previous execution of the predetermined information change mode does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the predetermined processing is executed. Since the means is provided, the manager of the game hall notices the existence of the game machine executing the predetermined processing in the game hall, and thus executes the current predetermined information change mode from the previous execution of the predetermined information change mode. It is possible to notice the presence of a game machine whose elapsed time until the time does not satisfy a predetermined condition. In addition, the manager determines whether or not a predetermined process has been executed in the gaming machine, and the elapsed time from the previous execution of the predetermined information changing mode in the gaming machine to the current execution of the predetermined information changing mode satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to grasp whether or not

[Feature δT2]
A gaming machine according to feature δT1,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the elapsed time is equal to or longer than a first predetermined time (14 hours).

According to the feature δT2, the predetermined condition includes that the elapsed time from the previous execution of the predetermined information change mode to the current execution of the predetermined information change mode is equal to or longer than the first predetermined time. When the elapsed time from the execution of the predetermined information change mode to the current execution of the predetermined information change mode is less than the first predetermined time, the predetermined process is executed. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

In the following, a case will be described in which a gaming machine with the first predetermined time set to 14 hours is operated in a gaming hall that is open from 10:00 am to 11:00 pm (business hours: 13 hours).

In the game hall, for example, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the administrator causes the game machine to execute the predetermined information change mode to change the predetermined information to a desired value. In general, the predetermined information change mode is executed before the opening of the game hall, and the predetermined information change mode is not executed during business hours.

After that, business starts at 10:00 am, and the players play games in the gaming machine. After that, the business of the game hall ends at 11:00 pm. Then, at 9:00 am on the next day, the administrator causes the game machine to execute the predetermined information change mode to change the predetermined information to a desired value. In such a case, since the elapsed time from the execution of the previous predetermined information change mode to the current execution of the predetermined information change mode is already 14 hours or more, the predetermined process is not executed in the gaming machine.

Next, a description will be given of a case in which a person who is not an administrator but has an unauthorized intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") executes the predetermined information change mode during business hours.

First, at 9:00 am before the opening of the business, the administrator causes the gaming machine to execute the predetermined information change mode to change the predetermined information to a desired value. After that, business starts at 10:00 am, and the players play games in the gaming machine. For example, at 3:00 pm during business hours, if an unauthorized person tries to change the prescribed information by causing the game machine to execute the prescribed information change mode by unauthorized means, the previous prescribed information change mode will be changed. Since the elapsed time from the execution to the current execution of the predetermined information change mode is less than 14 hours, which is the first predetermined time, the predetermined processing is executed in the gaming machine. By noticing the presence of a gaming machine executing a predetermined process in the gaming hall, the manager satisfies a predetermined condition in the elapsed time from the previous execution of the predetermined information change mode to the current execution of the predetermined information change mode. It is possible to notice the presence of a game machine that is not in use. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being changed by an unauthorized person, and to prevent a game from being played on a gaming machine in which the predetermined information has been unauthorizedly changed.

[Feature δT3]
A gaming machine according to feature δT2,
A gaming machine comprising: a first predetermined time changing means capable of changing the first predetermined time.

According to the feature δT3, since the first predetermined time changing means is provided for changing the first predetermined time, the administrator can change the first predetermined time in consideration of the business hours of the gaming hall and the time period during which the predetermined information change mode is to be executed. The time can be changed as appropriate.

[Feature δT4]
A gaming machine according to feature δT2 or feature δT3,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the elapsed time is within a second predetermined time (30 minutes) shorter than the first predetermined time.

According to feature δT4, the predetermined condition includes that the elapsed time from execution of the previous predetermined information change mode to current execution of the predetermined information change mode is within a second predetermined time that is shorter than the first predetermined time. Therefore, if the elapsed time from the previous execution of the predetermined information change mode to the current execution of the predetermined information change mode in the gaming machine is within the second predetermined time, the predetermined process is not executed. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

In the following, a case will be described in which the gaming machine with the second predetermined time set to 30 minutes is operated in a gaming hall that is open from 10:00 am to 11:00 pm (business hours: 13 hours).

In the game hall, for example, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the manager causes the game machine to execute the predetermined information change mode to change the predetermined information, but the changed predetermined information is different from the desired value, or the Even if the administrator causes the predetermined information change mode to be executed again, such as when the operation policy of the game machine for the day is changed, from the previous execution of the predetermined information change mode to the current execution of the predetermined information change mode. is within 30 minutes, which is the second predetermined time, the predetermined process is not executed. Therefore, according to this feature, the predetermined information can be changed again by the administrator before the start of business without executing the predetermined process.
Further, if the second predetermined time is set to be shorter than the time from the time when the manager executes the predetermined information change mode to the opening time of the game hall, the predetermined information change mode is executed after the opening time of the game hall. If so, a predetermined process will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally changing the predetermined information, and allow the manager to change the predetermined information again before the start of business.

[Feature δT5]
The gaming machine according to feature δT4,
A gaming machine comprising a second predetermined time change means capable of changing the second predetermined time.

According to the feature δT5, since the second predetermined time changing means is provided that can change the second predetermined time, the administrator can change the second predetermined time in consideration of the business hours of the game hall and the time period during which the predetermined information change mode is to be executed. The time can be changed as appropriate.

[Feature δT6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features δT1 to δT5,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined process executing means includes notification means for executing a predetermined notification as the predetermined process.

According to the feature δT6, the predetermined processing execution means includes notification means for executing predetermined notification as the predetermined processing. Since the presence can be noticed, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in a gaming machine in which the predetermined information change mode has been illegally executed.

[Feature δT7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features δT1 to δT6,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined process execution means includes launch suppression means for suppressing the launch of a game ball as the predetermined process.

According to the feature δT7, the predetermined process execution means includes, as the predetermined process, a launch suppression means for suppressing the launch of the game ball, so that the game is played on the gaming machine in which the predetermined information change mode has been illegally executed. can be suppressed.

<Characteristic δU group>
The feature δU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 135 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δU1]
Predetermined information changing means capable of changing predetermined information that is information that determines one privilege granting condition from among a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
special information determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege provision condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
Predetermined processing executing means for executing a predetermined processing when the predetermined information is changed and the elapsed time from the previous change of the predetermined information does not satisfy a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature δU1, when the predetermined information is changed and the elapsed time from the previous change of the predetermined information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined processing executing means is provided for executing the predetermined processing. , the administrator of the gaming hall notices the presence of a gaming machine that is executing a predetermined process in the gaming hall, so that the elapsed time from the previous change of the predetermined information to the current change of the predetermined information satisfies the predetermined condition. It becomes possible to notice the presence of a gaming machine that does not meet the requirements. In addition, the manager determines whether or not the elapsed time from the previous change of the predetermined information in the game machine to the current change of the predetermined information in the game machine satisfies the predetermined condition, depending on whether or not the predetermined process has been executed in the game machine. can be grasped.

[Feature δU2]
A gaming machine according to feature δU1,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the elapsed time is equal to or longer than a first predetermined time (14 hours).

According to the feature δU2, the predetermined condition includes that the elapsed time from the previous change of the predetermined information to the current change of the predetermined information is equal to or longer than the first predetermined time. If the elapsed time from the change of the predetermined information to the current change of the predetermined information is less than the first predetermined time, the predetermined process is executed. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

In the following, a case will be described in which a gaming machine with the first predetermined time set to 14 hours is operated in a gaming hall that is open from 10:00 am to 11:00 pm (business hours: 13 hours).

In the game hall, for example, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the manager changes the predetermined information of the game machine to a desired value. In general, the predetermined information is changed before the game hall opens for business, and the predetermined information is not changed during business hours.

After that, business starts at 10:00 am, and the players play games in the gaming machine. After that, the business of the game hall ends at 11:00 pm. Then, at 9:00 am on the next day, the administrator changes the predetermined information of the gaming machine to a desired value. In such a case, since the elapsed time from the previous change of the predetermined information to the current change of the predetermined information is already 14 hours or longer, the predetermined process is not executed in the gaming machine.

Next, a description will be given of a case where predetermined information is changed by a person who is not an administrator but who has a fraudulent intention (hereinafter also referred to as an "illegal person") during business hours.

First, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the administrator changes the predetermined information of the gaming machine to a desired value. After that, business starts at 10:00 am, and the players play games in the gaming machine. For example, if an unauthorized person attempts to change the predetermined information of the gaming machine by unauthorized means at 3:00 pm, which is during business hours, the change from the previous change of the predetermined information to the current change of the predetermined information Since the elapsed time is less than 14 hours, which is the first predetermined time, the gaming machine executes the predetermined process. By noticing the presence of a gaming machine that is executing a predetermined process in the gaming hall, the administrator can find a gaming machine that does not satisfy the predetermined condition for the elapsed time from the previous change of the predetermined information to the current change of the predetermined information. It becomes possible to notice the existence of Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being changed by an unauthorized person, and to prevent a game from being played on a gaming machine in which the predetermined information has been unauthorizedly changed.

[Feature δU3]
A gaming machine according to feature δU2,
A gaming machine comprising: a first predetermined time changing means capable of changing the first predetermined time.

According to the feature δU3, since the first predetermined time changing means is provided for changing the first predetermined time, the administrator can set the first predetermined time in consideration of the business hours of the game hall and the time zone for changing the predetermined information. It can be changed as appropriate.

[Feature δU4]
A gaming machine according to feature δU2 or feature δU3,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the elapsed time is within a second predetermined time (30 minutes) shorter than the first predetermined time.

According to the feature δU4, the predetermined condition includes that the elapsed time from the previous change of the predetermined information to the current change of the predetermined information is within the second predetermined time shorter than the first predetermined time. If the elapsed time from the previous change of the predetermined information in the machine to the current change of the predetermined information is within the second predetermined time, the predetermined process is not executed. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

In the following, a case will be described in which the gaming machine with the second predetermined time set to 30 minutes is operated in a gaming hall that is open from 10:00 am to 11:00 pm (business hours: 13 hours).

In the game hall, for example, at 9:00 am before the start of business, the manager changed the predetermined information of the game machine, but the changed predetermined information was different from the desired value, or the operation policy of the game machine on the day was changed. Even if the administrator changes the prescribed information again due to a change, etc., if the elapsed time from the previous change of the prescribed information to the current change of the prescribed information is within 30 minutes, which is the second prescribed time. specified processing is not executed. Therefore, according to this feature, the predetermined information can be changed again by the administrator before the start of business without executing the predetermined process. Further, if the second predetermined time is set to be shorter than the time from the time when the manager changes the predetermined information to the opening time of the game hall, when the predetermined information is changed after the opening time of the game hall, A predetermined process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally changing the predetermined information, and allow the manager to change the predetermined information again before the start of business.

[Feature δU5]
The gaming machine according to feature δU4,
A gaming machine comprising a second predetermined time change means capable of changing the second predetermined time.

According to the feature δU5, since the second predetermined time changing means is provided for changing the second predetermined time, the administrator can set the second predetermined time in consideration of the business hours of the game hall and the time zone for changing the predetermined information. It can be changed as appropriate.

[Feature δU6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features δU1 to δU5,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined process executing means includes notification means for executing a predetermined notification as the predetermined process.

According to the feature δU6, the predetermined processing execution means includes notification means for executing predetermined notification as the predetermined processing. can be noticed, it is possible to prevent a game from being played on a gaming machine in which the predetermined information has been illegally changed.

[Feature δU7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features δU1 to δU6,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined process execution means includes launch suppression means for suppressing the launch of a game ball as the predetermined process.

According to the feature δU7, the predetermined process execution means includes the launch suppression means for suppressing the launch of the game ball as the predetermined process, so that the game is prevented from being played on the gaming machine in which the predetermined information has been illegally changed. can be suppressed.

<Characteristic δV group>
The feature δV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 138 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δV1]
A gaming machine comprising command execution means (main side CPU 62x) capable of executing a plurality of types of commands,
The instruction execution means is
capable of executing a first instruction (CALLI instruction) that calls a predetermined process;
When a predetermined process is called using the first instruction,
a process (PUSH PSW, storage process) of saving predetermined information stored in a predetermined register (PSW) to a stack area;
the called predetermined process;
A game machine characterized by executing

According to feature δV1, the instruction (PUSH PSW) for executing the process of saving the predetermined information stored in the predetermined register to the stack area can be omitted from the description of the source code. Therefore, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

[Feature δV2]
A gaming machine according to feature δV1,
The instruction execution means is
A second instruction (RETI instruction) for returning to the caller can be executed,
When the second instruction is executed at the end of the called predetermined process,
the process of returning to the caller;
a process of restoring the predetermined information saved in the stack area to the predetermined register (POP PSW, change process);
A gaming machine characterized by executing

According to feature δV2, an instruction (POP PSW) for executing processing for restoring predetermined information saved in the stack area to a predetermined register can be omitted from the description of the source code. Therefore, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

[Feature δV3]
A gaming machine according to feature δV1 or feature δV2,
A gaming machine, wherein the first command includes a command for calling a process related to game history as the predetermined process.

According to feature δV3, in a gaming machine that executes processing related to game history, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for storing programs can be reduced.

<Feature δW group>
The feature δW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 140 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δW1]
A gaming machine comprising command execution means (CPU 62x) capable of executing multiple types of commands,
The instruction execution means is
a save instruction (PUSH PSW) for saving predetermined information stored in a predetermined register (PSW) to a stack area;
a restore instruction (POP PSW) for restoring the predetermined information saved in the stack area to the predetermined register;
Between,
A game machine comprising means for executing a plurality of call instructions (CALL instructions) for calling predetermined processing (processing including test shooting test processing).

According to feature δW1, it is possible to reduce the number of executions of save instructions and restore instructions compared to a configuration in which save instructions and restore instructions are executed before and after each of a plurality of call instructions. Therefore, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

[Feature δW2]
A gaming machine according to feature δW1,
A gaming machine, wherein the plurality of call commands include a command to call a process related to a game history as the predetermined process.

According to feature δW2, in a gaming machine that executes processing related to game history, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for storing programs can be reduced.

<Characteristic δX group>
The feature δX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 138 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δX1]
A gaming machine comprising command execution means (main side CPU 62x) capable of executing a plurality of types of commands,
The instruction execution means is
A predetermined instruction (RETI instruction) for returning to the caller can be executed,
When the predetermined command is executed,
the process of returning to the caller;
a process (POP PSW, change process) of restoring predetermined information saved in a stack area to a predetermined register;
A gaming machine characterized by executing

According to the feature δX1, the instruction (POP PSW) for executing the process of restoring the predetermined information saved in the stack area to a predetermined register can be omitted from the description of the source code. Therefore, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

<Characteristic δY group>
The feature δY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 138 of the first embodiment.

[Feature δY1]
A gaming machine comprising command execution means (main side CPU 62x) capable of executing a plurality of types of commands,
The instruction execution means is
capable of executing a first instruction (CALLI instruction) for calling specific processing related to game history;
When the specific process is called using the first instruction,
a process (PUSH PSW, storage process) of saving predetermined information stored in a predetermined register (PSW) to a stack area;
the called specific process;
A gaming machine characterized by executing

According to feature δY1, in a gaming machine that executes specific processing related to game history, an instruction (PUSH PSW) can be omitted. Therefore, the amount of source code description can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for storing the program can be reduced.

The inventions of the features δR group to feature δY group solve the following problems.

For pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, we aim to improve the enjoyment of games, reduce the processing load on the machines, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and improve the efficiency of machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of providing a game machine that is less likely to cause problems and a game machine that takes players into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, we are improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the efficiency of development of the gaming machine, and preventing the occurrence of defects. For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is difficult to play, providing a gaming machine that considers the player, and providing a more sound game, there is a demand for further improvement in technology.

It should be noted that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature δY group are appropriately combined may be employed. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry part; and an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means. machine.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each form described in the Summary of the Invention are used to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. Moreover, if the technical feature is not described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Exhaust port 23...Lever 24...Production operation button 25...Operating handle 25a... Touch sensor 25b... Weight button 25c... Variable resistor 26... Game ball launch button 30... Game board 31... Guide rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32 ...General winning opening 32a...First winning opening 32b...Second winning opening 32c...Third winning opening 33...First starting opening 34...Second starting opening 34a... Electric Accessory 34b...Electric Accessory Drive Unit 35...Through Gate 36...Variable Winning Device 36a...Big Winning Port 36b...Open/Close Door 36c...Variable Winning Drive Unit 37... Special figure unit 37a...First symbol display part 37b...Second symbol display part 37c...First reservation display part 37d...Second reservation display part 38...General figure unit 39... Round display section 40... Variable display unit 41... Pattern display device 42... Nail 43... Out port 45... Main display section 45z... Game history information display section (information display section)
46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 51...First control unit 52...Second control unit 53...Third control unit 54...Tank 55...Tank rail 56... Case rail 60... Main controller 61... Main control board 62... Main side MPU
62x...Main side CPU
63... Main side ROM
64...Main side RAM
64x... Flash memory 70... Payout control device 71... Payout device 80... Launch control device 81... Game ball shooting mechanism 85... Power supply device 86... Power outage monitoring circuit 90.. .Sound light emission control device 91...Sound light emission control board 96...RTC
100...Display control device 300...Game history management chip 302...Buffer 304...Register 306...Memory for storing data on the number of winning balls 307...Memory for storing calculation execution conditions 307a... Memory for storing execution conditions 308...CPU
309... Memory for storing computation results 309a... Memory for storing number of entered balls 309b... Memory for storing entered ball information 320... Inspection machine 321... CPU
328... Display 329... Connection cable

Claims (1)

special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition opportunity based on a game action occurs ;
A lottery determination means for executing a win-or-fail determination with a predetermined probability using the special information;
setting value determination means for selecting and determining the setting value of the predetermined probability used for the suitability determination from among a plurality of stages within a predetermined range;
means for storing predetermined setting information in a predetermined storage area based on determination of a predetermined setting value;
The predetermined setting information stored based on the determination of the setting value is used as information corresponding to the predetermined setting information and referred to when the lottery determination means determines whether or not the special information is appropriate. means for determining and storing the
A gaming machine comprising
The lottery determination means determines the special information by referring to the determination time reference information before starting the variation of the symbols based on the occurrence of the acquisition opportunity ,
The game machine further comprises
storage content determination means for determining whether or not the storage content of the game storage area including the predetermined storage area is normal;
initialization means for initializing a predetermined range of the game storage area when the set value determination means newly determines the set value;
with
The range initialized by the initialization means differs depending on whether the memory contents of the game memory area are determined to be normal by the memory contents determination means or not.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images